Bob Vilahttps://www.bobvila.comen-USThu, 20 Feb 2025 05:18:51 -0500WordPress 6.7.2hourly1<![CDATA[Yes, Your Home Needs a Radon Test Kit — And These Are the Best]]>Safeguard and ensure the health of your family by testing for radon gas. Use our guide to find the best radon test kit on the market today.

The post Yes, Your Home Needs a Radon Test Kit — And These Are the Best appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-radon-test-kit/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=112492Wed, 19 Feb 2025 18:21:50 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Radon test kits detect the presence of radon gas, a byproduct of uranium decay in rock and soil. Radon can enter homes by seeping through cracks in the foundation, slowly accumulating until it reaches dangerous levels. Prolonged exposure to this harmful gas can cause health issues like headaches or even cancer. 

Radon is tasteless, odorless, and colorless, making it undetectable without specialized radon testing equipment. These home technology tools can measure radon levels over a few days or months or provide continuous monitoring. Since no level of radon exposure is considered safe, knowing which radon sensor you can rely on is essential. 

After tapping a home safety expert for insights and testing a few popular options, we chose the Airthings Corentium Home Radon Detector as the best radon test kit. It’s portable, has an easy-to-read screen, and takes multiple measurements to capture trends. Below, we detail what we like and don’t like about this product and the rest of our picks so you can choose one of the best radon test kits to keep your family safe.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Airthings Corentium Home Radon Detector
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: First Alert RD1 Radon Test Kit
    Jump to Review
  3. UPGRADE PICK: Airthings Wave Plus Smart Radon Detector
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST SMART: Airthings View Plus Smart Air Quality & Radon Monitor
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST SHORT-TERM: AccuStar Short-Term Charcoal Canister Radon Test Kit
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST LONG-TERM: Ecosense RadonEye Radon Sensor & Detector
    Jump to Review
The Best Radon Test Kit Option
Photo: amazon.com

Radon Test Kits Comparison Chart

Product NameTypeResultsPortability
Airthings Corentium Home Radon DetectorBattery-operated deviceInstant on device Portable
First Alert RD1 Radon Test Kit1-time test kitMust be mailed to lab; results emailed  3 to 5 days after lab receipt Portable
Airthings Wave Plus Smart Radon Detector Battery-operated smart deviceInstant in app and on device Portable; mounts to wall or ceiling 
Airthings View Plus Smart Air Quality & Radon MonitorBattery- or USB-powered smart deviceInstant in app and on device Portable; mounts to wall 
AccuStar Short-Term Charcoal Canister Radon Test Kit1-time test canisterMust be mailed to lab; results available next business dayPortable 
Ecosense RadonEye Radon Sensor & DetectorPlug-in deviceInstant in app and on device Portable but requires outlet 

Our Top Picks

After researching dozens of radon test kits and testing a few as part of our guide on the best air quality monitors, we recommend the following six options for their ease of use, accuracy, and value. 

Best Overall

Airthings Corentium Home Radon Detector

 Airthings Corentium Home Portable Radon Detector on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • First results shown on screen within 24 hours
  • Lightweight and portable
  • Displays both long- and short-term readings

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users’ units stopped working after a few years

Specs

  • Type Battery-operated device
  • Results Instant on device
  • Portability Portable

The Corentium Home radon detector kit by Airthings is one of the first continuous radon test kits to use batteries, allowing you to take it into any space that needs testing. The clear digital display provides both long- and short-term radon levels, revealing daily fluctuations as well as overall averages. Once you’ve tested your home for at least 30 days, Airthings also makes it easy to generate a free self-inspection report through its website. 

Though this portable radon detector does start delivering readings within 24 hours, the manufacturer recommends waiting at least 20 days before taking action if levels appear high. This ensures plenty of time for results to stabilize, so you know your readings are reliable. To test another area after your first test is complete, simply reset the unit and move it to a new location.  

Get the Airthings Corentium Home radon test kit at Amazon, Ace Hardware, Walmart, or Airthings.

Best Bang for the Buck

First Alert RD1 Radon Test Kit

 First Alert radon test kit on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Listed under the EPA’s Radon Gas Measurement Proficiency Program
  • Low price includes lab fees in most states
  • Results emailed 3 to 5 business days after receipt

What We Don’t Like

  • Can only be used once
  • User pays shipping costs

Specs

  • Type 1-time test kit
  • Results Must be mailed to lab; results emailed 3 to 5 days after lab receipt
  • Portability Portable

The First Alert RD1 home radon test kit is a simple and effective way to detect dangerous radon gas in your home. It essentially functions as a disposable radon detector that you allow to sit for a few days and then send away for results. To use, simply open the sealed activated charcoal packet, place it in the lowest livable area of your home, and leave it. After 2 to 4 days, seal it up and send it to the lab. Within 3 to 5 days of lab receipt, you’ll receive the results by email.

Unlike most mail-in radon test kits, this simple charcoal option includes the laboratory fee for most states (excluding New Jersey), though you will need to pay for shipping. Still, its price and reliability are difficult to beat for those looking for a one-time, short-term test.

Get the First Alert radon test kit at Amazon, Lowe’s, or First Alert.

Upgrade Pick

Airthings Wave Plus Smart Radon Detector

 Airthings Wave Plus Radon and Air Quality Monitor on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Provides continuous results via Bluetooth
  • Monitors radon, CO2, VOCs, humidity, temperature, and air pressure
  • Visual indicator shows current air quality

What We Don’t Like

  • Detailed results only available within Bluetooth range

Specs

  • Type Battery-operated smart device
  • Results Instant in app and on device
  • Portability Portable; mounts to wall or ceiling

While the Airthings Wave Plus radon and air quality monitor is more expensive than our top two picks, it also tests a lot more than just radon. Once set up, this unit provides continuous readings for radon gas buildup, carbon dioxide (CO2), volatile organic compounds (VOCs), humidity, temperature, and air pressure.

The Wave Plus radon gas monitor runs on batteries and is easy to mount on a wall or ceiling. Its on-unit color-coded display indicates whether air quality is good (green), fair (yellow), or bad (red). For more detailed information, pair the unit with the Airthings app via Bluetooth for real-time reading and tips on how to improve indoor air quality. You can also see current and past readings on Airthings’ web dashboard. 

What our tester says: “This Airthings monitor is quite an overachiever! As part of a larger test, we exposed it to a dish of oil-based stain for 2 hours. When we checked back in, the light was red (indicating hazardous air quality), and the app showed the volatile organic compound levels had spiked.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Airthings Wave Plus radon test kit at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Smart

Airthings View Plus Smart Air Quality & Radon Monitor

 Airthings 2960 View Plus Radon & Air Quality Monitor on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Wi-Fi and Bluetooth connectivity; compatible with IFTTT, Homey, Google Assistant, and Amazon Alexa
  • Detects a wide range of pollutants and irritants
  • Data available on unit, app, and Airthings website

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires 6 AA batteries

Specs

  • Type Battery- or USB-powered smart device
  • Results Instant in app and on device
  • Portability Portable; mounts to wall

This smart monitor from Airthings makes it easy to check levels of radon, PM2.5 (particulate matter), CO2, temperature, VOCs, air pressure, and humidity. It also provides pollen forecasts so those with allergies can stay informed about outdoor conditions. As a continuous radon monitor, this unit has its own display showing current levels, and users can also check the app or Airthings website for long-term readings. It also features a visual indicator with green, yellow, and red status lights for at-a-glance monitoring. 

The View Plus is compatible with IFTTT, Homey, Google Assistant, and Amazon Alexa and runs via batteries or the included USB-C cable. You can place it virtually anywhere indoors to test levels in multiple locations or mount it to the wall to ensure continually safe radon levels in a basement​.  

Get the Airthings View Plus radon test kit at Amazon or Airthings.

Best Short-Term

AccuStar Short-Term Charcoal Canister Radon Test Kit

 AccuStar radon test kit on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Same-day results available if received by noon
  • Easy to use; requires zero technological know-how
  • Durable canister design keeps results safe

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t measure radon; only reports whether levels are under 4 pCi/L (picocuries per liter)

Specs

  • Type 1-time test canister
  • Results Must be mailed to lab; results available by next business day
  • Portability Portable

This short-term test kit by AccuStar uses activated charcoal to absorb radon and its byproducts over a 48- to 96-hour period. Its easy-to-use design simply requires you to leave the unit undisturbed for a few days, mail it in, and wait for the results, which can arrive same-day if the canister is received by noon. 

Though the cost of the AccuStar radon detection kit includes laboratory fees, you will need to pay to ship the unit in. The durable canister protects the test unit while in transit, ensuring your results remain accurate and safe from interference. This low-tech pick is perfect for those nervous about determining radon safe levels on their own and real estate agents testing radon in homes for clients.

Get the AccuStar radon test kit at Amazon, The Home Depot (2-pack), or AccuStar Labs.

Best Long-Term

Ecosense RadonEye Radon Sensor & Detector

 Ecosense RadonEye Home Radon Detector on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • First reading is 90 percent accurate and available in 10 minutes
  • Results shown in app and on device
  • Tracks short- and long-term readings and trends

What We Don’t Like

  • Some reports of Bluetooth connectivity issues

Specs

  • Type Plug-in device
  • Results Instant in app and on device
  • Portability Portable but requires outlet

The Ecosense RadonEye home radon detector takes 30 independent counts of pCi/L levels every hour, delivering the very first reading just 10 minutes after setup. To get started, simply plug in the electronic radon detector and leave it on a flat surface to allow it to begin collecting data. 

Short-term results from this radon gas detector are displayed on the unit’s OLED screen and updated every 10 minutes. Additional hourly, monthly, and yearly data is available via Bluetooth connectivity on the RadonEye app. This pick’s continuous monitoring system not only provides an average reading over time, it also sounds an alarm if radon levels exceed 4 pCi/L. 

Get the Ecosense radon test kit at Amazon, Walmart, or Ecosense.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Radon Test Kits

The Best Radon Test Kit
Photo: amazon.com

When gathering our list of recommendations, we primarily considered the most important aspects of radon home kits—accuracy and ease of use. We selected a variety of units that make it simple to test for radon, choosing a few one-time kits that need to be sent to a laboratory as well as several that offer instant access to results via the unit itself or an app.  

Most picks on our list are battery-operated units, though some can also be powered using a standard plug or a USB cable. We also included one low-tech option that does not require power at all and simply needs to sit and absorb radon for a few days before being mailed in for reading. Finally, since the prices of radon detectors can vary greatly, we were careful to include picks at a range of costs since everyone needs to be able to afford to test for cancer-causing radon gas

What to Consider When Choosing a Radon Test Kit

To select one of the best radon kits for your needs, it’s important to consider test type, accuracy, and ease of use and installation. 

Types of Radon Test Kits

A radon test kit will use one of several methods to test the air in your home for elevated radon levels. Regardless of which type of radon monitor you choose, these helpful devices are the only way to determine your family members’ exposure to this harmful gas other than a professional radon inspection

Short-Term Radon Test Kits

Radon kits for short-term use collect readings from your home over a 2- to 90-day period and must then be sent to a laboratory for the results to be read. The lab fees necessary for proper testing are likely included with your purchase, though shipping generally costs extra. 

Because short-term radon test kits are the fastest and least expensive test option, real estate agents often use them to check for safe radon levels before selling a home. However, since radon levels fluctuate, short-term test kits are not the most accurate testing method. For definitive results, long-term testing is necessary.

Long-Term Radon Test Kits

As their name indicates, long-term radon test kits are designed to test levels of radon gas over a longer period, such as weeks, months, or years. Like short-term tests, some are single-use devices that must be sent to a laboratory to be read, though others have screens or Bluetooth connectivity that allows you to monitor levels yourself. 

Since a long-term radon test kit collects a greater volume of data, periodic spikes that naturally occur are less likely to raise unnecessary alarms, which may happen with more limited readings. The downside of this type of detector is that it will typically be more expensive than a one-time use or short-term kit and may not be necessary if radon levels are consistently lower than 4 pCi/L.

Alpha-Track Radon Test Kits

The alpha-track radon test kit is a long-term test that measures levels of radon using polycarbonate plastic sheets placed in the lowest livable level of the home. If radon gas is present, it will emit alpha particles that create tracks on these sheets, with higher levels of gas producing greater numbers of tracks. Once the test kit has collected data for the suggested amount of time, it is sent in to be read. Generally speaking, alpha-track tests are more accurate than short-term test kits but don’t provide the ongoing measurements offered by long-term detectors.

Charcoal Radon Test Kits

Charcoal radon test kits are short-term options that work similarly to alpha-track units, though they use charcoal rather than polycarbonate plastic to measure levels. Generally speaking, they’re also cheaper and faster since they only monitor radon gas for between 2 and 90 days. For this reason, they are less accurate since they are susceptible to radon spikes and possible interference during shipping.

Digital Radon Test Kits

Digital radon test kits are also known as radon detectors, and they are the most expensive type of radon tester for home use. Most digital units can be mounted to the wall or ceiling or simply placed in the lowest level of the house. 

However, installation requirements typically extend well beyond mounting, as most of these kits use Bluetooth connectivity to deliver detailed readings to an app. Some digital kits also offer recent readings directly on the test unit, though their screens aren’t often large enough to display the long-term data that makes digital tests so valuable. Further adding to their worth, many digital kits also test home air quality levels of humidity, carbon dioxide, volatile organic compounds, and more. 

Accuracy

Accuracy is one of the most important factors to consider when choosing a radon test. Generally speaking, the longer a radon test kit collects data, the more accurate the results will be. This is because increased testing time allows you to determine average pCi/L levels without the influence of random positive or negative spikes.

Since short-term radon tests are susceptible to spikes in radon levels that can skew the average, they are considered the least accurate test option. Because they collect more data, long-term and continuous tests are the most accurate radon test kits available.

Ease of Use and Installation 

Radon test kits are designed to be easy to use, both for the consumer’s benefit and to ensure accurate results. Passive radon test kits, like charcoal and alpha-track test kits, are easy to set up but must be sent to a lab for results. 

On the other hand, active radon test kits, like digital radon detectors, are a bit more involved in setup but relatively easy to use after that. More advanced smart home-compatible detectors require additional technical know-how for ongoing use. It’s a good idea to consider your radon testing needs and comfort using technology before selecting a test kit.

FAQs

The following frequently asked questions section can help answer questions like “What is radon testing?” or “How much does a radon mitigation system cost?”. 

Q. How does a radon test work?

Radon tests work by measuring the amount of radon in the air. Charcoal devices absorb radon, enabling lab techs to count radioactive particles to estimate levels. Alpha-track kits must also be read in labs, but they use a plastic film that produces marks when radon gas strikes it. Digital detectors have sensors that detect and count alpha particles before displaying them on the device or in an app.

Q. How do you use a radon test kit?

Radon test kits are generally used by opening a sealed package and leaving the test kit exposed to the air for a certain amount of time. Some must be sent in to be read, while others provide measurements you can access yourself.

Q. Where should a radon test be placed?

Radon levels should be placed on the lowest occupied level of the home. Most manufacturers recommend setting them on a surface a few feet off the floor or mounting them to a wall so they won’t be accidentally disturbed or knocked over by kids or pets. 

Q. What do you do if you test positive for radon?

If your home tests positive for high levels of radon, contact a qualified radon mitigation contractor. They can provide an estimate for installing a radon mitigation system that will continually remove excess radon from your home.

Q. What buildings are most likely to be affected by radon contamination?

While buildings and homes on hillsides may be more likely to be affected by radon, any structure can be subject to radon contamination. Kevin Feak, Senior Fire Protection Engineer for the architecture and planning firm LaBella, says, “Radon is heavier than room air and will move to the lowest area. Areas below ground level, such as basements or crawl spaces, are at the highest risk.” 

Q. How often should I test for radon levels?

The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) guide to radon recommends testing for radon at least every 2 years. The EPA also suggests testing if you renovate your home or are considering selling it, as you will need to provide test results to the buyer.

Q. How can I minimize my chances of being affected by radon?

According to licensed Professional Engineer Kevin Feak, “The first step in determining your radon risk is to use the EPA’s Radon Zone Map. The second step is testing for radon with either a home test or calling a professional. Lastly, a mitigation system can be used to remove radon from your home or business.”

Q. How reliable are home radon test kits?

Different types of home radon test kits have different levels of reliability, with long-term tests being the most reliable and short-term tests being less reliable. Still, since short-term tests are typically less expensive, using them to perform more frequent tests over time can be an economical way to measure radon levels.

The post Yes, Your Home Needs a Radon Test Kit — And These Are the Best appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-19T18:21:50-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Double-Sided Tapes]]>If you need a strong adhesive for your project, try the best double-sided tape. This guide reviews the best tapes for repairs, crafts, and more.

The post The Best Double-Sided Tapes appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-double-sided-tape/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=135317Wed, 19 Feb 2025 11:06:56 -0500ReviewsDIYEasy DIY ProjectsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Move over, duct tape, there’s another tape that has nearly as many uses. Double-sided tape can be used to adhere any two surfaces a user wants to stick together tightly—without the need for glue or nails—in crafting, household, industrial, or manufacturing applications.

With so many products to choose from, it can be hard to select the best double-sided tape for a project. We’ve done the legwork with this comprehensive review, aiming to help shoppers make the right purchase. Our favorite is the Tough & Clear from Gorilla, offering a versatile and strong bond suitable both indoors and outdoors.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Gorilla Tough & Clear Double-Sided Mounting Tape
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Phinus Clear Waterproof Double-Sided Mounting Tape
  3. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Hitlights Heavy-Duty Double-Sided Foam Mounting Tape
  4. BEST REMOVABLE: Scotch Removable Double-Sided Tape Dispensered Roll
  5. BEST FOR CARPET: XFasten Double-Sided Tape 
  6. BEST FOR PAINTED WALLS: Scotch-Mount Indoor Double-Sided Mounting Tape
  7. BEST FOR CRAFTS: AJ Sign World 164-Foot Premium Double-Sided Adhesive
The Best Double-Sided Tape Option
Photo: amazon.com

Product Comparison

LengthColorFeatures
Gorilla Tough & Clear Double-Sided Mounting Tape60 or 150 inches long by 1 inch wide; 48 inches long by 2 inches wideClearWeatherproof, 12- to 37.5-pound hold (depending on tape length)
Phinus Clear Waterproof Double-Sided Mounting Tape10 feet long by 0.75 inches wideClearNonresidue, weatherproof
Hitlights Heavy-Duty Double-Sided Foam Mounting Tape32 feet or 100 feet long by 0.39 inches wideBlackFoam core
Scotch Removable Double-Sided Tape Dispensered RollVarious, from 200 to 450 inches longClearRemovable, dispenser included
XFasten Double-Sided Tape Various, from 15 to 30 yards longWhiteUV-, heat-, and moisture-resistant
Scotch-Mount Indoor Double-Sided Mounting TapeVarious, from 55 to 350 inches longWhiteIndustrial-strength adhesive holds up to 15 pounds
AJ Sign World 164-Foot Premium Double-Sided Adhesive164 feet long by 0.5 or 1 inch wideClearUltrathin, tearable by hand

Our Top Picks

Double-sided tape can work in a variety of scenarios if the right option is used. The ones listed here were selected for their quality and price to help shoppers find the best one for their projects.

Best Overall

Gorilla Tough & Clear Double-Sided Mounting Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tapes Option: Gorilla Tough & Clear Double-Sided Mounting Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for use both indoors and outdoors
  • Easily bonds to a wide variety of materials
  • Ideal for use on glass without creating tape marks

What We Don’t Like

  • Removing the backing can be quite tricky

Products Specs

  • Length: 60 or 150 inches long by 1 inch wide; 48 inches long by 2 inches wide
  • Color: Clear
  • Features: Weatherproof, 12- to 37.5-pound hold (depending on tape length)

Gorilla’s double-sided tape is great for projects where traditional fasteners won’t work. The tape works on a variety of surfaces, including stone, concrete, glass, metal, bricks, tile, plastic, and wood. However, because it’s a permanent tape and features a strong adhesive, it’s not recommended for delicate surfaces such as painted drywall.

This mounting tape holds 1 pound per 4 inches of tape. It’s good for both indoor and outdoor applications and it won’t yellow over time. The tape is moisture- and heat-resistant up to 194 degrees Fahrenheit.

Gorilla tape offers a wide range of mounting, repairing, and bonding applications. For those who need a permanent tape that mounts in an instant with a long-lasting, weatherproof bond, Gorilla’s product is a solid choice.

Get the Gorilla double-sided tape at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Bang for the Buck

Phinus Clear Waterproof Double-Sided Mounting Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tapes Option: Phinus Clear Waterproof Double-Sided Mounting Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for a variety of surfaces
  • Waterproof, weatherproof, and multipurpose
  • Nonresidue adhesive formula

What We Don’t Like

  • Isn’t suitable for use on delicate surfaces

Products Specs

  • Length: 10 feet long by 0.75 inches wide
  • Color: Clear
  • Features: Nonresidue, weatherproof

A budget-friendly option, this double-sided tape by Phinus works best on smooth surfaces, such as glass, metal, plastic, ceramic tile, and marble. Because it has a strong acrylic adhesive base, it’s not suitable for delicate surfaces such as wallpaper, painted surfaces, or broken walls.

The tape is flexible and leaves no residue when removed from proper surfaces. It has a cold/heat resistance of -4 to 160 degrees Fahrenheit and is resistant to moisture and solvents, making it useful outdoors as well as inside the home.

Get the Phinus double-sided tape at Amazon (2-pack).

Best Heavy Duty

HitLights Double Sided Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tapes Option: HitLights Double Sided Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Provides flexibility on more difficult surfaces
  • Ideal for installing LED strips on multiple surfaces
  • Provides an excellent permanent bond

What We Don’t Like

  • Tape is difficult to remove once applied

Products Specs

  • Length: 32 feet or 100 feet long by 0.39 inches wide
  • Color: Black
  • Features: Foam core

This industrial-strength, high-bond acrylic foam tape is suitable for most applications, including outdoor use. It works on a variety of materials, including aluminum, steel, glass, and plastics.

HitLights is a heavy-duty double-sided tape that grabs a firm hold immediately. The bond created by this permanent tape actually strengthens over time, and the product truly shines in cases where waterproof adhesion is required.

Get the Hitlights double-sided tape at Amazon or Hitlights.

Best Removable

Scotch Removable Double-Sided Tape Dispensered Roll

 The Best Double-Sided Tape Option: Scotch Removable Double-Sided Tape Dispensered Roll
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Ideal for small projects like scrapbooking
  • Tape comes in the included dispenser
  • Gentle enough to not damage delicate surfaces

What We Don’t Like

  • Removability sacrifices adhesive strength

Products Specs

  • Length: Various, including 200 inches long by 0.75 inches wide, 250 inches long by 1 inch wide, 300 inches long by 3 inches wide, and 450 inches long by 1 inch wide
  • Color: Clear
  • Features: Removable, dispenser included

This removable tape features a unique adhesive that holds paper securely but is easy to reposition or remove if needed or desired. This ability makes Scotch’s tape a terrific option to use in small projects, such as photo albums and scrapbooks. (The tape is acid-free and archival, so it will not yellow or damage either photographs or papers.)

For light-duty mounting needs, this double-sided tape is a fine option, not least because it comes in an easy-to-use tape dispenser that allows the tape to glide off the roll smoothly.

Get the Scotch removable double-sided tape at Amazon, Target (3-pack), Staples, or Office Depot.

Best for Carpet

XFasten Double Sided Carpet Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tapes Option: XFasten Double Sided Carpet Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Can easily stick to most surfaces
  • Sticky enough to hold most rugs in place
  • Resistance to heat, moisture, and UV light

What We Don’t Like

  • Unless installed carefully, rugs may still curl up in the corners

Products Specs

  • Length: Various, including 15 yards long by 3 inches wide, 20 yards long by 2 inches wide, 20 yards long by 4 inches wide, and 30 yards long by 2 inches wide
  • Color: White
  • Features: UV-, heat-, and moisture-resistant

XFasten’s durable carpet tape is a top solution for keeping area rugs and runners firmly in place. If the rug may need to be moved later, no worries—the tape can be removed easily by hand without leaving a sticky residue behind.

Surfaces must be dry and free of debris before application, but the tape is safe for use on hardwood, vinyl, and tile, as well as on carpeting of all types.

Get the XFasten double-sided tape at Amazon or XFasten.

Best for Painted Walls

Scotch-Mount Indoor Double-Sided Mounting Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tape Option: Scotch-Mount Indoor Double-Sided Mounting Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for most common uses around the home
  • Comfortably tackles most DIY projects
  • Thick and pliable tape

What We Don’t Like

  • Mounting heavier objects may start to fail over time
  • Removing the tape may inadvertently peel some paint off the wall

Products Specs

  • Length: Various, including 55 inches long by 1 inch wide, 125 inches long by 1 inch wide, and 350 inches long by 0.75 inches wide
  • Color: White
  • Features: Industrial-strength adhesive holds up to 15 pounds

Not all double-sided tapes like to adhere to painted surfaces, but Scotch’s foam mounting tape delivers a strong, permanent bond in 30 seconds flat and is able to hold 1 pound per 5.5 inches of tape up to a maximum of 15 pounds when using 80 inches of tape.

This product is ideal for mounting pictures and decorations, not least because it can be used on most types of walls, including ceramic tile and wood surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. However, this tape is not recommended for use on wallpaper or delicate surfaces. For the best results, apply when the temperature is between 50 and 100 degrees Fahrenheit.

Get the Scotch-Mount double-sided tape at Amazon (125 inches), Ace Hardware (350 inches), The Home Depot (55 inches), or Lowe’s (350 inches). 

Best for Crafts

AJ Sign World 164-Foot Premium Double-Sided Adhesive

 The Best Double-Sided Tape Option: AJ Sign World 164-Foot Premium Double-Sided Adhesive
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Relatively affordable price point
  • Tape is very thin and easy to tear
  • Backing is easy to remove

What We Don’t Like

  • Adhesive is quite strong and doesn’t remove easily

Products Specs

  • Length: 164 feet long by 0.5 or 1 inch wide
  • Color: Clear
  • Features: Ultrathin, tearable by hand

AJ Sign World’s acid-free tissue tape excels in all types of arts and crafts applications. It’s easy to tear by hand—no scissors required—and it’s transparent, which makes the tape more versatile. This 1-inch wide tape is only suited for use on smooth surfaces. Note also that this is a permanent tape. Once it’s on, it’s on for good.

Those who are looking for a thinner version of this AJ Sign World tape may want to consider the 0.5-inch-wide version.

Get the AJ Sign World double-sided tape at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Double-Sided Tapes

To build our top picks list, we researched all the top double-sided tape brands available across several categories. Our recommendations cover a range of specific uses for the best double-sided tapes, each offering unique qualities to suit a household task or project.

Our top picks are available in a variety of colors and lengths. We made sure to include a varied selection of adhesive strengths, from options that can be easily removed and repositioned to others capable of holding up to 15 pounds of weight. Our list also includes a range of both thick and thin tapes, which are better suited to different tasks.

What to Look for When Choosing Double-Sided Tape 

Double-sided tape is a versatile, economical alternative to glue. It has pressure-sensitive adhesive exposed on both sides of the tape which allows two items to be bonded together. The adhesive lies on top of a carrier material, which can range from film as thin as a fraction of a millimeter up to a thick foam several millimeters thick.

Unlike single-side tape, double-sided tape creates an invisible bond between two objects. Moreover, there’s little time required for the bond to form—simply peel and stick. The tape is often used to hang signs or temporary displays, attach foam to wall panels or flooring underlayment to floors, secure and hold carpets in place for major events or trade shows, and much more. The type of double-sided tape required depends on the application.

When shopping for double-sided tape, consider the tape type, adhesive level, thickness, width, application setting, and other factors. Below are some common characteristics to take into account when picking the right double-sided tape for a particular project.

Type

There are several types of double-sided tape with various carrier materials, each serving a specific purpose. Double-sided tape types fall into one of the below categories:

  • Tissue tape is the most common type used for light bonding tasks. It’s mostly used for stationery, art, crafting projects, office, and general applications. Double-sided tissue tape is easy to tear, and is thin enough that it can adhere to irregular surfaces. It’s also inexpensive and a good alternative to glue.
  • Acrylic tape is primarily used in industrial environments. It’s stronger than tissue tape and is weather-resistant, making it ideal for both indoor and outdoor use. Acrylic double-sided tape should only be used when permanent bonding is needed.
  • Polyethylene tape, also known as foam double-sided tape, provides thick cushioning and insulation. Double-sided polyethylene tape is well-suited for uneven surfaces.
  • Floor tape is used on floor surfaces, like carpet, to hold items like area rugs or runners in place. They have medium adhesion, which allows for removal without residue.
  • Double-sided tape has either acrylic or rubber adhesives. Acrylic adhesives are stronger but more expensive and rubber adhesives are generally cheaper but less suited for long-term applications. Acrylic adhesive is also more heat- and light-resistant than rubber.

Thickness and Width 

Double-sided tape has either thick or thin bonding systems. Tapes with thick bonding systems adhere well to unusual, non-uniform, or highly patterned and textured surfaces. This type of tape usually has a foam carrier layer. Thin bonding systems are significantly thinner. Sometimes the carrier layer is so thin that they are pretty much an adhesive on top of a silicone liner. These tapes are best suited for light adhesion applications.

Width varies quite a bit with double-sided tape. Rolls are available in widths less than 1/4-inch to several inches wide. Each type of tape will have several width options to suit specific projects.

Bonding Surfaces 

The right double-sided tape for a project depends on the surface of the two objects that the user wants to stick together. Surface energy is the degree of attraction or repulsion force a material exerts on another material. Double-sided tape works best on surfaces with a high surface energy, like glass, glazed tile, and bare metals. The surface energy of plastic can vary quite a bit, but in general, it’s best to use a stronger tape. Then there’s silicone, which has such low surface energy that conventional adhesives won’t stick to it. Silicone needs a very tacky adhesive, or one specially formulated to adhere to it.

For flat and smooth surfaces like glass, aluminum, and PVC, thinner tape works well. For rougher surfaces like wood, cement, brick, and stucco, thicker tapes work best. Painted or coated surfaces need thicker, stronger tape as well.

Environment

The environment plays an important role in the adhesion of double-sided tape. Is the tape for indoor or outdoor use? Some tapes are not designed to hold up in outdoor environments.

For outdoor tapes, the weather impacts adhesion quality. The cooler the temperatures, the weaker the resulting bond will be. But high heat isn’t good for adhesion either—it can cause the adhesive to melt and loosen the bond.

Dust, grease, or moisture can also compromise the bond between two surfaces. Cleaning the surface with rubbing alcohol and making sure it’s completely dry before application will guarantee a stronger bond.

Object Weight

Double-sided tapes are rated by the maximum load they can hold. In general, thicker tapes hold more weight. Additionally, tapes with acrylic-based glue will hold more weight. However, the strength of the bond depends on the surface and weight of the object.

The load capacity is determined by the tape’s adhesive viscosity. Adhesive viscosity is similar to liquid viscosity— if it flows easily, it has low viscosity; if it does not, it has high viscosity. However, the viscosity rating for double-sided tape basically determines how well it binds to uneven surfaces. For rough surfaces, a viscous tape is preferable because it will spread into all the nooks and crannies of the uneven surface. Smooth surfaces do not need tape that is as viscous.

In some tapes, viscosity increases as the tape cures on the surface, strengthening the bond.

Pick a tape that best matches the surface energy of the items and consider the maximum load rate.

Longevity

Double-sided tape is either removable or permanent. The removable variety is meant for temporary use and is easily removed. Permanent tapes are used mostly in industrial manufacturing, but strong tapes are also available for home use. These tapes are typically used in lieu of glue or nails to permanently hold two objects together.

The longevity of the bond depends on how strong the adhesive is, as well as the environment. In climate-controlled environments, most double-sided tapes will hold a bond until the user removes it. In outdoor environments, the bond is subjected to heat, cold, and moisture, which will eventually cause the bond to deteriorate.

Removal

There may come a time when it’s necessary to remove double-sided tape. Thankfully, for most of them, a little heat will cause the adhesive to melt and break the bond. A blow dryer or a heat gun can be used to warm the surface and slightly melt the adhesive. Sometimes the tape will release from one side but hold fast to the other. In that case, it may be necessary to apply more heat to break the bond.

If heat does not remove the adhesive, try commercial residue cleaners. These products work by dissolving the sticky adhesive on the tape, making it easier to remove. Pour some of it on the tape and let it soak in for a few minutes, then scrape it off.

FAQs

Now that you have read through the characteristics of double-sided tape, you may still have a few questions. Read on to see some of the commonly asked questions about double-sided tape.

Q. How do you prepare a surface for tape application?

The surface must be free from dust, dirt, and oil, and be completely dry before application. Use rubbing alcohol to wash away any residue and dry with a tack cloth before applying the tape.

Q. What is the ideal temperature for applying double-sided tape?

The ideal temperature for both the surface and the tape is 65 degrees Fahrenheit, or 18 degrees Celsius.

Q. What is the strongest double-sided tape?

VHB tape, such as the Hitlights double-sided tape, is the strongest double-sided tape available for consumers.

Q. Can double-sided tape be removed?

Yes. Typically applying heat to the surface will cause the adhesive to melt and release the bond.

The post The Best Double-Sided Tapes appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-19T11:06:56-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels to Keep Hoses Contained, Tested]]>The best garden hose reels eliminate the need to wrap up a hose manually and keep the hose stored tidily. Learn the features to look for and see our picks.

The post The Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels to Keep Hoses Contained, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-retractable-garden-hose-reels/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-retractable-garden-hose-reels/Tue, 18 Feb 2025 10:45:56 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

If you’ve ever used a hose around the garden, you may know the struggle of wrangling it when you’re done with a given task. Although many garden hose storage options seek to simplify putting away a garden hose, few make it as easy as a retractable hose reel. There are a number of retractable hose reels on the market, and we tested eight top models for functionality, durability, installation ease, value, and curb appeal.

How does a retractable hose reel work? A round housing unit holds a garden hose and a reel powered by a large spring. As you extend the hose from the unit, a spring attached to the reel begins to wind and tighten. When you’re finished using the hose and want to store it, simply tug the hose to release a locking mechanism and engage the spring-loaded reel, which automatically winds up the hose in about 20 seconds. 

Our top pick was the 130-foot retractable option from Giraffe Tools thanks to its lockable hose and 180-degree swivel. Find out how each product fared in our hands-on testing and which ones are our top picks for the best retractable garden hose reels in various categories.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Giraffe Tools 130-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel
  2. RUNNER-UP: Aquazilla 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel 
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Eneacro 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel 
  4. UPGRADE PICK: Macnaught 60-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel
  5. BEST FOR SMALL YARDS: Gardena 50-Foot Wall-Mounted Hose Reel
  6. BEST FOR MEDIUM YARDS: Giraffe Tools 90-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel
  7. BEST FOR LARGE YARDS: Giraffe Tools 155-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel
  8. BEST SPIKE-MOUNTED: Gardena 66-Foot Retractable Hose Reel on Metal Spike 
The Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels Options
Photo: Katie Barton for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

LengthSizeNozzle
Giraffe Tools 130-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel130 feet½-inch diameterAdjustable with 9 spray pattern
Aquazilla 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel100 feet⅝-inch diameterPistol grip with 9 spray patterns
Eneacro 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel 100 feet½-inch diameterPistol grip with 9 spray patterns
Macnaught 60-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel60 feet½-inch diameter Not included
Gardena 50-Foot Wall-Mounted Hose Reel50 feetUnspecifiedFire hose
Giraffe Tools 90-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel90 feet⅝-inch diameterPistol grip with 9 spray patterns
Giraffe Tools 155-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel155 feet½-inch diameterPistol grip with 9 spray patterns
Gardena 66-Foot Retractable Hose Reel on Metal Spike66 feetUnspecifiedFire hose

Our Top Picks

These top picks represent some of the best retractable garden hose reels on the market today. They are easy to operate, with proven designs that will quickly retract a hose without tangling. We’ve included a selection of reels to accommodate various hose lengths, and we extensively tested each model for functionality and durability.

Best Overall

Giraffe Tools 130-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Giraffe Tools 130-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • 130-foot hose locks at any length, making it ideal for all yard sizes
  • Auto-rewind system retracts the hose without any kinking or tangling
  • Hose reel features a 180-degree swivel and is removable for storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Loose rubber gaskets inside the hose’s couplings fell out upon unboxing

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 5/5 

Product Specs

  • Length: 130 feet
  • Size: ½-inch diameter
  • Nozzle: Adjustable with 9 spray patterns

With its ample length and durable construction, this retractable garden hose reel from Giraffe Tools is a quality choice for just about any yard. It comes equipped with a 130-foot hose that locks at any length, allowing it to reach even the far corners of a lawn. The hose itself is made of an abrasion-resistant hybrid material that can handle pressures of up to 600 pounds per square inch (PSI)—nearly twice what most hoses can handle—without bursting. This is a key feature, given that the hoses in retractable reels generally aren’t replaceable. 

The Giraffe Tools retractable hose reel came with everything we needed to mount the bracket to our wooden post, and the process was simple, taking less than 10 minutes. The handy quick-release system made it easy to set the reel in the bracket and remove it for portability or storage. The hose pulled out smoothly, requiring little effort on our part. To retract the hose, we gave it a gentle tug, and the auto-rewind system kicked in, rolling it up without any kinking or tangling. 

We also appreciated the hose’s high-quality spray nozzle, which features nine unique spray patterns. We repeatedly dropped the hose on our concrete patio to test for durability, and there was no damage to the nozzle or couplings. The only malfunction we encountered was minor: The rubber gaskets in the hose’s couplings were loose, falling out as we unboxed the reel. It was easy to put them back in place, but potential buyers will want to keep this in mind.

Get the Giraffe Tools 130-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Runner-up

Aquazilla 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Aquazilla 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Easy-to-install mounting bracket; hose reel locks in place via a metal pin
  • 100-foot hose length is ideal for yards and gardens of all sizes
  • Durable 9-pattern spray nozzle is suitable for various applications

What We Don’t Like

  • Retraction requires the gentlest of pulls; required several attempts after each use

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • Length: 100 feet
  • Size: ⅝-inch diameter
  • Nozzle: Pistol grip with 9 spray patterns

The Aquazilla retractable water hose reel was on par with our top pick, earning it the Runner-Up award. The hose features a ⅝-inch diameter and a 100-foot length, perfect for extended reach through the yard. The mounting bracket has a 180-degree swivel, and the hose locks at any length. 

Upon unboxing the Aquazilla retractable garden hose, we were impressed with the attractiveness of the design. A handle at the top of the reel made it easy for us to carry and then install the product. It took us a mere 5 minutes to install the mounting bracket on our wooden post; the reel hooked to the bracket via a removable metal pin. 

During testing, we could pull the hose smoothly from the reel, and it locked into place the second we stopped pulling. Our only issue was that retracting the hose required only the gentlest tug, which we never could seem to achieve on the first try. However, once the hose did retract, the hose guide prevented any kinking. The heavy-duty, pistol-grip spray nozzle resisted any cracking when we dropped it on our concrete patio. We also found the nozzle’s nine different spray patterns useful for many applications, including rinsing off our patio and watering flowers.

Get the Aquazilla retractable garden hose reel at Amazon.

Best Bang for the Buck

Eneacro 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Eneacro 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Reasonably priced compared with retractable hose reels of a similar size
  • Easiest to pull the hose of all the models we tested
  • 100-foot hose length is suitable for yards and gardens of all sizes

What We Don’t Like

  • Plastic housing unit appears to be of lower quality than other top picks

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 3/5; Functionality 5/5; Durability 3/5; Value 5/5 

Product Specs

  • Length: 100 feet
  • Size: ½-inch diameter 
  • Nozzle: Pistol grip with 9 spray patterns

This retractable garden hose reel from Eneacro offers several good features at a reasonable price. It automatically locks at any length and retracts slowly using an internal breaking mechanism. The hose’s 100-foot length makes it suitable for yards and gardens of all sizes. The reel includes a side mount and can rotate 180 degrees to reach all parts of a yard, and users can remove the reel from the bracket for easy winter storage. 

Upon unboxing, it was apparent why this garden hose reel was cheaper than other products on our list. The plastic housing unit was thinner, and the hose looked to be of lower quality. However, looks can be deceiving, as we were pleasantly surprised by this hose reel’s performance. 

We installed the mounting bracket by drilling four pilot holes and then screwing the bracket in place. We then attached the reel and began using the hose. This hose was the easiest to pull among all of our top picks. There was no resistance, and drawing out the entire hose length took zero force. When we had finished using it, the hose retracted smoothly. The hose also features a handy pistol-grip nozzle with nine spray patterns. While this model’s housing unit appears to be a lower quality than that of the other products, it’s still an ideal option for users who value ease of use—and at a lower price.

Get the Eneacro retractable garden hose reel at Amazon.

Upgrade Pick

Macnaught 60-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Macnaught 60-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Features durable construction and an attractive modern design
  • Hybrid polymer hose is thick, flexible, and resistant to kinking
  • Simple installation and easy to remove from the mount for portability or storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Inconsistent retraction; the hose sometimes rewinds to one side rather than evenly throughout the reel
  • Doesn’t include a spray nozzle or screws for the mounting bracket

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 3/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs

  • Length: 60 feet
  • Size: ½-inch diameter 
  • Nozzle: Not included

For shoppers who want to invest in a higher-priced retractable hose reel, it’s best to choose a sturdy model designed for ease of use like this Macnaught hose reel that features heavy-duty construction and a high-quality hose. Although the 60-foot hose has a smaller ½-inch diameter, it’s made from a hybrid polymer material that doesn’t hold a coiled shape, making it easier to extend and less likely to kink. 

When we unboxed the hose reel, we were impressed with the material quality. The hose felt flexible but thick—definitely a grade above the other options. The housing unit featured durable plastic and a modern design. It included a metal bracket for installation; unfortunately, though, no screws were included. Luckily, we had some screws on hand and were able to mount the bracket to our post in just a few minutes.

Similar to other retractable garden hose reels, this model locks automatically and retracts with a gentle pull. However, the retraction was inconsistent during our testing. Sometimes the garden hose would retract in an even pattern, while other times it would all go to one side. In those instances, we’d have to unwind the hose and retract it again to straighten it out. An additional downside to this model is that it didn’t include a spray nozzle.

Get the Macnaught retractable garden hose reel at Amazon

Best for Small Yards

Gardena 50-Foot Wall-Mounted Hose Reel

 The Best Retractable Garden Hose Option Gardena 50-Foot Wall-Mounted Hose Reel
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Includes hose guide for easy, even retraction within the reel
  • Reel attaches to the mounting bracket via a removable metal pin
  • Hose is easy to pull out, locks in place, and smoothly retracts

What We Don’t Like

  • Hose features plastic couplings with snap-on connections, which may be less desirable 

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 4/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 4/5; Value 4/5 

Product Specs

  • Length: 50 feet
  • Size: Unspecified
  • Nozzle: Fire hose

The shorter 50-foot hose on this Gardena model is ideal for keeping flower beds and landscaping in smaller yards well irrigated. Similar to other hose reels, it mounts to a wall and swivels 180 degrees to access different parts of the yard. A bracket on the mount pairs with a standard padlock (not included) to prevent theft. Users can easily remove the reel from the mount for winter storage. 

We installed the bracket to our wooden post with four screws and then set the reel on top, locking it in with a metal pin. We then tested the hose, pulling it out and retracting it more than a dozen times. The hose extended and retracted smoothly and efficiently each time. This product includes a handy hose guide for installation on the corner of a house or building to prevent snags.

Rather than metal couplings like the other hose reels we tested, this product has plastic couplings with snap-on connections. The water source hook-up, however, has a standard threaded connection. Additionally, this hose reel has a basic fire-hose nozzle, which wasn’t our favorite, but it works well for watering plants.

Get the Gardena 50-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon.

Best for Medium Yards

Giraffe Tools 90-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Giraffe Tools 90-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Attractive and high-quality housing unit made from reinforced propylene plastic
  • Kink-proof hose retracts via a guide that keeps it tidy inside the housing unit
  • 90-foot hose length and versatile spray nozzle are ideal for many applications

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t pull as smoothly as other tested products from this brand; requires force

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.5/5 

Product Specs 

  • Length: 90 feet
  • Size: ⅝-inch diameter
  • Nozzle: Pistol grip with 9 spray patterns

The Giraffe Tools 90-foot retractable garden hose reel is an attractive option for midsize yards and gardens. The housing unit is durable, consisting of reinforced propylene plastic that won’t fade in the sun. The reel features a self-layering system that guides the hose into the unit smoothly and without any kinking. 

This model included everything we needed to mount it, including a propylene bracket and four screws with plastic anchors. After mounting, all we had to do was set the reel in place. We started our functionality testing by pulling the length of the hose out of the reel multiple times. We immediately noticed that this model required much more force to pull than the other Giraffe Tools models we tested.

The retraction on this hose worked as expected, rewinding smoothly and without kinks. We repeatedly dropped the nine-setting spray nozzle on the concrete patio to mimic the regular wear and tear the hose might experience. The couplings never warped, and the nozzle didn’t crack or show any signs of damage. Overall, this is a high-quality retractable garden hose reel, but it requires some upper body strength to extend the entire length of the hose.

Get the Giraffe Tools 90-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Best for Large Yards

Giraffe Tools 155-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Giraffe Tools 155-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Extra-long hose length of 155 feet is ideal for large yards, gardens, and barns
  • Durable, heavy-duty housing is made from reinforced and fade-resistant propylene
  • Versatile spray nozzle with 9 spray patterns meets multiple needs

What We Don’t Like

  • Long hose length makes reel heavier to carry and install
  • Wider mounting bracket may limit installation options

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.5/5 

Product Specs

  • Length: 155 feet
  • Size: ½-inch diameter 
  • Nozzle: Pistol grip with 9 spray patterns

With a whopping 155 feet of hose length, this Giraffe Tools option is one of the longest retractable garden hose reels on the market, making it ideal for yards that extend far from the spigot. The reel functions similarly to other retractable hose reels, locking automatically at any length and retracting with a simple tug. 

The mounting bracket was wider than others on our list, requiring a minimum of a 4-inch by 6-inch post on which to mount it. Alternatively, users can mount it directly to the side of a house or building. We installed the bracket on our wooden post, which took only a few minutes. We then set the reel in place and began using the hose. The reel weighs about 40 pounds, making it slightly more challenging to install.

We expected such a long hose to be more difficult to pull, but it wasn’t. It pulled smoothly from the reel, locking in place each time we stopped. It also retracted with a gentle tug, never kinking. The durable sprayer nozzle featured the same nine-setting pistol grip as on all the Giraffe Tools models we tested. We subjected the nozzle to many drops on our concrete patio, and it held up well. And we found the multiple sprayer settings useful for a variety of applications.

Get the Giraffe Tools 155-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Spike Mounted

Gardena 66-Foot Retractable Hose Reel on Metal Spike

 The Gardena 66-Foot Retractable Hose Reel on Metal Spike on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Easy-to-install metal ground spike eliminates the need for wall mounting
  • Hose pulls out smoothly and retracts with a gentle tug
  • 66-foot length suits small to medium yards and gardens

What We Don’t Like

  • Includes a basic adjustable nozzle instead of a higher-quality spray nozzle
  • Expensive for the quality and size of the hose reel

Our Ratings: Installation 4/5; Curb Appeal 4/5; Functionality 5/5; Durability 3/5; Value 3.5/5 

Product Specs 

  • Length: 66 feet
  • Size: Unspecified
  • Nozzle: Fire hose

Users who can’t or don’t want to wall-mount a hose reel can still enjoy the benefits of a retractable garden hose with the spike-mounted Gardena 66-foot hose reel. The housing unit is constructed with frostproof and UV-resistant material and features RollControl technology for safe retraction.

This hose reel came with everything we needed to install it. We mounted the stake by finding a suitable, utility-free area in our yard and then used the included metal rod to twist the stake into place. We couldn’t get the stake all the way into the ground, but we pushed it deep enough to support the hose reel. We then assembled the reel and placed it on the mount. 

The hose didn’t feel quite as durable as the other models we tested, but it extended and retracted smoothly with no tangling or kinking. The 66-foot length makes it best suited for small to medium yards. This model has a fire-hose adjustable nozzle, which didn’t have the quality of the nozzles on other top picks. However, it still held up to many drops on the concrete patio and worked well for watering plants. 

Get the Gardena 66-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels

  • Products tested: 8
  • Hours spent testing: 6.5
  • Tests performed: 5
  • Average price: $180

Before starting our hands-on testing of the best retractable garden hose reels, we researched top consumer needs and considered more than 15 options with high user reviews. Then, we narrowed our list to eight models to test and spent a month installing and using each retractable hose reel.

First, we mounted each hose reel to a wooden post using the included bracket and screws, if applicable. To test for functionality, we extended the full length of the hose and then retracted it at least a dozen times, noting the overall ease or difficulty, the smoothness, and how well it retracted. We also dropped the hose couplings and any included nozzles on our concrete patio multiple times to mimic the natural wear and tear these parts may undergo. Finally, we kept all of our test results in a rubric, and—at the end of the testing period—used these results to rate each product and award it as the top pick in one of the categories.

What to Consider When Choosing a Retractable Garden Hose Reel 

Although knowing the length of the hose is key when you’re purchasing a retractable garden hose reel, there are other important factors to consider, such as the hose diameter, nozzle type, and mounting design. 

Length

“Hose length is definitely a top consideration,” says Jeremy Yamaguchi, CEO of Lawn Love. “If you want to be able to extend your hose out to water the plants across your lawn without requiring a watering can to make up the difference, then make sure to measure the distance you need.”

Though other types of hose storage solutions may allow you to add length by attaching an additional hose, you won’t be able to add to or replace the hose that comes with a retractable reel. The best way to determine the length you’ll need is to measure from an outdoor spigot to the farthest point in the yard. Hose lengths for retractable garden hose reels typically range from about 50 to 150 feet. 

Mounting and Portability 

A retractable garden hose holder comes with a mounting kit for installation on the side of a house, shed, or even a fence or post. The mounting kit allows the reel to hinge left to right 180 degrees, making it easier to direct the hose toward a flower bed, driveway, or other location. 

Mounting the hose reel is necessary to provide a solid base while pulling the hose for retraction. A hose reel wall mount typically has a removable pin that allows the user to detach the entire device from the mount, which is convenient when storing the hose in a shed or garage for the winter. 

Hose Size

Hose sizes for retractable garden hoses vary from ⅜ of an inch in diameter up to ⅝ of an inch in diameter. A larger-diameter hose can carry more water and therefore produce a higher flow rate than a smaller-diameter hose. With this in mind, a ⅜-inch or ½-inch hose is best suited for watering plants, while a ⅝-inch hose is ideal for uses that demand higher water volume, such as running a sprinkler or washing a car. 

Nozzle Type

Some garden hose reels feature one of two types of nozzle: pistol grip or fire hose. Pistol-grip models fit ergonomically in the hand with a grip and trigger that allow the user to regulate the amount of output. The nozzle has a throttle tip for toggling between eight or nine spray patterns, including a stream, broad fan, and mist. 

Fire-hose nozzles are long and straight. The user can adjust the spray from a high-pressure stream to a broad fan by twisting the nozzle. Though a fire-hose nozzle doesn’t offer the same variety of spray patterns as a pistol-grip nozzle, it is usually made from all-metal parts and is typically more durable. 

Most nozzle types use standard fittings, so you can easily replace one later with an aftermarket nozzle, if necessary.

The Advantages of Owning a Retractable Garden Hose Reel

Although retractable reels are one of the more expensive storage solutions for garden hoses, there are several good reasons to invest in one. A retractable hose reel makes it easy to collect and store a garden hose that is up to 155 feet in length, eliminating the need to wrangle a hose manually. Garden hose reels also feature wall mounts, which can inconspicuously attach to a house or shed, unlike a hose reel cart that requires indoor storage. These reels detach easily from their mounts and double as a storage container for the hose during winter months. A retractable garden hose reel can:

  • Eliminate the need to manually wind up a hose
  • Store the hose in an out-of-the-way place
  • Allow for convenient transport of the hose for winter storage

“With longer hoses, it’s definitely helpful to have a crank feature or a retractable design to bring the hose back into place. If you don’t need a long hose and/or don’t need to take it out very far, a retractable hose may be an unnecessary expense,” says Yamaguchi. With that in mind, if you have a small yard with low water needs, a quality expandable hose may be sufficient.

FAQs

If you’re wondering how to use your new retractable garden hose reel or want to know what to do if the hose becomes damaged, read on for answers to these frequently asked questions. 

Q. Why do I need a retractable garden hose reel?

A retractable garden hose reel makes it easier to collect and store the hose by eliminating the need to manually wind it up. A quality hose reel also provides a tidy place to store the hose during the winter months. 

Q. How do I use a hose reel?

To use a hose reel, grab the nozzle end and pull the hose to the desired location for watering. The hose will automatically lock when you stop pulling. To retract the hose, give it a quick tug. The hose reel will automatically wind up the hose in about 20 seconds. 

Q. Can I replace a hose in a retractable hose reel?

Most hoses in retractable hose reels are not replaceable. If the hose becomes damaged, however, you may be able to repair it with a patch kit. 

Meet the Tester

Katie Barton has over 10 years of experience in product writing, has tested dozens of cleaning products, and has authored hundreds of articles for major media outlets. Her cleaning and organizing advice has been featured on GOBankingRates, Realtor.com, Yahoo!, Cabin Life, and more. She takes an unbiased approach to product testing, using each product multiple times or for several days/weeks to determine efficacy. Her goal is to help readers decide which products are worth their hard-earned money and which fall flat.

Additional research provided by Tony Carrick.

The post The Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels to Keep Hoses Contained, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-18T10:45:56-05:00
<![CDATA[The 7 Wood Chippers That Cut Best in Our Tests]]>Tackle yard work with the best wood chipper for your mulching needs and budget. We tested and reviewed top models and found seven that made the cut.

The post The 7 Wood Chippers That Cut Best in Our Tests appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-wood-chipper/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-wood-chipper/Tue, 18 Feb 2025 10:09:36 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More › https://c.aps.amazon-adsystem.com/apstag.js window.apstag = window.apstag || { queue: [], init: function() { apstag.queue.push(['i', arguments, (new Date).getTime()]) }, fetchBids: function() { apstag.queue.push(['f', arguments, (new Date).getTime()]) }, setDisplayBids: function() {}, targetingKeys: function() { return []; } } window.apstag.init({ pubID: "49cdee1c-072d-4765-8313-7c45826cbedc", // APS provided value adServer: 'googletag', videoServer: 'DFP', signals: { ortb2: { site: { page: "https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-wood-chipper/", publisher: { id: "49cdee1c-072d-4765-8313-7c45826cbedc" // APS Provided - publisher UUID } } } } }); apstag.queue.push(function () { window.apstag.nativeContent().enable(); });

A wood chipper cuts twigs, limbs, branches, and other solid yard material into small pieces. These chips may provide mulch for a garden, kindling for a fire pit, or even the raw material for pressed wood to make furniture or complete other carpentry projects.

The best wood chipper for home usemust accommodate the twigs and branches you feed into it and suit your power requirements. While thebest electric wood chipperis quieter and runs on a home power supply, gas and power take-off (PTO) models are much more powerful, cutting through more material at a faster pace.

We interviewed a landscaping expert to get his insight on what specifically to look for. Then we shopped around to identify electric and gas-powered wood chippers that our readers could count on for their outdoor cleanup projects. Then we spent more than 8 hours assembling and testing the following picks in a huge brush pile in order to compare wood chippers.

Through this testing, we selected the Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder as our best overall wood chipper for its ability to shred and chip branches of 3 inches in diameter, 301 cubic centimeter (cc) 4-cycle gas engine, low shredder hopper, and dock-and-lock bagging system.

Continue reading for insight on our shopping considerations and check out ourwood chipper reviews to see how each of these models performed in our tests—and why one of them may be the best wood chipper for your project.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Sun Joe CJ601E Electric Wood Chipper
  3. UPGRADE PICK: DK2 OPC503 3-Inch Disk Chipper Shredder
  4. BEST FOR COMPOSTING: Earthwise Electric 15-Amp Corded Chipper Shredder
  5. BEST WITH LEAF VACUUM: Troy-Bilt CSV060B Chipper Shredder Vacuum
  6. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Champion Power Equipment 3-Inch Chipper Shredder
  7. ALSO CONSIDER: Predator 6.5 HP 212cc Chipper Shredder
A person feeding a tree branch into the best wood chipper while standing in a yard next to a pile of mulched wood.
Photo: Debbie Wolfe for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

EngineBranch CapacityWeight
Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder301cc gas engine3 inches140 pounds
Sun Joe CJ601E Electric Wood Chipper14 amp (A) corded electric1.5 inches25.4 pounds
DK2 OPC503 3-Inch Disk Chipper Shredder7 horsepower (hp) 208cc Kohler Command Pro gas engine3 inches187 pounds
Earthwise Electric 15-Amp Corded Chipper Shredder15A corded electric motor1.75 inches30 pounds
Troy-Bilt CSV060B Chipper Shredder Vacuum163cc gasoline engine1.5 inches125 pounds
Champion Power Equipment 3-Inch Chipper Shredder224cc Champion gasoline engine3 inches135.6 pounds
Predator 6.5 HP 212cc Chipper Shredder212cc gas engine3 inches120 pounds

Our Top Picks

We tested some of the top-rated wood chippersin our test facility brush pile. Read on to learn how each of these machines performed in our tests and why we consider them to be among the best wood chippers for home use.

Best Overall

Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder

 The Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder on a white backgound.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Starts easily and handles tough material without stalling
  • Chips branches up to 3 inches in diameter
  • Easy loading of leaves and small debris
  • Includes a dock-and-lock bagging system
  • Large 11-inch airless wheels

What We Don’t Like

  • Pricey compared to other options
  • The included bottle of oil isn’t enough

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 301cc gas engine
  • Branch capacity: 3 inches
  • Weight: 140 pounds

The best all-around wood chipper we tested was durably built, easy to operate, and tackled the toughest branches without bogging down. It also featured a compact design that made it easy to transport and store. A 301cc gas engine and dual-knife chipper disc allow the Earthquake K33 chipper shredder to tackle branches up to 3 inches in diameter. Four hammer assemblies (two J-hammers and two tri-hammers) on the shredder make quick work of leaves, pine cones, smaller sticks, and other yard waste.

The big, powerful engine is the key to this chipper’s success. It started on the first pull and produced more than 13 foot-pounds of torque, while the other gas models in the test group averaged just over 11 foot-pounds. With that kind of power, the Earthquake K33 did an outstanding job chipping the thickest branches that bogged down or stalled out the other chippers.

When it came to shredding, we liked that the hopper opening was just 35 inches high, whereas some of the others were over 40 inches high. The lower height made it easier to load, especially when we were dumping large quantities of debris from a container. To offset the low height and still allow for leverage to make transport easy, the handlebar attaches at an angle so that it is higher than the rim of the hopper.

The debris bag worked great, too. Rather than relying on a drawstring as most models did, this one uses a locking bracket with its own handle. A support rod holds the bag open so that it fills all the way, with no need to reposition or shake down the material. When it’s full, the handle rotates off the mounting bracket for transport, and a heavy-duty zipper on the opposite end facilitates fast disposal.

We felt that the performance and build quality warranted the premium price for this wood chipper. Although it’s not the cheapest model available, the Earthquake K33 would make a smart pick for heavier use on larger properties.

Get the Earthquake wood chipper at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Mowers at Jacks.

Best Bang for the Buck

Sun Joe CJ601E Electric Wood Chipper

 The Sun Joe CJ601E Electric Wood Chipper on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Shreds branches up to 1.5 inches thick
  • Strong 14A electric motor
  • Upright configuration saves space in storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Not made for shredding leaves or soft, pliable stems
  • Operates more slowly than other electric chippers

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 14 amp (A) corded electric
  • Branch capacity: 1.5 inches
  • Weight: 25.4 pounds

For those who want to save money when cleaning up a small yard, Sun Joe’s 14A electric wood chipper could be considered thebest budget wood chipperaround. This affordable small wood chipper uses an electric motor that runs at speeds up to 4,300 revolutions per minute (rpm). As a light-duty chipper, it won’t clear fallen trees or do heavy landscaping work, but it cuts sticks and limbs up to 1.5 inches thick and produces usable mulch for the garden or yard. When the job is done, its compact, upright design won’t take up a lot of room.

This electric chipper has the lowest average price of all the models we tested, making it a smart choice for budget shoppers with limited storage space. Setup and start-up took about 15 minutes, and all tools were included in the box. We also noticed right away that this chipper was even lighter than the other electric models, weighing in at just over 25 pounds. The stated reduction ratio is 16:1 (to reduce a volume equal to 16 bags of debris down to one).

After a half hour of grinding branches, we noted that this Sun Joe model operates somewhat slower than other electric chippers and produces larger particles. In 30 minutes of chipping a mix of green and woody branches, it produced approximately 15 gallons (three 5-gallon buckets full) of chips. The motor strained a few times but never jammed, so we didn’t get to try out the jam-clearing function in a real-world scenario. The compact, upright build; strong performance; and maintenance-free design make this an easy choice for everyday use.

Get the Sun Joe wood chipper at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Upgrade Pick

DK2 OPC503 3-Inch Disk Chipper Shredder

 The DK2 OPC503 3-Inch Disk Chipper Shredder on a white background.
Photo: lowes.com

What We Like

  • Professional-grade Kohler gasoline engine for durability
  • Large hopper capacity and lower height for easier loading
  • Air-filled off-road tires and removable ATV towing hitch
  • Drop stand and locking wheels

What We Don’t Like

  • Horizontal configuration takes up more storage space
  • Top discharge configuration can become clogged with fine debris

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 7 horsepower (hp) 208cc Kohler Command Pro gas engine
  • Branch capacity: 3 inches
  • Weight: 187 pounds

The towable DK2 chipper shredder features a 7 hp 208cc Kohler Command Pro engine and dual high-strength steel-carbide cutting blades for reliable performance in tough conditions. Pneumatic off-road tires, a removable ATV towing hitch, and a drop stand make it easy to access worksites on difficult terrain. The wheels lock in place for added safety while chipping. An extra-large hopper and branch auto-feed chute placed at a comfortable height make it easier to load composting materials, yard waste, brush, and branches up to 3 inches in diameter.

After about a half hour of easy assembly, we fueled up the DK2 chipper shredder and moved it in place for testing. The large air-filled tires and hand-truck configuration made it the easiest gas-powered model to move manually; the added convenience of the removable tow bar was icing on the cake. Locking the wheels in place for operation required removal of the wheel pins from the end of the axle, sliding the wheels outward on the axle, and reinstalling the pins through the wheels and axle. In practice, this was only slightly awkward and less complicated than it may sound. The machine started on the first pull and ran smoothly throughout the test.

We operated the chipper for a half hour, feeding it a combination of green and dried hardwood branches, sunflower stalks, cornstalks, brush, and dried leaves. We really liked the wide mouth and comfortable height of the chute at just 36 inches high. It made it super easy to load leaves and other fine-textured materials. Even the largest, driest branches presented no problem. However, we did note that some of the fine material fed through the hopper accumulated at the base of the discharge chute. It did not clog the flow, but we recommend occasionally checking for excessive buildup during the course of a workday. Overall, this was the most pleasurable chipper shredder we tested. It was very easy to maneuver, powerful, and relatively quiet compared to competitors.

Get the DK2 wood chipper at Tractor Supply Co. or The Home Depot

Best for Composting

Earthwise Electric 15-Amp Corded Chipper Shredder

 The Earthwise Electric 15-Amp Corded Chipper Shredder on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Powerful exhaust-free operation
  • Includes a 1.2-bushel collection bin
  • Processes large branches
  • Lightweight yet durable construction

What We Don’t Like

  • Limited working range without extension cord
  • Shallow plastic hopper is somewhat flimsy

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 15A corded electric motor
  • Branch capacity: 1.75 inches
  • Weight: 30 pounds

When processing organic waste for composting, a clean, quiet electric chipper makes sense. The Earthwise 15A electric chipper grinds sticks and branches up to 1.75 inches in diameter and other yard and garden waste into smaller, more uniform particles for fast, efficient composting. It requires no gas or oil and virtually no maintenance. The included 1.2-bushel plastic collection bin makes it easy to capture chips, and the slim design with rear wheels makes for easy transport.

The Earthwise electric chipper was the easiest to assemble of all the models we tested, taking only about 10 minutes. However, we didn’t love the lightweight plastic snap-in-place hopper since the tabs lined up with difficulty and the assembled hopper was too easy to knock off while working. On the other hand, we really liked the plastic collection bin that simply slides into place and backs out like a drawer.

Feeding a wide range of such materials as plant stalks and woody branches was a breeze, and the included tamper tool helped us safely feed smaller items. The motor operated quietly, unfazed by even the largest, driest woody material, and the finished chips were quite uniform in appearance. We filled the collection bin within the half-hour testing time frame. The strong electric motor, compact build, and generously sized collection bin make this an easy choice for composting enthusiasts.

Get the Earthwise wood chipper at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best with Leaf Vacuum

Troy-Bilt CSV060B Chipper Shredder Vacuum

 The Troy-Bilt CSV060B Chipper Shredder Vacuum on a white background.
Photo: homedepot.com

What We Like

  • Excellent versatility; chips, vacuums, shreds, and bags
  • Gas engine reduces user fatigue
  • 24-inch vacuum width
  • Onboard vacuum hose reaches into tight spots
  • Accepts branches up to 1.5 inches in diameter

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires more storage space than other chipper shredders
  • Does not work well in natural areas or tall grass

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 163cc gasoline engine
  • Branch capacity: 1.5 inches
  • Weight: 125 pounds

Anyone looking to win “Tidiest Yard in the Neighborhood” will want to look into Troy-Bilt’s chipper-shredder-vacuum combo. With its 24-inch vacuum opening, leaf removal is as simple as walking across the lawn. Need to collect a few leaves blown beneath the shrubs or a pile near the front-door vortex? Just detach the 8-foot-long 7-inch-diameter vacuum hose and it will reach them. If a few sticks fell from the shade tree, simply insert them into the 1.5-inch chipper feed chute.

This machine operates somewhat like a push lawn mower. The deck height is adjustable for optimal leaf pickup. It rolls smoothly on 11-inch rear wheels and 8-inch front wheels. The cast-aluminum impeller is powered by an easy-starting California Air Resources Board (CARB)–compliant 163cc engine. It turns eight bags worth of yard waste into a single bag of chips and collects them in the onboard 2-bushel felt bagger.

This Troy-Bilt model arrived mostly assembled, with the exception of the handle, bagger, and hose. Installing those took about 15 minutes. Then we added oil and gas, adjusted the deck height, and started testing.

We found that the Troy-Bilt exhibited good suction, easily picking up dry or damp leaves, small pine cones, and twigs from the lawn, and the hose feature sucked up matted debris from beneath shrubs. The 1.5-inch chipper feature operated smoothly and efficiently for the most part. We tested it with both green wood and dried hardwood branches, though strongly curved and crooked branches did need to be broken into short pieces or tossed aside in a few cases.

The weight of the engine and deck countered the weight of the debris bagger quite well until the bag was mostly full. Emptying the bagger onto the ground was easy enough, but transferring the chips to a disposal bag was awkward. This machine could really help those who live where summer storms regularly leave debris in the yard or where autumn leaves fall over an extended period of time. It could also boost productivity during spring cleanup.

Get the Troy-Bilt wood chipper at The Home Depot, The BuildClub, or Troy-Bilt.

Best Heavy-Duty

Champion Power Equipment 3-Inch Chipper Shredder

 The Champion Power Equipment 3-Inch Chipper Shredder on a white background.
Photo: homedepot.com

What We Like

  • Powerful 224cc engine and dual-blade chipper
  • Extra-large shredder hopper handles debris up to 0.5 inches thick
  • Branch feed chute accepts straight limbs up to 3 inches thick
  • Hand-truck style makes it easy to maneuver over uneven terrain

What We Don’t Like

  • Tall stance makes loading more difficult
  • Handle built into the hopper rim with no padding or finger molding

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 224cc Champion gasoline engine
  • Branch capacity: 3 inches
  • Weight: 135.6 pounds

The ruggedly built Champion Power Equipment 3-inch portable chipper shredder proved to be the best heavy-duty wood chipper in our tests. A clean CARB-compliant 224cc Champion gas engine drives the chipper’s steel blades. This chipper grinds the equivalent of 20 bags of yard debris to fit into one bag. The large hopper is suitable for shredding fine debris like twigs, leaves, and other material smaller than 0.5 inches thick, while the branch feed chute accepts limbs up to 3 inches in diameter. The discharge chute features an adjustable angle top and comes with an easy-to-use 2-bushel drawstring collection bag for fast, easy cleanup.

As with the other models we tested, we set aside 30 minutes and a large pile of branches, brush, and leaves to test the Champion chipper shredder. After 45 minutes of easy assembly, we added gas and oil before going to work. The tall height of the hopper rim, which is where the transport handle is located, was a help and a hindrance. Because the wheels are on the same side of the machine as the handle, it easily maneuvers like a hand truck over all kinds of terrain, and the tall height provides welcome leverage. Later on, however, we realized that the 50-inch-tall hopper was less comfortable for loading debris compared to models with lower hoppers.

The engine started on the first pull of the recoil cord. We were impressed by the smooth operation and grinding power provided by the big gas engine. This was the largest gas engine in our test lineup. The automatic feed branch chute fed really fast, even with dry, large-diameter hardwood. The hopper, as noted earlier, was a bit too high for comfort but was wide enough to hold lots of material. The machine never clogged or showed signs of struggle with the workload. We also noted the machine’s small footprint, which makes it ideal for saving space in storage. This is a great choice for making fast work of occasional tough cleanup jobs.

Get the Champion Power Equipment wood chipper at The Home Depot.

Also Consider

Predator 6.5 HP 212cc Chipper Shredder

 The Predator 6.5 HP 212cc Chipper Shredder on a white background.
Photo: harborfreight.com

What We Like

  • Affordable and effective for medium-duty cleanup
  • Easy to load with leaves and small debris
  • 2-bladed chipper flywheel makes quick work of larger branches
  • Includes discharge collection bag

What We Don’t Like

  • Less powerful engine
  • Can get bogged down with tougher branches

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 212cc gas engine
  • Branch capacity: 3 inches
  • Weight: 120 pounds

No need to overspend on a seldom-used specialty tool. The Predator chipper shredder is value priced and delivers more chipping capability than electric models, along with the freedom of movement that only comes with gas-powered equipment. In terms of its overall build, it mimics our top pick but comes with a smaller 212cc engine and a drawstring debris bagger.

We assembled the Predator wood chipper in about 45 minutes, and other than having difficulty trying to read the tiny lettering used in the instructions, assembly went smoothly. This chipper does not come with engine oil, so be prepared with 2 quarts of 10W-30. Immediately after fueling up the first time, it started on the third pull, but going forward the engine started on either the first or second pull every time.

This chipper comes equipped with air-filled tires. For us, that was a good thing, as they rolled easily across all types of terrain, including wet ground. However, users will need to be cautious to prevent punctures. Another unique feature was the wheel brakes that could be locked for safety while chipping.

This chipper was a bit underpowered for branches thicker than about 2 inches. When we fed it larger material, the engine consistently bogged down, and in three cases stalled out. It was not a great performer compared to the other gas models we tested, but it was several hundred dollars cheaper on average. As a step up from electric chippers, the Predator wood chipper was a lot faster, more powerful, and generally more convenient for working anywhere on the property. Budget-conscious shoppers in need of a light- to medium-duty wood chipper will find good value here.

Get the Predator wood chipper at Harbor Freight.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Wood Chippers

Our testing observations and comparison started with unpacking and assembling the chippers. All of the electric wood chippers came together in about 15 minutes as they were all comparatively lightweight and compact. While basic, disposable tools were included in the packaging; however, using personally owned tools ought to make the job go faster and easier. All of the electric chippers require a heavy-duty 12-gauge extension cord to avoid tripping the circuit breaker during operation.

Assembling each of the gas-powered chippers took 45 minutes to 1 hour and required installation of the hopper, branch chute, safety guards, discharge chute, wheels, and standing brace. These machines all weigh more than 100 pounds, so it’s a good idea to have a helper. Again, the included tools will get the job done, but using ones from a personal tool kit makes the process more comfortable. The packages included engine oil and gasoline that must be added before operation.

After assembly, we transported each of the chippers across the lawn to the worksite. In so doing, we noted that the small plastic wheels on the electric chippers provided the most stability on solid, flat ground. The larger hard wheels on the gas machines worked fine on average lawns but caused some struggles on sloped, uneven surfaces. The towable DK2 chipper, which includes a handle for moving by hand, was the easiest to move on rough ground.

In general, chippers with wheels on the same side of the machine as the handle—what we called a “hand-truck” configuration—were easier to maneuver than those with wheels and handles on opposite sides of the machine, like a wheelbarrow. The wheelbarrow configuration requires the user to lift the handle and bear more of the machine’s weight versus the hand-truck configuration, which transfers more weight to the wheels.

Finally, we set up and operated each chipper for 30 minutes. During operational testing, we fed each model a combination of large and small branches, including green wood and dried wood, and dry leaves (when applicable) to observe the full range of functionality. In addition to the machine’s ability to chip, we observed chip consistency, working stability, operator comfort, and noise level from a purely subjective standpoint to help determine our preferences and recommendations.

We also spoke to Kaustubh Deo, president of Blooma Tree Experts, a tree care company based in Seattle, Washington, featuring International Society of Arboriculture (ISA)–certified arborists with over 17 years of experience. He says that once you’ve purchased a chipper, “Don’t forget to follow the maintenance instructions in the guides. Make sure you keep the chipper knives sharp and rotate them.” He also adds this expert tip: “Rental shops that rent out chippers should be able to sharpen chipper knives for you.”

What to Consider When Choosing a Wood Chipper

Before buyers choose a wood chipper for their yard cleanup needs, they’ll want to take a few minutes to educate themselves on the most important shopping considerations for these tools.

Types of Wood Chippers

Wood chippers fall into three main types based on their power source: electric, gas, and PTO.

Electric

Electric wood chippers often look a lot like golf bags. These compact machines run quieter than either gas or PTO chippers, but they often lack the power and capacity needed to deal with material larger than 2 inches in diameter.

For small branches and yard trimmings, an electric wood chipper does the trick. They’re reasonably priced, lightweight, and easy to use. Plug them into a standard outlet, and they’re good to go.

Gas 

The most common residential models, gas wood chippers are larger, louder, and produce gasoline exhaust. Gas-powered wood chippers generally employ 4-cycle engines from 150cc to 250cc and produce 7 to 10 hp. To find the models with the lowest exhaust emissions, look for the CARB-compliant label. CARB adheres to the highest emission standards in the United States.

More powerful than electric options, gas chippers need not sit near an outlet and won’t tether the user to an extension cord. Situated in the middle of the price range for chippers, gas-powered options cost more than electric ones but are not quite as much as PTOs. Gas chippers can typically handle material of more than 3 inches in diameter.

PTO

PTO refers to the drive shaft on the wood chipper, through which it attaches to a splined output shaft on a tractor, mower, or truck. Through this connection, the PTO wood chipper draws energy from the engine of the vehicle. This method of energy supply makes PTO wood chippers more effective than their gas or electric counterparts. They can cut through more material at a faster rate.

The best PTO wood chippersmake an excellent choice for anyone who lives on a large plot of land. They cost more than either electric or gas chippers, and they require a compatible vehicle to work. These machines are much larger and less convenient for average home landscapes. Although professionals will want to findthe best commercial wood chipper, we did not test PTO-driven models.

Bag Capacity

Not all wood chippers use bags or bins to gather the chipper refuse. Those who are looking for one that comes with a bag or bin will want to consider the storage container’s capacity. Larger bags make a great choice if users plan to use the wood chipper for a big cleanup project.

Keep in mind that the larger the bin, the heavier and more cumbersome it will be to empty. If weight is a concern, a model with a smaller bag or bin will require more frequent but easier emptying—a smart choice to avoid the risk of injury that comes with lifting a heavy bag.

Cutting Blades

Wood chippers use one or both of two cutting-blade types to grind up yard waste: fixed blades, also called knives; or hinged blades, sometimes called hammers. The most commonly used material for both blade types is hardened chromium-alloy steel. Steel tends to bend rather than chip and may be resharpened numerous times before it needs to be replaced.

A wood chipper’s ability to cut through material fed into the machine is a key factor. Shoppers will want to think about how they’ll use their wood chipper. An electric wood chipper will be fine for small branches and clippings. These devices usually shred branches up to 2 inches in diameter across the widest point. Those dealing with larger material will want to consider a gas or PTO chipper, which may be able to shred materials up to 4 inches in diameter. Some commercial wood chipper models cut through branches up to 7 inches in diameter, though these cost significantly more than the average residential wood chipper.

Torque

A wood chipper uses a powerful motor to turn a series of cutting and grinding blades with enough force (torque) to cut through solid wood quickly. Torque describes the rotational force, typically measured in foot-pounds, that a motor imparts on an object. In wood chippers, torque forces the blades to cut through any appropriate material pushed into the hopper. Most residential wood chippers get a torque rating between 7 and 15 foot-pounds.

Shredding Chute

Many chippers include two different chutes for feeding material into the machine: a long, narrow branch chute for thick branches; and a wide shredding chute, also known as a hopper. Shaped like a broad funnel, the shredding chute compresses bundles of thin pliable twigs and branches so that they can contact the blades more efficiently. This separate chute shreds less rigid material, such as weeds, leaves, grass, and other soft plant waste, so it can come in handy for common yard work.

While a leaf shredder would tackle this job, a wood chipper with a built-in shredding chute gets the same results in a more cost-effective and space-saving way. However, a wood chipper/leaf shredder combo will cost more than a model without the shredder. But this combo may be considered the ​​best residential wood chipper option.

Reduction Ratio

The reduction ratio of a wood chipper indicates how small the material will be after it has passed through the wood chipper. For example, if a wood chipper has a reduction ratio of 8:1, it will reduce the material down to an eighth of its original size. Another way to think of it is that it can reduce eight bags of yard waste to fit into one bag. The reduction ratio of most wood chippers typically ranges from 8:1 to 20:1.

Chippers need more power and energy to cut materials into smaller pieces. As the engine size increases, so does the price of the chipper. If users don’t need to cut material into tiny pieces, they can save money by choosing a chipper with a lower reduction ratio.

Weight and Mobility

Weight and mobility rank as key considerations in the purchase of a wood chipper, but many shoppers overlook these factors. Thebest small wood chipper for the extent of yard work is typically the ideal purchase. A wood chipper that’s too big or doesn’t have decent wheels can be very difficult to move around the yard, which reduces overall yard cleanup efficiency.

Look for wood chippers that come with sturdy stands and large wheels capable of moving over grass, paving stones, deck boards, sticks, and any other obstacles on the ground. Keep in mind that the heavier a wood chipper, the more difficult it will be to move across uneven ground or up steep inclines. For larger properties with fewer trees, a lightweight wood chipper may be ideal because users can move it around the yard quickly and effectively without significant fatigue.

How to Use a Wood Chipper Safely

There’s a reason wood chippers make frequent appearances in horror films. This incredibly dangerous yard tool should only be operated by an experienced user who is sure to take the following safety precautions:

  • Read the manufacturer’s instructions thoroughly before using a wood chipper.
  • Use hearing protection, eye protection, hand protection, and a hard hat.
  • When users are feeding branches into the wood chipper, they shouldn’t force stubborn branches into the blades. Users will want to let the chipper pull branches in while they stand to the side to avoid flying debris.
  • Keep hands and any other body part away from the wood chipper when it is connected to a power source. A simple accident could result in severe injury or death.
  • Users will want to disconnect the power and the spark plug before performing maintenance to ensure that the wood chipper does not start up while they’re vulnerable to the blades.

The Advantages of Owning a Wood Chipper

Yard-waste disposal is the greatest benefit of owning a wood chipper. Bushes require regular trimming, trees may need pruning, and old trees shed dead branches frequently, which can create a substantial pile of wood and yard material to remove. A wood chipper makes it easy to use or dispose of that debris.

Wood chippers are also a useful tool to reduce the potentially harmful emissions produced by burning chemically treated wood. Instead of releasing these toxic fumes and unpleasant odors into the air, wood can be mulched and used to protect plants.

Besides mulch, users may also create pressed wood for carpentry projects or biofuel for certain cars or other machinery.

To recap, a wood chipper:

  • Quickly process yard waste into small, easily managed chips;
  • Provides an environmentally friendly means of disposing of yard waste; and
  • Produces useful materials like mulch, pressed wood, and biofuel.

FAQs

Q. How big a wood chipper do I need?

Electric wood chippers are made for processing small and midsize twigs and branches. For this purpose, most users only require a wood chipper with a 1.5-inch cutting diameter. But if you have older trees on your property, or wish to grind up leaves and other finely textured material, you may want to have a larger gas-powered chipper. These models feature a hopper for processing fine materials and a larger branch chute to chip branches up to 3 inches in diameter.

Q. How do you use a wood chipper?

Choose a level location for the machine to sit. Once it is in position, set the parking brake on any equipment used to haul it and then adjust the chip deflector and chip chute to direct chips to your desired location.

Check the chipper for any debris before starting. If it is clear, start it up. If it isn’t, you’ll want to disconnect the spark plug and clean it out before turning it on. Never perform maintenance of any kind without disconnecting the power.

With the engine started, feed material into the wood chipper, blunt end first. The machine will begin chipping away, allowing you to back off and move to the side of the chipper so you don’t get hit by pieces that may shoot out. Once you have finished chipping, clean up the wood chips with a leaf blower or leaf vacuum and either dispose of them or put them to good use.

Q. How do you feed a wood chipper?

To feed material into the wood chipper, begin with the blunt end and carefully guide it into the chipper. You may also want to include a mixture of dry and green limbs so that the moisture from the green branches can help to cool and lubricate the wood chipper’s knives.

Q. How loud is a wood chipper?

A wood chipper’s noise output generally falls between 85 and 110 decibels, which is more than enough to warrant hearing protection.

Q. How much does a wood chipper cost?

Wood chippers range in price from about $150 to well over $2,000, depending on the type, size, torque, and overall power. Typically, residential wood chippers cost about $200 to $800, though heavy-duty models can greatly exceed this amount.

Q. Can wood chippers shred leaves?

Some wood chippers can also shred leaves, but if you don’t need to chip any wood, it may be better to invest in a dedicated leaf shredder instead. These tools tend to take up less space and they are more affordable.

Q. Is it better to chip wood when it is dry or wet?

Dry wood is harder and causes more wear and tear on the chipper’s blades, so it’s best to do wood chipping when the wood is cool and moist.

Q. What shouldn’t I put in a wood chipper?

Keep yourself safe and protect your equipment by only chipping branches within the size range your machine is built to process. Never place branches that may have nails or screws, lumber, excessively sappy wood, long vines, palm fronds, or other fibrous materials into the chipper.

Q. How do you clean a wood chipper?

Start any maintenance process by stopping the engine (ensuring all moving parts have stopped before proceeding) and disconnecting the spark plug wire or power cord to prevent accidental start-up.

To clean the wood chipper, begin by removing the flail screen and any larger debris. Clean the flail screen separately, and then clean the chute and around the muffler with water and a brush or dry cloth. Avoid using a high-pressure spray of water because it can contaminate the fuel system.

Meet the Tester

Mark Wolfe is a writer and product tester with a background in the nursery and landscaping industries. For more than 20 years he mowed, edged, planted, pruned, cultivated, irrigated, and renovated beautiful landscapes. Now he tests and writes reviews about the latest outdoor power equipment, hand tools, lawn care products, and other outdoor-living goods.

Additional research provided by Timothy Dale and Tom Scalisi.

The post The 7 Wood Chippers That Cut Best in Our Tests appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-18T10:09:36-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best PEX Crimp Tools for Plumbing Projects, Tested]]>Plumbing work―particularly on PEX pipes―requires specific tools. See reviews of the best PEX crimp tools for plumbing installation and repairs here.

The post The Best PEX Crimp Tools for Plumbing Projects, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-pex-crimp-tool/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=137855Tue, 18 Feb 2025 09:37:45 -0500ReviewsHand ToolsMajor SystemsPlumbing SuppliesTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

PEX (cross-linked polyethylene) tubing is widely used in today’s plumbing and HVAC systems because it’s flexible and easy to work with if you have high-quality PEX crimp tools. We researched more than 20 PEX crimpers, and we chose four for hands-on testing. While all performed well, our favorite is the Iwiss iCrimp F1807 kit for its durability and multipurpose versatility. 

In addition to the ones we tested, we’re featuring several additional PEX piping tools that we feel would be good picks for anyone working with PEX tubing. Keep reading to find out what to look for when shopping for tools for PEX plumbing, and find out how the following earned a spot on this lineup of the best PEX crimp tools.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Iwiss iCrimp F1807 All-In-One Crimping Tool Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Plumbflex Crimper Tool Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Iwiss iCrimp CRP1096 PEX Cinch Tool Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST MULTIPURPOSE: SharkBite PEX Crimp Tool
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST COMPACT: Iwiss iCrimp IWS-FAS PEX Copper Ring Crimp Tool Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST MULTISIZE HEAD: Apollo PEX Multi-Head Crimp Tool Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST FOR TIGHT SPACES: Iwiss iCrimp Angle Head F1807 PEX Crimp Tool Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. BEST PROFESSIONAL: Milwaukee M18 Press Tool Kit With PEX Crimp Jaws
    ↓ Jump to Review
  9. ALSO CONSIDER: Iwiss iCrimp IWS-C Angle PEX Crimping Tools
    ↓ Jump to Review
The Best PEX Crimp Tools
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

TypeLengthCapacity
Iwiss iCrimp F1807 All-In-One Crimping Tool KitCrimps15.55 inches⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes 
Plumbflex Crimper Tool KitClamps11 inches½- and ¾-inch PEX pipes
Iwiss iCrimp CRP1096 PEX Cinch Tool KitClamps 11.02 inches⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes
SharkBite PEX Crimp ToolCrimps14.5 inches⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes 
Iwiss iCrimp IWS-FAS PEX Copper Ring Crimp Tool KitCrimps 12.2 inches ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes
Apollo PEX Multi-Head Crimp Tool KitCrimps 17 inches⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes
Iwiss iCrimp Angle Head F1807 PEX Crimp Tool KitCrimps 13.7 inches ½- and ¾-inch PEX pipes 
Milwaukee M18 Press Tool Kit With PEX Crimp JawsCrimps 
13.5 inches
⅜-, ½-, ⅝-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes
Iwiss iCrimp IWS-C Angle PEX Crimping ToolsCrimps 7.87 inches½- and ¾-inch PEX pipes

Our Top Picks

The best PEX crimp tools on the market are made with effectiveness, ergonomics, and ease of use in mind. Check out our list of the ones we tested plus some additional models we think look great.  

Best Overall

Iwiss iCrimp F1807 All-In-One Crimping Tool Kit

 Iwiss ICrimp F1807 PEX Crimp Tool Kit in a storage case
Photo: Amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Performance 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Crimps
  • Length: 15.55 inches 
  • Capacity: ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes 

What We Like

  • Accommodates PEX A, B, or C tubing types 
  • PEX crimp removal tool and pipe cutter included 
  • Includes a go/no-go gauge 
  • Hard carrying case included

What We Don’t Like

  • Hand strength needed to crimp 

If you’ll be installing a lot of PEX, this Iwiss iCrimp kit has everything you need in one place. The kit comes with a crimper; jaws for ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch pipe; a PEX pipe cutter; and a crimp-removal tool. It also features a go/no-go gauge and a wrench for calibrating the crimper. We liked the way all the tools fit nicely into the included hard plastic carrying case for protection.

The Iwiss PEX crimping tool kit is easy to use. We were able to change jaws when we were crimping different sizes of tubing. The long handles make applying sufficient force for crimping relatively easy, but it still takes some hand strength to crimp the rings snugly. The included go/no-go gauge is a definite perk. 

After crimping a ring on a PEX fitting, we used the gauge to see if we’d crimped it accurately. The removal tool made it easy to cut through incorrectly fitting crimp rings, and the cutter was a nice bonus because it ensured flush tubing edges that fit smoothly against the shoulders of the copper fittings. This kit gives you everything you need to run PEX tubing. 

Get the Iwiss iCrimp F1807 all-in-one PEX crimp tool at Amazon.

Runner-up

Plumbflex Crimper Tool Kit

 The Best PEX Crimp Tools Option: Plumbflex Crimper Tool Kit
Photo: The Home Depot

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Performance 4.8/5; Durability 4.5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Clamps
  • Length: 11 inches
  • Capacity: ½- and ¾-inch PEX pipes

What We Like

  • Works with cinch rings from different manufacturers
  • Includes a high-quality cutter
  • Comes with 50 clamps in both sizes
  • Attached cinch rings securely in testing

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t come with a go/no-go tool
  • Not suitable for ⅜- or 1-inch PEX

The Plumbflex PEX crimper is suitable for use with ½- and ¾-inch tubing, the most common sizes used in residential construction. This clamp-type tool performed flawlessly in our tests. We used it to attach stainless steel cinch clamps to both sizes of PEX tubing, and the fittings were snug and secure. Plus, it comes with 50 clamps of each size, so we had plenty to test with. 

It doesn’t come with a go/no-go tool, but you can pick one up for under $10 from any home improvement store. We used one of the go/no-go tools that came with another model we tested, and each clamp we applied was right on target.

One of the benefits of a PEX clamp tool (including this one) over a traditional crimp tool is the ability to reach into tight spots because there’s no need to spread the handles as far. We tried out the Plumbflex on a few cinch rings we had from a different manufacturer, and it worked just as well. 

Another perk is the PEX cutter that comes with the clamp tool. It cuts the tubing straight and flush so the edges fit smoothly against the shoulders of the brass crimp fittings. If you won’t be installing narrower ⅜-inch or larger 1-inch tubing, the Plumbflex is a quality pick. 

Get the Plumbflex PEX crimp tool at The Home Depot.

Best Bang For The Buck

Iwiss iCrimp CRP1096 PEX Cinch Tool Kit

 iCrimp PEX Cinch Tool with Removing Function in its plastic packaging
Photo: Amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Performance 4.5/5; Durability 4.5/5; Value 4.8/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Clamps 
  • Length: 11.02 inches
  • Capacity: ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes 

What We Like

  • Works with multiple sizes of PEX
  • Comes with 30 cinch rings
  • Compact size for working in tight spaces 
  • Comes with good cutter

What We Don’t Like

  • No storage case included
  • Complicated removal function

If you’re looking for a budget-friendly tool for securing stainless steel cinch rings, look no further than the iCrimp PEX cinch tool. This clamp cincher works for any size PEX and comes with 30 clamps, so you can get started right away. It performed well in our tests, but it took a bit more hand strength to completely snug the cinch rings than the Plumbflex model. 

Still, it did a good job and comes with a top-notch PEX cutter. The only downside was that the removal feature of the tool didn’t work well for us. We followed the instructions for adjusting the tool from the clamping feature to the removal feature (which requires about five steps), and then we tried to cut the tabs, but all we got were smashed tabs. Maybe we didn’t do it right (that’s likely), but it seems like a complex process and simpler to just use a dedicated removal tool. 

One additional thing to note is that the iCrimp cinch tool cannot be calibrated. However, we found it well calibrated right out of the package, and it should be fine for completing most PEX plumbing projects. This tool lets you make high-quality connections at an affordable price point.

Get the Iwiss iCrimp CRP1096 PEX crimp tool at Amazon.

Best Multipurpose

SharkBite PEX Crimp Tool

 The Best PEX Crimp Tools Option: SharkBite PEX Crimp Tool
Photo: Lowe’s

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.8/5; Performance 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.8/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Crimps
  • Length: 14.5 inches
  • Capacity: ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes 

What We Like

  • Consistently made secure connections
  • Easy-to-change jaws
  • Go/no-go gauge included
  • Mini hard case
  • Ergonomic handles for comfort

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavier than some at nearly 4 pounds
  • Limited use in tight spots

We’re big fans of traditional push-to-connect SharkBite fittings, so we were excited to test the brand’s crimper tool and weren’t disappointed. At just under 4 pounds, the SharkBite crimper is one of the heavier PEX plumbing tools we tested, but it did a spectacular job of creating a secure connection each time. 

We tested it with stainless steel crimp rings, but it’s also designed to accommodate copper crimp rings. Changing jaws on the SharkBite was simple, and it comes with a go/no-go gauge so we could check each ring after crimping to ensure it was correct. It performed flawlessly. 

The SharkBite comes complete with a mini hard case that secures the gauge and the jaws, and it fits over the head of the PEX pipe crimping tool. We actually prefer this type of case because it doesn’t take up a lot of space in our tool box, and we can even slip it in a tool belt. The mini case protects the working parts of the tool and keeps the accessories secure. 

However, it doesn’t come with a removal tool and is not designed for use in restricted spots—its handles must be completely opened (nearly 180 degrees) to crimp a ring. However, it manages all standard PEX sizes, and the ergonomic handles reduce hand fatigue. 

Get the SharkBite PEX crimp tool at Lowe’s

More Great Options

While we didn’t personally test the following PEX plumbing crimpers, they were on our short list before we selected the ones we wanted to test—and they’re still among our top picks. 

Best Compact

Iwiss iCrimp IWS-FAS PEX Copper Ring Crimp Tool Kit

 Iwiss ICrimp IWS-FAS PEX Copper Ring Crimp Tool Kit in its storage case
Photo: Amazon

Product Specs 

  • Type: Crimps 
  • Length: 12.2 inches 
  • Capacity: ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes

What We Like

  • High-leverage design
  • Multiple jaw sizes 
  • PEX cutter and go/no-go gauge included 
  • Comes in a hard plastic case

What We Don’t Like

  • Shorter handle than comparable options 

We know it can be tough to find a compact PEX crimper that fits in a tool box but still provides the leverage required to seal off a PEX joint. But if you’re looking for just that kind of item, check out the Iwiss IWS-FAS PEX crimping tool. This crimper uses a high-leverage design that allows the user to apply enough pressure for a perfect seal despite its compact 12.2-inch design.

This PEX crimping kit is more than just an innovative tool. We like that it comes with the jaws required for crimping ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch pipe, plus a PEX cutter, a go/no-go gauge, and a hard plastic case to carry it all. That’s a lot!

Get the Iwiss iCrimp IWS-FAS PEX crimp tool at Amazon or Walmart.

Best Multisize Head

Apollo PEX Multi-Head Crimp Tool Kit

 Apollo 69PTKH0015K PEX Multi-Head Crimp Tool Kit
Photo: Amazon

Product Specs 

  • Type: Crimps 
  • Length: 17 inches 
  • Capacity: ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes

What We Like

  • 4 sets of jaws 
  • Go/no-go gauge and wrench included 
  • Plastic carrying case 

What We Don’t Like

  • Big, heavy construction 

For a heavy-duty crimping tool that can tackle most PEX tubing plumbing projects, we think the Apollo PEX multihead crimp tool kit is worth a look. This tool kit comes with the crimper, four sets of jaws (⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch sizes), a go/no-go gauge, and a wrench for adjustments and calibration. The jaws swap out with two hex bolts, which the included wrench also fits.

The Apollo provides plenty of leverage for sealing off plumbing joints, good for creating up to 100 pounds of force. The components pack nicely into the plastic carrying case, keeping everything secure and in one place between projects. The only thing we would like it to include is a PEX cutter to make straight flush cuts.

Get the Apollo PEX crimp tool at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best For Tight Spaces

Iwiss iCrimp Angle Head F1807 PEX Crimp Tool Kit

 Iwiss iCrimp IWS-FA Long-Version Crimp Tool Kit in its storage case
Photo: Amazon

Product Specs 

  • Type: Crimps 
  • Length: 13.7 inches 
  • Capacity: ½- and ¾-inch PEX pipes 

What We Like

  • Suitable for crimping tasks in tight spaces
  • Tubing cutter and crimping rings included 
  • Go/no-go gauge included
  • Hard plastic carrying case

What We Don’t Like

  • Shorter handles provide limited leverage 
  • No PEX cutter included

One advantage that PEX fittings have over copper piping is that in-wall repairs in tight spaces are much easier and safer, but they can still be challenging to reach and crimp. This product’s unique offset-head design allows the user to get a grip on any ½- or ¾-inch crimp, even in hard-to-reach places. We think this would be optimal for renovations where the user is retrofitting the plumbing.

This kit’s crimper comes with built-in jaws for ½- and ¾-inch pipe, as well as a tubing cutter and several crimp rings. It also has a go/no-go gauge, alerting the user to calibration issues and potential leaks. All of this gear stores away in a hard plastic carrying case. While we didn’t test this model, we’re familiar with many Iwiss iCrimp PEX plumbing tools, and we’ve never had a problem with any of them. 

Get the Iwiss iCrimp angle head PEX crimp tool at Amazon.

Best Professional

Milwaukee M18 Press Tool Kit With PEX Crimp Jaws

 Milwaukee M18 Fuel 2-Gallon Compact Quiet Compressor on a white background
Photo: The Home Depot

Product Specs 

  • Type: Crimps 

  • Length: 13.5 inches

  • Capacity: ⅜-, ½-, ⅝-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes

What We Like

  • Power PEX crimp tool
  • Fast and precise alignment

  • Green light to show cycle is complete

  • Kit includes charger, 2 batteries, and case

What We Don’t Like

  • Bulk makes it challenging to work in tight spaces
  • Cutter, ⅜-inch, and ⅝-inch jaws are not included

We’re well aware that using a manual PEX crimp tool all day can result in hand pain. While we’ve never used a powered crimp tool, we think the technology is awesome and we’re looking forward to seeing more manufacturers implement it in the near future. 

Milwaukee’s powerful 18-volt press tool kit is the solution many professionals prefer. Spring-loaded jaws provide precise alignment for flawless fitting of all PEX crimp sizes. According to Milwaukee, this tool is 40 percent faster than powered rivals, with a full cycle taking just 3 seconds.

Optimized force means no calibration intervals interrupt work, and no calibration tool is required. A pre-press battery check ensures sufficient charge to complete the crimp successfully, and a green LED confirms this at the end of the cycle. However, there’s no cutter in the kit, and while three sets of jaws are included, the ⅜- and ⅝-inch versions cost extra.

Get the Milwaukee PEX crimp tool at The Home Depot or Amazon.

Also Consider

Iwiss iCrimp IWS-C Angle PEX Crimping Tools

 Three iCrimp Angle PEX Crimp Tools on a white background
Photo: Amazon

Product Specs 

  • Type: Crimps 
  • Length: 7.87 inches
  • Capacity: ½- and ¾-inch PEX pipes

What We Like

  • PEX cutter included with purchase
  • Compact size for tight spaces
  • Precalibrated design 

What We Don’t Like

  • Short handle may be difficult for some users 

Occasionally, plumbing projects and repairs get so tight and restricted that they require scaled-down tools to get the job done. For projects like those, we like the iCrimp angle PEX crimp tool combo. This two-pack of PEX crimping tools features a ½-inch crimper and a ¾-inch model, plus a PEX tubing cutter, both sized to easily fit in a standard tool box. 

These PEX crimping tools can fit in some tight spots thanks to their compact size and diameter-dedicated jaws. Unlike many other crimp tools, both of these tools come from the factory precalibrated. If you’re looking at making water-supply line repairs or retrofits, we think this is a good pick for getting in those tight spots. 

Get the Iwiss iCrimp IWS-C angle PEX crimp tool at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

The Best PEX Crimp Tools
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

How We Chose and Tested the Best PEX Crimp Tools

Testing Stats
Products tested 4
Time spent testing 3 hours
Tests performed4
Price range$32 to $750

Before selecting the tools we wanted to test, we chatted with Korey Gregory, superintendent at water damage specialists ASAP Restoration in Tempe, Arizona. He stresses that “ineffective PEX crimp tools don’t create a tight enough seal around the ring.” 

We then extensively researched and chose to test PEX crimp tools made for PEX A, B, or C with crimps or clamps to suit individual users’ preferences. We selected models for various PEX tubing sizes, including ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch sizes. Several of our picks come from Iwiss, a leading manufacturer of high-quality crimping tools. 

In actual testing, we used each tool to securely attach rings or clamps to PEX fittings. We swapped out the jaws (when applicable) and used the accessories that came with the tools to see how well they were made. We used go/no-go gauges to determine whether the crimping tools were securing the fasteners to the correct degree. 

During the tests, we awarded points based on a rubric. Afterward, we averaged the points to find our top pick and categorize the other models according to their best uses. 

What to Consider When Choosing a PEX Crimp Tool 

Gregory offers some additional sound advice: “One of the ways to ensure that you get a quality crimper is to choose ones with longer handles rather than shorter ones. Longer handles help to give you leverage when doing the actual crimping.” He adds, “If you are starting a plumbing business, have wrist problems, or just a huge number of PEX crimps to do, then a powered PEX crimper tool might be worth the investment.”

Types of PEX Crimp Tools 

PEX is a flexible tubing that can transport fresh water, hot water, radiant heating, and even sprinkler-system water, making it very popular in residential applications.

These plastic pipes all work the same way, and most of the same joints will apply for all three types. However, their makeup and characteristics vary. One thing to understand is that PEX A, B, and C do not indicate a grade or quality of PEX piping. Those designations simply designate the manufacturing process used to create the pipe. 

PEX A

PEX A is the most expensive type of PEX, and it has some desirable properties. For one, even though it comes in rolled coils, PEX A will hold its new shape when straightened, making it easier to install through wall cavities and floors. However, PEX A does have the potential to leach more production-related chemicals, like toluene and methyl tert-butyl ether (MTBE), into the water supply. Also, it has a lower bursting pressure than PEX B. 

PEX B

PEX B can cost half as much as PEX A, and that price comes with some advantages and disadvantages. PEX B has a higher bursting pressure than PEX A, and chemical leaching from the pipe is considerably less likely. However, it doesn’t straighten well and it kinks relatively easily, which can make it a bit of a hassle to install.

PEX C

PEX C isn’t very common, and DIYers are unlikely to come across it. The manufacturing process used to create PEX C makes it relatively weak compared to PEX A and B. It’s also less resistant to oxidation, meaning PEX C will wear down through normal usage faster than A and B.

Crimps vs. Clamps

The Best PEX Crimp Tools
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

When shoppers are learning about PEX plumbing tools, a key point is that there are crimps and clamps

  • Crimps may be stainless steel or copper crimp rings that slide over a joint, and the crimping tool squeezes the entire ring down onto the barbed fitting underneath. Copper crimps are burlier than clamps, but they’re more susceptible to corrosion. 
  • Clamps are stainless steel bands with small tabs and locking holes. Clamping tools squeeze a tab that snugs the crimp fitting over the tubing. Stainless steel clamps are easier to install and less likely to corrode, but they’re also much thinner than copper crimps, so they may bend or separate more easily. 

Length

For putting strong pressure on a crimp, longer handles are better. The longer the tool’s handle, the more leverage the user can apply to the crimp or clamp, requiring less effort to create a perfect seal. Look for a pipe crimping tool at least 11 inches in length. Since longer-handled PEX piping tools can be slightly awkward, they might have more of a learning curve than shorter-handled ones. 

Clamps tend to be easier to secure and require less effort, so handle length isn’t as much of a priority. 

Weight 

Plumbers and electricians who use these tools regularly will want to look for options between 1 and 9 pounds; most options weigh under 4 pounds. However, heavyweight options may provide more crimping power than their lighter counterparts.

Pipe

Before picking a crimping or clamping tool, know what type of pipe it works for. While many types of clamping and crimping tools work for plumbing joints, not all of them work for PEX pipe.

Some tools work for both copper and PEX pipe, but they generally require additional jaws or PEX crimp fittings. Buying models with added features can get expensive quickly, but for those who do a lot of plumbing, it might be worth the investment to be able to perform multiple plumbing functions with a single tool. Switching a fitting on a clamping tool takes less time than sweating a copper joint with flux and solder.

Capacity

Don’t worry about choosing the PEX crimp tool that is the right size. Because PEX comes in only a few sizes—⅜, ½, ¾, ⅝ , and 1 inch—most clamping or crimping tools made for PEX will do. Swapping between those sizes is usually pretty straightforward. 

Electrical and plumbing crimping tools typically have 1-inch jaws that can crimp 1-inch pipe, but their kits come with smaller jaws for tackling smaller pipes. To clamp those smaller pipes, simply open the 1-inch jaws and slip the necessary-size clamping jaws inside. 

Clamping tools are often one size fits all. They slide over the knob on the clamp and squeeze it, and those knobs are relatively universal in size.

Gauge 

The point of any plumbing job is to avoid leaks. With PEX crimps, it can be difficult to tell by eye or feel if there’s a good seal. Some tools come with go/no-go gauges to help ensure each fitting is tightly sealed.

These gauges have U-shaped cutouts meant for specific pipe sizes. To use a go/no-go gauge, slide it over the joint. Check it from several angles. The gauge should slip over the crimp about halfway before stopping. If it slides over the crimp—or not at all—the joint may have problems when pressurized. 

Calibration

Over time, clamping and crimping tools can fall out of perfect calibration. Applying pressure many times throughout a plumbing project can stretch the jaws, in which case they’ll need a little tightening.

Most PEX crimp and clamp tools have adjustment screws, and they often come with the wrenches required to tighten them. Use these to tighten the tools back to the ideal settings. Many have adjustments on both jaws, allowing for calibrating to a perfectly round result. 

The gauge can also determine if the jaws are overtightened, which can just as easily lead to a leak. 

Removal Function

Many of the best PEX clamp tools have removal functions for separating clamps from the pipe. Don’t expect to reuse these clamps or crimps, though, as the removal process either cuts them or damages their integrity. However, the fitting underneath should be completely intact.

Removing crimps requires an entirely different tool with a blade for cutting through the crimp rings. 

FAQs 

Q. What is the best PEX to use?

PEX B is considered the best all-around PEX pipe. It leaches far fewer chemicals and has a higher bursting pressure. The disadvantage is that it can be harder to work with.

Q. Do PEX clamps fail?

They can fail, but it’s usually due to human error. If the clamp is applied crookedly or unevenly, it will leak. To ensure that the clamps stay in place, check that the clamp or cinch type is compatible with the pipe being cinched.

Q. Can I crimp PEX with pliers? 

You cannot get a solid, accurate, leak-free joint with pliers, which can’t apply even pressure all around the crimp. Though this can help with some of the more nitty-gritty problems, a proper PEX pipe crimping tool is the best option.

Q. Can I run PEX through floor joists?

PEX can run through floor joists, stud walls, or almost anywhere else that would normally hold plumbing (according to local code).

Q. Can I run PEX to a water heater?

PEX should not run directly to an electric or tankless water heater, but it can run to a copper riser 18 inches or more in length, coming directly from the water heater. But be advised that the PEX tubing must be 6 inches away from the exhaust vent of the heater.

Q. What is the lifespan of a PEX pipe?

PEX may be able to last more than 100 years. While it hasn’t been around long enough to verify that longevity, long-term testing indicates it could last a century before breaking down. However, it’s important to note that hungry rodents can also cause damage.

Q. How tight do I need to crimp PEX fittings?

Typically, you will squeeze the crimper handles until they’re fully closed. At that point, the crimp is complete. Don’t stop squeezing before the handles are closed or the connection may leak.

Q. How often should PEX be clamped?

PEX should be crimped or clamped at each fitting, but it should only take one solid squeeze of the handles to complete the crimp if the tool is properly calibrated.

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a product tester and writer specializing in the construction, remodeling, and real estate industries. 

Additional research provided by Tom Scalisi. 

The post The Best PEX Crimp Tools for Plumbing Projects, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-18T09:37:45-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Air Impact Wrenches of 2025 for Tough Jobs, Tested]]>The best air impact wrench will loosen bolts you could never tackle by hand and offers super-fast tightening, too. See top-rated tools here.

The post The Best Air Impact Wrenches of 2025 for Tough Jobs, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-air-impact-wrench/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=169558Sun, 16 Feb 2025 06:02:55 -0500ReviewsPower ToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

It’s difficult to imagine the immense twisting force that an air impact wrench can apply. Here’s an example: A nut that is “hand tight” requires a pressure of about 2 pounds per square foot, or 2 foot-pounds (ft-lbs). The best air impact wrenches multiply that energy more than 500 times. Air impact wrenches make easy work out of otherwise tough jobs like loosening lug nuts, in which an extension bar on a standard wrench can prove insufficient. You won’t find a pro auto shop without an impact wrench for tires, and they’re also used in engineering and construction.

Air impact wrenches are neither complicated nor difficult to use, so there’s no reason amateur mechanics shouldn’t have one of these tools at home, especially if they already own an air compressor. We tested five impact wrenches and found the Aircat 1250-K, with its high torque output (twisting force) and sturdy build, to be the best of the bunch.

We compiled the following sections to help you understand the important features of these handy tools. This information can help you find the best air impact wrench for the job.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Aircat 1250-K ½-Inch Nitrocat Kevlar Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: ACDelco ANI405A Pneumatic Air ½-Inch Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
  3. UPGRADE PICK: Ingersoll Rand 2235QTiMAX ½-Inch Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST COMPACT: Aircat 1056-XL ½-Inch Nitrocat Compact Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR HOME MECHANICS: DeWalt DWMT70773L ½-Inch Drive Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST HIGH-POWERED: Aircat 1150 ½-Inch Composite Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST FOR LUG NUTS: Ingersoll Rand 232TGSL ½-Inch Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
  8. BEST ERGONOMIC: Campbell Hausfeld ½-Inch Impact Wrench 
    Jump to Review
  9. HONORABLE MENTION: Workpad ½-Inch Mini Air Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
The Best Air Impact Wrench Options
Photo: Tony Carrick for Bob Vila
TorqueSpeedNoise level
Aircat 1250-K ½-Inch Nitrocat Kevlar Impact Wrench1,300 ft-lbs 8,500 RPM86 decibels
ACDelco ANI405A Pneumatic Air ½-Inch Impact Wrench500 ft-lbs 8,000 RPM97.7 decibels
Ingersoll Rand 2235QTiMAX ½-Inch Impact Wrench1,300 ft-lbs 8,500 RPM88.7 decibels
Aircat 1056-XL ½-Inch Nitrocat Compact Impact Wrench750 ft-lbs 9,000 RPM85 decibels
DeWalt DWMT70773L ½-Inch Drive Impact Wrench650 ft-lbs 7,500 RPMUnlisted
Aircat 1150 ½-Inch Composite Impact Wrench900 ft-lbs 9,0000 RPM86 decibels
Ingersoll Rand 232TGSL ½-Inch Impact Wrench 500 ft-lbs10,000 RPM105.2 decibels
Campbell Hausfeld ½-Inch Impact Wrench 550 ft-lbs 8,000 RPMUnlisted
Workpad ½-Inch Mini Air Impact Wrench500 ft-lbs10,000 RPM112 decibels

Our Top Picks

We chose the following air impact wrenches for their performance, reliability, and value. While Aircat and Ingersoll Rand dominate the market, some interesting alternatives exist in several categories.

Best Overall

Aircat 1250-K ½-Inch Nitrocat Kevlar Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrench Option: AIRCAT 1250-K 1 2-Inch Nitrocat Kevlar Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Powerful lug nut-removing torque for changing tires
  • Pro-level build quality
  • Three torque settings for tightening

What We Don’t Like

  • Only one torque setting for reverse

Specs

  • Torque: 1,300 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 8,500 revolutions per minute (RPM)
  • Noise level: 86 decibels

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Ergonomics 4/5; Performance 5/5; Noise 5/5; Value 4/5 

The ½-inch Nitrocat air impact wrench is an outstanding tool from the Aircat range. In terms of pure performance, to say it is impressive is an understatement. But there’s no denying that it is expensive, and casual or home users are unlikely to need the performance it delivers.

Its breakaway torque is 1,300 ft-lbs, with a normal level of 950 ft-lbs. That showed during testing. Of the five impact wrenches we tested, the Nitrocat offered the least resistance when removing lug nuts from our Toyota Tundra, spinning off each lug nut with ease using our 21-millimeter impact socket. 

To maximize control, this high-torque impact wrench contains a three-way adjustment, including three torque settings for tightening bolts. This was handy in avoiding over-torquing our lug nuts when we were reattaching them. But when it comes to removal, the impact wrench only has a single torque setting. While this didn’t impact performance, it was overkill for removing our lug nuts and could potentially cause them to spin off the socket and go flying through the air.

The Nitrocat is built to take a beating with a heavy-duty stainless steel housing and Kevlar-reinforced body that’s durable enough to handle a professional shop. 

For all its power and rock-solid build quality, the Nitrocat 1250-K air impact wrench still weighs under 5 pounds. The Aircat comes with a steep price tag, but for serious home mechanics or those who work on other people’s cars, it’s a worthy investment. 

What our tester says: “The Aircat somehow manages to produce ample power while at the same time operating with very little vibration or noise.” —Tony Carrick, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Aircat 1250-K air impact wrench at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Bang for the Buck

ACDelco ANI405A Pneumatic Air ½-Inch Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrench Option: 3 ACDelco ANI405A Heavy Duty Pneumatic Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Fraction of the price of competing impact wrenches
  • 5-speed design adds versatility 
  • Durable build quality 

What We Don’t Like

  • Lacks the power of higher-end impact wrenches

Specs

  • Torque: 500 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 8,000 RPM
  • Noise level: 97.7 decibels

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Ergonomics 4/5; Performance 3.3/5; Noise 3/5; Value 4.5/5 

The ½-inch ACDelco air impact wrench is a high-quality all-around tool that offers excellent value without much sacrifice. Its 500 ft-lbs of max torque is well below the top-performing impact wrenches on this list, but for most home mechanics, it’s more than sufficient. While we experienced a little hesitation when breaking the lug nuts on our truck free, the wrench still removed the lug nuts and did so fairly quickly. The torque output is not adjustable, but the speed adjusts via four settings that go to a maximum free speed of 8,000 RPM, giving some flexibility when working with different-size nuts

The ACDelco is noticeably louder than the other impact wrenches we tested, which is in line with its rating of 97.7 decibels. It’s heavier, too, weighing in at nearly a pound more than our top pick for this guide, though it is well balanced, and the handle does feel comfortable to hold. With its stainless-steel housing, this air impact wrench feels durable, but the steel housing does nick and scratch fairly easily. 

The ACDelco’s limited torque wouldn’t pass muster for most professional auto shops, but it’s certainly adequate for home mechanics working on their own vehicles. Moreover, its low cost puts it within reach of users who might not have considered owning an air impact wrench.

What our tester says: “While the ACDelco may not match other air impact wrenches in power, it’s hard not to like the performance it offers at a super low price.” —Tony Carrick, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the ACDelco air impact wrench at Amazon or Walmart.

Upgrade Pick

Ingersoll Rand 2235QTiMAX ½-Inch Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrench Option: Ingersoll Rand 22235QTiMAX Air Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Produces a tremendous amount of torque
  • Operates with very little vibration
  • Durably built yet surprisingly light

What We Don’t Like

  • Comes with a steep price tag
  • Hard plastic handle

Specs

  • Torque: 1,300 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 8,500 RPM
  • Noise level: 88.7 decibels

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Ergonomics 4/5; Performance 4/5; Noise 5/5; Value 4/5 

With a nut-busting torque rating of 1,300 ft-lbs and a standard rating of 900 ft-lbs, the ½-inch 2235QTiMAX air impact wrench from Ingersoll Rand is among the most powerful tools in its class. A four-stage power regulator provides excellent control, and the twin hammer action runs at 1,220 blows per minute (BPM). 

All of those impressive specs added up to outstanding performance in testing. The 2235QTiMAX spun off our lug nuts rapidly with little resistance. Despite all that power, this heavy-duty impact wrench operates smoothly with very little vibration, making it comfortable to use. We also liked the versatility of the torque adjustment dial, which works when both tightening and in reverse. This allowed us to slow down the tightening speed to avoid over-tightening while also dialing back the power after breaking free a lug nut to prevent spinning it off into the air. Our only gripe is with the lack of a rubber grip on the hard plastic handle.

The 2235QTiMAX is also built like a rock with a titanium case that’s impact- and chemical-resistant. It’s clearly a tool that is built for professional auto mechanics. Despite its sturdy build, it weighs just 4.6 pounds.

The Ingersoll Rand 2235QTiMAX is easily the most expensive impact wrench on our list, but it’s worth the splurge for those who spend most of their weekends working in their home auto shop or those who work on other people’s cars for a living. 

Get the Ingersoll Rand 2235QTiMAX air impact wrench at Amazon or Northern Tool + Equipment.

Best Compact

Aircat 1056-XL ½-Inch Nitrocat Compact Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrench Option: Aircat 1056-XL-1/2" Nitrocat Compact Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact design can fit into tight spaces
  • Surprisingly powerful considering small, lightweight build
  • Convenient power controls on the trigger

What We Don’t Like

  • Fair amount of vibration when using

Specs

  • Torque: 750 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 9,000 RPM
  • Noise level: 85 decibels

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Ergonomics 4/5; Performance 3.8/5; Noise 4/5; Value 5/5 

The Aircat 1056-XL’s compact lightweight design, surprising power, and affordable price tag make it a great choice for home auto mechanics. This impact wrench is the easiest to use of the five impact wrenches we tested thanks to its compact size. Its head measures just 4.25 inches front to back, it weighs only 2.5 pounds, and it has an ergonomic grip. This makes the 1056-XL easy to use with one hand in tight spaces, allowing access to bolts located deeper inside the engine bay. We also like the trigger-mounted power management switch, which makes it easy to adjust torque and speed without changing position or shifting the grip. 

Despite its small size, this Aircat has a high breakaway torque of 750 ft-lbs, which was plenty of power for removing lug nuts from our truck rims, though we did notice significantly more vibration with this impact wrench over beefier models. With a max speed of 9,000 RPM, we never felt like this was an impact wrench that would slow us down. The Aircat 1056-XL has a composite housing that gives it a solid, durable feel, even with its lighter overall weight. And at just 85 decibels, the Aircat 1056-XL air impact wrench is among the quietest tools on this list. Add to that an affordable price tag, and the Aircat 1056-XL is a great option for home mechanics or as a travel tool for mechanics on the go. 

Get the Aircat 1056-XL air impact wrench at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best for Home Mechanics

DeWalt DWMT70773L ½-Inch Drive Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrenches Options: DeWalt ½-Inch Drive Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Ergonomic handle with shock-absorbing rubber grip
  • Easy-access switch on the trigger
  • Great cost value
  • High breaking torque of 1,200 ft-lbs

What We Don’t Like

  • Noticeable vibration when operating
  • A little top-heavy

Specs

  • Torque: 650 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 7,500 RPM
  • Noise level: Unlisted 

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Ergonomics 4/5; Performance 4/5; Noise 4/5; Value 5/5 

The DeWalt ½-inch drive impact wrench provides both power and ease of use with its rugged, high-powered design and the ability to use with a one-handed grip. While the DeWalt operates at a lower speed and torque than some of the top-of-the-line models that cost twice as much, it does have a breaking max torque of 1,200 ft-lbs, which is more than enough to break even tougher lug nuts. It didn’t hesitate after repeated efforts to remove lug nuts during testing.

The DeWalt has more vibration than some of the pricier impact wrenches we tested, but it makes up for it with an ergonomic handle and shock-absorbing rubberized grip that makes it comfortable to hold. We also like the three variable-speed power settings that can be adjusted via the built-in power dial, and a direction switch that’s located at the trigger for easy access. The DeWalt also has a durable feel with a hard plastic housing and rubber bumpers on the sides that protect against scuffing or scraping. 

While the DeWalt’s lower torque output means it won’t find a place in many professional auto shops, its high breaking torque output makes it more than powerful enough for automotive maintenance at home. Plus, it costs hundreds of dollars less than those higher-end impact wrenches.

Get the DeWalt air impact wrench at Amazon or The Home Depot.

More Great Options

Along with the products we hands-on tested, we also recommend the following impact wrenches, which we selected based on extensive research and customer reviews. 

Best High Powered

Aircat 1150 ½-Inch Composite Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrench Option Aircat 1150 ½-Inch Composite Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Produces high amount of torque 
  • Quiet operation volume at just 86 decibels 
  • Lightweight, ergonomic option at just 4.5 pounds

What We Don’t Like

  • Longer head won’t fit into tight spaces

Specs

  • Torque: 900 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 9,000 RPM
  • Noise level: 86 decibels

With so many good tools around, it’s tough to pick the best air impact wrench for everyone’s power needs. However, the ½-inch Aircat 1150 is likely to appeal to most people, as it certainly offers impressive performance. 

The loosening torque of 1,295 ft-lbs should raise a few eyebrows as well as the standard operating torque at 900 ft-lbs with three-way adjustment. A twin hammer action works at 1,400 impacts per minute (IPM), and the free speed is 9,000 RPM; plus, at 4.5 pounds, this is not an unwieldy tool. It’s also among the quieter air impact wrenches at just 86 decibels. Plus, the ergonomic handle prevents any strain on the user’s wrists or hands.

Available as a stand-alone tool or with a number of extras, this model comes with three invaluable extensions to increase reach and versatility.

Get the Aircat 1150 air impact wrench at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best for Lug Nuts

Ingersoll Rand 232TGSL ½-Inch Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrench Option: Ingersoll Rand 232TGSL Super-Duty Air Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • High free speed of 10,000 RPM
  • Ample nut-busting torque 
  • Designed to look like NASCAR impact wrenches

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavy overall weight 
  • Very noisy at 105 decibels

Specs

  • Torque: 500 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 10,000 RPM
  • Noise level: 105.2 decibels

Lug-nut removal is one of the most common uses for air impact wrenches, and the ½-inch Ingersoll Rand 232TGSL air impact wrench is designed specifically for this purpose. While largely intended for professional use, it also makes a good addition to a home auto enthusiast’s tool kit.

NASCAR fans might recognize its design since it’s based on the racetrack version of the tool. The 232TGSL produces 625 ft-lbs of maximum reverse torque and 500 ft-lbs of forward torque, with a regulator for power adjustment. Its BPM is 1,250, and with a free speed of 10,000 RPM, it’s the fastest full-size air impact wrench currently available.

At 6 pounds, it’s a bit of a handful, and it’s quite loud at 105.2 decibels. Nevertheless, for those who remove lug nuts all day, the performance is hard to beat.


Get the Ingersoll Rand 232TGSL air impact wrench at Amazon or Tractor Supply Co.

Best Ergonomic

Campbell Hausfeld ½-Inch Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrenches Options: Campbell Hausfeld ½-Inch Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Well-balanced for ease of use
  • 3 power settings 
  • Ergonomic rubberized grip 

What We Don’t Like

  • Weighs over 5 pounds

Specs

  • Torque: 550 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 8000 RPM
  • Noise level: Unlisted

Campbell Hausfeld is perhaps better known for its high-performance compressors, but its ½-inch air impact wrench has plenty to offer the home auto enthusiast and DIY user. Although at 5.2 pounds it weighs more than some, it’s a well-balanced tool with a tough but comfortable rubberized grip and protective body armor.

This impact wrench’s working torque of 550 ft-lbs is plenty for the home user, with three power settings to maximize control. Its free speed is 8,000 RPM, and the hammer action produces 1,200 IPM.

Get the Campbell Hausfeld air impact wrench at Amazon or The Home Depot

Honorable Mention

Workpad ½-Inch Mini Air Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrench Option Workpad ½-Inch Mini Air Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Can fit into tight spaces 
  • Adjustable power settings prevent over-tightening 
  • Surprisingly powerful for its size 

What We Don’t Like

  • Not ideal for heavy-duty applications

Specs

  • Torque: 500 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 10,000 RPM
  • Noise level: 112 decibels

Although Workpad may not be a top brand name, its ½-inch air impact wrench has all the features offered by many of its rivals and may be all that many home users need.

Although it’s called a “mini” air impact wrench, the term applies to its compact size and is no reflection on performance. In fact, the power-to-weight ratio is excellent. A maximum of 500 ft-lbs of torque is available, and there’s a three-position regulator for easy adjustment. Free speed is 10,000 RPM.

The tool has a durable, corrosion-resistant aluminum body that keeps its weight down to 3.3 pounds. The only drawback is the noise; at 112 decibels, it’s louder than many.

Get the Workpad air impact wrench at Amazon

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose and Tested the Best Air Impact Wrenches

Testing Stats
Products tested 5
Time spent testing 6 hours
Tests performed2
Price range$50 to $350

When gathering our top picks for this guide, we looked at a range of brands to find suitable options across a variety of categories. All of our recommendations are from reputable manufacturers that produce robust tools with respectable power and are made from high-quality materials that can stand up to heavy use. 

Our list of recommendations ranges from 500 to 1,300 ft-lbs of torque output, with options to suit many shoppers’ needs. We also considered noise level, reviewing tools that produce a relatively quiet 85 decibels up to 105 decibels.

Of our nine selections, we hands-on tested five. Our testing involved using each impact wrench to remove large lug nuts on a Toyota Tundra with a 21mm-deep impact socket from a Neiko Drive Master ½” impact socket set, which we had previously tested as part of a guide covering the best socket sets. Each socket was tightened to 97 ft-lbs. We evaluated each impact wrench based on several factors, including how easy it was to break each lug nut loose and remove it, the amount of vibration produced by each impact wrench, and each model’s noise level. Finally, we considered each impact wrench’s weight, ergonomics, and build quality. 

What to Consider When Choosing an Air Impact Wrench

Most people’s mental image of an air impact wrench typically includes an auto mechanic attacking stubborn lug nuts. While that’s certainly a popular use for these air tools, they are versatile enough to tackle almost any hexagonal fixing. When shopping for an air impact wrench, consider the following technical features.

Torque 

Torque is rotational force: the energy required to loosen or tighten screws, nuts and bolts, and other fasteners. It is generated by using a screwdriver or a wrench to tighten screws and nuts.

An air impact wrench can generate far more torque than even the strongest person. The most powerful models in this guide produce well over 1,000 ft-lbs. However, when shopping for the best air impact wrench for specific needs, remember that it’s more important to have the right amount of torque rather than the maximum available. 

While users with heavy-duty needs might need the highest torque levels possible, any tool that generates 400 to 500 ft-lbs is sufficient for most users. The terms “nut busting” and “breakaway torque” are used frequently to indicate the maximum torque available for releasing difficult fixings. However, normal operating torque is lower. Depending on the intended use, it may be worth checking forward and reverse torque figures, as they often differ.

Rotation Speed and Impacts

Rotational speed, which appears in RPM on the label, is not the same as torque. Here it’s not about energy but about how quickly the socket spins. It’s an important consideration for those who work on multiple fixings, because it impacts how quickly they can be fastened or loosened. Manufacturers usually describe rotation speed as “free speed” or “no load speed,” which assumes no effort is required to turn the fixing. In the real world, even a small amount of mechanical friction reduces this speed. Nevertheless, knowing the speed is useful for comparison.

Air impact wrenches contain hammer mechanisms within the tool that jolt the socket to increase the effectiveness of the torque. Specifications are stated in impacts per minute (IPM) or, sometimes, blows per minute (BPM). A higher number generally means a more aggressive action, so if you’ll be regularly working with tough fixings, this is another area that warrants attention. That said, high IPM also means the tool vibrates more, which increases user fatigue. Twin hammer actions help balance vibration; while tools with twin hammers still vibrate, the effect is less severe.

Additional Features

  • Air demands: All air tools need a portable air compressor to supply sufficient air pressure and volume. Pressure is stated in pounds per square inch (PSI) and volume in standard cubic feet per minute (SCFM, or sometimes just CFM). Air impact wrenches don’t have particularly high-pressure needs, but CFM demands can be higher than other tools. Checking these demands is vital. Many otherwise very good home air compressors may not produce the required supply.
  • Weight and grip: Air impact wrenches come in a variety of sizes and materials. Weight can have a big impact on manageability and user fatigue, so while lighter tools usually cost more (because the materials are more expensive), it’s often money well spent. Users also need a good grip on the handle both for control and safety. Contoured and rubberized areas generally improve grip and ergonomics.
  • Noise levels: The hammer action generated by an air impact wrench is loud. While better manufacturers try to reduce noise, most tools still exceed current safety levels. Always wear ear protection while using an air impact wrench.
  • Sockets: ¼-inch drives exist on light-duty air impact wrenches, but most measure ⅜ inch or ½ inch. This measurement specifies the size of sockets needed. The sockets should be of good quality and marked as “impact ready” or something similar. Cheap socket sets are unlikely to stand up to the pounding they receive and can actually shatter under the force.

Tips for Using an Air Impact Wrench

Always be aware of the important practical and safety aspects of using these powerful tools.

A key component that may be overlooked is the compressor required to supply air. Take into account the necessary air supply specifications, but remember that optimal performance is achieved only if the compressor is properly maintained. While air impact wrenches require little maintenance, regular lubrication is vital. In both cases, always follow the manufacturer’s recommendations.

In addition:

  • Make sure the air hose is properly connected to the compressor and that the air supply to the air impact wrench is set at the correct pressure (PSI).
  • Although many air impact wrenches can be used with one hand, make certain to keep a good grip on the tool when loosening tight nuts and bolts. If the fixing breaks away suddenly, the torque reaction can make the tool jump and cause a nasty wrist sprain.
  • Be careful when tightening nuts and bolts. If the torque is too high, the power of the air impact wrench can easily strip threads. If the tool is adjustable, always start at low pressure, then increase it if the fixing is not tight enough.
  • Always wear some kind of ear protection. Even “quiet” air impact wrenches may still exceed the 80-decibel limit above which hearing damage can occur.

FAQs

The information provided here is a comprehensive overview of these tools and should help you find the best air impact wrench for your needs. We’ve backed the information with a host of real-world examples of the top tools available. However, a number of questions crop up frequently, so yours may be answered below.

Q. What does “impacts per minute” mean, and why is it important? 

Impacts per minute, also referred to as blows per minute, is how fast the tool’s internal hammer action works to help loosen tough fixings. However, as explained, it’s just one factor to consider.

Q. Are air impact wrenches adjustable?

The best air impact wrenches contain a “power regulator” (also called an “air pressure flow switch”) to adjust the air supply independently of the compressor. This effectively allows more precise control of torque. It’s sometimes referred to as speed control, though technically, that’s not an accurate term.

Q. Are electric impact wrenches as good as cordless models?

It depends on the task. The best cordless impact wrenches are less-powerful but convenient tools, particularly for light-duty tasks. However, some struggle with higher torque demands and their runtimes can be underwhelming. Corded impact guns often outcompete their cordless impact gun rivals. In many cases, although a battery impact wrench may be a good choice for a home garage or the job site, most automotive and engineering professionals choose an air tool, perhaps in part because a compressor is usually available.

Q. Is drive size an important feature?

Drive size describes the size of the socket that the impact wrench uses. Most measure either ⅜ inch or ½ inch. If you already own impact-compatible sockets, this is important. Adapters are available, but using one is not an ideal solution. If buying both an air impact wrench and sockets, a ½-inch drive model is generally the more powerful option.

Q. What size impact wrench do I need to remove lug nuts?

Removing lug nuts requires around 100 ft-lbs of torque, so it’s a good idea to have an impact wrench that offers at least 150 ft-lbs. While some electric impact tools might struggle to achieve this, most air impact wrenches can do so comfortably. Never put lug nuts back on with an air impact wrench, because you can easily overtighten them or strip the threads. Use a manual torque wrench to set them to the tightness recommended by the vehicle manufacturer.

Q. What is the optimum PSI required for an air impact wrench?

Each tool has its own demands. Pneumatic air wrenches need anywhere from 80 to 150 PSI, so it’s a figure that should be checked like air consumption.

Meet the Tester

Tony Carrick is a freelance writer specializing in home improvement, landscaping, technology, home security, and design. His articles have been featured on such sites as Popular Mechanics, Futurism, SFGate, Pro Tools Review, and more. Tony has conducted rigorous product testing on everything from power tools to home security systems to backyard grills. With each review, his goal is to help readers determine whether a product meets their needs and if it is or isn’t worth its price tag.

Additional research provided by Bob Beacham.

The post The Best Air Impact Wrenches of 2025 for Tough Jobs, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-16T06:02:55-05:00
<![CDATA[I Never Thought I Needed a Suction Lifter—But Once I Tried It—I Had to Have Another One]]>The post I Never Thought I Needed a Suction Lifter—But Once I Tried It—I Had to Have Another One appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/dewalt-grabo-tool-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427600Fri, 14 Feb 2025 11:38:59 -0500ReviewsDIYHand ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

I’ve never been able to carry a full sheet of drywall alone—until now. Even with a helper, it was always awkward. And plate glass? Let’s just say my wallet took a hit after a costly mishap. 

Rating: 4.5/5

Dewalt Grabo

DeWalt Grabo Lifter

The first time I saw a DeWalt Grabo, I was intrigued—but skeptical. I’d used glass suction cups before, and they only worked on perfectly smooth, impermeable surfaces.There was no way the Grabo could grip drywall or plywood, or so I thought. I was wrong. 

After loading a DeWalt PowerStack battery into the Grabo, I set it on my kitchen counter and pressed the suction button. Instantly, the rubber seal compressed, gripping the countertop like a vise. Within seconds, it was locked tight—and no matter how hard I yanked, it wouldn’t budge. That was impressive, but how would it fare on other flat surfaces? I headed outside to test. 

Over the next few weeks, I used the Grabo on virtually every hard flat surface I could find, including drywall panels, plywood, steel plates, and more. I discovered that the Grabo worked even on slightly porous surfaces like concrete pavers. It dawned on me that I’d been lifting things the hard way for years. 

That’s when I decided I needed another one—for large, two-person tasks, like carrying heavy marble or travertine slabs. I bought a second DeWalt Grabo Suction Lifter

So, how does it work? Pressing the suction button activates an internal vacuum that removes the air between the tool and the surface. A dense foam ring around the base compresses, forming a rock-solid seal. I could actually see the Grabo sink down as the suction kicked in. When the (negative) pressure between the tool and the surface reached about -12.1 PSI, the vacuum shut off, but the suction remained. 

On semi-porous materials, such as concrete pavers, the suction began to drop slowly after the vacuum shut off, but I could still lift and carry the items. When the suction dropped to around -8.4 PSI, the vacuum automatically kicked back on to increase the suction again. The time it takes for the suction to drop depends on the material being carried. When I tested the Grabo on a clean mirror, the suction barely dropped at all—not enough for the tool to kick back on. 

  • Dewalt Grabo Review hand placing on storage base
  • Dewalt Grabo Review inserting battery
  • Dewalt Grabo Review on large format tile
  • Dewalt Grabo Review sunshade screen cover
  • Dewalt Grabo Review woman holding two dewalt grabos
  • Dewalt Grabo Review using dewalt grabo on mirror
  • The Best New Power Tools Option DeWalt 20V MAX Grabo Lifter
  • Dewalt Grabo Review hand holding
  • Dewalt Grabo Review

One of my favorite features on the Grabo is its safety button, which prevents accidental activation. DeWalt added a tiny release lever next to the suction start button, which I had to push before I could fully press the start button to activate suction. It only took a few tries before I could do it by feel, but that extra step adds a simple and critical layer of safety.

Like any power tool, the Grabo Suction Lifter may need occasional maintenance. It comes with extra vacuum filters for the small intake holes on the base, and the dense foam seal is also replaceable. Most retailers sell this as a “tool only,” which means you’ll need to buy a separate battery if you don’t have other DeWalt 20V tools. But at $249.00, it’s well worth it for anyone who regularly lifts and hauls panels, glass, or other unwieldy items with smooth surfaces. 

Now, I can’t imagine lifting without it. 

Where to Buy the Dewalt Grabo:

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a contractor, product tester, and writer focusing primarily on construction, DIY tools, and home appliances.

The post I Never Thought I Needed a Suction Lifter—But Once I Tried It—I Had to Have Another One appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-14T11:38:59-05:00
<![CDATA[In Just 2 Months, This Tool Has Transformed My Workshop]]>The post In Just 2 Months, This Tool Has Transformed My Workshop appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/dewalt-planer-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=426556Thu, 13 Feb 2025 13:20:54 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

A couple of months ago I got the Dewalt 735 Planer to help expedite board prep for woodworking projects. I wanted the flexibility to use wood from a variety of sources, but flattening boards and matching thicknesses has never been my favorite part of a project. Sanded “project” lumber is prohibitively expensive and limited in scope. Hand planing is slow, and router planing requires a clunky jig. After years of workarounds, I finally splurged on the right tool for the job.

As a brand, DeWalt enjoys broad-based customer satisfaction across its array of power tool offerings, and I’ve had positive experiences with the DeWalt jobsite table saw and router I’ve been using the past few years. After initially testing it in combination with a Rikon 8-inch jointer, I’ve been using the 13-inch planer to clean up edge-glued panels, and for dimensioning a couple of log-to-lumber milling projects in my workshop. In this DeWalt planer review, I’ll share my observations after two months using the DeWalt DW735, including the pros and cons that I’ve experienced, and why I’m confident that I made the right choice.

Rating: 4.7/5

Best Benchtop Planer Option: DEWALT DW735 13-Inch Thickness Planer with Stand

DeWalt Planer DW735

DeWalt Planer DW735 Specs
Motor15-amp
CutterheadThree-knife, 10,000 RPM
Maximum width13 inches
Maximum thickness6 inches
Feed rateTwo-speed 196 CPI or 79 CPI

Testing the DeWalt Planer DW735 

DeWalt Planer action
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Store-bought lumber is milled within a fairly wide error-tolerance range that can leave woodworking projects looking rough unless you take the time to match the pieces. The usual way to match boards is by using a jointer to remove cupping and warping, which creates one flat face, then planing the other face down to a set thickness. Alternatively, both of these functions can be completed using only a planer with the help of a shop-built planing sled—an effective option for boards that are too wide for the jointer. The planer smooths the surface, but more importantly, it evens out the board thickness while also making it possible to match thicknesses from one board to the next. I’ve tested this planer both ways.

Over the past couple of months I’ve used the DeWalt 735 Planer with and without the jointer as project circumstances have dictated. I used it while preparing boards for glue-ups, and for final surfacing after gluing. When I wanted to make lumber from an oak log, I used a sled with the planer to flatten the surfaces, then matched thicknesses of the rough-cut boards. I’ve logged about 12 hours on the planer so far, which has been enough time to know that this is exactly the tool I was looking for and that I’m glad I fought the urge to buy a cheaper model. The heavy build and powerful motor give it ample stability and steady cutting power. The thickness selector makes it easy to avoid over-planing while precisely matching boards, and the finished pieces come out with very little snipe or chip-out.

What We LikeWhat We Don’t Like
Automatic carriage lockLarger than other bench planers, very heavy
Fan-assisted dust port with impellerRequires dust collection add-ons
Material removal gauge for quick set up
Heavy-duty height adjustment system

Helpful Features Boost Productivity and Minimize Mistakes

DeWalt Planer action 3
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

This model has been around long enough to become “exhibit A” when woodworkers need a point of reference with regard to thickness planers. It accepts workpieces up to 13 inches wide and 6 inches thick, and is capable of removing up to ⅛ inch layers per pass. Powered by a 15 amp motor, the cutter rotates at 10,000 revolutions per minute (RPM), while the two-speed rollers feed at either 14 or 26 feet per minute. The three-knife cutterhead extends production time between blade replacements up to 30 percent compared to 2-knife models. The two-speed gearbox allows the operator to choose either faster planing at 79 cuts per inch (CPI) or a smoother finish at 196 CPI. 

A few key features set DW735 apart from other planers on the market. First off, it weighs a hefty 92 pounds, which is up to 40 pounds heavier than other popular models. The extra weight hints at better-than-average durability, and more importantly the weight boosts working stability. Another unique feature that I haven’t seen anywhere else is the fan-assisted dust port. Unlike other planers that require an external dust collection vacuum to pull the chips away, this machine is equipped with an impeller and fan that grinds up the shavings and blows them out—all the way across the shop, if not attached to a collection bag.

One of the handiest features is the material removal gauge. It helps when setting up the first pass on a face-jointed rough board. I can place the board beneath the spring-loaded gauge and crank the carriage down until the gauge needle indicates the amount of material I want to remove, then turn on the motor and plane as normal. The planer also has several automatic thickness settings that, when selected, will prevent accidentally making the board too thin.

Hard to Lift, Easy to Operate

DeWalt Planer chip chute
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

I had minimal experience with thickness planers before I got the DeWalt DW735. I had borrowed one a couple of times, but was not proficient. I spent the evening after it arrived setting it up and reading the owner’s manual to make sure I wouldn’t break anything or get injured. Turns out, the biggest risk was that I might throw my back out trying to move it. I recommend getting a helper any time you need to pick this machine up. For shop use, a dedicated planer stand would be a smart addition.

It only took about 15 minutes to set up the planer and assemble the infeed and outfeed tables. I actually purchased the DW735X kit, which is the same machine as the DW735 but includes the infeed/outfeed tables, dust port adapter, and an extra set of knives. The unit is pretty much plug-and-play, but opting for the tool-only unit will require just a bit more setup.  

After adjusting the carriage height for my plank, I flipped the switch and sent the piece through. I decided to test the planer outdoors since I don’t have a dust collection system, and I’m glad I did. When I ran the first test piece through I was amazed to see the wood shavings blown up to 20 feet away. The noise level was much louder than I anticipated, so I put on a set of over-ear hearing protectors and kept working. I experimented with different removal thicknesses, tried out the material removal gauge, the thickness selector, and the different feed speeds on a pile of pine and hardwood scrap. Everything worked as expected and there was basically zero learning curve. 

Plenty of Cutting Power, Silky Smooth Finish, Consistently Accurate

DeWalt Planer automatic thickness control
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

So far I have used the DeWalt Planer DW735 on store-bought poplar and yellow pine lumber, blanks split from an oak log, and various cutoffs and reclaimed boards. I mostly work with pieces that are less than 4 feet long. It has delivered excellent results on everything I have fed it. Neither the feed rate nor the cutting speed seems to be affected by the hardness of the wood. Hardwood, softwood, fresh and sappy or old and dried boards, the finished faces always come out clean and smooth. Thickness accuracy has been pretty much perfect too, although it does produce a bit of snipe. 

Snipe is a ubiquitous issue with benchtop planers. The snipe section averages about 15 thousandths of an inch, measured with a digital caliper, and runs about 3 inches back from the board end. Raising the infeed-outfeed tables a bit has helped, but the best solution I found was to either run longer boards and cut off the snipe, or send a sacrificial board through just ahead of the good board.

The DW735 has a maximum planing depth of ⅛ inch. I usually plane no more than 1/16 inch at a time, often as little as 1/32 inch. The owner’s manual cautions against planing the maximum depth on 13-inch wide boards due to the strain it would place on the motor. In order to provide a full review, I did test the maximum depth on 8-inch-wide lumber. On the nearly flat surface, the full-depth cut seemed (audibly) to strain the motor some, but it did not affect the feed rate or the appearance of the finished surface.

Why I Think the DeWalt DW735 Planer Is Worth Every Penny

DeWalt Planer height crank
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

I am a firm believer in “buy it once, use it forever,” and the DeWalt DW735 feels like that kind of tool. Based on 2 months of fairly intensive hobby-level use, it has done everything I’ve needed exceedingly well. The blades have remained sharp, the cutter and carriage structure is perfectly sturdy and still exactly square with the feed table. The adjustment mechanisms are dead-on reliable. Just as importantly, it comes from a highly-regarded, time-tested brand that also has an excellent track record for product support. When I eventually need replacement blades, I don’t have to worry whether or not I’ll be able to get them. I think that the price is fair for that level of performance and peace of mind. 

Buy the DeWalt 735 Planer on:

Product Comparisons

DeWalt Planer DW735Grizzly Planer G0940Hercules Portable PlanerCraftsman Benchtop PlanerOliver Machinery 10045 Planer
Motor15-amp15-amp15-amp15-amp15-amp
CutterheadThree-knife, 10,000 RPM30-insert helical, 8,500 RPMThree-knife, 9,700 RPMTwo-knife, 8,000 RPM36-insert helical, 10,000 RPM
Maximum width13 inches13 inches12.5 inches12.25 inches13 inches
Maximum thickness6 inches6 inches6 inches6 inches6 inches
Feed rateTwo-speed 14 FPM or 26 FPM25 FPM25.3 FPM26.2 FPMTwo-speed 17 FPM or 26 FPM
Price$599.00$870.00$399.99$349.00$999.99

So, is the DeWalt Planer DW735 right for you?

DeWalt Planer infeed
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

A power planer can be a big help in the wood shop. Flattening and choosing custom-thickness for rough-cut boards is far less expensive than buying sanded-four-sides (S4S) project lumber at a retail store. Your shop-planed boards will be more consistent than those at the store, and it gives the option to use wood from other sources, like local sawmills or your own logs. A planer also allows for flattening multiple-board panels after gluing them together.

Not every workshop needs a thickness planer. Other workarounds can suffice until buying one is necessary or fits into the budget. If it’s time to buy a benchtop planer, the DeWalt 735 is one of the best options available. The DW735 is not the cheapest or most expensive option, but it offers outstanding performance for the price, and is backed by a support network that offers replacement knives and other parts and accessories to keep it in top condition. You’ll get the best value from the DW735X kit, which includes the infeed/outfeed tables, or for the smoothest possible finish and extra-long cutter life, it is available with the Byrd Tools Shelix upgrade cutterhead pre-installed.

Meet the Tester

Mark Wolfe is a writer, product tester and serial DIYer who lives in an older home. When he isn’t writing, he spends his time upgrading, repairing, and replacing anything and everything in his home, yard, and garden. He tests and writes reviews about hand and power tools, lawn care and home repair products, and outdoor living goods.

The post In Just 2 Months, This Tool Has Transformed My Workshop appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-13T13:20:54-05:00
<![CDATA[We Tested 2025’s Best Single-Stage Snow Blowers and Found 9 Top Models You Can Rely On]]>The best single-stage snow blower is made for clearing lighter snow or flat surfaces. We put the top picks to the test; see our results here.

The post We Tested 2025’s Best Single-Stage Snow Blowers and Found 9 Top Models You Can Rely On appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-single-stage-snow-blower/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=155705Mon, 10 Feb 2025 18:37:23 -0500ReviewsDIYDriveways & WalkwaysExteriorToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Single-stage snow blowers are compact and lightweight, offering an affordable and highly maneuverable alternative to full-size machines while still eliminating the back-breaking work of shoveling. But when gas, cordless, and corded options can cost between $100 and $1000, it’s hard to know how much you need to spend to get a model you can rely on. That’s why we researched dozens of popular options before testing nine you can trust to clear your driveways and walkways.

After using these tools in a variety of snowy conditions and reaching out to an expert for their opinions, we selected the Snow Joe 24V-X2-SB18 48V Ionmax Snow Blower as our best overall electric model and the Troy-Bilt Squall 208E 21″ Snow Blower as the top gas option. Both machines offer consistent performance and impressive clearing abilities. By reading through the pros and cons of the snow blowers on our list and familiarizing yourself with the features of these machines that matter most, you will be well positioned to choose one of the best single-stage snow blowers for your property.

  1. BEST OVERALL ELECTRIC: Snow Joe 24V-X2-SB18 48V Ionmax Snow Blower
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST OVERALL GAS: Troy-Bilt Squall 208E 21″ Snow Blower
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Greenworks 13-Amp 20″ Corded Snow Thrower
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. UPGRADE PICK: Ego Power+ Peak Power 21″ Snow Blower
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST LIGHT-DUTY: Wen 5664 Snow Blaster 18″ Electric Snow Thrower
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST MEDIUM-DUTY: DeWalt 21″ 60V MAX Single-Stage Snow Blower Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Ryobi 40V HP Brushless 21″ Whisper Snow Blower
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. BEST SELF-PROPELLED: Toro Power Clear 721 E 21″ Gas Snow Blower
    ↓ Jump to Review
  9. BEST BATTERY LIFE: Greenworks 60V 22″ Single-Stage Snow Blower
    ↓ Jump to Review
A close-up photo of single stage snow blower after use with snow on it
Photo: Zach Lazzari for Bob Vila

Before You Buy a Single-Stage Snow Blower

Compared to traditional two-stage machines, single-stage snow blowers are lighter, more mobile, and better suited to light- to moderate-duty jobs. For folks who regularly get severe storms with several feet of heavy snow at a time, these machines might be underpowered. 

However, if you’re looking for a good snow blower that can clear smaller amounts of snow on average-size driveways and walkways, a single-stage model will be a relatively cheap snow blower that still offers plenty of convenience power. 

Single-Stage Snow Blowers Comparison Chart

Product NameTypeWeightClearing Width
Snow Joe 24V-X2-SB18 48V Ionmax Snow BlowerCordless electric37.5 pounds18 inches
Troy-Bilt Squall 208E 21″ Snow BlowerGas100 pounds21 inches
Greenworks 13-Amp 20″ Corded Snow ThrowerCordless electric50.6 pounds21 inches
Ego Power+ Peak Power 21″ Snow BlowerCorded electric32 pounds18 inches
Wen 5664 Snow Blaster 18″ Electric Snow ThrowerCordless electric59 pounds21 inches
DeWalt 21″ 60V MAX Single-Stage Snow Blower KitCordless electric52 pounds21 inches
Ryobi 40V HP Brushless 21″ Whisper Snow BlowerGas84 pounds21 inches
Toro Power Clear 721 E 21″ Gas Snow BlowerCordless electric65.5 pounds22 inches
Greenworks 60V 22″ Single-Stage Snow BlowerCorded electric32 pounds20 inches

Our Top Picks

Just ahead are some of the best single-stage snow blowers in a variety of categories, all tested in tough conditions. Each of these snow blowers are capable of clearing driveways and sidewalks after moderate snow events.

Best Overall Electric

Snow Joe 24V-X2-SB18 48V Ionmax Snow Blower

 The Best Single Stage Snow Thrower Option: Snow Joe 24V-X2-SB18 48V Ionmax Snow Blower
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Two 24-volt batteries; 40 minutes of runtime each
  • Quadruple-bladed steel auger cuts 10 inches deep
  • Moves up to 10 tons of snow per charge
  • 180-degree adjustable snow chute

What We Don’t Like

  • Plastic blade can chip on hard gravel or debris

Specs

  • Type Cordless electric
  • Weight 37.5 pounds
  • Clearing width 18 inches

This Bob Vila Approved product carries our brand’s highest level of recommendation.

Bob Vila Approved badge

Bob Vila Approved recognizes the household and DIY products that impressed us most in our real-world testing and that exemplify core values of the Bob Vila brand, including craftsmanship, innovation, and value for the dollar. Winners of this designation come recommended by our professional review team and are personally approved by Bob Vila.

This battery-powered snow blower from Snow Joe is made to rival the power of a standard two-stage snow blower. Equipped with two rechargeable 24-volt (V) batteries, it offers up to 80 minutes of runtime and can throw up to 10 tons of snow per charge. Its 18-inch auger is rubber tipped, can cut a 10-inch-deep path, and works noticeably faster than other models. In some instances, it also threw snow farther than the 20-foot mark claimed by the manufacturer.

We chose this Snow Joe cordless snow blower as the best electric snow blower because it’s very functional, moderately priced, and a solid, consistent performer in a variety of conditions. At a relatively light weight of 37.5 pounds, it’s plenty easy to push around and manage. It also has a nice set of LED headlights to increase visibility in dark conditions. 

Shoppers seeking an economical single-stage snow blower with plenty of power, simple operational features, and great performance won’t be disappointed.

What our tester says: “We were so impressed by how quickly the batteries on this Snow Joe charged. But they also lasted long enough for us to make it through full snow-clearing sessions during testing, which is a big part of why this model was a clear favorite.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer

Read our full review: Snow Joe 24V-X2-SB18 48V Ionmax Snow Blower

Get the Snow Joe single-stage snow blower at Amazon (with cover and scraper), Walmart, Best Buy, or Blain’s Farm & Fleet.

Best Overall Gas

Troy-Bilt Squall 208E 21" Snow Blower

 The Best Single-Stage Snow Blower Option: Troy-Bilt Squall 208E 21-Inch Snow Blower
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Easy to start, runs efficiently, and is impressively quiet
  • Auger throws snow with remarkable force
  • Fairly affordable for a high-quality gas-powered snow blower

What We Don’t Like

  • Wheels may be too small for deep snow

Specs

  • Type Gas
  • Weight 100 pounds
  • Clearing width 21 inches

The Squall is a smooth-running unit with an efficient 208 cubic centimeter (cc) 4-stroke engine, meaning it doesn’t require users to mix oil and gas as with a 2-stroke machine. Its user-friendly design features an easily accessible gas-fill neck and an oil fill that doesn’t require any manipulation of the machine or leveling. The unit’s electric start performed flawlessly, repeatedly firing up on the first push.

During testing, we really appreciated how quiet the engine ran and how easy it was to push this snow blower around, especially considering how loud and heavy gas models can be. We were impressed with the auger’s ability to virtually vacuum up snow before projecting it through the chute at high speeds. While its standard-size half-gallon fuel tank may seem small, the machine’s efficiency allowed us to clear multiple properties without needing to refill. The 100-pound machine pushed along easily, even though its wheels are smaller than is ideal for deep snow. Overall, however, this gas snow blower is perfect for moderate storms and snow loads under 12 inches. 

What our tester says: “We tested several gas models that performed exceptionally well, so assigning this award wasn’t easy. Ultimately, the Troy-Bilt Squall took the top prize, but we think shoppers will also want to take a hard look at the Toro self-propelled model. Both snow blower brands excel in the gas snow blower design with reliable engines and smooth functionality.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Troy-Bilt single-stage snow blower at The Home Depot, Walmart, or Northern Tool + Equipment

Best Bang For The Buck

Greenworks 13-Amp 20" Corded Snow Thrower

 The Best Single-Stage Snow Blower Option: Greenworks 13-Amp 20-Inch Corded Snow Thrower
Photo: Walmart

What We Like

  • Clears a 20-inch swath of snow with each pass
  • Discharge chute throws snow up to 20 feet
  • Rubber auger blades don’t damage pavement
  • Attractive and affordable price point

What We Don’t Like

  • Corded operation can be inconvenient
  • Requires an extension cord, which is not included

Specs

  • Type Corded electric
  • Weight 32 pounds
  • Clearing width 20 inches

At just 32 pounds, this corded electric Greenworks 20-inch snow thrower is almost a mini snow blower, yet our tests proved it’s powerful enough for clearing snow up to 12 inches deep on small driveways, walkways, and decks. Though the manufacturer doesn’t advise operating it in heavy snow, we did try to tackle some deeper snow and found the ramping-up technique quite effective. The unit put out consistent power without requiring us to stop and recharge a battery. Of course, that meant we always had to be within access to an outlet, which generally involved using an outdoor-rated extension cord we had on hand.

While this model does have a clip that helps secure its cord to prevent it from accidentally unplugging, it was sometimes still challenging to wrangle the long cord in areas with multiple obstacles. Still, there’s a lot to like about using this unit to remove snow: its push-button start is convenient, and controlling the chute is simple via a lever located just below the handle. Although our model did not include LED lights, Greenworks makes a version with the option, which would make nighttime snow removal much easier.

Get the Greenworks 20-inch single-stage snow blower at Walmart.

Upgrade Pick

Ego Power+ Peak Power 21" Snow Blower

 The Best Single-Stage Snow Blowers Option: Ego Power+ SNT2112 Peak Power Snow Blower
Photo: Amazon

What We Don’t Like

  • Large wheels make it easy to push
  • Throws snow up to 40 feet for clearing large driveways
  • Handles can fold for easy storage
  • Extended battery life provides plenty of working time

What We Like

  • Can be challenging to push up hills

Specs

  • Type Cordless electric
  • Weight 50.6 pounds
  • Clearing width 21 inches

For those looking to invest in a machine with some unique features, the Ego Power+ cordless snow blower could be just the ticket. This model can throw snow up to 40 feet, far exceeding many single-stage units. That impressive distance, along with the adjustable discharge chute and steel auger, makes plowing large snow piles easy—even in icy conditions.

This Ego snow blower features a 21-inch capacity, which is a bit larger than most comparable models. It comes with two 56-volt 5.0 amp hour (Ah) batteries that can power the brushless motor long enough to clear snow off a 12-car driveway. The adjustable throttle also allows the user to regulate the power and battery as needed. This unit even has a folding handle with quick-release levers that make it easy to store. The only downside to this Ego is that it is on the heavier side, but the extended battery life is definitely a plus that cannot be ignored. 

What our tester says: “During testing, this model performed exceedingly well. It was easy to operate and push, even over less-than-smooth terrain. We also enjoyed the folding handle with quick-release levers, as it made storing this model a breeze.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Read our full review: Ego Power+ Peak Power 21″ Snow Blower

Get the Ego Power+ single-stage snow blower at AmazonLowe’s, Ace Hardware, or Walmart.

Best Light-Duty

Wen 5664 Snow Blaster 18" Electric Snow Thrower

 The Best Single Stage Snow Thrower Option: Wen 5664 Snow Blaster 18 Electric Snow Thrower
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Lightweight, portable snow blower
  • 13.5-amp motor clears snow up to 7.8 inches deep
  • Can move up to 490 pounds of snow per minute

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires some assembly and an extension cord
  • Not designed for deep snow removal

Specs

  • Type Corded electric
  • Weight 32 pounds
  • Clearing width 18 inches

This 13.5-amp electric blower by Wen is a lightweight, 32-pound machine designed for use in small areas. It can clear an 18-inch swath of light to medium snow accumulation up to 7.8 inches deep and features a 180-degree rotating chute that’s easy to adjust with minimal effort. Despite its compact and simple design, we found it to be a powerful and effective tool for removing light snowfall as well as wet snow (if we gave it a little extra push). 

This Wen requires a cord to function, so it’s best in areas with convenient access to electricity—we found it most useful on our front steps and deck. The plastic auger worked surprisingly fast, and the throwing distance was more than ample for those spaces. We also liked that this unit has a folding handle that makes it easy to transport and store. 

Get the Wen single-stage snow blower at Amazon or Wen.

Best Medium-Duty

DeWalt 21" 60V MAX Single-Stage Snow Blower Kit

 The Best Single-Stage Snow Blower Option: DeWalt 21-Inch 60V MAX Single-Stage Snow Blower Kit
Photo: Ace Hardware

What We Like

  • Impressive 21-inch clearing path
  • Steel auger is tough enough for hard, icy snow
  • Electric controls enable quick throwing-direction changes

What We Don’t Like

  • Auger angle control requires manual adjustment

Specs

  • Type Cordless electric
  • Weight 59 pounds
  • Clearing width 21 inches

With this medium-duty model, DeWalt introduces some great features into the electric snow blower market. It’s one of the few single-stage options available that has a steel auger, making it great for chopping through ice and wet snow. It also offers an impressive 21-inch width so users can process more snow in less time, and its batteries provide about 40 minutes of continuous runtime. 

During testing, the DeWalt worked through light snow with no resistance, and once conditions iced up, it continued to do really well. We had to use a bit more effort as the snow got heavier, but the auger was more than capable and still threw snow reasonably far. We were also impressed by how easy it was to change throwing directions via this machine’s electric tab-style buttons. If you need a snow blower that’s a bit more powerful than a light-duty model but not as heavy-duty as a two-stage machine, the DeWalt is a great choice.

Get the DeWalt single-stage snow blower at Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware or The Home Depot.

Best Heavy-Duty

Ryobi 40V HP Brushless 21" Whisper Snow Blower

 The Best Single-Stage Snow Blower Option: Ryobi 40V HP Brushless 21-Inch Whisper Snow Blower
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • 21-inch clearing width and 13-inch clearing depth
  • Variable-speed auger throws snow more than 35 feet
  • Whisper-quiet operation and LED light bar
  • Handle-mount controls are comfortable and easy to use

What We Don’t Like

  • Not a self-propelled option
  • Plastic tires aren’t as durable as rubber ones

Specs

  • Type Cordless electric
  • Weight 52 pounds
  • Clearing width 21 inches

With its multiple batteries and 40 minutes of runtime, this Ryobi snow blower boasts plenty of long-lasting power and excellent snow-blowing capabilities. The 40V brushless single-stage unit comes with a push-button start, a variable-speed rubber-metal auger (the center shaft of the auger is metal while the blades are rubber), and handle-mount control for an overall ergonomic design. 

This Ryobi has a 21-inch clearing width, a 13-inch clearing depth, and a 1.4-watt LED light bar. It comes with dual 7.5Ah batteries as well as a charger. Want more? It also has whisper-quiet operation (purportedly 84 percent quieter than other snow blowers) and launches snow over 35 feet. 

During testing in a huge storm event in the Sierra Nevada mountains, this model really stood out. The batteries charged quickly, and it was capable of churning through heavy snow with minimal force. The charging port does only accept one battery at a time, but for most users, this is still a high-performance machine that will get the job done.

Get the Ryobi single-stage snow blower at The Home Depot

Best Self-Propelled

Toro Power Clear 721 E 21" Gas Snow Blower

 The Best Single-Stage Snow Blower Option: Toro Power Clear 721 E 21-Inch Gas Snow Blower
Photo: Tractor Supply

What We Like

  • Self-propelled 212cc 4-cycle overhead valve engine
  • Throws snow up to 35 feet
  • 210-degree chute features a locking deflector
  • Folds for compact storage

What We Don’t Like

  • For use on paved surfaces only
  • Heavy compared to similar models

Specs

  • Type Gas
  • Weight 84 pounds
  • Clearing width 21 inches

Those wanting to quickly remove snow without having to push a heavy snow-removal tool can rely on the Toro Power Clear 721 E. This self-propelled snow blower has an electric start and comes with Curve Technology that easily shreds through snow. Its auger is durable and strong, making this unit a candidate for pushing the limits of single-stage capabilities. The locking deflector on the 210-degree chute allows users to direct where the snow goes after it has been picked up. 

This Toro nearly snagged the best overall gas model, and it’s certainly one of the best and most powerful single-stage snow blowers we tested. The gas motor is powerful, efficient, and even relatively quiet. Though it’s not on par with electric models for reduced noise, the trade-off is that users won’t even need to wait for this machine to recharge. The fact that the Toro is self-propelled is a major bonus, as this will save users the effort of pushing through difficult snow. The only downside is that changing chute angles and throwing directions is done manually. It’s a quick process, but there are no controls within reach of the handle area. 

Get the Toro 721 E single-stage snow blower at Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot.

Best Battery Life

Greenworks 60V 22" Single-Stage Snow Blower

 The Best Single-Stage Snow Blower Option: Greenworks 60V 22-Inch Single-Stage Snow Blower
Photo: Tractor Supply Co.

What We Like

  • 2 powerful 5.0Ah batteries and a dual port charger
  • Runs for up to 60 minutes; recharges in about 45
  • Folding handle enables easy transport and storage
  • LED headlights enhance visibility during heavy storms

What We Don’t Like

  • Not self-propelled

Specs

  • Type Cordless electric
  • Weight 65.5 pounds
  • Clearing width 22 inches

While battery-powered tools offer the convenience of cordless operation and minimal maintenance requirements, the compromise in power and runtime can make them impractical. Not so with this snow blower from Greenworks. The 60-volt, 22-inch model doesn’t look especially beefy, but its two 5.0Ah batteries really pack a punch. They deliver exceptional power and longer runtimes so users can work up to an hour to get big jobs done.

It’s hard to overstate the benefits of more battery power. We found the battery life to be a huge bonus during bigger storms and when the neighbors needed a hand with snow removal. The dual charging port also offers simultaneous or alternate charging for near-continuous use. 

Outside of the batteries, this unit also performed as well as any of those tested. It has great auger speed and throwing distance as it zipped right along, clearing a wide 22-inch path. It’s not self-propelled, but otherwise, we had zero complaints about the quality of this machine.

Get the Greenworks 22-inch single-stage snow blower at Tractor Supply Co. or Walmart

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Single-Stage Snow Blowers

We tested a range of electric and gas single-stage snow blowers in a series of Montana and Sierra Nevada storms. We evaluated each unit’s ease of assembly and functionality on concrete as well as light gravel, if applicable. We looked at overall performance, auger quality and speed, snow-throwing distance, battery life, and build quality. 

Since the storms during our tests delivered everything from a few inches of powder to a foot of heavy snow alongside temperatures as low as -10 degrees Fahrenheit, we got a great idea of how well these machines’ batteries and gas motors could hold up in difficult conditions. After rating each unit based on the above factors, we assigned awards to worthy models. 

What to Consider When Choosing a Single-Stage Snow Blower

According to Wes Bollingmo, Channel & Product Support Manager at Toro, one of the most important things to consider when choosing a snow blower is its type, and that doesn’t mean gas or electric. Wes says, “While fuel types do matter in the buying process, it’s much more important to ensure you have the proper type of snow blower: single-stage, in-line two-stage, or two-stage.” After that, you can look into things like power source, clearing width and depth, ease of use, and additional features.

Type/Power Source

The best snow blowers come in corded electric, battery-powered, and gas-powered varieties. 

  • Electric snow blowers are typically designed to clear light snow up to about 8 inches deep. They must be plugged into an outlet with an extension cord, limiting their performance slightly and making them best for minimal snowfall levels and relatively short sidewalks and driveways. Since they’re lightweight enough to lift and move, they’re also handy for clearing snow from decks and steps.
  • Cordless snow blowers are convenient battery-powered machines ideal for light to medium snowfall and spaces that can be cleared in 30 to 40 minutes. To extend this runtime, some models come with a spare battery that users can swap in if needed. Generally speaking, single-stage cordless models are lighter and more compact than gas units. 
  • Gas-powered snow blowers boast more power than electric and battery blowers and don’t restrict their operators to the length of an extension cord. They can clear away deep and heavy snow all along the driveway and then continue down the sidewalk and clear the neighbor’s drive as well. They’re generally more expensive and louder tools and also require more snow blower maintenance to stay operational across seasons.

Toro’s Wes Bollingmo does point out, however, that the power difference between gas and electric machines is becoming less substantial over time. “Thanks to recent technological advances, today’s battery-powered snow blowers offer performance comparable to gas models, making fuel type less of a deciding factor than in years past,” he says. Still, since power source can impact ease of use, it remains a relevant consideration.  

Weight

Weight plays a significant role in how easy it is to push or turn a snow blower. Though a large snow blower can clear a driveway in fewer passes than a small snow blower, bigger machines are harder to maneuver.

Most single-stage gas snow blowers weigh at least 80 to 100 pounds, while corded and cordless blowers weigh closer to 30 to 60 pounds. Those needing something lighter may want to consider a handheld snow blower, snow thrower, or electric shovel snow blower

Clearing Width and Depth

Before choosing the best single-stage snow blower, it’s important to consider the width and depth of snow the machine can clear with each pass. Most single-stage machines can clear paths between 15 and 22 inches wide—and the wider the path, the faster you’re finished. 

Intake height determines the depth of snow each tool can remove with each pass, and most single-stage snow blowers have an intake depth between 7 and 12 inches. A good rule of thumb is to choose a snow blower with an intake depth 2 inches higher than your area’s average snowfall. 

Wheels, Tracks, and Terrain Type

Wheeled snow blowers feature two large rear wheels that drive the machine forward, while tracked models have tracks similar to those found on a military tank. 

  • Tracked snow blowers provide significantly better traction in the snow, making them better able to climb steep slopes without slipping backward. Most tracked models are two- or three-stage snow blowers, as single-stage models typically don’t produce enough power to drive the tracks. They also operate more closely to the surface, leaving a thinner layer of snow and ice on a driveway or sidewalk than wheeled models. 
  • Wheeled snow blowers are easier to turn since tracked models don’t pivot. Wheel sizes for single-stage snow blowers range from 6 to 8 inches. Larger wheels perform better in deeper snow, while smaller wheels are easier to maneuver. While wheeled blowers are generally faster than tracked models, some higher-end tracked blowers offer faster speed and turn-on-a-dime technology that makes them comparable in speed and maneuverability. 

Terrain type will influence which of these design options is best for a specific user. Paved surfaces, such as driveways and sidewalks, are best suited for wheeled snow blowers. Tracked snow blowers are better suited for unpaved surfaces. Grade also has a significant impact; steep driveways require a snow blower with good traction and enough power to pull it up a snow-covered slope.

Speed Control

Speed control in a snow blower can refer to both the speed at which you can move the machine as well as the speed of the auger. Gas snow blowers can be quite heavy, so many shoppers prefer self-propelled models to make pushing them faster and easier. Battery-powered blowers are generally lighter and feature digital drive systems that help optimize output without unnecessary effort.

Blowers with variable-speed augers can be useful for adapting to different types of snow. If the snowfall is nice and light, increasing the speed at which the snow is scooped and thrown through the chute will make it easier to move the machine. For heavy, packed snow, you will need to slow the blower to give the machine time to discharge it without clogging. 

Chute Control

The chute, a curved, hollow tube that extends from the back of the intake on a snow blower, provides a route for the snow to be thrown from the machine. On most blowers, a manual crank or lever lets users change the angle and direction of the snow being displaced. 

Premium snow blowers, however, have auto-rotating chutes that users turn by pushing a button near the handle, which doesn’t require the machine to be stopped. The angle on some chutes also can be changed to allow the snow blower to throw snow even further.

Additional Features

Single-stage snow blowers often boast some extra features to improve ease of use. 

  • Electric start is a useful feature for gas snow blowers. This typically involves a push-button ignition that replaces the standard pull start and choke.
  • Heated handles may seem luxurious, but personal safety is an important part of working outdoors in freezing temperatures. The heat generated by the handles helps keep the user’s fingers warm in the cold air and makes it easier to hold and control the snow blower.
  • Drift cutters help clear deep drifts of snow. The cutter’s metal housing collects and pushes snow down into the auger for removal.
  • Headlights make it easier and safer to clear snow at night or in dim lighting.
  • Automatic safety shutoffs turn off the snow blower when the user releases the handle.

We asked Corey Welch, founder and CEO of Mow & Snow, an on-demand snow removal and lawn care company in Canada, which of these features he appreciates most on a snow blower. He said, “Headlights are a game-changer for early mornings or late evenings, and heated handles are a luxury that keeps your hands from freezing during long jobs.” Anyone looking to increase comfort and ease of use will want to look for a model with these features.

FAQs 

If you still have questions about single-stage snow blowers, we suggest you refer to the answers to common FAQs below before putting on your work boots and heading outside. 

Q. What’s the difference between single-stage and two-stage snow blowers?

The biggest difference between a single-stage vs. a two-stage snow blower is power. Most single-stage snow blowers can handle a maximum of 7 to 12 inches of snow, whereas two-stage snow blowers can tackle up to 2 feet. The “stage” term refers to how each blower removes snow. 

A single-stage snow blower has an auger that both gathers and blows away the snow. A two-stage snow blower, in comparison, has an auger that sucks up the snow and an impeller that launches it into the air. In addition to being able to remove deeper snow, two-stage snow blowers also have larger intakes that range in width from 20 to 36 inches. 

Q. What size cord is suitable for a single-stage electric snow blower?

The length of the extension cord depends on the gauge of the power cable. A 12-gauge cord will work up to 100 feet, while a slimmer 14-gauge cord only extends about 50 feet.

Q. How do I start a single-stage snow blower in the cold season?

Getting a snow blower started depends on its power source. Keep these tips in mind for electric and gas-powered machines: 
Corded electric: Plug the unit into an outlet and press the start button. These models take their power from an AC power source, so there are no issues with low-temperature start-ups. 
Cordless electric: Some electric snow blowers will not start if the battery is too cold. It’s a good idea to store lithium-ion batteries at room temperature to prevent this issue. 
Gas-powered: Gas snow blowers with a pull-start motor may be challenging to start in low temperatures. Make sure to use lightweight motor oil, such as 5W-30, which is designed to operate at low temperatures. 

Q. How do I change the fuel filter on a single-stage snow blower?

Periodically changing the fuel filter ensures contaminants won’t find their way inside the engine and negatively impact performance. The fuel filter is usually located between the fuel pump and fuel tank. 
Change the filter by removing the two hoses that connect to it, making sure to keep the hoses pointing upward to prevent fuel from leaking out of the tank. Install the new filter by attaching the hoses to the line leading from the fuel tank and the line leading to the engine.

Q. What fuel does a single-stage snow blower use?

A single-stage snow blower might use gas, corded electricity, or a battery as its fuel.

Q. Are single-stage snow blowers any good?

Yes, single-stage snow blowers are good, though they aren’t right for everyone. If you live in an area with light to medium amounts of snowfall and don’t have an especially large property, a single-stage snow blower can provide effective performance and affordability.

Q. Can you use a single-stage snow blower on grass?

The augers on single-stage snow blowers are designed to clear snow down to the ground, so using them on grass is not recommended. They may damage your lawn or even pick up debris that can damage your machine.

Meet the Testers

Zach Lazzari is a freelance writer splitting time between the great outdoors, travel, and DIY projects ranging from camper builds to home renovations and maintenance. His home base in Montana is the perfect testing grounds for winter products and snow equipment. With over a decade of professional writing experience, he also covers a variety of other projects and maintenance topics for Bobvila.com.

Tom Scalisi is a full-time DIY and construction writer for many of the largest websites in the industry, including BobVila.com, This Old House, Family Handyman, and Forbes. He also owns and operates a pest control blog called RiddaBugs.com.

Additional research provided by Tony Carrick.

The post We Tested 2025’s Best Single-Stage Snow Blowers and Found 9 Top Models You Can Rely On appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-10T18:37:23-05:00
<![CDATA[These New Carving Knives Have Earned a Spot in My Arsenal of Tools]]>The post These New Carving Knives Have Earned a Spot in My Arsenal of Tools appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/flexcut-knives-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=425947Fri, 07 Feb 2025 11:26:17 -0500ReviewsHand ToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

One of the risks that accompanies any hobby is the temptation to buy shiny new gear, and with wood carving, that means knives. I started whittling with a cheap pocket knife when I was 10 years old. That knife was sufficient for turning big sticks into little sticks, but as my skills improved, I learned about real wood carving knives, with their small fixed blades and large comfortable handles. Trying one for the first time was a revelation. My hands didn’t hurt after 20 minutes and I was able to add details that were previously almost impossible. 

Flexcut has spent the past few years designing its Pro Series of wood carving knives that fed my temptation by promising even better control, precision, and comfort. I got the 3-piece Pro Set that includes a 1 ⅝-inch carving knife, 1 ⅜-inch detail knife, and 1-inch chip carving knife. I’ve been using them for a couple of months now, and while I’m not ready to give up my old whittling knives, I really like the new features.

Our Rating: 4.5/5

Flexcut knives review

Flexcut Pro Series 3-Piece Pro Set

Pro Series knives use the same durable heat treated 1095 spring steel blade material that the brand has been using for years, but with a true flat grind blade and an open space between the heel of the blade and the choil. No need to break out the knife sharpener. These were razor sharp, mirror polished, and ready to work right out of the package. The steel held its edge in all types of wood like earlier models, but the redesign makes the blades lighter without sacrificing strength, and they were easier to strop than traditional Scandi-ground blades. 

The handles got a makeover too. The unvarnished cherrywood handles are straighter at the butt and feature flat sidewalls, subtly angled corners,  and a slight downward curve toward the blade spine. They feel good. I don’t miss the tapered and curved butt end on older models, and my big hands don’t tire or get sore after a couple of hours whittling hardwood.

Flexcut Pro knives are really great, but sometimes I prefer working with a narrower point or a curved edge, neither of which is available in the Pro Series, and let’s face it, old habits are hard to break. For no-particular-reason I sometimes feel like using a particular knife, even though it may not be technically the “best” tool for the job. I am happily adding the Pro Series into my whittling rotation, and I know I’ll use them often. Time will tell if one of them becomes my next habit.

  • Flexcut knives review Flexcut Pro 3-Piece Pro Set
  • Flexcut knives review Flexcut Pro 3-Piece Pro Set
  • Flexcut knives review Flexcut Pro handle (right) typical wood carving knife handle (left)
  • Flexcut knives review Flexcut Pro wood carving knife action
  • Flexcut knives review Flexcut Pro wood carving knife in hand

Where to Buy the Flexcut Pro Series Carving Knives

Get the Flexcut Pro Series 3-Piece Pro Set at:

The post These New Carving Knives Have Earned a Spot in My Arsenal of Tools appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-07T11:26:17-05:00
<![CDATA[8 ​​Paint Primers That Provide a Blank Slate For Painting]]>The best paint primer depends on the surface, where it's located, and your preferred dry time. We tested top-rated picks for a variety of projects.

The post 8 ​​Paint Primers That Provide a Blank Slate For Painting appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-paint-primer/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=104207Fri, 07 Feb 2025 10:44:37 -0500ReviewsDIYInteriorPaint NeedsPainting & FinishingTools & MaterialsWalls & CeilingsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Whether you’re painting the living room or a patio table, applying a prep coat of primer to the surface can improve adherence, prevent peeling, and reduce the number of coats needed to finish the job. While all primers contain more resins and less pigment than paint, formulas vary from product to product. We tested some of the most popular options to find out which primer works best for different situations. Our number one pick is Rust-Oleum’s Zinsser Bulls Eye with its low odor and ability to work on multiple surfaces.

The right primer for your project depends on the environment you’ll be working in, the surface you’ll be painting, and your preferences for the time frame of the job and its final look. Read on to find out what makes a quality paint primer and why the below options rank as our top favorites among the best paint primers we tested.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Rust-Oleum Zinsser Bulls Eye 1-2-3 Water-Base Primer
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Kilz Original Interior Primer
  3. BEST ALL-PURPOSE: Kilz 2 All-Purpose Interior/Exterior Primer
  4. BEST FOR METAL: Rust-Oleum Clean Metal Primer
  5. BEST FOR GLOSSY SURFACES: Kilz Adhesion Interior/Exterior Primer
  6. BEST FOR ODOR BLOCKING: Kilz Restoration Interior Primer
  7. BEST FOR EXTERIOR: Kilz 3 Premium Interior/Exterior Primer
  8. BEST FOR INTERIOR WALLS: Sherwin-Williams SuperPaint Interior Acrylic Latex
Painter in action, testing the best paint primers on a wall.
Photo: Debbie Wolfe for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

Our Top Picks

We spent hours narrowing the paint primer market and testing the top-rated products. One or more of these recommendations for the best paint primer may suit your specific needs.

Best Overall

Rust-Oleum Zinsser Bulls Eye 1-2-3 Water-Base Primer

 The Rust-Oleum Zinsser Bulls Eye 1-2-3 Water-Base Primer on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Low-VOC and low-odor formula
  • Mold- and mildew-resistant
  • Works on multiple surface types

What We Don’t Like

  • Thin viscosity; second coat may be required for proper coverage

Product Specs 

  • Interior/exterior: Both
  • Recoat time: 1 hour
  • Base material: Water-based acrylic

Rust-Oleum is well known for its protective paints and coatings. Its Zinsser Bulls Eye 1-2-3 water-base primer is an all-purpose primer-sealer that sticks to various surfaces without sanding and works with any top coat. The brand is regarded as one of the top producers of rust-preventive paints.

The primer is low odor, low in volatile organic compounds (VOCs), and provides excellent coverage on interior and exterior surfaces. It’s made from water-based acrylic and is designed to resist blistering, peeling, and mold and mildew growth. The primer is tintable and available in white or gray. It’s also available in spray-paint form.

We tested this primer on multiple surfaces, including drywall, wood, metal, and plastic. It readily stuck to all of those surfaces and provided a textured finished surface that easily held onto a top coat of paint. The primer did not completely block the water stain on drywall, but we expected that—most white primers do not. We thought the paint was thin and needed two coats on all surfaces to ensure an even, smooth top coat. Overall, we liked this primer’s versatility of use on multiple surfaces, making it our top choice.

Get the Rust-Oleum Zinsser paint primer at Amazon or Ace Hardware.

Best Bang for the Buck

Kilz Original Interior Primer

 The Kilz Original Interior Primer on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Effectively blocks stains and odors
  • Applies smoothly and evenly
  • Lower-VOC formula

What We Don’t Like

  • Strong odor

Product Specs 

  • Interior/exterior: Interior
  • Recoat time: 2 hours or less
  • Base material: Oil

Kilz is a trusted paint brand, especially for primers. Kilz Original interior primer is the company’s flagship primer designed to block most heavy interior stains on wood, drywall, plaster, paneling, wallpaper, masonry, brick, and painted metal. It also works on properly prepared glossy surfaces.

The primer is oil-based but can be used as a base coat for latex and oil paints. Kilz is our go-to primer for tough stains in our household. Previously, we had only used the spray-can version but found that the can version works just as well. We tested the primer on water stains on our drywall and as a base coat on various materials, including wood, brick, and metal. The primer adhered well to porous surfaces, but we did need to sand the metal before priming.

The white primer paint did a decent job blocking light-colored stains. However, in our experience with trying to hide stubborn stains on drywall, the primer works best at hiding stains when tinted gray.

Although it is available in a lower-VOC formula, it is not low VOC and the odor was strong. We recommend using a respirator or working in a well-ventilated area when using this primer. Overall, Kilz Original is a solid performer, and we highly recommend it for any ventilated interior primer application.

Get the Kilz Original paint primer at Ace Hardware.

Best All-Purpose

Kilz 2 All-Purpose Interior/Exterior Primer

 Kilz 2 All-Purpose Interior/Exterior Primer on a white background.
Photo: acehardware.com

What We Like

  • Minimal odor
  • Mildew-resistant finish
  • Easy soap-and-water cleanup
  • Low-VOC formula

What We Don’t Like

  • Only blocks light to medium stains

Product Specs 

  • Interior/exterior: Both
  • Recoat time: 1 hour
  • Base material: Water

Kilz 2 all-purpose interior/exterior primer is a general-purpose primer well suited for use on various DIY projects. This water-based primer has a drastically lower VOC content than the Original Kilz Primer, and it works under or over water-based or oil-based paints. It blocks light to medium stains and mild odors, and it leaves a mildew-resistant finish.

Kilz 2 all-purpose primer works well for general-purpose priming and sealing needs. In testing, it left a smooth base coat on drywall and bare wood. It did a moderate job blocking dark stains on walls, but it effectively blocked lighter stains like pencil marks, minor scuffs, and markers. We recommend using Kilz 2 for priming old walls before repainting or for any exterior surface as a base coat for exterior paint. It’s also handy to use a primer for craft painting projects.

Get the Kilz 2 paint primer at Lowe’s, Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot

Best for Metal

Rust-Oleum Clean Metal Primer

 Rust-Oleum Clean Metal Primer on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Prevents rust from growing in some areas
  • Suitable for both indoor and outdoor use
  • Weather- and corrosion-resistant

What We Don’t Like

  • Metal surfaces should be sanded beforehand

Product Specs 

  • Interior/exterior: Both
  • Recoat time: 24 hours
  • Base material: Oil

Rust-Oleum Clean Metal primer is formulated to cover lightly rusted metals as well as bare and previously painted metals. It’s weather- and corrosion-resistant and bonds tightly to exterior/interior surfaces like wood, metal, concrete, and masonry.

This primer is designed primarily for use on metal, but it works well on other surfaces. It did a good job blocking rust stains on a metal bench we refinished, and it provided a smooth surface for a top coat. The only real drawback of this primer was that the smooth surfaces required prep work before use—smooth, hard, or glossy finishes need sanding for the primer to adhere. However, after applying onto sanded metal, it did form a durable finish, and the top coat went on beautifully.

Get the Rust-Oleum metal paint primer at Amazon, Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot.

Best for Glossy Surfaces

Kilz Adhesion Interior/Exterior Primer

 Kilz Adhesion Interior/Exterior Primer on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Bonds to glossy surfaces without sanding
  • Can be used on products containing xylene or other solvents
  • Easy soap-and-water cleanup after use

What We Don’t Like

  • Not for wet floors or horizontal surfaces

Product Specs 

  • Interior/exterior: Both
  • Recoat time: 1 hour
  • Base material: Water

Kilz Adhesion interior/exterior primer is formulated to bond to various tough-to-paint surfaces such as PVC, vinyl, glass, tile, and glazed brick. The water-based primer offers the same stain- and odor-blocking properties as the other Kilz primers. Unlike the other primers in the Kilz line, Adhesion does not require sanding a glossy surface before primer application.

Since this primer is virtually identical in its stain and odor properties to the others in the Kilz lines, we primarily tested its ability to stick to slick surfaces. We applied the primer to plastic, metals, and glazed ceramic. We did not sand the surface before application. It did adhere to the surfaces pretty well, but we did find that applying the primer in thin, multiple layers produced better results. Although it took at least two coats, we prefer to paint two coats rather than sanding the entire surface first.

Get the Kilz Adhesion paint primer at Amazon.

Best for Odor Blocking

Kilz Restoration Interior Primer

 Kilz Restoration Interior Primer on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Minimal odor and low-VOC formula
  • Easy soap-and-water cleanup
  • Provides a smooth finish

What We Don’t Like

  • Does not block or cover heavy or prominent stains

Product Specs 

  • Interior/exterior: Interior
  • Recoat time: 1 hour
  • Base material: Water

Water, mold, and rust stains are tough to cover, but odors are even harder to conceal. Smoke, pet urine, and food odors often require using an oil-based or shellac-based primer to seal them into the surface before painting. However, Kilz Restoration interior primer offers the same performance as oil-based primers but with the easy cleanup convenience of water-based paint.

Like the other primers offered by Kilz, this primer did an adequate job of covering most light to medium stains. However, Kilz Restoration shines as an odor blocker. We tested this primer drywall in a room where smokers previously resided. The primer went on smoothly and sealed in the odor. Once the top coat was applied, there was no hint of the smell. It did a moderate job concealing old water stains, but we expected that.

Since this primer is mainly formulated for odor blocking, we suggest only using this primer for that purpose. Kilz Original primer is a better stain blocker.

Get the Kilz Restoration paint primer at Amazon, Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot.

Best for Exterior

Kilz 3 Premium Interior/Exterior Primer

 Kilz 3 Premium Interior/Exterior Primer on a white background.
Photo: acehardware.com

What We Like

  • Blocks most medium to heavy stains
  • No-VOC formula
  • Great in moisture-prone areas

What We Don’t Like

  • Not meant for applying to glossy surfaces

Product Specs 

  • Interior/exterior: Both
  • Recoat time: 1 hour
  • Base material: Latex

Kilz 3 Premium interior/exterior primer is formulated to minimize problems caused by color changes, minor stains, surface textures, and porosity differences. This primer offers excellent adhesion, a mildew-resistant coating, and seals interior and exterior surfaces for a uniform finish.

In testing, we found that this primer did an excellent job sealing new wood framing on our covered deck. It left an ultrasmooth finish, and the top coat went on smoothly. The primed and painted wood has been through a few rainstorms and high humidity conditions for a few weeks, and the surface still looks amazing.

As a stain blocker, it did a decent job covering up an older painted surface with minor mold and dirt discoloration. The only con we found with this primer was that it’s not made to adhere to glossy surfaces without preparation. However, it’s an excellent primer for exterior use because it sticks readily to plaster, paneling, masonry, brick, and painted metal without issue.

Get the Kilz 3 Premium paint primer at Lowe’s, Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot.

Best for Interior Walls

Sherwin-Williams SuperPaint Interior Acrylic Latex

 Sherwin-Williams SuperPaint Interior Acrylic Latex on a white background.
Photo: sherwin-williams.com

What We Like

  • Thick paint goes on smoothly
  • Can also be used on ceilings
  • Tintable in Sherwin-Williams’ full color options
  • Low-VOC formula

What We Don’t Like

  • Expensive compared to similar options

Product Specs 

  • Interior/exterior: Interior
  • Recoat time: 1 hour
  • Base material: Latex

Sherwin-Williams SuperPaint is the brand’s paint-and-primer combo available in interior and exterior formulations. The interior version is designed for one coat coverage on drywall, trim, and ceilings. SuperPaint creates a lasting finish and a surface that holds up to scrubbing.

We have used SuperPaint as our primary wall paint for years. It’s thicker than most interior paints, which allows it to cover in fewer coats than cheaper paints. The flat finish is perfect for ceilings, too. We could achieve solid coverage on walls in two coats, even over darker paint. Although we were able to cover a similar color wall in one coat in the past, we think it looks better with two coats of paint. The only con we have with this paint is that it’s expensive. However, Sherwin-Williams often offers promos that can help offset the cost.

Get the Sherwin-Williams paint primer at Sherwin-Williams.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Paint Primers

We tested each paint primer according to established rubrics, including how easy it was to apply, how well it adhered to various surfaces, and its stain- and odor-blocking abilities. We rated each primer based on these rubrics on a scale between 0 and 4 to determine a score. Lastly, we tested the primer’s durability and how attractive the final finish appeared on each surface.

We applied each primer to metal, masonry, drywall, and wood surfaces. The drywall surfaces included water stains, mildew, and lingering smoke odors. We applied two coats of primer to each surface and allowed it to dry for an hour, and then followed up with a flat white top coat to determine if there was any bleedthrough of stains and to judge the smoothness of the top coat.

Painter using the best paint primer for a smooth wall finish.
Photo: amazon.com

What to Consider When Choosing a Paint Primer

When choosing a primer for your project, there are several features to consider. The best paint primer options efficiently cover multiple surfaces, block stains, and ensure an even, smooth top coat. Here are more details about important features to consider when choosing a paint primer.

Project Environment

Paint primers come in three formulas: interior/exterior, exterior, and interior.

Interior/exterior primers are suited for indoor and outdoor use, while exterior primers are designed for outdoor use only. Both contain additives that stave off UV-related fading and moisture-related mold issues; they also add flexibility to withstand frequent outdoor temperature changes, preventing the paint from peeling or cracking.

Interior primers, formulated without exterior additives, are only suitable for indoor use. Interior/exterior primer is the best bet for doing a range of painting jobs, indoors and out. Plus, choosing a primer that works inside and outside saves on the costs of buying separate interior and exterior products.

The Best Paint Primer Options: Wall and stairs makeover using the best paint primer
Photo: amazon.com

Surface

Each type of primer may adhere better to different surfaces. The following details the best primer type for common household surfaces:

  • Bare wood: Apply an oil-based or latex primer to wood that has never been stained or painted to help seal the porous surface. Keep in mind that oil-based primers tend to emit more VOCs (smelly pollutants) than do latex primers.
  • Drywall: Apply a latex primer to drywall, as an oil-based primer can raise the grain and make the surface look uneven.
  • Stain-prone surfaces: Use a stain-blocking primer on stained wood, bare wood with high tannin content that can bleed out (e.g., cedar or redwood), interior walls with water or smoke stains, or cabinets/trim with grease stains. It will cover stains and keep them from bleeding into and discoloring top coats.
    • Choose latex stain-blocking primer if the stains are solvent-based (e.g., crayons or grease).
    • Choose an oil-based stain-blocking primer if the stain is water-based (e.g., water-based wood stain, smoke, or tannin).
  • Painted wood: An oil-based primer is usually best for painted wood that shows chalking (a chalky powder on the surface as the paint binder degrades) or chipping; it will dry into a denser, smoother foundation to minimize these imperfections.
  • Metal: Choose a rust-resistant oil-based primer on metals such as aluminum to avoid the formation of rust, which the water in latex primer can promote.
  • Glossy surfaces: Bonding primer, formulated to stick to glossy surfaces, is a must for the slick likes of glass, plastic, or glazed tile.

Dedicated Primer vs. Paint-and-Primer in One

Self-priming paints—also known as paint-and-primer combo products—let users prime and paint a surface in a single step. But these two-in-one products are only recommended if all of the following are true:

  • You’re not painting bare or stained wood.
  • Your painting surface has no stains or signs of peeling.
  • You’re repainting a previously painted surface in the same color or going from a lighter to a darker paint color.

Choose separate paint and primer to improve paint adhesion in the following situations:

  • You’re painting bare or stained wood.
  • You’re painting over a surface that has stains or is peeling.
  • You’re switching from a darker to a lighter paint color.
  • You want to use a paint with a different base than that of the primer. For example, use an oil-based primer with a latex paint to take advantage of the rot resistance of the oil primer and the lower VOCs and faster drying of the latex paint.
  • You want to cover an old oil-based paint coat with a latex paint coat. An intervening layer of a dedicated primer is needed for optimal adhesion of the latex paint.

Tintability

Primer usually comes in white or gray. Use either color as is without tinting it or have the primer tinted to a hue that’s slightly lighter than the top coat. Tinting primer, which requires buying a primer labeled “tintable,” generally achieves a deeper, richer, and more uniform final color but is particularly recommended in the following situations:

  • You’re changing the color from darker to lighter. The tinted primer reduces the number of paint coats needed to hide the darker base coat.
  • For stubborn stains, like water or mildew, a tinted primer is necessary to block the stain effectively from bleeding through, especially when there is a light-color top coat.
  • You’re changing from a lighter to a dramatically darker color, e.g., light blue to black. The tinted primer ensures that even if the top coat is uneven, no patches of white or gray primer will show through it.

Dry Time

Pay attention to the “dry-to-recoat” time specified on the primer packaging—an indication of when the primer is dry enough to be recoated either with another coat of primer or with paint. In general, latex primers have a shorter dry-to-recoat time of no more than 1 hour, whereas oil-based primers need 1 to 3 hours before they can be recoated.

FAQs

Q. Should I use an oil-based or water-based paint primer?

Water-based primer is best for walls and ceilings. Oil-based primer is primarily used for doors, windows, metal, woodwork, or over tough stains in well-ventilated areas.

Q. Which is better: primer or paint with primer?

Paint with primer is best for previously painted walls. Primers are recommended for use on any surface that has not been previously painted.

Q. Do I have to use paint primer?

No, but using a paint primer does reduce the amount of top coat paint needed, and it protects and seals the surface.

Meet the Tester

Debbie Wolfe is a photographer, author, and freelance writer in various niches. She has contributed hundreds of home, garden, and crafting articles and DIY tutorials for leading media outlets and retailers, including HGTV, Real Simple, Forbes Advisor, The Spruce, The Home Depot, Walmart, and Mother Earth News. She is the author of two DIY books: Do-It-Yourself Garden Projects and Crafts and Crafting with Herbs from Skyhorse Publishing. Her testing approach is straightforward and budget-minded.

Additional research provided by Manasa Reddigari.

The post 8 ​​Paint Primers That Provide a Blank Slate For Painting appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-07T10:44:37-05:00
<![CDATA[Keep Your Snow Blower Running Efficiently With These High-Quality Oil Options]]>Keep your snow blower in good working order and ready to go when needed. Read on to find recommendations on the best oil for snow blower upkeep.

The post Keep Your Snow Blower Running Efficiently With These High-Quality Oil Options appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-oil-for-snowblower/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=154594Fri, 07 Feb 2025 04:00:41 -0500ReviewsDIYDriveways & WalkwaysExteriorToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

High-quality oil for snow blowers helps keep your gas snow blower in peak condition, making starting and running it easier and smoother so you can clear wet winter weather quickly. However, knowing which oil type is best for your machine can be a challenge, so we researched dozens of popular snow blower lubricant options and reached out to an expert for their insights on choosing the right one. 

Based on our efforts, we learned that the best-performing oil should flow easily through a snow blower engine, even in the coldest temperatures, without leaving deposits and grime. That’s why we chose the Pennzoil Platinum Full Synthetic 5W-30 Motor Oil as our top pick: This synthetic engine oil offers excellent performance in extreme cold and washes away dirt as it flows through, helping extend the life of snow-blowing tools season after season. 

Read on to learn more about the features that make a motor or car oil appropriate for a snow blower, and see the rest of the best oils for snow blowers on the market today. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Pennzoil Platinum Full Synthetic 5W-30 Motor Oil
    Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Briggs & Stratton 5W-30 Synthetic Engine Oil
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Valvoline Advanced Full Synthetic SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST FOR SMALL ENGINES: Briggs & Stratton 5W-30 Low-Temp Small Engine Oil
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR 2-CYCLE ENGINES: Klotz TechniPlate 2-Stroke Snowmobile Oil
    Jump to Review 
  6. MOST VERSATILE: Castrol GTX High-Mileage 5W-30 Motor Oil
    Jump to Review
A person using a snow blower lubricated with the best oil for snow blower option
Photo: depositphoto.com

Best Oils for Snow Blowers Comparison Chart 

Our Top Picks

Our top picks feature oils specially formulated for cold weather, and many also have additives that help keep snow blower engines free of harmful dirt and deposits. Any of the following recommended products will help keep your snow blower running smoothly.

Best Overall

Pennzoil Platinum Full Synthetic 5W-30 Motor Oil

 The Best Oil for Snow Blowers Option Pennzoil Platinum Full Synthetic 5W-30 Motor Oil
Photo: Lowe’s

What We Like

  • Suitable for snow blowers and car engines
  • 5-quart size has 2 handles for controlled pouring 
  • Protects for long periods of time

What We Don’t Like

  • Oil losses can occur with intense friction

Specs

  • Volume: 1 quart (other sizes available)
  • Configuration: 5W-30
  • Type: Synthetic

Seasonal machines, such as snow blowers, often sit idle for months before they are needed, which allows time for impurities and gunk to build up. However, Pennzoil’s Platinum motor oil washes dirt and deposits out of the engine as it passes through, helping to extend the life of the machine while ensuring it starts when the next snowfall arrives. As a fully synthetic clear 5W-30 oil made from natural gas, this pick can keep your snow blower engine up to 45 percent cleaner than standard oils. 

Pennzoil Platinum comes in 1-quart, 5-quart, and 55-gallon bottles, and buying a larger volume might be smart since it also works in car engines. Another thing we really like about this product is the 5-quart bottle has handles on both the top and the side, making it much easier to pour without making a mess.

Get the Pennzoil oil for snow blowers at Lowe’s, Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Blain’s Farm & Fleet.

Runner-up

Briggs & Stratton Synthetic Small Engine Motor Oil

 The Best Oil for Snow Blowers Option Briggs & Stratton 5W-30 Synthetic Engine Oil
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Helps maintain a clean engine
  • Suitable for use in other garden equipment
  • Enables a smoother snow blower start

What We Don’t Like

  • More expensive than similar options

Specs

  • Volume: 1 quart
  • Configuration: 5W-30
  • Type: Synthetic

This Briggs & Stratton 5W-30 small engine oil is well suited to snow blowers—its use makes starting engines in cold temperatures easier while also minimizing oil consumption. As a synthetic oil, it lasts longer (up to 5,000 hours in a snow blower) and stays thinner at lower temperatures than conventional oils. 

With a high-temperature viscosity rating of 30, this oil is also a good option for other 4-cycle small engines that operate in hot temperatures, including lawn mowers. The 1-quart bottle has convenient measurements on the side that allow the user to see exactly how much snow blower oil is left. 

Get the Briggs & Stratton synthetic oil for snow blowers at Amazon (2-pack), Walmart, or Briggs & Stratton.

Best Bang for the Buck

Valvoline Advanced Full Synthetic SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil

 The Best Oils for Snow Blower Option: Valvoline Advanced Full Synthetic SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Provides excellent wear protection
  • Slightly more budget-friendly than competitors
  • Configured specifically for cold conditions

What We Don’t Like

  • Bottle may leak if stored incorrectly

Specs

  • Volume: 1 quart
  • Configuration: 5W-30
  • Type: Synthetic

Valvoline 5W-30 weight motor oil is a synthetic formula with additives that provide 50 percent more wear protection than standard motor oils. The included detergents flush sludge and harmful deposits from the engine, which is significant for small 4-cycle engines that are used only when it snows. 

This snow blower oil’s low cold operating viscosity is ideal for winter-use tools, while its 30-weight high-temperature viscosity rating also makes it suitable for warm-weather machines like lawn mowers. This Valvoline product comes in a 1-quart bottle, but a 5-quart bottle with a pour spout is also available. 

Get the Valvoline oil for snow blowers at Amazon (6-pack), Lowe’s, Walmart, or Tractor Supply Co.

Best for Small Engines

Briggs & Stratton 5W-30 Low-Temp Small Engine Oil

 The Best Oil For Snowblower Option: Briggs & Stratton SAE 5W-30 Snow Thrower Oil
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Ideal for use in cold temperatures
  • From a brand known for high-quality products
  • Specially suited for small engines

What We Don’t Like

  • Quite pricey compared to similar products

Specs

  • Volume: 1 quart
  • Configuration: 5W-30
  • Type: Synthetic

Made by one of the best-known names in small engines, this Briggs & Stratton 4-cycle oil is specially formulated for use in small engines. The synthetic formula comes in a 1-quart container with a handy gauge on the side that allows users to see how much oil is left in the bottle. 

With its 5W rating, this snow blower engine oil works well in machines operating at temperatures below 50 degrees Fahrenheit. It also has a high-temperature viscosity of 30, making it suitable for use in warmer-weather motors like power washers or lawn mowers. 

Get the Briggs & Stratton 4-cycle oil for snow blowers at Amazon or Briggs & Stratton.

Best for 2-Cycle Engines

Klotz TechniPlate 2-Stroke Snowmobile Oil

 The Best Oil for Snow Blowers Option Klotz TechniPlate 2-Stroke Snowmobile Oil
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Made for temperatures as low as -48 degrees Fahrenheit
  • ISO-EGD compliant for engine protection 
  • Formula helps extend engine life 

What We Don’t Like

  • Reports of leaky packaging

Specs

  • Volume: 4 quarts
  • Configuration: TC-W3
  • Type: Synthetic

Made for cold temperatures as low as -48 degrees Fahrenheit, the Klotz TechniPlate Snowmobile oil is designed for with 2-cycle engines like those in ATVs, motorcycles, race cars, and, of course, snow blowers. It works with stock engines or modified ones made by all leading manufacturers, including Ski-Doo, Arctic Cat, Polaris, and Yamaha as well as C-TEC and E-TEC engines. 

This clean-burning synthetic formula is TC-W3 certified and ISO-EGD compliant for reliability and efficiency. It’s made to improve throttle response and prevent plug fouling and can be used as an injection oil by pouring it directly into the tank or as a pre-mix product by blending it with gasoline. 

Get the Klotz oil for snow blowers at Amazon or Klotz.

Most Versatile

Castrol GTX High Mileage 5W-30 Motor Oil

 The Best Oil for Snow Blowers Option Castrol GTX High-Mileage 5W-30 Motor Oil
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Provides immediate engine protection on startup
  • Lasts for extended periods and still look clean
  • Suitable for both cold and hot weather

What We Don’t Like

  • Bottle shape is awkward for filling a snow blower

Specs

  • Volume: 5 quarts
  • Configuration: 5W-30
  • Type: Synthetic

With technology designed to protect engines and improve performance, this 5W-30 Castrol GTX motor oil features Castrol’s sludge and wear protection additive. It prevents buildup, extending the life of engines both large and small.

Castrol GTX also makes it easier to get a pull-start engine running, and once you start your snow blower’s engine, the oil quickly coats it to provide immediate protection. Additionally, this option features the optimal 5W oil rating for winter use and a 30 high-temperature viscosity rating for hot weather. 

Get the Castrol oil for snow blowers at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co. (1 quart), The Home Depot (1 quart), or Walmart (1 quart).

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Oils for Snow Blowers

To provide shoppers with a list of top picks for snow thrower and snow blower oils, we primarily considered oil type and viscosity. 

Oil type: Synthetic oil is the best choice for snow blower motors because it can handle lower temperatures and resist breakdown better than conventional oil. 

Viscosity: Our recommendations are all variations of 5W-30, which is the ideal oil viscosity for snow blowers. The products we selected include budget-friendly versions for occasional use and heavier-duty options that come at a slightly higher price point. Most of the picks on our list are also versatile enough for other home and garden equipment and suitable for both cold and hot weather conditions.

What to Consider When Choosing Oil for a Snow Blower

The right oil can make the difference between a snow blower not starting because it has a gummed-up engine and one that kicks on without issue. Ahead, learn how viscosity, snow blower oil type, and other factors affect engine performance in a snow blower. 

Type

Gas-powered snow blowers use 4-cycle engine oil, a type of oil for snow blower engines that uses separate tanks for gas and oil, much like car engines. The gas fuels the engine, while the oil lubricates it. 

Smaller engines, such as those on chainsaws, have 2-cycle engines. This type of small engine uses an oil and gas mixture that goes into one tank. Don’t use 2-cycle engine oil in a snow blower, as it will not properly lubricate the engine and will damage it. The motors on electric snow blowers don’t require engine oil.

Identifying the right type of engine oil is easy. The oil container has “4-cycle” or “2-cycle” clearly printed on the label. Although some 4-cycle engine oils are labeled for “small engines,” they are actually the same oil commonly used in cars and trucks. 

Viscosity

Viscosity refers to the thickness of the oil. Higher viscosity oil is better at protecting and lubricating engines at high temperatures and peak load (high RPMs). Oil with a low viscosity remains thinner at lower temperatures, promoting better flow through the engine, making it easier to start and more efficient to run. 

Viscosity is based on a scale created by SAE International, formerly known as the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE). Motor oil has two viscosity ratings: 

  • The first rating—the “W” (for “winter”) after the number—represents the cold temperature viscosity. For example, an oil rated 5W flows better at lower temperatures than a 10W oil. 
  • The second number indicates the high-temperature viscosity. For example, an oil with a high-temperature viscosity of 30 stays thicker at higher temperatures. 

Since snow blowers operate exclusively in cold weather, they typically use SAE 5W-30 weight oil, which ensures the engine will start at low temperatures. Make sure to check the maintenance section of your operating manual for the proper snow blower oil weight for your machine.

Synthetic vs. Standard

Not all 5W-30 engine oils are the same. Some engine oils are synthetic, which means they use higher-quality base oils than conventional oils. Synthetic lubricants can generally withstand higher temperatures and resist breakdown better. This means synthetic oil in a snow blower will last at least 50 percent longer than conventional oil, so you’ll probably need to perform less frequent snow blower maintenance

Many synthetic oils also contain additives to help improve engine performance and extend engine life. Additives include detergents that flush grime and buildup and chemicals that coat engine parts to enhance lubrication.

For these reasons, synthetic oils are generally more expensive, often costing several times more than conventional oils. Still, proper maintenance of a quality snow blower will likely run you less than the cost of snow removal if you live in an area with relatively frequent snowfalls. 

Versatility

The 4-cycle engine oil that snow blowers use is the same oil used in any 4-cycle engine, which means it’s also an appropriate oil for lawn mowers, power washers, and even cars and trucks. 5W-30 oil provides adequate protection during both cold and warm weather. 

Engine oil generally comes in 1-quart bottles, which is ideal for snow blowers since they hold about that much. It also comes in 5-quart containers and large, multi-gallon drums, but since its shelf life is generally around 5 years, it’s important not to buy more than you need. To store 5W-30 oil, keep it tightly sealed in a cool, dry environment. 

FAQs 

Even though you now know a fair bit about oil for snow blowers, you may still have additional questions. For details on deciding which type of oil in a snow blower is best to use and how often to replace it, read answers to some frequently asked questions below. 

Q. Can I use synthetic oil in my snow blower?

Yes, synthetic options are likely the best oils for snow blowers. Synthetic oils are refined to run cleaner, leaving fewer deposits in the engine. Many also include additives that clean grime and sludge from the engine to improve performance. 

Q. Can I use car oil in my snow blower?

Yes. Snow blowers, like cars, are 4-cycle engines, so they use the same type of motor oil. Use a motor oil weight with a low-temperature viscosity rating, such as 5W-30, since snow blowers must run during cold weather. 

Q. How do I know which oil is the right one for my snow blower?

Snow blowers operate in frigid temperatures, so the most important factor to consider is viscosity. Use motor oil with a low-temperature viscosity rating, such as 5W-30, to ensure the snow blower starts easily and runs smoothly. 

Q. What happens if I put too much oil in my snow blower?

Adding too much oil to a snow blower, or any 4-cycle engine, will cause the oil to rise and come in contact with other moving parts around the engine, aerating the oil and creating a huge mess.

Q. How often should I change my snow blower oil?

According to Christ Urato, owner-operator of Urato Landscaping, LLC, you should perform a snow blower oil change “after the first 5 hours of use for new snow blowers, then every 20 to 50 hours of operation or once per season, depending on usage.”

Q. What is the life expectancy of a snow blower?

A well-maintained snow blower should last around 10 to 15 years, but actual lifespan will depend on build quality and frequency of use. Performing regular maintenance tasks and avoiding common snow blower mistakes will help your machine last as long as possible. 

Q. Should I run my snow blower out of gas at the end of the season?

“Yes, running it dry prevents stale fuel from gumming up the carburetor and causing maintenance issues,” says Chris Urato, a landscaper and snow-removal provider from Goshen, New York. 

Q. How long should you let a snow blower warm up?

If you have a gas snow blower, you can give it 2 to 5 minutes before use so oil has time to run through the engine and lubricate it. If you have a battery-powered blower, there’s no need to let it warm up. 

The post Keep Your Snow Blower Running Efficiently With These High-Quality Oil Options appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-07T04:00:41-05:00
<![CDATA[We Cleared Nearly 400 Feet of Pavement to Find the 10 Best Snow Blowers]]>The best snow blower can help clear your driveway quickly and efficiently. We recently put our top snow blower picks to the test. Check out our results and some shopping tips.

The post We Cleared Nearly 400 Feet of Pavement to Find the 10 Best Snow Blowers appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-snow-blower/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=84991Wed, 05 Feb 2025 16:47:07 -0500ReviewsDriveways & WalkwaysExteriorTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

When snowflakes start to fall, it can be tempting to run out and buy the first snow blower that fits your budget. After all, these specialized tools make it much easier to tackle tough snow-clearing tasks. However, it’s worth taking a little time to learn which machine will work best for your climate and specific driveway and walkways rather than snapping up the first one you see. To help make the process much quicker, we used over 35 top models to remove snow and ice from hundreds of feet of pavement and gravel. 

Our top pick? The Troy-Bilt 2890 Storm Tracker—a powerful machine with excellent traction, a wide clearing path, and an easy-to-maneuver touch-sensitive steering system. Depending on how much snow you typically receive and whether your property is flat or sloped, this may or may not be the ideal model for you. Keep reading to learn more about all of the best snow blowers that made our list and get helpful insights from an expert in the snow blower industry.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Troy-Bilt 2890 Storm Tracker Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: PowerSmart Two-Stage Gas Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
  3. UPGRADE PICK: Cub Cadet 2X 30″ Max Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST BATTERY: Ego Power+ 24″ Snow Blower With Peak Power
    Jump to Review 
  5. BEST SINGLE-STAGE ELECTRIC: Snow Joe 48V 18″ Ionmax Single-Stage Snow Blower
    Jump to Review 
  6. BEST TWO-STAGE ELECTRIC: Toro 24″ Power Max e24 60V Two-Stage Snow Blower
    Jump to Review 
  7. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Toro Power Max HD 828 OAE Two-Stage Gas Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
  8. MOST VERSATILE: Ryobi 40V HP Two-Stage Self-Propelled Snow Blower Kit
    Jump to Review 
  9. ALSO CONSIDER: Troy-Bilt Storm 2600 Two-Stage Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
top three of the best snow blower options set in a driveway
Photo: Zach Lazzari for Bob Vila

Snow Blower Comparison Chart

Our Top Picks

To help you select the right snow blower, each of the following reviews details important aspects like fuel source, surface compatibility, clearing width and depth, and ease of use. They also discuss unique insights gained from our hands-on tests so you can find the best fit.

Best Overall

Troy-Bilt 2890 Storm Tracker Snow Blower

 The Best Snow Blower Option: Troy-Bilt Storm 26-Inch 208cc Gas Snow Blower
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Excellent traction on loose and icy surfaces
  • Broad 28-inch-wide swath
  • Touch N’ Turn power steering

What We Don’t Like

  • Track system makes it more expensive

Specs 

  • Type: 2-stage
  • Width: 28 inches
  • Self-propelled: Yes

The Troy-Bilt Storm Tracker makes clearing snow on paved, gravel, or dirt surfaces easier than ever. With its 28-inch clearing width, powerful auger and drive system, and tracks for superior traction, this machine is an absolute beast in big storms. The 272 (cubic centimeter) cc motor has plenty of power for big jobs, and the many drive settings allow for perfect speed control. The pull-cord start required only one or two pulls, and the electric start fired immediately. 

During our tests on loose substrate, this snow blower with tracks maintained excellent surface contact and pushed forward with ease. The same was true on icy surfaces. It has adjustable skids to set the lower blade height, and its settings adjust even further with a lever that quickly raises or lowers the blade. When working through gravel and rocky areas, this user-friendly system was a huge benefit. 

What our tester says: “Even on ice, the tracks maintained traction, and having multiple speed settings helped me find the right pace to keep moving forward. I was able to crawl, hit a moderate speed, or move quickly. I also really like this unit’s extras, like heated grips, trigger turn tabs on the handle, and easy chute controls.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer

Read our full review: Troy-Bilt 2890 Storm Tracker Snow Blower

Get the Troy-Bilt 2890 snow blower at The Home Depot, Walmart, Northern Tool + Equipment, or Troy-Bilt.

Best Bang for the Buck

PowerSmart Two-Stage Gas Snow Blower

 The Best Snow Blower Option: PowerSmart Two-Stage Gas Snow Blower
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Great price compared with other 2-stage models
  • Powerful enough to clear large driveways
  • Self-propelled design easily clears snow up to 10 inches
  • 180-degree adjustable chute and push-button electric start

What We Don’t Like

  • Narrower intake means more passes
  • Reduced traction on steep inclines and ice

Specs 

  • Type: 2-stage
  • Width: 24 inches
  • Self-propelled: Yes

Budget-minded shoppers will want to take a close look at the PowerSmart two-stage snow blower, a model that offers many desirable features found in higher-end models at a more modest price. While it may not be the best choice for especially extreme conditions, it’s plenty capable of clearing the occasional big storm and all light-to-medium snow loads. 

With an intake height of 20 inches and a high-speed impeller that works well in dense snow, this machine performs well in dense snow. It also excels on uneven surfaces and inclines, thanks to a quality drive system that includes reverse options. During testing its 208cc engine ran smoothly, and the electric star made it easy to fire up eerie time. Once we were clearing, it even threw snow through the adjustable chute with power that matched models costing twice as much. 

This model stands out as one of only a few low-cost snow blowers deliver both powerful performance and user-friendly functionality. It’s only slightly more expensive than a heavy-duty electric snow shovel, yet it’s more than enough machine to clear the average driveway with ease.

Get the PowerSmart snow blower at Amazon or PowerSmart.

Upgrade Pick

Cub Cadet 2X 30" Max Snow Blower

 The Best Snow Blower Option: Cub Cadet 2X MAX 30-Inch Snow Blower
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Powerful 357cc gas engine 
  • Heavy-duty construction
  • Power steering for easy maneuvering
  • Cozy hand warmers in the grips

What We Don’t Like

  • Not a budget-friendly model

Specs 

  • Type: 2-stage
  • Width: 30 inches
  • Self-propelled: Yes

For those with consistently high snow removal needs, Cub Cadet’s 2X 30-inch gas-powered snow blower might be the answer. Equipped with a 357c engine, a two-stage removal system, and self-propelled wheels, this large model is built to power through heavy snow with minimal effort. Its heavy-duty construction features a rotating steel chute with easy-access angle controls built into the top panel, plus onboard headlights for safety and visibility during snowy nights or early mornings.

Yes, the Cub Cadet is expensive—but during testing, it proved its worth. We pushed it through our heaviest snowdrifts and banks, and it powered through without hesitation. Its power steering and 16-inch knobby tires made it easy to maneuver (even in deep snow), and the large engine delivered power far beyond every other model we tested. We also really like the heated hand grips, but who wouldn’t? If you need a capable snow blower for big jobs and deep snow, the Cub Cadet is an excellent option.

Get the Cub Cadet snow blower at The Home Depot or Cub Cadet.

Best Battery

Ego Power+ 24" Snow Blower With Peak Power

 The Best Snow Blower Option: EGO Power+ 24 in. Two stage Battery Snow Blower Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Electric motor is powerful yet quiet
  • Throws snow up to 50 feet
  • User-friendly operation

What We Don’t Like

  • Can stall if overloaded too quickly

Specs 

  • Type: 2-stage
  • Width: 24 inches
  • Self-propelled: Yes

Whether snow is piling up on a sidewalk, patio, or even a gravel driveway, this battery-powered snow blower is powerful enough to push through. We were initially skeptical about its capabilities, but its two-stage system had no problem scooping and throwing snow up to 50 feet, and the self-propelled wheels made it incredibly easy to maneuver. The batteries on this unit provide enough power for up to 135 minutes before needing recharging, providing ample time for most jobs. While it weighs more than many other electric models, the powerful drive system handles the extra pounds easily. It also has a generous 200-degree adjustable chute and bright onboard headlights for increased safety and visibility.

As much as we liked this model, operating it took a little getting used to since the throttle and auger controls are reversed from normal. Once we got the hang of it, we found adjusting the throttle from “eco” to “turbo” allowed it to handle everything we threw at it. Still, running it on eco mode generally provided enough power for standard clearing and also helped maximize runtime. While we did experience a stall when we buried the auger in extremely heavy snow too quickly, this wasn’t an issue when we ran things at low speed. 

What our tester says: “We’re big fans of this Ego electric snow blower. It’s so much quieter than gas snow blowers, and we thought it was incredibly easy to use. It also throws snow so far that you almost have to be careful where you aim it.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Ego snow blower at Amazon, Lowe’s, Ace Hardware, or Northern Tool + Equipment.

Best Single-Stage Electric

Snow Joe 48V 18" Ionmax Single-Stage Snow Blower

 The Best Snow Blower Option Snow Joe 48V 18 Ionmax Single-Stage Snow Blower
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Includes 2 rechargeable 24-volt batteries
  • Quadruple-bladed steel auger 
  • Moves up to 10 tons of snow per charge
  • 180-degree adjustable snow chute

What We Don’t Like

  • Plastic blade may chip on hard objects

Specs 

  • Type: Single-stage
  • Width: 18 inches
  • Self-propelled: No

If you’re seeking an economical single-stage snow blower with plenty of power, simple operational features, and great performance, this could be the model for you. Powered by two rechargeable 24-vot batteries, this Snow Joe delivers up to 40 minutes of runtime to move more than 10 tons of snow per charge.

Weighing just 39 pounds, this cordless snow blower is easy to push around and manage. While it doesn’t have a drive or propulsion system, the 18-inch rubber-tipped auger helps it move forward while working through snow. This large auger also aids it in cutting a10-inch-deep path noticeably faster than some other models we tested. It throws snow well past the 20-foot mark claimed by the manufacturer and has a helpful set of LED headlights to increase visibility in dark conditions. 

As an affordable, electric single-stage model, the Snow Joe proved functional and consistent in a variety of conditions. The batteries also charged quickly (about 2 hours), making it possible to get back up and running without long delays. We didn’t need to wait through a recharge during testing, however, because the batteries lasted through each full session. 

Get the Snow Joe snow blower at Amazon, Lowe’s, Walmart, Best Buy, or Snow Joe.

Best Two-Stage Electric

Toro 24" Power Max e24 60V Two-Stage Snow Blower

 The Best Snow Blower Option Toro 24 Power Max e24 60V Two-Stage Snow Blower
Photo: Tractor Supply

What We Like

  • Consistent performance and features
  • Auger doesn’t use shear pins
  • Reliable performance and control

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires long battery recharging between uses

Specs 

  • Type: 2-stage
  • Width: 24 inches
  • Self-propelled: Yes

Though it’s electric, this model’s body, auger, and overall design are an exact match to the gas-powered models in the Toro lineup. Other than its quiet and fume-free battery operation, it features the same exceptional controls, durable steel auger, and great features and functions of the gas versions. It delivers an equally reliable performance and impressive ability to churn through snow yet doesn’t require the same amount of maintenance as a gas machine. 

During testing, we ran this unit for over 30 minutes using just one battery. Adding a second battery provides over an hour of runtime, and adding a third extends its capabilities even more. Generally speaking, its features are similar to many of the other good electric snow blower options available, but it does offer a couple of distinct advantages. First, its all-steel auger doesn’t require shear pins. Instead, it has integrated protections to prevent overloading and damaging the auger and mechanical components without requiring the replacement of broken pins. Second, the option to purchase a third battery for the tray makes this model among the longest-lasting electric snow-clearing machines on the market. 

Get the Toro e24 snow blower at Tractor Supply Co. or Toro.

Best Heavy-Duty

Toro Power Max HD 828 OAE Two-Stage Gas Snow Blower

 The Best Snow Blower Option: Toro Power Max HD 828 OAE Two-Stage Gas Snow Blower
Photo: Tractor Supply

What We Like

  • Cuts a broad swath
  • Can handle deep snow and slick surfaces
  • Has an adjustable steel chute

What We Don’t Like

  • Must manually adjust skids

Specs 

  • Type: 2-stage
  • Width: 28 inches
  • Self-propelled: Yes

Thanks to its joystick-like controls, wide coverage, and ability to handle deeper snowfall than many other two-stage models, the Toro Power Max 828 OAE snow blower is ideal for climates with heavy snowfalls every winter. Its large intake sits above the ground, enabling use on gravel and uneven surfaces, and it has a broad 28-inch swath that can clear snow up to 21 inches deep and throw it an impressive 45 feet. 

During testing, this model performed exceptionally well. Its Quick Stick controls and power steering made one-handed turning easy, and its knobby 16-inch tires provided ample traction in slick conditions. The anti-clogging system efficiently managed snow intake to prevent delays, and its LED headlight was helpful for nighttime snow blowing. It also has solid skids to adjust blade height above the ground, making it suitable for rough terrain.

What our tester says: “It’s hard to overstate how nice the joystick controls were for moving the chute throw direction and angle. Between the joystick and all its other features, this Toro was a very close second to our top pick, and it only lost out because it was pitted against a track system with height-adjustment control. Otherwise, this model is an absolute beast that can charge through the biggest storms.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Toro 828 snow blower at Tractor Supply Co. or Toro

Most Versatile

Ryobi 40V HP Two-Stage Self-Propelled Snow Blower Kit

 The Best Snow Blower Option: Ryobi 40V HP Two-Stage Self-Propelled Snow Blower Kit
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Changes direction easily
  • Plenty of power in deep snow
  • Intuitive controls and powerful drive system

What We Don’t Like

  • Batteries need recharging after 30 minutes

Specs 

  • Type: 2-stage
  • Width: 22 inches
  • Self-propelled: Yes

Driveways come in all shapes and sizes, and they don’t all call for an extra-large snow blower. With a 22-inch-wide cutting path, this small snow blower Ryobi may not be as big as some of the models we tested, but it still makes a substantial dent on each pass. The tires have great traction, and the machine also has a steel auger, speedy drive system, and skids for raising the blade over gravel. 

In testing, the Ryobi’s ease of use and ability to maneuver in tight spaces were a bonus. It turned and pivoted without resistance, and the drive system was powerful enough that we didn’t need to push much. According to the manufacturer, the batteries last up to 30 minutes, but ours went even longer in light snow. For the average driveway, that’s more than sufficient to get the job done, but for wet and heavy snow or large properties, it may make sense to pick up an extra battery to avoid waiting for a recharge.

What our tester says: “This two-stage brushless snow blower was such a big surprise in our tests that we were reminded just how valuable hands-on testing is. It delivered a ton of power and an impressive overall performance that we just wouldn’t have believed had we not experienced it ourselves.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Ryobi snow blower at The Home Depot.

Also Consider

Troy-Bilt Storm 2600 Two-Stage Snow Blower

 The Best Snow Blower Option :Troy-Bilt Storm 2600 Two-Stage Snow Blower
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Electric-start feature 
  • Chunky tires are great for uneven or slippery surfaces
  • Easy to access chute control

What We Don’t Like

  • Shorter snow discharge than some

Specs 

  • Type: 2-stage
  • Width: 26 inches
  • Self-propelled: Yes

Anyone on the hunt for an all-around capable snow blower may want to check out the Troy-Bilt Storm 26-inch snow blower. This gas-powered model can handle small properties while being heavy-duty enough to hold its own on large ones. It features two self-propelled drive wheels with big, chunky tires for plenty of surface grip. Also, the electric start makes firing it up a breeze.

Overall, we enjoyed using the Troy-Bilt Storm. We liked that the chunky tires offered plenty of grip—even on loose, grainy snow. We also liked that the chute controls, including angle and trajectory, were easily accessible from the control panel. While it doesn’t seem to throw snow as far as other models, it was very effective at removing plowed snow from the end of a driveway. Also, starting this model was very easy; it started on the first pull almost every time. 

Get the Troy-Bilt 2600 snow blower at The Home Depot, Walmart, or Troy-Bilt

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Snow Blowers

Because we were testing some serious machines for this guide, we needed to wait for a real winter storm to try them out. Once 10 inches of heavy, wet snow was on the ground, we used these tools to clear two 75-foot-long, 4-car driveways, about 200 feet of sidewalk, several small walkways, and the plow-piled snow at the ends of both driveways. We also ran the snow blowers over a loose gravel driveway and a compact gravel road to test their abilities on challenging terrain.

We tested ease of use for pull-cord and electric starters and runtime for battery-powered models. We noted snow discharge range, maneuverability, power, control, and the value added by extra features like heated grips and LED lights. We gave points based on a rubric and assigned worthy machines relevant awards. 

What to Consider When Choosing a Snow Blower

According to Wes Bollingmo, Channel & Product Support Manager at the well-respected outdoor tool company Toro, asking yourself a few simple questions is a great way to go about choosing a snow blower.

 “The key to finding the ‘best’ snow blower for any homeowner is assessing your space. Ask yourself: How large is the area you need to clear? What type of surface do you need to clear? What kind of slope does your driveway have? How much snow typically falls? These answers should narrow down your search better than just looking at a price tag,” he says. 

Types of Snow Blowers

Many people first think about snow blowers in terms of how wide a path they can clear, which is important—especially for large properties. However, perhaps a higher priority is choosing the type of snow blower best suited to the snow typical to your region and the surfaces you intend to use it on. Understanding terms like “single-stage,” “two-stage,” or “three-stage” is key to ensuring you choose the right machine for your needs.

Single-Stage Snow Blowers

Single-stage snow blowers, also called “snow throwers,” use a simple yet effective design. They have a horizontal auger at the front that rotates rapidly, generating sufficient force to scoop up snow and toss it through the chute. Most single-stage blowers can clear an 18- to 21-inch swath of light, fluffy snow, and they’re available in both gas and electric models.

While single-stage snow blowers work well for smaller spaces, their design has limitations. They generally do not generate sufficient power to blow the snow more than 15 to 20 feet away, meaning they aren’t ideal for wide driveways. Also, their auger blades skim the ground during operation, which makes them effective for clearing flat paved areas but poor snow blowers for gravel driveways since they tend to pick up small rocks and toss them out the chute. 

Two-Stage Snow Blowers

Two-stage snow blowers feature a powerful impeller fan that works in combination with an auger to draw in snow and forcefully throw it out the chute. Depending on the power of the fan on a particular model and the weight of the snow, a two-stage snow blower can shoot snow over 35 feet. 

In addition to handling fluffy snow, two-stage blowers can also handle wet snow and clear swaths ranging from approximately 20 inches to 30 inches (or more). Unlike their single-stage counterparts, two-stage snow blowers are suitable for use on gravel driveways because their auger blades don’t touch the ground.

Three-Stage Snow Blowers

Three-stage snow blowers are the big boys in the snow removal world. In addition to an auger and impeller fan, they feature an accelerator that grinds chunks of ice and powerfully expels snow and slush from the chute. It’s not unusual for a three-stage blower to throw lightweight snow a distance of more than 40 feet. 

These muscle-bound machines can clear paths as wide as 30 inches depending on the specific model. For those with truly heavy-duty snow removal needs, a three-stage blower might be the machine for the job. While these models are often very expensive, buying a three-stage snow blower may be more economical than paying the cost of snow removal for large properties that get a lot of heavy snow. 

Terrain Type

Removing snow from flat sidewalks and driveways is a straightforward process with most snow blowers, but trying to push a heavy snow blower up an incline can be a workout for even the most physically fit. 

If there’s a slope to maneuver, consider buying a self-propelled snow blower. With this snow blower type, the wheels pull the machine forward, so all that’s necessary is to guide the machine and follow along. If a gravel driveway needs to be cleared, make sure the machine is a two-stage or three-stage snow blower to prevent throwing rocks. 

Fuel

Like most outdoor-maintenance machines, snow blowers might run on electricity, gas, or diesel. Each option has its benefits and drawbacks.

  • Electric-powered snow blowers are typically small, affordable single-stage machines intended to clear light snow up to about 12 inches deep. They need to be plugged into an outlet with an extension cord. This limits their performance and range, making them best suited for those who receive minimal snowfall and have relatively short sidewalks and driveways. 

Electric-powered snow blowers are also handy for clearing snow from decks and steps because they’re lightweight enough to lift and move. A bonus: These machines don’t create fumes and don’t raise concerns about where to store fuel.

  • Gas- and diesel-powered snow blowers boast a lot more power than electric blowers, and they don’t restrict their operators to the length of an extension cord. With a blower like this, it’s possible to clear deep and heavy snow all along a driveway and then continue down the sidewalk to clear a neighbor’s drive as well.
  • Battery-operated cordless snow blowers are relatively new to the snow removal market and quite promising. They benefit from fume-free operation like electric blowers, but they don’t need an extension cord. That said, their runtime is usually limited to around 30 to 40 minutes before the high-capacity battery needs recharging. However, in many cases, they can continue past 30 minutes if the user swaps in a spare battery. 

Clearing Width 

Single-stage snow blowers (also known as “snow throwers”) are designed to remove snow in swath widths ranging from around 18 inches to 21 inches. Two-stage snow blowers will clear snow in a swath up to 30 inches wide, and three-stage snow blowers stay consistent at 30 inches wide, though they move faster thanks to their accelerators.

Weight

Corded electric snow blowers are typically the lightest, generally weighing between 26 to 38 pounds, followed by cordless snow blowers at anywhere from 30 to 69 pounds. Gas-powered snow blowers are in the heaviest category and can weigh 100 to 350 pounds or more.

Wheels vs. Tracks

Snow can be slippery, especially if it has a chance to melt slightly and then refreeze. This can make it hard for even self-propelled snow blowers to power through, but this is where track-drive snow blowers shine. 

Instead of wheels that can lose traction when maneuvering through heavy or slippery snow, the tracks on a track-drive model dig in and help pull the machine along. Another difference is in price: A gas-powered snow blower runs an average of $500 to $2,000, with track-drive blowers in the upper end of that range and extending beyond.

Additional Features

Some of the best snow blowers include extra features that make the work easier and more comfortable. Accessories designed to elevate the experience of using a snow blower include: 

  • Heated handles to keep cold hands warm in frigid temps
  • Lights, which enable snow clearing to begin before dawn or after dark
  • Speed controls to adjust how quickly the self-propelled wheels turn
  • Automatic safety shutoff for when the handles get released to prevent a loss of control
  • Electric starters, which allow for pull-free starts and less strain

FAQs

We’ve covered a lot of information about the best snow blowers, but to avoid making common snow blower mistakes, it’s smart to review the answers to the following frequently asked questions before making a final decision. 

Q. What is the difference between a snow blower and a snow thrower?

The terms “snow blower” and “snow thrower” are used interchangeably, but there are some technical differences. While both clear away snow, a snow thrower is a single-stage machine, and a snow blower can be a single-stage, two-stage, or three-stage machine. Generally speaking, snow blowers clear a wider swath and are better suited for heavier snow, while snow throwers work best on light snow.

Q. How do you use a snow blower?

A good snow removal tip is to use a snow blower just after the snow has stopped falling when it’s still light and fluffy. Make uniform passes down and back on the sidewalk or driveway, adjusting the discharge chute as necessary to toss the snow off the surface. 

Q. How do you start a snow blower?

You may have to pull a manual recoil cord to start a gas snow blower, although many have a push-button start these days. Cordless and electric models start at the push of a button.

Q. How do you clean a snow blower carburetor?

Since a dirty carburetor can keep a gas-powered snow blower from starting or cause it to emit dirty, smoky exhaust, cleaning your carburetor is a proper part of snow blower maintenance. A carburetor cleaner will dissolve the gunk and debris so your machine will run more smoothly. To clean the carburetor, you’ll need to remove its cover, a process which may be different depending on the make and model. Consult your owner’s manual to find out how to reach the carburetor.

Q. How do you store a snow blower?

The best spot to store a snow blower is in a garage or storage shed during the summer and when it’s not in use. If you don’t have the extra space, you can store it outside under a waterproof tarp. 

Q. How many years should a snow blower last? 

The number of years a snow blower should last will depend on its build quality, frequency of use, and quality of maintenance and care. Generally speaking, most machines should last between 10 to 15 years or longer. If your snow blower won’t start or you’re having other issues well before this time, check your owner’s manual for troubleshooting tips or contact the manufacturer to see if it’s still under warranty.

Q. How much should you spend on a snow blower? 

While you can pick up one of the best cheap snow blowers for less than $500, you may need to spend a bit more if you get a lot of wet, heavy snow or have a large property. The models on this list cost between $400 and $1900, and there’s a strong chance one of them will be ideal for your needs.

Q. When is the best time to buy a snow blower? 

The best time to buy a snow blower will vary depending on your priorities. If getting the exact model you want matters most, starting to shop as early as May is smart since inventory levels will be high. If you’re looking for the best price, however, months further into winter like January or February may be best. You can check out our tips on how to remove snow from a driveway without a shovel if you don’t want to buy anything until the unit you have your eye on goes on sale.

Meet the Tester

Zach Lazzari is a freelance writer splitting time between the great outdoors, travel, and DIY projects ranging from camper builds to home renovations and maintenance. His home base in Montana is the perfect testing ground for winter products and snow equipment. With over a decade of professional writing experience, he also covers a variety of other projects and maintenance topics for BobVila.com.

Additional research provided by Glenda Taylor and Tom Scalisi. 

The post We Cleared Nearly 400 Feet of Pavement to Find the 10 Best Snow Blowers appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-05T16:47:07-05:00
<![CDATA[This Tool is a Must-Have for DIY Renovation Projects]]>The post This Tool is a Must-Have for DIY Renovation Projects appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/best-drywall-saws/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=419590Wed, 05 Feb 2025 12:25:53 -0500ReviewsDIYHand ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Drywall is light, affordable, and relatively easy to cut, hang, and repair when you have the necessary tools and supplies, such as drywall tape, drywall screws, and drywall saws. A handheld drywall saw or jab saw has a long, narrow blade with large teeth and a sharp tip specifically designed for cutting into drywall. These tools are affordable and easy to use, making them a great option for any DIYer’s tool box. 

Trying to take on a drywall installation or repair project completely unprepared can lead to a difficult, time-consuming mess. Like all tools, you will want to find a drywall saw that is durable, accurate, and effective so that you can accomplish any drywall cutting tasks with relative ease. Take a look at this list of the best drywall saws to find a product that is suitable for your next home renovation or drywall repair project.

Best Overall

DeWalt DWHT20540 Jab Saw

 The Best Drywall Saws Option: DeWalt DWHT20540 Jab Saw
Photo: Amazon

Pros

  • Comfortable contoured handle improves ease of use
  • Aggressive tooth pattern increases cutting efficiency
  • Useful for cutting drywall, plastic, and other soft building materials
  • Durable, induction-hardened teeth stay sharp for longer

Cons

  • Not suited for large, clean cuts
  • Teeth may tear soft-sided tool bags

Specs

  • Blade material Carbon steel
  • Number of teeth 8 TPI
  • Blade length 6 inches

One of the top considerations for every DIYer selecting a quality drywall saw is the design of the handle. This DeWalt drywall saw features a comfortable, padded grip with a contoured handle that minimizes hand fatigue so you can work for longer periods without worrying about your hand cramping up. Additionally, the aggressive tooth pattern makes it easier for the blade to slice through the drywall, reducing the amount of power it takes to control the tool.

At 6 inches in length, the blade of this DeWalt drywall saw is long enough to pierce through several sheets of drywall and make accurate cutouts for ceiling lights, electrical outlets, pipes, cables, or any other objects that might protrude. It can also be used for cutting plastic and other soft building materials thanks to the highly durable, induction-hardened teeth. Just make sure to store the drywall saw in a solid plastic or metal toolbox that can withstand wear and tear from the sharp teeth.

What our tester says: “The tip of the saw penetrates drywall easily, and the long triple-ground saw teeth cut into drywall cleanly without tearing the paper at the edges of the cut. I also found the cushioned handle comfortable, which made it easy for me to control the blade for straight or curved cutting.” -Mark Wolfe, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the DeWalt Drywall Saw at Amazon, Home Depot, or Ace Hardware.

More Drywall Saws Worth Your Money

A man working with one of the Best Drywalls Saws Option
Photo: Amazon

Whether for making cutouts in the ceiling for new lights or cutting out damaged patches of drywall for minor repairs, these quality drywall saws come highly recommended. Choose the tooth pattern and blade design that suits your next project, or opt for one of the folding drywall saws to make tool storage easier.

How We Chose the Best Drywall Saws

a man working with one of the Best Drywalls Saws Options
Photo: Amazon

In order to select the best drywall saws for this list, we researched and reviewed a wide range of products from the top tool manufacturing brands. From a pool of over 30 potential options we narrowed our choices based on durability, blade design, blade material, size, weight, and any additional features, such as a folding blade that would make it easier to store the drywall saw.

We aimed to choose a variety of blade styles and drywall saw designs to provide a diverse selection of top tools for this list. The price of each saw also influenced our assessment, though the most important factor we considered was the overall quality of each drywall saw. With this in mind, we eliminated products with weak blades, uncomfortable handles, and low durability until only the best drywall saws remained. 

FAQs

Before starting the search for the best hand saw to cut drywall, it’s worth finding out as much as possible about drywall saws and the right methods for cutting drywall. Otherwise, you may invest in a drywall or wallboard cutting tool that isn’t suitable for the project or that can only be used for certain aspects of the job, like an adjustable drywall hole saw. Check out this list of frequently asked questions about drywall and drywall saws to round out your understanding.

Q. Do you need a special blade to cut drywall?

Whether you need a special blade or not depends on the type of saw. When selecting a tool for cutting drywall it’s important to make sure the drywall cutting tool is equipped with a drywall blade for the best results. A utility knife is a common tool to cut drywall that can be used with the standard blade to make long, straight cuts. Similarly, drywall saws already have a specially designed blade for small, accurate cuts, though when paired with a drywall cutting blade, some of the best oscillating tools can also be used to make clean square cuts for those who prefer an electric drywall saw.

Q. Can I use a rotary tool to cut drywall?

Rotary tools equipped with drywall cutting bits can be some of the best tools to cut drywall. Jesse Andrews, owner of New England Home Pros, says “an electric rotary tool like the Dremel, paired with a drywall bit, offers superior speed and control for large-scale projects or intricate patterns.” You can also choose between a jigsaw vs reciprocating saw if you are looking for an alternative power drywall cutter.

Q. What’s the difference between Sheetrock and drywall?

Jesse Andrews, owner of New England Home Pros, explains that “drywall and Sheetrock are terms often used interchangeably, though Sheetrock is a brand.” This means that while all Sheetrock is drywall, only some drywall should be considered Sheetrock. Other drywall products may be made using a different chemical composition and can range from low to high quality, but when you are cutting Sheetrock you know that this material is made with a specific formula and is widely considered to be a high-quality product.

Q. Which side of drywall do you cut?

Part of learning how to cut drywall is understanding which side of the material to cut. Typically, drywall will have a light finished side and a dark paper side. Jesse Andrews, owner of New England Home Pros, says “when cutting, start on the finished side for cleaner, more professional-looking results.”

The post This Tool is a Must-Have for DIY Renovation Projects appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-05T12:25:53-05:00
<![CDATA[We’ve Researched Over 20 Bench Sanders, But We Like These 7 the Best]]>The best bench sander is a great addition to any workshop. This buyer’s guide breaks down the top picks and tips to find the best bench sander for you.

The post We’ve Researched Over 20 Bench Sanders, But We Like These 7 the Best appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-bench-sander/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=147376Tue, 04 Feb 2025 08:36:19 -0500ReviewsPower ToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Best Overall

The Best Bench Sander Option: Ryobi 4-Inch by 36-Inch Belt/Disc Sander

Ryobi BD4601G 4-Inch by 36-Inch Belt/Disc Sander

Best Bang for the Buck

The Best Bench Sander Option Rikon Power Tools 50-151 Bench Sander

Rikon Power Tools 50-151 Bench Sander

Best for Large Tasks

The Best Bench Sander Option: Wen 6502T 4-Inch by 36-Inch Belt and Disc Sander

Wen 6502T 4-Inch by 36-Inch Belt and Disc Sander

Bench sanders are designed to smooth large surfaces quickly and easily, allowing you to finish a woodworking project faster. We researched more than 20 best-selling bench sanders and then tested the top five to see how well they performed in workshop sanding situations. And we found a favorite: the Ryobi BD4601G 4-Inch by 36-Inch Belt/Disc Sander, which offers a large flat sanding surface plus a 6-inch sanding disc. It excelled in our hands-on sanding tests. 

If the Ryobi isn’t the right tool for you, no need to worry—we tested more top-rated models that provide additional sanding solutions for DIYers and pros. We also added three more models to our list, which, though we didn’t test them, grabbed our attention based on reviews and customer ratings. Among our lineup of the best bench sanders, you’ll find combo models and even a sander that comes with a grinding wheel. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Ryobi BD4601G 4-Inch by 36-Inch Belt/Disc Sander
    Jump to Review 
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Rikon Power Tools 50-151 Bench Sander
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST FOR LARGE TASKS: Wen 6502T 4-Inch by 36-Inch Belt and Disc Sander
    Jump to Review 
  4. BEST UPGRADE PICK: Grizzly Industrial G0787 Horizontal/Vertical Belt Sander
    Jump to Review 
  5. BEST VERTICAL: Bucktool BG2600 Combo Belt Sander Bench Grinder
    Jump to Review 
  6. BEST FOR SHOP: Jet J-41002 Belt Grinder and Disc Sander
    Jump to Review 
  7. BEST COMBO SANDER: Rockwell RK7866 Shop Series Belt/Disc Combo Sander
    Jump to Review
The Best Bench Sander Option WEN
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Bench Sanders Comparison Chart

ProductTypePowerDust Port?
Ryobi BD4601G Belt/Disc SanderBelt and disc4.3 ampsYes
Rikon 50-151 Bench SanderBelt and disc0.33 hpYes
Wen 6502T Belt/Disc SanderBelt and disc½ hpYes
Grizzly Industrial G0787 SanderBelt and disc4.3 amps, ½ hpYes
Bucktool BG2600 Combo SanderBelt and grinder3.5 ampsYes
Jet J-41002 Belt/Disc SanderBelt and disc6.2 amps, ¾ hpYes
Rockwell RK7866 Belt/Disc SanderBelt and disc4.3 ampsYes

Our Top Picks

The following list of bench sanders has something for every woodworker. We chose models with wide belts for aggressive wood removal and some with narrow belts for finer detail work. Many include rotating discs and fences or miter gauges for precision work, and we’ve included high-quality models to fit various budgets. One is sure to be a good pick for your workshop. 

Best Overall

Ryobi BD4601G 4-Inch by 36-Inch Belt/Disc Sander

 The Best Bench Sander Option: Ryobi 4-Inch by 36-Inch Belt/Disc Sander
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Wide-profile belt for large sanding tasks
  • Belt and disc sanding options
  • Integrated dust port
  • Miter gauge for sanding angles

What We Don’t Like

  • Dust collection requires attaching a hose

Specs

  • Type: Belt and disc sander
  • Power: 4.3 amps
  • Additional accessories: Integrated dust port, work table 

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.8/5; Build Quality 5/5; Performance 5/5; Value 4.8/5

This pick can get a lot of sanding done in a hurry thanks to its 36-inch by 4-inch belt and the driving force of the powerful 4.3-amp motor. This impressive tabletop belt sander also has a 6-inch disc and an adjustable tool rest table that we used to smooth bevels and angles. 

We especially liked its adjustable belt position, which allowed us to use the sander vertically or horizontally. That’s a definite perk when sanding various board configurations for the same project. 

The integrated dust port on this benchtop sander can be connected to a collection bag or to a shop-type vacuum. We used it with and without an attached vacuum hose, and it significantly reduced the amount of airborne dust. The sanding disc table has a miter gauge to support material at a specific angle, and we found that very helpful for sanding consistent angles.

What our tester says: “I love how stable the Ryobi bench sander is. I tested it with and without it being bolted to the workbench, and although I’d always suggest bolting, the Ryobi didn’t walk or move when it wasn’t bolted.” —Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Ryobi bench sander at Amazon, The Home Depot or Walmart

Best Bang for the Buck

Rikon Power Tools 50-151 Bench Sander

 The Best Bench Sander Option Rikon Power Tools 50-151 Bench Sander
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Budget-friendly price
  • Compact size for small-scale DIY
  • Sturdy tool rest table
  • Built-in miter gauge

What We Don’t Like

  • Not suitable for heavy-duty sanding

Specs

  • Type: Belt and disc sander
  • Power: 0.33 hp
  • Additional accessories: Dust port, miter gauge

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Build Quality 4/5; Performance 5/5; Value 5/5

With the Rikon 50-151 bench sander, users can enjoy the power of a bench sander without spending a lot of money. It features a narrow 1-inch by 30-inch sanding belt that performed well in our tests for smaller projects. It has a sturdy tool rest table that supported our workpieces while we sanded. 

The Rikon also features a disc sander with a built-in miter gauge, which we used to sand consistent angles and square ends on both hardwood and softwood boards.

This is a light-duty sander, and we’d recommend it for small DIY and craft projects or repair work. It’s not big enough or powerful enough to handle large sanding projects, but it’s well worth the investment for those who work on many small-scale projects. We connected our shop vacuum to the dust port, which reduced airborne dust, but enough escaped that wearing a dust mask is a must. 

Get the Rikon bench sander at Amazon or Walmart

Best for Large Tasks

Wen 6502T 4-Inch by 36-Inch Belt and Disc Sander

 The Best Bench Sander Option: Wen 6502T 4-Inch by 36-Inch Belt and Disc Sander
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Belt and disc sanding combo
  • Quickly smooths rough wood
  • Quick and easy sandpaper changes
  • Smooth operation (no wobbling)

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires vacuum for dust mitigation

Specs

  • Type: Belt and disc sander
  • Power: 4.3 amps 
  • Additional accessories: Miter gauge, dust port

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Performance 5/5; Value 4.5/5

This Wen bench sander comes with two standard sanding tools—a 4-inch belt sander and a 6-inch disc sander—so it can handle a range of projects. It has a cast-iron base and weighs 37.6 pounds, which is heavy enough to prevent most wobbling during use, but we bolted it to our workbench anyway. 

In our tests, the sanding belt did an excellent job of quickly smoothing out rough wood surfaces and removing extra material on both hardwood and softwood boards. The 6-inch disc features a large tool rest table and built-in miter gauge that we used to sand square board ends and angled ends. 

The Wen bench sander is powered by a 4.3-amp motor and has a simple tension release lever for changing the sandpaper. The sanding belts on this sander are also designed for easy replacement. Its dust collection port doesn’t direct the flow of sawdust on its own, but when we connected it to our shop vacuum, it substantially reduced the amount of airborne dust. 

Get the Wen 6502T bench sander at Amazon or The Home Depot

Best Upgrade Pick

Grizzly Industrial G0787 Horizontal/Vertical Belt Sander

 The Best Bench Sander Option Grizzly Industrial Horizontal Vertical Belt Sander
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Multipurpose shop tool for sanding and grinding
  • Lower risk of damage from heat buildup
  • Sharpens material quickly
  • Easy to adjust/change grit

What We Don’t Like

  • 80-grit belt is not aggressive 
  • Requires practice to achieve precision

Specs

  • Type: Belt grinder and sander
  • Power: 4.3 amps, ½ hp
  • Additional accessories: Built-in adjustable miter gauge, 2½-inch dust port, worktable angle scale

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Build Quality 4.5/5; Performance 4/5; Value 5/5

The Grizzly Industrial horizontal/vertical belt sander works well on wood or metal projects, and we tested this one for sharpening mower blades. It packs a 4.3-amp single-phase motor that turns the belt at a rate of 1,900 feet per minute. The 90-degree adjustable belt platen and right-angle backstop allow vertical, diagonal, or horizontal sanding for optimal user comfort and control.

The 4-inch abrasive belt perfectly matched the width of the sharp edges on our 21.5-inch mower blades. We raised the belt arm to the vertical position, flipped the power switch, and braced the blade against the backstop as it contacted the belt. The moderately worn blade only needed a 12-second grind on each edge, while the severely worn blade required 27 seconds per edge. This would also be a good bench sander for large woodworking projects. 

What our tester says: “I liked that the Grizzly belt sander gave the edge an evenly flat profile, and the included 80-grit belt left a smooth finish.” —Mark Wolfe, Product Reviews tester & writer 

Get the Grizzly Industrial bench sander at Amazon, Tractor Supply Co., The Home Depot, or Grizzly Industrial.

More Great Options

While we didn’t test the following models in our workshops, they made our shortlist of bench grinders based on their standout reviews and ratings. Each offers a slightly different range of power and features in a range of budgets.

Best Vertical

Bucktool BG2600 Combo Belt Sander Bench Grinder

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 42-inch belt adjusts from 0 to 90 degrees
  • Horizontal and vertical sanding 
  • Brush wheel included

What We Don’t Like

  • Bench sanding belt’s tension cannot be adjusted

Specs

  • Type: Belt sander and disc grinder
  • Power: 3.5 amps 
  • Additional accessories: Cast-iron base, eye shield, brass wheel 

This Bucktool bench sander has a 2-inch by 42-inch belt sander that can be adjusted from 0 degrees to 90 degrees, so it can be set up to run horizontally or vertically, depending on needs. We really like the 6-inch bench grinder that can be used for sharpening, as well as the inclusion of a brush wheel for removing rust from tools. 

This combination belt sander/bench grinder has a 3.5-amp motor and a cast-iron base for better support while working. For the most stable sanding results, we still recommend bolting the Bucktool to a workbench. The grinder also comes with an adjustable eye shield and a built-in LED light, which illuminates the work area while the wheel is in use.

This is one of the most versatile picks on our list because it sands, grinds, and brushes away rust. 

Get the Bucktool bench sander at Amazon.

Best for Shop

Jet J-41002 Belt Grinder and Disc Sander

 The Best Bench Sander Option: Jet 2-Inch by 42-Inch Belt Grinder and Disc Sander
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Suitable for multiple sanding tasks 
  • 3,100 surface feet per minute (SFPM) 
  • 3,450 revolutions per minute (RPM) 
  • Made of heavy-duty steel and cast iron 

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavy: may not be suitable for frequent transport

Specs

  • Type: Belt grinder and disc sander
  • Power: 6.2 amps, ¾ hp
  • Additional accessories: 45-degree sanding table, miter gauge

Woodworkers in search of a highly functional combination belt and disc sander may want to check out this Jet model, which has a powerful 6.2-amp motor, one of the most powerful of any on our lineup. It drives the vertical 42-inch-long by 2-inch-wide belt sander at up to 3,100 SFPM and the 8-inch disc sander at up to 3,450 RPM, helping to ensure a smooth finish on woodworking projects.

The powerful motor and the heavy-duty steel and cast-iron construction add to the weight of this benchtop belt sander, sitting at a hefty 60 pounds, so it may not be a good choice for users who want to pack it up and take it to multiple jobsites. However, the 45-degree sanding table has a removable miter gauge to help users produce a smooth, accurate finish while sanding at an angle.

The only thing we would prefer on this model is a wider sanding belt. With the power this sander has, a 4-inch belt would make quick work of sanding large projects. 

Get the Jet bench sander at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Walmart

Best Combo Sander

Rockwell RK7866 Shop Series Belt/Disc Combo Sander

 The Best Bench Sander Option: Rockwell Shop Series Belt/Disc Combo Sander
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 6-inch disc sander 
  • Table adjusts from 0 to 45 degrees 
  • Offers horizontal and vertical sanding 
  • Built-in safety switch 
  • Dust collection port

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users report poor construction 
  • Belt tends to strip out easily

Specs

  • Type: Belt and disc sander 
  • Power: 4.3 amps, ½ hp 
  • Additional accessories: Adjustable table, dust port

This Rockwell belt/disc combo sander can get a lot of work done fast thanks to its wide belt sander and 4.3-amp (½ hp) motor. We like that it also has a 6-inch disc sander and an adjustable sanding table that can be set from 0 to 45 degrees for optimal material positioning. This belt sander can be adjusted from a horizontal position to a vertical sanding position. 

The Rockwell has a safety switch to prevent accidental starts. For convenience, both the belt and disc sandpaper are easy to change. The Rockwell sander also comes with a dust collection system. It weighs 42 pounds, which we feel is heavy enough to reduce most of the vibration or movement associated with sanding, but we still recommend bolting it in a permanent spot on the workbench. 


Get the Rockwell bench sander at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose and Tested the Best Bench Sanders 

Testing Stats
Products tested 5
Time spent testing 2 weeks
Tests performed4
Price range$60 to $350

We started by researching the best-selling bench sanders based on type, power, user-friendliness, and other special features included by top brands. We narrowed our list to eight and then selected the top five for hands-on testing. (We also tested the Wen HA5932 Portable Oscillating Spindle Sander, but went out of stock upon publication.)

In actual testing, we used the bench sanders in our workshops to perform various sanding tasks. We sanded hardwood and softwood, and we used the miter gauges available on some models to sand square ends and angles. We carefully noted the safety aspects of each of the sanders as well as beneficial features that made using the tools easier or more efficient.

We awarded points based on a rubric: the better a bench sander performed on a test or assessment, the higher the points. After testing, we averaged the points to determine our best overall pick and to categorize the other bench sanders by their best use. 

What to Consider When Choosing a Bench Sander

There is a lot to consider when searching for the right sander. From the space available to the particular type of machine best suited to your needs, the following are some things to think about when looking for the best benchtop sanders for a workshop.

Type

Many different types of electrical sanders fall under the category of bench sander, giving tool users a range of options for their woodworking projects. Bench sander types include belt and disc, drum, and oscillating spindle sanders.

  • A belt and disc sander is a combination bench sander that includes a horizontal or vertical belt sander and a disc sander. The benchtop belt sander is a great choice for DIYers who enjoy woodworking projects because it provides multiple methods for sanding, smoothing, and shaping woodworking pieces. 
  • Drum sanders have traditionally been large freestanding tools with impressive power, but recently manufacturers have started producing a type of benchtop drum sander that can sit on the worktable or workbench. Drum sanders are designed to smooth long boards, panels, or doors and are essentially large stationary belt sanders. 
  • Oscillating spindle sanders have a vertical spindle where the abrasive sleeves are installed. This spindle rotates and oscillates up and down simultaneously, helping to prevent any lines from forming in the wood or alternate material. The result is a smooth finish on curves, contours, and other irregular shapes. 

Power 

The amount of power a bench sander needs depends on how it will be used. Large projects benefit from a sander with a powerful motor that can rip through a lot of material in a short period of time. Smaller, delicate projects need a less powerful sander, as too much force can ruin a design or tear the material apart. 

Additionally, a powerful sander is harder to control, which is not ideal when working with a small piece of wood. A bench sander with a ⅓ to ¾ hp motor—or about 1 to 5 amps—should be sufficient for most DIY sanding projects.

Adjustability 

The best bench sanders for woodworking can be adjusted to customize motor speed, sanding angle, and sanding surface, which gives the tool the ability to handle a wider range of projects and materials. A bench sander with speed controls lets users throttle its power output. 

The sanding angle on some belt sanders can be adjusted horizontally or vertically. There are also bench sanders that can be set to use a range of sandpaper types for smoothing materials other than wood.

Ease of Use

If the goal is to find a tool that’s easy to use, look for a sander with intuitive controls, clearly indicated measurements, and clear instructions for use. A bench sander needs to be heavy enough to remain steady as wood is pushed against it but light enough to move around as needed in the workshop. A tool in the weight range of 30 to 40 pounds is usually ideal. Even with sufficient heft, it’s helpful for a sander to have a nonslip base so that it remains stable on the workbench during use.

Make sure to choose the right kind of bench sander for the work that’s planned. For fine work, a bench sander with a spindle-sanding tool is the best bet. If a wide range of projects are planned, a sander with a belt sanding tool, disc sanders, or a grinding wheel may be the better choice. 

Additional Features

Bench sanders can come with several different accessories or built-in features to help make it easier to control the sander and achieve the best finish possible on projects. Remember that these tools can be loud, so have hearing protection on hand. 

  • Safety: Staying safe is the first concern while using a bench sander, so some manufacturers have included a removable key to prevent the power from being turned on and a lockable power switch. Some models may come with a benchtop sanding bench guard or safety gear like gloves, safety glasses, hearing protection, or a dust mask.
  • Bevel capacity: Beveling is the process of sanding or cutting a square edge to create a sloping one. Bench sanders can include a beveling device that controls the specific beveling range or beveling capacity, though this feature is more common on circular saws, miter saws, and table saws. Bench sanders tend to rely more on miter gauges for angled cuts.
  • Miter gauge: Some bench sanders have a built-in slot that can be used to secure a miter gauge, which holds the material in place during sanding. This is especially useful for sanding on an angle because the miter gauge keeps the angle consistent.
  • Dust collector: Bench sanders produce dust and debris that can become a safety hazard. Look for models with built-in dust collectors. When running, these collectors produce suction that pulls dust from the sandpaper into a dust collection bag. After the work is done, the dust can be easily emptied from the bag.

Tips for Using a Bench Sander

Safety is important when working with a bench sander. Personal protective equipment (PPE), including work gloves, safety glasses, hearing protection, and a dust mask, should be worn. 

Using proper sanding techniques is crucial. Operate the sander with a slow, deliberate pace to avoid accidentally over-sanding the material. Like any benchtop power tool, a bench sander should be operated on a flat, stable surface so that it doesn’t slip, wobble, or fall over. To recap:

  • Use PPE when operating a bench sander. 
  • Don’t force the wood against the sander; move slowly and deliberately.
  • Place the bench sander on a sturdy, flat surface so that it won’t shift while running.

FAQs 

With so many bench sander options and features, it’s understandable to have some lingering questions. If you still aren’t sure how to choose the best bench sander, the following helpful answers to common questions about bench sanders may help. 

Q. What are bench sanders typically used for?

Bench sanders may have several different sanding tools built into them, including disc, spindle, and belt sanders. Each type of sanding tool on the bench sander has a different purpose. Disc sanders are good for sanding a lot of surface area in a hurry or stripping paint from old furniture. 
Bench belt sanders can handle rough surfaces, and you can use them to round and shape wood. Spindle sanders are designed to produce a smooth finish on detailed edges and curves, so they’re good for fine carpentry and refinishing furniture.

Q. Is it safe to use a disc sander?

Any equipment can be dangerous if users don’t follow instructions and take precautions. Be sure to read the manual thoroughly before using any bench sander, and wear PPE for protection in the case of an accident. A belt sander with disc-sanding capabilities may be more manageable for new users. 

Q. What is the difference between belt-sanding and spindle-sanding?

Belt-sanding machines have a horizontal or vertical adjustable belt of sandpaper that runs through the tool like a conveyor belt. Belt sanders can trim edges, level surfaces, and shape materials. Spindle sanders have a single vertical oscillating spindle with a piece of sandpaper wrapped around it. They’re good for shaping edges, adding curves, rounding work, and detailed work.

Q. What is the difference between a bench grinder and a sander?

Bench grinders are more suitable for heavy-duty work and can cut, grind, and polish harder materials. Sanders, on the other hand, smooth and finish surfaces and are typically used on wood.

Q. What’s the size range of materials that I can use with a bench sander?

Bench sanders can handle a range of tasks, from smoothing long boards to beveling the edge of a dowel. They can handle big jobs or smaller jobs that would normally be done with a rasp or hand plane. The size of materials a bench sander can handle depends on the type of sanding tools it has and the size of the sanding surface.

Q. How do you choose the right size sander? 

Consider the types of projects you’ll be working on most often. Smaller sanders with smaller pads are best for light-duty projects. They are easier to maneuver and can handle more detailed work in tight spaces. Larger sanders, such as a 6-inch belt sander, will move over surfaces more quickly and are more appropriate for heavy-duty jobs.

Q. Is it better to sand by hand or with a sander? 

It depends on the project. A sander is a better choice when working quickly on a heavy-duty project to achieve more even sanding. More delicate or intricate projects require more control over the sanding pressure, so in those cases hand sanding is the better choice.

Meet the Testers

Glenda Taylor is a contractor, product tester, and writer focusing primarily on construction and power tools. She tests a wide range of power tools as well as other home improvement, household, and lawn-and-garden products.

Mark Wolfe is an expert gardener, landscaper, avid DIYer, and power tool aficionado, as well as a seasoned product tester and writer for BobVila.com. 

The post We’ve Researched Over 20 Bench Sanders, But We Like These 7 the Best appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-04T08:36:19-05:00
<![CDATA[After Testing These 9 Laser Measures, Our Top Pick is a Must-Have]]>When tape measures fall short, the best laser measure can help. We put the best laser measures to the test here.

The post After Testing These 9 Laser Measures, Our Top Pick is a Must-Have appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-laser-measure/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-laser-measure/Mon, 03 Feb 2025 10:12:37 -0500ReviewsHand ToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Laser measures use a laser and an optical sensor to determine the distance between two surfaces to find the height of a room, the length of a stairway, or other helpful measurements. With this tool, you won’t have to rely on a flexible metal tape measure. We put some of the best laser distance measures through the paces to test how accurately they measure, noting their features, to compile this list of the best laser measures for both DIYers and pros.

After lining up the laser distance measure with the surface on the other end of the room, this hand tool calculates the measurement almost instantly. Many laser measuring tools also provide area or volume measurements, as well as an impressive accuracy range that can measure to within  ⅛, 1/16, or even 1/32 inch. 

After testing many of the top models on the market, our favorite was the Bosch GLM165-25G Blaze Green-Beam Laser Measure, thanks to its easy-to-see green laser beam and vast number of features. We also spoke with industry experts to get their insights on ideal features that make a great laser measure, and we took this into consideration to evaluate other features like display, ease of use, and included apps. The result: this list of the best laser measures by category.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Bosch GLM165-25G Blaze Green-Beam Laser Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Atolla Laser Distance Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. UPGRADE PICK: Bosch GLM400CL Blaze Outdoor 400-Foot Laser Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST COMPACT: Leica Disto E7100i Laser Distance Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR PROS: DeWalt Tool Connect 100-Foot Laser Distance Measurer
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST HYBRID: Lexivon 2-in-1 Digital Laser Tape Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST RANGE: Leica Disto D2 Laser Distance Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. BEST LIGHTWEIGHT: Klein Tools Compact Laser Distance Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  9. BEST FUNCTIONS: Mileseey Outdoor Laser Distance Meter With Camera
    ↓ Jump to Review
A person holding the best laser measure against a door and being pointed toward the center of a room.
Photo: Tom Scalisi for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

RangeDisplayConnectivity
Bosch GLM165-25G Blaze Green-Beam Laser Measure165 feetBacklit LED None
Atolla Laser Distance Measure196 feetBacklit LEDNone
Bosch GLM400CL Blaze Outdoor 400-Foot Laser Measure400 feetBacklit, plus video viewfinderBluetooth
Leica Disto E7100i Laser Distance Measure200 feetBacklit LEDBluetooth
DeWalt Tool Connect 100-Foot Laser Distance Measurer100 feetBacklit negative LEDBluetooth
Lexivon 2-in-1 Digital Laser Tape Measure130 feetBacklit negative LCDNone
Leica Disto D2 Laser Distance Measure330 feetBacklit LEDBluetooth
Klein Tools Compact Laser Distance MeasureUp to 100 feetBacklit LCDNone
Mileseey Outdoor Laser Distance Meter With Camera330 feetBacklit LED and picture displayBluetooth

Our Top Picks

There are a lot of details to consider when selecting the right laser measure for the job. To help shoppers find their best option in a laser distance measure, below are some of the best product picks based on quality, price, and features. We performed hands-on testing with these models to ensure they met our expectations, and eliminated those that did not.

Best Overall

Bosch GLM165-25G Blaze Green-Beam Laser Measure

 The Bosch GLM165-25G Blaze Green-Beam Laser Measure on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Easy to see green laser beam
  • Can check back on previous measurements
  • Has a rounding option

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t include a rechargeable battery

Specs

  • Range 165 feet
  • Display Backlit LED
  • Connectivity None

The Bosch GLM165-25G Blaze Green-Beam laser measure has what it takes to replace any other outdoor laser level. It has a green laser beam that’s easy to see in daylight (something red lasers don’t always excel at) as well as a weather-, water-, and dust-resistant exterior to protect it from tough jobsite conditions. 

The Bosch has a number of features and functions that make it a solid choice. First, it has a maximum range of 165 feet, making it useful for most outdoor projects. It also has an audible beep, auto shutoff, a backlit display, and battery-save mode. It’s compatible with a tripod and its functions include distance, continuous measure, area, volume, Pythagorean theorem, wall area, stakeout, and leveling. It even allows users to choose if they’d like to round and what fraction they want to round to for faster measurements: ½, ¼, ⅛, 1/16, or 1/32 inch.

The Bosch was very easy to use, though we did think the digits on the screen were a little difficult to see. It also has a huge memory, storing so many measurements that we couldn’t even remember what they were. Our only complaint, and we had to dig for one here, is that it doesn’t have rechargeable batteries, but that’s the case for several other laser levels in this list as well.

What our tester says: “While the Bosch was great indoors, I found the bright green laser was an excellent touch for outdoor projects. It’s easier to see in daylight, which allowed me to get measurements faster and ultimately helped me save more battery life.”–Tom Scalisi, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Bosch Green-Beam laser measure at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Ace Tool.

Best Bang for the Buck

Atolla Laser Distance Measure

 The Atolla Laser Distance Measure next to its carry strap and two AA batteries.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Provides accurate measurements
  • Easy to carry compact design
  • Several measurement modes included

What We Don’t Like

  • Bottom isn’t perfectly flat
  • Laser wasn’t straight for some users

Specs

  • Range 196 feet
  • Display Backlit LED
  • Connectivity None

Portability and affordability are important considerations for some folks, and this model offers both. The Atolla device is compact enough to fit comfortably in a pocket, a tool box, or a bag, and is affordable enough that nearly any DIYer will want to consider it. Its adjustable wrist strap can be set to the ideal size to ensure that it doesn’t slip off the user’s wrist.

The Atolla water-resistant laser distance meter can measure accurately to within 1/16 inch up to a maximum distance of 196 feet. It features several measurement modes, including single measurement, continuous measurement, area, distance, volume, and Pythagorean mode. The backlit LCD screen is easy to see, and the built-in level helps properly align the laser with the targeted point in the distance.

The Atolla laser distance meter isn’t perfect by any stretch of the imagination, but it proved to be an excellent value during testing. First, the bottom isn’t completely flat, so it does rock a bit when trying to get a measurement. Also, the laser wasn’t straight. But compared to the other models, neither issue affected its accuracy. It offers most of the same calculations, including length, area, and volume. We also liked that it’s relatively compact for such a budget-minded laser measure. 

Get the Atolla laser measure at Amazon.

Upgrade Pick

Bosch GLM400CL Blaze Outdoor 400-Foot Laser Measure

 The Bosch GLM400CL Blaze Outdoor 400-Foot Laser Measure on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Video viewfinder is ideal for long-distance measuring tasks
  • Has the longest measuring range in the test
  • Fully digital menu provides ample user-friendliness

What We Don’t Like

  • Lots of beeping (but it can be turned off)

Specs

  • Range 400 feet
  • Display Backlit, plus video viewfinder
  • Connectivity Bluetooth

This outdoor laser measure from Bosch has a robust, reinforced glass screen that’s anti-scratch, glare-resistant, and shatter-resistant, which protects it and makes it easier to read the measurement results in bright light. It has several measurement options as well as built-in data storage capable of keeping the last 50 measurements and more than 600 images. 

Bluetooth connectivity allows users to transmit collected measurements wirelessly through the free Bosch app, which can also create custom blueprints. This device can measure accurately to within 1/16 inch with a maximum distance of up to 400 feet. It also has a built-in camera with an adjustable zoom so users can locate the laser at a long distance when outdoors, despite the light from the sun.

During testing, the GLM400CL appeared to have everything one could want from a laser measure. For one, the 400-foot range is excellent for outdoor calculations. The menu is fully digital, so swapping between area, volume, distance, stakeout, and other settings is simple. Also, the video viewfinder is incredibly useful in pulling measurements from long distances. Unfortunately, every button press emits a beep, and this model’s beep drove my dog (who often works with me) up a wall. Fortunately, for both my pooch and myself, I was able to turn it off (30 beeps later).h me) up a wall. Fortunately, for both my pooch and myself, I was able to turn it off (30 beeps later).

Get the Bosch Blaze laser measure at Amazon, Lowe’s, or DK Hardware.

Best Compact

Leica Disto E7100i Laser Distance Measure

 The Leica Disto E7100i Laser Distance Measure on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Thinnest model in the test
  • Bluetooth connectivity provides user-friendliness and sharing capabilities
  • Detachable pocket clip assists with portability
  • Perfectly flat bottom for easy measuring

What We Don’t Like

  • No volume calculation included in the model
  • App is a little frustrating to use

Specs

  • Range 200 feet
  • Display Backlit LED
  • Connectivity Bluetooth

Anyone looking for a compact laser measure that they can keep in a pocket or a tool belt will want to give the Leica Disto E7100i some serious consideration. This model has a measuring range of up to 200 feet (with a claim of 1/16-inch accuracy at that distance). It comes with a detachable pocket clip as well as Bluetooth connectivity. 

Also, the Leica Disto E7100i features a min/max function that allows the user to sweep the laser measure across a corner while it records only the longest measurement, offering extreme accuracy. It also has length and area measurements.

Testing proved that the Leica Disto is clearly a precise machine; its compact design does not affect its accuracy. We liked the pocket clip that can grip onto the lip of a tool bag, and it detaches easily. The bottom of this model is dead flat, so placing it against a surface and getting a quick, accurate measurement was a breeze. The only cons were that, despite the product description, we could not find a “volume” mode on this laser. Also, the Disto Plan app was a little frustrating to use; it wasn’t as easy to swap between metric and imperial measurements as it was on the actual laser.

Get the Leica Disto E7100i laser measure at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best for Pros

DeWalt Tool Connect 100-Foot Laser Distance Measurer

 The DeWalt Tool Connect 100-Foot Laser Distance Measurer on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Best app in the test
  • Suitable for those who need to save measurements
  • Simple functionality for first-time pros or DIYers
  • Hard to lose, with large, durable construction

What We Don’t Like

  • Bottom isn’t flat; may not suit some users’ needs

Specs

  • Range 100 feet
  • Display Backlit negative LED
  • Connectivity Bluetooth

This DeWalt laser measuring tool is an option for professionals who need an easy-to-use device to take quick measurements of 100 feet or less. It has only five buttons to learn, and the entire device is covered in a thick, durable protective cover to help keep the laser measure safe from scratches and impact damage if it’s dropped. 

The device can take and send measurement data through an active Bluetooth connection. The brand’s Tool Connect app collects and stores data for use in creating new projects like flooring or painting. It also can be used to export the project, saving pros time and effort that might otherwise include drawing a plan by hand.

The reason why the DeWalt laser distance meter is the best for pros truly boils down to its app. Pros who use the DeWalt Tool Connect app won’t have to add an additional app or confuse matters with another interface, and that’s a real “pro.” It was also the best app in the test, as it was the easiest to use once it was set up. The laser was simple to use, with very few buttons and easy functionality (despite having more functions than some more expensive models). We also like that it’s yellow, so it is harder to misplace. The only issue we had is that the bottom is not flat, so it wobbles quite a bit when held against a surface.

Read our full review: DeWalt Tool Connect 100-Foot Laser Distance Measurer

Get the DeWalt laser measure at Amazon or Acme Tools.

Best Hybrid

Lexivon 2-in-1 Digital Laser Tape Measure

 The Lexivon 2-in-1 Digital Laser Tape Measure on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Convenient 2-in-1 distance and tape measure design
  • Digital display is surprisingly clear
  • Simple 1-button design is perfect for first-time users

What We Don’t Like

  • Magnet in hook is very weak

Specs

  • Range 130 feet
  • Display Backlit negative LCD
  • Connectivity None

When it comes to convenient design, it’s hard to beat the Lexivon two-in-one digital laser tape measure. This model has a built-in tape measure, allowing the user to pull measurements up to 16 feet. But, should the user want a faster method or a longer measurement, the laser measure can handle them up to 130 feet.

There aren’t many other bells and whistles to the Lexivon tape measure, but that’s part of its beauty. Its one-button design makes it easy to use, and it was just as accurate as other models. The digital display was very easy to read as well, despite this being a relatively affordable and simple tool. Our only complaint about this distance and tape measure is that it doesn’t have any function other than length, so volume, area, and angled measurements require old-school paper-and-pencil calculations.

Get the Lexivon laser measure at Amazon.

Best Range

Leica Disto D2 Laser Distance Measure

 The Leica Disto D2 Laser Distance Measure on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Memory access is very easy
  • Suitable for sharing measurements
  • Easy to use and connect to a smartphone
  • Flat bottom for easy readings in certain spaces

What We Don’t Like

  • The app is frustrating to use

Specs

  • Range 330 feet
  • Display Backlit LED
  • Connectivity Bluetooth

When it comes to long measurements, Leica’s Disto D2 laser distance measure might be the tool for the job. This laser measure features a maximum measuring range of 330 feet, so it is as suitable for outdoors as it is for indoor work. 

The Leica Disto D2 has plenty of functionality as well, offering length, area, volume, and Pythagorean functions. It also connects to the Leica Disto Plan app through Bluetooth. The backlit LED display is easy to read.

During testing, the Leica Disto D2 was accurate and easy to use. We did struggle with a few of the settings (the Pythagorean theory setting, specifically), but the instructions cleared up the questions. Also, the backlit display on this Leica Disto D2 was very clear, and the dead-flat bottom made grabbing a quick measurement a breeze. Again, the Leica Disto Plan app was a little more difficult to use than the actual laser, but connecting the laser measure to a phone was very easy.

Get the Leica Disto D2 laser measure at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Lightweight

Klein Tools Compact Laser Distance Measure

 The Klein Tools Compact Laser Distance Measure on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Backlit display is easy to read
  • Easy to use and cycle through the settings
  • Fits in a shirt or pants pocket easily

What We Don’t Like

  • Only has distance measurements

Specs

  • Range Up to 100 feet
  • Display Backlit LCD
  • Connectivity None

The Klein Tools compact laser distance measure is worth considering for anyone looking for a lightweight, pocket-ready laser measure. This tool weighs just 2.3 ounces, so it can sit easily in a shirt or vest pocket, or it can be clipped to a pants pocket without weighing the user down. And despite its size, it has a range of up to 100 feet.

This laser measure is simple to use. It has one button that toggles through the different settings: beep or silent, auto shutoff, measure, or continuous measure. It doesn’t do any complicated functions like Pythagorean calculations, however, but it does store the last three measurements right on the backlit screen. 

We found the beauty of the Klein Tools compact laser distance measure in its simplicity. It doesn’t have a bunch of buttons or complicated functions, so we could simply take it out, grab a measurement, and move on. It’s also weather- and dust-resistant, so it should hold up to some basic outdoor hazards. We found the small backlit screen was actually quite easy to see as well. But if users need area or volume numbers, they’ll want to bring a pen and paper as this laser measure doesn’t offer anything but distance measuring.

Get the Klein Tools laser measure at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Best Function

Mileseey Outdoor Laser Distance Meter With Camera

 The Mileseey Outdoor Laser Distance Meter With Camera on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Incredible number of functions and measurements to use
  • Built-in camera keeps track of what measurements represent
  • Includes carrying case and recharging cord

What We Don’t Like

  • Great functions, but their labeling doesn’t make sense
  • We had Bluetooth connectivity issues

Specs

  • Range 330 feet
  • Display Backlit LED and picture display
  • Connectivity Bluetooth

When it comes to functions, the Mileseey 330-foot laser might take the cake. This model’s functions include distance, volume, area, several Pythagorean theorem calculations, angles, round area and volume, stakeout, and more. It also features Bluetooth connectivity, a built-in camera, and an auto-rotate display.

The Mileseey comes with a carrying case as well as a recharging cord. It’s weather- and dust-resistant, features tripod compatibility, and has a large picture display that functions with the camera. 

One of us tested a Mileseey laser measure in the past, and to be honest, we hated it. It was inaccurate and clunky. Luckily, Mileseey solved the accuracy problem, because this model is excellent. We found the sheer number of calculations available meant we’d probably never need a pen and paper or calculator to measure large objects of all shapes and sizes again. Also, the camera helped us keep track of what each measurement represents. 

But, it’s still a little clunky. None of the icons make sense, so cycling through them is somewhat hit or miss. Also, we could not get the Bluetooth to connect to our phone, and even the Mileseey product videos hint that it might not work with all devices. 

Get the Mileseey laser measure at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Laser Measures

Before getting our hands on our top picks for testing, we interviewed Matt Mace, a drafter and interior designer for HartmanBaldwin, a full-service architecture, construction, and interior design company serving Los Angeles and Southern California, who says that laser measures can vary greatly in price point, so shoppers will want to consider what they would be using one for. “The complexity and power of the laser measure will determine its maximum distance. It is likely that the more expensive the unit, the greater the distance capabilities it will have.” 

Mace goes on to say that “for the more technologically advanced, spending a little more can get you a unit that has Bluetooth capabilities that works in conjunction with a smartphone application to generate a floor plan automatically, and in real time.” We took this advice when selecting our range of products to test, ensuring that we had picks for both DIY and more professional applications. 

The number of measurements we pulled during testing numbered well into the hundreds. We tested length, area, volume, level, and every other function we could—many times. 

The first test included taking a measurement across three rooms, from the front door to the back of the house. Next, we used the laser measures to calculate the square footage of a room. We pulled each measurement from the exact same spots to ensure the laser measures were given a fair chance. Each measure from the laser measures that made our list proved to be accurate. After testing area measurements, we went with the volume test, which these models also passed. 

For laser measures with extra features like Bluetooth or an extended range, we waited until the end of the test to dig in and see how they worked. We downloaded apps, connected our phones, and used the long-range features on nearby buildings to get a full scope of what these models could do.

What to Consider When Choosing a Laser Measure

There are many choices when it comes to laser distance measures for DIYers and professionals. To help weed through the options, consider a few key features when comparing laser measuring devices since different characteristics are important for different types of projects. The following factors may help you find the right tool for the job.

Indoor vs. Outdoor Use

While most laser tape measures are only suited for measuring distance indoors, there are some products that are specifically for outdoor use. Most outdoor models can measure longer distances, but the laser light of the measure doesn’t change in any way. However, the bodies of outdoor models need to be able to stand up to rain, snow, and fluctuating temperature extremes.

This weather resistance helps prevent the interior of the tool from becoming damaged by moisture buildup, and the tightly sealed case helps keep out dust. However, the upgraded case comes at a cost, so users can expect to pay more for an outdoor laser measure.

Accuracy and Range

The accuracy and measurement range are typically listed together, with most products claiming an average accuracy rating to within ⅛ inch at a distance of 50 feet. However, some laser distance measures can accurately measure much longer distances (up to 320 feet). Just remember that as the distance increases, accuracy can begin to falter. Mace has some advice: “When taking a series of measurements in the same location, the smallest of the measurements is the truer number because angles will have a longer distance, in most cases.”

Laser measures rated for use at long distances often have a higher degree of accuracy, with many products capable of accurately measuring to within 1.6 millimeters or 1/16 inch. This increase in accuracy is often due to a stronger laser, which usually comes with a higher price tag. 

Functionality 

When selecting a laser distance measurer, consider the tool’s various functions that may help make a project as efficient and successful as possible. Those who have no experience using a laser distance measure might want to consider a model with detailed operating instructions or one with very basic functionality. 

A laser measure’s basic job is to simply measure the distance between two points, but some measurers can perform additional specialized functions:

  • Some laser distance measures contain an integrated calculator that uses the length and width measurements to provide the area of the room, which is necessary for flooring projects.
  • Other products can calculate volume using multiple laser measurements, which is helpful, for example, when determining the type of heater needed for a specific space.
  • Still other laser measures contain a Pythagorean measurement function that uses known proportions to find an unknown length or distance. 

Most laser measuring tools operate with the push of a button, though some provide a continuous or an automatic measurement while the operator moves around to find the ideal angle without needing to take multiple measurements. This is useful for quickly measuring the length, width, and height of a room.

Display

A bright display with text that’s easy to read in dim lighting is an integral feature of a laser distance measurer. If the display is backlit, the text is easier to see in both direct sunlight and low-light conditions.

Laser measuring devices may display only a few numbers to indicate the distance and the unit of measurement. Or, the displays may be more complex, featuring multiple menus, functionalities, and accuracy settings. Some even have rotating screens to make it easier to see the readings from any position.

Connectivity and Storage

The best laser tape measure is often equipped with a continuous measure feature and the ability to transfer data from the device to a computer; this is handy for multiple measurements like stairway length and riser heights, for example. Upgraded models have an extended measuring range, and they may be capable of indirect measurement with the Pythagorean measurement function, keeping all information stored safely on the device.

Laser measuring tools might also come with Bluetooth connectivity, which allows the stored measurements to be transferred wirelessly to a smartphone or tablet, saving time and effort. Just make sure to follow the manufacturer’s directions to properly connect the device. 

Additional Features

The best laser measuring tools aren’t just about the basics. They can include a range of additional features to help make the laser measure easier to use and more convenient for users, including a battery life indicator, sound alerts, automatic shutoff, and holsters. 

  • Battery life indicators are usually simple visual symbols that are displayed on the screen to tell the user how much battery life is remaining. They may begin to flash or trigger a sound alert when the battery gets too low. 
  • Sound alerts can be used to notify the user about a low battery, to indicate that the device is ready to take a measurement, or to simply alert the user when the laser measure has successfully taken the intended measurement.
  • The automatic shutoff function of a laser measure saves battery life. When the tool is idle for a certain period of time, it shuts down to conserve energy but typically stores the previous readings. 
  • Holsters may not add anything to the functionality of the device, but having a holster for the laser measurer makes it easier to carry, put away, or access when necessary. 

The Advantages of Owning a Laser Measurer

Adding a laser distance measure to your tool box or workshop helps make many home renovation projects easier to complete. A laser measurer can produce an accurate measurement at long distances, unlike a metal tape measure that may slip or sag if not properly supported at both ends.

Not only do these devices deliver better accuracy than regular tape measures, but they also can be recalibrated. Many laser distance measures provide the ability to measure area, volume, or even triangular shapes. Plus, their compact size makes them easy to carry, store, and use. 

Tips for Using a Laser Measure

Laser measuring tools are impressive tools that can make it easier to take long measurements. However, as the distance between objects increases, any slight alteration to the laser measure can change the measurement. To help ensure that the laser measure is lined up properly, use a piece of painter’s tape or a sticky note as a target. 

Outdoor measurements with a laser measure can also be difficult because the laser can get lost in bright sunlight, making it hard to see if it’s properly aligned. Some laser measures have a built-in viewfinder or an external viewfinder to help users locate the laser and line it up.

After using the laser measure, make sure to properly clean it. These tools rely on the uninterrupted beam of light, so any dirt or debris on the tool can block a portion of the laser, reducing the accuracy of the tool. 

  • For accurate measurements, consider using a small target, like a sticky note, on the opposite side of the distance being measured. 
  • Use a viewfinder to help track down the laser on the target surface in bright light. 
  • Before putting it away in a tool box, clean the laser measure to continue to get the best results.

FAQs

Q. How does a laser measure work?

A laser measure essentially emits light in a concentrated beam, then measures the time it takes for the light to hit an object and reflect back to the laser measure. Through this process, it is able to determine the distance between the laser measure and the object it’s pointed toward.

Q. Can a laser measure replace a tape measure?

A traditional tape measure is a better option for short measurements because it takes less time to set up, but there are hybrid laser measures that incorporate a traditional tape measure into the laser measure, providing users with both tools.

Q. How accurate is a laser distance measurer?

An average laser distance measurer is capable of accurately measuring a distance to within ⅛ inch or even 1/16 inch at a distance of 50 feet.

Q. Can you use a laser distance measurer outside?

Yes, laser measuring tools can be used outside, but bright sunlight can impair the ability to see the laser dot. Moreover, other factors can interfere with the reading, such as falling leaves or blowing dust and debris. Consider using a telescopic optical viewfinder, a tripod, or a targeting camera for better results outdoors.

Q. How do you calibrate a laser distance measurer?

To calibrate a laser distance measurer, refer to the manufacturer’s guidelines. Each model may have a different calibration method, such as a detailed manual process or an automatic process. Some laser measures may require professional calibration.

Meet the Tester

Tom Scalisi is a full-time DIY and construction writer for many of the largest websites in the industry, including BobVila.com, This Old House, Family Handyman, and Forbes. He also owns and operates a pest control blog, RiddaBugs.com

Additional research provided by Timothy Dale.

The post After Testing These 9 Laser Measures, Our Top Pick is a Must-Have appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-02-03T10:12:37-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Dovetail Jigs for Woodworking of 2025, Tested and Reviewed]]>The best dovetail jigs can clamp your project while you cut a strong, stable joint. Upgrade your woodworking shop with a top-rated model.

The post The Best Dovetail Jigs for Woodworking of 2025, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-dovetail-jig/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=132094Wed, 29 Jan 2025 09:32:48 -0500ReviewsPower ToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Dovetail jigs are indispensable when it comes to cutting matched pieces of corner joints for woodworking projects. They clamp workpieces in place, allowing users to run a router along a cutting template to create an interlocking joint that looks like a series of bird’s tails. Dovetail joints are very strong and stable with plenty of surface area for gluing. A dovetail router jig makes it possible to create perfect dovetail joints time and again. But these tools can be quite expensive, and not all are easy to use. So we did the research to find which options professional and amateur woodworkers preferred, then tested four of the most popular dovetail jigs on the market. 

The Porter-Cable Deluxe Dovetail Jig was our favorite. It is not the cheapest option, but it is very well built, accurate, and comes with an assortment of templates to make different kinds of dovetail joints, so it’s our first choice overall. Many readers may find one of the other, simpler models we tested better suited to their needs. In this review, we will share our observations from testing four of the best dovetail jigs on the market, detail a few other great options that we didn’t get to test, and highlight the essential shopping considerations to help you choose the right one for your shop.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Porter-Cable 4216 12-Inch Dovetail Jig Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: General Tools 861 E-Z Pro Dovetail Jig
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST FOR BEGINNERS: Rockler 22818 Complete Dovetail Jig
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST FOR ROUTER TABLE: Leigh RTJ400 Router Table Jig 
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR HALF-BLIND DOVETAILS: Porter-Cable 4210 12-Inch Dovetail Jig
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. MOST VERSATILE: Leigh Super12 12-Inch Dovetail Jig
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST FOR LARGE PROJECTS: Porter-Cable 4212 12-Inch Dovetail Jig
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. BEST FOR SMALL WORKSHOPS: Keller 1500 Journeyman Dovetail Jig
    ↓ Jump to Review

man working with Rockler dovetail jig
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila
Porter-Cable 4216
General Tools 861
Rockler 22818Leigh RTJ400Porter-Cable 4210Leigh Super12Porter-Cable 4212Keller 1500
Works withFree routerFree router or router table Free routerRouter tableFree routerFree routerFree routerFree router or router table 
Joint typesThrough dovetail, box, half-blind dovetail, rabbeted dovetail, sliding dovetail, mini through dovetail, mini box jointThrough dovetail, half-blind dovetail, boxThrough dovetail, half-blind dovetailThrough dovetail, half-blind dovetail, boxHalf-blind dovetail, rabbeted half-blind dovetail, sliding dovetailVariable through dovetail, half-blind dovetail, sliding dovetail, boxThrough dovetail, box, half-blind dovetail, rabbeted dovetail, sliding dovetailThrough dovetail
Template materialAluminumAluminumPhenolicAluminumAluminumAluminumAluminumPhenolic
Max material thickness1⅛ inch1 inch1⅛ inch1 inch1⅛ inch1 inch1⅛ inch¾ inch
Max material width12 inchesUnlimited11 inches16 inches12 inches12 inches12 inchesUnlimited

Our Top Picks

General Tools dovetail jig
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Different woodworking projects have different needs, so we tested four highly-rated models in our search for the best dovetail router jigs. Whether you need a heavy-duty jig with the widest range of settings, a budget-friendly tool that is easy to use and store, or absolute repeatable precision, one of these models is sure to work for you.

Best Overall

Porter-Cable 4216 12-Inch Dovetail Jig Kit

 The Porter-Cable 4216 12-Inch Dovetail Jig Kit on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Works with large- and small-dimension material
  • Outstanding functionality for the price
  • High-quality construction
  • Lots of joinery options
  • Accurate and repeatable results

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires dedicated workshop space
  • Adjustments require attention to detail

Specs

  • Maximum board width 12 inches
  • Maximum board thickness 1⅛ inch
  • Types of joints Through, half-blind, rabbeted and sliding dovetail, box, mini through dovetail, mini box

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.7/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 4.7/5

When it comes to build quality, accuracy, consistency, and convenience, the Porter-Cable 4216 deluxe dovetail jig checks all the boxes. This kit includes the bench-mount jig body, three heavy-duty milled aluminum templates, four professional-quality router bits, and router guides. It’s everything you need to create most dovetail sub-types in workpieces up to 12 inches wide and 1⅛ inch thick. 

This Porter-Cable 12-inch dovetail jig includes aluminum templates for half-blind, rabbeted half-blind, through, and sliding dovetails, as well as box joints and a mini dovetail/box joint jig. Adjustable edge guides ensure consistently accurate board placement, and sandpaper-backed cam-type clamps quickly secure boards in place. The jig also includes built-in adjustable router bit depth stops to eliminate measurement errors.

Although the Porter-Cable 4216 kit appeared fairly complex at unboxing, we found the instructions mostly clear. After reading the manual and watching a couple of short user videos, it only took about 15 minutes to assemble and adjust the jig and set up our router to start cutting. The results could not have been better—a perfect through dovetail joint on the first try. We ended up trying out all three of the reversible templates, and made joints with woods of both equal thickness and unequal thickness. Resetting the jig required close attention to several critical details, but following the directions each time led to nice snug joints. 

What our tester says: “The Porter-Cable dovetail system has a lot of moving parts, which made it a little intimidating at first. So I took the time to thoroughly read the instructions, and I got perfectly matched dovetails every time.” —Mark Wolfe, product tester and writer

Get the Porter-Cable 4216 dovetail jig at Amazon, Woodcraft, or Rockler.

Best Bang For The Buck

General Tools 861 E-Z Pro Dovetail Jig

 The General Tools E-Z Pro Dovetail Jig on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Budget-friendly price
  • Compact, easy to store
  • Durable milled aluminum jig
  • Simple clamp-on assembly
  • Works with freehand router or router table

What We Don’t Like

  • Achieving consistent accuracy may take practice
  • Awkward to clamp the jig/workpiece assembly for cutting

Specs

  • Maximum board width Unlimited
  • Maximum board thickness 1 inch
  • Types of joints Through and half-blind dovetails, box joints

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Build Quality 4.5/5; Value 5/5

For a compact and affordable approach to dovetails, check out the E-Z Pro dovetail jig from General Tools. Just attach it to the board and use a router table or handheld router with the included top-bearing dovetail router bit to follow the template. The jig fits boards of any width, and the open-ended design and alignment tool make repositioning simple. The maximum width it can handle without repositioning is 6 inches.

This kit comes with the jig and ¼-inch shaft router bit—a nice touch for such an affordable model. Screw-down clamps are built into the jig for clamping securely onto the board. While it doesn’t have additional templates, the jig does offer an effective way to create dovetail and box joints on boards of any width.

The General Tools dovetail jig worked as designed in our tests, which made it an effective and very affordable option for limited use on smaller projects. Following the included directions and a couple of video tutorials, we made nice tight dovetail joints with it. But we discovered that working with the clamp system requires some caution to prevent marring the wood surface. Using this jig with a router table worked best for us. With a handheld router, the assembled jig and board had to be clamped to a workbench for cutting and the jig’s clamp knobs made that an awkward task.

We liked the small size and the durable single-piece jig and template. It doesn’t require dedicated workshop space and doesn’t take up much space in storage, but it is really best for limited use. Dealing with the dual screw-down clamps for a large project or several wide boards—and being limited to 6 inches of dovetailing per setup—slows down the process compared to wider jigs with cam action clamps.

Get the General Tools dovetail jig at Amazon, The Home Depot, or TEquipment.

Best For Beginners

Rockler 22818 Complete Dovetail Jig

 The Rockler Complete Dovetail Jig on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Durable steel bench jig
  • Easy assembly and adjustments
  • Includes router bits, collet, and guide bushing
  • Permanent or portable/semi-permanent installation

What We Don’t Like

  • Clearer labeling on the jig would be helpful
  • Fewer joint options than our top pick

Specs

  • Maximum board width 11 inches
  • Maximum board thickness 1⅛ inch
  • Types of joints Through and half-blind dovetails

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.7/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 4.3/5

For anyone new to cutting dovetail joints, a simple, sturdy jig can make the job easier. The Rockler complete dovetail jig features a steel frame and phenolic templates for dependable service. The jig can handle through and half-blind dovetails, and the compact design makes it easy to store when not in use. This kit includes the jig, pins and tails templates, three router bits, a collet, and a guide bushing for accurate routing.

We assembled the Rockler jig in a permanent configuration on our workbench for testing. As an alternative solution for smaller shops, the base mounting system makes it easy to attach it to a mobile baseboard. That way the jig can be clamped onto a workbench when needed and stored out of the way when not in use. 

The cam-action board clamps made production work fast and easy once we adjusted the jig to the proper settings. Getting the settings right required a bit of trial and error for best results. There were preset locations with visual markers for working with ½-inch and ¾-inch stock, but no positive stops. Unfortunately the keys to the lettered stop marks were printed in the user manual but not labeled on the body of the jig (we made a label for future reference). Additionally, the router bit depth gauge is a visual marker that allows a bit more room for error compared to a hard physical stop; we used a mini square to match the bit depth to the visual guide. 

Get the Rockler dovetail jig at Amazon or Rockler.

Best For Router Table

Leigh RTJ400 Router Table Jig

 The Best Dovetail Jigs Option: Leigh RTJ400 Router Table Jig
Photo: Woodcraft

What We Like

  • Incredibly accurate with minimum setup
  • Supports workpieces up to 16 inches wide
  • Kit includes all necessary router accessories
  • Crystal clear instruction manual and on-tool prompts

What We Don’t Like

  • Not ideal for portable router tables
  • Longer workpieces feel less stable compared to a bench jig

Specs

  • Maximum board width 16 inches
  • Maximum board thickness 1 inch
  • Types of joints Through and half-blind dovetail, box joints

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.3/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 4.7/5 

A router table could be the best place to cut through and half-blind dovetails or box joints. The Leigh RTJ400 router table dovetail jig delivers precise, repeatable results with minimal setup time and almost no margin of error. It makes nine sizes of through dovetails, three sizes of half-blind dovetails, and four sizes of box joints. The kit includes a CNC-machined aircraft aluminum base template, adjustable side stops, cam clamps, ½-inch 14-degree and 8-degree dovetail router bits, ½-inch by ⅜-inch and ½-inch straight bits, and a patented elliptical guide bushing.

In many ways, the RTJ400 was the easiest jig we tested. We didn’t need space to mount another tool in the shop, and it held wide and narrow workpieces perfectly steady. The included bit-depth gauge made setting up the router fast and easy. Using a scrap of the workpiece material as a backer, we got clean cuts with no tear out. 

After carefully following the setup instructions, the only variable left to adjust was the width of the cut. This is where the elliptical router guide bushing came into play. Because the bushing is not perfectly round, it can be adjusted in 1/1000-inch increments until the pins fit perfectly between the tails. The bushing is indexed so that you can record the setting for later reference and repeat your results.

What our tester says: “The Leigh RTJ400 was incredibly accurate, but it’s probably best for freestanding router tables. We used it with our portable table and stand, which was not ideal for stability and comfort.” —Mark Wolfe, product tester and writer

Get the Leigh dovetail jig at Woodcraft, Lee Valley, Infinity Tools, or Leigh.

More Great Options

With so many options available, it’s possible that one of the jigs we tested may not be right for your dovetail joint woodworking projects. The following recommendations come from our research and hundreds of satisfied users.

Best For Half-Blind Dovetails

Porter-Cable 4210 12-Inch Dovetail Jig

 The Porter-Cable 4210 12-Inch Dovetail Jig on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 12-inch capacity
  • Solid 1-piece base
  • Built-in router bit depth gauge
  • Durable aluminum template

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires dedicated bench space
  • Requires several manual adjustments

Specs

  • Maximum board width 12 inches
  • Maximum board thickness 1⅛ inch
  • Types of joints Half-blind, rabbeted half-blind, and sliding dovetail

This kit features the popular Porter-Cable dovetail jig base assembly plus an aluminum template for half-blind, rabbeted half-blind, and sliding dovetails. The professional quality base and sturdy template make it a reliable option for those with a more limited scope of joinery needs. It’s more affordable than other premium models and takes up less space when not in use compared to the more expansive Porter-Cable kits. The one-piece base assembly mounts on a workbench for complete stability. Quick cam-action clamps secure the workpiece inside a sandpaper-faced bracket. Initial set up and adjustments take a few moments, but once set, the Porter Cable dovetail jig allows for accurate, repeatable cuts and fast production.

Get the Porter-Cable 4210 dovetail jig at Amazon, The Home Depot, Woodcraft, or MSC Industrial.

Most Versatile

Leigh Super12 12-Inch Dovetail Jig

 The Best Dovetail Jigs Option: Leigh Super12 12-Inch Dovetail Jig
Photo: Woodcraft

What We Like

  • Infinitely adjustable pin and tail spacing
  • Creates half-blind, through, and sliding dovetails
  • Includes three bits and elliptical template guide
  • User-friendly instructions and assembly

What We Don’t Like

  • More expensive than other dovetail jigs

Specs

  • Maximum board width 12 inches
  • Maximum board thickness 1 inch
  • Types of joints Variable through dovetail, half-blind dovetail, sliding dovetail, box

DIYers looking for an adjustable dovetail jig for a wide range of through and half-blind joints will want to give Leigh’s Super12 dovetail jig some thought. Most dovetail jigs offer a few different standard patterns, but the Leigh Super12 dovetail jig offers infinitely adjustable pin and tail size and spacing. The jig has a 12-inch capacity, and the adjustable fingers ensure a half pin at the edge of each joint, regardless of board width. For fast, accurate production, an included two-function spacer allows you to precisely offset the tail board and cut pins and tails at the same time. 

This jig can be used for through, sliding, and half-blind dovetails. It comes with a special half-blind bridge for guiding the router to improve accuracy, and works with a range of half-blind router bits for custom half-blind joint depths. The kit includes three bits, an elliptical router collar for fine tuning, and a sliding dovetail fence. It’s expensive, but the accuracy and adjustability it offers may be worth the cost. 

Get the Leigh dovetail jig at Woodcraft, Lee Valley, or Leigh.

Best for Large Projects

Porter-Cable 4212 12-Inch Dovetail Jig

 The Porter-Cable 4212 12-Inch Dovetail Jig on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Large 12-inch capacity
  • Includes two aluminum templates
  • Cam-action clamps for a fast, firm grip
  • Heavy-duty steel base

What We Don’t Like

  • Proper adjustments require close attention to details

Specs

  • Maximum board width 12 inches
  • Maximum board thickness 1⅛ inch
  • Types of joints Through dovetail, box, half-blind dovetail, rabbeted dovetail, sliding dovetail

This is the same 12-inch capacity dovetail jig frame as our Best Overall pick, but with only two aluminum templates instead of three: the Porter-Cable 4211 for half-blind, rabbeted half-blind, and sliding dovetails, and the Porter-Cable 4213 for through dovetails and box joints. It’s a reliable option in terms of durability and accuracy, and a more affordable option for those who don’t need the mini dovetail template. 

The jig features a one-piece base that must be mounted on a workbench for stability, and cam-action clamps that quickly secure the workpiece, allowing the creation of accurate repeatable joints. The two fixed templates are interchangeable and adjustable for wood thicknesses between ¼ inch and 1⅛ inch. The initial preparation and adjustments take a few moments, but once set, the Porter Cable dovetail jig allows for quick and efficient production.

Get the Porter-Cable 4212 dovetail jig at Amazon, Woodcraft, or Rockler.

Best for Small Workshops

Keller 1500 Journeyman Dovetail Jig

 The Keller 1500 Journeyman Dovetail Jig and piece of cut wood on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact size for workshop or jobsite use
  • Includes router bits for dovetails or box joints
  • Unlimited capacity for wide boards

What We Don’t Like

  • Accurate repositioning requires attention to detail

Specs

  • Maximum board width Unlimited
  • Maximum board thickness ¾ inch
  • Types of joints Through dovetail

Small workshops require compact, flexible tools like Keller’s 1500 Journeyman dovetail jig. The Journeyman is a one-piece kit that DIYers can use to cut through dovetails or box joints. The kit mounts to a strip of wood and measures 15 inches wide, though it’s repositionable for unlimited capacity.

This model comes with two router bits for cutting dovetails or box joints, complete with ball-bearing guides that ride along the template’s plate. While the capacity is limitless, repositioning this jig will require a careful eye to ensure accuracy. However, the benefit of this simple design is that it can sit on a shelf or rack until needed. 

Get the Keller dovetail jig at Amazon, Walmart, Woodhaven, or Keller.

Jump to Our Top Picks

man working with Porter Cable dovetail jig
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

How We Chose and Tested the Best Dovetail Jigs

For crafters who build furniture, cabinetry, and artisan boxes, beautiful dovetail joints are a point of pride, but cutting them by hand is very time-consuming. We wanted to source and test router jigs that would make the process faster without adding another layer of problems. After researching the most popular options, we decided to test four that represented a broad range of value and performance. To judge them, we used them as instructed to make through and half-blind dovetail joints in oak, pine, and poplar boards. After two days of cutting and assembling dovetail joints, we recorded our observations on a scoring rubric before assigning the award titles for this review.

Products tested 4
Time spent testing 15 hours
Tests performed6
Price range$50 to $440
Porter-Cable 4216
General Tools 861
Rockler 22818Leigh RTJ400
Ease of Use4.74.54.74.3
Build Quality54.555
Value4.754.34.7

What to Consider When Choosing a Dovetail Jig

Leigh dovetail jig model in operation process
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Dovetail jigs aren’t new technology, but they’re a less popular and approachable method for joinery than pocket hole jigs. That said, dovetail joints are strong and old-school, though new DIYers might not be familiar with them or know what to look for when shopping. The following sections contain some of the most important factors to consider when looking for dovetail tools.

Material

When choosing the best dovetail joint tool, consider the materials used in each product’s construction. The dovetail jigs of years past were usually cast iron in construction, and if they received regular maintenance, they lasted almost forever. However, they were very heavy and expensive. Today’s models use cast aluminum or steel in their construction.

Dovetail jigs with aluminum parts and templates are light and usually very accurate when making dovetail joints, but they can be expensive. Steel jigs and templates are heavier and less expensive, but they’re also less likely to bend and become inaccurate than an aluminum jig. Unlike aluminum, steel jigs also are susceptible to rust, so it’s best to store them in a dry shop.

One-Step vs. Two-Step

Two types of dovetail jigs are available. One-step jigs usually are a bit more expensive than two-step jigs, but for good reason.

A one-step jig allows users to cut the joint in two boards at the same time. By holding the board ends perpendicular to each other, users can run the router over both boards, perfectly aligning the pins and tails and creating an incredibly accurate joint. Two-step jigs allow users to mill only one board at a time: the board must be unclamped and replaced with the other board, which can introduce room for error. 

Fixed vs. Variable Template

Depending on the level of customization needed, users might choose a fixed or variable jig. Each makes robust and reliable joints but with different degrees of customization.

Fixed template jigs use solid templates that create a perfectly uniform joint. Their guides are spaced evenly and consistently. Users can choose from fixed dovetail jigs with different spacing or shapes, but the actual templates are not adjustable.

Variable templates allow users to adjust the spacing, the number of guides, and the look of the dovetail joint. This less uniform look creates a more handmade appearance that many craftspeople appreciate.

Capacity

Before purchasing a dovetail jig, consider the size of the boards each jig can handle. Many jigs can only handle boards of a certain size before they must be removed and repositioned. The more often the boards are repositioned, the more room for error.

For cabinetmaking work, a jig with a 12-inch capacity is usually enough for most drawers. Drawers are rarely deeper than 12 inches, but if they go deeper, some jigs allow the boards to be repositioned to keep milling.

For deeper boxes and crates, many craftspeople prefer a jig with a bit more capacity, such as one within the 24-inch range. These allow the creation of large dovetailed box joints with the router.

Accuracy

When considering the best dovetail jig for router projects, accuracy trumps any other factor. If the dovetail jig isn’t accurate, it will create loose, sloppy joints or worse, joints that don’t fit together at all. 

While most jigs have consistent, accurate templates, the quality of the jig itself has a lot to do with the accuracy of the joint. If the jig has lower-quality fittings, clamps, or hardware, things may shift while using the jig. Shifting will create less consistent results. Many of the best options are from trusted brands that use quality parts and hardware made from steel or aluminum.

Types of Joints

As a user’s woodworking journey unfolds and they begin to become better craftspeople, they often appreciate the ability to create a different look or style of joint with a dovetail jig.

Dovetail jigs are useful and fun because they can create so many different types of joints. By swapping out a template, the user can change from making a standard dovetail to a box joint to a half-blind or even a full-blind mitered joint.

Ease of Use

A DIYer probably doesn’t have years of old-school cabinetmaking experience to rely on when setting up a dovetail jig. As a result, most people look for a jig that’s easy to set up and use. Quick-change jigs and quick-grabbing clamps help with setup. Jigs with guides are also available for accurate depth setting, which is an essential measurement for blind and half-blind joints.

Also, consider the ease of cutting joints with the jig. Models that come with swappable router collars allow users to run the router along the guides smoothly, creating accurate joints. Quick lever-activated clamps also help make setup quicker and easier.

Lastly, consider the size and weight of the jig. If the jig is in a dedicated woodworking or cabinetmaking shop, removal and storage aren’t an issue, but most home craftspeople don’t have space to keep the jig up all the time. Older cast-iron jigs were fairly heavy, but today’s models are much more manageable. Remember: the longer the jig, the longer the board it can handle, but the more difficult it will be to store. 

Shopping for a Used or Refurbished Dovetail Jig

a hand holding General Tools dovetail jig
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

While there are lots of great dovetail jigs on the market to choose from, it might be worth shopping for a used model. Dovetail jigs have been around for a long time, and the older models were extremely durable. That means there are probably quite a few around, and the deals can be worth the effort.

Many older dovetail kits featured cast-iron construction, making them extremely durable (though a bit heavy). While they may not be adjustable, these jigs are almost sure to be accurate as long as they’re whole and have no missing or bent teeth. And older DIYers or retiring woodworkers looking to get rid of these heavy tools may be willing to pass them on to new craftspeople at heavy discounts. 

The downside is that these tools aren’t always readily available on sites like Amazon Renew, ebay Refurbished, or Walmart Refurbished. Due to their weight, they can be cost-prohibitive to ship, though it may be worth checking those sites first anyway. Local yard sales and swap meets may be a better bet.

Tips for Using a Dovetail Jig

If any play or wobble occurs in the jig or workpieces, the results won’t be as accurate. Clamp the jig base securely to the table or the workpiece to ensure the best possible joints.

If the boards come from a home improvement store, be sure to square up their ends before placing them in the router jig. Factory ends are rarely square, and routing them in a dovetail jig will create a box that wobbles or doesn’t assemble properly. Consider running them over a dovetail jointer to ensure that all of the surfaces are perfectly square. If not, a hand plane will do the trick.

Alignment is everything. When clamping the workpiece into the jig, ensure that everything is square and aligned properly. Take your time and make sure that this part of the process is correct. A mistake here can end with a poorly cut joint and two boards that don’t align properly. This step is even more critical when repositioning a jig for a wider board: a small mistake here could keep the joint from coming together at all.

  • For consistent results, be sure the jig or workpiece is clamped securely to the table.
  • Square the ends of the boards before milling them on the jig.
  • Ensure accurate alignment, especially when repositioning the jig on a wider board.

FAQs

Now that you know a bit more about the best-rated dovetail jigs, other questions may arise. Below is a collection of some of the most frequently asked questions about these woodworking tools and their answers. If you still have questions after this, a manufacturer’s customer representative customer service department may help.ilable for helping cut dovetails, other questions may arise. Here, find a collection of some of the most frequently asked questions about dovetail jigs and their answers. If you still have questions, a manufacturer’s customer representative customer service department may help.

Q. Do you need much experience to use a dovetail jig?

No, experience isn’t necessary, but it’s important to realize that small mistakes can result in ruined joints. Taking the time, aligning the workpieces, and ensuring that everything is stable on the workbench can all help achieve excellent results.

Q. What is a lapped dovetail joint?

Lapped dovetail joints are popular in cabinetmaking. These joints look like standard dovetails; however, the dovetails don’t extend all the way through one of the pieces. This makes the dovetails hidden from one side of the joint.

Q. What is a full-blind dovetail?

The dovetails in a full-blind joint are just like standard dovetails, but they don’t pass all the way through. They aren’t visible from any side of the joint. The dovetail pins hide inside the joint and provide a strong joint with lots of glue surface. 

Q. Are any dovetail joints weaker than the rest?

Comparing strength in dovetail joints comes down to several different variables, including the size of the dovetails and even the strength of the wood. However, comparing dovetails to box joints and other lap-style joinery almost always shows that dovetails are the strongest.

Q. What kind of joints can you make with a dovetail jig?

The possibilities are endless, but a dovetail jig can create dovetail, hidden dovetail, through dovetail, sliding dovetail, mitered dovetail, and box joints, just to name a few. 

Q. What size router do I need for a dovetail jig?

For most woodworking projects, a 2 horsepower router that accepts both ½-inch and ¼-inch collets will cut most dovetails cleanly and accurately. To ensure quality cuts, opt for the best wood router you can find. 

Q. How thick should a dovetail jig be?

The thickest dovetail jointed boards are usually no greater than 1 inch, so the jig should open to at least that thickness, perhaps as thick as 1⅛ inch.

Q. How tight should dovetails be?

The joint should be snug, but not so tight that the glue is forced out when the joint is assembled. If you can dry-fit the joint easily by hand (not with the aid of a mallet), and there is no play, it’s about right.

Q. What angle are dovetails cut at?

Dovetails should be cut at an angle between 15 degrees and 7 degrees depending on the type of wood—lower angles for hardwood and higher angles for softwood.

Q. What are the weaknesses of dovetail?

Well-made dovetail joints are strong and durable, but they can be difficult to mark and cut accurately. Even when using a router and dovetail jig, there are multiple variables that must be coordinated to create a joint that fits together properly.

Meet the Tester

Mark Wolfe is a writer, product tester and serial DIYer who lives in an older home. When he isn’t writing, he spends his time upgrading, repairing, and replacing anything and everything in his home, yard, and garden. He tests and writes reviews about hand and power tools, lawn care and home repair products, and outdoor living goods.

Additional research provided by original writer Tom Scalisi.

The post The Best Dovetail Jigs for Woodworking of 2025, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-29T09:32:48-05:00
<![CDATA[Too Many Devices, Not Enough Outlets? Here’s a Simple Fix!]]>Power several devices at once with the best power strip. This buyer's guide goes into shopping considerations and several top-rated recommendations.

The post Too Many Devices, Not Enough Outlets? Here’s a Simple Fix! appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-power-strip/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=126240Wed, 29 Jan 2025 09:23:38 -0500ReviewsInteriorLighting & ElectricalTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Power strips are a simple solution to having too few outlets. Today’s many cordless tools and electronic devices are handy, but they present a problem: the outlets in a home—especially an older home—just aren’t enough to plug everything in. To help meet the electrical needs in our readers’ homes, we researched over 35 power strips and selected the top 9 for hands-on testing. And we found a favorite! DeWalt’s Magnetic Power Strip earned top honors for its powerful magnets that attach firmly to metal surfaces, a 6.5-foot cord, and a quality build.

The right power strip for you depends on how you want to use it, where you want to use it, and what you need to plug in. Keep reading to find out how the following models fared in our tests and how they earned a spot in this lineup of the best power strips. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: DeWalt Magnetic Power Strip With 6 Outlets
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: AmazonBasics 6-Outlet Surge Protector Power Strip
    Jump to Review 
  3. BEST FOR OUTDOORS: APS IPX6 9-in-1 Outdoor Power Strip –FROM BEST OUTDOOR POWER STRIPS
    Jump to Review
  4. MOST VERSATILE: Belkin 8-Outlet Pivot-Plug Power Strip 
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST PORTABLE: Anker Nano 6-in-1 Power Strip
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST FOR WORKSHOP: Klein Tools PowerBox 1 Magnetic Power Strip
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST SURGE PROTECTION: Belkin 12-Outlet PivotPlug Surge Protector
    Jump to Review
  8. BEST FOR DESKS: Jgstkcity Desk-Clamp Power Strip with USB
    Jump to Review
  9. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: CRST Heavy-Duty Power Strip Surge Protector–FROM BEST OUTDOOR POWER STRIPS
    Jump to Review
The Best Power Strips Amazon Basics Power Strip
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Power Strips Comparison Chart

OutletsSurge ProtectionWater Resistance
DeWalt Magnetic6 AC, 2 USB-ANoNo
Amazon Basics6 AC790 JNo
APS Outdoor6 AC, 3 USB-A400 JIPX6
Belkin 8-Outlet8 AC1800 JNo
Anker Nano2 AC, 2 USB-A, 2 USB-CNoNo
Klein Tools4 AC, 2 USB-A, 1 USB-C2160 JNo
Belkin 12-Outlet Surge Protector12 AC, 2 cable4320 JNo
Jgstkcity5 AC, 2 USB-A, 4 USB-C1200 JNo
CRST Strip10 AC2800 JNo

Our Top Picks

Our list includes power strips for a wide range of uses. Whether you need to charge batteries in your workshop or garage or want extra plug-ins on a desk or nightstand, you’ll find the right one in our tested lineup.

Best Overall

DeWalt Magnetic Power Strip With 6 Outlets

 The Best Power Strips Option DeWalt Magnetic Power Strip With 6 Outlets
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Strong magnets securely attach to metal
  • High build quality
  • Master power switch
  • Two USB ports

What We Don’t Like

  • Not as many outlets as some models
  • No surge protection

Specs 

  • Outlets: 6 AC, 2 USB-A
  • Surge protection: No
  • Water resistance: No

Our Ratings: Design 5/5; Durability 5/5; Performance 5/5; Value 4.8/5

Two very strong magnets on the back of DeWalt’s power strip helped move it to the top of our list, and for good reason. In a workshop situation, it’s crucial to have instant access to a power strip when needed. We’ve had strips fall behind work benches and get tangled up in cords. With DeWalt’s magnetic power strip, all we had to do was put it on a metal surface, like a tool chest, and it didn’t move or fall off, even when we unplugged cords. 

It’s also very well built—there’s no wimpy plastic on this one. It features six standard outlets and two USB ports. The strip also has a master power switch we used to turn the entire strip on and off. That’s a handy feature because we didn’t have to mess with unplugging the individual cords when we shut down for the day. 

What our tester says: “While I tested power strips with more outlets, the DeWalt power strip offers everything a DIYer needs for plugging in tools and chargers. I especially liked that the magnets are so strong that the strip stayed where it was supposed to.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the DeWalt power strip at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Grainger

Best Bang for the Buck

AmazonBasics 6-Outlet Surge Protector Power Strip

 The Best Power Strips Option AmazonBasics 6-Outlet Surge Protector Power Strip
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Affordably priced power strip
  • Up to 790 J surge protection
  • Keyhole slots for wall mounting

What We Don’t Like

  • Limited spacing between outlets
  • No USB ports

Specs 

  • Outlets: 6 AC
  • Surge protection: Yes, 790 J
  • Water resistance: No

Our Ratings: Design 4/5; Durability 4.5/5; Performance 4.5/5; Value 5/5

Power strips don’t have to be expensive. The AmazonBasics 6-Outlet Surge Protector Power Strip is just right for basic appliances. It offers surge protection up to 790 joules (J), and best of all, it comes at an affordable price. 

We tested this power strip by plugging in several small appliances and chargers. The only issue we ran into was not being able to use every outlet if the cords we plugged in had large, 3-prong (grounded) plugs. There wasn’t quite enough room between the outlets to fit a 3-prong plug in each one, so we had to skip every other outlet or use cords without ground prongs. 

Since many small appliances only have two-prong plugs, many users would not have an issue with this power strip. We found it well-suited for home offices, bedrooms, and other spaces where more outlets are needed. We also liked the ability to mount this strip on a wall via the keyhole slots on the backside. 

Get the AmazonBasics power strip at Amazon

Best for Outdoors

AmazonBasics 6-Outlet Surge Protector Power Strip

 The Best Power Strips Option APS IPX6 9-in-1 Outdoor Power Strip
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Suitable for outdoor use in wet weather
  • Integrated safety fuse
  • Widely spaced outlets

What We Don’t Like

  • Offset cord doesn’t fit GFCI boxes

Specs 

  • Outlets: 6 AC, 3 USB-A
  • Surge protection: Yes, 400 J
  • Water resistance: IPX6

Our Ratings: Design 4.5/5; Durability 4.5/5; Performance 4.5/5; Value 4.5/5

Along with its excellent weather resistance (IPX6), this power strip from APS also offers a nice collection of socket options. Its six 3-prong outlets are well-spaced with no obstructions, so we had no problem fitting larger plugs side by side. There are also three USB plugs on the end of the power strip that are convenient for charging smart devices, lights, or small electronics that use a USB outlet. We found it particularly handy for charging drone batteries.

Along with being weatherproof, the power strip also has a durable feel thanks to its tough plastic housing. It barely registered a scratch when we dropped it. Plus, it has an internal circuit breaker that trips at 1,875 watts and a 306 rotating ball joint where the power cord connects to the power strip, preventing bending that can cause damage at this connection point. 

With its ample capacity and top-notch weather resistance, this is our favorite outdoor power strip for extended use.

Get the APS outdoor power strip at Amazon

Most Versatile

Belkin PivotPlug 8-Outlet Pivot-Plug Power Strip

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Adjustable pivot plugs
  • Cord management clip
  • Light-up status indicators
  • High joule rating (1,800)

What We Don’t Like

  • Shifts if not mounted

Specs 

  • Outlets: 8 AC
  • Surge protection: Yes, 1,800 J
  • Water resistance: No

Our Ratings: Design 5/5; Durability 5/5; Performance 4.5/5; Value 4.5/5

We’re smitten with Belkin’s idea of incorporating pivot plugs in their power strips. What a neat idea! We tested other power strips where the outlets were configured in a way that kept us from using every one of them because using large plugs blocked adjacent outlets. That’s not a problem with pivot plugs.

Turning the outlets one way or the other on the power strip’s column gave us ample space for every plug. Another perk is a clip at the end of the strip where we were able to tuck the cords to help keep things tidy. The Belkin power strip has a heavy-duty 6-foot cord and light-up status indicators that let us know the unit was protected and grounded. 

The only downside—and it’s really just a matter of personal preference—is that the power strip itself tends to roll around a bit unless it’s mounted via keyholes on the back. With a high joule rating of 1,800, we think this power strip surge protector is a good pick for sensitive electronics and digital devices. 

Get the Belkin PivotPlug 8-outlet power strip at Amazon, Walmart, or Belkin

Best Portable

Anker Nano 6-in-1 Power Strip

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact power strip with flat plug
  • Rapid-charge USB ports
  • Over-volt and short-circuit protection
  • Ideal for travel or remote work

What We Don’t Like

  • Non-surge power strip
  • Limited outlets

Specs 

  • Outlets: 2 AC, 2 USB-A, 2 USB-C 
  • Surge protection: No
  • Water resistance: No

Our Ratings: Design 4.5/5; Durability 4.5/5; Performance 5/5; Value 4.5/5

We found a lot to like about the Anker power strip, although it’s more of a square than a strip. It’s a great option for anyone who needs extra plug-ins on the fly. It doesn’t have a joule rating, so it doesn’t provide surge protection; however, it does offer over-volt and short-circuit protection, so we’d be comfortable taking it to an internet cafe, plugging in a laptop, and charging our phone and tablet (via the rapid-charge USB ports) while we work remotely. 

We liked the ultra-slim design of this flat plug power strip, which includes a narrow plug that can be plugged into tight spots behind desks and nightstands. It comes with a flexible, 5-foot cord that winds around it, making it suitable for storing in a backpack or laptop bag without taking up too much space. 

While it only offers 2 AC outlets, that’s probably enough for someone traveling or working remotely for the day. It’s not made for plugging in power tools, but it’s perfect for anyone on the go. We also like the fact that it’s made from 75 percent recyclable materials. 

Get the Anker power strip at Amazon, Walmart, Newegg, and Anker

Best for Workshop

Klein Tools PowerBox 1 Magnetic Power Strip

 The Best Power Strips Option Klein Tools PowerBox 1 Magnetic Power Strip
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • High surge protection
  • Wall-mount power strip
  • Ideal for shop use
  • Very strong magnets

What We Don’t Like

  • Not weather-resistant

Specs 

  • Outlets: 4 AC, 2 USB-A, 1 USB-C
  • Surge protection: Yes, 2,160 J
  • Water resistance: No

Our Ratings: Design 4.5/5; Durability 5/5; Performance 4.5/5; Value 4.3/5

Klein Tools did a great job with the PowerBox 1, and we found the perfect spot for it: in our workshop! The PowerBox 1 provides 2,160 J of surge protection and comes with magnets on the back for attaching to a metal surface. We liked the idea of the magnets, and they were even stronger than the ones on the DeWalt power strip. We attached the PowerBox to a metal workstand and we had to pull hard just to get it off. 

We also liked the mounting holes in all four corners. This allowed us to insert screws to mount the PowerBox to a wall or workbench and eliminate movement. The PowerBox is a good choice for woodworkers, crafters, and DIYers who must plug in multiple tools and simultaneously charge their phones. We like that it has good surge protection, but we wish Klein Tools had designed it to be weather-resistant so that we could use it outdoors as well. Nonetheless, it’s a nice heavy-duty power strip. 

Get the Klein Tools power strip at Amazon, Lowe’s, and The Home Depot.

Best for Surge Protection

Belkin 12-Outlet PivotPlug Surge Protector

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • High surge protection
  • 8 pivoting outlets
  • 2 cable connectors
  • Integrated cord clip

What We Don’t Like

  • Not suitable for outdoor use

Specs 

  • Outlets: 12 AC, 2 cable
  • Surge protection: Yes, 4,320 J
  • Water resistance: No

Our Ratings: Design 4/5; Durability 4.5/5; Performance 4.5/5; Value 4.8/5

For a high level of surge protection, the Belken 12-outlet power strip is hard to beat. It comes with a 4,320 J rating, making it a good choice for plugging in sensitive electronics. Like the other Belkin model we tested, this one features pivot outlets (eight, to be precise), which we were able to rotate outward to make the most of the available space. We plugged in large and small plugs with no problems. 

It also has four standard AC outlets on the front center that don’t move and a handy cord clip at the end of the strip. The great surge protection was our favorite feature on this one, but be aware that plugging in 12 devices or tools and running all or most of them simultaneously will likely flip a breaker. Another perk is that this power strip has an 8-foot cord, so it offers more location versatility.

What our tester says: “I think this is a great power strip for use in a home office or media room, where users can plug in several sensitive devices at once without worrying about power surges.” —Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Belkin PivotPlug 12-outlet power strip at Amazon, Walmart, or Belkin

Best for Desks

Jgstkcity Desk-Clamp Power Strip with USB

 The Best Power Strips Option Jgstkcity Desk-Clamp Power Strip with USB
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Declutters messy desks and controls cords
  • Versatile charging options
  • Sturdy twist clamp

What We Don’t Like

  • Limited surge protection for sensitive devices

Specs 

  • Outlets: 5 AC, 2 USB-A, 4 USB-C
  • Surge protection: Yes, 1,200 J
  • Water resistance: No

Our Ratings: Design 5/5; Durability 4.5/5; Performance 5/5; Value 5/5

Home office desks are notorious for hosting a messy tangle of cords. Our work desk is covered with cords for speakers, monitors, an Echo Dot, and a mouse. Another cord is involved if we want to charge our phones as we work. As such, we love the organizational ability of this desk-clamp power strip. 

It has 5 AC outlets, 2 USB-A ports, and 4 USB-C ports. The clamp is sturdy, and when it’s tightened snugly, it keeps the power strip firmly in place. This is a great little desk power strip, but it isn’t perfect. It offers 1,200 J of surge protection, but we don’t think that’s quite enough to protect pricey PCs, monitors, and electronic peripherals. We solved this problem by plugging the desk power strip into a dedicated surge protector outlet (sold separately) under the desk. It’s the perfect setup for us: outlets in a handy, organized spot, and powerful surge protection for sensitive electronics.

Get the Jgstkcity power strip at Amazon

Best Heavy-Duty

CRST Heavy-Duty Power Strip Surge Protector

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Good build quality
  • Long 15-foot cord
  • 15-amp circuit breaker

What We Don’t Like

  • Not water-resistant

Specs 

  • Outlets: 10 AC
  • Surge protection: Yes, 2,800 J
  • Water resistance: No

Our Ratings: Design 4/5; Durability 5/5; Performance 4.5/5; Value 4.8/5

Along with a tough build and large capacity, this outdoor power strip is exceptionally well-designed for those who need a power hub for corded power tools. The CRST has a tough aluminum housing that, combined with the thick plastic covers on its ends, makes it capable of enduring plenty of abuse and drops. We appreciated its thicker 14-gauge power cord (most are 16-gauge).

Measuring 15 feet long, the power cord is much longer than others. This allowed us to extend it out into the yard or driveway without having to add an outdoor extension cord. And while that long cord could be unwieldy, the strip includes an integrated cord holder that allowed us to wrap any slack neatly around the housing and secure it with a Velcro strap. If you need a power strip with a long cord, this is the one.

Its bright yellow color makes it more visible to foot traffic, and it comes equipped with a 15-amp breaker switch in case the user pulls too much juice at one time. This is a good power strip for outdoor DIY projects, but it’s not water-resistant, so use it only in dry conditions. 

Get the CRST power strip at Amazon

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose and Tested the Best Power Strips

Testing Stats
Products tested 9
Time spent testing 2 weeks
Tests performed3
Price range$15 to $60

When we started researching the best power strips, we discovered hundreds of different options on the market, so we started by looking carefully at the top-rated models. We took brand names into consideration, to an extent—Anker and Belkin are well-respected names in the industry, for example—but we also looked carefully at niche brands and AmazonBasics picks with good customer reviews. Our initial list had over 35 best-selling power strips, but we narrowed that down to nine picks we wanted to try out for ourselves. 

In our hands-on testing, we used the power strips for two weeks, noting their build quality, trying out their features, and assessing their design. We plugged in battery chargers, power tools, PCs, monitors, peripherals, and small appliances.

Since the primary purpose of buying a power strip is to have additional outlets, we noted how easy (or difficult) it was to use all of the outlets on the strip at the same time. Our goal wasn’t to see how much power we could pull—that depends solely on the circuit—but to see how well the strips were designed for real-world use. 

We awarded points based on a rubric: the better a strip performed on a test or assessment, the higher the points. After testing, we averaged the points to find our top pick and categorize the others by their best use. 

DesignDurabilityPerformanceValue
DeWalt Magnetic5554.8
Amazon Basics44.54.55
APS Outdoor4.54.54.54.5
Belkin 8-Outlet554.54.5
Anker Nano4.54.554.5
Klein Tools4.554.54.3
Belkin 12-Outlet Surge Protector44.54.54.8
Jgstkcity Desk Clamp54.555
CRST Strip454.54.8

What to Consider When Choosing a Power Strip

Before choosing the best power strip for your needs, consider how and where you plan to use it, as well as the important factors below. 

Equipment Type

The right power strip for your needs depends heavily on how it will be used and which devices or equipment will be plugged into it. 

  • Power tools need a rugged power strip with wide spacing between the outlets so larger plugs will not block adjacent outlets. These power strips also typically have a metal frame to protect them from impact damage and a higher power capacity, so you can use them with larger appliances that could overload a regular power strip.
  • Office equipment requires a power strip with multiple specialty outlets for various devices, including modem outlets, USB wall outlets, and coaxial connections. Power strips with surge protection will keep office equipment safe.
  • Simple power strips are suitable for small household appliances. Although many residential-use power strips may have surge protection capability, they are not intended for high-power appliances or devices.
  • Multimedia and smart devices require high surge protection because a power surge can easily damage the sensitive electronics inside these devices. Power strips with multiple USB outlets and smart home compatibility are an ideal option for your smart devices.
  • Outdoor equipment requires a power strip that is weather-resistant, temperature-resistant, impact-resistant, and offers surge protection to ensure that neither the devices nor the strip will be damaged. However, larger garden tools, like lawnmowers or snowblowers, typically require a heavy-gauge extension cord plugged directly into a home’s outlet.

Number of Outlets

The number of outlets you need in a power strip depends on both how many and what type of devices you want to plug into it. Remember that you should not plug high-power-capacity devices into power strips, regardless of the number of outlets. The circuit still limits the power strip.

Power strips can have as few as two outlets or more than 20. These outlets can be standard power outlets, USB-A or USB-C outlets, wide-spaced outlets intended for larger adapters, and specialty connections like ethernet or coaxial connections. The number and configuration of outlets are mostly a personal preference; however, consider that as the number of outlets increases, so does the size of the power strip. So, if space is an issue, choose a power strip with fewer outlets and a narrower profile.

Length and Configuration

Length and configuration refer to the length of the cord and the type of outlets in the power strip. 

  • Cord length is always an important consideration. Cords should be long enough for their intended purpose, but not so long that they create an untidy mess—but often cords don’t come in exactly the right length. Cord length typically ranges from less than a foot to more than 20 feet, though the average length is approximately 6 feet.
  • Outlet type is another factor to consider before purchasing a new power strip. Many users are fine with a product that only has standard outlets, but others need USB outlets to make it easier to charge smartphones, headphones, and other USB devices. Another option is a power strip with outlets that are compatible with smart home systems like Amazon Alexa to set up timers, turn the electrical outlet off from anywhere via an app, or control the power flowing to the strip through voice control.

Surge Protection

In our technologically advanced society, many devices and appliances embedded with complex electrical systems are very sensitive to power surges, so surge protection is a feature of a power strip nearly everyone needs. Power surges typically occur when a storm brings down electrical lines, causing the power company to reroute power to address power demands. These changes can create inconsistent power flow fluctuations, resulting in a power surge. The only way to protect all appliances and devices is with a whole-house surge protector, but strips with surge protection will reduce the risk of damage to sensitive electronics and devices. 

Surge protection—also referred to as the surge suppression rating of a power strip—is measured in joules (J) and normally varies, depending on the product, from as low as 100 J to higher than 4,000 J. When using a power strip as surge protection for expensive or sensitive devices, it is important to invest in a power strip with a high surge suppression rating.

Smart Tech

A standard power strip runs electricity to multiple devices, typically via an on/off switch. Smart power strips function similarly, but they can also connect with compatible smart home systems, like Amazon Alexa or Google Assistant, usually through a WiFi connection.

Once a smart power strip connects to a smart home system, users can control the electrical supply to the paired devices through either voice control or a smartphone app. Some power strips even support timers or schedules so connected devices will automatically turn on or off.

Safety Features

While power strips don’t seem very dangerous, cords can become trip hazards and electrocution and fires can result from improper use. Many power strip manufacturers include safety features like full-metal housing, internal circuit breakers, or ground-fault circuit interrupters (GFCIs) to protect users and their property from harm.

  • Full-metal housing is especially useful in construction environments where impact damage is a regular risk. These power strips are made with a durable metal casing to protect the outlets, cables, and internal connections from damage, including a potential fire or short-circuiting of the power strip.
  • Internal circuit breakers are designed to automatically turn off the power strip in the case of a dangerous system overload to help prevent damage to the electrical system.
  • Ground-fault circuit interrupters (GFCIs) are typically installed in outlets in areas where water is a hazard. If a piece of electrical equipment comes into contact with water, a GFCI automatically cuts electricity to the outlet if it detects a short circuit to protect users from injury—and even death—from a dangerous electrical shock.

FAQs

Take a look below to find the answers to some of the most commonly asked questions about electrical power outlet strips.

Q. Are power strips dangerous?

If used properly, a power strip can actually reduce the risk of electrical fire by providing a safe place to plug in additional accessories. However, if misused, either by overloading it, using it for appliances it’s not rated for, or linking multiple power strips together (called daisy-chaining), a power strip can become a danger. 

Q. What should you never plug into a power strip?

Never plug high-power-capacity appliances, such as electric space heaters, refrigerators, microwaves, toaster ovens, and air conditioners, into a power strip.

Q. Is it dangerous to daisy chain power strips?

Daisy-chaining power strips means linking multiple power strips together in a series that connects back to a single electrical outlet. This is a big concern for fire-fighting professionals because daisy-chained connections will almost invariably lead to an overloaded power strip that heats up until it burns out or catches fire.

Q. Why do power strips catch fire?

Power strips can catch fire if they are old or frayed, or if they are overloaded beyond their capacity. This can happen when several devices that draw too much electricity, such as air conditioners or electric heaters, are plugged into the same strip. The strip will then heat up and eventually begin to melt, sparking a fire.

Q. How long do power strips last?

While there is some discrepancy between specific products, on average, power strips will last for about 2 years before replacement is necessary. However, they can last between 3 to 5 years if properly maintained.

Q. Is it safe to plug two power strips into one outlet?

It depends on what you plug into the strips, but in general, it’s not a good practice to plug two strips into one outlet. Overloading the circuit will cause the breaker to trip.

Q. Are smart power strips worth the money?

In a home that has too few outlets for the owners’ needs, power strips can absolutely be worth the money because they expand the number of outlets available. Power strips that have surge protection are also ideal for homes with a lot of sensitive electronics, as the strips prevent damage when power surges might otherwise cause damage. Just keep in mind that power strips don’t actually provide more power to the home—they just allow more devices to use the power that’s already there.

Q. Should I turn off my power strip at night?

It’s not a bad idea. Turning it off will reduce standby energy usage, but as long as you’re not overloading the circuit, it should be safe to leave on.

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a contractor, product tester, and writer focusing primarily on construction and power tools. She tests a wide range of power tools as well as other home improvement, household, and lawn-and-garden products.

Tony Carrick has contributed to BobVila.com since 2020. He writes how-to articles and product reviews in the areas of lawn and garden, home maintenance, home improvement, auto maintenance, housewares, and technology.

Additional research was provided by Timothy Dale.

The post Too Many Devices, Not Enough Outlets? Here’s a Simple Fix! appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-29T09:23:38-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Drywall Sanders for Quick and Easy Sheetrock Smoothing, Tested]]>The best drywall sanders allow the user to achieve a high-quality finish. We researched a variety to bring you a list of the best drywall sanders.

The post The Best Drywall Sanders for Quick and Easy Sheetrock Smoothing, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-drywall-sanders/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=188393Tue, 28 Jan 2025 04:39:58 -0500ReviewsInteriorPower ToolsTools & MaterialsWalls & CeilingsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Drywall sanders help make the laborious process of preparing sheetrock for paint or plaster quicker and easier. These helpful tools are available as both manually powered pole sanders and options with high-speed motors that hook to convenient dust collection systems. To help you choose the version that’s right for your next DIY project, we put seven popular models through hands-on tests and reached out to a construction expert for additional insights. 

Based on our efforts, we chose the Wen 6377 Variable-Speed Dual-Head Drywall Sander as the top sheetrock sander for its powerful corded construction, easy-to-maneuver design, and effective wet/dry dust collection hose. Still, a few of the other tools we tested are worth considering. Keep reading to learn more about all the products that won awards and get details on which features matter most when selecting from among the best drywall sanders. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Wen 6377 Variable-Speed Dual-Head Drywall Sander
     Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Hyde 09170 Dust-Free Pole Sander Kit
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST POLE SANDER: Marshalltown 48″ Pole Sander With Aluminum Handle
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST CORDLESS: DeWalt 20V Max* Cordless Drywall Sander
    Jump to Review
A close-up of the best drywall sander option
Photo: Tom Scalisi for Bob Vila

Best Drywall Sanders Comparison Chart

Product NameType WeightDust Collection 
Wen 6377 Variable-Speed Dual-Head Drywall SanderCorded electric 17.4 poundsHose for wet/dry vac
Hyde 09170 Dust-Free Pole Sander KitManual pole2.36 poundsHose for wet/dry vac
Marshalltown 48″ Pole Sander With Aluminum HandleManual pole1.6 poundsNone
DeWalt 20V Max* Cordless Drywall SanderCordless electric12.6 pounds Hose connection (no hose included)

Our Top Picks

The following products are our picks for the best drywall sanders available today. We suggest you compare each option closely before choosing the right ceiling sander on a pole or power drywall sander for your needs.

Best Overall

Wen 6377 Variable-Speed Dual-Head Drywall Sander

 The Best Drywall Sander Option Wen 6377 Variable-Speed Dual-Head Drywall Sander
Photo: Lowe’s

What We Like

  • 2 sanding heads for bulk and detailed work
  • Handle folds for storage and telescopes for tall spaces
  • Adjustable shoulder strap makes it easier to handle

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t come with a dust bag

Specs 

  • Type: Corded electric
  • Weight: 17.4 pounds
  • Dust collection: Hose for wet/dry vac

The Wen 6377 drywall sanding vacuum is a corded electric model with a 5-amp head-mounted motor that pivots and swivels for easy sanding. It offers variable speeds between 600 and 1,500 revolutions per minute (RPM), making quick work of big projects. It comes with a standard 8.5-inch round head for large spaces and a triangular head to reach corners, and no tools are necessary to switch between the two. 

We found we didn’t use the triangular head all that often in our tests, but having the option to do so is nice since hand-sounding corners with a block is the only alternative. When working on the ceiling, we appreciated the relatively light weight of this tool (just 9 pounds without one of the swappable heads attached) and the fact that the weight is fairly evenly distributed. The adjustable shoulder strap made using and carrying it even easier, and the 15-foot hose allowed us to get up high while remaining connected to our wet/dry vac. Still, it would be nice if this drywall sanding vacuum tool came with a bag. It does, however, come with a starter pack of sanding sheets that includes five of both round and triangle in grits of 60, 80, 120, 150, 180, and 240.

What our tester says: “The swappable heads are great, as the rotary head can do the bulk of the work while the triangle-shaped head gets into corners—plus, they’re very easy to change. We also really liked the telescoping and folding handle, which felt sturdy and secure during use but was easy to break down for storage.”—Tom Scalisi, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Wen drywall sander at Lowe’s, The Home Depot, or Wen.

Best Bang for the Buck

Hyde 09170 Dust-Free Pole Sander Kit

 The Best Drywall Sander Option Hyde 09170 Dust-Free Pole Sander Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Comes with a vacuum hose and adapter
  • Lightweight design enables extended use
  • Head stays flat during use, which we prefer over those that flip

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t come with a pole

Specs 

  • Type: Manual pole
  • Weight: 2.36 pounds
  • Dust collection: Hose for wet/dry vac

Manual pole sanders offer a low-cost alternative to buying an electric sander machine for drywall, but their usual drawback (apart from the physical effort required) is that drywall dust gets everywhere. However, since the Hyde 09170 vacuum sander includes a hose attachment plus an adapter that fits most wet/dry vacs, it strikes an excellent balance between affordable and user-friendly.

Though this manual sander requires more physical input than a power option, we appreciated how much cleanup effort the hose saves us since it did such a good job collecting sanding dust. It even has adjustable vents that allow you to regulate the suction level to ensure you suck up as much dust as possible. We also liked that the swiveling head clamps to a sanding screen rather than using hook-and-loop abrasives and that the head remains flat during use instead of flipping over like many pole sanders do. Though this dust-free drywall sander kit comes with a washable, reusable screen, it doesn’t include a handle. It does have universal threads, however, so it will work with a standard broom or painter’s pole. 

Get the Hyde drywall sander at Amazon, Ace Hardware, or Target.

Best Pole Sander

Marshalltown 48" Pole Sander With Aluminum Handle

 The Best Drywall Sanders Option: Marshalltown 3.25-Inch by 9.25-Inch Pole Sander
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Quick-clamp makes installing sanding screens easy
  • No-flip swivel maneuvers without flipping
  • Included pole is comfortable and durable

What We Don’t Like

  • Pole is double female and won’t fit other tools

Specs 

  • Type: Manual pole
  • Weight: 1.6 pounds
  • Dust collection: None

A manual pole sander is a cheap and efficient solution for those on a tight budget or with only a modest amount of drywall to sand. While it doesn’t have a dust collection system like the other manual sander we recommend, we like that this model comes with a lightweight aluminum pole, which many rivals omit. It also has a reinforced cast aluminum head that’s lightweight and maneuverable yet doesn’t flex. In our tests, the free-swiveling head easily kept the abrasive flat against the wall instead of flipping over and marring the compound.

Since we’ve used this type of drywall pole sander for years, we feel like we know a quality tool when we see one, and our tests proved our instincts were correct. We loved that this model uses durable sanding screens instead of lower-quality sanding discs and that its quick-action clamps make sanding head replacement incredibly easy. We also really liked the aluminum construction and smooth paint finish of the included pole, which is so nice that we’d like to use it with other tools. Unfortunately, we can’t because both ends are female threads (one universal, one machine), so it won’t work with other pole-mounted tools. 

Get the Marshalltown pole sander at Amazon

Best Cordless

DeWalt 20V Max* Cordless Drywall Sander

 The Best Drywall Sander Option: DeWalt 20V MAX Cordless Drywall Sander
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Cordless design removes tripping hazard of cord
  • Quick-release length adjustment is easy to use 
  • Has a wireless on/off switch for compatible dust collectors 

What We Don’t Like

  • Weight and large tube make use awkward at times

Specs 

  • Type: Cordless electric
  • Weight: 12.6 pounds 
  • Dust collection: NoneHose connection (no hose included)

No power? No problem. The DeWalt cordless drywall sander offers you the ability to work in locations where no electricity is available. The 20-volt brushless motor delivers competitive power, driving the 9-inch head at speeds from 700 to 1,200 RPM. It also features a wireless on/off control when paired with a compatible dust collector. 

There was a lot to like about this model during testing. The lack of a cord is a serious plus, and we found sanding a ceiling much easier without worrying about tripping. To be fair, we did still have to watch out for the vacuum hose, but that’s worth it since it eliminates so much mess. On the flip side, the 5-amp-hour battery only lasts about 30 minutes, so many users will need to invest in a second battery to avoid constant interruptions to recharge. The tool also felt heavier than 12.6 pounds, but that could be because the tube, which doubles as a handle, is a bit wide, which is not the most ergonomic design. 

What our tester says: “We really liked this unit’s quick-release clamp, which made it easy to adjust the sander’s length. We noticed we could go from walls to ceilings much quicker with this model than with those where you have to unscrew clamps and screw them back down again.”—Tom Scalisi, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the DeWalt drywall sander (tool only) at Amazon, Lowe’s, Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot (with batteries and charger). 

ALSO TESTED

The high-speed, cable-driven F2C Variable-Speed Electric Drywall Sander has pretty decent user reviews, and we assumed we’d agree when we first started testing. However, the cable created excessive tension on the front of the sanding pad that forced it into fresh compound, and the fact that the motor is in the handle meant its fan kept blowing dust everywhere. We agree with users that its speed and weight are great, but we still think much better options are available. 

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Drywall Sanders

To ensure the drywall sanders we included in this guide can handle typical household tasks, we called upon our many years of experience with power tools, hand tools, and DIY projects. We selected seven top-rated sanders and used each for several days, completing drywall repair and working on a test wall and ceiling. 

Since we’re also familiar with how to sand drywall, we used our knowledge to rate each option on speed, comfort, performance, and dust collection. We removed the sanders that failed our tests from our list and gave awards to the remaining picks based on their strengths. 

What to Consider When Choosing a Drywall Sander

Those who already own a sander might wonder whether a dedicated drywall sander is really necessary. While random orbital or detail sanders might be enough for small areas, trying to sand a whole room with one gets old quickly. Knowing which features to look for before using a manual or power sander on drywall will help you choose the right tool for the job.

Types of Drywall Sanders

While you can find manual sanding blocks in any hardware store, their small size and the physical effort required to use them make them impractical for sanding drywall. The most basic alternative is a larger pad attached to a pole. Not surprisingly, these types of sanders are called pole sanders. Their heads can be oblong or round and usually attach to a hook-and-loop sanding disc or sanding screen. Advanced versions incorporate a hose you can attach to a wet/dry vac.

The other option is an eclectic sander, either a portable cable sander or a cordless version that’s handheld or attached to a pole. These are effectively large-diameter orbital drywall sanders, and they usually hook up to a wet/dry vac or have their own dust-collection system. A self-contained dustless drywall sander is a rapid way to finish drywall and dramatically reduces cleanup time.

Motor Power and Speed

Electric drywall vacuum sanders allow DIYers and professionals to work faster. Since their heads vary from 7 inches to 9 inches, these tools must have a reasonably powerful motor to drive them efficiently. A 5-amp motor should be enough, but those with bigger projects may want to look for a 7-amp model.

Cordless models are rated in volts, which reflects the battery power, and most of the models currently available are 20 volts. The Ah capacity of the battery is another important element. The higher the number, the longer the tool can run without needing recharging. Pay attention when buying a cordless sander, as many are sold “bare.” While the price might look attractive, the battery and the charger cost extra.

Electric drywall sanders also offer variable speeds, improving control for rapid material removal or fine finishing. The specifics will vary depending on the model, but the tools we considered ran between 500 and 2,000 RPM.

Flexibility, Hose Length, and Weight

Sanding drywall usually involves working up from the floor to the ceiling and possibly across the ceiling surface. The reach provided by the drywall sander has a major impact on convenience. Handheld electric models—much like an orbital sander for drywall but with a larger head—are often more affordable than long-reach versions, but you’ll need a ladder to reach the top of walls.

Low-cost manual pole sanders can offer good reach and have articulated joints that allow for multiple sanding angles. However, they may not come with a pole. Some manual sanders have dust collection, but you’ll still want to check that the included hose is long enough to reach your wet/dry vac. If the hose is on the short side, you’ll need to keep the collecting bag or vacuum close, meaning it could get in the way. 

Weight also is an important factor since most electric models have head-mounted motors. A heavy tool will prove tiring, particularly if you need to use the drywall sander above shoulder height for extended periods. Some vacuum bags have shoulder straps to overcome this problem.

Sanding Discs and Screens

Many drywall sanders use inexpensive and easy-to-change hook-and-loop discs. These come in a range of grits, from 60 grit for fast material removal to 220 grit for final finishing before painting. The challenge with standard sanding discs is that the disc can clog quickly, even on drywall sanders with dust collection. 

Sanding screens are an alternative that can fit some tools. The mesh screen is resistant to tearing and doesn’t clog as easily. Many can be rinsed and reused, whereas discs are usually disposable. There is a wide range of sanding screens available for rectangular pole sanders, which attach via clamps or clips. It can be difficult, however, to find screens for 9-inch-diameter heads that take hook-and-loop discs.

FAQs

While the technical information above may have answered many of your questions on the best drywall sanders, it’s possible you still have a few lingering queries. The following answers to frequently asked questions should help. 

Q. Is a drywall sander worth it?

For small repairs, such as patching after removing drywall screws, finishing sanders can do a reasonable job. If you have a particularly thick area of compound you need to remove, even handheld belt sanders can be useful. But if you’re working on a large area or multiple rooms, getting a drywall sander will be worth it. Drywall sanding tools generally have long handles so you can work on walls and ceilings, and they offer much better dust control to minimize the mess created by this task.

Q. Can you use a hand sander to sand drywall?

Yes, you can use a good hand sander on drywall, however, the job will take considerably longer and likely be much dustier.

Q. Should I use ear protection when using drywall sanders?

It is advisable to wear noise protection when using a drywall sanding machine since noise levels above 80 decibels (dB) may cause hearing loss. In workplaces, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requires hearing protection for those experiencing sound levels above an average of 85dB for an 8-hour day. Many drywall sanders are around this level, but even quieter, prolonged exposure can be uncomfortable.

Q. Can drywall dust make you sick?

Yes. According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, drywall dust can cause eye, nose, throat, and respiratory tract irritation. Prolonged exposure can lead to coughing, phlegm production, and breathing difficulties. Using some kind of mask while sanding is vital, and we recommend a half-mask respirator with replaceable filters.

Q. What is the best way to get rid of drywall dust?

Drywall dust is very fine and flies everywhere. Dampening it with a water spray helps it stick together, making it easier to clean up. Any spray bottle that produces a reasonably fine mist will do. Lightly spray the dust to make it damp (not wet), use a soft broom to sweep up as much as possible, and then vacuum. Drywall dust can easily clog household vacuums, so it’s best to use a wet/dry vac.

Q. What is the correct grit for sanding drywall?

We asked Clark Lowe, President and CEO of O’Connor Company, which grits he recommends. He said, “For drywall, start with a medium grit like 120 to smooth rough edges, then finish with a finer grit like 180 or 220 for a polished surface.” 

Q. How do you sand drywall without making a mess?

Mess- and dust-free sanding is easiest using the right tools and techniques. Cover open doorways with plastic sheeting, spread a drop cloth over floors, and select a drywall sander with a vacuum attachment to clear away dust as you go. 

Q. How long do you have to leave drywall before sanding?

Building expert Clark Lowe says that “Drywall compound should be left to dry for at least 24 hours, depending on the thickness of the application and room conditions like humidity and ventilation.” 

Meet the Tester

Tom Scalisi is a full-time DIY and construction writer for many of the largest websites in the industry, including BobVila.com, This Old House, Family Handyman, and Forbes. He spent years working in the trades and industrial maintenance, undertaking more drywall projects than he can count.

Additional research provided by Bob Beacham.

The post The Best Drywall Sanders for Quick and Easy Sheetrock Smoothing, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-28T04:39:58-05:00
<![CDATA[We Tested the Best Circular Saws, and Our Favorite Is a Powerhouse]]>Get the speed and accuracy your projects require with the best circular saws. Check out our tested guide for the best options.

The post We Tested the Best Circular Saws, and Our Favorite Is a Powerhouse appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-circular-saw/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=109514Mon, 27 Jan 2025 13:20:53 -0500ReviewsPower ToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Anyone who’s worked on a construction site or been part of their home’s renovation knows how versatile circular saws are. When it comes to breaking down a sheet of plywood and making quick, repetitive cuts on a stack of framing lumber, it’s the best tool for the job. Still, with the abundance of saw brands, power options, and features available, choosing the right one can be challenging. That’s why we tested 10 top models to see which will push your project along and which might hold you back. 

To help us select the models we feel confident recommending, we also reached out to a home improvement expert to get his take on how to choose one of these powerful tools. Based on his insights and our hands-on tests, we chose the Makita XSH06PT 36V Brushless 7¼” Circular Saw Kit as our favorite circular saw for its quality contraction and user-friendly operation.

The results of our tests on the Makita XSH06PT and the rest of the saws is below, alongside a quick peek at a product that wasn’t reliable enough to make our list. After pushing these tools to their limits cutting timbers, particle-strand lumber (PSL), plywood, and dimensional lumber, we can accurately say the following lineup represents a solid selection of the best circular saws on the market.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Makita XSH06PT 36V Brushless 7¼” Circular Saw Kit
    Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: DeWalt DCS573B 20V MAX 7¼” Cordless Circular Saw
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Greenworks 24V 7¼” Cordless Battery Circular Saw
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST SMALL: Makita XSS03Z 18V LXT Cordless 5⅜” Circular Trim Saw
    Jump to Review 
  5. BEST FOR FRAMING: Skil CR5429B-20 PWR CORE 20 Brushless 7¼” Circular Saw
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST LASER GUIDE: Skil 5280-01 Corded 7¼” Circular Saw
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST FOR TIMBERS: Skil SPT70WM-01 10¼” Magnesium Worm Drive Skilsaw
    Jump to Review
  8. BEST KIT: Bosch Profactor 18V 7¼” Circular Saw Kit
    Jump to Review
  9. BEST FOR PROS: DeWalt DWS535B 7¼” Worm Drive Circular Saw 
    Jump to Review
The Best Circular Saw Option Makita Compact-2
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Circular Saw Comparison Chart

Product NamePower SourceSpeedSize
Makita XSH06PT 36V Brushless 7¼” Circular Saw Kit36-volt (V) battery6,000 RPM7¼ inch 
DeWalt DCS573B 20V MAX 7¼” Cordless Circular Saw20V battery5,500 RPM7¼ inch 
Greenworks 24V 7¼” Cordless Battery Circular Saw24V battery4,500 RPM7¼ inch 
Makita XSS03Z 18V LXT Cordless 5⅜” Circular Trim Saw 18V battery3,600 RPM5⅜ inch 
Skil CR5429B-20 PWR CORE 20 Brushless 7¼” Circular SawTwo 20V batteries5,300 RPM7¼ inch
Skil 5280-01 Corded 7¼” Circular SawCorded 15-amp motor5,300 RPM7¼ inch
Skil SPT70WM-01 10¼” Magnesium Worm Drive SkilsawCorded 15-amp motor4,700 RPM10¼ inch 
Bosch Profactor 18V 7¼” Circular Saw Kit18V battery5,000 RPM7¼ inch
DeWalt DWS535B 7¼” Worm Drive Circular Saw Corded 15-amp motor4,800 RPM7¼ inch

Our Top Picks

Choosing a circular saw doesn’t have to be confusing. Review the results of our hands-on tests as well as each tool’s pros and cons to help you select the model that’s right for your next project.

Best Overall

Makita XSH06PT 36V Brushless 7¼" Circular Saw Kit

 Makita XSH06PT 36V Brushless 7¼-Inch Circular Saw Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Durable magnesium foot plate and blade guard
  • Fast and simple blade depth and angle adjustments
  • 2 bright guide lights for increased safety

What We Don’t Like

  • Sawdust discharge port doesn’t work well with vacuum hose

Specs 

  • Power source: 36-volt (V) battery
  • Speed: 6,000 RPM
  • Size: 7¼ inch

The 36-volt cordless Makita circular saw takes top honors in our lineup of the best circular saws for several reasons. First, its base (or “shoe”) and its retractable blade guard are made from magnesium, which offers more durability than steel or aluminum at a lighter weight. It’s also powerful, has a long list of easy-to-use features, and offers an impressive cutting capacity. 

We tested the Makita by making straight and bevel cuts of various depths on plywood and dimensional lumber. It powered through smoothly with no torque loss, even after the battery indicators showed less than half a charge. We made repeated cuts over an hour, and the Makita’s motor and housing never heated up. 

We also liked that this battery-powered circular saw has a handy quick-change angle adjustment, allowing cuts up to 56 degrees with positive stops at standard angles of 22½, 45, and 56 degrees. Its depth is easy to adjust up to 2⅝ inches, making this tool great for quick-moving projects where you don’t want to stop and use a wrench to change settings. While this handheld circular saw also has a sawdust discharge nozzle for wet/dry vacuum hose connect, we noticed quite a bit of sawdust still escaped from around the blade guard, making this feature of the saw the only one we don’t totally endorse.

Read our full review: Makita XSH06PT 36V Brushless 7¼” Circular Saw Kit 

What our tester says: “If I could only choose one circular saw for most nonshop situations—either a corded 7¼-inch model or the Makita XSH06PT—I’d choose the Makita. It offers as much cutting power as most corded saws, and purchasing a couple of extra lithium-ion batteries eliminates any downtime. Corded models are great when you’re in a shop with plenty of outlets, but this Makita is excellent when portability matters.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Makita 36V circular saw at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Runner-up

DeWalt DCS573B 20V MAX 7¼" Cordless Circular Saw

 DeWalt DCS573B 20V MAX Cordless 7¼-Inch Circular Saw
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact design is suitable for carrying
  • Rafter hook enables secure hanging for safety
  • Quick-adjust levers make changing blade depth and angle easy

What We Don’t Like

  • Base shoe is aluminum not magnesium

Specs 

  • Power source: 20V battery
  • Speed: 5,500 RPM
  • Size: 7¼ inch

DeWalt is a leader in the power tool market, and this 20-volt cordless circular saw is a perfect example of why. It’s smartly designed and comfortable to use, and its powerful 20V motor with 5,500 RPM speed allowed us to make repeated straight and angled test cuts of various depths over an hour without it losing power or heating up. It has a bevel capacity of up to 57 degrees, with positive stops at 45 and 22½ degrees, making it handy to cut standard angles without needing to examine the angle measurements carefully before locking in. At 2 9/16 inches, it also offers a deeper cutting depth than most of its competitors. 

While we would prefer a magnesium base instead of aluminum, we don’t consider this a deal breaker. The blade-angle-adjustment lever and the depth-adjustment lever save time when making adjustments, and the unit’s rafter hook adds to its versatility. For projects like framing a roof structure with dimensional lumber, it’s nice to be able to hang the saw on a rafter while performing another task and grab it when you’re ready to cut again. 

What our tester says: “We like this DeWalt saw for pros, but we also think dedicated DIYers will use it a lot. It’s a great combination of well designed and ergonomic, and it had just as much power on the last cut of our tests as the first.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the DeWalt 20V circular saw at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Northern Tool + Equipment.

Best Bang for the Buck

Greenworks 24V 7¼" Cordless Battery Circular Saw

 The Best Circular Saw Option Greenworks 24V 7¼ Cordless Battery Circular Saw
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Budget circular saw suitable for most DIY-project cuts
  • Comptabile with Greenworks’ 1.5, 2, 4, and 5Ah (amp hours) batteries
  • Ergonomics are comfortable during use 

What We Don’t Like

  • Offers slightly less speed than some other models
  • Blade guard is plastic instead of metal

Specs 

  • Power source: 24V battery
  • Speed: 4,500 RPM
  • Size: 7¼ inch

Not everyone needs all of the features of a top-of-the-line cordless saw or the heavy-duty capability of a timber-framing model. For DIY projects that include an occasional small framing job or breaking down plywood sheets—especially when saving money is a priority—the affordable Greenworks 7¼-Inch circular saw might be the right choice.

We’ve tested plenty of tools from many manufacturers, but this is the first Greenworks power tool we tried, and we were pleasantly surprised. Despite its affordable price, this circular saw made repeated straight and bevel cuts in plywood and dimensional lumber over an hour of solid testing without heating up on us or losing power. It tops out at 4,500 RPM, which is slightly less speed than some of the other saws we tested, but it will be sufficient for cutting the types of wood most DIYers will need to cut. 

The CR24L00K features quick adjustments for both angle cutting (up to 45 degrees) and cutting depth (up to 2½ inches), and we found it simple to adjust both. The base shoe is made from stamped metal, which is to be expected at this price point, but we were disappointed that the blade guard is plastic—it really should be metal. The blade guard didn’t break during our tests, but it’s a weak point in the tool’s design. 

Get the Greenworks circular saw (tool only) at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Greenworks.

Best Small

Makita XSS03Z 18V LXT Cordless 5⅜" Circular Trim Saw

 Makita XSS03Z 18V LXT Cordless 5⅜-Inch Circular Saw
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Lightweight and small circular saw suitable for overhead cutting
  • Compact yet offers a versatile 2-inch depth of cut
  • Size plus cordless functionality make it incredibly portable 

What We Don’t Like

  • Dual-hand support too small for large hands
  • Battery and charger sold separately

Specs 

  • Power source: 18V battery
  • Speed: 3,600 RPM
  • Size: 5⅜ inch

For part-time DIYers or smaller-framed users, Makita’s 18V LXT cordless 5⅜-inch circular saw’s small size and minimal weight make it an attractive, portable option. This lightweight circular saw weighs just 6 pounds, allowing DIYers of any size and skill level to wield it. It’s well suited to overhead cutting where it isn’t easy to wield a heavier circular saw. 

Despite its minimal size and small blade, this Makita cordless circular saw has a depth of cut of up to 2 inches, offering more than enough capacity for cutting dimensional lumber. Its 3,600-RPM top speed should be capable of handling most projects, though the speed is less than some competitive models. The base bevels up to 50 degrees to allow users to make angled cuts. 

Although small, we found that this portable circular saw packs quite a punch. It easily powered through straight and angled cuts in plywood and dimensional lumber. While the dual support knob is a little on the small side, we were able to use it to keep the saw stable while cutting. Most pros will probably forgo the dual support and use this model as a one-handed saw. 

Get the Makita 18V circular saw at Amazon.

Best for Framing

Skil CR5429B-20 PWR CORE 20 Brushless 7¼" Circular Saw

 The Best Circular Saw Option Skil CR5429B-20 PWR CORE 20 Brushless 7¼ Circular Saw
Photo: Ace Hardware

What We Like

  • Elongated design adds control and stability
  • Two 20-volt batteries provide ample power 
  • Adjustable to a depth of 2 9/16 inches-—more than most 7¼-inch saws

What We Don’t Like

  • Have to push a second button to adjust past 45 degrees

Specs 

  • Power source: Two 20V batteries
  • Speed: 5,300 RPM
  • Size: 7¼ inch

Those seeking a pro-level circular saw for DIY jobs should consider this Skil PWR CORE model. While it looks like a worm-drive saw because of its length and heft, it’s actually a sidewinder with its motor located next to the blade rather than behind it. Upon inspection, we realized the additional length comes from the positioning of the double-battery case, which sits to the rear of the motor. 

In our tests, controlling the saw when cutting dense wood and larger pieces of dimensional lumber was made easy by grasping the rear handle and the dual stabilizer bar at the front. The saw’s two 20-volt, 5Ah batteries, provide more than enough power to make repetitive straight and angled cuts on plywood and dimensional lumber. Since it’s billed as a heavy-duty model, we also tested the saw on laminated veneer lumber (LVL), which is very dense and difficult to cut, and it cut through without bogging down. 

We like this saw’s deeper-than-average cutting depth of 2 9/16 inches and its up to 53-degree-angle cutting capacity. What we don’t like is having to press a second lever to adjust the blade angle beyond 53 degrees, as it feels uncomfortable and seems unnecessary. We also would prefer a magnesium base shoe to the aluminum one, but we appreciate how the elongated shoe style helps stabilize the saw on deep cuts.

What our tester says: “This saw is well designed, ergonomic, and suitable for heavy-duty DIY use. It’s the Skil model we feel bridges the gap between a standard consumer and a pro tool.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Skil PWR CORE circular saw at Ace Hardware, Lowe’s, or Target.

Best Laser Guide

Skil 5280-01 Corded 7¼" Circular Saw

 Skil 5280-01 Corded 7¼-Inch Circular Saw
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Offers unlimited runtime as long as an outlet is nearby
  • Laser guide bright enough for sunny days
  • Impressive speed for its price point

What We Don’t Like

  • Several components are plastic
  • Cord restricts portability

Specs 

  • Power source: Corded 15-amp motor
  • Speed: 5,300 RPM
  • Size: 7¼ inch

Getting the hang of using a circular saw can be challenging, but operating a circular saw with laser guidance makes the process much easier. This Skil electric circular saw features a single-beam laser that allows users to maintain consistent passes on cutlines, taking some of the learning curve out of straight cuts. While we’ve found that some laser guides are dim or don’t extend more than a few inches, the laser on the Skil saw is a notable exception. Even outdoors on a mostly sunny day, it was visible on our cutting material for more than 2 feet.  

In addition to its laser beam, this corded circular saw also boasts a 5,300-RPM top speed from its 15-amp motor, offering plenty of power and capability. It cuts angles up to 51 degrees and comes with a positive stop at 45 degrees—the angle used most often when cutting miters. Adjusting both angle and depth is simple via levers, and the tool comes with a maximum cutting depth of 2.4357 inches.

While we deem this saw a good choice for making straight and angled cuts on plywood and dimensional lumber, it’s not for heavy-duty sawing. The motor got pretty warm to the touch after about 45 minutes of use, which told us that we were pushing it further than it was designed to go. The saw also has several plastic components, which help keep the price down but make it better for novice DIYers needing a saw for small projects.

Get the Skil corded circular saw at Amazon, Ace Hardware, Lowe’s, or Walmart.

Best for Timbers

Skil SPT70WM-01 10¼" Magnesium Worm Drive Skilsaw

 Skil SPT70WM-01 10¼-Inch Worm Drive Circular Saw
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Worm-driving gearing provides maximum torque
  • Magnesium base shoe is durable and stable
  • Accommodates cuts up to 4 inches deep

What We Don’t Like

  • 16.45-pound weight can result in user fatigue
  • Cord restricts portability

Specs 

  • Power source: Corded 15-amp motor
  • Speed: 4,700 RPM
  • Size: 10¼ inch

Though this large circular saw from Skil weighs a hefty 16.45 pounds, has a substantial 10¼-inch blade, and operates at a respectable 4,700 RPM—it’s neither the biggest nor the fastest model on our list. Still, it produces enough torque to keep spinning through thick and dense timbers associated with post-and-beam and timber framing. During testing, we used it to make a variety of straight and angled cuts on dimensional lumber and an LVL, and it didn’t heat up at all. 

As with most of today’s worm-drive saws, this model is corded because its size and torque demand more power than most lithium-ion batteries can produce. It performed flawlessly when we used it to bevel the edge of a large 8-foot-long 12-inch by 12-inch Hem-Fir beam, and it has an enviable cutting depth of 3 11/16 inches. It cuts angles up to 51 degrees, and both the blade angle and depth are easy to adjust via levers. Over our testing period, our arms and shoulders did get a bit tired from the weight of this saw, making this model a bit much for occasional-use DIYers. If you need to cut sizable dimensional lumber or timbers, however, this is the machine for you.

Get the Skil Worm Drive circular saw at Amazon or Lowe’s.

Best Kit

Bosch Profactor 18V 7¼" Circular Saw Kit

 Bosch Profactor 18V 7¼-Inch Circular Saw Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Good ergonomics and a nonslip grip 
  • Quick-change levers offer easy angle and depth adjustments
  • Includes battery, charger, and bag 

What We Don’t Like

  • On the heavier side
  • Cord restricts portability

Specs 

  • Power source: 18V batter
  • Speed: 5,000 RPM
  • Size: 7¼ inch

We’ve purchased “tool-only” power tools in the past, only to find we had to pay as much or more to then buy a compatible battery and charger. The Bosch Profactor circular saw gets around that issue by including the brushless circular saw, battery, charger, and a heavy-duty canvas bag as a complete kit. 

But the Bosch isn’t just about a certain quantity of pieces, it’s also a quality tool that cuts up to 50-degree angles and 2½-inch depths. It features easy-to-change adjustments, and though its base shoe and blade guard are aluminum, it’s a well-built saw that, at 12 pounds, weighs slightly more than some of the similar 7¼-inch models we tested. 

We made near-constant straight and angled cuts through dimensional lumber and plywood for over an hour, and this saw didn’t come close to overheating. An interesting aspect of this model is that its blade is on the left, whereas the blades on most 7¼-inch circular saws are on the right. While this took a little getting used to, we didn’t feel it was a downside—the saw can be used easily by a right-handed or left-handed user.

Get the Bosch circular saw at Amazon or Lowe’s

Best for Pros

DeWalt DWS535B 7¼" Worm Drive Circular Saw

 DeWalt DWS535B 7¼-Inch Worm Drive Circular Saw
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Pleasantly light at under 9 pounds
  • Ergonomic design is easy to control
  • High-quality magnesium base shoe and aluminum blade guard

What We Don’t Like

  • Slightly shallower cutting depth than non-worm-drive competitors

Specs 

  • Power source: Corded 15-amp motor
  • Speed: 4,800 RPM
  • Size: 7¼ inch

DeWalt is well known for producing high-quality power tools, and the brand’s 7¼-inch worm-drive circular saw is no exception. It features a magnesium base shoe and lightweight aluminum blade guard, meaning it’s not as heavy as many worm drives. We also like its elongated base-shoe design, which creates a stabilizing effect when cutting denser materials. It has an easy-adjust blade angle that cuts bevels up to 53 degrees and offers positive stops at 22½ and 45 degrees, which are standard angles in the construction industry. 

During our tests, we made both angled and straight cuts on plywood, dimensional lumber, and LVLs, and this DeWalt saw powered through all of them without heating up or bogging down. This corded circular saw features 4,800 RPM, which is less than some models, but it makes up for the slower speed with higher torque power. It features a 2.438-inch maximum cutting depth that’s also easy to adjust via a lever lock. We would have liked a deeper cut capacity, but this is still a top-performing 7¼-inch circular saw. 

Get the DeWalt worm drive circular saw at Amazon, Ace Hardware, or Lowe’s.

ALSO TESTED

We had high hopes for the Black+Decker 20-Volt Compact Circular Saw, but it didn’t quite live up to our standards. Unfortunately, this little 5½-inch saw couldn’t muster enough power to make a ½-inch-deep cut in plywood, even though its 20-volt 1.5Ah lithium-ion battery should have been sufficient for such a shallow cut. 

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Circular Saws

Putting together a list of good circular saws was more fun than work—after all, we have years of experience with these tools. Drawing on our expertise, we whittled our testing list down from over 25 to just 10 carefully selected models. We then used our selected saws to make straight and angled cuts in a variety of materials for a solid hour. 

When cutting, we only used manufacturer-suggested materials for each model, not attempting to cut LVLs, which are very dense and difficult to cut, with compact circular saws that are not made to withstand that type of cutting. Likewise, we didn’t bother cutting plywood with worm-drive saws, which are explicitly designed to cut denser, thicker materials like timbers.

We monitored each saw to see whether it got hot during use, how easy/challenging it was to adjust blade angle and cutting depth, and if it lived up to the manufacturer’s depth claims. We scored each machine based on a rubric and used our results to determine each tool’s best use.

What to Consider When Choosing a Circular Saw

Motor alignment, run speed, amperages, and blade types are all essential aspects of a circular saw, so here’s a quick primer on all the types of circular saws and necessary considerations to get your search started.

Corded vs. Battery-Powered

As with any type of saw, corded circular saws tie the user to the power source (i.e., an electric socket), whereas battery-operated models can be used anywhere. On professional job sites, cordless circular saws were once shunned in favor of corded models, but with the recent improvements in lithium-ion batteries, this is changing. 

Today’s battery-operated cordless circular saws have much more power and far longer battery life than early models. Much of this improvement is due to the adoption of brushless motors (the latest, most efficient, maintenance-free technology) and higher-quality lithium-ion batteries, though the most powerful models are still corded. 

According to Ron Shimek, President of Mr. Handyman, a Neighborly company, “A corded saw is the best option for consistent power and performance. Corded saws typically offer superior power and cutting capacity, especially for demanding tasks like ripping through thick lumber.” He points out, however, that cordless options are ideal for outdoor or remote jobs, so you may need different tools for different circumstances.

Sidewinder vs. Worm Drive

Sidewinder and worm drive refer to motor alignment and position on a circular saw. A sidewinder model’s motor is installed in line with the blade, enabling it to run at high speeds in a compact footprint.  

A worm-drive circular saw has a motor in the rear of the saw and uses a set of worm gears (so-called because of their spiraling worm shape) by the blade. Worm-drive saws, which are usually longer, larger, and heavier than sidewinders, tend to reduce speed but increase torque (force). They also require oil to lubricate the gears, so users should check their oil level daily. 

For speed, size, and ease of maintenance, a sidewinder model is the way to go. For power and torque, worm-drive saws reign supreme.

Amperage and Speed

Amperage is the amount of electrical power a motor can withstand without its inner components failing. In the past, electric motors were weaker and not as capable, so amperage (amp) was an important specification to tout. Nearly all modern corded circular saws feature 15-amp motors.  

A saw’s speed, however, can be a consideration since the faster the blade spins, the quicker it can cut through a material. But speeds tend to be relative because a 15-amp motor can spin a 7¼-inch blade faster than a 10¼-inch blade. Generally speaking, when it comes to 7¼-inch saws, speeds between 4,000 and 5,500 revolutions per minute (RPM) are common and should be adequate for fast, accurate results. Worm drives may offer slightly lower speeds but come with more torque (spinning force), so while they may cut more slowly, they won’t overheat or bog down during big cutting jobs. 

Keep in mind that blade speed has very little to do with the density of material a saw can cut. This is largely dependent on the blade type and quality, and you may need to change a circular saw blade to a higher-quality version to cut denser substances.

Blade Size and Type

One noticeable difference among circular saw models is the size of their blades, as each uses a specific-size blade. The average pro or DIYer can get most framing and construction jobs done with a 7¼-inch model. Compact saws might feature blades in the 5⅜-inch range, while large saw blades can be 10¼ inches or more. 

Popular types of circular saw blades include all-purpose, framing, finish, and plywood blades. The tooth count (the number of teeth around a blade) determines which projects a blade works best for. The lower the tooth count, the rougher the cut will be, making these blades suitable for framing or demolition. Higher-count blades should be used for cabinetmaking, plywood, and finish work.  

Pro Tip: Circular saws cut on the “upswing,” meaning the cutting half of the blade (the part under the shoe) spins toward the front of the saw. This will inevitably cause tiny slivers of wood to “tear out” of the wood—particularly when cutting plywood—creating noticeably rough edges that detract from the quality of work. To minimize this, lay a piece of painter’s tape over the cutline to hold these fibers in place. It’s also possible to cut wood face down to eliminate tear-out concerns on the face of the wood. For more tips, see our guide on how to use a circular saw

Shoe Material

The base plate that rides on the workpiece is known as a shoe, which will generally be made of one of three materials:

  • Steel, though once popular, is less popular today because, despite being inexpensive and sturdy, it’s also very heavy.
  • Aluminum is far lighter than steel but more expensive and not as tough.
  • Magnesium, which is about 30 percent of the weight-per-volume of aluminum, is the high-tech metal of choice for circular saw shoes. Magnesium is stronger than aluminum (and even steel in some applications) and easier to manufacture but considerably more expensive.

Ease of Adjustment

Certain materials, such as plywood and other sheet goods, require a shallow blade depth, while others (framing applications, 4×4 posts, etc.) demand the full depth a saw can muster. For true versatility, a circular saw should allow the user to make quick and accurate depth adjustments.  

Almost all models feature levers or knobs to adjust the blade angle, known as the “bevel.” Knobs tend to be more accurate at dialing in the perfect angle, although they’re a bit of a hassle to loosen and tighten when wearing work gloves.  

The most important consideration when it comes to blade angle adjustment is an easily accessible level or knob. Some manufacturers put these knobs in an inconvenient place—for instance, the rear of the saw between the handle and blade guard—but an angle-adjustment knob in front of the motor where it’s easy to access is the most thoughtful design.

Safety

Manufacturers build safety features into their machines to combat the dangers inherent to circular saws. One helpful safety feature is an electric brake, which stops circular saw blades almost immediately after the user releases the trigger. Older models would allow the blade to come to a stop on its own, which could result in a spinning blade coming into contact with something unintended. 

Built-in LED lights and spring-loaded blade guards also offer significant safety measures. Work lights illuminate the workpiece, allowing the user to see the cutline and any debris or impending mistakes they should avoid. Retractable guards cover the blade as soon as the blade is removed from the workpiece, helping to minimize dangers. 

Safety is also the responsibility of the user, so be sure to wear eye and ear protection when using a circular saw, miter saw, track saw, or table saw

Additional Features

Some of the best circular saws offer additional features that make the job easier and faster. For instance, some models have dust-collection ports and detachable collection bags to help minimize the amount of sawdust on the cutline. Depending on the kit, cordless saws might come with extra batteries. 

Another helpful feature that manufacturers offer with their saws is a built-in rafter hook. These hooks swivel out of the saw, allowing the user to hang them from a rafter, ladder, sawhorse, or another sturdy ledge. Builders have been attaching hooks to their saws for years, and manufacturers are now catching on.

FAQs

Q. What is a circular saw used for?

The most common use for a circular saw is cutting framing lumber to length. However, it can also trim deck boards, cut plywood sheets into cabinet panels, cut metal, and even trim plastic. 

Q. What kind of cuts can a circular saw make?

Circular saws can cut straight lines, make cuts with beveled angles, and even create a series of thin, shallow cuts known as dadoes or rabbets. These kinds of cuts are achievable on both hard and soft materials including pressure-treated or hard wood. 

Q. What is the best circular saw for home use?

Both the Makita 36V circular saw and the DeWalt 20V circular saw are among the best circular saws for a variety of home projects, including those DIYers are most likely to tackle.

Q. How do you keep a circular saw straight?

The best way to keep a circular saw straight is to clamp a straight edge to the workpiece and run the base against it. Another method is to place a small clamp on the front of the base to act as a guide. Ron Shimek, President of Mr. Handyman, a Neighborly company, also points out that “features like laser guides, beveling capabilities, and precise blade depth adjustment contribute to accurate cuts” and clean, straight lines.

Q. Why am I getting kickback on my circular saw?

Kickback can occur for a few reasons:
Don’t start the saw with the blade against the workpiece. Allow the blade to get up to speed before pushing it through the workpiece.
Semi-cut workpieces tend to droop, and this droop can cause sideways friction on the blade, pinching it in place. Support the workpiece until the cut is complete.
Hitting a knot in the wood can cause kickback because knots are harder than the rest of the wood. Look for knots when measuring the wood, and try to avoid cutting through them.

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a product tester and writer specializing in the construction, remodeling, and real estate industries. She and her husband own a general contracting company, and Taylor is experienced in both residential and commercial building applications. She tests a wide range of power tools as well as other home improvement, household, and lawn-and-garden products.

Additional research provided by Tom Scalisi.

The post We Tested the Best Circular Saws, and Our Favorite Is a Powerhouse appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-27T13:20:53-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Drawer Slides for Soft-Closing Cabinets and More]]>Make sure your drawers close smoothly and silently. Shop this guide to discover our top picks when choosing the best drawer slides for your next project.

The post The Best Drawer Slides for Soft-Closing Cabinets and More appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-drawer-slides/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=143306Mon, 27 Jan 2025 10:17:11 -0500ReviewsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Rarely do we give a second thought to the way our cabinets and drawers open and close—that is, unless they squeak when they’re in motion and don’t glide on their tracks as easily as they should. The drawers of your furniture should function easily and quietly. This is easy to achieve with high-quality drawer slides, which are both easy to use and install.

Soft-close drawer slides have high-quality dampers to prevent the drawers from slamming when you close them. They are also outfitted with springs that help return the drawer gently to the cabinet. Slides that offer full extension are useful because they allow you to easily see and access the contents of the whole drawer. Read on to learn more about how to choose the best drawer slides for your next kitchen or bath DIY project.

  1. BEST OVERALL: LONTAN 20 Inch Drawer Slides Metal Drawer Slides
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Accuride 1029 Center Mount Slide
  3. BEST SIDE MOUNT: PROMARK Full Extension Side Mount Drawer Slides
  4. BEST UNDERMOUNT: Blum Tandem Drawer Slides
  5. BEST EUROPEAN: Liberty 14-Inch Bottom Mount Drawer Slide
The Best Drawer Slide Options
Photo: freepik.com

Our Top Picks

The recommendations for the best drawer slides consider top features including type, size, material, and weight.

Best Overall

LONTAN 20 Inch Drawer Slides Metal Drawer Slides

 The Best Drawer Slide Options: LONTAN 6 Pairs Soft - Close Metal Drawer Slides
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Six  pairs of cold-rolled steel slides
  • Hydraulic steel dampers and locking side levers
  • Comes with full 16-inch extension
  • 100-pound weight capacity

What We Don’t Like

  • No rear brackets included
  • Heavy weight

These soft-closing side mount drawer slides from LONTAN are affordable and effective. They fully extend, so you can easily see and access all of the drawer’s contents. These slides are made from cold-rolled steel, with a steel ball-bearing mechanism that ensures smooth operation. What’s more, they have integrated hydraulic dampers so drawers open and close silently. With locking side levers, the drawers can be removed without using any tools.

LONTAN’s soft-close slides have a 100-pound weight capacity, so they’ll hold as many kitchen accessories or as much bath gear as you can fit into a drawer.

Get the Lontan drawer slide at Amazon.

Best Bang for the Buck

Accuride 1029 Center Mount Slide

 The Best Drawer Slide Options: Accuride 1029 Center Mount Slide
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • 15-inch extension
  • 35-pound weight capacity
  • Steel ball bearings and friction disconnect included
  • Light weight

What We Don’t Like

  • Not suitable for heavy-duty use
  • Only ¾ extension
  • No other sizes available

This center mount drawer slide from Accuride is 15 inches long and designed for drawers that are up to 16 inches wide. It has steel ball bearings and offers three-quarters extension, so it remains out of view when the drawer is open. Like other center mount drawer slides, the Accuride can’t bear a lot of weight—it has a weight capacity of just 35 pounds—so it’s best for light-duty applications.

The full installed length is 14⅞ inches and is meant to be suitable for drawers with depths ranging from 12⅝ inches to 14½ inches.

Get the Accuride drawer slide at Amazon.

Best Side Mount

PROMARK Full Extension Side Mount Drawer Slides

 The Best Drawer Slide Options: Promark Full Extension Side Mount Drawer Slides
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Made with anti-rust, cold-rolled steel
  • Full extension offered
  • Ball-bearing mechanism
  • 100-pound weight capacity, multiple lengths

What We Don’t Like

  • Screws not included
  • Heavy weight

These full-extension side mounted drawer slides from PROMARK are constructed from cold-rolled steel and coated in an anti-rust. Thanks to their high-quality ball-bearing mechanism, they open and close smoothly and silently. These drawer slides are built for the long haul, too: they’re treated with an anti-rust coating to protect against corrosion and can bear up to 100 pounds of weight, so they’re suitable for drawers that contain heavy objects.

These slides are available in a variety of different lengths, ranging from 12 inches to 24 inches. They’re available in packs of either five or 10 sets, which is ideal for those who have a full-kitchen DIY upgrade in mind.

Get the Promark drawer slides at The Home Depot.

Best Undermount

Blum Tandem Drawer Slides

 The Best Drawer Slide Options: BLUM Bundle 15 Tandem Drawer Slides with BLUMOTION
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Depth and four-dimensional adjustment
  • Full extension, large dampers
  • Comes in multiple lengths
  • All hardware and instructions included

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavy weight
  • Made for wooden drawers only

Like all undermount drawer slides, these from Blum are not visible when the drawer is open, making them just the ticket if you have quality wood cabinetry that you want to show to best advantage. These soft-close drawer slides have large, integrated dampers, allowing them to open and close quietly and smoothly. They’re certified by the Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA), so you can trust you’re getting a high-quality product.

This model has a 18-inch length, but 9-inch, 12-inch, 15-inch, and 21-inch options are also available, providing a solution no matter what the depth of your drawers. They’re designed to fit drawers that have a side thickness of ½ inch to ⅝ inch. Made in the USA, these slides come packaged with all the screws and accessories you need to outfit one drawer.

Get the Blum Tandem drawer slides at Amazon.

Best European

Liberty 14-Inch Bottom Mount Drawer Slide

 The Best Drawer Slide Options: Liberty 14-Inch Bottom Mount Drawer Slide
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Made with epoxy-finished stamped steel
  • Self-closing function
  • Affordable
  • All hardware and instructions included

What We Don’t Like

  • Comes in one length only
  • Not meant for heavy-duty use
  • Only ¾ extension

European bottom mount drawer slides are affordable and easy to install. This pair from Liberty is constructed from stamped steel, coated with a white epoxy finish, and should match white cabinetry perfectly. These self-closing drawer slides have a rolling mechanism and offer three-quarters extension.

These slides can be purchased in packs of one, two, three or four sets of slides, making them suitable for projects both big and small. They are available in lengths ranging from 12 to 24 inches. Like most European-style drawer slides, the Liberty bottom mount slides have a lower weight capacity of just 50 pounds, so they’re suitable for drawers full of clothes and personal effects, but perhaps not heavy kitchen equipment.

Get the Liberty drawer slides at Amazon.

How We Chose the Best Drawer Slides

Drawer slides can help keep your kitchen, office, and even entertainment center’s items safely stowed and easy to access. The above selection of slides offers ideal weight capacities, sturdy constructions, ease of installation, and versatility for your next upgrade.

These top picks come with strong metal and plastic constructions with materials like cold-rolled steel and epoxy for durability and weight capacities of up to 100 pounds. Many are also constructed with steel ball bearings and dampers for smooth, silent movement. For variety, the above top picks feature undermount or side-mounted options depending on your preference.

Plus, these slides come with ¾ to full extension in multiple lengths for ample visibility and reach within your current drawers. Select top picks are also available with all hardware and instructions included for easy installation.

What to Consider When Choosing the Best Drawer Slides

Though you might assume that all drawer slides work the same way, several characteristics can affect their functionality. Before shopping for the best drawer slides for your home improvement projects, read on to learn about some of the most important qualities and features to consider.

Types of Drawer Slides

There are several styles of drawer slides: side mount, undermount, center mount, and European. The type of slide that’s best for your needs will depend on your budget, how heavy the contents of your drawers are, and how much clearance you have between the drawers and the cabinets.

Side Mount

The most popular drawer slides are side mount drawer slides which, as their name suggests, attach to the sides of the drawers and cabinets. Although these slides do not support the bottom of the drawer, they can still bear a lot of weight. Side mount drawer slides are sold in pairs and operate via one of two mechanisms: ball bearings or rollers. Slides with ball bearings are typically made from high-quality steel and help drawers glide quietly and easily. Side mount drawer slides operate on rollers and are less expensive, but drawers on rollers typically cannot extend as far as those on ball bearings.

One of the primary advantages of side mount drawer slides is that you can remove drawers from cabinets easily, without using tools. One drawback of side mount slides, however, is that you can see them when the drawer is open. To install these slides, you must have about ½ inch of clearance between each side of the drawer and the cabinet.

Undermount

Undermount drawer slides are sold in pairs and mount to the sides of the cabinet. They connect to locking devices that attach to the underside of the drawer. Because they are not visible when the drawer is open, these slides are a popular choice for those who don’t want metal hardware distracting from the look of their wood cabinetry. Undermount drawer slides are typically silent and don’t make the metal clicking sound that some other slides do.

The disadvantage of undermount slides is that they are typically more expensive than other types of drawer slides. Though they don’t require a lot of clearance between the sides of the drawer and the cabinet, they do have specific clearance requirements above and below the drawer. For these reasons, undermount drawer slides are typically used on high-end, custom-made cabinetry.

Center Mount

While most drawer slides come in sets of two, center mount slides have just one bracket that attaches to the underside of the drawer. Made of either wood or metal and fairly easy to install, center mount drawer slides are less popular than other types of slides because they can easily come out of balance, causing the contents of your drawer to shift and slide around. Another disadvantage of center mount drawer slides is that they can’t hold as much weight as other types of slides. For this reason, they’re not a good option for drawers that will contain heavy items.

European Slides

Also known as bottom mount drawer slides, European slides are attached to the bottom edge of the drawer and the side of the cabinet. One advantage of European slides is they’re easy to install: They are simply attached to the bottom edge of a drawer, so there’s no guesswork involved when it comes to placement. And, because they use nylon rollers rather than ball bearings, they’re typically inexpensive, too. Two downsides to European drawer slides are that they tend to have lower weight capacities than side mount or undermount slides, and the soft-close feature is not always available for this style of slide.

Size

First and foremost, make sure that the drawer slides you choose are the correct size for your cabinets. Drawer slides come in a variety of different lengths, with standard sizes ranging between 12 inches and 24 inches. To figure out what length you need, you’ll first need to establish whether your cabinets are frameless or have face frames.

  • Frameless cabinets don’t need a rear mounting bracket. To establish the slide length they require, simply measure the total depth of the cabinet and subtract the thickness of the front of the drawer.
  • Face frame cabinets have a frame around the front of the cabinet box and require a rear mounting bracket. This means that when measuring, it’s important to subtract ½ inch for the bracket as well as the thickness of the front of the drawer.

Material

Drawer slides are typically made from wood or metal.

  • Wood drawer slides are often found in high-end furniture and require expert craftsmanship to build. They have a traditional, classic look. They do, however, tend to wear down more quickly than their metal counterparts and don’t give you the flexibility to fully extend the drawers. Depending on the temperature and humidity in your home, these slides may also warp and stick.
  • Metal drawer slides may not be as aesthetically pleasing as wooden ones, but they are more durable and are fairly easy to install. They are constructed with either a roller mechanism or a ball-bearing mechanism, both of which are unaffected by temperature and humidity. Metal drawer slides can be both self closing and soft closing. Because some types of metal drawer slides are visible when the drawer is open, you’ll want to buy slides in a finish that complements that of your cabinetry.

Weight Capacity

How much weight a drawer slide can bear is one way to evaluate its quality—the higher the weight capacity, the better. Slides that are meant to bear heavy contents are sturdier and more durable than those that don’t hold as much weight. Some styles of drawer slides, like center mount and European, tend to have lower weight capacities than undermount and side mount styles. The best drawer slides have a capacity of at least 75 pounds. Most standard options cap out at a 100-pound weight capacity, though heavier-duty products are available at a higher price point.

Anti-Rust Feature

Some metal slides are coated with a chemical that protects against rust and corrosion. While stainless steel is designed to resist rust, other types of steel are susceptible to rusting if they are exposed to moisture, which is not unusual in kitchens and bathrooms. Anti-rust coatings will extend the life of your drawer slides and are commonly found on high-quality slides.

Ball Bearing

Metal drawer slides come with either nylon rollers or metal ball bearings.

  • Drawer slides with plastic or nylon rollers, like European roller slides, are typically more affordable. They’re a good choice for drawers that don’t need to bear a lot of weight. Some are designed to work with self-closing drawers.
  • Slides with ball bearings are generally sturdier and have higher weight capacities. Most soft-closing and self-closing drawers have ball-bearing mechanisms.

FAQs

Q. What size drawer slides do I need?

The size of drawer slides you need depends on the depth of your drawers and cabinet. Simply put, drawer slides should be the same size as your drawer, after you subtract the depth of the drawer face.

Q. How do I measure drawers for slides?

Remove the drawer from the cabinet, and turn the drawer upside down. Measure from the underside of the front of the drawer to the back of the drawer; that is, measure everything except the drawer front. Then round the measurement down to the nearest whole number: a 15½-inch drawer, for example, would require a 15-inch slide.

Q. Will it be a problem if I go for a slider that has a plastic engagement pin?

Sliders with stainless steel engagement pins will last longer and be more durable than those with plastic engagement pins.

The post The Best Drawer Slides for Soft-Closing Cabinets and More appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-27T10:17:11-05:00
<![CDATA[This Tool Is a Must-Have for Every Homeowner]]>The best tape measure provides accurate results for your measurement needs. We put our top picks to the test. Read on to see which tape measures performed well and our shopping tips.

The post This Tool Is a Must-Have for Every Homeowner appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-tape-measures/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=100552Thu, 23 Jan 2025 14:02:52 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

The adage “measure twice, cut once” is key in all kinds of craft and construction projects—and following it is much easier with a tape measure. However, since tape measures are readily available in various types and at a wide range of prices, it’s hard to know which ones are accurate and reliable. To help you choose a measuring tape you can trust, we put 10 top options to the test and reached out to an expert for their insights on the matter.  

Based on our tests and our expert’s advice, we chose the Stanley 25-Foot PowerLock Tape Measure for its accuracy, durable construction, and reasonable price. We also found several other options that offer quality, precision, and the ability to withstand repetitive use. Read on for a breakdown of the best tape measures, their pros and cons, and things to consider when selecting the right tool for your needs.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Stanley 25-Foot PowerLock Tape Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Komelon Self-Lock 25-Foot Power Tape
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST POCKET-SIZE: Lexivon 16Ft/5m DuaLock Tape Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Craftsman 25-Foot Self-Lock Tape Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR LAYOUTS: DeWalt 100-Foot Closed-Case Long Tape
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. EASIEST TO READ: Milwaukee 25-Foot Compact Auto-Lock Tape Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST LASER MEASURE: DTape DT50 165-Foot Laser Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. BEST FOR DISTANCES: Komelon 300-Foot Fiberglass Open-Reel Tape Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
  9. BEST METRIC: Zabiki 25-Foot Dual-Side Tape Measure
    ↓ Jump to Review
A person using one of the Best Tape Measures Options
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Tape Measure Comparison Chart

Product NameTypeLengthMarkings
Stanley 25-Foot PowerLock Tape MeasureCased25 feetImperial only 
Komelon Self-Lock 25-Foot Power TapeCased25 feetImperial only 
Lexivon 16Ft/5m DuaLock Tape MeasureCased 16 feetImperial and metric
Craftsman 25-Foot Self-Lock Tape MeasureCased25 feetImperial only 
DeWalt 100-Foot Closed-Case Long TapeReel100 feetImperial only 
Milwaukee 25-Foot Compact Auto-Lock Tape MeasureCased25 feetImperial only
DTape DT50 165-Foot Laser Measure Laser165 feetDigital, imperial and metric 
Komelon 300-Foot Fiberglass Open-Reel Tape MeasureReel300 feetImperial only 
Zabiki 25-Foot Dual-Side Tape MeasureCased25 feetImperial and metric

Our Top Picks

To qualify for a spot in our lineup of the best tape measures, the following products had to meet our high testing standards. While any of them are worthy of a place in your home tool kit, we suggest you review each one to determine which is best for your needs.

Best Overall

Stanley 25-Foot PowerLock Tape Measure

Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Metal blade stays stiff during use
  • Smooth retraction mechanism doesn’t catch
  • High-quality construction at a great price

What We Don’t Like

  • No metric measurements

Specs

  • Type Cased
  • Length 25 feet
  • Markings Imperial only

From a name well known in the building industry comes the Stanley 25-foot PowerLock tape measure—a dependable and accurate choice for anyone needing to make precision cuts. It features a stainless steel case with a strong blade lock that holds firmly without slipping. In our tests, the durable metal extended to nearly 10 feet before bending, which is quite an accomplishment compared to thinner blades that bend at 5 feet or less. 

The PowerLock has a 3-rivet-reinforced tang for accurate measuring and features imperial-only measurements in ⅙-inch increments. This labeled tape measure also has red premarked 16-inch notations for easy stud locating and black diamonds every 19.2 inches, which is another spacing interval often used in framing. After the first 12 inches, the Stanley tape shows both feet and inches as well as cumulative inch measurements (e.g., both 30 inches and 2 feet, 6 inches), which is useful when determining longer distances. 

What our tester says: “This tape is highly accurate and durable, and since it has a clip for easy carrying on a pocket or belt, it’s a tape measure we find ourselves relying on time and time again.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Stanley tape measure at Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot.

Best Bang for the Buck

Komelon Self-Lock 25-Foot Power Tape

 The Best Tape Measures Option: Komelon Self Lock 25-Foot Power Tape
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Self-locking feature automatically secures blade
  • Push-button blade retrieval eliminates fumbling
  • Stainless steel clip grips tool belts tightly

What We Don’t Like

  • Auto-lock function less effective at longer lengths
  • No metric measurements

Specs

  • Type Cased
  • Length 25 feet
  • Markings Imperial only

DIYers don’t need to overspend to get an accurate tape measure, and the Komelon self-lock power tape is a great budget-friendly option. The easy-read tape measure not only has precise markings, but they’re also on both edges, allowing for easy, accurate readings from either side. The Komelon also features graphic notations every 16 inches and 19.2 inches, making it well suited for standard framing measurement. It demonstrated rigid blade standout to just over 7 feet, making it a very decent tape measure for the price point. 

Another standout feature of this Komelon is its self-lock mechanism, which automatically holds the blade in place when engaged, eliminating the need to manually engage a stiff blade lock. It has a bright green button that, when pressed, retracts the blade smoothly and doubles as a manual lock. While we loved using it to trigger a smooth retraction of the blade, we found we did have to use it to manually lock the blade at longer lengths. The auto lock worked when at distances of a few feet, but by the time we extended the blade to 20 feet, it started to slip. Still, the measurements are highly accurate, and we appreciate being able to use the green button to lock the blade manually. 

Get the Komelon self-lock tape measure at Amazon, Lowe’s, Ace Hardware, or Walmart.

Best Pocket-Size

Lexivon 16-Foot/5-Meter DuaLock Tape Measure

 The Best Tape Measures Option: LEXIVON 16Ft 5m DuaLock Tape Measure
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact; great for shorter-length measurements
  • Rubberized grip doesn’t slip
  • Dual blade-locking system with pressure-sensitive button

What We Don’t Like

  • Too short for larger jobs

Specs

  • Type Cased
  • Length 16 feet
  • Markings Imperial and metric

TThose looking for a quality compact tape measure need look no further than the Lexivon 16-foot tape measure, which comes with both imperial and metric measurements and graphic markings denoting standard 16-inch and 19.2-inch framing measurements. It features a smooth rubberized overmold, a steel belt/pocket clip, and hook-under tang forks that allow the user to snag the upper or underside of the item being measured. 

In our tests, we were able to extend it nearly 6 feet (standout) before it bent, we found the numbers easy to read, and we were impressed by the dual blade-locking system. In addition to a standard blade lock, it also has a pressure-sensitive button on the bottom of the case. Pressing the button stops the blade from moving, and letting up on it a bit allows it to retract slowly. Anyone undertaking a small job who’s been cut by a metal tape blade that retracted too quickly will appreciate the pocket-sized Lexivon. 

Get the Lexivon tape measure at Amazon or Walmart.

Best Heavy-Duty

Craftsman 25-Foot Self-Lock Tape Measure

 The Best Tape Measures Option: CRAFTSMAN Tape Measure, Self-Lock, 25-Foot
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • High-quality construction for heavy use
  • Smaller fractions labeled for precise measurements
  • Self-locking with smooth blade movement

What We Don’t Like

  • No metric measurements

Specs

  • Type Cased
  • Length 25 feet
  • Markings Imperial only

Everything about the Craftsman heavy-duty tape measure points toward it being a quality tool made to withstand high use. The case is made from heavy molded polyethylene and features a partial rubberized grip along the top and bottom edges. The belt clip is polished solid steel, and the metal blade is nylon coated for durability and rust resistance. The movement on the blade is smooth, and the retraction is controlled and even. 

Although it only has imperial measurements (with standard graphic notations every 16 and 19.2 inches), it improves over some tapes in that incremental fractions are printed along the bottom edge of the blade. We checked the measurements on the Craftsman tape against our steel measure, and they were spot-on. This Craftmas also features a 3-rivet tang and a labeled lock button that doesn’t leave the user guessing which direction is locked and which is unlocked. The tape is self-locking as well, making it well suited to anyone who doesn’t want to take the extra time to set the lock manually. 

Get the Craftsman tape measure at Amazon, Ace Hardware, or Walmart.

Best for Layouts

DeWalt 100-Foot Closed-Case Long Tape

 The Best Tape Measures Option: DEWALT Tape Measure, Closed Case, 100-Foot
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Fast-winding crank retracts with minimal turning
  • Coated for rust resistance
  • Constructed to withstand tough jobsites

What We Don’t Like

  • ⅜-inch wide tape slightly on the thin side

Specs

  • Type Reel
  • Length 100 feet
  • Markings Imperial only

The DeWalt 100-foot tape measure is perfect for tasks like staking out an area for excavating or determining the dimensions of a lot. With imperial measurements at ⅛-inch increments, it’s not suited to making precise carpentry cuts, but it wasn’t designed for that. Instead, the 100-foot reel tape measure is made to obtain longer measurements, and it’s typically used outdoors when laying out foundations or determining the length of a proposed fence line. 

The tang comes with a fold-out spike that is useful for fitting over a nail or screw head, and the molded plastic case is strong and durable with a partially rubberized grip. The flexible fiberglass blade has a rust-resistant coating that gives it stability, even in tough jobsite conditions like wind and rain. The stainless steel crank arm is snug without any play, and it features a 5-to-1 gear ratio, which allowed us to wind up the entire tape with just a dozen or so turns. The tape comes with an attached stainless steel carabiner clip that’s perfect for hanging on a hook. 

What our tester says: “We’re familiar with reel tape measures and DeWalt products, so we had high hopes for this specific tool—and we weren’t disappointed. We were especially impressed when we hooked the tang on a nail, stretched the tape to its maximum length, and it didn’t flip this way and that in the wind like some reel tapes do.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the DeWalt tape measure at Amazon, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot.

Easiest to Read

Milwaukee 25-Foot Compact Auto-Lock Tape Measure

 The Best Tape Measures Option: Milwaukee 25 ft. Compact Auto Lock Tape Measure
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Easy-read measuring tape with large numbers
  • Self-locking mechanism and hook-under forks
  • Partial rubberized case and belt/pocket clip

What We Don’t Like

  • No metric measurements

Specs

  • Type Cased
  • Length 25 feet
  • Markings Imperial only

Milwaukee is nationally known for high-quality construction tools and accessories, and the Milwaukee 25-foot self-lock tape measure is no exception. As with all the tapes we tested, the Milwaukee’s measurements were spot-on. The tape’s bold black whole-inch numbers are large and easy to read against the muted yellow background. In addition, the smaller fractions are clearly labeled along the bottom edge of the tape, with the ¼-inch fractions appearing in bold and the ⅛-inch fractions in regular type, making both easy to see at a glance. 

The Milwaukee tape measure features a 3-rivet tang with hook-under forks that allow the user to snag the topside or the underside of the item being measured. The tape had the longest standout of all, just under 9 feet before it bent, and the tool comes with a self-lock that kept the blade from retracting until we depressed the retraction button. 

Get the Milwaukee tape measure at The Home Depot, Northern Tool + Equipment, or Walmart.

Best Laser Measure

DTape DT50 165-Foot Laser Measure

 The Best Tape Measures Option: DTAPE Laser Measure 165ft, DT50Laser Portable Digital
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Instantly measures from one point to another
  • Well suited to measuring room dimensions
  • Backlit LED screen makes numbers easy to see

What We Don’t Like

  • Only accurate between ¼ and ½ inch
  • Slightly complex calculator functions

Specs

  • Type Laser
  • Length 165 feet
  • Markings Digital, imperial and metric

With the DTape laser measure, there’s no hooking a tang over a nail head, recruiting a helper to hold the end of the tape, or locking a blade in place while wondering if it will retract too quickly and snap your hand. Instead, this digital tape measure lets you determine distances easily by pushing a button, positioning a bright red laser dot on the spot you want to measure, and checking the reading on the LED screen. It’s fast and easy to use, runs on two AAA batteries, and comes with calculator functions.

While we like a lot about the DTape laser measure, it’s much quicker to figure estimates on a standard construction calculator, and its measurements are only accurate between ¼ to ½ of an inch. While that’s not precise enough for construction or woodworking projects, it’s plenty close for calculating the width, length, volume, and area of rooms for appraisal purposes or to estimate paint, carpeting, or wallpaper. 

If you need a laser measure that offers more accuracy (albeit at several times the price), check out our review of the best digital tape measure, the DeWalt digital tape measure

Get the DTape laser tape measure at Amazon. 

Best for Distances

Komelon 300-Foot Fiberglass Open-Reel Tape Measure

 The Best Tape Measures Option: Komelon 6633 Open Reel Fiberglass Tape Measure
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Lime-green tape is highly visible
  • Fiberglass coating keeps roll tape measure from twisting
  • Sturdy enough for regular use

What We Don’t Like

  • Subject to the elements if left outside

Specs

  • Type Reel
  • Length 300 feet
  • Markings Imperial only

Lengthy measurements, such as across an entire lot or from a curb to the back of the house, require a long reel of tape, and that’s just what the Komelon open-reel measurer provides. All 300 feet of lime-green fiberglass tape are neatly wound around a center spool and held in place by strong molded polyethylene arm supports that keep it snug and evenly wound. Both sides of the double-sided tape measure feature imperial measurements in ⅛-inch increments, which is standard for a reel tape. The reel tape is sturdy and durable, and we found it to be one of the most accurate measuring tape models we’d ever tested. 

The tang features a fold-down spike that can be fitted over a nail or screw head, and the Komelon comes with a separate bright orange spike for pushing into the ground to determine the origination point. We’ve used reel tapes before that became twisted on the spool when rewinding them up, but the fiberglass tape on the Komelon has just enough stiffness to help keep it straight. 

Get the Komelon open reel tape measure at Amazon or Blain’s Farm & Fleet. 

Best Metric

Zabiki 25-Foot Dual-Side Tape Measure

 The Best Tape Measures Option: Zabiki Tape Measure, 25 Ft Dual Side Easy to Read
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Easy-to-read markings for all measurements
  • Partial rubberized grip is comfortable
  • Magnetic tang holds firm during use

What We Don’t Like

  • Blade lock slightly stiff
  • No recurring markers at 16-inch or 19.2-inch increments

Specs

  • Type Cased
  • Length 25 feet
  • Markings Imperial and metric

Most tape measures sold in the U.S. come with imperial measurements only, and those that include metric measurements often have small and difficult-to-see numbers. Not so with the Zabiki 25-foot tape measure: Both inches and centimeters are clearly marked and equally easy to read. It also has a 3-rivet tang for durability and features a sturdy case with a partial rubberized grip. 

One thing this measuring tape had that none of the others did was a strong magnetic tang,  opening up the option to measure metal objects without needing a helper. Our tests showed the tang is strong enough to hold firm against metal even when the tape is fully extended. We really liked this and most of the rest of the Zabiki, with the only exceptions being the lack of markers at 16 and 19.2 inches and the fact that the blade lock tended to stick. Still, it extended to almost 6 feet in our standout test and will be excellent overall for anyone needing imperial and metric measurements. 

Get the Zabiki tape measure at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Tape Measures

To earn a spot in our lineup, each of the tape measures had to be accurate and precise, so we compared each one’s measurements against a steel measuring tool for accuracy. We then extended them to their maximum lengths, noting how easy it was to pull the blade out and how smoothly it retracted back into the housing. We also looked at quality, blade standout, blade lock, and the overall design of the tape. 

Though even the best measuring tape is a relatively simple tool, we inspected each option closely to see how well its tang was attached and whether its markings were clear and easy to read. We evaluated case and tape durability and whether a tape included both imperial and metric measurements. Still, we didn’t dock a tape for not having metrics since many U.S. DIYers and pros use only imperial measurements. We awarded points for each test we performed, depending on how well the tape measured up. 

What to Consider When Choosing a Tape Measure 

Getting precise measurements is essential for many projects, even ones as simple as hanging art or estimating how much wallpaper will be necessary for a specific room. This means you need to know about the types of tape measures, the meaning of the lines on a tape measure, and whether any additional features would make your project easier. 

Type 

Don’t choose a tape measure at random; take some time to learn the basics. First off, know that there are four basic varieties to choose from: 

  • Cased tape measures: The most popular and versatile design, these tape measures house the blade—the metal or fiberglass measuring strip—in a rubber or metal holder that can be easily stowed in a pocket or clipped to a tool belt. You can use a standard cased tape measure for a variety of building and craft purposes, such as installing shelving, hanging pictures, and woodworking.
  • Long or open-reel tapes: Used primarily by engineers, contractors, and builders, these tools have a hand crank for retraction and can be between 25 and 500 feet in length. They are typically made of coated fiberglass, have measurement markings in both feet and meters, and may have a bottom spike for increased stability when measuring ground distances.
  • D-tape: Similar in look and style to a cased tape, a D-tape (diameter tape) contains an ultra-flexible blade of cloth or metal that can easily wrap around pipes and poles. D-tapes provide an accurate measurement using pi to calculate circumference (the length around a circle) and diameter (a straight line passing from one side of a circle to the other). D-tapes come in a variety of lengths, from 12 inches to 50 feet.
  • Laser: Rather than an actual tape measurer, the new kids on the block—laser tape measures—can be handy alternatives to standard tape measures when the user needs to calculate the width, length, or height of a room. To use one, you simply shine the laser on the wall, ceiling, or board and press the measuring button. The best laser measures calculate the distance within about ⅛ inch to ½ inch. These tape measures are popular with real estate agents, appraisers, and adjusters, but they’re subject to user error (moving slightly while measuring), so they’re not the best option for precision carpentry.

Blade and Tang

The tape itself—known as the blade—needs to be strong enough to stay straight and firm when extended in the air. Cheap blades bend easily, denting and dipping in places. Quality blades, made of steel or fiberglass, should literally “stand out” for 6 feet or farther before bending. Metal blades coated with nylon are highly durable and versatile. 

The metal end-hook at the tip of the tape measure, the tang, is key to getting an accurate reading. Make sure the tang on the measurer you choose looks and feels solid without being static—there should be a slight in-and-out movement (called “floating”) when you tug it gently. You’ll notice that when the tang hits a wall or solid object, it pushes in slightly. When you hook the tang around an edge, it pulls out slightly. The tang is designed to float to compensate for its own width, providing consistent and accurate measurement. Magnetic tangs act as an additional tool—assisting a solo measurer when measuring a metal object.

Markings 

Tape measure markings are the information printed on the blade, which should be clear and easy to read. In the U.S. most markings use the imperial system of feet, inches, and fractions. If you think you may need to make conversions (for a rug or piece of furniture from abroad, for example), get a tape measure that also has metric markings.

Graphic markings (diamonds and triangles) noting 16-inch and 19.2-inch intervals are useful for building walls compliant with codes since studs are often placed 16 inches apart. Stud marks also make hanging pictures and installing shelves much easier, allowing you to anchor the nail solidly.

Size and Weight

Most standard tape measures are highly portable. They weigh just a few ounces, and the majority come with a clip on one side for carrying on a belt or a pocket. The exception is the reel tape, which can measure as much as a foot in diameter, depending on length.

  • Size: Standard measuring tape housings are usually no more than about 4 inches high and wide and an inch or so thick. Reel-type models can be up to a foot long and wide or even larger.
  • Weight: Users can expect the average tape measure to weigh less than a pound—although some of the more compact models weigh just a couple of ounces. Reel tapes generally weigh around 3 pounds or more.

Accuracy

While all tape measures should be accurate, finish carpenters, cabinetmakers, and woodworkers depend on a high level of accuracy. Most tape measures come with 1/16-inch increments, although a few come with 1/32-inch increments. When learning how to read a tape measure for precision, if the measure has only 1/16-inch increments, the standard rule is to say the measurement is “strong” when it falls between increments. For example, if a measurement falls between 3/16 inch and 4/16 inch, it would be called a “strong 3/16 inch” which tells the user it’s actually 7/32 inch.

In addition to marking increments, a few more considerations can impact a tape measure’s accuracy:

  • Standout: Most metal-blade tape measures (excluding the very cheapest) feature a blade with a curve. The curve is instrumental in keeping the blade from bending downward when the user extends it a few feet in the air. This is known as the blade’s standout capability. Eventually, all blades will bend, but the best ones can be extended 6 feet or farther before that happens.
  • Scribe tip: Measuring is straightforward, but a pencil is often necessary to mark the material for cutting. When a pencil isn’t available, the slightly serrated bottom edge of the tang can be moved back and forth across the material to make a mark for cutting.
  • Nail grab: The best measuring tapes come with a nail grab, which is helpful for those working alone with no helper to hold the tape. By driving a nail into the material at the right spot, the user can slip the tang over the nail head to hold it in place for measuring.

Additional Features

  • Belt clip or holder: Cased tape measures are often equipped with a belt clip—a steel or nylon pincer that attaches to a tool belt or pocket. Some pros and do-it-yourselfers find the clip annoying because it adds bulkiness and may make the tape measure harder to hold or stow in a pocket. If you find this to be true, you can often unscrew the clip or buy a clipless model.
  • Auto-lock: A tape measure that automatically locks when pulled out is especially helpful when working alone or in tight spaces. For example, if you’re measuring the inside of a cabinet, the blade will lock into position by itself, ensuring an accurate reading. Simply press a button and the blade will retract.
  • Rubberized grip: When shopping for the best measurement tape, grip type is secondary to other features. The best overall pick in our lineup features stainless steel housing, although many of the other tape measures we tested come with rubberized coatings that give them a soft hand feel. The difference is mostly negligible, but a rubberized grip may help keep hand tools from slipping.

FAQs

Tape measures are found in most homes, workshops, tool boxes, and tool belts, and for a good reason—there’s always something that needs measuring. Still, different types of measuring tape are better suited to some tasks than others, so it’s natural that those looking to find the best tape measure for a specific project may have a few remaining questions. the best tape measure for a specific project are likely to have some questions.

Q. What is the black diamond on a measuring tape for?

Small black triangles appear every 16 inches on many measuring tapes to denote standard 16-inch on center (O.C.) measurements between studs. Small black diamonds appear every 19.2 inches, another standard spacing for wall studs or floor joists, although 16-inch O.C. is the most common.

Q. Do I need an automatic locking tape?

It sure is handy, but you don’t need it. You can always engage the manual lock if the tape doesn’t automatically lock when you pull the blade out.

Q. What are the most common sizes of tape measures?

With tape measures, 25 feet is the most common length, although some are as short as 12 feet, and others are 30 feet or longer.

Q. Are laser distance measurers worth the price?

It depends on how they’re used. They’re typically accurate to around ¼ of an inch, suitable for figuring wall space but not accurate enough for woodworking. Real estate agents, appraisers, and engineers often find laser tape measures worth the money.

Q. Which is more accurate, a tape measure or ruler?

They should be equally accurate—the difference is that a tape measure is accurate over a longer distance. 

Q. Are tape measures 100% accurate?

We asked the COO of Bates Electric, Inc., Andrew Bates, this question. According to Andrew,
“Tape measures are almost never 100% accurate, though they’re relatively close to the truth.” He also points out that it’s difficult to get the exact same length from two different tape measures, so it’s very important to choose a tape measure type that’s appropriate for the accuracy your project requires. 

Q. Should measuring tape be tight or loose?

The short answer is that a measuring tape should be held tight while being stretched from point A to point B. If you’re still wondering how to read a measuring tape and would like more tips, check out our guide on how to use a tape measure.  

Q. Why is there a hole in the end of a tape measure?

As mentioned above, the hole at the end of a tape measure is a nail grab. You can drive a nail or small screw into this hole to hold the tape in place when working alone.

The post This Tool Is a Must-Have for Every Homeowner appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-23T14:02:52-05:00
<![CDATA[The Highest Performing Corded Hammer Drill Is the Best Pick for Both Pros and DIYers]]>The post The Highest Performing Corded Hammer Drill Is the Best Pick for Both Pros and DIYers appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/best-corded-hammer-drills/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=422979Thu, 23 Jan 2025 10:14:01 -0500ReviewsPower ToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Corded hammer drills can sometimes seem to belong to a category of tools that are a bit outdated. While it’s true that many lack high-tech motors, that’s largely because corded hammer drills simply do not need them. Whereas cordless tools rely on efficient motors that can eke the most out of their limited battery power, corded hammer drills boast simpler motors with long-proven reliability. They’re often more affordable as a result, and they never leave a project on hold while the battery charges.

In this article, we’ll examine a lineup that includes value-conscious and high-performance options. We’ll answer questions like, “Exactly what is a hammer drill?” and give advice on choosing the right model for both home and jobsite tasks. We also have a carefully curated selection of the best corded hammer drills on the market right now.

Best Overall

DeWalt ½-Inch VSR Pistol-Grip Hammer Drill

Photo: The Home Depot

Pros

  • Versatile all-rounder for home and professional use
  • Drill-only mode for wood and steel
  • Side handle for increased grip and control

Cons

  • Brand name’s reputation comes with premium pricing
  • Occasional reports of overheating

Specs

  • Power 1,100 watts
  • Maximum Speed 3,500 rpm
  • Blows Per Minute (BPM) 56,000

The DeWalt pistol-grip hammer drill is a terrific all-around choice for most projects. It’s a go-to tool when you need higher performance for tough drilling tasks without the bulk and weight you usually get with a rotary hammer drill. It’s rated for up to 1½” diameter in wood, ¾” in masonry, and ½” in steel. It can run in high-speed, drill-only mode for wood and steel, and switch to low-speed and higher torque when you need a hammer drill for concrete or other masonry. The side handle adds control so you can drill with precision, and there’s an adjustable depth stop. The 10-amp motor has overload protection, which should prevent burnout should a drill bit get jammed—not an uncommon event when drilling in hard materials.

What our tester says: “The DeWalt power tools I’ve tested are usually the toughest, and this one was no exception with its all-metal chuck and gear case. If you have a project that requires drilling more than a couple of holes in masonry or making large holes in wood, this corded model is a great choice.” —Tony Carrick, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the DeWalt corded hammer drill at Lowe’s or The Home Depot.

More Corded Hammer Drills Worth Your Money

Dewalt corded hammer drill being used on concrete
Photo: Tony Carrick for Bob Vila

These tools vary from budget-friendly, entry-level models to heavy-duty hammer drills that can tackle light demolition jobs. In fact, it’s not unusual to find a hammer drill set that includes the chisels necessary for this type of work. The following list of the best corded hammer drills demonstrates the wide variety available.

How We Chose the Best Corded Hammer Drills

To ensure we had an overall view of the market, we drew on personal experience with corded drills and conducted extensive research. We looked at power output, speed, impact rate, and torque. Weight and manageability were also important, as was durability. The best hammer drill isn’t necessarily the one with the highest performance. For example, a hammer drill with drill bits can offer DIY users better value for the money even if the maximum speed is slightly lower than other models. As such, our curated roundup includes entry-level models as well as those that professionals might choose.

We also sought some professional advice. Corey Hinkel, Product Manager at Bosch Power Tools, suggested that “Before purchasing a corded hammer drill, it’s essential to consider factors like weight, required hole size, and impact energy. These key criteria will help in selecting the ideal tool for the specific job demands, including drilling, breaking, and chiseling concrete.”

What to Consider When Choosing a Corded Hammer Drill

The Best Corded Hammer Drills Option
Photo: Amazon

The key aspects of choosing a hammer drill will depend on what you’re likely to use it for most of the time. For example, if you want to put up a few shelves in a cinder block garage wall, an entry-level hammer drill will do what a standard drill driver can’t and it won’t cost you a lot of money. On the other hand, if you’re going to be drilling holes in concrete all day long, you’ll want a corded rotary hammer. The following section explains the main differences.

Power

There are two ways to indicate the power of a corded drill: amps (A) or watts (W). In both cases, higher numbers indicate more power. Amps measure the strength of the electrical current used. Generally speaking, entry-level to light professional hammer drills use between 6 and 8 amps. More powerful heavy-duty models use between 10 and 14 amps. At the upper end of this range, you find tools that can also work as light demolition hammers. The maximum current allowed by an ordinary household socket is usually 15 amps, so 14 amps is seen as a maximum to prevent the tool from tripping breakers.

Watts are calculated by multiplying amps by volts. As most circuits are 120 volts, it’s easy to see that amps and watts are closely related. Entry-level hammer drills are probably in the 500 to 600 watt range, whereas heavy-duty models might reach 1,500 watts. Not all manufacturers provide the hammer drill’s wattage, and we found that even when they do, some retailer figures are inaccurate. As long as you remember that watts=amps x volts, you can calculate the true value yourself.

Speed

Budget-friendly hammer drills are often single-speed. It’s a compromise between the faster speeds generally used for wood and slower speeds that are better suited for drilling masonry. A switch is used to toggle between the standard drilling mode and the hammer action.

The same kind of switch is found on more powerful hammer drills, but these also have two speeds, so you have increased versatility when drilling in different materials. Another way to judge performance is to look at the maximum drilling capacities that some manufacturers provide or the size of the drill bit that can be used in the chuck. You might also want to check the type of chuck. Heavy-duty SDS, SDS Plus, and SDS Max hammer drills have a special engagement system and can’t use standard drill bits.

Impact Energy & Torque

Our expert, Corey Hinkel of Bosch Power Tools, mentioned the importance of impact energy, which is essentially the force of the hammer action. Manufacturers often provide related metrics, such as blows per minute (BPM) or impacts per minute (IPM). The higher the number, the more rapid the hammering; however, that doesn’t take into account the amount of force or weight behind the hammer action, and those would be needed to properly gauge impact energy. Unfortunately, the numbers are seldom provided, so in effect you have to make an educated guess. Combining BPM with tool weight gives a reasonable indication for comparison.

Torque can be defined as twisting power. It’s most often given as inch pounds (in-lbs) but occasionally as foot pounds (ft-lbs). Hammer drills usually boast considerably more torque than standard models, though again, figures may be hard to find.

FAQs

The article above provides plenty of information to help you understand the different ways a corded power drill can function. A look at the specifications of our top picks will allow you to refine your choice. During our research, we found a few questions related to performance that could affect how a drill would be used, so we have answered those questions here.

Q. Is a corded hammer drill more powerful than cordless?

A corded hammer drill isn’t necessarily more powerful than a cordless hammer drill. However, as corded hammer drills are often cheaper than their cordless equivalent, you may be able to afford a more powerful model. Additionally, corded performance isn’t interrupted by the need to change batteries.

Q. How powerful should a hammer drill be?

It depends on the type of work you need to do. The information provided in our ‘What to Consider’ section will help you assess your needs. Entry-level DIY models would be around 6 to 8 watts. Heavy-duty tools can offer up to 14 watts.

Q. What is the best wattage for a hammer drill?

As watts are widely accepted as a way to measure how powerful a motor is, use the same standard you would to decide how powerful the drill should be: for heavy-duty jobs, look for a higher wattage (up to 14). For simpler, less-demanding jobs, an entry-level model of 6 to 8 watts should suffice.

Q. What are the disadvantages of a corded hammer drill?

Corded hammer drills may sometimes be seen as older technology, and budget models may be basic. The main disadvantage is that the cord can restrict freedom of movement, and even with a long extension, you need to be within about 100 feet of a power outlet.

The post The Highest Performing Corded Hammer Drill Is the Best Pick for Both Pros and DIYers appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-23T10:14:01-05:00
<![CDATA[This Simple Tool Is a Must-Have for Electrical Projects]]>Cut, strip, crimp, and grab wires with some of the best wire cutters on the market. See our recommendations for electricians and DIYers.

The post This Simple Tool Is a Must-Have for Electrical Projects appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-wire-cutters/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=142701Tue, 21 Jan 2025 14:21:04 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Whether you’re an electrician, mechanic, or DIYer, a quality pair of wire cutters can make an indispensable addition to your toolbox. The name “wire cutter” can be deceiving, though, since most of them incorporate one or more additional features that give them multipurpose functionality. Wire strippers, bolt cutters, and snub or needle-nose plier jaws are just some of the available options to choose from, depending on your specific needs. 

After reviewing dozens of wire cutters and putting some to the test, our favorite is the IRWIN Vise-Grip Wire Stripping Tool / Wire Cutter. Available at a budget-friendly price point, this tool performed well, allowing us to cut, strip, and crimp 10 to 22-gauge wires with ease.

To get the low-down on selecting the right wire-cutting tool for the job, read on to discover the types available, how they differ in quality, and how to choose the best wire cutters for your next project. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: IRWIN VISE-GRIP Wire Stripping Tool / Wire Cutter
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: DOWELL 10-22 AWG Wire Stripper Cutter Wire Stripping
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST FOR PROFESSIONALS: 4-in-1 Lineman Plier Pro Lineman Tools 9” Combination
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST FLUSH: Klein Tools D213-9NE Pliers, 9-Inch Side Cutters
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST DIAGONAL: IGAN Diagonal Cutting Pliers, 7-inch Ultra Tough
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST NEEDLE-NOSE: LAOA Needle-nose Pliers with Stripper
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST SPRING-LOADED: Klein Tools 11055 Wire Cutter and Stripper
    Jump to Review
  8. BEST WITH CRIMPER: Greenlee Stainless Steel Wire Cutter/Stripper/Crimper
    Jump to Review
Best Wire Cutters Options
Photo: amazon.com
Product NameLengthAWG Range
Multifunctional
IRWIN VISE-GRIP Wire Stripping Tool / Wire Cutter8 inches10 to 22 gaugeYes
DOWELL 10-22 AWG Wire Stripper Cutter Wire Stripping7 inches10 to 22 gaugeYes
4-in-1 Lineman Plier Pro Lineman Tools 9” Combination9 inchesNot specifiedYes
Klein Tools D213-9NE Pliers, 9-Inch Side Cutters9.35 inchesUp to 8 gaugeNo
IGAN Diagonal Cutting Pliers, 7-inch Ultra Tough7 inchesUp to 9 gauge copper wire, 11 gauge iron wire, and 14 gauge steel wireNo
LAOA Needle-nose Pliers with Stripper8.47 inchesVaries; up to 12 gauge iron wire, up to 4 gauge cableYes
Klein Tools 11055 Wire Cutter and Stripper7.4 inches10 to 18 gauge solid wire and 12 to 20 gauge stranded wireYes
Greenlee Stainless Steel Wire Cutter/Stripper/Crimper7.5 inchesNot specifiedYes

Our Top Picks

While a basic pair of wire cutters is sufficient for tackling small jobs, not every pair will work for every project. Consider the following top-rated options in several different categories.

Best Overall

IRWIN VISE-GRIP Wire Stripping Tool / Wire Cutter

 Best Wire Cutters Options: IRWIN VISE-GRIP Wire Stripping Tool
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Multifunctional tool cuts, strips, and crimps wire
  • Features a built-in small bolt cutter
  • Has hardened cutting teeth

What We Don’t Like

  • Wire cutter isn’t spring-loaded
  • Handle isn’t comfortable enough for prolonged use

Specs 

  • Length: 8 inches
  • AWG range: 10 to 22 gauge
  • Multifunctional: Yes

Whether you need to cut and strip wires, crimp terminal connectors, or even cut small bolts, Irwin’s wire cutter and strippers can do it all. This tool features an 8-inch handle covered with a comfort-grip material and offers maximum cutting leverage with minimal fatigue. We like that the wire cutters on the end of the jaws are induction-hardened for increased durability, and the needle-nose end makes grabbing onto small-gauge wires a breeze. 

For increased versatility, the Irwin wire cutters also feature wire stripping slots that accommodate 10 to 20 AWG wires and a crimper for splicing wires with terminal connectors. It even offers a small bolt cutter, capable of cutting small bolts with enough precision to leave enough lead thread for nuts to screw onto. 

What our tester says: Tom Scalisi, a Bob Vila writer and product tester, notes in the Best Wire Strippers that he was “impressed by the number of functions on the Irwin wire stripper, especially because it comes at a very attractive price point. In addition to cutting and stripping wires from 10 to 22 gauge in size, this handy tool offers crimping ability.”

Get the Irwin wire cutter at Amazon or Menards.

Best Bang for the Buck

DOWELL 10-22 AWG Wire Stripper Cutter Wire Stripping

 Best Wire Cutters Options: DOWELL 10-22 AWG Wire Stripper Cutter Wire
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Affordable price point
  • Features spring-loaded action
  • Can cut and strip wires
  • Has a safety lock

What We Don’t Like

  • Pivot point is less sturdy than other models

Specs 

  • Length: 7 inches
  • AWG range: 10 to 22 gauge
  • Multifunctional: Yes

Don’t be fooled into thinking the DOWELL wire cutters are a low-quality option just because they’re so affordable. They’re made with durable, corrosion-resistant high carbon steel that maintains the blade’s sharp edge for longer than comparably priced cutters that use lower quality materials. These durable components can cut, crimp, and strip a wide range of wire sizes. 

These small wire cutters feature a 7-inch comfort grip handle for comfortable operation and a spring-loaded mechanism for easy one-handed use. The main disadvantages are that the pivot point isn’t as sturdy as some higher-end models, and it doesn’t offer needle-nose jaws for grabbing and manipulating wires. But taking all the other impressive features into account, DOWELL’s cutters offer an incredible value for the price.

Get the DOWELL wire cutters at Amazon.

Best for Professionals

4-in-1 Lineman Plier Pro Lineman Tools 9” Combination

 Best Wire Cutters Options: 4-in-1 Lineman Plier,Pro Lineman Tools
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Can cut, twist, strip, and crimp wire
  • 9-inch handle provides leverage
  • Features comfortable PVC non-slip grips

What We Don’t Like

  • Only has five stripping slots

Specs 

  • Length: 9 inches
  • AWG range: Not specified
  • Multifunctional: Yes

For professional-grade cutting power and durability, consider these chrome vanadium steel heavy-duty wire cutters that maintain a sharp cutting edge while offering superior corrosion resistance. In addition to the cutter and plier jaws that typical lineman pliers feature, these cutters offer a crimper and an electric wire stripper for optimal versatility and functionality. 

The 9-inch handle offers increased leverage for maximum cutting and twisting power, and it’s wrapped with a comfort-grip material that reduces fatigue. The main disadvantage is that it only offers five unmarked wire stripping slots, which limits the tool’s overall multipurpose functionality. That being said, these cutters offer pro-grade features without breaking the bank.

Get the Lineman Plier Pro wire cutters at Amazon.

Best Flush

Klein Tools D213-9NE Pliers, 9-Inch Side Cutters

 Best Wire Cutters Options: Klein Tools D213-9NE Pliers
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Handle helps absorb “snap” when cutting wire
  • Thoughtful design offers plenty of cutting leverage
  • Features a durable, precision-hardened plier head

What We Don’t Like

  • Wire cutter only; not multifunctional

Specs 

  • Length: 9.35 inches
  • AWG range: Up to 8 gauge
  • Multifunctional: No

Klein Tools’ line of pliers and cutters have been used by professionals and DIYers for decades, and this pair of flush cutters doesn’t disappoint. The long 9-inch handle and a durable pivot point close to the jaws combine to offer a huge amount of cutting leverage. To compliment this leverage, the cutting blades are induction hardened to produce an incredibly hard blade that stays sharper for longer. Finally, the ergonomically designed handle fits snugly and comfortably in your hand. 

The main downside to this cutter is that it’s fairly expensive, and the higher price may be hard to justify for the average homeowner or occasional DIYer.

Get the Klein Tools wire cutters at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Lowes.

Best Diagonal

IGAN Diagonal Cutting Pliers, 7-inch Ultra Tough

 The Best Wire Cutter Option IGAN Diagonal Cutting Pliers, 7-inch Ultra Tough
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Spring-loaded mechanism allows one-handed operation
  • Hardened blades cut through a variety of material
  • Makes easy cuts thanks to its high-leverage design 

What We Don’t Like

  • No multifunctional capabilities

Specs 

  • Length: 7 inches
  • AWG range: Up to 9 gauge copper wire, 11 gauge iron wire, and 14 gauge steel wire
  • Multifunctional: No

If you need a wire cutter strictly designed for consistently making powerful cuts, then IGAN’s diagonal wire cutters may be just what you’re looking for. Its blades are made with induction-hardened, high-carbon steel for maximum durability and longevity, and a sturdy pivot point is in close proximity to the cutting jaws for easy and powerful cuts. The comfort-grip handles are coupled with a spring-loaded mechanism for comfortable one-handed operation, minimizing fatigue from prolonged use. 

Get the IGAN wire cutters at Amazon.

Best Needle-Nose

LAOA Needle-nose Pliers with Stripper

 The Best Wire Cutter Option LAOA Needle-nose Pliers with Stripper
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Cuts, strips, crimps, clamps, and more
  • Features an anti-slip handle
  • Needle-nose design is ideal for small wires

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users report missing or faulty safety lock
  • Crimping requires a lot of force

Specs 

  • Length: 8.47 inches
  • AWG range: Varies; up to 12 gauge iron wire, up to 4 gauge cable
  • Multifunctional: Yes

If you want a flush wire cutter that can access tight spaces and grab small wires, LAOA’s needle-nose pliers and wire cutters have you covered. The durable induction hardened, high carbon steel blades and plier jaws don’t just cut and grab wires; they also feature a crimper and a couple of wire stripping slots. 

The spring-loaded, comfort-grip handle is comfortable with an anti-slip grip. The primary con is that these wire cutters require a lot of force to achieve an effective crimp. Some users have also complained about the locking mechanism.

Get theLAOA wire cutters at Amazon or Walmart.

Best Spring-Loaded

Klein Tools 11055 Wire Cutter and Stripper

 The Best Wire Cutter Option Klein Tools 11055 Wire Cutter and Stripper
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Cuts solid and stranded copper wire
  • Acts as a wire stripper
  • Features doubled-dipped curved handles

What We Don’t Like

  • No crimping action

Specs 

  • Length: 7.4 inches
  • AWG range: 10 to 18 gauge solid wire and 12 to 20 gauge stranded wire
  • Multifunctional: Yes

Those looking for a basic set of wire cutters and strippers made of high-quality materials will appreciate these from Klein Tools. The needle-nose tip makes it easy to grab and bend wires, and the cutter consistently delivers clean cuts. The double-dipped, curved handle was comfortable for extended use when testing, and we appreciated the labeled AWG sizes on the wire stripper tool.

The only fault we found was the lack of a crimper, which is often necessary when working on computers or performing automotive work. The thumb release is also slightly stiff, but overall, these are a reliable, high-quality pair of wire cutters.

What our tester says: Glenda Taylor, a Bob Vila writer and product tester, notes in the Best Wire Strippers that “The sharpened stripper notches accommodate wires from 10 to 20 gauge in size. We were able to cut through wire cleanly, using the marked holes in the base of the shear blades.”

Get the Klein Tools wire cutters at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Ace Hardware (2-piece set).

Best with Crimper

Greenlee Stainless Steel Wire Cutter/Stripper/Crimper

 The Best Wire Cutter Option Greenlee Stainless Steel Wire Cutter
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Can cut, strip, and crimp wires
  • Comfortable vinyl cushioned handle
  • Features spring-loaded action
  • Has a safety lock

What We Don’t Like

  • Thumb lock tends to stick

Specs 

  • Length: 7.5 inches 
  • AWG range: Not specified
  • Multifunctional: Yes

Those performing automotive or computer work may need a crimper, stripper, and wire cutter. This Greenlee tool combines all three functions and even has a needle-nose tip, making it easy to grab and bend small wires.

While this model doesn’t specify the size of the wire it cuts, it can strip 10 to18 gauge solid wire and 12 to 20 gauge stranded conductors. The coil spring makes it easy to operate, and the tool features a safety lock to keep it closed when not in use. Other features of these stainless steel wire cutters include the ability to shear 6-32 and 8-32 bolts and vinyl cushioned handles for a comfortable grip.

Get the Greenlee wire cutters at Amazon or Acme Tools.

How We Chose the Best Wire Cutters

To find the best wire cutters, we spent hours researching the top brands and looking for models with the highest customer satisfaction ratings. We wanted to ensure that our recommendations were the best of the best. We varied our selection by showcasing each type of wire cutter, including flush, diagonal, and needle nose. Other factors we considered included AWG size, blade material, and ergonomics.

Based on our findings, we narrowed down the top wire cutters to eight picks that suit the most common needs. We then organized our list by category.

What to Consider When Choosing the Best Wire Cutters

Wire cutters are a type of electrician tool that can have different qualities, influencing performance and durability. Consider the following features before determining which model is best suited for your job.

Types of Wire Cutters

Three main types of wire cutters are available: flush, diagonal, and needle nose. While each one has a certain set of tasks for which they are specialized, most can be used for a variety of jobs. 

Flush 

Flush cut wire cutters (also called “combination” or “lineman’s pliers”) look like an ordinary pair of pliers but feature a pair of cutting blades flush to the outside edge and directly behind one of the plier’s gripping jaws. The flush cutting blades are capable of making clean and straight cuts without leaving a sharp point that could cut your hands, such as diagonal cutters tend to leave. However, they may require more manual force to cut the wire than diagonal cutters. In addition to the cutting blades, the plier jaws can be used for cutting, gripping, and bending wires and small cables. 

Some flush cutters are also equipped with bolt cutters capable of cutting screws and nails flush to the fastened surface and a few wire stripping slots for stripping back insulation.

Diagonal 

As opposed to flush cut pliers, diagonal cutters are used exclusively for cutting. These hand tools feature a pair of curved cutting blades that extend all the way to the tip. Because the cutting blades are diagonally offset by about 15 degrees, they can be used to cut wires at an angle. 

Instead of cutting with a shearing action like scissors or flush cut pliers, diagonal pliers use a wedging action to separate the wire connections with their v-shaped cutting blades. This special cutting mechanism typically makes cuts easier to make, which is a contributing factor to them being the most commonly used cutting instrument for electrical wire and other light-gauge metal wire. Just like flush cut pliers, they can also be used for flush cutting a variety of screws and nails. 

Needle-nose 

Needle-nose wire cutters are a variety of flush cut pliers that have a set of cutting blades flush to the outside and behind one of the plier’s jaws. However, with needle-nose models, the jaws taper down to a much smaller tip at the nose. This slender tip makes it easier to grab and manipulate small wires and to maneuver in confined spaces where conventional flush cut pliers can’t operate. 

In addition to straight nosed cutters, there are needle nose cutters with 45-degree and 90-degree bends in the nose to make grabbing material in awkward spaces easier. Needle-nose pliers can possess many of the same additional features as conventional flush wire cutters, like wire strippers and bolt cutters.

Handle 

The two most important factors to consider when choosing a handle are its length and grip materials. A longer handle provides more leverage for making easier cuts but at the cost of not being able to easily maneuver in tight and confined spaces. A smaller handle fits into smaller spaces, but requires more manual force to make cuts. The size of the handle also influences how comfortable the cutters are to use. It’s generally recommended to use at least a 4-inch long handle that’s capable of comfortably fitting in the palm of your hand, but some experts suggest a handle length of at least 5½ inches for optimal comfort. 

The handle can also feature grips composed of various polymers (most commonly plastic and rubber) and can be soft or hard. The more affordable models of wire cutters typically come with hard grip handles, but they’re the least comfortable to use over a long period. Soft, or “comfort” grip handles are more comfortable but usually come with a higher price tag. Each type can offer some degree of insulation against electrical shock, depending on the material’s level of nonconductivity.

Design 

A wire cutter’s design can heavily impact its performance and ease of use. Some wire cutters are designed to provide an all-in-one solution for cutting, stripping wire, crimping, and grabbing wires. These multipurpose tools typically have 10 or more individual slots for stripping wire, a needle nose plier head for grabbing, and a crimping tool at the base of the plier jaws. Unfortunately, because they aren’t specifically designed for cutting, they don’t typically offer the same cutting ability as a cutter made exclusively for that purpose. 

Another design factor to consider is the pivot point. The pivot point is the round piece of metal that sits directly behind the jaws and is responsible for allowing the jaws to open and close. A pivot point that’s closer to the jaws provides greater cutting force and leverage, so it’s best to use a wire cutter with a pivot point that’s as close to the jaws as possible for maximum cutting ability. It’s also important that the pivot point is designed to be as durable as possible. A lower-quality pivot point can become loose, resulting in “play” in the handle’s mechanism, making it difficult to close the blades directly on top of one another and cause lower quality cuts. Also, a poorly designed pivot point can develop “stickiness,” making it harder to open and close the handles and jaws. 

Comfort 

It doesn’t matter how well a set of electric wire cutters works if you’re discouraged from using them because they’re uncomfortable to handle. The handle length and grip material play a crucial role in how comfortable a wire cutter is to use. Another key comfort feature is a spring-loaded opening and closing mechanism, which reopens the cutter’s jaws when pressure is relieved. This allows for easy one-handed operation and also reduces the effort required to reopen the jaws after a cut has been made. 

A wire cutter with multifunctional capabilities also contributes to ease of use, as you won’t have to switch between tools in between tasks, such as cutting, stripping, and then crimping wires together. 

Blades 

Wire cutter blades are usually made from a type of “tool steel” with or without the addition of various metal alloys. Tool steel is simply iron with added carbon to achieve a hardness and durability that works particularly well for hand tools. Additional alloys, like higher quantities of carbon, chromium, nickel, and vanadium, can also be used to influence a tool’s hardness and durability. Generally speaking, wire cutters designed with conventional tool steel are affordable and offer a moderate level of hardness and durability, while steels that feature additional alloys are harder and more durable, but more expensive.

The other main difference between blades is whether they are made with a case hardening or induction hardening process. Most blades are case hardened, meaning that the tool is surrounded by carbon and heated until the higher—and harder—carbon material plates the blade’s surface, while leaving the core alloy unaffected. Induction hardening uses a multistage hardening process that heats the metal through electromagnetic conduction to harden the blade all the way through. Case hardened blades are generally the cheapest, but they’re not as durable and are difficult to sharpen. Inducted hardened blades are more expensive, but retain a sharp edge for longer and are easier to sharpen. 

FAQs About Your New Wire Cutters

Before you start using your new pair of wire cutters, you may have some lingering questions about some of its features and how they’re used. To that end, consider the answers to following frequently asked questions.

How should you use wire cutters? 

You can use wire cutters like a pair of scissors: by separating the handles to open the cutting blades, inserting the wire in between the blades, and closing the handles to bring the blades together and sever the wire. You can also insert a wire terminal connector into the crimping slot (if equipped) for crimping or insert a wire into the appropriate wire stripping slot for stripping wire. 

How should you open a wire cutter?

A wire cutter with a spring-loaded handle opens automatically when you’re no longer applying manual force to keep the handle closed. If the wire cutter isn’t spring-loaded, you can either use your nondominant hand to open the handles or use a flicking motion with the hand with which you’re using the pliers. 

Is it safe to cut a cable wire?

Before cutting a cable wire, you should ensure that it’s not supplied with electricity (“live”). You can use a line tester to verify that the wire isn’t electrified. To be extra careful, you can shut off the electricity to the section of your home where you’re working at the main fuse box.

Can wire cutters cut through metal?

Whether or not a wire cutter can cut through metal depends on what the cutter is rated to cut and whether it features an additional bolt cutter specifically designed for cutting metal. Some wire cutters are only capable of cutting through small copper wires, while others can cut through screws, nails, and other metal objects.

What are ESD-safe wire cutters?

ESD stands for “electrostatic discharge.” An ESD-safe wire cutter is rated by a third-party certification agency that determines their level of electrical insulation. Even if a wire cutter isn’t considered “ESD-safe”, it may still feature insulated handles that offer protection from electrical shocks.

The post This Simple Tool Is a Must-Have for Electrical Projects appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-21T14:21:04-05:00
<![CDATA[We Tested the Best Snow Shovels, and Our Favorite Makes Lifting Heavy Snow Easier on Everyone]]>The best snow shovel allows you to quickly and safely clear a snow-covered driveway. We tested the top snow shovels to see how they performed.

The post We Tested the Best Snow Shovels, and Our Favorite Makes Lifting Heavy Snow Easier on Everyone appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-snow-shovel/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=106487Tue, 21 Jan 2025 08:21:12 -0500ReviewsDriveways & WalkwaysExteriorTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Clearing driveways, walkways, and decks with a snow shovel might not be fun, but it’s a good-for-the-Earth way to keep these spaces safe and clean. While chloride contamination caused by salt treatments is toxic for wildlife, agriculture, and people long after the snow has melted, shoveling snow by hand causes no harm to the environment—and it’s great exercise. Plus, thanks to today’s high-quality, well-designed snow shovels, you can clear driveways and paths more quickly than ever.

To determine which of the thousands of shovels available are worth their price and your effort, we carefully researched top snow shovel models and tested them on driveways, paths, decks, and gravel. We shoveled fresh snow and drove a vehicle over sections of snow to test how these tools would do on compacted snow and ice. We also spoke with a snow removal expert for their insights on what to look for when choosing a snow shovel. 

Based on our expert’s experience and our test results, we chose the Snow Joe Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow Shovel as our top pick. It’s easy to use on all types of snow, and its unique design makes it safe for all ages and fitness levels. If that’s not the right shovel for you, read on for more on how each snow shovel performed in our tests and details on which features matter most when choosing from among the best snow shovels.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Snow Joe Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow Shovel
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: True Temper 18-Inch Aluminum Snow Shovel With D-Grip
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST SNOW PUSHER: The Snowplow 36-Inch The Original Snow Pusher
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST FOR PACKED SNOW: Manplow RevolutionX 24-Inch Snow Pusher With U Handle
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR WALKWAYS: Emsco Group Bigfoot Poly Snow Shovel
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST ELECTRIC SHOVEL: Snow Joe 24-Volt IONMAX Cordless Snow Shovel Bundle
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST PORTABLE SHOVEL: Trazon Portable Folding Snow Shovel
    ↓ Jump to Review
A person using the best snow shovel to clear a path in the snow.
Photo: Tom Scalisi for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

StyleMaterialBlade Size
Snow Joe Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow ShovelComboPolypropylene blade, aluminum handle, plastic D-grip18 inches
True Temper 18-Inch Aluminum Snow Shovel With D-Grip TraditionalSteel handle with aluminum blade18 inches 
The Snowplow 36-Inch The Original Snow PusherPusherFiberglass handle, polyethylene blade36 inches
Manplow RevolutionX 24-Inch Snow Pusher With U Handle PusherAluminum handle and polyethylene blade24 inches 
Emsco Group Bigfoot Poly Snow ShovelTraditionalPoly blade, metal handle17⅞ inches
Emsco Group Bigfoot Poly Snow Shovel ElectricPlastic auger13 inches
Trazon Portable Folding Snow ShovelTelescoping handlePlastic blade, metal handle16 inches

Our Top Picks

Based on our research and hands-on testing, we’re confident at least one of these shovels will suit your needs. After comparing their features and reviewing what we like (and what we don’t), you’ll be able to find the right tool to make scooping snow easier. 

Best Overall

Snow Joe Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow Shovel

 The Snow Joe Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow Shovel on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Integrated lift handle
  • Assembly is quick and straightforward
  • Lightweight yet durable construction

What We Don’t Like

  • Lift handle sometimes gets in the way

This Bob Vila Approved product carries our brand’s highest level of recommendation.

Bob Vila Approved badge

Bob Vila Approved recognizes the household and DIY products that impressed us most in our real-world testing and that exemplify core values of the Bob Vila brand, including craftsmanship, innovation, and value for the dollar. Winners of this designation come recommended by our professional review team and are personally approved by Bob Vila.

Product Specs 

  • Style: Combo
  • Materials: Polypropylene blade, aluminum handle, plastic D-grip
  • Blade size: 18 inches  

Anyone on the hunt for a solid overall snow shovel will want to give the Shovelution from Snow Joe a look. This combo-style shovel features an 18-inch-wide polypropylene blade with a metal lip and an aluminum handle that snaps together. Its lightweight construction and unique lift-assist handle make scooping and pushing heavy snow across a driveway and lifting snow over a deck railing easy—so much so that even children can help. 

Beyond being incredibly lightweight and user-friendly, we also liked that the Shovelution was easy to assemble, especially considering it came in the smallest box. Even though we were pretty uncertain about this shovel before we used it, in the end, our only complaint was that the additional handle was a little awkward when we turned the shovel over for chipping. Even that’s a pretty minor qualm since there’s a convenient strap that holds the handle in place; you just need to take a second to secure it.

What our tester says: “During testing, we didn’t want to like the Snow Joe. The additional lift-assist handle seemed like a gimmick, but it required much less bending over compared to a traditional shovel and plenty of leverage for scooping.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Snow Joe snow shovel at Amazon.

Best Bang for the Buck

True Temper 18-Inch Aluminum Snow Shovel With D-Grip

 The Best Snow Shovel Option: True Temper 18-Inch Aluminum Snow Shovel With D-Grip
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Aluminum and steel construction is lightweight but durable
  • Blade chips ice with little effort
  • No assembly required

What We Don’t Like

  • Traditional shape limits it to moving lighter loads

Product Specs 

  • Style: Traditional
  • Materials: Steel handle with aluminum blade
  • Blade size: 18 inches 

This reliable and durable shovel from True Temper might be the perfect choice for those with smaller driveways or who live in areas that don’t see a ton of snow. Designed to be a light-duty yet long-lasting shovel, it combines a traditionally shaped 18-inch-wide aluminum blade with a strong steel handle. 

During our tests, we found the True Temper aluminum snow shovel to be a great choice for small snowfalls or lightweight snow. It was tough yet light, and we appreciated that we could flip the traditional-style shovel over and chip ice off steps with ease. Also, it doesn’t require assembly, which is a definite benefit if a storm has already dropped a few inches of snow. A few inches is probably all it can handle since the traditional blade shape does make it difficult to carry heavier loads.

Get the True Temper aluminum snow shovel at The Home Depot.

Best Snow Pusher

The Snowplow 36-Inch The Original Snow Pusher

 The The Snowplow 36-Inch The Original Snow Pusher on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Heavy-duty construction is built to last
  • Extra-wide blade effectively throws snow
  • Tough and thick blade

What We Don’t Like

  • More of a pain to assemble than other options

Product Specs 

  • Style: Pusher
  • Materials: Fiberglass handle, polyethylene blade
  • Blade size: 36 inches 

As the “original” snow pusher, the Snowplow is beloved for its straightforward performance. It can move more snow than a traditional or combo shovel, making short work of large driveways. The fiberglass handle lessens weight without sacrificing strength, and the sleek blade, which is made of advanced polyethylene, delivers extreme resistance to abrasion and wear.

The Snowplow was a joy to use during testing. With a little bit of force, the blade efficiently threw snow forward, making clearing our large driveway and surrounding walkways a breeze. The heavy-duty polyethylene blade was thick and tough, and it provided plenty of chipping power when turned over for use in snow-packed tire tracks. The only issue we had was that it was a little bit of a pain to assemble, but we think it’s worth it.

Get the Snowplow snow shovel at Amazon, Ace Hardware, or Northern Tool + Equipment.

Best for Packed Snow

Manplow RevolutionX 24-Inch Snow Pusher With U Handle

 The Manplow RevolutionX 24-Inch Snow Pusher With U Handle on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Wide-handled U-shape design
  • Minimizes bending over to prevent back pain
  • Insulated padded grip adds comfort

What We Don’t Like

  • Not practical for lifting snow

Product Specs 

  • Style: Pusher
  • Materials: Aluminum handle and polyethylene blade
  • Blade size: 24 inches 

Anyone who’s ever driven over fresh snow and then tried to scoop it afterward knows this can be an impossible task—but the Manplow RevolutionX Snow Pusher is up for the challenge. This two-handled snow shovel features a pusher-style, U-shaped design with a padded grip, a polyethylene blade, and a durable metal handle. This combination allows you to generate some serious force, making it easy to chip up hard-packed ice and snow. Not only that, the design also minimizes bending, which helps prevent both fatigue and back pain. 

Though the Manplow has a long list of features and benefits in its pros column, our tests also revealed the shove’s con. When it came time to scoop and toss the snow we’d unstuck, we found the task nearly impossible. Though there’s a handle attachment to make the job easier, we found it was actually easiest to simply grab another shovel. To be fair, though, that one never could have lifted such packed-down snow.  

Get the Manplow snow shovel at Amazon or Manplow.

Best For Walkways

Emsco Group Bigfoot Poly Snow Shovel

 The Emsco Group Bigfoot Poly Snow Shovel on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Lightweight design is easy to lift and maneuver
  • Blade is slick so snow slides right off
  • Large D-shaped handle provides great grip

What We Don’t Like

  • Small blade isn’t adequate for heavy loads
  • Not ideal for large driveways

Product Specs 

  • Style: Traditional
  • Materials: Poly blade, metal handle
  • Blade size: 17⅞ inches 

A heavy-duty snow shovel with a big bucket and metal-edged blade is great, but it won’t be right for every task. When it comes to clearing walkways, this lightweight Emsco Group Bigfoot poly snow shovel is a perfect fit. Simple in form, durable, and easy to grip and lift, it can handle reasonable snowfalls without fuss. During testing, it was our favorite option for clearing our sidewalks and back patio area. 

Those who live in condominiums or apartments where small areas need occasional clearing will also appreciate this option. It’s compact, stores easily, and comes in other blade shapes and styles should you need something smaller or larger. Though we found the linked version perfect for clearing light-to-moderate loads without working too hard, a bigger shovel capable of pushing through more volume would be better after big storms. 

Get the Emsco Group snow shovel at Amazon or Walmart.

Best Electric Shovel

Snow Joe 24-Volt IONMAX Cordless Snow Shovel Bundle

 The Best Snow Shovel Option: Snow Joe 24-Volt IONMAX Cordless Snow Shovel Bundle
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Electric auger removes snow without lifting
  • Battery lasts up to 30 minutes per charge
  • Clears decks and walkways quickly
  • 2-handle design makes it easy to use

What We Don’t Like

  • Short runtime for big clearing sessions
  • Projects snow forward rather than to the side

Product Specs 

  • Style: Electric
  • Materials: Plastic auger
  • Blade size: 13 inches

Though it’s not a replacement for a full snow blower, this surprisingly lightweight and easy-to-handle battery-powered shovel makes short work of clearing walkways, decks, and other tight spaces where shoveling is typically done. During testing, it zipped right through the snow left on our driveway by a big storm, pushing through the accumulated inches with minimal effort. When it came to testing the unit on deeper and heavier snow, we could only remove a few inches at a time. Still, the unit worked down to the ground relatively quickly, and the battery lasted nearly 30 minutes. 

When we first held this shovel, we expected more weight. But since its handles are strategically located to balance the head weight, it’s very easy to lift. It’s also easy to use: With the battery charged and installed, you simply push a button to activate the auger. 

What our tester says: “Like our pick for Best Overall (also a Snow Joe product), we were initially skeptical about this electric snow shovel. However, just like with that pick, we completely changed our minds after testing.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Snow Joe IONMAX snow shovel at Walmart.

Best Portable Shovel

Trazon Portable Folding Snow Shovel

 The Trazon Portable Folding Snow Shovel on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Handle collapses for easy storage
  • Locking mechanism expanded unit secure during use
  • Lightweight but still strong and durable
  • Ideal snow shovel for car

What We Don’t Like

  • Foam grip will likely wear out and tear off
  • Not ideal for big driveways or heavy snow loads

Product Specs 

  • Style: Telescoping handle
  • Materials: Plastic blade, metal handle
  • Blade size: 16 inches

While calling the Trazon a folding shovel is a bit misleading, this unit’s collapsing handle makes it as portable and easy to store as true folding shovels. Name aside, we prefer this design to one that folds for two reasons: It doesn’t have a weak point with a hinge, and its push button and locking mechanism hold the shaft securely in place during use. 

Though it’s not intended for day-to-day scooping like the other tools on our list, we enjoyed using this shovel in our tests. Its compact design can heft reasonable amounts of snow because the blade is concave. It also has a metal edge for scraping ice, like you’d find on an ice scraper, which is a nice bonus. Scraping is a little harder on concrete, but we would rather clear slippery spots than shovel over them and leave that ice intact. 

While we think this shovel is great for home use and especially nice for homes or apartments with limited storage, we like it most for those who travel backroads and sometimes encounter snow drifts that require digging. The collapsible handle makes it easy to stash behind the front seat or in the trunk of a car, and the locking mechanism makes the handle sturdy when expanded up to its full 48 inches. Though it has a nice foam grip that helps with handling, we do think the grip will wear or tear off after a season or two of use, but that’s not a deal breaker and won’t impact how well this shovel works.

Get the Trazon snow shovel at Amazon or Trazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks 

How We Tested the Best Snow Shovels

We tested the above snow shovels in upstate New York and Montana. Once snow fell in each location, we set to work getting an idea how well these shovels performed.

We used each shovel to clear a sidewalk or other walkway, testing how thoroughly the shovels removed the snow and how easy they were to use. We tested them on a deck to see how well they could toss snow over the railing. We worked each one over a gravel driveway to evaluate whether they could push along an uneven surface.

We also drove over fresh snow before clearing the driveway, packing it down into hard, tire-width trails. We then used all the shovels to push or scoop snow from one side of the driveway to the other, testing how well they could remove packed snow before using the back side of the blade to chip up the icy tire tracks. 

What to Consider When Choosing a Snow Shovel

Buying the best shovel for snow might seem like a basic task, but as Joe Palumbo, president of Ice Dam Removal Guys LLC, points out, a lot goes into choosing one. “Depending on how much snow you get and what type will determine your best course of action. There are scoops, pushers/plows, ergonomic, and even wheeled ones. One other thing to consider is material. Plastic/poly is my recommendation, and I’d even recommend that you check the lip’s edge and whether it is lined with metal or plastic. Reason being, metal can leave marks on certain pavers, flagstone, natural rock paths, and more.” 

The following sections on blade design, materials, handle features, and wheels and maneuverability go into further on what to consider when choosing a snow shovel. 

Blade Design

There are three types of shovels intended for snow removal: traditional scoop shovels, pushers, and combination shovels/pushers. The difference mainly comes down to blade design.

  • A traditional shovel has an almost flat, 18- to 24-inch rectangular blade. In contrast, a pusher has a longer, narrower curved blade.
  • Pushers are excellent for driveways because they clear snow faster and with less effort. A traditional shovel is better suited to walkways and smaller areas where a push shovel may have trouble maneuvering.
  • A combo shovel has a slightly wider, curvier blade than a traditional shovel for both scooping snow and pushing it away. For driveways and larger areas, either a push shovel or a combo is typically faster and easier to use.

Materials

Snow shovel blades, which need to be lightweight yet rugged, are routinely made from one of three materials: poly plastic, steel, or aluminum. Each has pros and cons.

A steel or aluminum blade is best for clearing off ice and hard-packed snow because these metals are light yet extremely strong with sharp edges. Metal blades, however, can scratch decking and other wooden or stone surfaces. A plastic blade works well for those spaces and for light to medium snow. Hardy handles typically consist of steel, aluminum, fiberglass, or wood.

Handle Features

Many snow shovels have straight handles, so learning the right grip is important to prevent strain. To shovel safely, place one hand as close to the blade as possible and the other on the handle grip. Some snow shovels boast ergonomic handles, which are curved to lessen the natural tendency to lean over and lift with the back (instead of lifting with the legs). 

Another option is an extra “assist” handle closer to the blade, which increases leverage and lifting power. These handles can be a big boost for children (or adults with bad backs), but they’re also all-around helpful for anyone who wants a more ergonomic snow shovel.

Some handles are even cushioned with foam to lessen hand fatigue. Many models feature wide D-grip handles, which, as their name suggests, are shaped like the letter D and provide a firmer and more comfortable grip than a straight handlebar.

Wheels and Maneuverability 

If snowfall is particularly heavy where you live, or you have larger areas to plow, a snow removal service might make sense, or you might want to consider a snow pusher or shovel with wheels. Unlike snow blowers, wheeled snow pushers don’t require any gas or engine upkeep, just old-fashioned elbow grease. The wheels make moving and depositing larger quantities of snow a bit easier, while the blade may be made of steel for greater strength, stability, and weight.

FAQs

Q. Is a plastic or metal snow shovel better?

In most cases, a plastic shovel for snow will be ideal. They’re generally lightweight, affordable, and durable enough for the heaviest storms—if you purchase a good one.

Q. How wide should a snow shovel be?

It depends on the type of snow shovel and application, but the following can serve as a guide:
– Traditional shovels should be between 18 and 24 inches wide.
– Combo shovels should be around 24 inches wide, though folks with strength concerns will want to go smaller (18 inches).
– For push-style shovels, consider the surface. Driveways can benefit from a 36-inch-wide push shovel for snow, while walkways might be easier to clear with a 24-inch-wide snow shovel.

Q. Should you salt before shoveling snow?

The best time to salt is before the snow falls or after you’ve cleared it away. If you’ve allowed snow to accumulate and become hard-packed or icy, you may need to salt it to melt the ice before you can scoop the slush away, but that’s not ideal. If you don’t have salt on hand but still need help softening snow before shoveling, there are other ways you can melt ice without salt.

Q. Is it better to shovel snow at night or in the morning?

Generally speaking, the best time to shovel is after a few inches have fallen. For safety reasons, however, it’s likely best to wait until the morning after the storm to start clearing accumulation.  For more tips, see our guide on how to shovel snow

Q. Are snow shovels worth it? 

Snow shovels are an inexpensive and eco-friendly way to clear away snow before it becomes dangerous ice. According to Joe Palumbo of Minneapolis, Minnesota’s Ice Dam Removal Guys LLC, “It’s always good to have a shovel. Clearing the snow allows any sun exposure to melt and dry the surface, which is much better than having ice there tomorrow.” If you don’t have a shovel but still need to clear away snow, you can try these tricks to remove snow without a shovel.

Q. Is a straight or curved snow shovel better?

It depends. A curved or angled snow shovel can reduce the need to bend over and the force required to push snow, which could decrease back strain. Straight shovels are often preferred when lifting or throwing snow, as it’s easier to position your hands on them for optimal power.

Meet the Tester

Zach Lazzari is a freelance writer splitting time between the great outdoors, travel, and DIY projects ranging from camper builds to home renovations and maintenance. His home base in Montana is the perfect testing ground for winter products and snow equipment. With more than a decade of professional writing experience, he covers a variety of other projects and maintenance topics for BobVila.com.


Additional research provided by Tom Scalisi and Andreana Lefton.

The post We Tested the Best Snow Shovels, and Our Favorite Makes Lifting Heavy Snow Easier on Everyone appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-21T08:21:12-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Moisture Meters, Tested and Reviewed]]>Need to detect moisture? Use a moisture meter. We put our top picks to the test to find the most reliable moisture meter. Check out our results.

The post The Best Moisture Meters, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-moisture-meter/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=114844Mon, 20 Jan 2025 19:48:35 -0500ReviewsDIYGardeningLawn & GardenLawn Care & GardeningTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Moisture meters can test the moisture content of many different materials, including drywall, paneling, and wood studs. Furniture makers and other woodworkers use them frequently to ensure they’re working with a quality product, and flooring contractors use the meters to determine ideal moisture conditions when installing a laminate or wood floor over a concrete slab or subfloor.

For home and building inspectors, a moisture detector is a necessary tool for verifying the condition of a home. Similarly, you can use this tool to verify that your home is moisture-free or ensure the quality of materials during DIY projects. A moisture meter can help you determine if there is too much moisture or your home needs a dehumidifier.

Our favorite is the General Tools Digital Pin/Pinless Moisture Meter. We like it because of its built-in temperature and humidity sensors, pin/pinless design, holes built into the cap for quick calibrating, and durable storage case.

This guide features hands-on testing of the top-rated moisture meter options available. Some passed with flying colors, while others didn’t make the cut.

  1. BEST OVERALL: General Tools Digital Pin/Pinless Moisture Meter
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Proster Digital Handheld Moisture Meter for Wood 
  3. UPGRADE PICK: Wagner Meters Orion 940 Pinless Wood Moisture Meter
  4. BEST COMBINATION: Teledyne Flir Extech MO55 Pin/Pinless Moisture Meter
  5. BEST FOR WOOD: Tavool Digital Pin Moisture Meter for Wood
  6. BEST EASE OF USE: Lignomat Mini-Ligno E/D Pin Moisture Meter
  7. BEST FOR PROFESSIONALS: Protimeter BLD5365 Surveymaster Moisture Meter
The Best Moisture Meter Options
Photo: Tom Scalisi

Product Comparison

StyleRangeAccuracy
General Tools Digital Pin/Pinless Moisture MeterCombination5 percent to 50 percent in wood; 1.5 percent to 33 percent in building materials3 percent
Proster Digital Handheld Moisture Meter for WoodPin0 percent to 99.9 percent in wood0.5 percent
Wagner Meters Orion 940 Pinless Wood Moisture MeterPinless4 percent to 32 percentUnspecified
Teledyne Flir Extech MO55 Pin/Pinless Moisture MeterCombination– 5 percent to 50 percent in wood; 1.5 percent to 33 percent in building materials (pin)

– 0 percent to 99 percent in wood and other materials (pinless)
3 percent
Tavool Digital Pin Moisture Meter for WoodPin6 percent to 60 percent in wood; 0 percent to 40 percent in building materials2 percent
Lignomat Mini-Ligno E/D Pin Moisture MeterPin6 percent to 45 percent0.5 percent
Protimeter BLD5365 Surveymaster Moisture MeterPin7.9 percent to 99.9 percent with pins, and 70 to 999 with the pads1 percent

Our Top Picks

The top-rated products below were chosen for quality, price, and customer satisfaction to help you find the best moisture meter for your projects. And, to make sure you know everything you need to, we performed hands-on testing with several models. The following meters are ranked among the best.

Best Overall

General Tools Digital Pin/Pinless Moisture Meter

 The Best Moisture Meters Options: General Tools Digital Pin/Pinless Moisture Meter
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Great versatility for multiple projects
  • Pin and pinless design for added flexibility
  • Comes with durable case
  • Cap has holes

What We Don’t Like

  • Temperature resets to Celsius every time it’s powered on
  • No “mold tester” as description claims


This multifunctional moisture meter helps DIYers test for moisture using pinless, flat sensors without damaging the material. If the meter finds moisture, the user can remove the cap to expose two pins for accurate moisture measurement within 3 percent, humidity measurement within 5 percent, and temperature measurement within 2 degrees.

Considered the best moisture meter for plaster walls, it can be used for drywall, carpeting, flooring, brick, grout, soil, paper, or powders, and it shows readings on two bright displays. The meter has a moisture level range of 5 percent to 50 percent for wood and 1.5 percent to 33 percent for other building materials, plus a humidity range of 25 percent to 95 percent and a temperature range of 32 to 140 degrees.

During testing, this General Tools digital moisture meter proved to be accurate and easy to use. We liked that it didn’t take much setup, and there aren’t any complicated charts to read in order to set it to the correct species. The built-in temperature and humidity sensors work well and are easy to read. Also, we like that we could use the cap to check our calibration. The only thing that we found frustrating is that it reverted to Celsius every time we turned it off and back on. Also, there is no “mold tester” as the product description claims.

Product Specs 

  • Style: Combination
  • Range: 5 percent to 50 percent in wood; 1.5 percent to 33 percent in building materials
  • Accuracy: 3 percent

Get the General Tools digital moisture meter at Amazon or General Tools.

Best Bang for the Buck

Proster Digital Handheld Moisture Meter for Wood

 The Best Moisture Meters Option: Proster Digital Handheld Moisture Meter for Wood
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Screen is simple and very easy to read
  • Versatile tool with broad temperature range
  • Very easy to use with no complicated settings
  • Affordable compared to other moisture meters

What We Don’t Like

  • Designed for wood use only


This digital handheld moisture meter from Proster is made for use with wood and wood products only. This specialization comes with two big benefits: The first is that DIYers can get this moisture meter for a bargain compared to other models. The second is that the Proster can provide impressive accuracy to within 0.5 percent on a massive scale of 0 percent to 99.9 percent for wood, firewood, logs, cardboard, paper, and other wood products.

The pin moisture meter settings can switch between four different wood groups containing 50 wood species for precision measurement. The large LCD screen is easy to read, and the body of the device comes in sturdy ABS plastic for superior durability. This moisture meter won’t work with concrete, gypsum, drywall, or other nonwood building materials, but DIYers with wood-based projects have an affordable specialty pick.

We really like the Proster meter. Unlike other models that require lengthy user manual reads and have complicated settings, this affordable meter has everything we need to know displayed right on the front. We liked the wide range, though we suspect that anything above 70 percent would probably feel like it was dripping wet to the touch. The only real drawback of the Proster is that it’s for wood use only, meaning it isn’t very helpful for locating leaks or moisture in building materials.

Product Specs 

  • Style: Pin
  • Range: 0 percent to 99.9 percent in wood
  • Accuracy: 0.5 percent

Get the Proster moisture meter at Amazon or Proster.

Upgrade Pick

Wagner Meters Orion 940 Pinless Wood Moisture Meter

 The Best Moisture Meter Option: Wagner Meters Orion 940 Pinless Wood Moisture Meter
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Incredibly accurate (despite an unspecified accuracy by the manufacturer)
  • Comes with a calibration plate and durable carrying case
  • Adjustable for several tree species

What We Don’t Like

  • Limited moisture range only up to 32 percent


For shoppers with extra room in their meter budget, the Wagner Meters Orion 940 is one of the best pinless moisture meter options worth considering. While the model might be a bit expensive, it does offer deeper, more accurate readings than most meters, and it does it without pins.

This model from Wagner Meters features a measurement range of 4 percent to 32 percent. It also comes with a chart that allows the user to calibrate it to a specific value assigned to a species, offering the most reliable readings possible. And, unlike many other pinless meters, this model can take measurements in wood as thick at 1.5 inches, or the full thickness of a stud. Should you question its calibration, it comes with a calibration plate for checking at any point.

There’s a bit of a learning curve when it comes to the Orion. First, we had to read the manual to discover how to change the species setting, but once we did, the change was easy. Also, cycling through the calibration, species, and materials menu was a little confusing at first. Although it doesn’t have a tremendous range, it was incredibly accurate and consistent. Truth be told, we used this model as the baseline for accuracy in our test.

Product Specs 

  • Style: Pinless
  • Range: 4 percent to 32 percent
  • Accuracy: Unspecified

Get the Wagner Meters moisture meter at Amazon, Acme Tools, or Wagner Meters.

Best Combination

Teledyne Flir Extech MO55 Pin/Pinless Moisture Meter

 The Best Moisture Meter Option: Teledyne Flir Extech MO55 Pin/Pinless Moisture Meter
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Easy to use with a simple screen
  • Offers visual guide and audio alerts for moisture content
  • Ideal when precision is key

What We Don’t Like

  • Material setting button seems sensitive


Anyone looking for a combination pin/pinless moisture meter might not want to overlook the Extech MO55 pin/pinless moisture meter from Teledyne Flir. This meter offers accurate pinless readings between 0 percent to 99 percent in both wood and other building materials, as well as a 5 percent to 50 percent range in wood and 1.5 percent to 33 percent range in building materials when using the pins.

A calibration test in the cap allows users to check the Extech’s accuracy before relying on its readings. It also features a visual guide to moisture, with one digital raindrop representing dry wood, two drops for medium moisture, and three representing wet wood.

When we were testing the Extech in pin mode, we continued to press the materials button, which would inevitably give us a reading of our index fingers rather than the material we were testing. Beyond that, we liked how easy the Extech was to use, and we appreciated the digital raindrops and audio alerts that speed up according to a wood’s moisture content. And, we continued to check this model’s accuracy with its built-in calibration gauge.

Product Specs 

  • Style: Combination
  • Range:
    • 5 percent to 50 percent in wood; 1.5 percent to 33 percent in building materials (pin)
    • 0 percent to 99 percent in wood and other materials (pinless)
  • Accuracy: 3 percent

Get the Teledyne Flir Extech moisture meter at Amazon, Acme Tools, or Teledyne FLIR.

Best For Wood

Tavool Digital Pin Moisture Meter for Wood

 The Best Moisture Meters Option: Tavool Digital Pin Moisture Meter for Wood
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Excellent pin design
  • Includes a built-in thermometer for added versatility
  • Best digital screen in the test

What We Don’t Like

  • Many of the tree species in the guide go by their scientific names


The Tavool digital moisture meter is an excellent addition to any woodworking shop. This moisture meter for wood comes with seven calibration scales for wood so DIYers can be as precise as possible with their measurements at an accuracy within about 2 percent. The pin moisture meter also can measure the temperature of the material within 4 degrees to help quickly track down leaks.

The moisture meter uses a scale of 6 percent to 60 percent for wood and 0 percent to 40 percent for other building materials. Its big, backlit LCD screen makes for easy readability, even in dim lighting. A “Hold” key freezes readings on the screen, while the built-in memory function stores readings so the user doesn’t have to keep track.

The Tavool was one of the biggest surprises we found during testing. For one, the digital screen is both easy to read and full of information. We liked that this moisture meter features a built-in temperature sensor as well. But the one “point” we liked most about the Tavool was its pin design; the pins are long and thin enough to plunge deeply into wood but not so thin that they’re not durable. The only issue we found came when adjusting for species. Tavool, for some reason, included scientific names for tree species. We didn’t bring our biology book, so we had to do a lot of googling.

Product Specs 

  • Style: Pin
  • Range: 6 percent to 60 percent in wood; 0 percent to 40 percent in building materials
  • Accuracy: 2 percent

Get the Tavool moisture meter at Amazon.

Best Ease of Use

Lignomat Mini-Ligno E/D Pin Moisture Meter

 The Best Moisture Meter Option: Lignomat Mini-Ligno E/D Pin Moisture Meter
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Doesn’t get any easier to use
  • Extreme accuracy
  • Cap forms a comfortable handhold

What We Don’t Like

  • Feels like an old-school design (but is that really bad?)


The Lignomat Mini-Ligno E/D moisture meter is a premium tool designed for a specialized purpose. This pin moisture meter comes calibrated for use with wood and wood products, but it boasts an accuracy of 0.5 percent on a precision scale of 6 percent to 45 percent. Its sturdy body is easy to hold and use, with sharp pins that can push through even the toughest wood.

The body of the moisture meter holds a longer second set of pins for deeper penetration, but the real benefit of this model is the simplicity of the design. Select the wood type to be measured, then push the pins into the material. A unique on-off switch between the pins activates the meter so the user only has to look at the reading on the bright, digital LED display.

We’ll try not to gush, but the Lignomat moisture meter is pretty much everything you need from a moisture meter, and it’s by far the easiest to use in the group. First, this thing doesn’t even have a power button; simply poke it into a piece of wood and it will give you a reading. Second, it provides readings for a wide range of species while only requiring the user to switch between “Group 2” or “Group 3”—no fancy calculations necessary. And, we couldn’t help but enjoy the Lignomat’s accuracy and the way the cap forms a comfortable hand-hold during testing. If we’re going to complain about something, it’s that this thing looks and feels like it’s straight out of the 1980s, but we’re not so sure nostalgia is a bad thing.

Product Specs 

  • Style: Pin
  • Range: 6 percent to 45 percent
  • Accuracy: 0.5 percent

Get the Lignomat moisture meter at Amazon or Acme Tools.

Best for Professionals

Protimeter BLD5365 Surveymaster Moisture Meter

 The Best Moisture Meters Option: Protimeter BLD5365 Surveymaster Moisture Meter
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Comprehensive tool set with plenty of accessories
  • Very accurate
  • Excellent pin penetration for deep readings

What We Don’t Like

  • Pinless readings are not shown as a percentage
  • Doesn’t adjust for species


The Protimeter BLD5365 Surveymaster professional moisture meter is dual functional but doesn’t just use standard pins and pads to take readings. It also features a set of 5-inch pins for deep penetration and a moisture probe that can plug into the unit to help with taking readings in difficult-to-access areas. It even includes a calibration tool to ensure the readings are accurate.

The heavy-duty design and highly accurate moisture readings within 1 percent make this a must-have tool for discerning DIYers and industry professionals like contractors, surveyors, inspectors, and many more. With two modes of operation for search (pinless) and measure (pin), the moisture meter works with concrete, wood, tile, vinyl, drywall, and many other building materials with a scale of 7.9 percent to 99.9 percent using the pins and a relative scale of 70 to 999 using the pads (where 70 to 169 is dry, 170 to 199 is at risk, and 200 to 999 is considered wet).

During testing, we liked the accessories and could definitely see their usefulness. Even grabbing readings from boards right in front of us was easier, since we could look at the display while getting the reading at the same time. Also, we enjoyed the 1 percent accuracy and excellent pin penetration. Our only concerns were that we would prefer the pinless readings in a percentage, and we couldn’t adjust it for species.

Product Specs 

  • Style: Pin
  • Range: 7.9 percent to 99.9 percent with pins, and 70 to 999 with the pads
  • Accuracy: 1 percent

Get the Protimeter moisture meter at Amazon.

Also Tested

We also tested the General Tools pinless digital moisture meter and the Klein Tools ET140 pinless moisture meter; however, neither of these models passed our tests.

The General Tools pinless moisture meter uses a measurement range of 0 percent to 53 percent for softwoods like pine, a range of 0 percent to 35 percent for hardwoods like maple, and a relative scale for drywall and masonry. This meter was difficult to use, and didn’t register moisture readings anywhere near the range of the other models on the list. It could’ve been a calibration issue, but since it automatically calibrates, we didn’t have any luck.

The Klein ET140 is a durable pinless moisture meter that calibrates for each material with the push of a mode button that switches between types of material for precise measurement. Unfortunately, during our repeated testing of this model, it consistently read 4% moisture and the unit could not be recalibrated after multiple attempts. We’re big fans of Klein Tools, but this one didn’t make the grade.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Moisture Meters

Typically, we love testing products, but this moisture meter test was tough. First, every meter had a different range and accuracy rating, which made establishing baselines difficult. While we were conducting moisture meter reviews, we found that each product had a different method of adjusting for certain species, so we spent an entire day reading user’s manuals—surely a better test for eyeglasses and patience than moisture meters.

Eventually, with everything dialed in as well as possible, we began checking moisture levels. For some variety, we used three pieces of pine lumber from a recent project. One piece soaked in a bowl of water overnight. The other piece sat in an oven and dried at 225 degrees for 2 hours. The third piece was left alone. We checked each of the meters using all three of these pieces of lumber and compared readings.

Next, we checked the meters on a small section of drywall, a small section of concrete foundation, and an unfinished oak stair tread. Those readings were collected and compared as well.

Finally, we went through all the settings, modes, and extra features (for those that had them). At this point, we had a solid grasp on which models were worth the money and which we needed to discard from the test.

What to Consider When Choosing a Moisture Meter

Before purchasing a moisture meter, it’s a good idea to educate yourself about these important considerations to make sure that you settle on the appropriate product for your purposes.

Types of Moisture Meters

DIYers and professionals in industries like home inspection, fine carpentry, and flooring use three common types of moisture meter: pin, pinless, and multifunctional.

Pin

Pin moisture meters get their name from the two metal prongs, or pins, that emerge from the top of the meter like antennae. These pins are what measure the moisture percentage. Using a pin moisture meter requires aligning the pins with a spot on the material, and then pushing them so they penetrate the material.

Once the pins are inserted, users can operate the moisture meter with a control pad to send an electrical signal down one pin. This signal travels through the material on its way to the other pin. The moisture meter uses this signal to measure the material’s resistance to electrical current, which can help determine its moisture content.

This method of measurement is considered invasive because it requires puncturing the material to obtain a result. However, pin moisture meters are the only type that can help identify the exact location of moisture.

Pinless

Pinless moisture meters, so named for their lack of measurement pins, do not penetrate the material to get a reading. Instead, a plate on the back of the meter lays flat against the material and a high-frequency signal travels through it. The signal changes based on the material’s ability to store an electrical charge, which enables the moisture meter to detect the levels of moisture in the substance.

The main benefit of pinless moisture meters becomes clear when testing drywall. Having to drive holes into drywall to detect moisture can quickly turn it into Swiss cheese. A pinless moisture meter can check for moisture multiple times without damaging the drywall.

Although pinless moisture meters are less invasive than pin meters, their readings show moisture in a general area rather than a specific spot. A good option for regular moisture detection is a multifunctional moisture meter. Multifunctional moisture meters use both methods of measurement for noninvasive, precise moisture detection if an issue is discovered.

Accuracy

DIYers and pros looking for a moisture meter place accuracy as one of the most important factors in deciding which one to buy. A unit lacking in accuracy is essentially useless for measuring moisture. However, not all units advertise the same accuracy rate.

High-quality moisture meters should be accurate to within 0.1 percent, but these high-end models can cost a lot. For a less-expensive option, some moisture meters are accurate to within 5 percent. This still represents a reasonable accuracy rating for the average DIYer, but if a project or professional requires a more precise measurement, it is best to stick to the high-end models. It isn’t advisable to invest in a moisture meter that has more than a 5 percent variance in its accuracy.

All moisture meters’ readings are displayed as a percentage of moisture content (% MC). Typically, a moisture meter is calibrated for use with wood and has a scale between 5 percent (dry) and 40 percent (saturated). Measuring nonwood materials like concrete uses a relative scale from 0 (dry) to 100 (saturated). Moisture meters for use with gypsum or drywall offer a third scale that ranges from 0.2 percent (dry) to 50 percent (saturated). Before deciding on a moisture meter, determine the accuracy levels you need and the materials you will want to check.

Durability

A product’s durability is important to anyone who will be using a moisture meter regularly on job sites. Even a newer model with the best features should survive having its pins pushed into a wall or being jostled in a tool box.

The moisture meter should include the features a DIYer wants but also have a reputation for durability and long life. Consider options that have a rubberized casing, a heavy-duty design, or shock resistance built in. These moisture meters will survive a few falls without damage and make a great investment because they’ll need to be replaced less frequently.

Ease of Use

Choose a moisture meter that is relatively simple to use. Complicated moisture meters take much longer to read than those with a more straightforward design and can lead to inaccurate and inconsistent readings that could result in undetected moisture damage.

Instead, opt for a moisture meter with an easy-to-read, backlit digital display that shows the information you need. Users should be able to navigate easily between the menus on the device and switch between functions quickly. Pinless moisture meters are much easier to use than pin moisture meters, but the trade-off is in pinpoint accuracy.

Range of Measurement

The range of measurement a moisture meter offers is determined by the minimum and maximum moisture percentages it can read. The broader the range of measurement, the less precisely the device will measure, with some moisture meters offering as wide a range as 0.2 to 60 percent.

Smaller, more precise scales provide more accurate measurement and frequently come in meters used in the flooring and fine carpentry industry to ensure optimal moisture percentage. However, most DIYers would benefit more from a broader scale range so they can use the same meter for many applications.

Additional Features

Moisture meters, like most electronic devices, can pack plenty of additional features to make the task easier. One of these features is a temperature display that can track a hot or cold water leak. Following changes in the temperature helps locate the source.

Other features include memory functions that can keep track of previous readings instead of having to write them down or remember them, audible alerts for the moisture level reading, and a carrying case to protect the moisture meter.

The Advantages of Owning a Moisture Meter

Having a moisture meter handy can save you a lot of trouble in your home and with DIY projects. It is easy to quickly test areas that look like they might be accumulating moisture to determine whether there is an issue. By taking the reading yourself, you avoid having to call a professional inspector and paying a costly fee only to find no moisture problem exists. If you have frequent problem areas in your home or in a high-moisture basement or cellar, a moisture meter can take regular readings to quickly identify and treat mold growth.

In addition, a moisture meter improves the outcome of DIY projects by providing accurate moisture readings for flooring projects, when installing wallpaper, and during woodworking projects. Without a moisture meter, DIYers only can guess at the moisture content in a material, which could lead to problems with mold growth or structural issues if the moisture buildup becomes severe.

  • Owning a moisture meter helps you to detect problems without having to call in a professional.
  • Regular readings in high-moisture homes can help detect and stop mold growth.
  • Using a meter for flooring, wallpapering, and other DIY projects will ensure a high-quality finish and appropriate moisture percentages.

FAQs

Before buying a new moisture meter, take a look at the most frequently asked questions and their answers below.

Q. How does a moisture meter work?

Pin moisture meters work by measuring the resistance an electrical current meets when passing through a material. Inserting the pins into the material sends a current down one pin to flow into the second. The meter then measures the resistance the current met traveling through the material between the pins to generate a moisture reading.

Pinless moisture meters use a high-frequency signal to permeate the material. The electrical signal changes based on the material’s ability to hold a charge, and the moisture meter receives a measurement of the moisture content in the material.

Q. What is a normal reading on a moisture meter?

In general, a reading of 5 to 12 percent is optimal, but a normal reading on a moisture meter depends on the material. Drier materials like drywall should have lower moisture readings of around 5 to 7 percent. Damp materials like wall studs and framing lumber have acceptable moisture levels of up to 12 percent.

Q. What is a bad moisture meter reading?

A bad moisture reading would be one that climbs to 20 percent or higher—in this environment, your porous materials like lumber may be susceptible to mold growth or decay.

Q. Does moisture in walls mean mold?

Not necessarily. A moisture meter can be used to help detect problem areas, but it cannot detect mold. The hope is that you would use the moisture meter to detect a leak before the mold can form. But if the moisture is left untreated, it can become the perfect environment for mold spores to flourish.

Q. How do you use a moisture meter on drywall?

To use a moisture meter for drywall, first ensure that the meter is calibrated to accurately measure moisture in the material. If the meter is not calibrated, the results will be inaccurate.

Once the meter is calibrated to test drywall, operate the moisture meter normally according to product instructions. Insert pin meters into the drywall in several different spots to get an accurate reading of the entire wall. Similarly, a pinless meter should scan several sites on the wall for a full scope of its moisture content. For drywall, a reading of 5 percent to 7 percent is optimal.

Q. Are moisture meters accurate?

A dependable moisture meter may boast an accuracy within 3 percent of the reading, with some professional-grade models getting within 0.5 percent.

The accuracy of a moisture meter varies depending on the material you are testing, the calibration of the meter, the type of moisture meter, the procedures used during the test, and the meter’s functionality, which can vary based on upkeep and maintenance of the unit.

Above all, a moisture meter for walls and other structures will be most accurate if used correctly. A high-quality moisture meter used on the correct material by an experienced DIYer can accurately measure moisture to within 0.1 percent. However, an inexpensive moisture meter used on an inappropriate material without a proper scale could return inaccurate readings in the same way that a poor-quality stud finder can fail to find a stud if used improperly.

The post The Best Moisture Meters, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-20T19:48:35-05:00
<![CDATA[We Tested Over a Dozen Snow Blowers and This Ryobi Is a Heavy-Duty Machine in Compact Form]]>The best cordless snow blowers make quick work of clearing driveways and walkways. We put our top picks to the test on heavy snow in cold temps.

The post We Tested Over a Dozen Snow Blowers and This Ryobi Is a Heavy-Duty Machine in Compact Form appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-cordless-snow-blower/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-cordless-snow-blower/Mon, 20 Jan 2025 12:58:00 -0500ReviewsDIYDriveways & WalkwaysExteriorToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Shoveling snow can be tiring, but a cordless snow blower can minimize the bending, lifting, and tossing necessary to clear driveways and walkways. Another major benefit of these tools is that they don’t emit unpleasant and harmful fumes, which makes them better for the environment than gas-powered snow blowers. To help you sift through all the options, we tested a dozen popular models, evaluating them on power, maneuverability, and overall efficiency.

After our tests and an interview with a snow-removal expert, we chose the Ryobi 40V 22″ Two-Stage Cordless Snow Blower as our favorite for its sturdy build and powerful performance. It impressed us in just about every kind of snow, but it’s not the only option worthy of a look.

Our top picks are among the best in their category, with a range of models and sizes to suit a variety of snow-blowing needs. Keep reading to find out how well these models cleared snowy exteriors and to learn what to look for when shopping for one of the best cordless snow blowers.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Ryobi 40V 22″ Two-Stage Cordless Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Toro Power Max 60V e24 24″ Two-Stage Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Snow Joe 48V 18″ Ionmax Cordless Snow Blower Kit
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST TWO-STAGE: Ego Power+ 56V 24″ Self-Propelled Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST SINGLE-STAGE: Greenworks Pro 60V 22″ Cordless Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST COMPACT: Earthwise 40V 18″ Cordless Snow Thrower
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST LIGHTWEIGHT: Ego Power+ 56V 21″ Peak Power Snow Blower
    Jump to Review 
  8. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Toro Power Clear 60V e21 21″ Cordless Snow Blower
    Jump to Review
  9. ALSO CONSIDER: DeWalt 60V 21″ Max Single-Stage Snow Blower Kit
    Jump to Review 
Three of the best cordless snow blowers on a snowy driveway during testing.
Photo: Zach Lazzari for Bob Vila

Cordless Snow Blowers Comparison Chart 

Product NameTypeWeightClearing Width
Ryobi 40V 22″ Two-Stage Cordless Snow Blower2-stage146 pounds22 inches
Toro Power Max 60V e24 24″ Two-Stage Snow Blower2-stage172 pounds24 inches
Snow Joe 48V 18″ Ionmax Cordless Snow Blower Single-stage37.5 pounds18 inches
Ego Power+ 56V 24″ Self-Propelled Snow Blower2-stage143.3 pounds (without batteries)24 inches
Greenworks Pro 60V 22″ Cordless Snow BlowerSingle-stage57 pounds22 inches
Earthwise 40V 18″ Cordless Snow ThrowerSingle-stage34 pounds18 inches
Ego Power+ 56V 21″ Peak Power Snow Blower Single-stage53 pounds21 inches
Toro Power Clear 60V e21 21″ Cordless Snow BlowerSingle-stage55 pounds21 inches
DeWalt 60V 21″ Max Single-Stage Snow Blower Kit Single-stage59 pounds21 inches

Our Top Picks

We tested and ranked these options based on build quality, price, and overall efficiency. Not only did these models remove mounds of the white stuff easily, but they also handled temperatures as low as -7 degrees Fahrenheit during testing with no battery or power output issues. Check out our top picks to find the best cordless snow blower for just about any job.

Best Overall

Ryobi 40V 22" Two-Stage Cordless Snow Blower

 The Ryobi 40V 22" Two-Stage Cordless Snow Blower, two batteries, and charger on a white background.
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Steel auger strong enough for hard-packed snow
  • Multiple speed settings for maximum maneuverability
  • Cutting path is appropriately sized most exteriors
  • Includes 2 powerful 8 amp hour (Ah) batteries

What We Don’t Like

  • Loses charge faster at full auger and drive speed
  • No heated hand grips

Specs 

  • Type: 2-stage
  • Weight: 136 pounds
  • Clearing width: 22 inches

After completing all our tests, one snow blower ranked better than the rest for excellent performance across every category: the Ryobi two-stage brushless snow blower. This machine has all the benefits of a heavy-duty model yet is also very nimble and capable in tighter spaces. While there are both bigger and smaller options available, this one was just right for every job we encountered. 

The Ryobi’s steel auger is powerful, and it even worked on a gravel driveway with great results. With multiple speed settings and a reverse option on the drive system, the lightweight unit was very easy to maneuver. The tires gripped well, and it had no problem pivoting on narrow walkways and cutting through deep snow on big driveways. The controls made changing auger and throw angles simple, and this model shot snow through the chute with impressive power, sending fresh powder a good 40+ feet.

What our tester says: “The combination of functionality, maneuverability, and the flexibility to work through different types of snow and surfaces made this model a joy to use. This thing felt as powerful as any gas or electric model we’ve tested. “—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Ryobi cordless snow blower at The Home Depot.

Runner-up

Toro Power Max e24 60V 24" Two-Stage Snow Blower

 The Best Cordless Snow Blower Option Toro Power Max 60V e24 24 Two-Stage Snow Blower
Photo: Tractor Supply

What We Like

  • Wide 24-inch path for larger driveways
  • Durable steel construction
  • High headlight position for working in poor visibility
  • Optional-use third battery bay to extend runtime

What We Don’t Like

  • Very heavy

Specs 

  • Type: 2-stage
  • Weight: 172 pounds
  • Clearing width: 24 inches

Property owners and managers in need of a serious two-stage electric snow blower will appreciate the Toro e24 cordless model. It’s built on the same platform as Toro’s two-stage gas models and delivers the power and performance the brand is known for. In our tests, one of the first things we noticed was its beefy steel auger, which is surrounded by a steel box and frame. The auger’s joystick-style control offered the best of design of the bunch, making changing throwing angle and direction quick and easy.

Since it has space for the two included batteries and an optional third, the battery box on this Toro is larger than that of other options. Buying a third battery is a simple way to increase runtime between recharging, and with all three, this model can run for over an hour. We used two in our tests, giving us just over 30 minutes to clear our property. In exceptionally heavy and wet snow, runtime might be a bit shorter, but it’s still competitive with that of other models. 

What our tester says: “This machine performs similarly to top-tier gas models. Its drive system was powerful enough to push heavy snow, and its wide path helped us clear our driveway quickly even though conditions were challenging.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Toro Power Max cordless snow blower at Tractor Supply Co. or Acme Tools.

Best Bang for the Buck

Snow Joe 48V 18" Ionmax Cordless Snow Blower Kit

 The Best Cordless Snow Blower Option Snow Joe 48V 18 Ionmax Cordless Snow Blower Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Budget-friendly price point
  • Powerful snow thrower for the size
  • Lightweight for easy maneuvering
  • Small size for easier storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Less stable on uneven surfaces

Specs 

  • Type: Single-stage
  • Weight: 37.5 pounds
  • Clearing width: 18 inches

This Snow Joe single-stage model is an excellent lightweight and highly portable snow blower. Although this machine is smaller than many others we tested, its quadruple-bladed rubber-tipped steel auger can carve a path 18 inches wide by 10 inches deep in a single pass. In deeper snow, we had to blow snow in layers, but this Snow Joe still got the job done. 

In our testing, we found that the Snow Joe was best for flat, even walkways and driveways, as it did get hung up on small obstructions. Beyond that, we were truly impressed with its overall performance, easy-to-use controls, and value price. Its ability to throw snow in the 20-foot range was a definite surprise for a single-stage snow blower. We did use chute lubricant to minimize clogging, and we believe this helped it throw snow without sticking. 

This rechargeable snow blower comes with two 4Ah batteries, which provide about 40 minutes of runtime. It has a pair of LED headlights that make night sessions easier, and it’s also easy to pick up (it even has a handy crossbar to grab for the job). Especially given that it’s a relatively cheap snow blower, this small Snow Joe is a very solid option.

Get the Snow Joe cordless snow blower at Amazon (with cover and scraper), Walmart, Best Buy, or Blain’s Farm & Fleet.

Best Two-Stage

Ego Power+ 56V 24" Self-Propelled Snow Blower

 The Ego Power+ 56V 24" Self-Propelled Snow Blower and two batteries on a white background.
Photo: Lowe’s

What We Like

  • Throws snow 50 feet or more
  • Can change throttle speed quickly
  • Comparable power to gas-powered snow blowers

What We Don’t Like

  • Can’t “bump” the throttle

Specs 

  • Type: 2-stage
  • Weight: 143.3 pounds (without batteries)
  • Clearing width: 24 inches

Whether snow is mounded on your sidewalk, patio, or even a gravel driveway, this two-stage snow blower can push through. It features a powerful auger to scoop and throw snow as well as an impeller fan that helps it manage large piles. Thanks to its ample 24-inch-wide clearing path, this model can move through large areas efficiently. It still feels nimble, however, and we appreciate how easily it pivots under power. The dual-battery power provided by the two 7.5Ah batteries keeps it running for upwards of 1 hour in normal conditions, and the heated grips are a wonderful bonus for cold conditions. 

This Ego Power+ isn’t inexpensive, but it’s worth every penny. Not only did this model work as well as almost any gas-powered snow blower we’ve ever used, but in some instances, it worked better. We liked that we could change the throttle speed on the fly. Also, we found that the reported 50-foot throw distance might be an understatement—this thing has power to spare. The main throttle for the drive wheels is a lever-activated switch, which didn’t allow us to bump the throttle the way we can with a gas-powered mechanical throttle. Instead, there’s a delay, but the ability to throw snow 50-plus feet made up for it. 

What our tester says: “With two 7.5Ah arc lithium batteries, a heavy steel auger, a convenient control dashboard, and 50 feet of throwing distance, I was impressed by this machine’s well-rounded features and thoughtful design. It had more than enough power to work through a big storm.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer

Read our full review: Ego Power+ 56V 24″ Self-Propelled Snow Blower

Get the Ego Power+ self-propelled snow blower at Lowe’s, Walmart, Ace Hardware, or Northern Tool + Equipment

Best Single-Stage

Greenworks Pro 60V 22" Cordless Snow Blower

 The Greenworks Pro 60V 22" Cordless Snow Blower, two batteries, and charger on a white background.
Photo: Walmart

What We Like

  • Lightweight design
  • Ample power for a single-stage snow blower
  • Excellent battery life
  • Auger churns through snow very well

What We Don’t Like

  • Cleaning tool doesn’t attach to the snow blower

Specs 

  • Type: Single-stage
  • Weight: 57 pounds
  • Clearing width: 22 inches

The Greenworks Pro 60V snow blower offers a nice combination of power and functionality in a lightweight, easy-to-use unit. We tested this model in varying conditions, and its auger breezed through powder and held its own in heavy snow. Its 22-inch cutting path is substantial for a single-stage model, and it also has 13 inches of depth. The chute ejection proved clean in testing, and the Greenworks threw snow up to 40 feet, which is an ample distance. 

One thing we really appreciate about Greenworks is the brand’s impressive battery game, and this unit pairs two higher amp-hour batteries (5Ah) with this tool’s competitive single-stage design. With more than an hour of runtime in moderate storms, this is an excellent option for those wanting ample runtime to work across larger areas. We were able to clear a full driveway and walkways and still had battery life left over to help out the neighbors.

Get the Greenworks snow blower at Tractor Supply Co., Walmart, or Greenworks

Best Compact

Earthwise 40V 18" Cordless Snow Thrower

 The Earthwise 40V 18" Cordless Snow Thrower on white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact size stores easily
  • Lightweight and easy to handle for extended use
  • Impressively quick 30-minute charging

What We Don’t Like

  • Assembly is hampered by lesser-quality hardware

Specs 

  • Type: Single-stage
  • Weight: 34 pounds
  • Clearing width: 18 inches

Instead of multiple rounds of intensive shoveling that result in sore, aching muscles, shoppers may be better off investing in an affordable, cordless device that clears away snow at a rate of up to 500 pounds per minute. Earthwise’s battery-powered snow blower comes with one 4Ah battery and a rapid charger that brings the battery back to full power within 30 minutes. At just 34 pounds, this lightweight machine is akin to a handheld snow blower, and its ergonomic, padded handle makes it even easier to maneuver.

This excellent-value blower includes a dual-blade auger with a snow-throwing distance of 30 feet. Its front snow-intake port has a clearing width of just 18 inches, so it may take a few passes to clear a wide driveway. It has a clearing depth of 12 inches, which can cut quickly through long stretches of moderate snow. 

Overall, this light-duty single-stage snowblower performed very well in testing. It has a relatively sturdy build, but we wish it had better assembly hardware. Otherwise, it worked similarly to a cordless snow shovel with a battery, making it perfect for clearing backyard patios and small to moderate driveways. We really enjoyed the bright headlights for low light conditions and how easily the chute rotates, but the throw angle does require a manual adjustment.

Get the Earthwise cordless snow blower at Amazon, Walmart, or Northern Tool + Equipment.

Best Lightweight

Ego Power+ 56V 21" Peak Power Snow Blower

 The Best Cordless Snow Blower Option Ego Power+ 56V 21 Peak Power Snow Blower
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Easy to maneuver and control
  • Quiet operation won’t disturb neighbors
  • Throws snow an impressive distance

What We Don’t Like

  • Single-stage auger can catch on uneven surfaces
  • Chute needs lubrication in extreme cold

Specs 

  • Type: Single-stage
  • Weight: 53 pounds
  • Clearing width: 21 inches

The Ego Power+ Peak Power single-stage snow blower is a battery-powered machine that runs on two 5Ah batteries, offering impressive snow-clearning power on a single charge. Weighing just 53 pounds, we found operating it similar to using a lawn mower. It has a bail switch for easy control and a conveniently placed chute lever for quickly adjusting snow-throwing direction. Its steel auger was quite effective when clearing heavy snow from our driveway, though it did scrape against the cement in places where the pavement is uneven. 

We appreciated that this machine was so easy to set up, only requiring us to install the chute. Its batteries charged in just 40 minutes via our rapid charger, but a standard charger will still get the job done in a relatively short 100 minutes. Though this machine didn’t quite throw lightweight snow the full 40 feet Ego advertises, it got pretty close when we tested it on wet and heavy precipitation, even in below-zero temperatures. The chute did clog when it was that cold outside, but using a bit of nonstick snow blower spray will take care of that problem.

Read our full review: Ego Power+ 56V 21″ Peak Power Snow Blower

Get the Ego Power+ Peak Power snow blower at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Ace Hardware.

Best Heavy-Duty

Toro Power Clear 60V e21 21" Cordless Snow Blower

 The Best Cordless Snow Blower Option Toro Power Clear 60V e21 21 Cordless Snow Blower
Photo: Lowe’s

What We Like

  • Really digs into the snow
  • Durable metal auger is built to last
  • Large battery with 40 to 60 minutes of runtime

What We Don’t Like

  • Awkward weight distribution
  • Takes 3 hours to charge the battery

Specs 

  • Type: Single-stage
  • Weight: 55 pounds
  • Clearing width: 21 inches

Although the Toro two-stage is a popular favorite, the company also makes a single-stage snow blower for those wanting something a little lighter-duty. Like the two-stage, it resembles the build of Toro’s single-stage gas models. By bringing the long-standing quality and design of gas snow blower augers, buckets, chutes, and components to the electric side, Toro gives major confidence and sets real expectations for users experienced with gas-model operations.

The Toro truly shined in our head-to-head comparison testing. Its best attribute was how well it dug into the snow, getting down to the surface below for better clearing. This is one of only a few single-stage options that offer a steel auger. While that adds a few pounds, it’s worth the trade-off when it comes to breaking down wet or icy snow. It also throws that snow very well, hitting around 40 feet from the chute, and the chute itself has a great turning radius of 200 degrees. However, we found its uneven weight distribution awkward—it even tipped over a few times, but not during use. We think this is due to the massive 7.5Ah battery mounted behind the wheels, but that long battery life is worth it to us.

Get the Toro Power Clear cordless snow blower at Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, Walmart, or Toro.

Also Consider

DeWalt 60V 21" Max Single-Stage Snow Blower Kit

 The Best Cordless Snow Blower Option DeWalt 60V 21 Max Single-Stage Snow Blower Kit
Photo: Tractor Supply

What We Like

  • Steel auger blade
  • Eco and Max power modes for optimal battery life
  • Batteries last about an hour
  • Folding handle makes storage easy

What We Don’t Like

  • Plastic wheels have minimal traction
  • Requires manual pushing
  • Power button doubles as the auger engagement

Specs 

  • Type: Single-stage
  • Weight: 59 pounds
  • Clearing width: 21 inches

DeWalt is a leader in electric power tools, and its entry in the electric snow blower market is strong. The company offers two substantial 4Ah batteries and 60 volts of power for a long-lasting, reasonably powerful machine. We enjoyed the steel auger, which performs better than plastic when it comes to icy conditions and difficult snow. It ought to provide real longevity. 

The blade did a great job of breaking down wet snow, and it ejected well from the chute. It didn’t throw more than 40 feet like many models we tested, but it did throw a reasonable distance and cleared the space required for a 2-car driveway. We found that adding a layer of silicone chute lubricant helped to prevent clogging and kept it running smoothly. While users must manually adjust the chute angles, the electric chute rotation tabs were really nice for changing direction. They are quick and easy to access—among the best we have encountered.

Other bonuses are the easy-to-fold handle for transportation and storage. It only requires a few seconds to prep for storage and it reassembles just as quickly. This is a good electric snow blower for small to moderate snow loads on paved surfaces. It’s not as robust as the bigger two-stage options, but it’s still a great pick.

Get the DeWalt snow blower at Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Cordless Snow Blowers

We had to wait for a significant storm to test these snow-clearing tools, but when it finally arrived, it not only brought snow but subzero wind chills—the perfect weather to put these models through their paces since extreme cold is typically hard on battery-powered tools. Before testing, we assessed each model’s ease of assembly and compared their features and components, identifying which were more heavy duty and which might be more difficult to use. 

Once we had a few inches of snow on the ground, we cleared two 75-foot-long 4-car driveways, a 12-foot-by-8-foot deck, and several small walkways between them. As snow continued to fall in additional storms, we kept using each option to blow the light and heavy precipitation that fell and chip away at icy road buildup left by plows. We checked runtime, throwing distance, and ease of use, rating each model to determine which of the best cordless snow blowers belonged in our lineup.

Testing Stats
Products tested 12
Time spent testing 2 weeks
Tests performed5
Price range$350 to $1,600

What to Consider When Choosing a Cordless Snow Blower 

The best snow blower for a particular user depends on the amount of snow a region typically experiences, the size of the sidewalk and driveway that need clearing, and how much battery power and runtime the project requires. Some cordless snow blowers are equipped to handle wide swaths of deep snow, but others are not. Consider these factors when perusing the many features of cordless snow blowers on today’s market.

Single-Stage vs. Two-Stage

The best cordless snow blowers fall into one of two categories: single-stage or two-stage. There are also three-stage blowers available; however, these are limited to gas-powered tools and commercial applications.

  • Single-stage snow blowers, most commonly used for residential purposes, have a horizontal auger at the front of the machine that rotates rapidly to scoop up snow and throw it through the chute. One disadvantage of a single-stage snow blower, however, is that it isn’t suitable for gravel driveways. Its auger blades are too low to the ground and will pick up the rocks and throw them.
  • Two-stage snow blowers use an auger to scoop and throw snow, much like single-stage snow blowers, but they also have an impeller fan that makes them more effective at managing larger amounts of heavy snow. They can throw snow over 35 feet, and their auger blades sit high enough to clear gravel driveways.

Power and Runtime

The runtime of a battery-powered snow blower is a key factor to consider when deciding on the best electric snow blower for tackling a driveway, walkway, or patio. Although most battery-operated snow blowers have a runtime that ranges from about 30 to 45 minutes, this depends on whether the snow is light and fluffy or heavy and wet.

The heavier the snow, the more power required to remove it, which means a cordless snow thrower that usually runs for 45 minutes may run for only 30 minutes before the battery needs to be recharged. However, there are also snow blowers that use more than one battery at a time to increase the power and runtime of the machine. Shoppers will want to consider a dual-battery blower if there’s a lot of ground to clear.

Size and Weight 

A cordless snow blower’s size and weight are important considerations. Though users needn’t bend to scoop, lift, and throw snow as they do with a standard shovel, they still must push the snow blower. Size also matters when storing the snow blower in a garage, shed, or any other space. 

Small snow blowers are generally single-stage models that weigh between 20 and 60 pounds. Though heavier snow blowers may have a self-propelling system to make them easier to move, maneuvering a larger, heavier machine, especially if the area is large or hilly, can be challenging for many users. 

Clearing Width and Depth 

When calculating clearing width and depth, think about the driveway, sidewalk, and any other areas around the home that must be cleared of snow. Some cordless snow blowers have small intake ports that can clear 6 inches of snow, and other models have deep 12-inch intake ports. Clearing width correlates to the blower’s number of stages.

  • Single-stage cordless snow blowers are usually sufficient for residential snow removal. Use a single-stage blower to remove snow in sections that are 11 to 22 inches wide.
  • Two-stage cordless snow blowers, well suited for small commercial locations or large residential properties, have a clearing width between 20 and 30 inches.

Speed Control

Because snow blowers can be heavy and cumbersome, many users want a self-propelled model. Unlike gas snow blowers, battery-powered models have a digital drive system and can be self-propelled, but they usually have a variable-speed auger to speed up snow removal. 

By increasing the speed at which the snow is scooped and thrown through the chute, the auger makes it easier to move the machine through a light snowfall. However, a variable-speed auger isn’t as effective when clearing heavy, packed snow.

Chute Control

The chute, which is a curved, hollow tube that extends from the back of the intake on a snow blower, provides a route for the snow to be thrown from the machine. On most blowers, a manual crank or lever allows users to change the angle and direction of the snow being displaced. 

Premium snow blowers, however, have auto-rotating chutes that users turn by pushing a button near the handle, which doesn’t require the machine to be stopped. The angle on some chutes also can be changed to allow the snow blower to throw snow even farther.

Wheels, Tracks, and Terrain Type

Cordless snow blowers can traverse snow on either wheels or tracks. Wheeled snow blowers feature two large rear wheels that drive the machine forward, while snow blowers with tracks have tracks similar to those found on a tank. Consider the features of wheeled versus tracked blowers: 

  • Wheeled snow blowers are easier to turn because tracked models don’t pivot. Wheel sizes for single-stage snow blowers range from 6 to 8 inches. Larger wheels perform better in deeper snow, while smaller wheels are easier to maneuver. These blowers are generally faster than tracked models. That said, some higher-end tracked blowers offer faster speed and turn-on-a-dime technology, making them comparable in speed and maneuverability to wheeled models. 
  • Tracked snow blowers provide significantly better traction in the snow, making them better able to climb steep slopes without slipping backward. Most tracked snow blowers are two-stage models, as single-stage models typically don’t produce enough power to drive the tracks. They also operate closer to the surface, leaving a thinner layer of snow and ice on a driveway or sidewalk than wheeled models. 

When choosing between wheeled or tracked snow blowers, shoppers will want to take terrain type into account. Wheeled snow blowers are best suited for paved surfaces, such as driveways and sidewalks, while tracked snow blowers are better on unpaved surfaces. Grade also has a significant impact; steep driveways require a snow blower with good traction and enough power to pull it up a snow-covered slope.

Additional Features

Some of the best cordless snow blowers have special features designed to make snow clearing easier and more comfortable. These extras include heated handles, a drift cutter, headlights, and an automatic snow blower safety shutoff. 

  • Heated handles may seem luxurious, but personal safety is an important part of working outdoors in freezing temperatures. The heat generated by the handles not only helps keep the user’s fingers warm in the cold air, but also makes it easier to hold and control the snow blower.
  • Drift cutters help clear deep drifts of snow. The cutter’s metal housing collects and pushes snow down into the auger for removal.
  • Headlights make it easier and safer to clear snow at night or during low-visibility situations.
  • An automatic safety shutoff shuts off the snow blower when the user releases the handle.

FAQs 

First-time cordless snow blower shoppers may have some additional questions about these devices. Just ahead are answers to some of the most commonly asked snow-blower questions.

Q. What is the difference between a snow blower and a snow thrower?

The terms “snow blower” and “snow thrower” are used interchangeably, but there are a couple of minor technical differences. While both clear away snow, a snow thrower is a single-stage machine, and a snow blower can be a single-stage, two-stage, or three-stage machine. Snow blowers clear a wider swath and are better suited for heavier snow, while snow throwers work well for lighter snow.

Q. Is a cordless snow blower heavy?

Battery-powered cordless snow blowers are relatively lightweight, typically ranging from about 20 pounds to 60 pounds for a single-stage. Two-stage electric models can reach nearly 200 pounds.

Q. How do you use a snow blower?

To get the driveway as clean as possible with a snow blower, power it up just after the snow has stopped falling since snow is easier to move when it’s still light and fluffy. Push the snow blower down and back up the sidewalk or driveway, making the necessary adjustments to the discharge chute so that the snow piles up where you want it.

Q. How do you store a snow blower?

A cordless snow blower should be stored safely in a garage or storage shed when not in use. Those who don’t have sheltered storage will want to secure a waterproof tarp over and around the snow blower. Without proper storage and maintenance, folks could wind up with a snow blower that doesn’t start.

Q. How long do cordless snow blowers last?

If properly stored and maintained, a cordless snow blower can last about 10 years.

Q. How much should I spend on a snow blower?

The affordable snow blowers​ tested in this guide cost between $350 and $1,600. According to Corey Welch, founder and CEO of Mow & Snow, “Higher price tags often mean better durability, power, and features, but it’s all about matching the blower to your needs. Paying for more power than you’ll use or features you don’t need doesn’t make sense.” Over time, even a more expensive snow blower will likely run you less than the cost of snow removal if you live in an area that gets regular snow.

Q. Are cordless snow blowers loud?

Cordless snow blowers are much quieter than gas models. Still, given that these are large machines doing relatively difficult work, some noise is to be expected. 

Q. How much horsepower is good for a snow blower?

The Ryobi 40V 22″ Two-Stage Cordless Snow Blower is a very good snow blower, and it uses a 40-volt battery to deliver more power than a 243cc gas snow blower. As our pick for the best cordless snow blower, it was powerful enough to excel in all of our tests.

Meet the Testers

Zach Lazzari is a freelance writer splitting time between the great outdoors, travel, and DIY projects ranging from camper builds to home renovations and maintenance. His home base in Montana provides the perfect testing grounds for winter products and snow equipment.

Tom Scalisi is a freelance writer specializing in the home design, construction, tools, and automotive industries. He has been involved in the trades for over 15 years as both a contractor and a commercial building mechanic. 

Additional research provided by Timothy Dale. 

The post We Tested Over a Dozen Snow Blowers and This Ryobi Is a Heavy-Duty Machine in Compact Form appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-20T12:58:00-05:00
<![CDATA[I Hated Scrubbing My Patio Furniture Clean—Now I Don’t Need To]]>The post I Hated Scrubbing My Patio Furniture Clean—Now I Don’t Need To appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/dewalt-flexvolt-power-cleaner-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=423002Thu, 16 Jan 2025 11:12:59 -0500ReviewsCleaning & OrganizingDIYHand ToolsPower ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

I recently had a great experience testing the new DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner during an end-of-season yard cleanup. Power cleaners are similar to electric or gas pressure washers that create a high pressure water jet for cleaning hard surfaces, but they are more compact and almost exclusively battery powered. Since pressure washers are a mainstay tool in building construction and maintenance, it’s no wonder that DeWalt has produced them for years. In this DeWalt FlexVolt 60V Power Cleaner review, I will share my experience from testing this unit and why I recommend it. 

DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner: At a Glance
Our rating: 4.5/5

DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner Specs
Power source60V DeWalt FlexVolt battery (not included)
Water sourceHose outlet or bucket
Water pressureUp to 1,000 pounds per square inch (PSI)
Flow rate1 gallon per minute (GPM)
NozzlesTurbo, 15, 25, 40
Hose length20 feet
DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX Cordless Power Cleaner Review action
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Testing the DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner 

I tested the DeWalt power cleaner this fall when I had to put away patio furniture and outdoor pottery for the season. Since my regular pressure washer produces a 3,000 PSI stream, it’s great for the driveway, deck, and house siding, but not so much for small or lightweight items, or delicate finishes that are susceptible to damage. So I normally spend an afternoon with a scrub brush and soapy water cleaning these things before storing them. I took a chance this year using the 1,000 PSI power cleaner, and it did a great job. 

Essentially, using the power cleaner worked the same as cleaning with a big pressure washer. It came with a variety of different spray nozzles and a soap sprayer to accommodate different cleaning needs. But the moderate water pressure and reduced flow rate on the power cleaner afforded better control than I would ever have with my gas powered pressure washer. Also, it has the ability to intake water from either a hose outlet or a bucket of water, which makes it more convenient when a hose bib is not available. Best of all, it saved about 2 hours of scrubbing and allowed more time for everything to dry thoroughly after cleaning and before storing it for the winter. 

What We LikeWhat We Don’t Like
Easier to maneuver than a big pressure washerLimited to about 40 minutes of run time per charge
Faster than hand scrubbingPremium price for a unique tool
Strong enough to clean well
Gentle enough to avoid damage
DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX Cordless Power Cleaner Review battery
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Just Right for Smaller Cleaning Projects

For cleaning small, lightweight items and sensitive surfaces, you need just the right amount of water pressure. Rated 1,000 PSI, this tool produces about 18 times the pressure of a garden hose, but less than half the pressure of most gas powered pressure washers. The kit includes a quick connect wand, turbo nozzle, 15-degree, 25-degree, and 40 degree nozzles, soap cannon, shoulder strap, suction hose with quick connect adapter, and a mesh storage bag. The kit I tested also came with a battery charger and 9 amp hour FlexVolt battery, but the tool is also available for a lower price without the battery. 

A Portable Power Cleaner That Boaters and RVers Will Appreciate

The DeWalt Power Cleaner is one of the most portable pressure-type cleaners I’ve used. It is significantly smaller than gas-powered or plug-in electric pressure washers. When disassembled, it is small enough to stow in a storage tote or large tool box. That makes it easy to transport also, which boaters and RVers will appreciate. The whole kit only weighs about 14.5 pounds.

As for mobility while working, one of my favorite features was the option to either tap into a hose outlet or pull water from any fresh water source. When an outdoor faucet was nearby, I connected to a garden hose as with any other pressure washer. But if I was working far from a faucet, I didn’t need to connect multiple hoses for longer reach. I simply brought a bucket of water to the project and used the included intake hose. It only took a few seconds for the self-priming pump to pull in water so I could start cleaning. The 1-gallon per minute flow rate meant that a 5 gallon bucket of water only provided 5 minutes of cleaning time. But a larger water source like a rain barrel, pool, or lake could provide nearly unlimited time.

DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX Cordless Power Cleaner Review nozzles
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Good Run Time and Modest Pressure for Light Duty Cleaning

For light duty cleaning over a larger area, the self-priming pump and 20-foot intake hose is less convenient. It doesn’t provide enough mobility, so I found myself constantly repositioning the bucket. I really liked the modest pressure for washing my car, but needed to connect to a garden hose that I could just drag around the car as I worked. It’s also important to note that this unit is not designed for tough cleaning jobs; for instance, it was under-powered for cleaning mildew off my driveway.

DeWalt claims that the included FlexVolt battery delivers up to 37 minutes of constant run time per charge, but that didn’t seem accurate to me. I actually got better results. With typical use patterns–intermittent trigger blasts of 5 to 30 seconds at a time–it gave me 90 minutes of cleaning time before depleting the battery. That was enough time to clean a patio table, four chairs, a bench, and about 30 garden pots of different sizes. So it really proved to be an ideal tool for small items. It did not damage my wood bench, chip clay pots, or knock over pottery, and I finished the job in about one-third the time it typically takes me to scrub everything by hand.

DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX Cordless Power Cleaner Review quick connect
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Why I Think the DeWalt FlexVolt Power Cleaner Is Worth The Premium Price

At a regular price of $349.00, the DeWalt 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner kit is one of the more expensive tools in its class, but with good reason. Most of the small cordless power cleaners are significantly less powerful, ranging between 300 and 700 PSI with flow rates averaging about 0.8 gallons per minute. This one delivers about double the cleaning power, and the kit I tested includes a high quality battery and charger. Those who already have DeWalt FlexVolt batteries could purchase the power cleaner as a bare tool for $199.00.

Buy the DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner on:

Product Comparisons

DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX 1,000 PSI Power CleanerGreenworks 24V 600 PSI Power Cleaner
Ryobi One+ 18V EZClean 320 PSI Power CleanerEgo Power+ 56V 3,200 PSI Cordless Pressure WasherRyobi 40V HP Brushless 1,200 PSI Pressure Washer
Power source60V, 9 Ah battery (included)24V, 2 AH battery (2 included)18V battery (not included)56V battery (not included)40V battery (not included)
Water pressure1,000 PSI600 PSI320 PSI3,200 PSI1,200 PSI
Flow rate1 GPM0.8 GPM0.8 GPMUp to 2.0 GPMUp to 1 GPM
Price$349$99.99$49$449$199

So, is the DeWalt FlexVolt 60V MAX 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner right for you?

If you’re looking for a battery powered pressure washer that will perform similarly to gas, this one is not for you. The DeWalt FlexVolt 60V Max 1,000 PSI Power Cleaner is a light duty tool with cleaning ability on par with plug-in electric models. But it’s better than the corded ones, because you can take it anywhere. In fact, its compact size and portability may be the most compelling reasons to consider buying it. It can draw water for cleaning out of a bucket, barrel, pool, or pond if need be, and runs for more than an hour per charge.

The DeWalt power cleaner comes with all the accessories necessary for deep cleaning. The whole kit weighs less than 15 pounds, and packs down into a surprisingly small drawstring bag. It produces adequate pressure and flow to clear away a season’s buildup of dirt and grime from patio furniture and pottery, and it could keep your boat or RV neat and clean. If you would like to save time and energy that you used to spend on scrubbing. This could be a smart pick.

Meet the Tester

Mark Wolfe is a writer and product tester who spent 20 years in the nursery and landscaping industry. For more than twenty years he mowed, edged, planted, pruned, cultivated, irrigated, and renovated beautiful landscapes. Now he tests and writes reviews about the latest outdoor power equipment, hand tools, lawn care products, and other outdoor living goods.

The post I Hated Scrubbing My Patio Furniture Clean—Now I Don’t Need To appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-16T11:12:59-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Roof Rakes to Keep Your Home Safe from Heavy Snow, Tested]]>The best roof rakes allow you to safely remove snow from your roof to protect your home and anyone passing by. We tested eight top options and review them here.

The post The Best Roof Rakes to Keep Your Home Safe from Heavy Snow, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-roof-rake/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=106627Wed, 15 Jan 2025 14:26:06 -0500ReviewsDIYExteriorRoofingToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Wet snow can weigh as much as 21 pounds per square foot, according to the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA), and a snow roof rake is the most effective means of removing that weight. The heavier the snow, the greater the risk of structural damage to a roof. That’s why the roof rake is an essential piece of winter equipment in some regions.

This tool lets users remove snow from a roof while keeping their feet planted firmly and safely on the ground. Failing to remove heavy snow can damage a roof and home after a big storm. Without a roof rake, one would need to improvise a tool or climb on the roof with a shovel, which are both dangerous and challenging options.

I tested eight different roof rakes after heavy snowfalls in Montana. To do so, I raked a metal roof and a shingle roof with different heights and pitches. I also tested the rakes on a tall shed and a camper. The camper was especially important because snow and ice buildup can lead to roof damage and leaks. My favorite from the bunch is the combo pack from Avalanche! It can handle large amounts of snow and includes built-in wheels to prevent roof damage.

Keep reading to learn about the different features to look for in a roof rake and find out why we chose the following as the best roof rake options available.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Avalanche! Combo Package
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Goplus Roof Snow Removal Rake Tool
  3. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: SnowPeeler Premium Long Handle Roof Rake
  4. BEST FOR FLAT ROOFS: Avalanche! Big Rig Rake
  5. BEST FOR BIG ROOFS: True Temper Telescoping Snow Roof Rake
  6. BEST GRIP: Snow Joe RJ208M Pro Snow Removal Roof Rake
  7. BEST TELESCOPING HANDLE: Garant Snow Roof Rake With Telescopic Handle
  8. BEST FOR GUTTERS: Roof Razor Original Snow Removal Tool
The best roof rake in action breaking a large block of roof snow into smaller segments for removal.
Photo: amazon.com

Before You Buy a Roof Rake

Note that roof rakes are intended for snow removal on single-story homes only. They should only be used when standing on the ground, and never while standing on a ladder. Attempting to balance a long pole while navigating snow-slick ladder rungs is a surefire way to slip and fall. Even if you have great balance, the weight of the snow you’re pulling off the roof could easily knock you off a ladder.

Product Comparison

LengthWeightMaterial
Avalanche! Combo Package 4 to 15.5 feet10.8 poundsFiberglass shaft, plastic head
Goplus Roof Snow Removal Rake Tool Up to 20 feet4.5 poundsAluminum shaft, plastic rake
SnowPeeler Premium Long Handle Roof RakeExtendable to 30 feet13.4 poundsAluminum shaft, aluminum head
Avalanche! Big Rig RakeExtendable from 4 to 16 feet7.25 poundsFiberglass shaft, plastic head
True Temper Telescoping Snow Roof RakeExtendable from 7 to 17 feet4.88 poundsAluminum shaft, polyethylene head
Snow Joe RJ208M Pro Snow Removal Roof Rake 22 feet7 poundsAluminum poles
Garant Snow Roof Rake With Telescopic Handle 16.5 feet4.5 poundsAluminum handle, poly blade
Roof Razor Original Snow Removal Tool 24 feet10 poundsAluminum

Our Top Picks

Selected for quality, functionality, material construction, and design, all of these tested products are excellent options for keeping the roof snow-free during the winter.

Best Overall

Avalanche! Combo Package

 The individual components of the Avalanche! Combo Package on a white background before assembly.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Heavy-duty design; suitable for large amounts of snow
  • Retractable plastic slide attachment enhances efficiency
  • Built-in wheels to glide along the roof, preventing damage

What We Don’t Like

  • Weighs more than most roof rakes on our list
  • Adding and removing sections slows job completion

Product Specs 

  • Length: Extendable from 4 to 15.5 feet
  • Weight: 10.8 pounds
  • Material: Fiberglass shaft, plastic head

Equipped with a retractable plastic slide for enhanced efficiency, this rake pulls dislodged snow down the slide and off the roof, saving users time and effort. It’s also equipped with small wheels to help it glide along the roof without damaging it.

The rake extends from 4 to 15.5 feet when each fiberglass extension bar is attached. This process is simple, but it takes a few minutes to add each extension. With telescoping models being the exception, most other roof rakes use fitted extension segments similarly.

When adding an extension pole, users might need to remove gloves to press the locking button. I really liked the fiberglass poles because they aren’t nearly as cold as metal options. It is important to ensure that the segments are seated well at each joint, with the locking button in place.

Super durable, the plastic head is up to heavy-duty challenges. Raking snow off a roof is usually awkward with any rake, and that was the case with this one. But I didn’t mind a small amount of extra weight while reaching for the high spots because the durable design also gave me the confidence to hit the heavy snow spots and pull hard. I felt like the fiberglass poles were strong as well.

One other reason this won our top spot is the fact that multiple heads are included for different needs. The head that’s equipped with wheels and a slide should be able to tackle most users’ needs. The slide allows snow to fall off the roof easily, creating a pathway over gutters and other obstacles. When users hit stubborn areas and need a head that can bust through ice and grab big chunks of snow over shingles, asphalt, and tricky surfaces, they’ll want to use the rake head with wheels.

What Our Tester Says: “I think this combo package is a great investment for anyone requiring regular use of a snow roof rake. Shoppers can find lighter-duty options for regions with less snow accumulation, but for those folks living in the mountains and regions where the snow piles up, I think a high-quality system is worth the price.”–Zach Lazzari, product tester and writer.

Read our full review: Avalanche! Combo Package

Get the Avalanche! Combo roof rake at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Bang For The Buck

Goplus Roof Snow Removal Rake Tool

 The Goplus Roof Snow Removal Rake Tool and additional handle pieces on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Lightweight and easy-to-handle
  • Multiple shaft segments for different length needs
  • Nice grip, durable head, and well-built handles

What We Don’t Like

  • Not built for heavy-duty use

Product Specs 

  • Length: Up to 20 feet
  • Weight: 4.5 pounds
  • Material: Aluminum shaft, plastic rake

Simple and affordable, this shovel provides up to 20 feet of reach with the help of its lightweight aluminum poles. Similar to other models, this rake features a clever locking system that allows users to add or remove segments. The snow roof rake itself is a simple hard plastic rake with metal supports to increase strength and rigidity.

Users will want to bolt the rake supports and head into place, but that’s the extent of the assembly. The rake head is hard and durable, and the handles are well built. When adding segments, each section must be seated well with the locking button aligned perfectly to hold the segments together. I found it easiest to connect each segment without gloves. It’s worth noting that the metal can get pretty cold to the touch, so work quickly or wear thin gloves.

The rake had no problem pulling snow off the roof. It doesn’t have a slide for easy removal, but it will make quick work of bigger drifts that add serious weight to the structure. The aluminum shafts do flex a little when every piece is connected, but overall, this rake worked well, and it has a great price point.

Get the Goplus roof rake at Amazon.

Best Heavy-duty

SnowPeeler Premium Long Handle Roof Rake

 The SnowPeeler Premium Long Handle Roof Rake on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for heavy snowfall
  • Slide attachment improves efficiency
  • Assembly is simple with a no-frills design

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavier than other rakes

Product Specs 

  • Length: Extendable to 30 feet
  • Weight: 13.4 pounds
  • Material: Aluminum shaft, aluminum head

Users who live in a region that gets heavy snow might want to invest in the tough SnowPeeler roof rake. Weighing in at 13.4 pounds and boasting a sizable 18-inch aluminum rake head with built-in stabilizing braces, the SnowPeeler roof snow rake can pull even packed snow down from the roof with no problem.

This is a heavy-duty product made with an aluminum shaft and rake head for dealing with deep, heavy snow. The roof rake can extend from up to 30 feet in length by adding the included extension poles as needed.

The SnowPeeler comes with a slide attachment that creates a slick path for the snow to slide down and off the roof. This greatly improves efficiency because the user doesn’t need to pull the snow all the way off the edge. However, the weight of the rake can fatigue the user more quickly than a lighter rake might.

I found this rake to be very easy to use, and I only wish the storm had dumped a heavier snow load so that I could really push its limits. Regardless, it peeled off a heavy foot of snow without any issues. It’s ideal for ski towns and mountain locations that get heavy snowfall and big storm events. Thanks to its no-frills design, assembly is simple, and the effectiveness for heavy snow is excellent. Overall, this roof rake is made to work hard.

Get the SnowPeeler roof rake at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best For Flat Roofs

Avalanche! Big Rig Rake

 All the pieces of the Avalanche! Big Rig Rake and its storage bag on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Sharp-angled shaft good for flat roofs
  • Wheels protect the roof and shingles from damage
  • Lightweight with a comfortable nonslip handle

What We Don’t Like

  • Not ideal for sloped roofs with its angled shaft

Product Specs 

  • Length: Extendable from 4 to 16 feet
  • Weight: 7.25 pounds
  • Material: Fiberglass shaft, plastic head

To properly clear a flat roof, it’s necessary to use a roof rake that doesn’t have a completely straight shaft. The shaft needs to be angled so that it can bend over the side and still sit flat on the roof. Designed with that in mind, this rake features a simple angled connector piece that fits onto the fiberglass shaft and extension bars. This gives users the ideal reach for a flat roof, like that of a truck trailer, RV, or shed.

Each extension bar is about 4 feet long, allowing the roof rake to extend to a maximum length of 15.5 feet. Also, keep in mind that each extension bar needs to be manually connected to the shaft. This is less convenient than other models that house the extensions inside the core of the shaft, allowing users to slide them out as desired. This roof rake weighs just over 7 pounds and features built-in wheels to keep the rake head from damaging the shingles.

I primarily tested this roof rake on my camper. It’s a flat roof with few obstacles aside from the two roof vents. The angled shaft made it very easy to clear the entire roof—it only took a few minutes. I think this model would also be great for semi-trailers, cargo trailers, and even flat roofs on garages and houses.

The problem with flat roofs is that they don’t allow snow to slough off naturally. This creates serious problem areas that can damage the roof and test the structural limits of a house or trailer. While straight-shaft models allow users to rake reasonably well, they still have trouble grabbing and pulling the base layers of snow. With this rake, I could easily clear the full snow load. It’s durable, sturdy, and easy to grip as well. I’m a big fan of this model and the quality of this brand’s products in general.

Get the Avalanche! Big Rig roof rake at Amazon.

Best For Big Roofs

True Temper Telescoping Snow Roof Rake

 The True Temper Telescoping Snow Roof Rake on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Aluminum design is easy to lift and maneuver
  • Easy push-button extension can reach up to 17 feet
  • Comfortable nonslip handle

What We Don’t Like

  • Polyethylene head may crack or chip with repeated contact

Product Specs 

  • Length: Extendable from 7 to 17 feet
  • Weight: 4.88 pounds
  • Material: Aluminum shaft, polyethylene head

The push-button telescoping design on this True Temper roof rake can extend the pole up to 17 feet, and it quickly collapses to 7 feet for storage. It weighs just 4.88 pounds, so users can easily lift it over their heads and control the movement of the rake.

If their home maintenance regularly requires removing substantial snow deposits, users will likely appreciate the lightweight aluminum design, which is easy to lift and maneuver thanks to its nonslip handle. Plus, this rake effectively pulls down deep snow accumulations in a single draw thanks to its 24-inch-wide poly blade.

This isn’t the longest roof rake out there, but its lightweight build is a trade-off that makes this model a favorite for large roofs. The telescoping handle lets the user quickly change the shaft’s length to match the required distance and pitch. Adjusting the telescoping handle is especially easy, and I found it very easy to manipulate. If you’ll be raking multiple roofs and will need to change lengths quickly, this is a great roof rake.

Although it’s a few feet shorter than some rakes, I was able to reach every spot needed on my roof. For a unique roof that requires some serious reach, there are much longer rakes out there, but they use segments rather than telescoping designs.

Get the True Temper roof rake at Amazon, Tractor Supply Co., or The Home Depot.

Best Grip

Snow Joe RJ208M Pro Snow Removal Roof Rake

 The Snow Joe RJ208M Pro Snow Removal Roof Rake on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Excellent grip increases control and functionality
  • Slide system and head design minimizes effort
  • Sturdy poles snap together easily

What We Don’t Like

  • Wheels can hang up on ice dams and other obstacles
  • Not designed to pull against heavy snow loads

Product Specs 

  • Length: 22 feet
  • Weight: 7 pounds
  • Material: Aluminum poles

This was a tricky roof rake to categorize because it performed very well across several categories. It did a great job overall, and I wouldn’t hesitate to recommend the rake for large roofs, heavy snow, and possibly other categories, too. It also sits at a nice price point.

One thing that stood out about this rake was its comfortable grip. I was able to hold it with and without gloves without my grip slipping. As minor a feature as it might seem, the grip really increased the functionality of this rake. The aluminum poles are also very sturdy and well built. Segments can be added or removed quickly with the locking button system. During testing, each section seated easily and snapped right into place.

The 22-foot-long model I tested offered plenty of reach, although if shoppers need a longer rake, the company also offers a 28-foot option. The rake head has two wheels and a fabric slide for easy snow removal. As the wheels roll into the snow, the fabric slide moves beneath it, allowing the snow to slide off the roof. The head is designed in such a way that it glides along the snow with very little resistance.

This type of head design is used by a number of other brands and models. It’s a great system that doesn’t cause fatigue as quickly as heavier rake heads made of a single solid strip. If the roof has ice dams and obstacles, though, the wheels might get caught occasionally. I really like the slide system overall because it’s capable of removing snow with minimal effort. It also covers gutters, and the snow slides over those openings.

In short, this rake impressed me. It features a solid design with a great grip. The handle feels durable, and during testing, it pulled snow off the roof with little resistance.

Get the Snow Joe roof rake at Lowe’s, The Home Depot, or Menards.

Best Telescoping Handle

Garant Snow Roof Rake With Telescopic Handle

 The Garant Snow Roof Rake With Telescopic Handle on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Great grip on coated primary pole
  • Smooth all-in-one telescoping handle
  • Sturdy rake head

What We Don’t Like

  • Shorter than other models
  • No wheels or slides for assistance

Product Specs 

  • Length: 16.5 feet
  • Weight: 4.5 pounds
  • Material: Aluminum handle, poly blade

Dealing with stand-alone pole extension segments can be a hassle at times. Not only is it a pain to have to lug them around while raking the roof, but it also takes time and planning to add and remove segments for different areas of the roof. It’s true that segmented designs work well for users who have a specific length need and consistent roof pitches—it’s not a bad system by any means, but all-in-one telescoping handles are much more convenient.

When you need to make adjustments on the fly and don’t want a pile of poles in the garage or truck, a telescoping handle design is an ideal option. This telescoping roof rake from Garant features a well-rounded design with a smooth-telescoping handle that extends to 16.5 feet long. It’s certainly not the longest out there, but it should be sufficient for most single-story homes.

I loved the handle and pole design of this model. It slides out in seconds, so length can be added or subtracted in a jiffy. I found the push-button design very user-friendly. Just make sure to hear a click to lock out the handle at the desired length. The coated primary pole also offers a great gripping platform for the second hand.

This model uses a standard poly blade with angled supports. The same system can be found on many other models. It’s sturdy and makes it easy to grab and pull snow. It requires more effort and strength than roller-and-slide systems, but I still found it easy to get the job done. For anyone with a normal single-story home, this roof rake is a winner. I love that it’s easy to store as a single-piece unit rather than having to deal with various poles and components.

Get the Garant roof rake at Ace Hardware or Walmart.

Best For Gutters

Roof Razor Original Snow Removal Tool

 The Roof Razor Original Snow Removal Tool on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Great for big roofs with gutters
  • Wheels and snow slide work very well
  • 24-inch cutting head removes large snow loads quickly

What We Don’t Like

  • Poles may flex when all segments are attached
  • Pole segments must be seated well to avoid damage

Product Specs 

  • Length: 24 feet
  • Weight: 10 pounds
  • Material: Aluminum

The Roof Razor and the aforementioned SnowPeeler have a few design similarities. It’s a close call between the two, and each has a unique set of advantages. I think the SnowPeeler has slightly stronger poles, but the Roof Razor is certainly up to tackling large roofs and heavy snow loads. During testing, the fabric slide rolled out nicely, and it allowed snow to slide over the gutters and fall to the ground.

I appreciated the long 24-foot handle, largely because it allowed me to reach difficult areas. Thanks to that, I was able to use this rake on the high roof of my neighbor’s metal shop. It was easy to lift and maneuver, even with the super-long extension poles attached. It also rolled easily over the metal roof and allowed a foot or so of snow to slide off. The high side of the shop didn’t have gutters, but the lower lean-to section did, and the slide covered the gutters as snow was removed. I was able to clear most of the 50-foot-long by 30-foot-wide shop within a half hour.

As with many snow rakes, this one requires each pole segment to be connected manually. To do so, users will want to seat the sections and make sure the button locks into place. This rake is slightly heavier than other models, but it also offers more length than most. Overall, it’s easy to handle once users find the balance point. A basic wrench set is required for assembly.

Get the Roof Razor roof rake at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Roof Rakes

Testing was done throughout a weeklong storm event. The first 3 days received heavy snowfall with a mix of dry powder and wet snow. The powder wasn’t problematic, but the wet snow was heavy, and it stuck to the rooftops. It also underwent a slight thaw and a subsequent freeze cycle that solidified the rooftop snow.

I waited for the storm to end and rotated through each roof rake, pulling sections of snow down. I judged each roof rake based on ease of assembly, grip, length, and ability to reach and grab snow without damaging the roof. Durability was also considered. Several of the brands have similar design features with slight variations in the way they are constructed. There was a reasonable overlap when it comes to performance and function with these look-alike models.

What to Consider When Choosing a Roof Rake

Make sure you’re up to date on the most important product factors before deciding on the best option to rake snow from your roof and prevent ice dams from forming. Some factors to consider in finding the right snow rake for roof cleaning include the type and quality of the materials, length, weight, and head design.

Material

A roof rake for snow removal can be made of different materials, including fiberglass, polyethylene, aluminum, and wood.

  • Fiberglass is a durable, lightweight material commonly used to make the shaft of a roof rake. This provides substantial support, allowing the user to push and pull snow without worrying about handling a heavy or fragile shaft.
  • Polyethylene is a type of plastic used to make the rake head. It’s tough, weather-resistant, and affordable, though aluminum is a more durable option.
  • Aluminum is great for use as both a shaft and rake head, though the hard metal can scratch or tear shingles. To avoid this issue, invest in a roof rake with wheels to help keep the edge of the rake just off the top of the roof.
  • Wood is never used for a roof rake head because it will begin to break down and decay with excessive exposure to water or snow. However, wood can be used to make the roof rake shaft, and it functions similarly to fiberglass.

Length and Weight

Most roof rakes come with adjustable poles that can be lengthened from 14 to 22 feet for snow removal and shortened to less than 8 feet for storage. The longer the pole, the higher users will be able to reach on the roof, but longer poles can also be unwieldy and may require more physical strength to lift and maneuver.

Roof rakes range in weight between 4 and 14 pounds, with most of the weight in the rake head. The heavier the rake head, the more likely it is to sink deeply into the snow on the roof, allowing users to remove a good amount with each pull. Conversely, heavy roof rakes require more physical strength to lift and position.

Head Design

Roof rake heads range in depth from a narrow 3 inches to a generous 10 inches, and widths run between 12 and 24 inches. The larger the rake head, the more snow the rake can remove in a single pull. If the snow is wet and heavy, it can require additional physical strength to pull it, which can lead to back and shoulder fatigue.

Curved heads and interchangeable attachments, such as a scoop, blade, or plastic slide, can greatly decrease fatigue if used properly. It’s also a good idea to consider looking for a roof rake with built-in wheels or bumpers to help protect the roof and shingles from damage. This is especially important when working with an aluminum rake head or if the rake has a blade attachment.

Tips for Using a Roof Rake

When starting to rake the snow off of a roof, it’s important to begin the process by removing the snow from the roof’s edge first. If users attempt to extend the roof rake as much as possible and simply pull down any snow caught within this range, there is a good chance that they will be unable to move the snow. Also, keep in mind that even if the snow does move, it isn’t a good idea to bring down that much snow at once because the weight of the snow could cause injury.

While the goal of snow removal on a driveway is to clear any snow or ice that could cause the car to slip, it’s not actually necessary to rake every inch of snow off the roof. Leaving one or two inches of snow isn’t going to cause ice dams to form, and this gap can help prevent the roof shingles from being damaged during raking.

Additionally, under no circumstances should users attempt to climb a ladder or walk on a sloped roof in winter conditions to remove snow. The entire purpose of a roof rake is for the user to remain on the ground, so don’t risk trying to rake the roof while perched on a ladder.

  • Start at the roof’s edge and work towards the center.
  • Not all the snow needs to be removed from a roof.
  • Do not climb up a ladder or sloped roof while handling a roof rake.

FAQs

For more information on the best roof rake for snow removal at your home, take a look at some of the most commonly asked questions and the detailed answers below.

Q. What is a snow rake for? 

Unlike general-purpose rakes, snow rakes (also known as roof rakes) are specially designed for one purpose: to remove snow from single-story roofs without having to climb. This makes it much easier and safer to keep the roof clear of snow and prevent ice dams from forming in the gutter system.

Q. Do roof rakes damage shingles? 

The blade on a roof rake head can damage the shingles on a roof. This is especially true with aluminum rake heads, but this problem can be avoided if you invest in a roof rake with built-in wheels. These wheels elevate the rake slightly, suspending the rake head above the surface of the shingles instead of grating against them.

Q. Do roof rakes prevent ice dams? 

If you rake the roof the same day it snows, you can prevent ice build-up in the gutter system.

Q. Do I need a roof rake for a metal roof? 

Whether or not you need a roof rake depends on how much snow naturally builds up on your roof. Some houses have steep roofs that don’t collect a lot of snow, while others may have a gentle slope. Metal roofs can be raked with a roof rake to keep them clear of snow, but in most cases, the snow will tend to slide off a metal roof without a problem. In fact, many homes with metal roofs need snow guards or snow fences to prevent piles of snow from sliding off and potentially hurting anyone standing nearby.

Q. When should I rake my roof? 

It’s a good idea to rake the roof on the same day it snows, just as it isn’t wise to wait long to shovel your driveway. Keep in mind that freshly fallen snow is much easier to move than snow that has been allowed to melt and refreeze under the sun.

Meet the Tester

Zach Lazzari is a freelance writer splitting time between the great outdoors, travel, and DIY projects ranging from camper builds to home renovations and maintenance. His home base in Montana is the perfect testing grounds for winter products and snow equipment. With over a decade of professional writing experience, he also covers a variety of other projects and maintenance topics for Bobvila.com.

Additional research provided by Glenda Taylor and Timothy Dale.

The post The Best Roof Rakes to Keep Your Home Safe from Heavy Snow, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-15T14:26:06-05:00
<![CDATA[I Love This Dewalt Construction Jack So Much, I Bought Two]]>The post I Love This Dewalt Construction Jack So Much, I Bought Two appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/dewalts-toughseries-jack-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=423386Wed, 15 Jan 2025 12:44:29 -0500ReviewsDIYHand ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Working solo has its perks—I can take my time, do things the way I like, and play ACDC as loud as I want. But it also has its challenges, like when I need to lift something heavy and there’s no one around to help. That’s where DeWalt’s ToughSeries Construction Jack comes in. It lifts items up to 340 pounds using hand squeezes or foot pumps.

The DeWalt jack earned a spot in Bob Vila’s 2024 Tool of the Year competition as one of the best new hand tools—a well-deserved recognition. 

Initially, I figured I’d use the jack primarily to lift and snug a bottom row of drywall panels against an upper row, and it’s great for that, but the more I used it, the more I realized it could be indispensable for many projects. And its usefulness extends from the jobsite to the home, where it can be used to lift appliances for leveling or raise a corner of a riding mower for changing a tire. 

I tested the DeWalt jack for lifting heavy objects, including a large file cabinet, a garage tool chest, heavy furniture, and more. I used it to lift a heavy wood door and hold it at just the right height to slip it on its hinges. The nice thing about lifting the door was that I could use my foot to raise it to the correct height—each foot pump seemed to lift the door another ¼ inch—and my hands were free to maneuver the door. That’s so much handier than bracing the door on tuna cans (yes, I’ve done that). 

  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review
  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review Using foot pedal pump
  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review Use as a pressure spreader to force hardwood strips tighter
  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review Squeezing the jack
  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review Lifting mower to change wheel
  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review Lifting furniture to put sliders under legs
  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review Lifting and using a level
  • DeWalt’s ToughSeries Jack Review Holding stud up for screwing

The DeWalt jack has a max lift height of 8 ¾ inches, and the lifting plate is tapered, so it slips easily under most items. However, if there’s no room between the object and the floor—as with my file cabinet—you may have to tip the object back slightly to slide the lifting plate underneath. It will only lift one edge of large-format items, which is often sufficient to reach underneath to clean or retrieve a dropped item.

There are two ways to release the lift pressure on the jack. The safest way is to use the thumb lever located above the foot pump and press it repeatedly to lower the jack in small increments. Once there’s no more weight on the lift plate, press the release button on the top of the jack, and you can slide the jack freely up and down the shaft. 

After testing the DeWalt ToughSeries jack, I had to make a tough decision: Where to keep it? Should it go in the garage for lawn and garden projects, in my truck tool box for quick lifts on the jobsite, or in the utility room for lifting heavy furniture to clean beneath? I won’t keep you guessing—it’s in the utility room, but I found it useful enough that I plan to buy a second one for my tool box, because the DeWalt jack is still my top pick for lifting drywall panels. 

Where to Buy the DeWalt ToughSeries Construction Jack

The post I Love This Dewalt Construction Jack So Much, I Bought Two appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-15T12:44:29-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Miter Gauges of 2025 for Precise Cuts, Tested and Reviewed]]>A miter gauge is a valuable addition to a woodworker's tool box. This buyer's guide offers top picks and tips on choosing the best miter gauge for you.

The post The Best Miter Gauges of 2025 for Precise Cuts, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-miter-gauge/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=150160Wed, 15 Jan 2025 04:02:56 -0500ReviewsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Precision cutting on a table saw, band saw, or router table can be demanding, and a good miter gauge makes it much easier. Simple miters on narrow boards can be cut with a hand saw and miter box, or with a powered miter saw. However, a miter saw can’t compete with a table saw when it comes to cutting wide boards and sheet material. But the table saw’s blade can’t be rotated to cut angles. The miter gauge solves this problem by guiding the workpiece into the blade at the proper angle. Unfortunately, the “free” miter gauges included with most shop tools leave much to be desired in terms of accuracy, adjustability, and repeatable results. 

For this guide, we tested four popular aftermarket miter gauges, using our portable table saw. After three days of testing and more than 100 miter cuts, the JessEm Mite-R-Excel II became our all-around favorite. The compact telescoping fence and moderate-length miter bar were a good fit for our saw. The protractor, adjustment knobs, and sliding fence felt more sturdy than the others in the test group. The gauge was very accurate right out of the box, and the flip-stop mechanism was compatible with a sacrificial fence setup (which was not the case for every model we tested).

But our top pick will not be right for every user. Others we tested range from a capable budget model for basic joinery to high-precision devices better suited for larger freestanding saws. Read on to learn more about our selection criteria for the best miter gauges, our workshop test observations, and other highly rated options that we did not get to test. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: JessEm Mite-R-Excel II
    Jump to Review 
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Fulton Precision Miter Gauge With Fence and Flip Stop
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST FOR LARGE TABLES: Kreg KMS7102 Precision Miter Gauge System
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST WITH SLED: Incra Miter5000
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR BENCH TOOLS: Incra V27 Miter Gauge
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST FOR BEGINNERS: Powertec Universal Table Saw Miter Gauge
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST FOR EXPERTS: Incra 1000HD Miter Gauge
    Jump to Review
  8. ALSO CONSIDER: The Original (Left Side) Dubby Cutoff Sled 3160
    Jump to Review
The Best Miter Gauge Fulton Precision Miter Gauge
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Our Top Picks

We chose the following miter gauges for testing based on their popularity among woodworkers. Each one offers its own blend of strengths for different projects, shop setups, and work styles.

Best Overall

JessEm Mite-R-Excel II

 The Best Miter Gauge Option JessEm Mite-R-Excel II
Photo: Woodcraft

What We Like

  • Sturdy aluminum construction
  • Telescoping fence for full-length support
  • 9 preset angles with spring-loaded indexing pins
  • Adjustable-depth flip stop with micro adjuster

What We Don’t Like

  • Short miter bar
  • Assembly took longer than necessary
  • More expensive than many other options

Specs 

  • Material: Steel and aluminum
  • Fence: Adjustable 20 to 36 inches
  • Quick stops: 9

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Accuracy 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 4.7/5

The JessEm Mite-R-Excel II has the precision necessary for fine woodworking combined with fast setting angles at 0, 10, 22.5, 30, and 45 degrees. At its shortest, the telescopic fence is suitable for small table saws, band saws, or router tables, yet it will extend out to 36 inches providing excellent workpiece support on large table saws. It also has flip and end stops for improved productivity when sawing high volumes.

Assembling this miter gauge took about 15 minutes, but should have only taken about five. The illustrations of the parts varied from the actual hardware, and one of the bolts was threaded differently than two others that otherwise looked identical at a glance. Once we figured it out, everything fit together perfectly. 

The JessEm Mite-R-Excel II was just the right size to work with our portable table saw. The miter bar was the shortest among our test group, but we had no problem cutting 45-degree angles on boards up to 8 inches wide. And it was consistently accurate. We made the rounds cutting angles at all of the positive-stop positions, and after the fourth round, all of the pieces from each cutting position measured within 0.3 degrees or less. 

What our tester says: “Just picking up the JessEm Mite-R-Excel II leaves the impression of quality. It is weighty—and dead-on accurate right out of the box. After adjusting the miter bar for a snug fit in our saw’s T-track, all of our matched cuts measured within 0.3 degrees of each other.” —Mark Wolfe, writer and product tester

Get the JessEm miter gauge at Amazon, Woodcraft, Lee Valley, Infinity Cutting Tools, or Walmart.

Best Bang for the Buck

Fulton Precision Miter Gauge With Fence and Flip Stop

 The Best Miter Gauge Option Fulton Precision Miter Gauge With Fence and Flip Stop
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Budget-friendly miter gauge
  • Good accuracy for the price
  • Beveled fence for improved support
  • Works with T-track or straight slot tables

What We Don’t Like

  • Measuring tap does not come pre-installed

Specs 

  • Material: Steel and aluminum
  • Fence: 18.9 inches
  • Quick stops: 13

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.3/5; Accuracy 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 5/5 

The Fulton miter gauge is a well-thought-out device, offering many features of much more expensive models. The sturdy aluminum head has settings for angles of 22.5, 30, 45, 60, 67.5, and 90 degrees and is capable of both left and right angles. A spring-loaded pin allows for rapid positioning. The main gauge is marked in single-degree increments.

The miter bar is 18.9 inches long, designed to eliminate play on the saw table slot. It will fit most straight and T-slot tables (though not Craftsman or Sears brands). The extruded aluminum fence has ends precut at 45 degrees, which allows workpiece support closer to the saw blade when cutting angles. A flip stop makes it easy to produce repetitive cuts.

In terms of basic functionality, the Fulton Precision miter gauge proved to be a very nice upgrade over the one that came with our table saw. The miter bar fit perfectly in the T-track slot on the table saw, and a few turns of the roller ball plungers achieved perfect alignment with no play. The 13 positive stops were perfectly accurate, quick, and easy to engage by means of a spring-loaded drop pin. Finding angles between the positive stops was a little trickier for repeat cuts. But all of our matched-angle cuts measured within 0.3 degrees. And the price was considerably lower than the other products we tested.

Get the Fulton miter gauge at Amazon or Wood Art Supply.

Best for Large Tables

Kreg KMS7102 Precision Miter Gauge System

 The Best Miter Gauge Option: KREG KMS7102 Table Saw Precision Miter Gauge System
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 24-inch fence supports larger workpieces
  • 0.1-degree angle resolution
  • Large swing stop
  • Mid-range price point

What We Don’t Like

  • Felt oversized on our saw table
  • Brass stop lock pin could be easily lost

Specs 

  • Material: Aluminum
  • Fence: 24 inches
  • Quick stops: 9

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.3/5; Accuracy 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 5/5 

The Kreg KMS7102 Miter Gauge was a bit larger than we preferred for working on our portable table saw, but would be a handy accessory for a large freestanding saw. This model’s protractor gauge is computer numerical control (CNC) machined, rather than pressed, and factory calibrated to within 0.003 inches. Positive stops at 0, 10, 22.5, 30, and 45 degrees to left and right allow for rapid setting of commonly used angles. Extra precision comes from a vernier scale that gives adjustment to 0.1 degrees and a micro adjuster capable of 0.01 degrees.

The table saw miter bar has five screw adjusters to ensure a snug fit in the table slot. The fence is 24 inches long—excellent for guiding long boards or large sheet material—and made of cast aluminum for rigidity. It has slots for mounting the Swing Stop workpiece positioning system, which also helps to improve the accuracy of repeat miter cuts.

The extra long miter bar allowed us to guide wider workpieces easily, but the long fence reminded us that our small portable table saw was not equipped to get the full value of the gauge. The KMS7102 would be great for cutting sheet material, but we would have needed a larger surface to support bigger workpieces. With its combination of competitive price and high performance, this miter gauge from Kreg is an excellent choice for freestanding table saws.

Get the Kreg miter gauge at Amazon, The Home Depot, Kreg, Menards, Grizzly, ToolNut, or Walmart.

Best with Sled

Incra Miter5000

 The Best Miter Gauge Option Incra Miter5000
Photo: Acme Tools

What We Like

  • Telescoping fence supports long workpieces
  • Suitable for left or right side of the saw blade 
  • 364 positive stops in .5-degree increments
  • Includes track clamp and swing stop

What We Don’t Like

  • Premium price for an MDF sled
  • Once assembled, cannot switch sides easily

Specs 

  • Material: Aluminum
  • Fence: Adjustable 36 to 64 inches
  • Quick stops: 364

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.3/5; Accuracy 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 4.7/5 

A sled offers the best workpiece support for miter cuts in wide panels because it carries the piece through the cut instead of pushing the piece into the blade. The Incra Miter 5000 miter sled features a laser cut steel protractor head with 364 angle stops, 36- to 64-inch telescoping fence. It also comes with such table saw miter gauge accessories as swing stop, and T-track clamp. The MDF sled base panels are easy to install for a zero-clearance cutting system, and customizable for cutting from the right or left side of the saw blade.

The Miter 5000 worked well on our portable table saw without added support, but that may not be the case for every saw and would not have been the case if we had to cut pieces longer than about 36 inches. The hardware was clearly labeled and the instructions were easy to follow, which made assembly a breeze. We installed the sled left of the blade, with the non-moving receiving panel mounted in the right-side miter track, following the instructions as written. There were also supplemental instructions for installing the sled on the right.

Setting the angles at 5-degree increments was a straightforward process, but setting between pre-marked angles required a 2-step process that took a little more time than other products we tested. That said, this system delivered incredibly accurate and repeatable results, with less than .1-degree difference between matched pieces. We especially liked the included T-track clamp for total support and control, particularly with small pieces.

What our tester says: “The Incra Miter 5000 was easy to set up, perfectly accurate, and worked well with the contractor table saw we used for testing. It was expensive, but way easier to use than just a miter gauge.” —Mark Wolfe, writer and product tester

Get the Incra Miter 5000 miter gauge at Amazon, Acme Tools, Woodcraft, Rockler, Grizzly, or Incra Tools.

More Great Options

If the models we tested don’t fit your needs, other great options remain. These highly rated miter gauges offer unique feature combinations for highly accurate cuts and easy adjustments.

Best for Bench Tools

Incra V27 Miter Gauge

 The Best Miter Gauge Option: Incra MITERV27 Miter V27 Miter Gauge
Photo: Acme Tools

What We Like

  • 27 stops for most common angles
  • Works with most benchtop saws and router tables
  • Miter bar adjusts to fit most table tracks
  • Affordable model from a premium brand

What We Don’t Like

  • Fence is not included
  • Periodic recalibration may be necessary

Specs 

  • Material: Steel
  • Fence: Mounting bracket
  • Quick stops: 27

Precision generally comes with a premium price tag. Still, this Incra model is not only affordable but also maximizes its value by tripling as a router table miter gauge, a sanding table miter gauge, or a band saw miter gauge. Where most miter heads have a handful of preset angle stops, the V27 takes its name from the 27 locking indents that make the setting of even unusual angles quick and easy. 

The miter bar has an optional T-slot washer and adjustment that allows it to be used with many different woodworking machines. The only thing lacking is a fence. However, there are two slots machined into the head for attachment of shop-made alternatives. It’s constructed of highly durable chromed steel, so it’s sure to last a long time.

Get the Incra V27 miter gauge at Amazon, Walmart, Acme Tools, Woodcraft, or Incra Tools.

Best for Beginners

Powertec Universal Table Saw Miter Gauge

 The Best Miter Gauge Option Powertec Universal Table Saw Miter Gauge
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Proven design at a competitive price
  • Compatible with slotted and non-slotted tables
  • Guide plate accepts a variety of aftermarket accessories

What We Don’t Like

  • Aluminum locating stops may wear over time
  • Adding a fence will increase overall cost

Specs 

  • Material: Laser-cut aluminum
  • Fence: Basic slotted
  • Quick stops: 27

Many woodworkers never need to saw material to 0.1 of a degree. For beginners, a robust, low-cost miter gauge like this one from Powertec can be easier to use and more useful than something with extreme precision. But that doesn’t mean it’s short on features. 

The head is thick laser-cut aluminum, offering the necessary accuracy and durability. There are 27 indents around the edge, with a pivoting locating mechanism that’s fast and easy to use. The miter bar has an adjustment, so it fits tightly in saw tables and can also be used with other machinery. While a miter gauge fence isn’t provided, there are fixing slots available for aftermarket or homemade additions. It is a basic miter gauge, which for some users might be the ideal solution.

Get the Powertec universal miter gauge at Amazon, The Home Depot, Powertec, or Walmart.

Best for Experts

Incra 1000HD Miter Gauge

 The Best Miter Gauge Option Incra 1000HD Miter Gauge
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Precisely machined and laser-cut components
  • Fast-setting angle lock system in single-degree steps
  • Telescopic fence provides excellent workpiece support

What We Don’t Like

  • Premium price tag

Specs 

  • Material: Steel and aluminum
  • Fence: 18 to 31 inches
  • Quick stops: 180

This Incra miter gauge has been designed to satisfy the most demanding woodworker, offering both fine detail and great flexibility. The heavy-duty aluminum steel head of the 1000HD is laser cut and machined for high accuracy. It has fast, positive locking increments at every single degree and further fine adjustment to 0.1 degrees. The patented miter bar allows an almost perfect fit in saw table slots. There’s also a removable T-slot adapter.

The aluminum fence extends from 18 to 31 inches, offering excellent workpiece support while being compact enough for smaller saws. The accompanying adjustable flip stop provides accurate control over cut length. The Incra 1000HD miter gauge is a considerable investment, but for those who need a high level of accuracy time after time, it may be worth the expense.

Get the Incra 1000HD miter gauge at Amazon or Acme Tools.

Also Consider

The Original (Left Side) Dubby Cutoff Sled 3160

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Cuts panels up to 24 inches wide by 52 inches long
  • Hold-down clamp safely secures small pieces
  • Pre-scribed miter cut lines for 4- to 16-sided frame angles
  • Compatible with most cabinet and contractor table saws
  • Choose from left side, right side, or both sides

What We Don’t Like

  • Base may warp in a humid environment
  • Does not include a zero-clearance tabletop

Specs 

  • Material: luminum and laminated medium-density fiberboard (MDF)
  • Fence: 24 inches
  • Quick stops: 1

Crosscut sleds are popular table saw accessories because they provide more support for larger panels than a fence alone. This typically increases accuracy and productivity. They also help to improve safety by keeping the hands further from the blade when cutting smaller pieces. The Dubby Original Cutoff Sled has garnered praise since the 1980s because it is simple to use and extremely accurate. 

The Dubby features a laminated fiberboard base with scribed stainless steel angle gauge, and an extruded aluminum fence on a pivot. Simply move the outer end of the fence to the desired angle index line and tighten the knob for perfect cutting accuracy. The kit also includes a sliding stop with fine adjustment for repeat cuts, and a toggle hold-down clamp to secure the workpiece against the base. This system ensures an accurate cut every time while adding a measure of safety when working with smaller pieces.

Get the Dubby crosscut sled miter gauge at Amazon or Peachtree Woodworking Supply.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose and Tested the Best Miter Gauges

To identify our top picks, we started with a list of popular brands of aftermarket miter gauges. Then we listed features that enhance accuracy and repeatability, reduce setup and adjustment time, and increase durability and user safety. The models we tested earned high ratings from the experienced and beginner woodworkers who rely on them. To test each miter gauge, we used them to cut square ends and matched angles to form a square (8 45-degree angles) and an equilateral triangle (6 30-degree angles). Instead of cutting all of the matching angles in succession, we adjusted between cuts with alternate angles to test repeatability. After cutting all the pieces, we evaluated accuracy first by assembling the shapes, then by measuring each angled piece with a digital angle finder. Finally, we scored each tested model on a rubric and noted any other observations before assigning awards.

Testing Stats
Products tested 4
Time spent testing 3 days
Tests performed6
Price range$80 to $400

What to Consider When Choosing a Miter Gauge

When a miter saw won’t cut it, a table saw miter gauge may help. The woodworker looking for a good miter gauge may be spoiled for choice, but as with any tool, some features should be prioritized over others. The following will help pinpoint the key benefits and highlight the versatility and potential creativity that the best miter gauge for table saw use can offer.

Construction

There are three main parts to a miter gauge: the miter bar, miter head, and fence.

Saw tables have a slot to accept various accessories. The miter bar is designed to fit in this, allowing the miter gauge to slide smoothly back and forth. The miter bar is often rectangular, though it may have an additional part shaped to fit table saws that have a T-slot in the table. The fit needs to be tight enough to maintain accuracy but not so tight that it jams in the slot. The best miter gauges can be adjusted to provide the right fit.

The miter head is semicircular and marked out for various angles. Increments vary from single degrees to .01 depending on the gauge. There’s usually a push handle, which is often also used to clamp the head at the correct angle, though a separate device may be employed.

The fence is fixed across the head and the workpiece rests against it. Fences may be solid or extendable. Longer fences provide better workpiece support but may not be suitable for small saws.

Material

Most miter gauges are made with components that are either steel or aluminum. Steel brings strength and durability, which is important for areas subject to frequent wear, like screw threads. However, steel is quite heavy and prone to rust. Aluminum is much lighter, highly resistant to corrosion, and is usually used for fences. These are normally sectional moldings that provide additional support and enough strength to avoid bending.

Nylon inserts or screws are frequently used to adjust how the miter bar (or miter gauge bar) fits in the slot on the saw table. These will wear out eventually and need to be replaced. Fortunately, they are not expensive. 

Brass is sometimes used for handles and clamps. It’s very decorative but has no real influence on function.

Stops and Adjustments

To allow for setting of the cutting angle, the miter head rotates around a central point. As mentioned above, this is often clamped in the desired position using the push handle.

The head rotates through a total of 180 degrees, enabling the desired angle to be set with great freedom. However, certain angles—90 degrees, 45 degrees, and 22.5 degrees, for example—are used most often, so preset stops in the form of pins, holes, or grooves are often added. This makes setting the miter gauge much quicker.

More advanced miter gauges may provide stops in single-degree increments, though they normally still have a method of setting those common angles quickly.

Capacity

When shopping for a miter gauge, it’s important to consider the size of the saw table and the dimensions of the material that will be cut most often.

Budget miter gauges generally have a short fence of a fixed length. For those who have a compact miter and table saw and work with material of modest sizes, that’s not a problem. However, as material length increases, there’s a tendency for it to flex. If that happens, it can reduce cutting accuracy. Some of the best miter gauges have either longer or adjustable fences to combat this. The ability to set the fence to different lengths maximizes workpiece control. That said, it’s important to check their minimum length. Some models may actually be too long for smaller table saws.

Accuracy

Manufacturing quality has an impact on overall accuracy. On a low-cost table saw miter guide, the head might be punched out of a steel sheet, whereas on better models, this part is laser cut or machined from a solid block.

A basic, low-cost miter gauge will allow for the cutting of angles to within a degree or so. For those making rustic furniture or a gate for the yard, that could well be close enough. However, much greater accuracy is possible. Machined stops at single-degree increments are common and several can further refine this to 0.1-degree stops. Those who demand absolute precision may prefer a table saw gauge with a micro adjuster that can be set to 0.01 degrees.

While not a feature of budget models, the fence may also have a measuring scale for accurate alignment of the workpiece with the saw blade. Flip stops that attach to the fence and slide along preformed groves are sometimes provided. These help hold the workpiece in exactly the right place when cutting to length.

Ease of Use

One may assume a basic saw table miter gauge is the easiest to use. To some extent, that’s true. However, on a slightly more expensive miter gauge, some stops make for faster setting, which may speed up the overall work process.

The consistent accuracy of a high-quality miter gauge can make repetitive tasks easier and help reduce errors. While adding precision at this stage of a job might be seen as making a tool more difficult to use, it will often save time at later stages.

What’s important is how well suited a particular miter gauge is to the work that is being done. It could be argued that ease of use isn’t just about simplicity; it’s also about how easy it makes the whole job.

Tips on Using a Miter Gauge

When the new miter gauge arrives, buyers will likely be keen to use it as soon as possible. Before doing so, take a few minutes to check and make certain nothing is missing or was damaged in transit. The following quick tips will help maximize performance.

  • Whether it’s a first miter gauge for those just learning the basics or an upgrade with more advanced features, always read the instructions. It can save a lot of time and frustration later. Before starting on a job that matters, test the miter gauge on a few offcuts or extra pieces of wood.
  • There’s an old adage in woodworking: Measure twice and cut once. In this case, users should not only double-check their measurements but also check that the clamps are nice and tight. It can be frustrating if the gauge moves during a cut, plus it can be dangerous.
  • Inaccurate cuts may not be due to the miter gauge; it could be the saw blade is out of alignment or not square to the table. Always check these parts before starting—which is a habit woodworkers should get into whether using a miter gauge or not.

FAQs 

In this comprehensive guide to choosing the best miter gauge, we provided insight into how these tools work and how to pick the right model for your table saw. Nevertheless, it’s natural to still have questions. We tackle some of the most common ones here. 

Q. Can a table saw make miter cuts?

The blade can usually be tilted up to 45 degrees to cut angles on the edges of a board, but this kind of cut is called a bevel, not a miter. You’ll need to add a miter gauge to cut the proper angle for a miter with the saw blade in the upright position.

Q. Are table saw miter gauges universal?

The slots on most table saw beds are the same, so a universal miter gauge ought to fit. However, there can be rare exceptions. It’s worth a quick check of your saw’s specifications before you buy your woodworking gauge.

Q. Can a miter gauge be used to cut 45-degree tapers?

You could argue that the standard miter cut is by nature a 45-degree taper. It’s also possible to cut two-sided and four-sided tapers at 45 degrees and, with creative use of your miter gauge, at various other angles. However, these are all quite short. If you need long tapers, you may want to invest in a taper jig.

Q. What are the most common angle cuts with a miter gauge?

The most common angles that woodworkers cut with a miter gauge are 90-, 45-, 22.5-, and 30- degrees, angled either to the right or left.

Q. Why shouldn’t you use a miter gauge and a fence at the same time?

The miter gauge and the fence are both designed to be used alone. Use the miter gauge for cross-cuts and angles. Use the fence for rip cuts. Sliding a board into the sawblade with the miter gauge while the fence is in place risks binding the board against the fence.

Meet the Tester

Mark Wolfe is a writer, product tester, and serial DIYer who lives in an older home. When he isn’t writing, he spends his time upgrading, repairing, and replacing anything and everything in his home, yard, and garden. He tests and writes reviews about hand and power tools, lawn care and home repair products, and outdoor living goods.

Additional research provided by Bob Beacham

The post The Best Miter Gauges of 2025 for Precise Cuts, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-15T04:02:56-05:00
<![CDATA[For Clean, Precise Cutting, Our Favorite Biscuit Joiner Ticks All of the Boxes]]>Choose one of these recommendations for the best biscuit joiner for a quicker, easier way to create strong tabletops and hidden joinery in your woodworking.

The post For Clean, Precise Cutting, Our Favorite Biscuit Joiner Ticks All of the Boxes appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-biscuit-joiner/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=131792Tue, 14 Jan 2025 10:03:42 -0500ReviewsDIYPower ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWorkshopWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

As a woodworker or DIYer, there are certain essential tools that, once the DIYer discovers them, help unlock their real potential, and among those tools is the trusty biscuit joiner. This power tool helps to create strong, seamless joints devoid of unsightly nail holes.

Whether you plan on gluing up a new worktop for a shop bench or building a bookshelf from scratch, the right biscuit joiner can help. These handy tools use small circular saw blades to cut slices in two pieces of wood, allowing woodworkers to insert a biscuit (a small, football-shaped chunk of compressed wood) in the two slots to create a solid joint. The glue-covered biscuit then expands, locking the two boards together and creating an incredibly strong joint that glue alone can’t match. 

Drawing from our experience with a variety of tools, we selected seven top biscuit joiners, each designed and priced for DIY woodworkers, and we tested four of them. We found the Makita XJP03Z to be the best of the bunch, due largely to its convenient cordless design and ability to effortlessly slice into wood. Read on to learn the factors and features to consider when shopping for the best biscuit joiner and to find out why we consider the following models to be the best on the market.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Makita XJP03Z 18V Lithium-Ion Cordless Plate Joiner
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Porter-Cable 557 7-Amp Deluxe Plate Joiner Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Wen JN8504 8.5-Amp Plate and Biscuit Joiner
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST CORDLESS: DeWalt DCW682B 20V Max XR Cordless Biscuit Joiner
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST ALTERNATIVE JOINER: Festool 574432 Domino Joiner DF 500 Q-Set
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. ALSO CONSIDER: Makita PJ7000 Plate Joiner
    ↓ Jump to Review
Best Biscuit Joiner Options in a workshop
Photo: Tony Carrick for Bob Vila

Power SourceBiscuit SizeHandle type
Makita XJP03Z18V battery#0, #10, and #20Barrel
Porter-Cable 557Corded#0, #10, and #20Barrel
Wen JN8504 8.5-Amp Plate and Biscuit JoinerCorded#0, #10, and #20Barrel
DeWalt DCW682B 20V Max XR Cordless Biscuit Joiner20V battery#0, #10, and #20Barrel
Festool 574432 Domino Joiner DF 500 Q-SetCordedUses Dominoes with 5, 6, 8, and 10 millimeter diametersBarrel
Makita PJ7000 Plate JoinerCorded#0, #10, and #20Barrel

Our Top Picks

The following list includes some of the best biscuit joiners available for woodworking projects. Whether you’re a beginner, a pro woodworker, or someone with a skill set that lands in between, you’re likely to find a quality tool for your workshop here.


Best Overall

Makita XJP03Z 18V Lithium-Ion Cordless Plate Joiner

 The Best Biscuit Joiner Option: Makita XJP03Z 18V Lithium-Ion Cordless Plate Joiner
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Makes clean, precise cuts
  • Easy to make adjustments to the fence
  • Great build quality

What We Don’t Like

  • Lacks safety shut-off features

Specs

  • Power source 18V battery
  • Biscuit size #0, #10, and #20
  • Handle type Barrel

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Accuracy 4.5/5; Value 4.5/5

Makita’s XJP03Z offers impressive performance and build quality in a convenient cordless design. This biscuit joiner uses Makita’s 18V LXT lithium-ion battery system, which allows it to produce up to 320 cuts (or 160 joints) on a single charge. Its motor generates an impressive 12,000 RPM, which slices into boards with minimal effort. And since the tool produces very little vibration, we were able to produce precise and accurate cuts. There’s also a blade break that stops the blade quickly, which is a nice safety feature.   

The XJP03Z has six depth settings with positive stops for #0, #10, and #20 woodworking biscuits. A rack-and-pinion vertical fence system makes dialing in precise settings for various board widths easy. The fence has a miter range between 0 and 90 degrees, with a positive stop at 45 degrees. 

The Makita has a sturdy, durable feel with a molded rubber grip that’s easy to control while making cuts, and a housing and fence that’s built to take beating.

Blade changes were also a breeze with the XJP03Z thanks to the design of its shoe. Unlike other biscuit joiners that required us to remove multiple screws to take off the shoe, the XJP03Z biscuit joiner tool uses a single knob you can loosen with your fingers. 

The XJP03Z is available for purchase as a set with a battery or as a stand-alone tool for those who already own a battery for other Makita tools.  

What our tester says: “The XJP03Z sliced effortlessly into softwoods and hardwoods alike with very little vibration or hesitation, which made it easy for me to make accurate cuts.”—Tony Carrick, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Makita biscuit joiner (tool only) at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Runner-Up

Porter-Cable 557 7-Amp Deluxe Plate Joiner Kit

 The Best Biscuit Joiner Option: Porter-Cable 557 7-Amp Deluxe Plate Joiner Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Broad fence range of 0 to 135 degrees
  • Makes precise, clean cuts
  • Durable build quality

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavy overall weight
  • Pricey for a corded tool

Specs

  • Power source Corded
  • Biscuit size #0, #10, and #20
  • Handle type Barrel

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.3/5; Accuracy 4/5; Value 3.7/5

Cabinetmaking requires a lot of joinery, and dense hardwood plywood can be tough on a biscuit woodworking joiner. For those situations, consider the Porter-Cable plate joiner kit. It features a wide fence angle range, multi-position depth stop, and a 7-amp motor that runs at 10,000 RPM to bore through dense plywood over and over again.

Power Cable’s biscuit joiner sets itself apart with its versatility. Unlike other biscuit joiners that have fences that are limited to a range of 90 degrees, the Porter-Cable’s fence tilts from 0 to 135 degrees, allowing users to create catty-corner cabinets and face frames without setting up complicated jigs or strange angles. It also has seven depth stops, handling #0, #10, and #20 biscuit sizes. 

The Porter-Cable performed well in testing, making clean cuts through our test boards. That said, it did produce more vibration than the DeWalt and Makita biscuit joiners we tested. There were also some notable differences in quality. The Porter-Cable biscuit joiner uses a screw adjuster for the fence as opposed to a more precise rack-and-pinion adjuster, and it lacks the ergonomic handle and rubberized grip found on the DeWalt and Makita biscuit joiners we tested. Weighing over 10 pounds, the Porter-Cable biscuit joiner is also one of the heftier biscuit joiners we tested, which made it somewhat cumbersome when setting up cuts. 

The Porter-Cable biscuit joiner is very similar in price to the Makita and DeWalt, even though it’s a corded tool. 

Get the Porter-Cable biscuit joiner at Amazon or Rockler.

Best Bang For The Buck

Wen JN8504 8.5-Amp Plate and Biscuit Joiner

 The Best Biscuit Joiner Option: Wen JN8504 8.5-Amp Plate and Biscuit Joiner
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Far more affordable than most biscuit joiners
  • Comes with a handy carrying case
  • Wide range of fence adjustments

What We Don’t Like

  • Less cutting power and precision
  • Cheaper build quality

Specs

  • Power source Corded
  • Biscuit size #0, #10, and #20
  • Handle type Barrel

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 3.8/5; Accuracy 3.5/5; Value 4/5

DIYers looking to spend as little as possible on a new biscuit joiner might want to consider the Wen JN8504. It costs a fraction of other biscuit joiners cost, yet it still boasts a powerful 8.5-amp motor with a cutting speed of up to 10,000 RPM. It comes with several biscuits, a wrench for blade changes, and a plastic carrying case.

This model features an adjustable fence as well as an angle gauge that adjusts between 0 and 90 degrees (though there aren’t any positive stops). It has an inline handle and dust extraction as well as adjustable depths that accommodate #0, #10, and #20 biscuits. 

Wen’s biscuit joiner won’t rival the top models on this list. With its slower blade speed, it doesn’t produce the same clean and precise cuts as the models we tested that cost four times its price. It’s also the heaviest biscuit joiner we tested, weighing over 11 pounds. And although its fence system is easy to adjust, it lacks the ability to dial in more precise measurements. That said, it was good enough to execute edge-to-edge, T-joint, face-frame, and mitered-edge joinery in various thicknesses of wood. 

The Wen does come with a carrying case that’s handy for storing it when not in use. While this biscuit joiner won’t make the grade for more serious woodworkers, it’s a great option for those who may only need one every now and then. 

Get the Wen biscuit joiner at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Best Cordless

DeWalt DCW682B 20V Max XR Cordless Biscuit Joiner

 The Best Biscuit Joiners Option: DeWalt DCW682B 20V Max XR Cordless Biscuit Joiner
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Lightweight cordless design
  • Excellent build quality
  • Powerful with little vibration when running

What We Don’t Like

  • Difficult to change the blade

Specs

  • Power source 20V battery
  • Biscuit size #0, #10, and #20
  • Handle type Barrel


Our Ratings:
Ease of Use 4.5/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 4.7/5

DeWalt’s MAX XR business joiner lives up to the quality and performance we expect from the yellow and black brand. This member of DeWalt’s pro-focused XR line boasts a brushless motor that’s powered by a 20-volt lithium-ion battery. 

The DCW682 is well designed. A pressure trigger that runs the entire length of the handle is easy to access while also adding an extra layer of safety. A single knob loosens the miter fence, and the fence slides easily and comes equipped with an easy-to-see arrow for setting precise angles, all of which makes setting up the proper angle for mitered joints a quick and easy process. Adding to this precision is a rack-and-pinion fence that made it easy to dial in precise settings for various board thicknesses. 

The DeWalt biscuit joiner is powerful, cutting easily into wood boards with minimal vibration. It’s also one of the lightest biscuit joiners we tested, making it one of the most comfortable to use among the tools we tested. The DCW682 also comes equipped with a larger-than-average dust bag, which was effective at capturing the majority of sawdust produced by each cut we made. 

Our only gripe is with blade changes. In order to change the blade, you need to remove the four Torx head screws that secure the shoe over the blade, which is a more time-consuming process than other units we tested that offer tool-free access to the blade. 

What our tester says: “I love how easy it is to make adjustments to the fence and cutting depth with the DCW682. It’s one of the easiest biscuit joiners I’ve used.”—Tony Carrick, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the DeWalt biscuit joiner at Amazon or Lowe’s.

More Great Options

Along with the four biscuit joiners we tested, we also recommend the following models, which include a higher-end model for serious woodworkers and another more affordable corded option.

Best Alternative Joiner

Festool 574432 Domino Joiner DF 500 Q-Set

 The Best Biscuit Joiner Option: Festool 574432 Domino Joiner DF 500 Q-Set
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Domino mortises provide more bonding surface area than biscuits
  • Several depth adjustments
  • Has multiple angle stops

What We Don’t Like

  • Festool Dominoes aren’t available everywhere

Specs

  • Power source Corded
  • Biscuit size Uses Dominoes with 5, 6, 8, and 10 millimeter diameters
  • Handle type Barrel

The Festool 574432 Domino joiner might not exactly be a biscuit joiner, but it’s one of the best tools for similar joinery in furniture and woodworking. The Domino uses Festool-specific hardwood tenons, which are candy-bar-shaped inserts that take the place of traditional biscuits. Instead of a circular blade, it has a drill bit-like spiral cutter to bore the mortises. This allows users to adjust the depth to prevent it from poking through a workpiece while still offering plenty of surface area for glue. 

Despite the unconventional joinery method, the Domino does have the flexibility of other biscuit joiners, with a few extras. Users can adjust the fence angle between 0 and 90 degrees, with stops at 22.5, 45, 67.5, and 90 degrees—two more stops than many of its competitors. It has multiple height adjustments and depth settings for fast, easy, and accurate adjustments. Festool is also known for employing effective dust extraction. 

This kit comes with a carrying case and several guides and fences. Shoppers should know, however, that the floating tenons (Festool calls them Dominoes) may not be as readily available as biscuits. 

Get the Festool biscuit joiner at Amazon.

Also Consider

Makita PJ7000 Plate Joiner

 The Best Biscuit Joiner Option: Makita PJ7000 Plate Joiner
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Powerful enough to generate 11,000 RPM
  • Weighs just 5.5 pounds
  • Barrel-shaped handle allows for plenty of accuracy
  • 6 depth adjustments

What We Don’t Like

  • 5.6-amp motor is on the less powerful side

Specs

  • Power source Corded
  • Biscuit size #0, #10, and #20
  • Handle type Barrel

If you’re looking for an all-around biscuit-joiner tool that really holds its own, check out the Makita plate joiner. This barrel-handled biscuit joiner has a 5.6-amp motor, and while that is on the lower end compared to some competitors, it produces speeds up to 11,000 RPM for dense hardwoods. It weighs just 5.5 pounds, has a maximum cutting depth of ¾ inch, and includes a carrying case as well as a 4-inch carbide-tipped blade.

The PJ7000 offers lots of adjustability. The fence has a rack-and-pinion vertical adjustment that allows users to dial the joiner into the perfect height. The fence also adjusts between 0 and 90 degrees, with positive stops at 0, 45, and 90. The PJ7000 has six different depth adjustments, with one-touch stops for standard biscuit sizes of #0, #10, and #20.

Get the Makita PJ7000 biscuit joiner at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

a person working with one of the Best Biscuit Joiner Options
Photo: Kathy Harms for Bob Vila

How We Chose and Tested the Best Biscuit Joiners

The best biscuit joiners tend to have a high power output, adjustable settings, and added attachments and accessories. They should also be easy to use. We considered all this while making our selections.

Our top picks come with powerful motors of 5.6 to 8.5 amps for speeds between 10,000 and 12,000 revolutions per minute (RPM). This power output is aided by adjustable angles and depths for quick and clean cutting. Many of these picks have 0- to 90-degree angles, with a select few topping out at 135 degrees. Plus, some of these top picks come with multiple preset depths. 

We put four of the biscuit joiners through a series of tests, using them to cut biscuit holes into hardwoods and softwoods of two different thicknesses. As part of our testing, we made a series of cuts at different angles to test each model’s miter fence and depth adjusters. We noted how easy it was to set up cuts and make adjustments to the biscuit joiner, and how precisely each one executed cuts. For the products we didn’t test, we based our selections on specifications and user reviews. 

Testing Stats
Products tested 4
Time spent testing 6 hours
Tests performed4
Price range$60 to $300

What to Consider When Choosing a Biscuit Joiner 

Once a DIYer gets their hands on a good biscuit joiner, they might wonder how they ever finished woodworking projects without one. They’ll no doubt come to rely on it a lot, so choosing a quality model is key. Here’s what to keep in mind when shopping for the best biscuit joiner.

Size and Weight

Usually, the larger and heavier the wood biscuit cutter, the better the quality of its parts, and a bruiser of a biscuit joiner will likely have a heavy-duty motor and high-quality slides (which guide the blade while it cuts to provide consistent results). However, a heavy biscuit joiner or a super high-end tool isn’t necessary or even ideal for everyone. There are plenty of mid-range options weighing around 5 or 6 pounds—about half the weight of a high-end model—that will do the trick for many users. 

Determining whether a burly biscuit joiner is necessary will come down to the types of projects you plan on doing and how often you’ll use the joiner. For the overwhelming majority of DIYers, a mid-range biscuit joiner will handle materials like oak and maple without issue. Those working in a cabinet shop and putting a joiner through its paces daily should consider the heavier-duty options.

Corded vs. Cordless

As with all power tools, the corded-versus-cordless debate exists in the biscuit-joinery world. Deciding on a style often just comes down to personal preference.

Almost all biscuit joiners are corded. Since most woodworking projects take place in a workshop, there’s usually power readily available. Also, it’s not typical to be climbing a ladder or working under a cabinet with a biscuit joiner, so portability isn’t really a consideration.

Biscuit joinery is quite taxing on a battery, so most manufacturers haven’t dived into cordless joinery. However, there are a few cordless biscuit joiners available. These can be quite handy during projects like kitchen remodels, where the user might need to join two sections of wooden countertops and would prefer not to set up an extension cord.  

Power and Speed

Biscuit joiners need to be stout power tools with tough parts and plenty of power and speed. While it might not take much power to bore a hole in pine or cedar, plunge-cutting a section of hickory or walnut can be a challenge.

The most important power-related factor to consider when shopping is a biscuit joiner’s amperage rating. Amperage refers to the current load a motor can handle before its parts start to fail. This has much to do with the quality of individual components inside the tool and how well it can cool itself while running. Ideally, look for a model with 5 to 7 amps.

When it comes to actually getting the work done, speed matters as well. The faster the motor, the faster it can spin the blade and cut a biscuit slot. Look for models with RPM ratings between 8,000 and 10,000 for general use.

Biscuit Size

Biscuit joiners use biscuits to join workpieces together. When the user inserts a glue-covered biscuit into a slot, it locks in to join two workpieces as one. Biscuits come in small, medium, and large sizes (#0, #10, and #20, respectively). To accommodate different-size biscuits, most joiners have settings that adjust for deeper or shallower cuts, some cutting as deep as ¾ inch; other models may require a blade change.

While biscuit size might not be a factor when shopping for a biscuit joiner, it can be important while working. For example, bookshelves and countertops might require a lot of gluing surface—and a bigger biscuit—while only a smaller biscuit might fit in a cabinet face frame. 

Blades

Although biscuit joiners use circular-shaped saw blades, they’re quite a bit different than the blades found in a miter, table, or circular saw. They’re thicker, have fewer teeth, and are much smaller in diameter.

Burrowing a spinning blade into dense hardwoods over and over again builds up quite a bit of heat and pressure, so blade material and longevity matter. Most biscuit joiner manufacturers use carbide-tipped blades, as they stay sharper longer than a lower-end steel blade, particularly for denser materials like walnut and hickory. They also hold up better to the speeds of high-end biscuit joiners. 

Cutting Angle and Depth

One feature most woodworkers appreciate about biscuit joiners is the tools’ versatility. The adjustable cutting angles provide the ability to cut slots in a wide range of situations. While edge joining two boards is the most obvious use for biscuit joiners, they can also bore biscuit slots for mitered corners and angled joinery or slots in the field of a workpiece for shelves or other uses. This is thanks to their adjustable fences, which users can set for a particular angle to bore an accurate slot. 

Adjustable cutting depth is also an important feature. Swapping between preset depths allows users to use different biscuit sizes quickly without worrying if the joint will be tight or hold enough glue.

Handle Type

When choosing the best biscuit joiner for a workshop, consider handle preference. There are two main styles: barrel handles and D-shaped handles.

Barrel-style handles can facilitate precise boring, so they’re better for control. With these models, the hand is in line with the slot being cut, making it easier to stay steady and bore an accurate slot. There are also many models with top-mounted handles to steady the tool even more. 

D-shaped handles are less accurate but more comfortable. The hand’s upright orientation tends to feel more natural, so it’s easier to push. However, the hand will be higher than the blade, so it’s possible to wobble and make a sloppy cut.

Additional Features

Biscuit joiners may include some additional features that can make storage simpler and cleanup easier. 

A sturdy box will keep a biscuit joiner secure when it’s not in use. Many manufacturers package their tools in hard plastic containers that can store a joiner, a few biscuits, and other small items. These cases also make it a cinch to stack tools on a shelf or under a workbench.

As the user bores slots with a biscuit joiner, they can make a mess with sawdust and wood chips. The best biscuit joiners come with bags that attach to the exhaust port, catching most of these particles before they hit the ground or air. 

Safety Tips for Using a Biscuit Joiner 

a person working with one of theThe Best Biscuits Joiners Options
Photo: Kathy Harms for Bob Vila

In general, biscuit joiners are safe power tools—but that could inspire some false confidence. As users become more comfortable using theirs, they might feel they can hold the workpiece with one hand while operating the tool with the other. It’s best to avoid this temptation, as the front lip of the board could lift, potentially causing the blade to strike a hand. Instead, clamp the workpieces to a workbench for a stable base.

Before cutting slots for biscuits, ensure that there are no nails, knots, or other obstructions where the joiner will be cutting. In most cases, the blade will simply cut through these obstructions, dulling the blade a bit. However, there is potential for the biscuit joiner to send a chunk of the obstruction flying with enough speed to cause injury.

Biscuit joiners can produce a lot of dust. While a dust-collection system helps reduce the amount of sawdust, it can’t get it all. Be sure to wear a mask to avoid breathing in airborne dust and safety glasses to keep your eyes protected. This safety gear is especially important when working with plywood and medium-density fiberboard (MDF). The glues and chemicals used in their manufacturing can be particularly irritating to the lungs and eyes.

  • Clamp the workpiece to a bench to avoid potentially striking a hand with the biscuit joiner.
  • Ensure the workpiece is free of obstructions like nails and knots before cutting biscuit slots.
  • Wear safety glasses and a mask for protection from sawdust.

FAQs 

While you may be excited about getting started with a new biscuit joiner, if you still want more info, refer to the answers to these frequently asked questions regarding biscuit joiners and how they work. If you don’t see the required answer here, reach out to the manufacturer’s customer service department and speak with a representative. 

Q. How many biscuits should I use to join wood?

A good rule of thumb is to use a biscuit every 6 to 12 inches. For weight-bearing projects like shelves and countertops, 6 inches is best to provide support.

Q. What materials can a biscuit joiner work with?

You can use biscuits with a range of wood-based products: Hardwoods, softwoods, plywood, MDF, and even laminated particleboard can work with a biscuit joiner.

Q. Are biscuit joiners worth it?

For many woodworkers, yes. Biscuit joiners allow the user to join pieces of wood without the use of nails or screws that create unsightly holes, which is crucial when building furniture and other finish pieces of carpentry. And since it isn’t difficult to learn how to use a biscuit joiner, these tools are useful for even novice woodworkers.

Q. What are the disadvantages of biscuit joiners?

Biscuit joiners require some level of precision for effective use. While biscuit joints are strong, they aren’t as strong as other types of woodworking joinery, such as half-lap and mortar and tenon joints. 

Q. How far from the edge should biscuit joints be?

A biscuit joint should be at least 2 inches from the edge or corner of a workpiece. You’ll also want to space each biscuit about 2 to 3 inches apart.

Q. How do you maintain a biscuit joiner?

To maintain your biscuit joiner, regularly clear out any sawdust that has collected in and around the blade. Also, regularly check the blade for damage or build-up from pitch, especially if using the joiner with hardwoods, which can be harder on the blade. 

Meet the Tester

Tony Carrick is a freelance writer specializing in home improvement, landscaping, technology, home security, and design. His articles have been featured on such sites as Popular Mechanics, Futurism, SFGate, Pro Tools Review, and more. Tony has conducted rigorous product testing on everything from power tools to home security systems to backyard grills. With each review, his goal is to help readers determine whether a product meets their needs and if it is or isn’t worth its price tag.

Additional research provided by Tom Scalisi.

The post For Clean, Precise Cutting, Our Favorite Biscuit Joiner Ticks All of the Boxes appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-14T10:03:42-05:00
<![CDATA[We Cleared More Than 4 Feet Of Snow Testing the Best Electric Snow Shovels and Found 9 Top Options]]>The best electric snow shovel can help you quickly clear snow with less effort. Check out our favorites from our latest round of testing.

The post We Cleared More Than 4 Feet Of Snow Testing the Best Electric Snow Shovels and Found 9 Top Options appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-electric-snow-shovel/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=121573Mon, 13 Jan 2025 13:16:27 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Electric snow shovels look similar to manual snow shovels yet have one key difference: They are designed with electric augers that can throw snow 20 feet or more, which means they help remove winter weather from walkways, decks, and driveways faster and with less effort. For light dustings, the traditional snow shovel design is great, but when more than a few inches have fallen, lifting and tossing heavy snow can be hard on the back and body.

To help ease the effort you need to complete cold-weather chores this season, we tested nine electric snow shovels and reached out to a snow-removal expert for their insights. Based on their advice and our test results, we chose the Greenworks 80V 12″ Cordless Battery Snow Shovel as the best option for most buyers. This tool is robust enough to throw snow up to 20 feet and offers an impressive 45-minute runtime for extended snow-removal sessions. Read on to learn about the key features of the best electric snow shovels and what makes the seven models that made our list stand out from the crowd.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Greenworks 80V 12″ Cordless Battery Snow Shovel
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Snow Joe 24V-SS13 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Bundle
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST LIGHTWEIGHT: Earthwise Power Tools 12″ 20V 4Ah Snow Thrower
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST CORDED: Earthwise Power Tools 16″ 12-Amp Corded Snow Thrower
    Jump to Review
  5. QUIETEST OPERATION: Snow Joe 24V-SS11 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Kit
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST WITH WHEELS: Earthwise Power Tools 16″ 40V 4Ah Lithium Snow Thrower
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Ego Power+ Multi-Head Snow Shovel Kit With 4Ah Battery
    Jump to Review 
The Best Electric Snow Shovel Option
Photo: Zach Lazzari for Bob Vila

Before You Buy an Electric Snow Shovel

Think of an electric snow shovel as a cross between a manual snow shovel and a larger, more powerful snow blower. The handle of an electric snow shovel resembles the handle of a traditional snow shovel, but that’s where the similarities end. Instead of a scoop blade, an electric snow shovel features a large turning blade that scoops up snow and tosses it off the path as it is pushed.

An electric snow shovel takes less physical effort to operate than a traditional shovel, but it still requires some pushing. Unlike snow blowers, electric snow shovels are typically not self-propelled. The auger does assist while it churns snow, but users will still need to push it along. And unlike blowers, electric snow shovels don’t have chutes to eject snow at different angles and trajectories; they simply eject the snow forward.

Electric snow shovels are much more affordable than snow blowers. They’re typically offered at between $60 and $190, while a heavy-duty snow blower could set buyers back $1,500 or more. Electric snow shovels can help many people clear moderate snow loads from small spaces without breaking the bank.

Electric Snow Shovels Comparison Chart

Product NameMaximum DepthClearing WidthPower
Greenworks 80V 12″ Cordless Battery Snow Shovel6 inches12 inches80V (volt) battery
Snow Joe 24V-SS13 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Bundle6 inches13 inches24V battery
Earthwise Power Tools 12″ 20V 4Ah Snow Thrower3.5 inches12 inches20V motor, 5Ah (amp hour) battery
Earthwise Power Tools 16″ 12-Amp Corded Snow Thrower8 inches16 inchesCorded with 12-amp motor
Snow Joe 24V-SS11 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Kit 7 inches11 inches24V battery
Earthwise Power Tools 16″ 40V 4Ah Lithium Snow Thrower8 inches16 inches4Ah battery
Ego Power+ Multi-Head Snow Shovel Kit With 4Ah Battery 6 inches12 inches56V battery

Our Top Picks

The following electric snow shovels are ranked by category to help shoppers find the best option for their purposes. Consider the best use of each model when choosing one for your needs.

Our Top Picks

The following electric snow shovels are ranked by category to help shoppers find the best option for their purposes. Consider the best use of each model when choosing one for your needs.

Best Overall

Greenworks 80V 12" Cordless Battery Snow Shovel

 Best Electric Snow Shovel Option: Greenworks PRO 80V 12-Inch Cordless Snow Shovel
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Powerful battery and quick recharge time
  • 45-minute runtime for heavy snowfalls or large areas
  • Throws snow 20 feet from the clearing path

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavier than many other models

Specs 

  • Maximum depth: 6 inches
  • Clearing width: 12 inches
  • Power: 80V battery

When it comes to cordless yard tools, battery life and power are key. This snow shovel from Greenworks excels at both thanks to a powerful 80-volt (V) battery that gives it 45 minutes of runtime. The battery recharges in just 30 minutes thanks to its nifty rapid charger.

The cordless snow shovel can discharge snow 20 feet away, making it suitable for walks, decks, and smaller driveways. During testing, this model performed quite well, but the battery and power were the real difference makers. The Greenworks 80V just kept on going, and the auger speed felt more powerful than competing models. 

At 19.2 pounds with the battery installed, this shovel does feel slightly heavier than some models. Still, it also feels incredibly sturdy and might be a bit more durable in the long run. After we found the right balance point with the blade grounded and the shaft tilted to roughly 45 degrees, it churned through icy snow very well and with little effort. The quick-charge battery is also a major bonus when users need to add more power without a long wait time.

What our tester says: “Overall, this is a fantastic, well-built electric snow shovel. There are a couple of cheaper models that perform nearly as well, but anyone who wants top-notch power and battery life might want to pay just a little more for the Greenworks 80V.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Greenworks cordless electric snow shovel at Amazon, Walmart, or Best Buy.

Best Bang for the Buck

Snow Joe 24V-SS13 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Bundle

 The Best Electric Snow Shovels Option Snow Joe 24V-SS13 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Bundle
Photo: Walmart

What We Like

  • Lightweight and easy to handle
  • Tosses snow up to 20 feet away
  • Dual handle reduces physical strain and fatigue

What We Don’t Like

  • Takes about 5 hours to recharge
  • Not ideal for ice and compact snow

Specs 

  • Maximum depth: 6 inches
  • Clearing width: 13 inches
  • Power: 24V battery

Shoppers don’t have to spend a lot of money to own a reliable electric shovel. The Snow Joe SS13 cordless shovel has a 24V battery, can clear a 13-inch-wide path in up to 6 inches of snow, and throws snow up to 20 feet away. The kit includes a battery, charger, snow scraper blade, and snow shovel cover.

Considering the comparatively low price tag, this unit is hard to beat—in fact, we think it’s likely the best value out there. It feels light and balances well in the hand, and its dual-handle design reduces strain during use. Its 13-inch clearing path is wider than most, and the shovel’s overall performance and extended battery life of up to 70 minutes are impressive. 

The only thing we didn’t love about this electric snow shovel was its initial setup, as it’s a little awkward connecting the shafts and inserting the bolts. We don’t consider this a deal breaker, but be aware that it will likely take a few minutes to get everything snug.

Get the Snow Joe 24V-SS13 electric snow shovel at Walmart, Target, Northern Tool + Equipment, or Best Buy.

Best Lightweight

Earthwise Power Tools 12" 20V 4Ah Snow Thrower

 The Best Electric Snow Shovel Option Earthwise Power Tools 12 20V 4Ah Snow Thrower
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Lightweight and easy to maneuver
  • Ergonomic handle is comfortable to use 
  • Runs long enough to clear paths and decks

What We Don’t Like

  • Low clearing depth not suitable for deep snow
  • Not ideal for compact or icy snow

Specs 

  • Maximum depth: 3.5 inches 
  • Clearing width: 12 inches
  • Power: 20V motor, 4 amp hour (Ah) battery

Though shoveling snow, even with an electric snow shovel, isn’t exactly easy, choosing a lightweight tool can help. At just 11.5 pounds, this cordless snow shovel from Earthwise Power Tools is the lightest model on our list. Though small, it’s still powerful enough to throw 300 pounds of snow per minute.

We have to admit we were surprised at how well this lighter model held up against the competition. It did great with powdery snow, throwing it about 15 feet. While that’s not the 25 feel the company claims, we were still impressed—so long as the snow was lightweight. When we tried testing it with compact and icy snow, it struggled. 

The other claim we don’t quite agree with the manufacturer on is runtime. Earthwise estimates about 60 minutes of battery life, but in our tests, 20 to 30 minutes of consistent use was more accurate. Still, the battery performed well and generally delivered ample power. If you’re looking for something easy to lift, handle, and maneuver for light-duty tasks and smaller spaces, we think this model will be just what you need.

Get the Earthwise Power Tools 12-inch electric snow shovel at Amazon, Walmart, Overstock, or American Lawn Mower Company.

Best Corded

Earthwise Power Tools 16" 12-Amp Corded Snow Thrower

 The Best Electric Snow Shovel Option: Earthwise Power Tools 16-Inch Corded Snow Thrower
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Adjustable handle and rear wheels increase maneuverability
  • Clears a sizeable 16-inch-wide by 8-inch-deep path 
  • Ejects snow in the 20- to 30-foot range

What We Don’t Like

  • Wet snow can trip the thermal shutoff

Specs 

  • Maximum depth: 8 inches 
  • Clearing width: 16 inches
  • Power: Corded with 12-amp motor

Corded electric snow shovels can be nice since they mean you don’t have to deal with batteries, making them lighter and infinitely operable so long as they’re plugged into power. This corded Earthwise Power Tools shovel features the same design as the company’s comparable electric model, but it also has wheels, making it great for folks who don’t want to lift their shovel. 

This electric snow shovel can clear driveways, walkways, and decks of up to 8 inches of snow. It’s a nice crossover option for regions where snow is infrequent and justifying having a larger snow blower is difficult. 

Though we think this is an excellent corded snow shovel, we would like to see the hardware quality for the wheel plate attachment improved. It would also be nice if this plate came preattached to save on assembly time. Otherwise, it performs great and can fit the needs of many homeowners and renters who want the power of a snow shovel with wheels without the weight and cost of a full snow blower.

Get the Earthwise Power Tools 16-inch corded electric snow shovel at Amazon, Walmart, or American Lawn Mower Company

Quietest Operation

Snow Joe 24V-SS11 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Kit

 The Best Electric Snow Shovels Option Snow Joe 24V-SS11 Ionmax Cordless Snow Shovel Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Relatively quiet operation compared to others
  • Narrower clearing width is ideal for small spaces
  • Lightweight and easy to use

What We Don’t Like

  • Takes longer to clear large areas than wider models
  • Battery life is somewhat short

Specs 

  • Maximum depth: 7 inches
  • Clearing width: 11 inches
  • Power: 24V battery

To be fair, most electric snow shovels are reasonably quiet, but this cordless snow shovel from Snow Joe makes snow removal especially easy on the ears. That may be in part because it’s smaller in design than most others, but its size also makes it a good fit for clearing walkways and patio areas. If you tend to get heavy snow or precipitation that turns to ice, the auger on this machine might not be powerful enough to crush and churn through it. But for those who keep up with snow removal and only have a few inches of powder to clear, it works very well. If you do need to work through a larger pile, you’ll simply need to move through it 7 inches at a time, making several passes until you clear all the way to the ground.

In our tests, this shovel performed on par with similar-sized models, though its battery only lasted around 20 minutes before requiring a recharge. For larger spaces, it might be smart to buy a second battery to extend the runtime. Regardless, you can use this model without the neighbors hearing you, making it great for early mornings or late nights. 

Get the Snow Joe 24V-SS11 electric snow shovel at Amazon or Walmart

Best with Wheels

Earthwise Power Tools 16" 40V 4Ah Lithium Snow Thrower

 The Best Electric Snow Shovel Option: Earthwise Power Tools 16-Inch Lithium Snow Thrower
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Easy-to-use cordless snow shovel with battery power 
  • Wheels reduce effort to operate this large model
  • Excellent auger clears up to 8-inch depths

What We Don’t Like

  • Assembly is more involved than most brands
  • Hardware connecting wheels could be sturdier

Specs 

  • Maximum depth: 8 inches
  • Clearing width: 16 inches
  • Power: 4Ah battery

Even though electric snow shovels make shoveling snow much easier, pushing and lifting them still requires effort. The Earthwise 40V cordless model reduces the effort necessary by adding wheels to a generously sized 16-inch-wide head. Without needing to lift it, users can simply push the shovel forward as the auger spins, propelling it forward. If it had a chute, this would be a light-duty snow blower, but instead, this one throws the snow directly forward. Though the company claims this shovel throws snow up to 32 feet forward, we found it was closer to 20 feet, well within the range of other comparable models. 

At 19.4 pounds, it’s slightly heavier than most models, but the wheels help offset the weight. The only caveat to having wheels is that they’re required to touch the ground to function. When snow is deeper than 8 inches, users will need to lift the shovel and work through the snow in layers. The wheels can still offer support if the snow is somewhat compact, but the process becomes more labor-intensive.

Overall, the design works really well and the auger is plenty powerful. Our only real issues with this model were the involved assembly process and the low-quality hardware that connects the wheel bracket to the auger head. Everything held up fine during testing, but we worry about the long-term durability of the screws.

What our tester says: “We appreciate how much the wheels helped push through several accumulated inches of heavy snow. They made it very easy to get the job done with minimal lifting.” —Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Earthwise Power Tools lithium electric snow shovel at Amazon, Walmart, Northern Tool + Equipment, or American Lawn Mower Company.

Best Heavy-Duty

Ego Power+ Multi-Head Snow Shovel Kit With 4Ah Battery

 The Best Electric Snow Shovel Option: Ego Power+ Multi-Head Snow Shovel Kit
Photo: Lowe’s

What We Like

  • Throws snow an impressive 25 feet away
  • Can clear 6 inches of snow on a 4-car driveway
  • Works with multiple attachments to tackle a variety of jobs 
  • Adjustable front handle makes it easy to push 

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavier than most others so harder to lift and push

Specs 

  • Maximum depth: 6 inches
  • Clearing width: 12 inches 
  • Power: 56V battery 

The Ego Power+ battery-powered shovel easily takes the heavy-duty prize, and we’d say it’s also the most versatile. In terms of versatility, you can swap out the lower shaft with the auger for any compatible Ego Power+ tool. This means that rather than buying multiple tools, you can use the same battery with an array of interchangeable heads, including a weed trimmer, brush cutter, edger, pole saw, and more. 

As for the electric snow shovel head, it’s powered by a 4Ah ARC lithium battery. Though the Ego Power+ batteries seem to take a little longer to charge, they are also more heavy-duty and powerful than other batteries in the same category. During testing, this battery ran for over 30 minutes without issue. The head and auger are especially powerful, and we had no problems pushing through 6 inches of snow depth. If shoveling in icy conditions, the two speeds and heavy-duty auger make this a great choice. It also throws snow farther than other models, making it perfect for bigger pathways and driveways.

At 17.3 pounds (without the battery), this model is a little heavier than others, but it also feels durable and well constructed. It’s also easier to assemble than the others, as it doesn’t require bolting shaft segments through a wire. Instead, this unit attaches to a spindle in mere seconds.

What our tester says: “This electric snow shovel had the most advanced design of all the models we tested. It’s the perfect choice for property owners who need more than just a simple shovel. Grab a few of the other head attachments, and you’ll be able to manage lawns, brush, trees, and snow throughout the year with a single battery and handle.”—Zach Lazzari, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Ego Power+ electric snow shovel at Lowe’s or Ace Hardware

Jump to Our Top Picks

The Best Electric Snow Shovel Options
Photo: Zach Lazzari for Bob Vila

How We Tested the Best Electric Snow Shovels

While researching electric snow shovels, we scrutinized features and pricing to determine which models stood out. We then tested nine options throughout several Montana snow storms and loaned them to a property management company for additional feedback. We used them on various surfaces ranging from paved sidewalks and driveways to compact gravel. We found that electric snow shovels aren’t suitable for unpaved areas, such as gravel driveways, but on paved surfaces, they work well. 

We used each electric shovel in various conditions: a light dusting, a storm that dropped roughly 6 to 8 inches of snow, and an even larger storm with 1 foot of snow. We analyzed the weight, handling, build quality, throwing distance, rechargeable battery life, and overall power. Based on our tests, we rated them, noted their pros and cons, and assigned the models we like awards that match their best features and use cases. 

What to Consider When Choosing an Electric Snow Shovel

Since electric snow shovels are capable of clearing snow far more easily than a conventional plastic snow shovel or metal snow shovel, they can almost be considered a clever hack for shoveling snow. When choosing the model that’s right for you, remember to consider the following key factors.

Corded vs. Cordless

Electric snow shovels come in corded and cordless designs. Each type has its own benefits and drawbacks:

  • Corded snow shovels offer immediate snow-clearing power: Just plug the cord into an outlet and let it rip. A corded electric model might make more sense for those who don’t want to wait for a battery to charge (which can take a few hours) before they can shovel snow. Of course, since they always need to be plugged into a power source, corded snow shovels limit the coverage area to the length of the extension cord (usually 50 to 100 feet). 
  • Cordless snow shovels operate on rechargeable lithium-ion batteries for their power supply. They tend to run for approximately 20 to 50 minutes on a single charge. Like cordless snow blowers, a battery-operated snow shovel will have a clear advantage over a corded model if clearing snow in locations far from an outlet. Plus, users don’t have to drag a cord behind them. Still, if there’s a lot of snow to clear, users might need to stop and recharge the battery before they finish the job.

Joe Palumbo, president of Ice Dam Guys, LLC, prefers cordless electric snow shovels for his team. “We’ve found cordless, battery-powered snow shovels to be more effective than corded electric ones. While most outdoor receptacles have GFCIs, we prefer avoiding plugged-in tools near steam and water for added safety.” He also points out that “They’re a great choice if you already use a battery system for your other power tools, like Milwaukee M18, DeWalt, or Skil,” as they allow you to swap in compatible batteries you already own to increase runtime. 

Clearing Area

How much snow an electric shovel can clear depends on the height and width of the intake chute. The height of the intake chute determines the maximum depth of snow the device can remove (about 4 to 8 inches). We recommend selecting an electric snow shovel with an intake chute at least as deep as the typical snowfall in your area. 

Some manufacturers claim their electric snow shovels can go over deep snow with more than one pass. But if the snow is soft, these devices might sink into the snow since they’re designed to sit on a paved surface. This will just push snow over the top of the tool rather than clearing it out of the path, requiring you to use a standard shovel or ice melt.

The chute’s width determines how wide a path an electric shovel can clear in a single pass, with most chutes ranging from about 10 to 16 inches wide. A wider chute means the shovel will require fewer passes to clear an area. Some chutes have LED lights mounted on them to illuminate the work area and make snow shoveling easier at night. 

Battery Life

Battery life depends on various factors, including chute size. The more snow the tool handles, the more power it requires, and the quicker the battery will drain. A battery also loses power with age, meaning it won’t hold as much charge after a few years as it did when it was new.

Generally speaking, a lithium-ion battery will run between 20 and 50 minutes on a single charge. Snow shovels with 40V batteries run about twice as long as those with 24V batteries. Investing in a second rechargeable supply can double the runtime, as users can quickly switch out the first battery if it runs out before the job is done. 

Ease of Use

Whether they’re corded or cordless, the best electric snow shovels are easy to operate: Just turn them on and push them along a paved surface to remove fresh snow. The following features also affect the shovel’s usability: 

  • Blades: Electric snow shovels work similarly to more powerful snow blowers. Their horizontal augers feature one or two blades. The auger rotates at a high speed, and the blades scoop up the snow and blow it out of an exhaust chute. Both single- and double-blade shovels will get the job done, but the double-bladed ones might clear the snow more quickly. 
  • Scrapers: Some models have a built-in scraper that slides under the snow, which helps the blades lift snow before discharging it out of the chute.
  • Handles: Some of these tools have adjustable handles to fit the user’s height. More heavy-duty models often contain a second handle to help operators push the shovel through the snow. 
  • Weight: Electric snow shovels are relatively light and typically weigh between 10 and 16 pounds. This matters because an electric snow shovel is not an automatic snow shovel, meaning you must push it along the ground rather than expecting it to propel itself. The right snow shovel will be light enough to push relatively easily but heavy enough to push into the snow rather than skim the top.
  • Cord length: The attached cord on a corded electric snow shovel usually isn’t longer than 6 feet. But they don’t plug right into a wall outlet anyway. Most need a 12- or 14-gauge exterior extension cord, which can be purchased separately. 

The Advantages of Owning an Electric Snow Shovel

An electric snow shovel is easier to use than a manual push snow shovel and less expensive than a full-size snow blower. These shovels expedite snow removal, lessening the time spent in coats, snow boots, and winter work gloves while clearing the driveway, leaving more time for sledding, snowball fights, or staying warm indoors. 

  • Reduces back, arm, and shoulder pain and fatigue associated with shoveling snow
  • Quickly removes fresh snow to an average depth of 6 to 8 inches
  • Lightweight and easy to handle (most weigh under 15 pounds)

FAQs

There’s no need to save up to cover the cost of snow removal—an electric snow shovel might make the job economical and easy enough to handle yourself. If you still have questions about buying an electric snow shovel, see the answers to common queries below. have questions about buying an electric snow shovel, see the answers to common queries below.

Q. How does an electric snow shovel work?

A horizontal auger with one or two blades spins at ground level to pick up the snow and toss it through an exhaust chute.

Q. When should I use my electric snow shovel?

An electric snow shovel works best on newly fallen snow that is light and fluffy before it has had a chance to melt and become heavy. An electric snow shovel or snow shovel with blower can move powdery snow more easily and launch it farther than it can wet snow.

Q. How do you fix an electric snow shovel?

Most electric snow shovels come with a 2- or 3-year warranty, so if something goes wrong during that time, contact the manufacturer. Consult the owner’s manual for instructions on basic maintenance.

Q. Are electric snow shovels worth it?

Electric snow shovels are relatively inexpensive, compact, and easy to use, making them well worth it for those areas or users where a manual snow shovel isn’t quite enough and a snow blower is too much.

Q. Do electric shovels work with wet snow?

Electric shovels can work with wet snow if it’s only an inch or two deep or if the shovel itself is a heavy-duty option like the Ego Power+ Multi-Head Snow Shovel Kit With 4Ah Battery. Many other electric snow shovels are too small or lightweight to clear heavy snow without multiple passes.

Q. How much snow can an electric snow shovel handle?

See the product specs above regarding maximum depth and clearing width to see how much snow an electric snow shovel can handle. Generally speaking, maximum depth will be between 3.5 and 6 inches, and maximum width will be between 11 and 16 inches.

Meet the Tester

Zach Lazzari is a freelance writer splitting time between the great outdoors, travel, and DIY projects ranging from camper builds to home renovations and maintenance. His home base in Montana is the perfect testing grounds for winter products and snow equipment. With over a decade of professional writing experience, he also covers a variety of other projects and maintenance topics for Bobvila.com.

Additional research provided by Glenda Taylor, Tony Carrick, and Jasmine Harding. 

The post We Cleared More Than 4 Feet Of Snow Testing the Best Electric Snow Shovels and Found 9 Top Options appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-13T13:16:27-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Bench Grinders of 2025 for Sharpening and Polishing, Tested]]>Stop sharpening blades by hand. Hone your knives, axe heads, and chisels quickly and easily with the best bench grinder for your needs.

The post The Best Bench Grinders of 2025 for Sharpening and Polishing, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-bench-grinder/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=117495Sun, 12 Jan 2025 10:52:11 -0500ReviewsPower ToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Certain tools make life a whole lot easier in the workshop, but they don’t always get the credit they deserve—and the bench grinder is a prime example. We tested three of the top bench grinders to see which ones excelled at smoothing metal, sharpening tools, and tackling tough jobs—and we found a favorite! The DeWalt DW785 Bench Grinder earned top honors in our hands-on tests thanks to its powerful performance, smooth, vibration-free operation, and heavy-duty build. 

In addition to the bench grinders we tested, we’re including three other highly rated models based on thorough research, user reviews, and standout features. Keep reading to learn more about these essential power tools, and find out how the following models earned a spot on our lineup of the best bench grinders.

  1. BEST OVERALL: DeWalt DW758 8-Inch Bench Grinder
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Wen BG4260 2.1-Amp 6-Inch Bench Grinder
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST WITH WIRE WHEEL: Jet JBG-6W 6-Inch Shop Grinder With Wire Wheel
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST VARIABLE-SPEED: Delta 23-196 6-Inch Variable Speed Bench Grinder
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR DIYERS: Wen BG625V 6-Inch Variable Speed Bench Grinder
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST FOR SHARPENING: Rikon 80-805 8-Inch Low-Speed Bench Grinder
    Jump to Review
The Best Bench Grinder Option WEN Bench Grinder
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila
DeWalt DW785Wen BG4260Jet JBG-6WDelta 23-196Wen BG625VRikon 80-805
Wheel size8 inches6 inches6 inches6 inches6 inches8 inches
Max Speed3,600 RPM3,450 RPM3,450 RPM3,400 RPM3,400 RPM1,750 RPM
Price$132.60$46.54$295.00$127.47$127.07$143.99

Our Top Picks

A good bench grinder should run smoothly, have adjustable tool rests, and be safe to operate. The first three models all excelled in our hands-on tests, and they will appeal to a variety of users based on wheel size, revolutions per minute (RPM), and budget. One is sure to be a good option for your workshop projects.

Best Overall

DeWalt DW758 8-Inch Bench Grinder

 The Best Bench Grinder Option: DeWalt DW758 8-Inch Bench Grinder
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Stable and good build quality
  • Large 8 inch grinding wheels
  • Adjustable tool rests
  • Fast and powerful

What We Don’t Like

  • No auto-braking when switching off
  • Requires bolting for maximum stability

Specs 

  • Wheel size: 8 inches
  • Speed: 3,600 RPM
  • Motor: ¾ hp

Our Ratings: Assembly 4.5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Performance 5/5; Value 5/5

The DeWalt DW785 is a beast! At 39.5 pounds, it was the heaviest model we tested, but that heft makes it solid and gives it stability during operation. It comes with 8-inch diameter grinding wheels, so we were able to grind larger items, such as axe blades and wide chisels. It took about 20 minutes to assemble and bolt to the workbench. 

The DeWalt DW758 comes with standard safety items like clear eye shields and spark deflectors over both wheels to protect users without obstructing their view. We did end up raising the shields when we worked on larger items because they reduce the working area when they’re in the down position, but we always took the precaution of wearing safety masks.

The DW758 features adjustable aluminum tool rests that allow users to position the item they’re sharpening at an optimal angle. The grinder wheels rotate smoothly at 3,600 RPM for quick shaping of metal blades. It has two grinding wheels: a coarse 60-grit wheel and a coarser 36-grit wheel. It doesn’t offer any bells and whistles—it’s just a powerful grinder at a competitive price. 

What our tester says: “For general grinding and burr removal, I think the DW785 is a good choice. After letting it run for 25 minutes straight, the motor casing was barely warm. A good sign!”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the DeWalt DW758 bench grinder at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Best Bang for the Buck

Wen BG4260 2.1-Amp 6-Inch Bench Grinder

 The Best Bench Grinder Option: Wen BG4260 2.1-Amp 6-Inch Bench Grinder
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Affordable price point
  • Effective spark deflector
  • Good grinding speed

What We Don’t Like

  • Best suited to light-duty grinding

Specs 

  • Wheel size: 6 inches
  • Speed: 3,450 RPM
  • Motor: 2.1 amps

Our Ratings: Assembly 4.5/5; Build Quality 4.5/5; Performance 5/5; Value 4.5/5

The Wen BG4260 6-inch bench grinder’s affordable price point means users can grind a lot of blades without spending a lot of money. It comes with the standard safety features, and we actually thought its spark deflector worked better than the more expensive models. Assembly was simple and straightforward, taking about 15 minutes.

The Wen grinder comes with 36-grit and 60-grit grinding wheels that spin at 3,450 RPM. We used the 36-grit wheel to reshape edges and the 60-grit wheel to hone them; if you’re looking for a knife-sharp edge, though, you’ll need to purchase an even finer-grit wheel. 

The BG4260 features see-through eye shields to protect the user’s eyes while grinding, and they adjust for grinding larger items. Also, each wheel on this relatively small bench grinder comes with adjustable tool rests to help steady the tool the user is grinding or sharpening, which is key to getting consistent results. It packs a 2.1-amp motor, which is suitable for most general grinding needs, but it did become pretty warm after we ran it nonstop for 25 minutes. If you have extensive grinding to do, we’d suggest taking a break every 15 to 20 minutes or so to give it a chance to cool off. 

Get the Wen BG4260 bench grinder at The Home Depot or Wen.

Best with Wire Wheel

Jet JBG-6W 6-Inch Shop Grinder With Wire Wheel

 The Best Bench Grinders Option: Jet JBG-6W 6-Inch Shop Grinder With Wire Wheel
Photo: Acme Tools

What We Like

  • Versatile wheel setup
  • Stable and smooth operation
  • Onboard dust port
  • Good build quality

What We Don’t Like

  • Limited sharpening ability

Specs 

  • Wheel size: 6 inches
  • Speed: 3,450 RPM
  • Motor: ½ hp

Our Ratings: Assembly 4.5/5; Build Quality 4.8/5; Performance 4.5/5; Value 4.5/5

The Jet bench grinder offers users added versatility with a very coarse 36-grit grinding wheel and a wire wheel. Assembling the tool was straightforward and took about 20 minutes. 

We tested the Jet’s grinding wheel for deburring and removing metal and then used the wire wheel to clean rust from bolt threads. The upside to this configuration is the ability to use the wire wheel to strip paint, buff, polish, or remove slag without removing too much material. The downside is being unable to switch to a 60-grit standard wheel for finer sharpening on mower or axe blades. Still, if you have a small workshop, combining a wire wheel with an extra-coarse grinding wheel makes sense because you won’t need to purchase another power tool, like an angle grinder. You can always purchase another grinding wheel if you prefer.

The Jet JBG-6W bench grinder has a ½-horsepower motor that spins at 3,450 RPM. Its build quality is good, and it didn’t heat up at all during testing, even though we ran it for 25 minutes nonstop. 

What our tester says: “I found the JBG-6W to be very stable and smooth during operation. I also liked the dust port on the back, which kept messes to a minimum when attached to a shop-type vacuum.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Jet JBG-6W bench grinder at Acme Tools.

More Great Options

While we didn’t test the following bench grinders–they made our short list thanks to excellent user reviews, build quality, and versatile options. We’ve included a low-speed choice since some users want the ability to control the grinding process to a higher degree for precise or delicate work. We hope to test one or more of these in the future. 

Best Variable-Speed

Delta 23-196 6-Inch Variable Speed Bench Grinder

 The Best Bench Grinder Option: Delta Power Tools 23-196 6-Inch Variable Speed Bench Grinder
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Variable speed dial
  • Grooved tool rests for consistency
  • Built-in cooling tray 
  • Attached work light

What We Don’t Like

  • Horsepower rating not listed

Specs 

  • Wheel size: 6 inches
  • Speed: 2,000 to 3,400 RPM
  • Motor: 2.5 amps

Different metals require adjustable speeds for the best grinding results, and we like the idea that Delta’s 6-inch variable-speed bench grinder allows users to adjust the motor’s speed between 2,000 and 3,400 RPM, allowing them to dial in the best speed for the project. 3,400 RPM quickly removes quite a bit of material, such as burrs. At 2,000 RPM, users can fine-tune the edge of a blade without worrying about removing too much material. 

This Delta grinder comes with two 6-inch grinding wheels, including 36-grit and 60-grit wheels. It includes eye shields for safety and adjustable tool rests for support. We like the idea of grooves in the tool rest because it allows users to get the exact angle on their blades, chisels, or other tools while protecting their eyesight. This bench grinder even features a water tray where users can drop hot fasteners for quick cooling. Plus, it has an LED light that helps provide optimal illumination while working. 

Get the Delta bench grinder at The Home Depot or Walmart.

Best for DIYers

Wen BG625V 6-Inch Variable Speed Bench Grinder

 The Best Bench Grinders Option: Wen BG625V 6-Inch Variable Speed Bench Grinder
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Adjustable speeds for different projects
  • Grooved tool rest
  • Finer, 80-grit wheel for sharp edges

What We Don’t Like

  • Not suited to heavy-duty grinding

Specs 

  • Wheel size: 6 inches
  • Speed: 2,000 to 3,400 RPM
  • Motor: 2.5 amps

We think the 6-inch Wen bench grinder is a solid pick for home mechanics and DIYers alike. It offers features like adjustable speeds, tool rest adjustment, and onboard illumination for a quality finished result.

This model’s motor spins at speeds between 2,000 and 3,400 RPM, allowing DIYers to adjust it according to the range of projects they might tackle. We really like the inclusion of an 80-grit wheel, which is finer than the 60-grit wheel most grinders offer. This makes the grinder well suited for fine-tuning sharper edges on blades. 

It also has the basics, like flip-down eye protection and adjustable tool rests, and the tool rests provide grooves for consistent results (helped along by the onboard lighting). The one area where it falls short is that there isn’t any information about the motor’s horsepower, so its 2.5-amp variable motor may not be suitable as a heavy-duty grinder. Still, with the consumer reviews we’ve seen, the Wen is a top-notch pick for all-around grinding and sharpening.

Get the Wen BG625V bench grinder at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Wen.

Best for Sharpening

Rikon 80-805 8-Inch Low-Speed Bench Grinder

 The Best Bench Grinders Option: Rikon 80-805 8-Inch Low-Speed Bench Grinder
Photo: Walmart

What We Like

  • Runs at lower speeds to prevent overheating
  • Aluminum-oxide wheels sharpen in 60 and 120 grits
  • Sturdy base and rubber feet reduce vibration

What We Don’t Like

  • Designed to sharpen knives and chisels

Specs 

  • Wheel size: 8 inches
  • Speed: 1,750 RPM
  • Motor: ½ hp

Folks looking for a tabletop grinder built specifically for sharpening will want to consider the 80-805 model from Rikon. This slow-speed bench grinder features a ½-horsepower motor that spins at 1,750 RPM, helping to prevent the machine from overheating blades, such as those on knives and chisels, while sharpening. If you’re looking for a grinder primarily for sharpening knives, this is the one we suggest.

The 8-inch wheel grinder comes with two wheels with higher-than-typical grits: 60 and 120, both of which are made from white aluminum oxide. This combination allows for a finer approach to sharpening, with the 60-grit reshaping the blade and the 120-grit wheel honing a sharp edge. This model features a heavy-duty cast-iron base as well as rubber nonslip feet. The result is reduced vibration for safer, more controlled sharpening. Just keep in mind that this grinder is designed for sharpening knives, chisels, and similar tools, not necessarily heavy-duty pieces like lawn mower blades and badly damaged axes. 

Get the Rikon bench grinder at Walmart, Acme Tools, or Rockler.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose and Tested the Best Bench Grinders

When we set out to curate a list of the best bench grinders on the market, we wanted to ensure that the models we suggested were the cream of the crop. We researched more than 20 bench grinders and then narrowed the list to six models. Of those six, we chose the top three for testing. We were looking for build quality, exceptional user experience, varied features, and different price points to offer something to a wide range of DIYers and mechanics.

In actual testing, we used the grinders on the same materials most DIYers would. We ground metal burrs off axes and used the grinders to remove material and sharpen chisels and bolts. While testing, we scored the grinders using a rubric and awarded points. The better a grinder did on a test or assessment, the higher the points. After testing, we averaged the points to determine our best overall pick and to categorize the other models for their best use. 

Testing Stats
Products tested 3
Time spent testing 6.5 hours
Tests performed3
Price range$50 to $300
DeWalt DW785Wen BG4260Jet JBG-6W
Assembly4.54.54.5
Build Quality54.54.8
Performance554.5
Value54.54.5

What to Consider When Choosing a Bench Grinder

Shoppers won’t find a lot of bells and whistles on the average bench grinder—just two wheels that spin at rapid speeds. While it’s possible to change a wheel on a bench grinder, it’s not always the most successful undertaking because it can be challenging to balance the new wheel, which is necessary to prevent wobbling. For the best results, it’s better to purchase a bench grinder with the desired type of wheels already installed on the tool. The two wheels on a bench grinder usually differ: One may be a coarse grit, while the other might be a less coarse grit, wire brush, or even a buffing wheel. The best bench grinder will depend on the type of grinding, cleaning, or polishing the user intends to do.

Though electric bench grinders can be beneficial for anyone who wants to sharpen a blade or grind rust away from a steel item, they’re found most often in the workshops of auto mechanics, DIYers, and classical woodworking artisans who use many hand tools. One thing you’re unlikely to find is a cordless bench grinder, because these power tools have high energy demands and are mostly corded. If you need to take your grinding to the field, consider using a cordless angle grinder

Automotive

Automotive workers, including both auto-body workers and mechanics, use bench grinders regularly to remove rust from nuts and bolts as well as to polish steel and chrome engine and body parts to a high sheen. A bench grinder designed for the automotive industry typically features the fastest spinning speeds—up to 3,450 RPM. Cleaning and polishing auto parts with a bench grinder greatly cuts the time it would take to clean and polish by hand. 

Woodworking

Woodworkers and craftspeople depend on sharp hand tools, such as planes and chisels, for creating well-fitting dovetail joints and smoothing out rough wood, but sharpening these metal tools by hand is time-consuming. A bench grinder keeps hand tools sharp, but grinders designed for woodworkers feature slower spin speeds than those marketed to automotive workers. The tempered steel in hand tools can be damaged by the high heat that results from fast-spinning grinding wheels, so anyone looking to sharpen tempered tools should look for a grinder with a slower (1,725 RPM) wheel. You may also want to consider a handheld angle grinder, such as the Makita grinder, which excelled in our tests. 

Variable-Speed

DIYers who dabble in both woodworking and car or auto-body repair typically rely on variable-speed bench grinders. These grinders allow the user to operate the tool at its highest speed when they need to clean car bolts, reducing it as needed when sharpening chisels and other woodworking hand tools. Variable-speed grinders typically run $65 to $125 more than their same-brand counterparts that feature single speeds. However, choosing a variable-speed grinder is less expensive than purchasing two separate bench grinders to get both high and low speeds.

Portable

Standard bench grinders are heavy, weighing up to 50 pounds, and they perform best when mounted to a workbench to prevent movement. Those who need to take a grinder with them to different work sites will want to invest in a smaller, lighter-weight model (around 10 pounds) that features rubber feet to prevent it from sliding when positioned on a table.

Wheel Material

The type of material from which the wheels are made will determine the tool’s best use. Except for wire and buffer wheels, most grinder wheels come in one of two grits: 36 grit for aggressive grinding and 60 grit for finer grinding. In addition, they’re made from the following materials:

  • Silicon carbide: This is one of the most common grinding wheels found on bench grinders and is suitable for a range of grinding tasks, including sharpening cast iron and lawn-mower blades. However, this type of grinding wheel tends to heat up very quickly, which can ruin the temper of high-quality woodworking tools such as chisels or hand planes.
  • Aluminum oxide: These commonly found wheels do not heat up as quickly as silicon carbide wheels and are designed for grinding hard metals, such as the carbon steel and alloy steel found in hand tools. 
  • Wire wheels: Made from both steel and brass bristles, wire wheels are designed to quickly clean away grease and gunk from auto valves and fittings. A grinder in a mechanic’s shop will likely have at least one wire wheel.
  • Ceramic aluminum oxide: This abrasive wheel is mainly used to grind away material from hard alloys and steel. If someone wanted to grind off half of an axe head for some reason, this is the wheel they’d want.
  • Buffing wheels: Made from various thick, brushed fabrics, buffing wheels are designed to polish steel and metal items to a high shine. Auto-body workers often use buffer wheel grinders when restoring a car to achieve high sheens on hubcaps and other chrome automobile features.

Wheel Type and Size

Bench grinders are advertised by the size of their wheels, which are commonly either 6 inches or 8 inches in diameter. Both types of grinding wheel machines perform similarly, with a couple of considerations.

  • 6-inch grinder: These smaller bench grinders are often slightly less expensive, ranging from around $65 to $175, depending on the brand name and any optional accessories they may feature. They come with a choice of low and high speeds, and they’re suitable for a variety of grinding purposes, such as sharpening knives, blades, and tools. They can weigh anywhere from 10 to 25 pounds or more and can be bolted to a workbench or used as a portable tool.
  • 8-inch grinder: Designed with the professional mechanic or woodworker in mind, these larger 8-inch bench grinders often feature more powerful motors, but they usually don’t spin quite as quickly as 6-inch models. They’re made to withstand frequent use in a professional workshop and range from around $100 to $500 or more, depending on brand and quality. They range in weight, typically between 20 to 50 pounds, and are usually bolted to a workbench to keep them from moving.

Safety Features

All power tools present a measure of risk, bench grinders included. Grinding iron creates sparks and sends shards of metal flying, so it’s imperative to wear safety glasses when operating a bench grinder. Fortunately, grinders are usually designed with some safety features to help reduce risk.

  • Eye guards: These are standard on most bench grinders in the form of clear, acrylic shields that extend directly over the grinding wheel as the user works, keeping metal and steel shards from making contact with eyes. Over time, these guards can become dirty or scratched, but when that happens, they can be replaced.
  • Spark deflectors: These common bench grinder attachments are small steel plates located between the wheels and the eye guards. They’re intended to keep sparks from flying all over the workshop. In general, the spark deflectors will keep the sparks from traveling very far, but there will still be sparks, so it’s recommended to keep flammables at least a few feet away from a bench grinder while it is in use. 

Accessories

Common bench wheel grinder accessories are designed to make it easier to use the tool. These are some accessories you might find included or sold separately from a bench grinder. 

  • Tool rests allow the user to brace a knife or blade to hold it steady while grinding. This accessory comes standard on almost all bench grinders.
  • LED lights that illuminate the work area to better see the task at hand.
  • Rubber feet (on portable models) to keep them from sliding across a workbench during operation.
  • A water tray near the bottom of the grinder for dipping a chisel (or other metal items) to cool off.

Tips on How to Mount a Bench Grinder

If a DIYer has space on their workbench, they’ll most likely want to mount a new bench grinder to keep it stable while sharpening or smoothing tools and parts. Bench grinders are pretty heavy on their own, but bolting them to a workbench, using the provided holes in their base, is optimal. A stable grinder is easier and safer to control. 

  • Position the grinder where it will go on the workbench, and then use a pencil to make marks on the workbench in all four base holes.
  • Use a drill to drill through the pencil marks.
  • Attach the grinder by inserting bolts through its base holes and the holes drilled in the workbench, and then use nuts to secure the bolts firmly in place.

FAQs 

Your grinding needs are not identical to anyone else’s, so the grinder you choose should reflect the type of materials and items you’ll be grinding. Below are some answers to the most frequently asked questions about bench grinders.

Q. What is a good speed for a bench grinder? 

A good all-purpose speed for a bench grinder is between 3,000 and 3,600 RPM. For flexibility and general usefulness, most models without variable speeds run at around 3,450 RPM.

Q. What is the best-size bench grinder? 

Most pros would agree that the best size for a bench grinder is 8 inches. These models are small enough to move around, the wheels stay relatively cool during use, and the motors are built to withstand a lot of work. However, for a DIYer or part-time user, a 6-inch model will likely be more affordable and just as capable of getting the job done. If you’re looking for a small grinder, consider a rotary tool with a grinding disc attachment. 

Q. Do I need a variable-speed bench grinder?

If you need to sharpen woodworking tools but you also work on cars, a variable-speed grinder will allow you to use the lower speed for sharpening woodworking tools and the higher speed for grinding down bolt ends or cleaning away rust from auto parts.

Q. What is the best grit for sharpening knives on a bench grinder?

A 4,000-grit to 6,000-grit wheel is best for sharpening knives to a razor-sharp edge. You may be able to get a finer edge by using a bench sander

Q. What are the disadvantages of a bench grinder?

Until you’re skilled at using a bench grinder, you could inadvertently create uneven edges or remove too much material. 

Q. What are some safety recommendations for using bench grinders?

Avoid loose clothing, pull long hair back and out of the way, and use safety goggles—or better yet, a full-face shield. 

Q. Do you have to bolt down a bench grinder?

In the best-case scenario, you should. Bolting it to a non-moveable surface, like a workbench, will keep it stable, reduce vibration, and enhance safety. The exception is when you purchase a bench grinder with a stand that will support it. A bench grinding stand is usually made from cast iron and, in many cases, will need to be bolted to the floor. 

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a contractor, product tester, and writer focusing primarily on construction, DIY tools, and home appliances.

Additional research provided by Tom Scalisi.

The post The Best Bench Grinders of 2025 for Sharpening and Polishing, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-12T10:52:11-05:00
<![CDATA[This Simple Upgrade Makes Your Ryobi Tools More Powerful]]>The post This Simple Upgrade Makes Your Ryobi Tools More Powerful appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/ryobi-edge-battery-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=422405Fri, 10 Jan 2025 20:43:59 -0500ReviewsPower ToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Ryobi, The Home Depot’s flagship brand for DIYers, is known for making affordable power tools for homeowners, hobbyists, and budget-conscious consumers. I recently tested Ryobi’s new high-capacity battery, the Edge, which offers more power and a longer runtime than their standard battery. 

I tried out the Ryobi Edge battery with three Ryobi tools: a circular saw, a reciprocating saw, and a bucket-top shop vacuum. The Edge is a souped-up, 18-volt, 4Ah battery that’s surprisingly more compact than Ryobi’s standard 4Ah battery. It fits all of Ryobi’s 18V One+ line of cordless tools and appliances, and in my hands-on tests, it offered noticeably more power and an extended runtime. 

Our rating: 4.5/5

Ryobi Edge Battery on White Background

Ryobi Edge Battery

I charged a standard battery along with the Edge to do some comparison testing. With the standard Ryobi 4Ah battery in the reciprocating saw, I was able to cut through dimensional lumber, plywood, and OSB. But when I used the Edge battery, the saw had more power and didn’t bog down when I exerted pressure to cut faster. That’s a clear advantage for those who want to speed up their work time. More power means getting the job done quickly. 

The Edge’s battery performance with the circular saw was similar—it cut faster and didn’t lag under pressure. After a few hours of testing, the standard battery started to run down, and I had to put it on the charger. The Edge was still going strong.

Another nice feature of Ryobi’s battery upgrade is the Edge’s built-in LED gauge that indicates how much battery life remains. When the standard battery ran out of oomph, the Edge LED gauge indicated it still had more than half its battery life remaining. At that point, I slipped the Edge into the Ryobi bucket-top shop vacuum and cleaned up all the sawdust mess I’d made with the saws. 

  • Ryobi ONE+ 4Ah Lithium Edge Battery C Review Ryobi Edge Battery
  • Ryobi ONE+ 4Ah Lithium Edge Battery C Review
  • Ryobi ONE+ 4Ah Lithium Edge Battery C Review Edge battery with Ryobi Shop vacuumRyobi ONE+ 4Ah Lithium Edge Battery C Review Edge battery with Ryobi Shop vacuum
  • Ryobi ONE+ 4Ah Lithium Edge Battery C Review Edge battery in Ryobi reciprocating saw
  • Ryobi ONE+ 4Ah Lithium Edge Battery C Review Edge battery in Ryobi circular saw
  • Ryobi ONE+ 4Ah Lithium Edge Battery C Review Edge Battery Charging
  • Ryobi ONE+ 4Ah Lithium Edge Battery C Review Comparing edge battery to standard Ryobi battery

My overall experience with the Ryobi Edge battery was positive. Lithium-ion technology continues to improve, and the Edge brings Ryobi closer to competing with professional, higher-end tool brands. Currently, the Edge 18V High-Performance Battery sells for $129.00 at The Home Depot and Ryobi. A charger is not included, but the Edge fits a regular Ryobi 18-volt charger. Compare that to two standard Ryobi 4Ah batteries that sell for $79

While the Edge costs more, it’s worth the investment for the extended runtime, additional power, and higher performance it offers Ryobi 18V One+ power tools. 

The post This Simple Upgrade Makes Your Ryobi Tools More Powerful appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-10T20:43:59-05:00
<![CDATA[After Testing 9 Rolling Tool Boxes, The Craftsman Offered Storage for Almost Every Tool]]>Store and relocate your tool collection easily using the best rolling tool box. This guide offers top recommendations for DIYers and pros.

The post After Testing 9 Rolling Tool Boxes, The Craftsman Offered Storage for Almost Every Tool appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-rolling-tool-box/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=130237Fri, 10 Jan 2025 20:19:58 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWorkshopWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

No matter which kind of tools a job calls for, a rolling tool box can make storing and transporting them much more comfortable and efficient. Rolling tool boxes come with drawers and bins that allow you to stow tools in an organized manner and keep them within easy reach. After testing nine rolling tool boxes for garage and outdoor use, our favorite was the Craftsman 5-drawer tool chest. It solved one of our most pressing needs by providing a home for hundreds of sockets, bits, screwdrivers, and other small hand tools, with easy mobility around the shop. We also found excellent mobile tool storage options for backyard building projects and jobs that require more remote work. 

The right tool box will depend on the kinds of tools and whether the job will be in the workshop or loaded in the back of a truck. We sought out different solutions for a variety of tool-storage needs. Read on for more details on how these tool boxes performed in testing and why we consider them to be some of the best rolling tool boxes available. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Craftsman 26-Inch 5-Drawer Tool Chest Combo
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Keter Masterloader Rolling Tool Box
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST WITH SEAT: OEM Tools Workshop Creeper Seat With Built-In Tool Box
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST WITH WORK BENCH: Husky 52-Inch by 25-Inch 9-Drawer Mobile Workbench
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST ALL-TERRAIN: Milwaukee Packout 22-Inch Rolling Tool Box Set 
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST TOOL BOX CART: Performance Tool 2-Shelf Utility Cart With Drawer
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST MODULAR: DeWalt DWST60436 ToughSystem 2.0 Rolling Tower 
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. BEST FOR POWER TOOLS: Stanley 23-Inch 50-Gallon Mobile Tool Box
    ↓ Jump to Review
  9. BEST FOR MECHANIC TOOLS: Husky 10-Drawer Tool Chest And Cabinet Combo
    ↓ Jump to Review
Craftsman tool chest with tools
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Testing Stats
Products tested 9
Time spent testing 20 hours
Tests performed6
Price range$80 to $700

Our Top Picks

Our product reviews team has tested dozens of full-size and portable tool boxes, and this round up features the best of the wheeled variety. To make the cut, these rolling tool boxes had to handle transport and incidental impacts while loaded with hundreds of pounds of tools. If you’re looking for a mobile tool storage solution, one of these models could be a great option.

Best Overall

Craftsman 26-Inch 5-Drawer Tool Chest Combo

 The Best Rolling Tool Boxes Option: Craftsman 26-Inch 5-Drawer Tool Chest Combo
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Storage for large and small tools
  • Upper tool chest can be locked
  • Convenient size for home garage or workshop
  • 300-pound storage rating

What We Don’t Like

  • Painted steel is subject to impact and scratch damage

Specs

  • Type Multi-drawer stacking tool chest
  • Dimensions 26.5 inches long by 14 inches wide by 44 inches high
  • Compartments 7

Our Ratings: Assembly 4/5; Build Quality 4.5/5; Organization 5/5; Portability 5/5; Value 5/5

A good tool box with drawers should be durable and offer adequate space for essential tools in an organized and accessible fashion. This Craftsman tool chest features five drawers, a lockable top compartment, and a lower cabinet for larger equipment. It’s made of lightweight but strong 20-gauge steel, holds up to 300 pounds of tools and equipment, and rolls on sturdy 3-inch casters.

The upper tool chest includes the hinged-lid upper compartment, two shallow drawers (2 inches deep by 19.5 inches wide), and one deep drawer (4 inches deep by 19.5 inches wide). It gave us plenty of space to store drill bits, sockets, and pliers, along with assorted smaller tools.

The lower portion of the rolling tool box features two deep drawers (4 inches deep by 23 inches wide), and a cabinet (14 inches deep by 23 inches wide). We used the top drawer for longer wrenches, pry bars, snips, flashlights, and multimeters, and put oil change supplies in the cabinet.

At first glance, the Craftsman rolling tool chest seemed small, but we were surprised by how much it ultimately held. We loaded it with a 160-piece socket set, 32 wrenches, 19 pairs of pliers, and 21 screwdrivers, along with a variety of specialty tools and bits. The kit included a roll of non-skid drawer liner that we cut to size for each drawer. It helped to keep the tools in place, but for best results we recommend adding other tool drawer organizers once you’ve determined your tool box layout. This could be an ideal garage tool storage solution. 

What our tester says: “There are larger tool chests out there, but I like that this one holds everything I need without taking up too much space. The lower cabinet gives me more space for bulky stuff, which is something that other options do not provide.” —Mark Wolfe, product tester and writer

Get the Craftsman rolling tool box at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Ace Hardware.

Best Bang for the Buck

Keter Masterloader Rolling Tool Box

 The Best Rolling Tool Boxes Option: Keter Masterloader Rolling Tool Box
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Easy single-handed opening
  • Separate hand tool and parts storage
  • Slide-open compartment with wide access
  • Budget friendly price

What We Don’t Like

  • Light duty telescoping handle

Specs

  • Type Portable tool box
  • Exterior dimensions 24.3 inches long by 14.9 inches wide by 16.3 inches high
  • Compartments 3

Our Ratings: Assembly 5/5; Build Quality 4/5; Organization 4.7/5; Portability 5/5; Value 5/5

When traveling between projects, a well-organized tool box ensures that tools and equipment will arrive the way you packed them. The heavy-duty polyresin Keter Masterloader rolling tool box features three main compartments that hold up to 66 pounds of hand tools, power tools, and other gear. It features a weather resistant body, two 7-inch all terrain wheels, and an extendable handle for easy transport. And it’s priced lower than any of the other rolling tool boxes we tested.

This is a small rolling tool box with a little more than 17 gallons total storage capacity. We really liked the organization and accessibility built into it. The two top storage boxes come with removable tool organizers to keep track of smaller items. One of the top compartments has a clear lid that allows you to see the contents. The top compartments slide out of the way to uncover bulk storage for large tools below. 

We were easily able to operate the latch, lids, and sliding compartments with one hand. This box offers plenty of storage and easy access for our normal portable toolbox needs, and we really like the way the smaller compartments are organized to keep small items readily available. The only thing we didn’t like was the sticky movement of the sliding handle, which could use some improvement.

Get the Keter tool box at Amazon or Menards

Best With Seat

OEMTools Workshop Creeper Seat With Built-In Tool Box

 The Best Rolling Tool Boxes Option: OEM Tools Workshop Creeper Seat With Built-In Tool Box
Photo: Walmart

What We Like

  • Padded work seat with tool storage beneath
  • Includes drawers, shelf, and can/cup holder
  • Sturdy powder-coated steel
  • 280-pound weight capacity

What We Don’t Like

  • Seat height was a little too low

Specs

  • Type Shop stool with tool storage
  • Exterior dimensions 14.9 inches long by 14.9 inches wide by 16.9 inches high
  • Compartments 3

Our Ratings: Assembly 4/5; Build Quality 5/5; Organization 5/5; Portability 4.7/5; Value 4.7/5

The OEMTools Workshop Creeper Seat can make tough chores more comfortable, whether that’s changing a tire, assembling a cabinet on the floor, or undertaking any other activity that might lead to one heck of a backache, like kneeling on concrete or constantly bending over. This well-designed rolling work seat features pull-out, under-seat trays to hold tools during the work process. 

The tool drawers are rated to hold up to 30 pounds each. They were just the right size to hold a couple of screwdrivers, a handful of sockets, a utility knife, pliers, and electrical tape while we were tuning up a lawn mower. The cup/can holder bracket came in handy for keeping spray lubricant at the ready, and we used the lower shelf to hold replacement parts while we worked.

The seat height was a little lower than ideal, but the 2-inch padding stayed comfortable for an hour or two at a time. The swivel casters rolled easily over smooth concrete but came to an immediate stop if they encountered a stray nut or small gravel on the floor. And when we were finished working, this shop stool fit perfectly under our work bench for storage.

Get the OEMTools rolling seat with tool box at Walmart, Summit Racing, Jegs, or AutoZone.

Best With Work Bench

Husky 52-Inch by 25-Inch 9-Drawer Mobile Workbench

 The Best Rolling Tool Box Option: Husky 52-Inch by 25-Inch 9-Drawer Mobile Workbench
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Sturdy wood workbench top
  • Built-in power strip
  • Minimal setup required
  • Large casters and handle for mobility

What We Don’t Like

  • Very heavy for setup

Specs

  • Type Workbench with tool storage
  • Dimensions 52 inches long by 24.5 inches wide by 37.75 inches high
  • Compartments 9

Our Ratings: Assembly 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Organization 5/5; Portability 4/5; Value 4.7/5 

The 52-inch, nine-drawer Husky mobile workbench is made of 21-gauge steel with a solid wood top and weighs 267 pounds before adding tools. It’s a beast, but worth the minimal setup effort for those who need a movable workstation. Not only does it provide a large, sturdy work surface suitable for layout, cutting, assembly, and other sorts of project work, but it also comes equipped with a built-in power strip with six outlets and two USB-A ports. 

Assembly was fast and easy—all we had to do was attach the wheels, handle, and cord keeper. Loading our tools took a bit longer. There was plenty of drawer space for all of our hand tools and assorted accessories, as well as power tools, batteries, and chargers. Although the drawers did not come equipped with dividers or other types of organizers, they did include removable non-skid liners that prevented things from sliding around when the drawers were opened and closed. Once the unit was fully loaded, it probably weighed 1,000 pounds or more. The large casters and heavy-duty handle made it easy enough to roll across the concrete floor, but don’t expect to load it on a truck for remote projects.

Get the Husky 52-inch by 25-inch rolling tool box at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best All-Terrain

Milwaukee Packout 22-Inch Rolling Tool Box Set

 The Best Rolling Tool Boxes Option: Milwaukee Packout 22-Inch Rolling Tool Box Set
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Heavy-duty build quality
  • Holds up to 250 pounds
  • Modular system for different tool combinations
  • Hand truck design

What We Don’t Like

  • More expensive than other options

Specs

  • Type Modular tool box
  • Dimensions 22 inches long by 16.5 inches wide by 32.5 inches high (assembled)
  • Compartments 3

Our Ratings: Assembly 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Organization 5/5; Portability 5/5; Value 4.7/5

When it comes to stackable tool boxes for easy transport, it’s hard to beat the Milwaukee Packout system. The kit we tested features a 22-inch-wide main box with large 9-inch all-terrain wheels and a telescoping handle for easy transport, plus medium and small boxes that latch securely in place atop the main box.

Each box features tough latches for the hinged lid, with a metal eyelet for securing tools with a lock. They’re dust- and water-resistant to keep valuable tools from getting damaged by the elements. The boxes are also very durable, featuring metal-reinforced corners and an industrial-grade extension handle. The large and middle size boxes include removable organizer trays, while the smaller box features a pair of removable compartments. The kit also includes a mooring location for the Milwaukee brand’s Bluetooth tracking device.

We loaded the Milwaukee Packout boxes with our cordless power tools, extra batteries and chargers, and a host of hand tools and fasteners. The three box stack held all the tools we needed to construct a tool shed from scratch, and had plenty of anchor points to secure in the truck on the way to the project. We preferred the structure of these boxes, which was much more convenient, secure, and organized than soft-sided tool bags, and the wheels were a back saver.

What our tester says: “The Milwaukee Packout system made efficient use of space in the truck bed, and the metal corner posts made it easy to strap in. The wheels rolled effortlessly across a gravel patch and shallow roots up to the build site. It has to be one of the easiest ways to tote tools from the truck to the build site.”—Mark Wolfe, product tester and writer

Get the Milwaukee Packout rolling tool box set at The Home Depot.

Best Tool Box Cart

Performance Tool 2-Shelf Utility Cart With Drawer

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Lockable tool drawer
  • Open storage for large parts and tools
  • Large heavy-duty swivel casters
  • Sturdy steel construction

What We Don’t Like

  • No drawer liner
  • Less storage space than other options

Specs

  • Type Tool box cart
  • 31.6 inches long by 16.25 inches wide by 35.25 inches high 31.6 inches long by 16.25 inches wide by 35.25 inches high
  • Compartments 1

Our Ratings: Assembly 4/5; Build Quality 5/5; Organization 4/5; Portability 5/5; Value 4.3/5

If you already have a well-organized hand-carry toolbox that works, but need a little more mobility around the garage, this Performance Tool toolbox cart may be the answer. The double-decker cart has a lockable tool drawer and holds up to 350 pounds of parts and tools. For easy mobility, it comes equipped with heavy-duty 4-inch casters, including two locking swivel casters. 

This cart requires assembly, which took us about 30 minutes. The 4-inch deep bare drawer would benefit from the addition of a non-skid drawer liner and tool organizers to keep things in order, but neither were included. We placed our own 3-drawer lockable toolbox inside for access to sockets, bits, and screwdrivers, and used the big built-in tool cart drawer for larger pliers, wrenches, and snips.

This service cart was easier to move around the shop than conventional rolling tool chests. It was nice to have the large open shelf on the bottom for bulky, heavy, or messy items, such as our oil drain pan and used filters. Another benefit to the tray-style top and bottom shelves was that they prevented sockets and other small tools and hardware from rolling off.

Get the Performance Tool rolling tool box at Amazon or Advance Auto Parts.

Best Modular

DeWalt DWST60436 ToughSystem 2.0 Rolling Tower

 The Best Rolling Tool Boxes Option: DeWalt DWST60436 ToughSystem 2.0 Rolling Tower
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • IP65 rated for weather and dust resistance
  • Large 8-inch all-terrain wheels
  • Snap-in-place connection system
  • Extendable transport handle

What We Don’t Like

  • Wheels are not solid rubber; may not be ideal for extreme use

Specs

  • Type Modular tool box
  • Dimensions 20 inches long by 13.5 inches wide by 34.5 inches high (assembled)
  • Compartments 3
  • Load capacity 250 pounds

Our Ratings: Assembly 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Organization 5/5; Portability 5/5; Value 4.7/5

This DeWalt Tough System 2.0 modular rolling tool box tower includes large, medium, and small interlocking boxes made of rugged molded plastic. The bottom tool box features an extendable transport handle and 8-inch wheels. It is the largest of the three boxes—we put in two circular saws and a reciprocating saw, and we still had room to spare. All three boxes are 20 inches wide and measure 13.5 inches from front to back. The large base box is 15.5 inches high, while the middle-size box is 12 inches high, and the smallest box is 7 inches high.

Several features make this system one of the best modular options we’ve tested. The interlocking boxes use side latches with an intuitive spring-loaded design. We only needed to stack the boxes to latch them automatically. This made them as secure as a single unit in transport. Then we squeezed the lever while lifting to separate them again. They also carry an IP65 water- and dust-proof rating for harsh jobsite conditions.

We also appreciated the included organizer trays in each of the boxes. The large and medium sizes had lift-out dual compartment trays for midsize tools. The smaller box included a pair of clear-lidded containers to organize hardware, bits, or other small items. This system is rated for 250 pounds of storage capacity.

Get the DeWalt ToughSystem portable tool box at The Home Depot or ToolNut.

Best For Power Tools

Stanley 23-Inch 50-Gallon Mobile Tool Box

 The Best Rolling Tool Boxes Option: Stanley 23-Inch 50-Gallon Mobile Tool Box
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Sturdy molded construction
  • Large storage capacity
  • Weather and impact-resistant
  • Also works as a seat or sawhorse

What We Don’t Like

  • Hinges and latches are less sturdy than others we’ve tested

Specs

  • Type Portable tool box
  • Dimensions 37 inches long by 23 inches wide by by 23 inches high
  • Compartments 1

Our Ratings: Assembly 5/5; Build Quality 4/5; Organization 4/5; Portability 5/5; Value 4.7/5

For those who need more secure storage space than a simple latch, consider the Stanley mobile tool box with its 50-gallon internal storage capacity secured by a built-in lock. The Stanley name is highly respected in the tool industry, and the robust design of this rolling tool chest is right in line with the company’s other quality products. The lock allows users to secure items with a key rather than keeping track of an easily lost padlock (though it does have hasps for padlocks on each latch as well). 

This Stanley rolling tool box is made from heavy-duty molded polypropylene, and it comes with metal latches and an in-box lock for added security. An extendable handle makes pulling easy, and the handle slides out of the way when not in use. However, this is a tip-up rolling chest, so it’s important to consider the weight of the items within; super-heavy items may make it difficult to tilt and roll.

We used the Stanley mobile tool box as a work site locker. There was plenty of room inside for us to stow our portable router table along with a circular saw, drill/driver, battery charger, and all of our hand tools. The box itself had thicker walls and was tougher than we had anticipated. The molded 2×4 slots in the lid offered a suitable alternative for a sawhorse, and we used the box as a seat for our coffee breaks. But the lock and hinges were not as heavy duty as some of the other boxes we tested. As far as security, this one will keep honest people honest, but probably won’t stop a criminal. 

Get the Stanley rolling tool box at The Home Depot, Walmart,or Global Industrial.

Best for Mechanic Tools

Husky 10-Drawer Tool Chest And Cabinet Combo

 The Best Rolling Tool Boxes Option: Husky 10-Drawer Tool Chest And Cabinet Combo
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Large casters and handle for portability
  • Large storage volume
  • Soft-close drawers with padded liners
  • Sturdy steel construction

What We Don’t Like

  • Casters did not lock securely

Specs

  • Type Multi-drawer stacking tool chest
  • Dimensions 27 inches long by 18.1 inches wide by 58.3 inches high
  • Compartments 11

Our Ratings: Assembly 5/5; Build Quality 4.6/5; Organization 4/5; Portability 4.5/5; Value 5/5

For those with limited garage space but many tools to store, this Husky rolling tool box with drawers may be ideal. Similar in design to our top pick, this one is larger and heavier. It has 10 drawers varying in size to suit different tools, each rated to hold up to 100 pounds, and a total weight capacity of 1,500 pounds. In our tests, we appreciated the soft closing mechanism of the drawers, as well as the included padded liners that were pre-cut and slid in nicely during setup. The entire two-piece tool chest came almost completely assembled, too, which was a plus. We just needed to install the four large caster wheels on the bottom, plus the handle on the side.

For testing, we overloaded the drawers above their rated 100 pounds. Even with very heavy items inside, the drawers seemed to hold up nicely, and we noticed little change to the smooth opening and closing. The bright red coating also makes quite the statement, although shoppers can opt for more subtle blue or glossy gray options, which are almost identical save for one additional drawer.

Our one gripe with the Husky was its hard plastic caster wheels. Even with both brakes applied, they didn’t seem able to fully stop the tool chest from moving when we pulled on it. This tool box on wheels just started sliding across the floor. We would have liked to have seen a hard rubberized wheel with a little more grip.

Get the Husky 10-drawer tool chest at The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

Milwaukee Packout Tool Box action
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

How We Chose and Tested the Best Rolling Tool Boxes

We vetted more than 40 rolling tool storage systems for this guide. We gleaned our favorite wheeled tool storage solutions from previously tested guides before scouring the internet for additional options. We tested each rolling tool box according to its weight rating and intended use. For garage tool chests, we considered compact models best suited to home garages. We also sought out portable options for transporting and temporarily storing construction tools. To test them, we loaded them to capacity and rolled them over the most likely terrain—a concrete floor for garage models, or gravel and grass for all-terrain types. After testing, we recorded our observations and scored each model on a rubric before awarding “best” titles.

What to Consider When Choosing a Rolling Tool Box

To determine which mobile tool box is the best choice, consider the number, weight, and type of tools in need of storage. Also take into account whether tools will require built-in electrical outlets and whether a rolling tool storage cabinet that locks is necessary.

Types of Rolling Tool Boxes

Rolling tool boxes come in various designs based on the types of tools stored inside them and the kinds of projects for which they are used. The following types of rolling tool boxes all store tools and can be moved with ease, but each offers different features that will suit some projects better than others. For some, a small rolling tool box is all that’s needed, while others will benefit from larger storage capacities.

Rolling Tool Cart/Trolley

Much like a rolling kitchen cart, a rolling tool cart or “trolley” has a tabletop work surface that can hold small items, such as nuts, bolts, and spark plugs, and also additional storage below the work surface. 

The storage space below a tool cart may be configured with multiple pull-out drawers or a combination of drawers and bins. It may also include shelving. A trolley-type cart can move to a designated spot for tool storage or hold all the tools necessary for a specific project—say, detailing a car—and then the user can pull it out to the driveway to keep everything within reach.

Rolling Tool Chest 

A rolling tool chest is essentially a large tool box on wheels with multiple drawers that resembles a dresser frequently found in a bedroom. This type of portable tool storage often appears in mechanics’ garages and typically features shallow drawers just deep enough to hold sockets and wrenches, as well as 4- or 5-inch wheels designed to roll across a smooth garage floor.

In an automotive garage, this type of standing tool box might be used to line the walls, with each unit chock-full of the small precision tools a mechanic needs to work on various vehicles. A rolling tool chest with drawers can also come in handy in a woodworker’s workshop. The shallow drawers are ideal for storing fasteners, bits, and other small supplies that can be difficult to find if they’re dumped in a box or tool bag.

Rolling, Stackable Tool Box

A stackable rolling tool box is a flexible tool storage option. These boxes have built-in wheels and handles that make them easy to roll, and they generally have large tool chests or bins instead of drawers. These chests serve as the foundation for adding additional storage boxes, which users can clip to the tool chest to keep them secure. 

These options are modular, so users can keep adding boxes as long as they can handle the weight and mobility. They can be a huge benefit to folks with multiple power tools during DIY projects who prefer to keep them in separate boxes along with their accessories, as well as those who use a lot of hardware and would like their nuts and bolts organized securely. 

Rolling Tool Box Stool

A rolling tool box with a stool can offer great relief when working on projects that require the user to bend down regularly, such as performing detail work on the exterior of a car or bathing the family dog outdoors. 

The stool’s storage can be as simple as a single shelf above the wheelbase, where it can hold a couple of hand tools, or a series of drawers and bins for storing more items. Having a stool for both sitting and stashing tools underneath can be just as convenient as wearing a tool belt—and even more comfortable for the user’s back.

Rolling Tool Box With Workbench

Similar to a rolling tool box trolley or cart, a tool cabinet with a workbench provides the user with an additional work surface that can hold cans of paint, brushes, or other tools and accessories. The tops on these storage cabinets are usually made of a durable material such as wood that will withstand scratches and gouges.

Material and Construction Quality

To protect expensive tools from dust, water, and the elements, many rolling tool boxes are made from heavy-gauge steel with a powder-coated finish designed to prevent rusting and corrosion. However, while steel tool boxes are moisture-resistant, they’re not waterproof, so they should be stored inside a garage or workshop when not in use. Some may even feature stainless steel components, but rarely are these boxes completely sealed from the elements.

Another popular material for rolling tool boxes is heavy molded resin, which can withstand the occasional shower. Remember, if the tool box does not say it’s waterproof, rain or water from a lawn sprinkler could seep into drawers or cabinet doors, causing rust on the tools inside.

Quality of construction may look different for the different materials, but certain indicators cut across the spectrum. Whatever the material, the lid should not flex or warp when raised. Hinges and latch hardware should not come out of alignment by simply raising and lowering the lid. Drawers should move smoothly through their full range of motion. High quality models incorporate soft-close drawers and may include padded drawer liners. Rolling boxes meant to be transported across open ground should have thick walls, large, grippy wheels, and a sturdy handle.

Size and Shape

A square or oblong box shape is the most common design for rolling tool boxes. There are a few round ones, but these are typically tool boxes with built-in stools. A unit with straight sides offers the most efficient use of tool storage and organization because it can be pushed against a garage wall. Rolling tool boxes are usually between 2 and 8 feet wide, and they can be just as narrow or tall. Most models are relatively shallow in depth so as not to take up too much room along the garage wall.

Storage Capacity

Consider the number and type of tools that require storage when choosing a rolling tool box. To stow hefty power tools—such as cordless drills, routers, and jigsaws—a tool box that has either large bins or shelves sturdy enough to hold them is best. For those who will be working on cars, the best garage tool organization and storage might be a box with small upper drawers for sockets and a couple of deeper drawers at the bottom for larger tools.

Tool Security 

Tools are expensive, and keeping them safe from thieves (not to mention away from curious children) may require locking the tool box. Some models feature individual locking doors, while others come with a bar-type lock that extends across all the doors. When security is an issue, it’s also a good idea to use a cable to secure the box to a permanent object, such as a lag bolt inserted into the concrete floor of a garage or workshop. But remember, locking tool boxes are not safes; they are designed to reduce the risk of theft, not to be impenetrable.

Maneuverability 

Metal mechanic tool boxes often come with small casters that enable the user to push the tool box over paved concrete. To move the box over different terrains, such as across the yard to a patio, look for larger wheels that will roll over turf or gravel without bogging down. Some jobsite rolling tool boxes have two large wheels along with a handle, enabling the user to tip the whole unit, like a hand truck, and pull it across uneven ground.

Portability

Portable rolling tool boxes tend to incorporate two or three tool boxes that fit together, one on top of another, and roll across the ground. They’re called “portable” because the boxes can be separated, carried, and loaded onto a truck. These boxes typically weigh less than 25 pounds when empty and often come with collapsible handles. Though some portable rolling tool boxes are made of metal, they’re more often crafted of lightweight molded resin. Keep in mind that a tool box’s true portability level will depend on the weight of the tools inside.

Additional Features 

Most rolling tool boxes are pretty straightforward, but a few have some particularly useful bells and whistles.

  • Electrical outlets: Look for these on workbench- or trolley-type rolling tool boxes. They allow the user to plug in electrical tools right at the cabinet. They require plugging a heavy-duty 12- or 14-gauge extension cord into the back of the cabinet and running it to an electrical outlet.
  • USB charging port: This feature usually comes as an added option on tool boxes with electrical outlets, allowing the user to charge a cell phone while working.
  • Indrawer compartments: These are handy for keeping small items, such as different sizes of fasteners, separate and organized.

The Advantages of Owning a Rolling Tool Box

Milwaukee Packout Tool Box
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Keeping needed tools within reach makes any project go quicker. Rather than having to maneuver repeatedly between a tool chest and a project, a rolling tool box lets you bring the tools right to where you’re working. 

  • With a rolling tool box, you can organize the types of tools you’ll need, such as sockets and wrenches for automotive work, and keep them within arm’s reach.
  • When you want to rearrange your work space, you can move a rolling tool box anywhere you want in the garage.
  • Some rolling tool boxes are also portable, which means you can stuff them full of tools and then transport everything to a different job site.

FAQs 

First-time shoppers may still have some questions about rolling tool boxes. Here are a few of the most common questions we’re asked, along with succinct answers.

Q. What can I store in a rolling tool box?

There are many ways to organize a tool box. While some rolling tool boxes can hold large power tools, many have shallow drawers that work better for organizing small tools and supplies, such as sockets and fasteners. 

Q. Does a rolling tool box have a lock?

Some do, but not all. When security is an issue, look for a tool box that allows you to lock it with a padlock.

Q. How do I clean a tool box?

Usually a spray-on, all-purpose cleaner will work, plus a rag to wipe off grease and gunk. For best results, clean your tools and keep them maintained to prevent the inside of the tool box from getting dirty. 

Q. What is the best material for a toolbox?

A metal tool box made of powder coated steel is generally best for a garage space. Rolling toolboxes for outdoor use are made of heavy-duty weather- and impact-resistant plastics. A cheap rolling tool box may incorporate less durable material.

Q. What is the difference between a tool box and a tool chest?

These terms may be used interchangeably, but “tool box” often specifically refers to a box with a hinged lid and one or two insert trays, and “tool chest” means a drawer system. 

Q. What size rolling tool box should I get?

If you are replacing one or more tool boxes with a larger one, one way to choose the correct size is by adding together the total space currently available and buying one slightly larger. A large rolling tool box with increased volume will allow you to incorporate tool organizers, or add a few more tools later on.

Q. How to store a rolling tool box?

If the tool box will be used on a regular basis, store it in a convenient location where it will not be blocked by other items. That could be beneath a work bench or on a shelf. If it’s for storage, a stacking system is often the most convenient and makes the best use of available space.

Meet the Testers

Paul Rankin is a writer and product tester who has been writing for BobVila.com since 2021. He focuses on buyer’s guides for the full range of tools, furniture, DIY supplies, and home and garden products.

Tom Scalisi is a freelance writer specializing in the home design, construction, tools, and automotive industries. As a lover of all things tools, construction, and DIY, he’s always looking for new tools and techniques while also sharing his knowledge with the DIY world. 

Glenda Taylor is a product tester and writer specializing in the construction, remodeling, and real estate industries. She and her husband own a general contracting company, and Taylor is experienced in both residential and commercial building applications.

Mark Wolfe is a product tester and writer with an extensive background in the nursery and landscaping industry. He kept his tool box well stocked in order to build or repair fences, walls, irrigation systems, and equipment on any given day. Now he tests and writes reviews about the latest hand tools, lawn-care products, outdoor power equipment, and other outdoor-living goods.

The post After Testing 9 Rolling Tool Boxes, The Craftsman Offered Storage for Almost Every Tool appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-10T20:19:58-05:00
<![CDATA[We Researched More Than 20 Dead Blow Hammers to Find The Best One]]>The post We Researched More Than 20 Dead Blow Hammers to Find The Best One appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/best-dead-blow-hammers/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=422936Thu, 09 Jan 2025 10:53:41 -0500ReviewsDIYHand ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

The dead blow hammer is one of those unusual items in the tools category that plenty of people have heard of but few actually own. A dead blow hammer is surprisingly versatile and can be used in engineering, metalworking, woodworking, masonry, and demolition, so it’s worth considering owning one.

The big advantage that the dead blow has over other types of hammers is that it doesn’t rebound. This allows for greater control because there’s no bounce, and because there’s less vibration, it can also reduce fatigue. A dead blow hammer can apply considerable force but can also tap something into place gently with little risk of damaging the surface. The well-rounded nature of the dead blow hammer is what really stood out in our top pick, the Neiko 02847A 2-Pound Dead Blow Hammer, which is one of the most versatile options out there. 

For those new to these tools, choosing the right one can be a challenge. We’ve addressed that in this article by selecting the best dead blow hammers for a variety of different tasks.

Best Overall

Neiko 02847A 2-Pound Dead Blow Hammer

 The Best Dead Blow Hammer Option Neiko 02847A 2-Pound Dead Blow Hammer
Photo: Amazon

Pros

  • Versatile and affordable all-rounder
  • High-vis, non-sparking poly body
  • Diamond textured, non-slip handle

Cons

  • Not for heavy-duty use

Specs

  • Weight: 2 pounds
  • Dimensions: Head: 2⅛ inches by 3⅞ inches; Overall length: 13⅜ inches
  • Features: Checkered grip, spark-resistant coating

It isn’t easy picking a single best dead blow hammer, but this one from Neiko is the kind of general-purpose tool that’s suitable for working with both metal and wood. With a weight of 2 pounds and a length of 13⅜ inches, it can deliver high force when required but remains maneuverable for more delicate work. The shot-filled head maximizes the impact without rebound, and the poly coating prevents marring the material and sparking when it comes in contact with metal. With its diamond texture, the octagonal handle provides a trusty grip.

There are a few reports of the head splitting, which could be a concern. To put that concern in context, however, it’s important to understand the purpose of a dead blow hammer: to impact a surface straight on while absorbing the impact and without damaging the surface. When hitting a flat surface to smooth a wood finish, remove a dent, or bring pieces of wood flush, the hammer will simply absorb the impact. When used to drive in nails or sharper objects, the coating that helps protect the surface it hits from being damaged may split when the sharp object pierces or impacts the coating. An ordinary steel hammer should generally be used for that type of work. If using a dead blow hammer to protect the surface when driving nails going into soft woods, some splitting or damage to the head is to be expected. 

Get the Neiko dead blow hammer at Amazon or Lowe’s.

More Dead Blow Hammers Worth Your Money

To properly answer the question, “What is a dead blow hammer?” it helps to have a selection of the different types and sizes as reference. The following top picks range from affordable sets that maximize the tool’s versatility to a heavyweight dead blow sledge hammer.

  • Yiyitools Dead Blow Hammer Set, available at Amazon.
  • Performance Tool M7234 Dead Blow Hammer Set, available at Amazon.
  • Milwaukee 32-Ounce Dead Blow Ball Peen Hammer, available at The Home Depot, or Northern Tool + Equipment.
  • ABN 4-Pound Dead Blow Hammer, available at Amazon.
  • Capri Tools C102 12-Pound Dead Blow Hammer, available at Amazon.

How We Chose the Best Dead Blow Hammers 

Dead blow hammers are popular with professionals but less common with DIYers, so in putting together this article, we wanted to provide examples of the various sizes, types, and materials. We looked at durability, coatings, grip, and, of course, prices. While tools from some leading brands command a premium, even large dead blow hammers can be very affordable.

We also sought expert advice from masonry contractor Andriy Boyko of A.O. Handy Inc., commercial and residential masonry specialists in Wisconsin. Boyko called a dead blow hammer “simple but incredibly useful, especially when you want to get a clean, controlled strike without leaving any marks.” Balance and weight are key features, he explained. “A 16-ounce hammer is a good all-rounder, but if you’re working on something bigger, you might want a 32-ounce one. Ideally, the head should be tough but gentle on surfaces. If you’re going to be using it for longer periods, look for a handle that has a good grip to reduce strain.” Before purchasing a dead blow hammer, consider the projects planned in the future and choose the appropriate weight and head material.

FAQs

Using a combination of the product descriptions and the key features should provide answers to many of the questions that people have when deciding which model to buy. We did find a few queries that we felt warranted further information, so we have addressed those here.

Q. What should a dead blow hammer be used for?

The question “What are dead blow hammers used for?” is a common one. Small models are good for assembly, or taking dents out of metal panels. Some landscapers use a dead blow hammer for pavers. Large models can be used for demolition. Any time you want maximum control with no rebound, a dead blow hammer is the tool to reach for.

Q. Is a dead blow hammer the same as a rubber mallet?

No. In our article on best rubber mallets, the tool is described as being like “a padded hammer”, and that’s a great page to visit for further information. Dead blow hammers deliver a hard, flat blow with no bounce that risks damaging the surface or the user. 

Q. What size dead blow hammer should I use for woodworking?

Although different sizes of hammers can be used depending on the task, most woodworkers prefer a dead blow hammer between 12 and 16 ounces.

Q. What is the effect of a dead blow hammer?

The head of a dead blow hammer is usually filled with sand or steel shot. When you strike something, that loose material moves forward, effectively “deadening” the blow and ending the hammer’s motion in place. As such, rebound is virtually non-existent, so the hammer stays where you hit.

Q. When should you use a dead blow hammer?

People use dead blow hammers when they need maximum control. Lightweight models are used for mechanical assembly. A heavy-duty hammer can apply a lot of force but will cause less surface damage than an ordinary hammer. However, because most are encased in plastic, they are not the best hammer for knocking in nails, for example.

Q. Can you use a dead blow hammer on metal?

You can. Dead blow ball peen hammers are specially designed for dent removal, shaping, and riveting.

The post We Researched More Than 20 Dead Blow Hammers to Find The Best One appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-09T10:53:41-05:00
<![CDATA[After 12 Hours of Testing, We Keep Reaching For These Whittling Knives]]>Learn about key shopping considerations to help you choose the best whittling knife for your projects among our top recommendations.

The post After 12 Hours of Testing, We Keep Reaching For These Whittling Knives appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-whittling-knife/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=120151Thu, 09 Jan 2025 10:14:21 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Whittling differs from wood carving in that whittlers perform their craft solely with wood and a good whittling knife, while wood carvers employ chisels, gouges, and occasionally power tools to shape the wood. The simplicity of whittling allows just about anyone to pick up a relatively inexpensive whittling knife and a piece of wood and get started.

A new whittling knife is always an exciting addition for new and experienced craftsmen alike. You get to try out the cut of a new blade and the grip of the handle. Ideally, the right whittling knife will sit comfortably in your hand and have a curve to the blade to enhance your whittling ability. We’ve scoured customer reviews and spent 12 hours testing a few highly regarded models in order to find the best whittling knife. Our favorite was the BeaverCraft S15X Wood Carving Set. Because project conditions vary, we really liked that the kit included 3 rugged knives for different cutting needs, and they felt as good in our hands after 3 hours of whittling as they did at first.

But your needs and preferences may vary, so be sure to check out our reviews of the other knives we tested. Whether you need a folding knife to carry in your pocket, a larger knife for working with greenwood, or even a gift idea, this guide has you covered. Our product evaluations and shopping considerations are here to help you find the best whittling knife for your next project.

  1. BEST OVERALL: BeaverCraft S15X – Premium Wood-Carving Set
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: BeaverCraft C4S Whittling Knife with Leather Sheath
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST PORTABLE: Flexcut JKN88 Whittlin’ Jack Carving Knife
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST POCKET KNIFE: Böker TS 2.0 Medium Stockman Pocket Knife
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR GREENWOOD: Morakniv 120 Wood-Carving Knife
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST FOR DETAILING: BeaverCraft C15 – Detail Wood-Carving Knife
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST SET: Elemental Tools 9-Piece Wood-Carving Tools Set
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. BEST POCKET-SIZE:Opinel No. 8 Carbon Steel Folding Knife
    ↓ Jump to Review
[youtube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YRoCPZd6ULU?feature=oembed&w=1778&h=1000]
BeaverCraft Wood Carving SetBeaverCraft Wood Carving Knife
Flexcut Whittlin’ JackBöker Medium StockmanMorakniv Wood Carving KnifeBeaverCraft Detail Carving KnifeElemental Tools Wood Carving Tools SetOpinel No. 8 Folding Knife
Knife type(s)Wood carving, detail carving, chip carvingSloydWood CarvingGeneral purposeWood CarvingDetail carvingWood carving, sloyd, hookGeneral purpose
Blade length2 inches, 1⅖  inches, 1 inch2⅞  inches2 inches, 1½  inches2 inches, 1¾  inches, 1½ inches2⅓  inches1½  inchesNot provided3¼ inches
Edge grind typeScandiScandiScandiFlatScandiScandiScandiFlat
Handle materialBlack walnutOakAluminumSteel and boneBirchAshWalnutBeech

Our Top Picks

We’ve tested hundreds of hand tools for work, but it’s not often we get to evaluate tools for the pure enjoyment of creating art. With quality, value, and comfortable control as our guide points in testing, we suggest these as some of the best whittling knives for new and experienced wood carvers alike.Finding the best whittling knife for your experience level depends on quality, price, and personal preference. These recommendations can help you find the best whittling knife for your projects.

Best Overall

BeaverCraft S15X – Premium Wood-Carving Set

 Best Whittling Knife Options: BeaverCraft Deluxe S15X Wood Carving Whittling Knives
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Accommodates different whittling styles
  • Excellent quality for the price
  • Comfortable, easy to control
  • Arrived sharp; blades held their edge well
  • Kit includes bandages, just in case

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users may prefer a single general-purpose knife

Specs

  • Knife type(s) Wood carving, detail carving, chip carving
  • Blade length 2 inches, 1⅖ inches, 1 inch
  • Handle material Black walnut

Our Ratings: Comfort 5/5; Sharpness 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 5/5

If you’re serious about whittling or wood carving, chances are you’ll want a few different blades for roughing in general shapes, fleshing out details, and adding decorative touches. Whether you’re a complete novice or an expert in need of another set of whittling tools, the BeaverCraft Deluxe S15X wood carving kit comes with everything you need: a large wood carving knife, detail carving knife, chip carving knife, polishing compound, leather strop, and genuine leather storage pouch. 

Compared to some of the other blades we tested, these were much less flexible. We liked the rigidity, although some users prefer more flexibility. The straight blade edge and downward-curving spine of the 2-inch carving knife gave it a good combination of power and precision that worked well for roughing and general carving. The shorter, narrower detail knife blade was very articulate when it came to narrowly curved cuts and smaller cuts overall.

The BeaverCraft knives came out of the box sharp and ready to work. As we carved, the edge durability proved to be excellent, as well. Working with basswood blanks, we stopped once an hour to hone the blades with good results. The walnut handles felt good in hand and provided excellent blade control. The well-tuned blades and comfortable handles allowed us to intuitively make controlled push cuts and pairing cuts and gradually improve our chip-carving techniques. 

What our tester says: “The BeaverCraft whittling knife set looks great in its leather pouch, and cuts just as well. I’ve only whittled with a pocket knife and was amazed by the comfort and control I had with these knives. And the blades stayed very sharp all the way through the test.”—Mark Wolfe, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the BeaverCraft S15X whittling knives at Amazon, Walmart, or BeaverCraft.

Best Bang for The Buck

BeaverCraft C4S – Whittling Knife With Leather Sheath

 Best Whittling Knife Options: BeaverCraft Sloyd Knife C4s 3.14 Wood Carving Sloyd Knife
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Affordable price for a quality knife
  • Good design for rough whittling and bigger projects
  • Sharp, durable edge
  • Includes a leather sheath

What We Don’t Like

  • Blade was shorter than advertised

Specs

  • Knife type(s) Sloyd
  • Blade length 2⅞ inches
  • Handle material Oak

Our Ratings: Comfort 5/5; Sharpness 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 5/5 

The BeaverCraft C4S is a single-blade knife with a sturdy 2⅞-inch blade. Its shallow belly is ideal for controlling long planing cuts, and the thin tip cleanly negotiates short curved cuts. The knife has a handle just under 5 inches long that’s made of solid oak and treated with natural linseed oil to protect the wood from moisture, rot, and decay. The handle is smooth and comfortable in the hand, and it boasts an ergonomic design intended for long periods of use. Perhaps best of all is its budget-friendly price, which may be a surprise for this level of quality.

The high-carbon steel blade is somewhat susceptible to rust, so you’ll need to keep it clean, and properly stored after every use. It retains an edge for a long time while working with just about any type of hardwood or softwood. The blade comes presharpened so you don’t have to worry about grabbing your sharpening stone or leather strop before you can start whittling. Once you are done, store it safely in the included leather sheath until you want it again.

We used the BeaverCraft sloyd knife to shape carving blanks out of dried poplar that we split from a pile of firewood. The wood was dry and hard, but this knife was the tool for the job. It sliced smoothly and produced long, curled shavings. After an hour, we honed the blade and worked at it for another hour. The handle felt good, the blade kept its edge, and our hands felt great after whittling for two hours.

Get the BeaverCraft C4S whittling knife at Amazon or BeaverCraft.

Best Portable

Flexcut JKN88 Whittlin’ Jack Carving Knife

 Best Whittling Knife Options: FLEXCUT Whittlin' Jack, with inch Detail Knife
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Sturdy yet lightweight
  • Ergonomic handle and blade design
  • Sharp, durable edges
  • Includes blades for roughing and details

What We Don’t Like

  • Thin handle profile is more tiring with extended use

Specs

  • Knife type(s) Folding roughing knife and detail knife
  • Blade length 2 inches, 1½ inches
  • Handle material Aluminum inlaid with wood veneer

Our Ratings: Comfort 4/5; Sharpness 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 4.7/5

The Flexcut Whittlin’ Jack is ideal for whittlers who want a trusty whittling knife that can fit in their pocket. It features a 1½-inch detail knife blade and a 2-inch roughing knife blade, both of which fold into a durable aluminum handle inlaid with wood veneer. The blades are made of high-carbon steel for easy sharpening and extended edge retention. The knife comes presharpened so that you can get to work as soon as it arrives.

The Whittling Jack is only 4 inches long when folded, so it can easily fit in a pocket or bag. The handle has a curved ergonomic shape for effortless control during use. We were able to use it as effectively as traditional wood-handled carving knives—with the exception of certain push cuts. Since the blades on this knife do not lock, we had to be more careful when pushing on the spine of the blade to avoid accidentally closing the knife. It was a minor concern, but one that stayed in the back of our minds throughout the test.

Our project results with this knife were excellent. Both blades maintained keen edges for an hour of whittling at a time. The blade angle and handle shape made control easy and mostly comfortable, but after two hours of cutting, we noted more hand fatigue than we experienced with the traditional handle designs.

What our tester says: “Using the Flexcut Whittlin’ Jack felt very much like other high-quality whittling knives. The angle between the blade and the handle felt comfortably familiar. I was able to control the cuts just as well as with a fixed blade. I can’t imagine a better design.”—Mark Wolfe, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the FlexCut whittling knife at Amazon, Woodcraft, Lee Valley, or Flexcut.

Best Pocket Knife

Böker TS 2.0 Medium Stockman Pocket Knife

 Böker TS 2.0 Medium Stockman Pocket Knife
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Beautiful traditional pocket knife
  • D2 steel blades for excellent edge retention
  • Assortment of blades for different cutting needs
  • General-purpose knife for everyday carry

What We Don’t Like

  • Blades are not purpose-designed for whittling
  • Smaller handle offers less comfort and control

Specs

  • Knife type(s) Folding multipurpose knife (clip, sheepsfoot, and spey blades)
  • Blade length 2⅛ inches, 1¾ inches, 1½ inches
  • Handle material Nickel silver bolsters, brass linings, bone scales

Our Ratings: Comfort 4/5; Sharpness 5/5; Build Quality 5/5; Value 4.7/5

If you don’t necessarily plan to dive deeply into this hobby, it can make a lot of sense to whittle with a pocket knife. The Böker Stockman is a tried-and-true design with a good assortment of blades. It measures 3 inches long closed, and the blades are made of D2 tool steel for optimum edge retention. This knife is both durable and stylish, with nickel silver bolsters, black jigged bone scales, and brass linings. In keeping with the traditional stockman pattern, it comes with a 2-inch clip blade, a 1¾-inch sheepsfoot blade, and a 1½-inch spey blade.

The Böker pocket knife came with nicely sharpened blades, but we honed them with a few strokes on the 3,000-grit stone and strop to bring the blades to the same level of sharpness as the other knives in the test. Surprisingly, this was the only knife we tested that did not require honing after the first hour of whittling. Once sharp, it stayed quite sharp for a long time.

Whittling with a pocket knife is more nostalgic than efficient, but it is effective and very accessible. Roughing and basic detail carving were doable, but the smallish handle and comparatively blunt-tipped blades made it more challenging to refine the work. Still, this was the easiest knife to carry in a pocket and whittle on a whim, which is perfect for carving details on a hiking stick while resting beside a scenic vista, or making basic three-dimensional figures while sitting around the campfire. For those with larger hands, the Böker Large Stockman might be a better fit.

Get the Böker whittling knife at Amazon, Swiss Knife Shop, Knife Country USA, or Böker USA.

More Great Options

Choosing the right whittling knife is as much about personal comfort and whittling style as it is about blade designs or handle shapes. If the knives we tested are not quite right for you, consider the following options, all of which have received rave reviews from dedicated whittlers and wood carvers.

Best For Greenwood

Morakniv 120 Wood-Carving 120 Knife

 Best Whittling Knife Options: Morakniv Wood Carving 120 Knife with Laminated Steel Blade
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Multipurpose blade for carving greenwood
  • Slightly curved blade
  • Full tang, laminated steel blade
  • Premium oiled birch handle

What We Don’t Like

  • Less effective for figure carving and fine details

Specs

  • Knife type(s) Wood carving knife
  • Blade length 2⅓ inches
  • Handle material Birch

First-time whittlers or woodworkers on a budget might hesitate to invest much money in a new whittling knife, but the Morakniv 120 is an affordable option, providing you with a single laminated steel whittling knife with a 2.35-inch blade. The laminated steel has a high-carbon steel core to help the blade hold its edge, but softer alloy steel surrounds the core to reduce the weight of the knife and to increase rust and corrosion resistance. 

The sloyd-style tapered blade with slightly up-curved tip gives this knife the balance of power and precision required for rough carving greenwood from the forest. It’s slightly less effective for working with kiln-dried wood from the lumber yard or hobby store.

The handle on the Morakniv is just over 4 inches long and made of oiled birchwood that sits comfortably in the hand. The soft wood is gentle to the touch, but provides a durable grip for precise whittling. This knife comes with a black plastic holder to protect the blade when not in use. The laminated steel blade doesn’t require the same level of maintenance as a carbon steel blade, but the manufacturer recommends washing and drying the blade by hand after every use to ensure the longevity of the knife.

Get the Morakniv whittling knife at Amazon, Ragweed Forge, or Morakniv.

Best For Detailing

BeaverCraft C15 –Detail Wood-Carving Knife

 Best Whittling Knife Options: BeaverCraft Wood Carving Detail Knife
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Short and thin tapered blade
  • Ergonomic ashwood handle
  • Sharp right out of the box
  • Great for working with store-bought wood blanks

What We Don’t Like

  • Less effective for rough carving large pieces

Specs

  • Knife type(s) Detail carving
  • Blade length 1⅖ inches
  • Handle material Ash

For smaller whittling projects, a good detail carving knife may be the only knife you need. Designed to make small, precise cuts, the BeaverCraft C15 is a fixed-blade knife that removes material slowly compared to carving knives with bigger blades. The handle comes in high-quality, ergonomically shaped ashwood and measures 4½  inches long, providing a smooth, comfortable grip to reduce hand fatigue.

The high-carbon steel blade is short, at just 1⅖ inches, giving new whittlers the control they need to help make narrow and curved cuts with a high level of control. It features a Scandi grind straight cutting edge, which is durable and easy to maintain. The blade is also thin, allowing you to whittle precision details into the wood. This knife comes presharpened so that you can begin whittling as soon as you find a suitable piece of wood.

Get the BeaverCraft whittling knife at Amazon, Walmart, or BeaverCraft.

Best Set

Elemental Tools 9-Piece Wood-Carving Tools Set

 Best Whittling Knife Options: Elemental Tools 9pc Wood Carving Tools Set
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Assorted blades for different project types
  • Includes a wood spoon blank and essential accessories
  • Affordable price

What We Don’t Like

  • Few size and material details from the manufacturer

Specs

  • Knife type(s) Sloyd, detail carving, hook
  • Blade length Not provided
  • Handle material Walnut

This 9-piece carving kit from Elemental Tools offers a combination of tools for whittlers at various levels. The set includes three whittling knives, cut-resistant gloves, polishing compound, leather sharpening strop, and a beechwood spoon blank that you can use as soon as you open the set. The beechwood blank is a medium hardness wood, great for beginners who might cut overzealously into softer woods.

The set comes in a bamboo storage box, which helps to protect the high-carbon steel blades of the hook knife, sloyd knife, and detail knife from rust and corrosion. The knives all come with black walnut handles that are smooth to the touch, while containing a robust and durable material. Black walnut is naturally resistant to moisture and decay, so there won’t be concerns about your handles swelling or cracking. 

Get the Elemental Tools whittling knives at Amazon, Wood Art Supply, or Elemental Tools.

Best Pocket-Size

Opinel No. 8 Carbon Steel Folding Knife

 Best Whittling Knife Options: Opinel Carbon Steel Folding Pocket Knife with Beechwood Handle
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Folding knife with locking blade
  • Large blade for fast material removal
  • Carbon steel blade retains a sharp edge
  • Lightweight and comfortable beech handle

What We Don’t Like

  • Limited to rough whittling

Specs

  • Knife type(s) General purpose
  • Blade length 3¼ inches
  • Handle material Beech

Those who prefer casual whittling with a pocket knife might look to the Opinel Carbon Steel Folding Pocket Knife. It is an ideal size for carrying in a pocket, at just 4.3 inches long with the blade closed. The hard carbon steel blade can cut through either hardwoods or softwoods, though this knife isn’t recommended for fine whittling. The blade is flat, with a gentle curve toward the end, so you can easily work with either the edge or the belly of the blade.

This folding knife comes with a stainless steel blade locking mechanism that can keep the blade in place when the knife is open or closed, so that you don’t have to worry about the blade slipping free. The handle of the knife is made from durable beechwood that feels smooth in the hand and has a curved tang at its end to give you a more secure grip.

Get the Opinel whittling knife at Amazon, Peaceful Valley, or Opinel USA.

Jump to Our Top Picks

Beaver Craft sloyd knife
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

How We Chose and Tested the Best Whittling Knives

Based on our own research and verified customer reviews, we sought a combination of the best quality and most affordable whittling knives for testing. With plenty of options to choose from, we included only the most broadly useful blade types: sloyd, rough carving, detail carving, and chip carving, along with a traditional pocket knife. After analyzing the overall construction of each one, we tested them by whittling for 2 hours each. We noted the initial sharpness, durability of the edge, and how each knife felt in hand with regard to comfort and control. Finally, we scored each one on a rubric before determining the award titles.

Testing Stats
Products tested 4
Time spent testing 12 hours
Tests performed4
Price range$20 to $60

What to Consider When Choosing a Whittling Knife

Boker medium stockman knife
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Before choosing a whittling knife, take a few minutes to think about the most important shopping considerations to keep in mind. Determining which type of wood you want to work with, what knife features you’re interested in, and which safety precautions you should focus on will depend on your skill level.

Wood Type

The type of wood you plan to use can influence the whittling knife you select. Beginners might want to start on a stick or piece of wood they find outdoors instead of spending money on precut wood. In this case, a basic whittling knife with no specialty purpose is best to get started.

Once you get the hang of working with a simple stick, you can move on to different types of wood and more advanced whittling knives, such as a hook knife. Intermediate and experienced whittlers will get more value from investing in precut pieces of wood. You can choose from a range of softwoods or hardwoods, though basswood and aspen wood are often used for whittling because of their minimal grain and relatively soft structure. 

Beaver Craft carving knife set
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Handle

The blade of a knife is generally considered the most important feature, but the handle greatly affects the balance, weight, and durability of the knife. It is also the part of the knife most responsible for comfort and can contribute to hand fatigue. Whittling knife handles often are made of wood, plastic, or stainless steel.

  • Wood is the most commonly used material. It looks classically attractive and provides a smooth, comfortable grip. On the other hand, wood is a porous material that can absorb excess moisture, causing swelling and splitting if the whittler does not care for and store the knife properly. Hardwood handles are less likely to split, but still require maintenance, such as the applying of appropriate oils. 
  • Plastic is inexpensive, easy to clean, and durable. Though it doesn’t look as nice as wood, you won’t have to worry about splitting or swelling. However, plastic-handled whittling knives can be harder to find.
  • Stainless steel is the most durable and easiest to clean of the three choices. Both plastic and wood are more comfortable to hold and manipulate for long periods of time, making stainless steel a poor option for beginner whittlers with inexperienced hand muscles that will likely fatigue quickly with this unyielding handle material.

Blade Material

Whittling knife blades are mostly stainless steel and carbon steel, though some blades are made out of laminated steel.

  • Stainless steel blades are a rust-resistant alternative to carbon steel. While stainless steel does not keep an edge as long as carbon steel or laminated steel, it costs less and doesn’t require as much maintenance. 
  • Carbon steel blades are the most common type of whittling knife blade. They keep a sharp edge with minimal sharpening, which is ideal for working with hardwoods. However, the blades require consistent maintenance and proper storage to ensure that they do not become rusted, frail, and essentially useless.
  • Laminated steel blades are made by layering different types of steel during the forging process. This gives them a sharper, longer-lasting edge than stainless steel blades and more rust and corrosion resistance than carbon steel blades.

Blade Shape

The shape of the blade is an important factor to consider. Some blades, like hook blades, are designed for a specific function, but for most projects, blade shape is more a matter of personal preference. 

If you are a beginner, you likely want to start with a long, thin blade that doesn’t have much of a belly. (The belly is the rounded portion toward the end of the blade.) Although many beginners prefer a shorter blade for better control and safety, this also can restrict your ability to make certain cuts. If you aren’t sure, it is best to have both a knife with a shorter blade and a knife with a longer blade so that you don’t limit your whittling. 

Whittlers should generally avoid any knife blades more than 15 millimeters thick. A blade this thick is obstructive to your cuts and can prevent you from achieving the results you want out of your whittling project.

Blade Locking

Some whittling knives have one or more blades that can fold into the handle when not in use. This protects the blade from damage and makes the entire knife more compact and portable. However, there is a chance that a foldable knife without a blade-locking feature can open up, causing injury if it is in your pocket, or exposing the blade to damage if it opens in your tool box.

If you’re going to get a whittling knife with a foldable blade, it’s a good idea to get one with blade locking. Not all foldable whittling knives will have this option, but safety is a worthy investment.

Single vs. Multi-Blade

Whittling knives can come in a single-blade or multi-blade format, and the latter has to be a foldable knife.

  • Single-blade whittling knives are easier to use and often come with a durable handle and sturdy construction that lets you get the most out of the blade. Keep in mind that if you want a fixed-blade whittling knife, you’ll need a single-blade knife, because only these blades offer the choice between a fixed blade or a foldable blade. However, you will have to get a second knife if you want a different blade shape or length.
  • Multi-blade whittling knives tend to be less durable and comfortable than single-blade knives because the handle must be large enough to house two or more blades without damaging the cutting edges. The more blades or tools a knife has, the less effective the individual blade tends to be, because it is more likely to attach further from the center of the handle, where it would normally have the most control and cutting power. The obvious benefit of a multi-blade knife is that you get multiple blade types in a single tool. This can be highly effective without much drawback if the knife has only two or three blades. 

FAQs

To tackle your next whittling project with as much information as possible, scout these answers to common whittling knife questions.

Q. How do you whittle wood?

All you really need to do to whittle wood is pick up a whittling knife and a piece of wood. The wood can be a high-quality block from your local hardware store, or it can be as basic as a piece of a tree branch. Take the knife and begin whittling away pieces of wood until you can form something that somewhat resembles the idea you had in mind. 

Whittling is an inexpensive hobby to get started in, and you don’t need any experience. However, you should wear gloves, go slow, and protect your hands at all times to prevent cutting up your fingers—especially the pad of your thumb, which often takes the brunt of slips and nicks during whittling.

Q. How do you sharpen your whittling knife blade?

There are many ways to sharpen a whittling knife, but the most common method employs a sharpening stone. Lay the blade of the knife flat on the stone, then angle it just slightly while pushing the knife away from you, as though you were trying to cut a piece off of the sharpening stone. Alternately, you can lay the blade flat on the stone with a slight angle, then sharpen the knife by applying pressure to the blade and moving the knife in a small circular motion against the stone.

Q. Can you use a pocket knife for whittling?

You can absolutely use a pocket knife for whittling. Some pocket knives even have multiple blades that you can use to create a variety of cuts on your whittling project.

Q. What is the difference between wood carving and whittling?

Wood carving is much more involved than whittling. It typically involves the use of chisels and gouges, and one might even use mallets or power tools to carve the wood. Whittling, on the other hand, is performed entirely with a whittling knife.

Q. What is the best blade grind for whittling?

The Scandinavian grind (also known as the “Scandi grind”), is popular because it offers a keen edge like a flat grind blade but with a stronger spine for added durability.

Q. How big should a whittling knife be?

Most whittling knife blades are short, typically measuring less than 2 inches in length. But the handles are chunky and curved for an easy grip and blade control.

Q. Does whittling dull your knife?

Whittling wears on the blade, but the sharpening process is minimal. For best results, most whittlers strop the blade once every hour or so. Use a leather strop with polishing or stropping compound.

Q. What angle should a whittling knife be?

Depending on the knife and what feels right to you, a good carving knife for wood will have a 15- to 20-degree edge bevel.

Meet the Tester

Mark Wolfe is a writer and product tester with a background in the green industry. He’s also an avid DIYer who lives in an older home. When he isn’t writing, he spends his time upgrading, repairing, and replacing anything and everything in his home, yard, and garden. He tests and writes reviews about tools, lawn care and home repair products, and outdoor living goods.

Additional research provided by Timothy Dale.

The post After 12 Hours of Testing, We Keep Reaching For These Whittling Knives appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-09T10:14:21-05:00
<![CDATA[Our Favorite Cordless Hammer Drill Has a Added Feature We Never Knew We Needed]]>With more power, the best cordless hammer drill provides quick work of projects. See how top-rated tools performed in our hands-on tests here.

The post Our Favorite Cordless Hammer Drill Has a Added Feature We Never Knew We Needed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-cordless-hammer-drill/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=121416Thu, 09 Jan 2025 02:31:15 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Drilling through concrete, bricks, and stone requires more force than even the most powerful corded drill drivers can provide—and cordless hammer drills have enough oomph (plus the convenience of battery power) to complete such tasks. Since this type of power tool is less common than a standard battery-operated drill, we tested a half-dozen top options to help you select a model worth your money. After using each battery hammer drill to bore holes in concrete, ceramic tile, and cinder brick, we documented each tool’s ability, performance, and ease of use before assigning all worthy options awards. 

Based on our tests and insights from a building industry expert, we chose the DeWalt 20V MAX XR Brushless 1-Inch Rotary Hammer as our favorite hammer drill for its ergonomic design and excellent performance. This model and the rest of our recommended cordless drills scored the highest in our hands-on testing and represent the best cordless hammer drills on the market.

  1. BEST OVERALL: DeWalt 20V MAX XR Brushless 1-Inch Rotary Hammer
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Craftsman V20 Cordless ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit 
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: DeWalt 20V MAX XR ½-Inch Hammer Drill/Driver Kit
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST MEDIUM-DUTY: Makita 40V MAX XGT ½-Inch Hammer Driver-Drill Kit
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST LIGHT-DUTY: Skil PWRCORE 20V ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST COMPACT: Milwaukee M12 Fuel ⅝-Inch SDS Plus Rotary Hammer Kit
    Jump to Review
  • The Best Cordless Hammer Drill Options
  • DeWalt Cordless Hammer Drill Review
  • DeWalt Cordless Hammer Drill Review
  • DeWalt Cordless Hammer Drill Review
  • DeWalt Cordless Hammer Drill Review

Before You Buy a Cordless Hammer Drill

A cordless rotary hammer drill works by spinning a drill bit while simultaneously generating a rapid hammering action—making it ideal for boring into concrete, bricks, stone, or other masonry. Equipped with heavy-duty components and a high amount of torque, this type of tool is typically more powerful than necessary for tasks generally associated with using a cordless electric drill. Before buying one, consider whether you need to mix large amounts of concrete and paint or drill through bricks and other masonry. If not, you probably don’t need a hammer drill and can save a bit of money using a standard drill driver.

Cordless Hammer Drill Comparison Chart

Product NameMaximum SpeedBattery VoltageWeight
DeWalt 20V MAX XR Brushless 1-Inch Rotary Hammer1,100 RPM/4,600 BPM20-volt (V)6.8 pounds
Craftsman V20 Cordless ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit 1,500 RPM/25,500 BPM20V6.1 pounds
DeWalt 20V MAX XR ½-Inch Hammer Drill/Driver Kit2,250 RPM/38,250 BPM 20V4.4 pounds 
Makita 40V MAX XGT ½-Inch Hammer Driver-Drill Kit2,600 RPM/39,000 BPM40V6 pounds 
Skil PWRCORE 20V ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit1,450 RPM/ 21,750 BPM20V4.32 pounds  
Milwaukee M12 Fuel ⅝-Inch SDS Plus Rotary Hammer Kit900 RPM/ 6,200 BPM12V3.9 pounds

Our Top Picks

The following hammer drills excelled in our hands-on tests. Find out what we liked about each one before choosing the best cordless hammer drill for your needs.

Best Overall

DeWalt 20V MAX Brushless 1-Inch Rotary Hammer

 The Best Cordless Hammer Drill Option: DeWalt 20V MAX 1-Inch XR SDS Plus Rotary Hammer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Ergonomic design and comfortable grip
  • 3 modes: drill only, hammer only (chipping), or combo
  • Adjustable depth-stop rod 

What We Don’t Like

  • Slightly heavy for delicate ceramic tile

Specs

  • Maximum speed: 1,100 RPM/4,600 BPM
  • Battery voltage: 20-volt (V)
  • Weight: 6.8 pounds

Traditionally, rotary hammers are large and unwieldy, but that isn’t the case with the DeWalt cordless rotary hammer. This heavy-duty tool has a standard pistol-style grip, which makes it easy to grasp and control. It has a brushless motor that generates up to 4,600 beats per minute (BPM) and a top speed of 1,100 rotations per minute (RPM). While this is lower than some of the other models we tested, that’s simply because this DeWalt drill is built for long-term power rather than speed. 

This model is a tool-only purchase, so we paired it with a DeWalt 5.0-amp-hour (Ah) rechargeable battery for testing. If you need to buy a battery, we wouldn’t suggest anything less than a 3.0Ah option, as this tool simply has too much power and torque for anything without at least that much capacity. Once you insert a battery, you can use the drill on one of three modes: drill only, chipping, or drill and hammer combined. This unit also has an adjustable depth rod, a side accessory handle, a belt hook, and a slotted drive shaft/system (SDS) chuck. 

In testing, this rotary hammer drill powered through all our masonry tasks without a glitch, and its ergonomic design allowed us to get a firm grip to maintain steady pressure. This specific model is a little beefy for drilling through ceramic tile, but we found we were able to drill smooth holes through tiles without cracking or chipping the surface glaze by switching to a smaller bit. 

What our tester says: “We especially like this DeWalt’s chipping feature, which worked well for getting old grout off used bricks. Even though we don’t need this mode on a daily basis, it’s so much quicker and easier than chipping away mortar by hand using a hammer and chisel that we’re really glad it’s an option.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Read the full review: DeWalt 20V MAX XR Brushless 1-Inch Rotary Hammer

Get the DeWalt 1-inch cordless hammer drill at Amazon, Lowe’s, Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best Bang for the Buck

Craftsman V20 Cordless ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit

 The Best Cordless Hammer Drill Option: Craftsman V20 Cordless ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 2 speed options plus drill and hammer modes
  • Suitable for light- to medium-duty projects
  • Onboard LED is helpful in low-light situations

What We Don’t Like

  • Included batteries are relatively low capacity

Specs

  • Maximum speed: 1,500 RPM/25,500 BPM
  • Battery voltage: 20V
  • Weight: 6.1 pounds

Though it’s not a heavy-duty model like our top pick, the Craftsman V20 hammer drill is efficient, affordable, and powerful enough for many DIY uses. It comes with two 1.3Ah batteries and produces up to 1,500 RPM at high speed, sufficient for most light- or medium-duty projects. When it comes to boring holes in brick or concrete, the Craftsman produces up to 25,500 BPM—more than respectable from a value-priced model. We wouldn’t suggest it for someone who needs to drill mainly in dense concrete, but it’s a good pick for drilling through ceramic tile, cinder bricks, or the occasional concrete floor.

In our tests, we were able to make clean holes in tile without causing chipping or cracking on both the high and low speeds. When drilling holes in concrete and cinder brick, the Craftsman tended to bog down slightly if we used too much pressure. That could be related to both its brushed motor—brushed motors aren’t quite as powerful as brushless motors—or it could be associated with its low-capacity batteries. Craftsman tool users with higher-capacity batteries may want to use them in this drill.

Get the Craftsman cordless hammer drill at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Ace Hardware.

Best Heavy-Duty

DeWalt 20V MAX XR ½-Inch Hammer Drill/Driver Kit

 The Best Hammer Drills Option: DeWalt 20V MAX 1-Inch XR SDS Plus Rotary Hammer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • LED light is dimmable and features a spotlight mode
  • Two 5.0Ah batteries and charger are included
  • Comes with a hard case for storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Batteries are a bit hard to remove from the tool

Specs

  • Maximum speed: 2,250 RPM/38,250 BPM 
  • Battery voltage: 20V
  • Weight: 4.4 pounds 

The DeWalt 20V MAX XR cordless drill set is a dependable and powerful hammer drill well suited to DIY and professional use, making it an excellent choice for an all-around hammer drill. As the second DeWalt in our lineup of the best cordless hammer drills, this top-notch pick is a conventional model rather than a rotary one. It features a brushless motor for enhanced power and three modes: drill, hammer drill, and driver.

In testing, the DeWalt hammer drill was impressive. We drilled quickly and without issue through concrete and cinder brick. We did get some surface chipping when drilling through ceramic tile, but that’s not unusual when working with powerful hammer drills. Still, this model’s variable-speed trigger made it much easier to start hammer drilling slowly so we didn’t shatter our glazed tile’s surface. It also has a dimmable LED light that users can set on low to conserve battery power or crank up to high for spotlight-bright illumination. We relied on that handy addition more than once in our tests, and we hope we see that feature added to more power tools. 

What our tester says: “We were impressed when we discovered that this hammer drill comes with two 5.0Ah batteries. Rechargeable lithium-ion batteries can be pricey—sometimes costing as much as the power tool itself—so it was a treat to get two high-capacity batteries alongside this excellent tool.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the DeWalt ½-inch cordless hammer drill at Amazon, Lowe’s, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Northern Tool + Equipment.

Best Medium-Duty

Makita 40V MAX XGT ½-Inch Hammer Driver-Drill Kit

 The Best Cordless Hammer Drill Option: Makita 40V Max XGT Brushless ½-Inch Driver-Drill Kit
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Low vibration reduces hand and arm fatigue
  • Works in 3 modes: hammer, standard, and driver
  • Ample torque for drilling through concrete 

What We Don’t Like

  • Having to press and unlock digital clutch slows use

Specs

  • Maximum speed: 2,600 RPM/39,000 BPM
  • Battery voltage: 40V
  • Weight: 6 pounds 

Makita has a reputation for producing top-notch tools, so while we were excited to test its new hammer drill, we were somewhat skeptical since it features a digital clutch. Considering that all the hammer drills we’ve used previously have clutch rings for manually adjusting the torque needed to insert screws without stripping out the heads, we wondered how a digital clutch would fare. 

To find out, we switched to driver mode to turn on the digital clutch and tested its torque and slip by inserting screws into pine lumber. Overall, it was as accurate as any manual clutch we’ve worked with, but you have to press and temporarily hold an additional digital lock each time you want to select the clutch range. For quick-moving professionals, repeatedly needing to unlock the digital clutch may become annoying, though it may not bother occasional-use DIYers at all. 

Still, our main testing concern was how well the Makita could bore holes in concrete and other masonry materials, and in that area, it performed very well. Its brushless motor delivered ample torque and power, and the percussion hammering was reasonably smooth and didn’t reverberate through our hands and arms as some hammer drills do. The Makita offers two speeds and three modes: hammer drill, standard drill, and driver (for screws). It also has a bright LED light, a removable bar handle for two-hand stability, two 2.5Ah batteries, and a charger.

Get the Makita cordless hammer drill at The Home Depot or Acme Tools.

Best Light-Duty

Skil PWRCORE 20V ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit

 The Best Cordless Hammer Drill Option: Skil PWRCORE 20 20V ½-Inch Hammer Drill Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Also drills in wood and metal 
  • 2 speed settings and 3 modes 
  • Has an LED light and belt clip

What We Don’t Like

  • Not as powerful as the others we tested

Specs

  • Maximum speed: 1,450 RPM/ 21,750 BPM
  • Battery voltage: 20V
  • Weight: 4.32 pounds  

When it comes to minor home repairs or DIY projects, the Skil 20V ½-inch hammer drill is a reliable option. This three-in-one tool functions as a hammer drill, drill, and screwdriver and has two speed settings. It comes with a 2.0Ah battery, which is on the low-capacity side yet still powerful enough for drilling the occasional hole in a concrete patio or basement floor. Since it doesn’t have a brushless motor, it’s best for light-duty tasks. 

In our tests, the Skil successfully drilled through cinder brick and ceramic tile, creating very smooth holes without causing chipping. In hammer mode, it vibrated more than other models we tested, but it wasn’t too much to handle. We think this Skil is a useful and cost-effective option for around-the-house drilling and light masonry tasks so long as you don’t need to drill more than a dozen holes in succession. We also recommend you don’t use too much pressure, as its motor bogs down a bit under increased force but drills just fine once you ease up.

Get the Skil cordless hammer drill at Amazon or Lowe’s.

Best Compact

Milwaukee M12 Fuel ⅝-Inch SDS Plus Rotary Hammer Kit

 The Best Cordless Hammer Drill Option Milwaukee M12 Fuel ⅝-Inch SDS Plus Rotary Hammer Kit
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact and lightweight
  • LED light is nice and bright 
  • Plenty of power and torque for a small cordless electric drill 

What We Don’t Like

  • No accessory bar for 2-handed use

Specs

  • Maximum speed: 900 RPM/ 6,200 BPM
  • Battery voltage: 12V
  • Weight: 3.9 pounds 

Hammer drills are typically more powerful than standard drills, so we were initially puzzled to see Milwaukee making a 12-volt version when most are 20 or even 40 volts. Surprisingly, this compact model proved pretty powerful in our tests, quickly drilling holes in concrete, cinder brick, and tile. We found it perfect for use in tight spots and appreciated that its smooth and comfortable hammering action felt more like a gentle vibration than percussion. 

Still, this 12-volt tool isn’t going to replace a full-size rotary hammer drill anytime soon. Its low-voltage motor is better suited to light-duty tasks rather than commercial or heavy DIY use, and it only has two modes: drill and hammer drill. Since it does provide excellent performance for its size, it would be a quality pick for a pro, such as an electrician or plumber, who has to drill occasional holes in a masonry wall to run wiring or conduit. It’s lightweight enough to use as a one-handed hammer drill, though it would be nice if it came with an accessory bar for added stability.

Get the Milwaukee cordless hammer drill at Amazon or The Home Depot. 

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Cordless Hammer Drills 

To select models for our hands-on tests, we looked at the power output, speed, motor type, battery type, weight, and unique features of dozens of popular options. We then fit a select few with masonry bits and used them to drill through concrete, ceramic tile, and cinder bricks. As we tested, we awarded points based on performance, material quality, ergonomics, and efficacy of special features. We then used the scores to determine which award each tool deserved. 

The Best Cordless Hammer Drill Options
Photo: Glenda Taylor

What to Consider When Choosing a Cordless Hammer Drill

Certain features make some hammer drills better than others. Consider the following before buying one of the top cordless drills recommended above.

Drilling Materials

A standard drill and drill bit will barely scratch the surface of porcelain tile, a concrete walkway, or a stone countertop, yet a hammer drill fitted with a masonry bit will easily bore through these dense materials. Masonry bits have wings on the tips that help them remove dust as they drill, and their points are more chisel-like than those on standard bits. Even the best drill bits will dull or break almost immediately if they aren’t meant to penetrate the surface of masonry material, so using proper masonry bits is essential for dense surfaces.

Motors

Power tools like cordless drills have either brushed or brushless motors. Brushed motors use older technology to send power to a coil attached to a shaft. As the shaft begins to spin, the drill delivers power and torque.

Brushless motors are far more efficient. They use sensors and control boards to send an electrical current to coils that spin a magnet attached to a shaft. This method produces significantly more torque and uses far less battery power than a brushed motor. If you need to drill numerous holes, purchasing a brushless hammer drill might be worth the extra expense for the time it saves.

RPM, Torque, and BPM

When it comes to speed, consider a drill with a maximum RPM speed of 1,000 or more. Though that much speed is probably not necessary to drill through masonry materials, it allows the tool to be used as a drill driver when it’s not boring holes through concrete and brick. 

Torque (twisting force) is also essential. To indicate torque, manufacturers may use “unit watts out” or UWO, which is a complex measurement of drill power at the chuck. A drill with at least 700 UWO should serve most purposes. Not all manufacturers list UWO, however. 

Additionally, beats per minute, or BPM, should be a consideration. This measurement unit describes how often the hammer gear strikes the chuck per minute. A hammer drill with a BPM rating of 20,000 to 30,000 is suitable for most scenarios, though heavier-duty models might offer lower BPM in exchange for increased torque. For example, drilling large-diameter holes may be easier with a hammer drill with high torque power, even if it has a lower BPM rating. 

Clutch

Because hammer drills create so much torque, users need a way to regulate how much of that torque is available when using the drive feature on the tool to insert screws (if applicable). Too much torque can break a driver bit or strip out the head of the screw. 

Manufacturers may incorporate adjustable clutches in their hammer drills to control torque output, but not all models have this option. Adjusting the clutch usually requires users to twist a collar at the base of the chuck to the correct position, though that position is always different from tool to tool and is dependent on the type of drilled material. For example, porcelain tile, which is very hard, might require a high clutch setting (as long as the fastener can handle it), while porous cinder brick will require less.

Chuck

There are two types of chucks to become familiar with: 3-jaw chucks and SDS chucks.  

Most medium-duty hammer drills use 3-jaw chucks. They clamp down on a round or hexagonal surface when the user twists the chuck. Three-jaw chucks allow users to use a wide range of drill bits and driver bits, which is why they’re nearly universal on drill drivers. They come in ½-inch and ⅜-inch sizes, with the larger size being more heavy duty. 

Rotary hammers use SDS chucks that accept SDS bits. These bits have grooved shanks that lock into place. SDS is a German innovation, and the letters originally stood for the German words “steck, dreh, sitz,” which mean “insert, twist, stay.” Today, SDS is more commonly used to represent the English phrase “slotted drive system” or “slotted drive shaft.” These bits are different because rotary hammers provide massive force, which requires a more secure method of holding onto a bit.

Battery Type and Life

The main types of batteries that come with any cordless power drill are nickel-cadmium (NiCd for short) and lithium-ion. Lithium-ion batteries are replacing NiCd because they’re more efficient and last longer during use and in overall lifespan. They’re also considerably lighter. All the models that we tested came with lithium-ion batteries.

Battery life during use is typically measured in Ah. For light-duty drill drivers, 2.0Ah batteries may be sufficient. When slamming a bit into masonry, however, users might want a battery to last longer. They will want to look for batteries with amp-hour ratings of 3.0Ah or more or choose a corded drill instead. For those who need higher amp-hour ratings, batteries up to 12Ah can typically be purchased separately.

Size and Weight

When shopping for the best cordless hammer drill for your particular needs, remember to consider project requirements. For example, drilling through porcelain wall tiles doesn’t require much torque, speed, or BPM. A light-duty, compact hammer drill weighing around 2 pounds (without the battery) can do the trick. On the other hand, drilling large holes for structural anchors in concrete will require a much larger, heavier hammer drill, possibly even a rotary hammer, which can weigh as much as 8 pounds without the battery. 

A medium-duty hammer drill is an excellent choice for many DIY applications since it can tackle most projects. However, it will be significantly heavier than a standard drill driver (often as much as twice the weight), so it might not be ideal as the only drill driver in a workshop.

FAQs 

If you’ve never used a hammer drill before, you might still have questions about the tools and how they work. Below are answers to some of the most frequently asked questions to help point you in the right direction.

Q. Can a hammer drill be used as a chisel?

If it has a chipping feature, you can use a rotary hammer drill as a chisel, such as our best overall pick in this lineup.

Q. Can I turn the hammer drill part off and use it as a regular drill?

Yes, many hammer drills function as drill drivers, though their high power might be overkill for most projects around the house.

Q. Why is my hammer drill not hammering?

Here are a few reasons your drill may not be hammering:
 
You’re not putting enough pressure on the bit. The drill must feel some resistance from the bit to hammer it into the material.
Your drill isn’t in hammer mode. There might be a dial on the side of the drill or a collar at the top of the machine that allows you to switch the drill into and out of hammer mode. 
Your hammer gear might have broken. Most likely, this is due to age or misuse, but it’s best to check into a new one if this is the case.

Q. When should you not use a cordless hammer drill?

To answer this question, we interviewed Eduard Mirzoian, CEO of the emergency restoration company Restorerz. Eduard says that “some materials do not take as well to drilling using cordless hammer drills. Take, for example, extremely difficult materials like stone or massive metal.” You may need a corded hammer drill that offers more power and torque or diamond-tip bits to breach incredibly dense materials such as these. 

Q. Is a cordless hammer drill worth it?

According to building expert Eduard Mirzoian, “It is worth having a cordless hammer drill if portability and versatility are crucial.” He points out that cordless hammer drills allow you to work away from outlets but that you also need to be sure you consider the battery life necessary for your project so you don’t run out of power in the middle of your task.

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a product tester and writer specializing in construction, remodeling, and real estate. She and her husband own a general contracting company, and she is experienced in both residential and commercial building applications. Taylor tests a wide range of power tools as well as other home improvement, household, and lawn-and-garden products.

Additional research provided by Tom Scalisi.

The post Our Favorite Cordless Hammer Drill Has a Added Feature We Never Knew We Needed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-09T02:31:15-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Stainable Wood Fillers of 2025 for Repairing Furniture, Decks, and More]]>Start your own shopping trip for the best stainable wood filler with our recommendations. See shopping tips and top-rated options here.

The post The Best Stainable Wood Fillers of 2025 for Repairing Furniture, Decks, and More appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-stainable-wood-filler/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=138935Thu, 09 Jan 2025 02:16:15 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWorkshopWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Wood fillers help hide the appearance of cuts, cracks, and nail holes in painted or finished wood trim and furniture, but they are also frequently used to fill in gaps that remain after putting up drywall or installing a new door frame. The best way to ensure that guests never notice the patches is to invest in a stainable product that has a texture similar to that of the adjacent wood. We put five of the top stainable wood fillers to the test to determine which ones perform the best. 

Finding a wood filler that blends well with the wood type, is easy to apply, and doesn’t cost a fortune is key to getting good results. After testing each wood filler on a variety of wood surfaces, we found Minwax, with its easy-to-use design, superior finish, and affordable price to be the best of the bunch. Read on to discover more of the best stainable wood fillers on the market and to learn more about our test results. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Minwax 42853000 Stainable Wood Filler
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BUDGET: J-B Weld 8257 Kirkwood Wood Repair Epoxy Putty Stick
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST EPOXY: Abatron WoodEpox Epoxy Wood Replacement Compound
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST FOR OAK: Goodfilla Water-Based Wood & Grain Filler
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST CELLULOSE BASED: Elmer’s E887Q Stainable Wood Filler, 3.25-Ounce
    Jump to Review
The Best Stainable Wood Filler Options
Photo: Tony Carrick for Bob Vila
Minwax 42853000 Stainable Wood FillerJ-B Weld 8257 Kirkwood Wood Repair Epoxy Putty Stick
Abatron WoodEpox Epoxy Wood Replacement CompoundGoodfilla Water-Based Wood & Grain FillerElmer’s E887Q Stainable Wood Filler
TypeLatex-basedEpoxyEpoxyCellulose-basedCellulose-based
Indoor/OutdoorBothBothBothBothBoth
Drying Time15 minutes15-25 minutes1-3 minutes15 minutesUp to 24 hours

Our Top Picks

The products below are our top picks for some of the best stainable wood fillers based on quality, price, and the shopping considerations mentioned above. Regardless of the specific attributes of a wood project, there’s a stainable filler below that fits the bill.

Best Overall

Minwax 42853000 Stainable Wood Filler

 The Best Stainable Wood Option: FillerMinwax 42853000 Stainable Wood Filler, 16-Ounce
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Consistency makes it easy to apply
  • No shrinkage while drying 
  • Matches natural wood color

What We Don’t Like

  • Not quite as strong as some wood fillers

Specs 

  • Type: Latex based
  • Quantity: 16 ounces 
  • Indoor/Outdoor: Both
  • Drying Time: 15 minutes

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Appearance 4.5/5; Durability 4/5; Value 5/5 

Minwax wood filler yields excellent results, is easy to use, and doesn’t cost much, which is why it tops our list of wood fillers. With its latex-based formula, Minwax has a smooth mud-like consistency that is very easy to spread over larger and smaller gaps and cracks. There were no lumps to work around, and it was thin enough that we didn’t need to use our fingers to apply it. We were able to fill a ¾-inch diameter hole that was ¼-inch deep with ease. 

Whereas other wood fillers took hours to dry, Minwax is a fast-drying liquid wood filler, ready for sanding in smaller cracks in under an hour and for larger jobs in about four hours, speeding along the job so we could move onto the staining phase. It also doesn’t shrink as it dries, so there was no need to apply a second layer to fill in gaps. Once dry, the filler’s smooth consistency meant that it was easy to sand the surface down to a stainable finish. Though not quite as strong as some of the cellulose-based wood fillers we’ve tried, Minwax still held up well to bumps and knocks once dry and fully cured. Minwax also took the stain well, and its natural wood color was a close match to our pine board. 

What our tester says: “Minwax has that just right consistency for filling in tiny nail holes or larger cracks. I was able to make even larger repairs with a single application, which isn’t the norm with most wood fillers.” —Tony Carrick, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Minwax wood filler on Amazon or at Lowe’s.

Best Budget

J-B Weld 8257 KwikWood Wood Repair Epoxy Putty Stick

 The Best Stainable Wood Option: FillerJ-B Weld 8257 KwikWood Wood Repair Epoxy Putty Stick
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Simple-to-use roll design 
  • Easy to apply to cracks and chips
  • Creates a strong bond

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t hold stain as well as others
  • Lumpier consistency

Specs 

  • Type: Epoxy based
  • Quantity: 1 ounce 
  • Indoor/Outdoor: Both
  • Drying Time: 15 to 25 minutes 

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Appearance 4/5; Durability 4/5; Value 5/5 

Scratches, dents, and nicks occur frequently around the home, and they’re usually not large enough to warrant a full bucket of wood filler. However, once enough of those little imperfections have accumulated, you’ll want to fix them. This J-B Weld epoxy-based stainable wood filler is affordable and can be applied quickly with just your fingers.

The 3.5-inch-long tube of filler has two separate parts of an epoxy formula that you knead together to prep. If you don’t mind getting your fingers a little dirty, JB Weld is very easy to use. We could pinch off a very precise amount of the filler, press it together to mix, and its Play-Doh-like consistency made it easy to push into small gaps and cracks with our fingers.

Kwikwood does have noticeably larger particles of wood in it than other fillers. While this helped to create a strong, hard repair, it also made it more challenging to achieve a smooth finish that was level with the surrounding wood. We spent more time during the sanding phase to blend it evenly with the surrounding wood surface than we did with some of the other wood fillers we tested. 

True to its name, Kwikwood dries quickly, taking between 20 minutes to set for a shallow repair and about an hour for our larger ¾-inch in diameter, ¼-inch deep divot. While this made for a quick turnaround time, we found that Kwikwood didn’t hold wood stain particularly well. The instructions advise mixing the stain into the filler before applying. This process was messy and the stain didn’t mix evenly into the filler. These characteristics make it a good choice for fast repairs on surfaces you intend to paint over or cover but not ideal for filling chips, cracks, or nail holes on stained furniture. 

Get the J-B Weld wood filler on Amazon or at Lowe’s.

Best Epoxy

Abatron WoodEpox Epoxy Wood Replacement Compound

 The Best Stainable Wood Filler Option Abatron WoodEpox Epoxy Wood Replacement Compound
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Resists rot, mildew, and water
  • Consistency makes it easy to apply once mixed
  • Sands easily to a smooth, even finish

What We Don’t Like

  • Need to mix it ahead of time
  • Doesn’t match natural wood color

Specs 

  • Type: Epoxy based
  • Quantity: 12 ounces 
  • Indoor/Outdoor: Both
  • Drying Time: 1 to 3 hours 

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.3/5; Appearance 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4/5 

While most wood fillers are rated for indoor and outdoor use, they lack the durability of Abatron WoodEpox epoxy-based wood filler, which has a formula specifically designed to resist mold, mildew, rot, and water. Once the stainable and paintable wood filler is dry, it will remain permanently bonded to the wood around it and will not shrink over time or with changing weather conditions. This ability to ward off Mother Nature makes the waterproof, solvent-free wood filler a good solution for repairing decks, outdoor wood furniture, and other outdoor woodwork. 

WoodEpox comes in two separate containers that are mixed in equal parts to produce 12 ounces of filler. Divvying out equal parts and mixing them in a separate container made the application process a little more complicated than most wood fillers. Similar to other epoxy wood fillers, we found that the best way to mix the two-part compound was by kneading it with our fingers. Once mixed, the putty-like consistency allowed us to push WoodEpox into cracks and divots with relative ease. 

WoodEpox dried in about an hour for our shallow repair and in a few hours for our larger divot repair. Since WoodEpox has a smooth consistency, it was relatively easy to sand. And while it holds stain well, it dries to a lighter white consistency that doesn’t match natural wood color, thus limiting its use to painted surfaces and darker opaque stains. 

Get the Abatron wood filler at Amazon or Walmart.

Best for Furniture

Goodfilla Water-Based Wood & Grain Filler

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Smooth consistency makes it easy to work with
  • Matches wood color well 
  • Sands to a smooth finish

What We Don’t Like

  • Too pricey for filling nail holes

Specs 

  • Type: Cellulose based 
  • Quantity: 8 ounces 
  • Indoor/Outdoor: Both
  • Drying Time: 15 minutes 

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.7/5; Appearance 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.5/5 

With its great color-matching quality and smooth consistency, Goodfilla is a favorite for making repairs to wood furniture. The cellulose-based, stainable wood filler has a finish that resembles the grain and color of natural red oak. If the initial color doesn’t quite match the existing flooring or furniture, the filler can be mixed with stains, tints, pigments, or dyes to achieve the perfect shade.

You get what you pay for with Goodfilla. While it was certainly the priciest of the wood fillers we tested, it also performed better than any of them. Its consistency is smooth and butterlike, which made filling everything from small nail holes to larger ¾-inch divots easy. Goodfilla dries quickly, is easy to sand, and has no shrinkage, so there was no need for a second coat on any of our test pieces. It dries to a rock-hard shell that held up to our efforts to chip and dent it. Goodfilla also did the best job of matching the surrounding wood color, and we found it to be one of the best wood fillers when it came to receiving stain. 

While Goodfella’s high price tag may not make it a good choice for basic jobs, such as filling nail holes in baseboards, it’s certainly worth the cost if you’re repairing chips and cracks in wood furniture and other finish carpentry. 

What our tester says: “I love how easy this product is to apply. It goes on smooth, fills even larger holes well, and sands down to an even finish that matches bare wood seamlessly.” —Tony Carrick, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Goodfilla grain filler on Amazon and Walmart.

Best Cellulose Based

Elmer's E887Q Stainable Wood Filler, 3.25-Ounce

 The Best Stainable Wood Option: FillerElmer's E887Q Stainable Wood Filler, 3.25-Ounce
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Easy to use for smaller repairs
  • Matches wood color well 
  • Sands easily 

What We Don’t Like

  • Hard to get a lot of product out of the bottl

Specs 

  • Type: Cellulose based 
  • Quantity: 3.25 ounces 
  • Indoor/Outdoor: Both
  • Drying Time: Up to 24 hours 

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Appearance 5/5; Durability 4/5; Value 4/5 

Cellulose-based, stainable wood fillers like this one from Elmer’s use fibers that imitate the feel and appearance of real wood. In its squeeze bottle form, Elmer’s is designed to be an easy and cheap fix for small repairs, including cracks, chips and nail holes. 

Elmer’s was the only wood filler we tested that uses a squeeze bottle design, and we had mixed feelings about it. The small applicator point, coupled with the thick consistency that’s characteristic of a cellulose-based wood filler, made it a challenge to squeeze filler out. We found that massaging the bottle with our fingers prior to removing the cap and cutting a large opening on the tip helped to make squeezing filler out of the bottle an easier process. But while we were able to coax enough wood filler out to handle smaller repairs, this is clearly not a wood filler designed to handle larger ones, such as our 3/4-inch diameter divot.

That said, the convenient squeeze bottle design made it a quick and easy option for filling nail holes and smaller chips. We were able to squeeze out a dab onto the repair and scrape away excess with a putty knife. Elmers also dried to a hard consistency quickly and was relatively easy to sand. Once dry, it was a close match to natural wood color and held stain and paint well. 

Get the Elmer’s stainable wood filler at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Stainable Wood Fillers

After researching the top stainable wood fillers for repairing furniture, flooring, and more, we discovered that the best options are determined by their type, quantity, drying time, compatibility with multiple surfaces, and other special features included by select brands. Keeping that in mind, we chose five good stainable wood fillers and put them to the test. 

We conducted three tests with each filler, using them to fill small nails holes, small cracks, and a large ¾-inch wide divot. We evaluated each filler based on several factors, including how easy it was to apply, the amount of time it took to dry, how easily we were able to sand it to a smooth, level finish, and its ability to match natural wood and receive stain. Finally, we factored in price to determine the overall value of each stainable wood filler. 

Testing Stats
Products tested 5
Time spent testing 6 hours
Tests performed3
Price range$6-$12]

What to Consider When Choosing a Stainable Wood Filler

Before choosing a stainable wood filler to renew the look of old furniture or to fix baseboards, consider important factors like drying time and the quantity of filler required. Once you have a better idea of your requirements, you’ll be able to find the best stainable wood filler for your project.

Types of Stainable Wood Fillers

The four basic types of stainable wood fillers are categorized by their formulas: gypsum-based, epoxy-based, vinyl-based, and cellulose-based.

Gypsum-based

Gypsum-based stainable wood fillers are typically used for indoor repairs to fill gaps in baseboards and drywall. This type of filler is made out of gypsum dust that must be mixed with water to create the paste. Once the filler has dried, it is no longer pliable. Instead, it takes on a similar consistency to hardwood or even rock, in some cases. 

Gypsum-based wood fillers are the most affordable type of filler. Because these fillers are susceptible to water damage, even after the filler has dried, they shouldn’t be used in locations where they may be exposed to moisture.

Epoxy-based

Epoxy wood fillers are the most durable and resistant, but they also require the most preparation before use. For the epoxy to have the desired consistency and adhesion, the two parts must be mixed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Once the epoxy is mixed, it can be applied to the affected area.

Ideal for use in outdoor conditions, epoxy-based wood fillers can expand and contract with changing temperatures. Because of their natural water resistance, they’re also the best suited fillers to seal the wall or foundation of a home against wind and rain.

Latex-based

Latex-based stainable wood fillers are commonly used for outdoor locations because they require less initial preparation than epoxies. They also set very quickly after they have been applied and are usually water-resistant within an hour. Latex fillers are also easy to work with, so they’re useful for fixing holes, repairing gouges, rebuilding portions of rotted wood, and restoring outdoor furniture.

When latex-based fillers have fully dried, they have a rigid consistency like hardwood. This consistency allows you to use sandpaper on the filler to create a smooth finish. You can also drive nails or fasten screws through latex filler without damaging the repair, adding to their durability.

Cellulose-based

Cellulose-based fillers are another official category of stainable wood filler, though they’re rarely labeled as such on product packaging. Instead, cellulose-based fillers’ packaging will indicate that they contain real wood fibers. Compared to latex-based fillers and epoxies, these wood fillers are relatively inexpensive. Because cellulose fillers are water soluble, they can be mixed with stain to create a richly colored material before application.

Some cellulose-based fillers can be used outdoors, but others are strictly for indoor use. Be sure to consult the product’s directions to verify how and where the filler can be used.

Project

The type of project will determine which stainable wood filler best suits your needs. Factors like preparation time, the amount of filler required, and any constraints around drying time (like impending rain) should all inform the product choice. 

  • Indoor projects can range from filling a gap between baseboards to touching up a piece of fine wooden furniture or repairing hardwood floors. Though any suitable wood filler can be used for indoor projects like these, epoxy fillers would be the last resort, as they take much longer to prepare and dry than other formulations.
  • Outdoor projects that require a stainable exterior wood filler might include fixing gouges in a fence, repairing cracks in a deck, restoring and staining outdoor furniture, and sealing up holes in a home’s exterior wall to protect from the elements. The best choice for projects like these is an epoxy-based stainable wood filler. For smaller repairs, it’s fine to use a latex-based outdoor wood filler or even a cellulose-based filler that is rated for exterior use.

Versatility

Most wood fillers are sold in small containers, each with a specialized purpose for one kind of minor repair or another. If you’re in renovation mode and need a lot of stainable wood filler to complete a long list of projects, it’s best to invest in a bulk wood filler product that has a wide range of applications. 

Before purchasing a large quantity of stainable wood filler, confirm whether it’s suitable for both indoor and outdoor use. Also consider how malleable the filler is before it dries—if you’re going to buy in bulk, it may be worth purchasing a small container to check how easy it is to work with before buying the large container. Examine the manufacturer’s recommended uses for the product, and the consistency of the filler when it has fully cured. For instance, it’s a good idea to use an epoxy-based stainable wood filler to fix a hole in an exterior wall because epoxy adapts best to temperature fluctuations.

Quantity

The quantity of wood filler required will depend on the scope of the project. The good news is that wood filler manufacturers sell their products in a variety of quantities, from miniscule to a bucketful, so you won’t have to pay for a ton of filler just to repair a few scratches.

For minor repairs, there are stainable wood fillers that come in a form similar to a crayon, allowing you to fill shallow cracks by simply swiping the filler material over them. Stainable wood filler packages between 8 to 16 ounces are appropriate for mid-size projects, like touching up the gaps after replacing the baseboards in a home. Any fillers that exceed this quantity are best for larger projects, like renovating an entire room or repairing an old deck or fence.

Drying Time

Be sure to note the approximate drying time of the stainable wood filler to determine exactly how long you have to complete a repair and smooth out the area before the filler hardens. Some products dry very quickly, which is convenient for outdoor applications, as it’s important for the filler to dry before it’s exposed to rain or snow.

When using stainable wood filler to repair a larger section of wood, it’s best to use a product that takes a while to dry; this will allow time to make the repair and form the filler into the desired shape. Drying time varies from product to product, so be sure to refer to the manufacturer’s directions for details.

FAQs 

If you’re still wondering how to select the right stainable wood filler for your project, review the answers to these frequently asked questions.

Q: How do you apply wood filler?

The easiest way to apply wood filler is to use a putty knife. Begin pressing the filler into the top of the affected area and slowly manipulate it into the repair, overfilling if necessary. After the crack, gouge, or scratch is filled, but before the filler dries, use the putty knife to remove any excess so it’s flush with the surface.

Q: How do you prepare a wood filler?

Some wood fillers, including epoxy-based and powder fillers, have to be mixed before they can be used. To prepare the stainable wood filler, carefully follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer. This usually involves mixing two parts of an epoxy together or mixing water with a powdered filler.

Q: How do you stain wood filler?

After sanding your wood and preparing the repaired area, apply the stain directly to the filler using a small paintbrush, or stain the entire piece of wood and the filler together for a more uniform look. 
If you have concerns about how the stain will look on the filler when it dries, test it out first on a scrap piece of wood. When the filler on the scrap wood is dry, test the stain so that you know how it will look before you commit to staining your furniture, floor, or any other wooden surface. 

Q: What is the difference between wood putty and wood filler?

The main difference between wood putty and wood filler is that putty typically remains somewhat pliable, which allows it to shrink and expand with the cold. This makes wood putty suitable for filling large gaps in a wall. Wood filler hardens to a consistency that’s similar to wood because it contains sawdust and wood fibers. Wood putty is made primarily of plastics, though there are also some plastic wood fillers.

Q: What is the best material to fill large gaps in wood?

The best material to fill large gaps in wood depends on the size of the gap. Furniture and wood floor fillers are the best option if the gap is no more than ¾-inch inch in diameter. For larger holes, you’ll need to use a plug of wood or sawdust along with wood filler to make the repair. 

Q: How thick can wood filler be applied?

You can generally apply wood filler to a thickness of up to ⅜ inch. Any thicker and the repair is less likely to hold up over time. 

Q: Can you drill into a wood filler patch?

Wood fillers dry hard enough that you can drill or screw into them. That said, if you do plan to do either, we suggest using an epoxy wood filler, which dries harder than other types of wood fillers. 

Q: How long does stainable wood filler take to dry?

How long wood filler takes to dry varies depending on the size of the repair. Most wood fillers dry in less than 30 minutes for small repairs, such as filling nail holes. Larger repairs, such as filling a large crack, can take 4 to 6 hours to dry and as much as a full day to cure. 

Meet the Tester

Tony Carrick is a freelance writer specializing in home improvement, landscaping, technology, home security, and design. His articles have been featured on such sites as Popular Mechanics, Futurism, SFGate, Pro Tools Review, and more. Tony has conducted rigorous product testing on everything from power tools to home security systems to backyard grills. With each review, his goal is to help readers determine whether a product meets their needs and if it is or isn’t worth its price tag.

Additional research provided by Timothy Dale.

The post The Best Stainable Wood Fillers of 2025 for Repairing Furniture, Decks, and More appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-09T02:16:15-05:00
<![CDATA[Dremel’s New Products Can Replace Your Portable Circular Saw Setup]]>The post Dremel’s New Products Can Replace Your Portable Circular Saw Setup appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/dremel-saw-station-blueprint-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=423289Tue, 07 Jan 2025 14:48:44 -0500ReviewsDIYHand ToolsPower ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

As a long-time Dremel fan, I’ve used their high-quality rotary tools for filing, sanding, cutting, engraving, and even grooming my dog’s nails. But, the new Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station and Dremel Multi-Drill take multi-use tools to a new level. Naturally, I couldn’t wait to put them to the test in my home and workshop. 


The portable saw station features a compact circular saw stowed in a hard case that folds out to form a cutting table with clamps, gauges, and more. The Dremel Multi-Drill handles standard drill/driver tasks but also features a built-in stud finder, bubble level, and laser level for added precision. Keep reading to learn more about each of these innovative 12V cordless Dremel tools and how they fared in my hands-on tests.

Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station: At a Glance

Our rating: 4.9/5

Our rating: 4.9/5

Dremel portable saw station on white background

Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station

Portable Saw Station Specs
PowerCordless/battery
Voltage Rating12V
Max cut depth1 inch
Bevel capacity0 to 45 degrees
AccessoriesConvertible case, clamps, miter risers, stud holder, table extender
Model CS12V-S1C

Buy on Amazon for $149.99

Testing the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station

The portable saw station is inclusive–everything comes neatly packed in a well-designed hard case that weighs about 16 pounds. After removing the tool and accessories, I unfolded the inner sides of the case–transforming it into a mini table saw base. 

Dremel’s compact circular saw features a 3-⅜-inch blade with a max cutting depth of 1 inch, and the saw station has a built-in miter gauge for making angled cuts. The features don’t stop there; however, Dremel designed this to be a multi-use saw, and I could also make beveled cuts (up to 45 degrees) by attaching two (included) bevel risers to the table.

I tested the saw station by cutting pine boards, hardwood oak flooring planks, laminated wood, and contoured cove trim boards. Dremel designed its portable saw station for beginners, but I also found it ideal for making precise finish carpentry cuts. The saw itself cuts at 5,000 RPM, and I was impressed with the smooth cut edges.

  • Tools and accessories stowed in the case of the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station
  • Making a straight cut on the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station
  • Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station Tool and Accessories
  • Bright LED laser guide on the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station
  • Extended long board holder on the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station
  • Making a miter cut on the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station

While cutting on the saw station, I was limited to relatively low-profile boards (about ¾-inch thick), but that didn’t stop me from cutting 2X4 studs. This isn’t a framing saw, but Dremel includes a clamp-on 2X4 cutting guide that allowed me to freehand cut one side of the stud, flip it over, and cut the other side–and the cut edge was perfect! 

Dremel thought of everything a homeowner or DIYer would need when designing the portable saw station. I’ll stick with my DeWalt miter saw for heavy-duty construction projects, but the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station is perfect for installing trim, cutting vinyl or hardwood flooring, creating custom picture frames, and crafting home decor projects. 

I thoroughly enjoyed testing this innovative compact saw  and recommend it to anyone who wants to make various precision cuts for small-scale projects. 

What We LikeWhat We Don’t Like
Makes straight, miter, and bevel cutsNot designed for heavy-duty construction
Great for finish carpentry
Ideal for trim, flooring, and frames
Produces clean, smooth cut edges

Buy the Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station on:

Dremel Blueprint Multi-Drill: At a Glance

Our rating: 4.8/5

Dremel Blueprint Multi-Drill on white background

Dremel Blueprint Multi-Drill

Multi-Drill Specs
PowerCordless/Battery
Voltage Rating12V
Maximum speedUp to 800 RPM
Included accessoriesBattery, Charger, laser, bubble level, stud finder
ModelDD12V-S1

Buy on Amazon for $99.99

Testing the Dremel Blueprint Multi-Drill

If you’ve ever had to hunt down a cordless drill, a stud finder, and a level—each seemingly hiding in a different corner of your workspace just to hang a new picture—you’re not alone. Simple home improvement projects shouldn’t have to involve a scavenger hunt and Dremel just came up with the perfect solution. 

The Dremel Blueprint Multi-Drill is a drill, a driver, a stud finder, a laser line, and a bubble level—all in one. I had a blast testing this multi-use tool; it’s lightweight (1.14 pounds), compact, and has everything needed to hang shelves and pictures or assemble furniture. 

I tested the Dremel multi-drill by drilling several holes in scrap boards, installing and removing dozens of fasteners, and then I put it to the ultimate test by hanging a new picture in my home. 

  • Dremel Blueprint Multi-Drill and Bit set
  • Drilling with the Dremel Blueprint multi-drill
  • Adjustable clutch on Dremel Blueprint drill
  • Bright LED guide light on the Dremel Blueprint multi-drill
  • Bubble and laser level
  • Dremel Bluepring removable laser level

The 12-volt battery (included) and the laser level charge separately. While I automatically charged the battery as soon as I unboxed it, I spaced out charging the laser, so I had to postpone my picture-hanging for about 30 minutes while I charged it (via USB port). 

The multi-drill generates a max of 1,000 RPM, which is excellent for small-to-moderate DIY tasks. It doesn’t have the torque to build a deck, but that’s not its purpose. I found it more than adequate for around-the-home tasks. 

I used all the features of the multi-drill when hanging my picture. First, I used the studfinder to locate a stud behind the drywall, then I used the drill/driver to drill the hole and insert the screw, and finally, I used the bubble/laser level to ensure the picture frame was level. It worked like a charm. I won’t be storing the Dremel Blueprint multi-drill in my truck tool box–it has a designated spot in my hall closet where I can grab it quickly for home improvement and decor projects. 

What We LikeWhat We Don’t Like
All-in-one designLimited torque–not for heavy-duty projects
Lightweight and portable (1.14 pound)
Compact and easy to store

Buy the Dremel Multi-Drill on:

So, is the Dremel Blueprint saw station or multi-drill right for you?

Both new Dremel tools excelled in my hands-on tests. The Dremel Blueprint Portable Saw Station is an excellent choice for homeowners who want to tackle small-scale projects, such as cutting trim or installing vinyl flooring or hardwood planks. It makes precise straight, miter, and bevel cuts on low-profile boards (up to about ¾ inches thick). Using its clamp-on stud guide, it can also make clean freehand cuts on 2-by lumber.

It’s a great little saw setup, but it won’t replace a standard table saw or circular saw for heavy-duty construction projects. Still, it’s inclusive, and it’s hard to beat if you’re creating decor or building custom picture frames. I’ve used many power tools, and the portable saw station is hands down my favorite for small projects. It has everything I need in one transformable case. 

The Dremel multi-drill is great for anyone looking for a lightweight tool to handle everyday home tasks, such as hanging pictures, installing shelves, or assembling furniture. It doesn’t have the torque needed to build a fence or deck, but its all-in-one design supplies all the tools you’ll need to find studs, drill, drive,  and level. You can’t ask for more than that in a handy household tool.

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a contractor, product tester, and writer focusing primarily on construction, DIY tools, and home appliances.

The post Dremel’s New Products Can Replace Your Portable Circular Saw Setup appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-07T14:48:44-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Coping Saws for Cutting Molding, Tested]]>Coping saws offer the ability to make intricate cuts to molding. Check out our guide's reviews to find the best coping saw for tackling any trim job.

The post The Best Coping Saws for Cutting Molding, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-coping-saw/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=139643Mon, 06 Jan 2025 13:43:25 -0500ReviewsHand ToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

A good coping saw belongs in the shop or tool box of any woodworker, regardless of skill. Small and versatile, these saws have thin, flexible blades with sharp teeth that are great for many uses, including cutting molding and baseboards, cutting in non-straight lines, and making intricate cuts too small for other saws. In fact, a coping saw should be one of the first tools a beginning craftsperson learns to use—which is why we tested five of the best saws on the market, judging them based on factors like comfort, ease of use, quality of cuts, and more.

While these types of saws mostly look the same, the devil is in the details. The best coping saws are those with a comfortable handle and a firm mechanism for locking the blade in place. Our favorite is the Bahco 301 61/2-inch coping saw, which makes a great addition to any woodshop with its incredibly comfortable handle and solid cutting action. But there are many other saws worth considering, including a few we liked but weren’t able to test ourselves. Read on to find out more information and help pick the best coping saw for you.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Bahco 301 6½-Inch Coping Saw
    Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Irwin Tools 2014400 ProTouch Coping Saw
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Olson Saw SF63510 Coping Saw
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST VERSATILITY: MegaCast 3-in-1 Saw Set
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST SET: Kakuri Coping Saw Set
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST CLASSIC DESIGN: Eclipse 70-CP1R Steel Frame Coping Saw
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST LONG-LASTING: Magic Saw Magic Frame Coping Saw
    Jump to Review
The Best Coping Saw Option Olson
Photo: Mike Larson for Bob Vila

Our Top Picks

Best Overall

Bahco 301 6½-Inch Coping Saw

 Best Coping Saw Options: BAHCO 301 6 1 2 Inch Coping Saw
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Smooth beechwood handle is comfortable for long use
  • Hand screw mechanism holds blade tight with no give
  • Blade cuts easily cuts through both hard and soft wood
  • Attractive design for such a simple tool

What We Don’t Like

  • A little pricey, but worth it
  • Swedish tool may be difficult to find in brick-and-mortar retailers

Specs 

  • Handle Material: Beechwood
  • Weight: 9.2 ounces
  • Total Length: 11.8 inches
  • Blade Length: 6.5 inches

Our Ratings: Comfort 5/5; Cutting action 5/5; Visual appeal 5/5; Ease of use 4/5; Price 4/5 

Simplicity can sometimes be deceiving. There isn’t much to a coping saw, but quality does matter. While the Bahco 301 looks like a bare-bones tool, there’s more than meets the eye. Out of the box, it looks like it could be just another coping saw—but once it’s your hand, you know that it’s something special.

Consisting of a nickel-plated steel frame with a bright orange handle, the saw is both visually appealing and incredibly effective. The handle is comfortable. Even though it’s a wooden coping saw handle, it feels soft and easy to hold. It’s so comfortable, in fact, that after using it for almost an hour, we hardly felt any hand fatigue. The action on the saw is also great. The included blade (6 ½ inches with 14 teeth per inch) is by far the best we tested. From an efficiency standpoint, the saw is fantastic. It didn’t matter what wood we put the saw to; it glided through without issue. From pine and birch to walnut and maple, the Bahco 301 cuts easily without ever stalling or suffering from blade bend. This is a wonderful tool for intricate, bending cuts and straight joinery. 

On the downside, the price is a little steep compared to the other saws. There are some quality coping saws out there for under $10, but the Bahco 310 ranges from $17 to $25. Take our word for it, though: it’s worth it. 

What our Tester Says: “I loved the feel of the Bahco 301. It literally feels like the extension of your hand when you’re using it. The blade cuts incredibly smooth and makes this saw a must-have.” —Mike Larson, Product Reviews tester and writer.

 Get the Bahco 301 Coping Saw at Amazon, Pro Tool Warehouse, or Abolox.

Runner-up

Irwin Tools ProTouch Coping Saw (2014400)

 The Coping Saw Option: IRWIN Tools ProTouch Coping Saw 2014400
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • One of the more reasonably priced saws, especially because it works so well
  • Blade stays tight and does exactly what you want it to do
  • Handle remains comfortable even after lengthy use

What We Don’t Like

  • Plastic handle and tighteners don’t look quite as nice as some of the other saws with wood handles and steel tighteners

Specs 

  • Handle Material: Plastic and rubber
  • Weight: 8 ounces
  • Blade Length: 6.5 inches

Our Ratings: Comfort 4/5; Cutting action 4/5; Visual appeal 3/5; Ease of use 4/5; Price 4/5

The Irwin ProTouch Coping Saw is one of the highest-performing saws that we tested. With sturdy construction and a comfortable handle, the saw features a 6.5-inch blade that includes 17 teeth per inch, perfect for coping saw use. The mechanism that holds the blade does a great job, keeping it tight for any number of cutting applications.

From an efficiency standpoint, the Irwin saw works as well as any we tested. The blade cut straight and had no issues with any of the wood species we tested on, from soft pine all the way to the harder oak and walnut. Cuts were crisp, leaving behind no markings on the wood.

Our only complaint about the saw has nothing to do with the way it works. Compared to the others we tested, the Irwin just doesn’t look as good. The plastic handle and tightening knobs don’t have the same sleek visual appearance, so for woodworkers who value the look of the tools hanging on their pegboards, this might not be ideal. But looks aren’t everything, as they say, and this is a high-quality, high-performing saw at an affordable price.

Get the Irwin ProTouch Coping Saw at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Walmart.

Best Bang for the Buck

Olson Saw SF63510 Coping Saw

 Best Coping Saw Options: OLSON SAW SF63510 Coping Saw
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • One of the best and most affordable saws available 
  • Cuts beautifully with little effort
  • Blade is 360-degree adjustable 

What We Don’t Like

  • Blade needs to be tightened after extended use

Specs 

  • Handle Material: Hardwood
  • Weight: 9.6 ounces
  • Total Length: 11 inches
  • Blade Length: 7.5 inches

Our Ratings: Comfort 4/5; Cutting action 4/5; Visual appeal 3/5; Ease of use 4/5; Price 5/5

The Olson Saw SF63510 is the epitome of a truly quality product that is genuinely affordable. While the Bahco 301 might be a Cadillac of coping saws, the Olson is more like a Volvo; it looks great, works great, and comes at a good price.

Again, the saw looks simple, featuring a natural wood finish on the handle. The blade action on this saw is smooth and flexible. While there was a little bit of resistance on the hardwood species—the walnut required a little extra care and finesse—for the most part, the saw cut through most of the species easily. A solid saw for either a DIYer or a professional, the saw’s 360-degree adjustable blade was useful when making complicated or angled cuts. 

The Olson Saw is also one of the lighter saws we tested, making it easy and comfortable to use. Our only real criticism with this particular saw was that after using it for a long time, the blade had to be tightened to keep it moving smoothly; not a huge problem and something users should be checking periodically on any saw, but nevertheless something to watch. Despite this one downside, the Olson Saw is still a solid and affordable choice.

Get the Olson SF63510 Coping Saw at Home Depot or Walmart.

Best Versatility

MegaCast 3-in-1 Saw Set

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Only saw we tested with an adjustable frame
  • Includes several blades and a bench clamp
  • Beveled wooden handle feels good in the hand 

What We Don’t Like

  • Adjustable frame needs to be tightened frequently

Specs 

  • Handle Material: Wood
  • Weight: 9 ounces
  • Total Length: 12 inches 
  • Blade Length: Adjustable from .5 inch to 5 inches 

Our Ratings: Comfort 4/5; Cutting action 4/5; Visual appeal 3/5; Ease of use 4/5; Price 4/5

While technically not a true coping saw, the MegaCast jeweler’s saw works the same way, and can be used on a variety of materials. The key to the MegaCast is its adjustable frame, which can handle an array of different blade sizes. Smaller, finer blades can cut through thinner woods and metals, while bigger, sturdier blades can cut through thick woods and plastics.

Due to its adjustable frame, the MegaCast looks a little bit more complex than the simpler coping saws, but it is still extremely easy to use. With a beveled wood handle, the saw is easy to hold and allows for hours of comfortable cutting. The only downside is that the screw that holds the frame in place once it’s adjusted to the proper length does need to be tightened from time to time. 

The saw includes several blades in five different sizes, giving the user plenty of options right out of the box. This is a perfect saw for a hobbyist who needs a saw for both intricate cuts and more rough work.

Get the MegaCast Saw at Amazon or WoodArt Supply.

Best Set

Kakuri Coping Saw Set

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • All-purpose design can cut wood, plastic, and light metals
  • Includes several interchangeable blades
  • Deep frame allows for cutting thick items like plastic

What We Don’t Like

  • Short handle may be hard to grasp

Specs 

  • Handle Material: Wood
  • Weight: 7.4 ounces
  • Total Length: 11.8 inches
  • Blade Length: 5.1 inches

Our Ratings: Comfort 3.5/5; Cutting action 4/5; Visual appeal 3/5; Ease of use 4/5; Price 4/5

The Kakuri coping saw is a fine option for anyone looking to cut a variety of materials. From wood to metal and plastic, the Kakuri does a great job. The action from the included blades is great, and the saw performs well, making straight, clean cuts in all of the materials we tested. One of the highlights of this saw is that it includes five different blades from small to large. The larger blades can tackle thick hardwood, while the smaller ones work best on softer woods or thin metal pipes.

The saw also features a 6.3-inch deep frame, which is about an inch deeper than all the other saws we tested. A deeper frame allows it to cut through thicker materials. 

Our only downside with this saw was its handle, which was just a little too short for our liking and could make managing the saw difficult for those with larger hands. The weight of the deeper frame coupled with the short handle made it feel a little top-heavy at times. While not a deal breaker for us, it’s still worth considering if balance and a larger grip surface are important.

Get the Kakuri Coping Saw at Amazon or Sears.

More Great Options

There’s no shortage of good coping saws out there, and while we were able to put many through their paces in our testing, there were a few others we came across in our research that we think are worth considering. If you’re still wondering about options after reading the above reviews, check out the ones below. 

Best Classic Design

Eclipse 70-CP1R Steel Frame Coping Saw

 Best Coping Saw Options: Eclipse 70-CP1R Wood Handle and Steel Frame
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Attractive look with a polished wooden handle and a black steel frame
  • Sturdy tool that can keep up with a steady workload
  • Unique blade can spin 360 degrees

What We Don’t Like

  • Higher price than similar saws

Specs 

  • Handle Material: Wood
  • Total Length: 12 ⅜ inches
  • Depth: 5 ⅛ inches

What you see is what you get with the Eclipse, a solid, well-made coping saw. Eclipse has an impressive pedigree in the tool-making industry, having produced saws since 1909. You don’t stay in business for that long without making quality products.

At 12 ⅜ inches long and with a depth of 5 ⅛ inch, the Eclipse is a versatile saw that can handle a variety of materials, from wood to plastic and even metal. A blade that swivels 360 degrees makes it possible to cut at any angle. The only downside is that you will probably pay a bit more for the Eclipse than some of the others we tested: At just under $30, this is on the higher end for coping saws. 

Get the Eclipse Coping Saw at Amazon, Walmart, or Woodcraft

Best Long-Lasting

Magic Saw Magic Frame Coping Saw

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Cuts through a range of materials
  • Included blade is made of strong, flexible carbon
  • Strong blade doesn’t give even under stress

What We Don’t Like

  • May be difficult to replace non-standard blade size

Specs 

  • Weight 6 ounces
  • Total Length: 10.83 inches
  • Depth: 4.9 inches

The first thing we thought when we saw the Magic Coping Saw was that it was definitely unique. The saw features one-piece construction, with the frame and handle as one. This not only gives it a look that stands out, but it also lends it a more sturdy feel. However, the real advantage of the saw is a carbon blade that can cut through just about anything, including wood, bamboo, wrought iron, aluminum and plastic. This is a true coping saw for metal, which can be difficult to find, and it offers the benefit of cutting other materials as well. It cut through any material we threw at it smoothly and uniformly.

Unfortunately, the saw doesn’t use standard blade sizes, so new ones need to be purchased directly through the manufacturer, Han-A Tools.

Get the Magic Coping Saw at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose and Tested the Best Coping Saws

Choosing the best saw for your needs is harder than it looks. If you Google “coping saw” you’ll get pages and pages of saws that, for the most part, look exactly the same. So when choosing saws to test, we looked at tools that had been mostly well-reviewed by people who had bought them, tools that were no more than $30, and tools that looked like quality products to our experienced eyes. We wanted to test saws that we would want to buy, as well as saws that looked solidly constructed and would last. We also limited ourselves to hand saws, choosing not to include electric coping saws or power coping saws.

The testing process was mostly uniform, with each saw being used for about an hour on several different materials, including different species of wood as well as different metals and plastics. To test blade efficiency, we timed ourselves while cutting uniform strips of wood with each saw, trying to maintain the same cutting speed and pressure. As a way to gauge comfort, we used our bare hands on each saw.

Testing Stats
Products tested 5
Time spent testing 1 hour
Tests performed4
Price range$10-25

What to Consider When Choosing a Coping Saw

As we’ve discussed, while many coping saws are similar, they are not all the same. If you’re wondering “what is a coping saw?” or trying to determine the many uses of a coping saw, we’ve laid out the basics to help you on your way. 

Blade Type

The blade is, not surprisingly, the most important part of the saw. Steel coping saw blades seem to be the norm, although more expensive carbon blades will stay sharper longer. However, steel blades work just fine for cutting most materials. Be cognizant of how many teeth per inch your blade has—15 to 20 is normally a good range.

Blade Connection and Tension

While the blade is the most important part, a saw is useless without a good means of keeping it locked in place. Look for saws that have screw turn tensioners, preferably with easy-to-grip heads. Having to use a screwdriver to torque down the blade will waste time.

Throat

Most coping saws have a throat depth between 5 and 7 inches. This can be important depending on the size of the material you’re cutting. If you plan on doing molding work, where material is only going to be a few inches thick, a smaller throat is fine. But for cutting large PVC pipe, a bigger throat is a better choice.

Handle and Ergonomics

No matter how effective a saw is, if it’s not comfortable to use, you might as well get rid of it: An uncomfortable tool will cause hand fatigue sooner and result in less-precise work. In our testing, we found that polished wood and plastic handles felt great. A nice bevel or an ergonomic shape were definitely beneficial, but not worth spending a lot extra for over the standard smooth handles.

FAQs

Coping saws are simple tools, but choosing one that works well for your project and your hand makes a big difference in the outcome of the work. You still might have some questions about coping saws, including how they work and how they differ from other saws such as miter and chop saws. We answered a few here to help as you begin shopping.

Q. What are the disadvantages of a coping saw?

Similar to hand scroll saws, coping saws are designed for a specific use—namely cutting materials that are only a few inches thick. Their relatively small throat depth means they’re not ideal for cutting especially thick or dense materials, and also means that the size of the cuts they can make are limited. While we tested some versatile models, a coping saw is not an all-purpose tool. 

Q. Can you sharpen a coping saw?

The short answer is yes. The reasonable answer is, yes, but it’s probably not worth it. Coping saw blades are relatively inexpensive to replace. The small teeth on a coping saw blade makes it really difficult to sharpen effectively, so when the blade gets dull, just buy a new one.

Q. Can you cut metal with a coping saw?

Most people only think of using a coping saw for wood, but most coping saws should be able to handle both materials as long as an appropriate blade is installed: Blades for wood and metal are different. As long as the wood blade is changed out for one designed for cutting metal, coping saws should be able to cut metal effectively.

Meet the Tester

Mike Larson is a professional journalist and DIYer in Pittsburgh. He’s become an experienced coping saw aficionado after replacing the baseboard trim in his 100-year old house. As a product tester, he likes to use a method and criteria that reveals the value of the product as a whole in a way that helps other DIYers and craftspeople.

Additional research provided by Mike Bruton.

The post The Best Coping Saws for Cutting Molding, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-06T13:43:25-05:00
<![CDATA[The Best Chainsaw Mills for Cutting Lumber]]>The best chainsaw mills convert rough logs into useful boards and beams right where the tree was felled. See our list of top picks.

The post The Best Chainsaw Mills for Cutting Lumber appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-chainsaw-mills/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-chainsaw-mills/Mon, 06 Jan 2025 10:50:51 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Processing logs using a chainsaw mill is a cost-effective alternative to buying lumber, as store-bought wood is often expensive and inconsistent in quality. A chainsaw mill attachment provides complete control over beam and board sizes as well as close monitoring of quality. Though a portable chainsaw sawmill will typically be made for smaller-diameter trees, it will also come at a much more affordable price than a larger sawmill. 

As useful as they are, chainsaw mills aren’t particularly common tools, so many people don’t understand which features are important. To help you choose the right mill for your needs, we researched the best options on the market and spoke with a woodworker who uses one on a regular basis. Based on our efforts and his insights, we chose the Granberg G778-36 36″ Alaskan MKIV Chainsaw Mill as our top pick for its quality construction, light weight, and ease of use. However, several other versions of these tools are also worth considering. Read on for a list of the seven best chainsaw mills as well as details on which features matter most when selecting one. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Granberg G778-36 36″ Alaskan MKIV Chainsaw Mill
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Zozen Portable Chainsaw Mill
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST COMPACT: Carmyra 24″ Portable Chainsaw Mill
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST FOR BEGINNERS: Timber Tuff Adjustable Lumber Cutting Guide
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Carmyra 48″ Portable Chainsaw Mill
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. HONORABLE MENTION: Granberg G777 Alaskan Small Log Mill
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. ALSO CONSIDER: XRKJ 36″ Chainsaw Mill
    ↓ Jump to Review
The Best Chainsaw Mills
Photo: Amazon

Product NameBar SizeCutting CapacityWeight
Granberg G778-36 36″ Alaskan MKIV Chainsaw Mill20 to 36 inches½ to 13 inches thick; 32 inches wide20 pounds
Zozen Portable Chainsaw Mill14 to 36 inches½ to 12 inches thick19 pounds
Carmyra 24″ Portable Chainsaw Mill14 to 24 inches½ to 13 inches thick; 18½ inches wide13 pounds
Timber Tuff Adjustable Lumber Cutting GuideAnySee product description below3½ pounds
Carmyra 48″ Portable Chainsaw Mill14 to 48 inches½ to 13 inches thick; 43½ inches wide16½ pounds
Granberg G777 Alaskan Small Log Mill16 to 20 inches½ to 13 inches thick; 18 inches wide10 pounds
XRKJ 36″ Chainsaw Mill 12 to 36 inches½ to 13 inches thick; 32 inches wide16 pounds

Our Top Picks

The following products are some of the best chainsaw mills available. We recommend you read through each model’s specs to find the right size mill then compare what we like and don’t about each to help make your final choice. For more detailed information on how to choose a chainsaw log mill, be sure to check out the shopping considerations near the end of this guide.

Best Overall

Granberg G778-36 36" Alaskan MKIV Chainsaw Mill

 The Best Chainsaw Mills Option: Granberg G778 36-Inch Alaskan MKIV Chainsaw Mill
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • High-quality steel and aluminum construction
  • Widely recognized for accuracy and durability
  • Works for both left- and right-handed users

What We Don’t Like

  • Higher price than similar-size competitors
  • Assembly takes around 30 minutes

Specs

  • Bar size 20 inches to 36 inches
  • Cutting capacity ½ inch to 13 inches thick; 32 inches wide
  • Weight 20 pounds

The Granberg Alaskan MKIV chainsaw mill takes top honors for its build quality, ease of use, and versatile functionality. The sturdy construction combines heavy-duty zinc-plated steel and aircraft-grade aluminum. It takes around 30 minutes to assemble, but once assembled, its clearly marked depth scales make clamping and adjustment fast and easy. At only 20 pounds, it’s portable, too.

The Granberg Alaskan MKIV chainsaw mill is designed to take a maximum 36-inch chainsaw, and the manufacturer recommends using a good chainsaw with a motor capacity of 70 cubic centimeters (cc) or better. It can take smaller chainsaws, but if you’re working with a smaller chainsaw, consider a lower-cost mill, as the Granberg isn’t cheap. Remember also that the bar clamp takes 3 to 4 inches from the cutting capacity, so using a 20-inch bar, for example, restricts the cut to around 16 inches.

Get the Granberg G778 chainsaw mill at Amazon, Walmart, Northern Tool + Equipment, or Acme Tools.

Best Bang for the Buck

Zozen Portable Chainsaw Mill

 The Best Chainsaw Mills Option: Zozen Portable Chainsaw Mill
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Competitive price for an entry-level tool
  • Easy to set up
  • Convenient adjustable handle

What We Don’t Like

  • Confusing instructions
  • An additional cross brace would increase stability

Specs

  • Bar Size 14 inches to 36 inches
  • Cutting capacity ½ inch to 12 inches thick
  • Weight 19 pounds

We chose the Zozen chainsaw mill as our best bang for the buck pick based on its competitive price point, solid construction, ease of use, and portability. It’s made of quality alloy and steel, and the bar is adjustable from 14 to 36 inches. 

Included with the chainsaw mill are four felling wedges that serve to ensure a more precise cut when milling. The adjustable handle is convenient for allowing even pressure while moving through the log. It’s very lightweight at only 19 pounds, and the portable design allows for backyard milling or easy transportation to more remote locations when required. 

Get the Zozen chainsaw mill at Amazon or Sawyer Supply

Best Compact

Carmyra 24" Portable Chainsaw Mill

 The Best Chainsaw Mills Option: Carmyra 24-Inch Portable Chainsaw Mill
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact dimensions ideal for smaller chainsaws
  • Can produce useful 18½-inch-wide boards
  • Great for low-volume users

What We Don’t Like

  • Instructions are poor but videos are available

Specs

  • Bar Size 14 inches to 24 inches
  • Cutting capacity ½ inch to 13 inches thick; 18½ inches wide
  • Weight 13 pounds

The Carmyra portable chainsaw mill uses the same popular and effective design as many competitors. It’s made from a combination of galvanized steel and aluminum, resulting in a good balance between strength and portability. For those who process lumber infrequently or need relatively low lumber volumes, this sawmill is a good tool with a competitive price.

This 24-inch Carmyra model is particularly suitable for those who only need to mill small to medium-size logs. As is common, the clamp reduces the overall cutting width, in this case, by approximately 4½ inches. This results in a maximum cut of little more than 18 inches. While it’s smaller than many competitors, the Carmyra still produces planks that are useful for a wide range of projects. 

Get the Carmyra 24-inch chainsaw mill at Amazon.

Best for Beginners

Timber Tuff Adjustable Lumber Cutting Guide

 The Best Chainsaw Mills Option: Timber Tuff TMW-56 Lumber Cutting Guide
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Heavy-duty steel and powder-coated construction
  • Costs considerably less than competitors
  • Can accept any size chainsaw

What We Don’t Like

  • No preset depth guide
  • Cut takes time to set up; slow operation

Specs

  • Bar Size Any
  • Cutting capacity See description below
  • Weight 3½ pounds

The Timber Tuff is called an adjustable cutting guide rather than a chainsaw mill because it operates slightly differently. The heavy-duty steel guide is designed to run along a piece of store-bought lumber, such as a 2×2, 2×4, or 2×6. The user simply nails or screws the store-bought board to a log, bolts the chainsaw bar to the Timber Tuff, and runs the guide along the board. Though the process is different, the results are similar to those produced by a milling attachment for a chainsaw. 

While setting up each cut takes a little more time and care than other types of chainsaw mills, it is light, simple, effective, and comes at a very low cost. Additionally, its cutting capacity is limited only by the size of the chainsaw used, and its cutting widths are defined by where users position the board for each cut.

Get the Timber Tuff chainsaw mill at Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Target, or Grainger.

Best Heavy-Duty

Carmyra 48" Portable Chainsaw Mill

 The Best Chainsaw Mills Option: Carmyra 48-Inch Chainsaw Mill
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Steel and aluminum construction
  • Designed for heavy-duty milling
  • Competitively priced and capable of high productivity

What We Don’t Like

  • Instructions are poor
  • Won’t fit some small chainsaws

Specs

  • Bar Size 14 inches to 48 inches
  • Cutting capacity ½ inch to 13 inches thick; 43½ inches wide
  • Weight 16½ pounds

Those needing to saw large logs will want to take a closer look at this 48-inch Carmyra chainsaw mill. Even with some width loss due to the clamping mechanism, it can still saw boards up to an impressive 43½ inches wide. Like its smaller counterparts, it also has the versatility to mill thicknesses from just ½ inch up to 13 inches.

The design is popular and well proven. It uses a combination of steel for toughness and durability with aluminum to keep the weight manageable. Despite the heavy-duty nature of this chainsaw mill, it weighs only 16½ pounds. Although rated for chainsaws as small as 14 inches, some bars are too narrow to accommodate the clamp. However, in reality, those with small chainsaws have no need for a portable lumber mill this large.

Get the Carmyra 48-inch chainsaw mill at Amazon.

Honorable Mention

Granberg G777 Alaskan Small Log Mill

 The Best Chainsaw Mills Option: Granberg G777 Alaskan Small Log Mill
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact mill from a quality brand
  • Light weight for milling in the field
  • Improved end brackets are strong and reliable

What We Don’t Like

  • Single-sided design lacks stability
  • First cut impacts subsequent boards

Specs

  • Bar Size 16 inches to 20 inches
  • Cutting capacity ½ inch to 13 inches thick; 18 inches wide
  • Weight 10 pounds

Granberg classifies its G777 as a small-log chainsaw mill. While capacities aren’t equal to the Alaskan MKIV, the G777 is a quality tool that offers versatility in cutting depth. It’s also more compact and lighter than the Alaskan MKIV, making it ideal for field use when more modest log sizes are available.

The G777 tracks across the board’s surface like other horizontal mills, but it’s only supported on one side. As a result, users should take care when setting up the first cut. Subsequent cuts also require focus to maintain accuracy, though most users should acclimate to the tool quickly.quent cuts also require focus to maintain accuracy, though most users should acclimate to the tool quickly.

Get the Granberg G777 chainsaw mill at Amazon, Northern Tool + Equipment, or Acme Tools.

Also Consider

XRKJ 36-Inch Chainsaw Mill

 The Best Chainsaw Mills Option: XRKJ 36-Inch Chainsaw Mill
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact mill from a quality brand
  • Light weight for milling in the field
  • Improved end brackets are strong and reliable

What We Don’t Like

  • Single-sided design lacks stability
  • First cut impacts subsequent boards

Specs

  • Bar Size 16 inches to 20 inches
  • Cutting capacity ½ inch to 13 inches thick; 18 inches wide
  • Weight 10 pounds

Featuring a design similar to the Granberg Alaskan MKIV, the XRKJ is a low-cost horizontal chainsaw mill constructed from quality materials. For the occasional user, it also offers good value for the money. 

Its steel and aluminum construction mean it’s not only strong but also lightweight. Although the minimum bar size is listed as 12 inches, the resulting maximum cut is only around 8 inches. Additionally, chainsaws of that size are unlikely to provide sufficient power, so a 20-inch chainsaw is the smallest practical size. 

Get the XRKJ chainsaw mill at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Chainsaw Mills

As the owner of a large property, I have considerable experience choosing a good chainsaw for milling and other maintenance and improvement tasks. Since I’m also an engineer by profession, choosing the best portable sawmill for a chainsaw plus a lineup of several more top options gave me a chance to use my training. When selecting our list of recommended products, I used the following criteria:

  • Build quality: Chainsaw mills aren’t likely to be treated with a great deal of care, so the materials they’re made from matter. Each model chosen has the strength and durability to withstand a tough working environment.
  • Brand: Many of our choices come from brands that have extended experience in the field and a recognized reputation. However, several well-made tools from lesser-known manufacturers are also on our list.
  • Value: Most chainsaw mills are very affordable, particularly when weighing the potential savings over store-bought lumber. Nevertheless, we were careful to pick models within a range of prices to offer something for every budget.

What to Consider When Choosing a Chainsaw Mill

A chainsaw mill (also called a “chainsaw sawmill” or “Alaskan sawmill”) isn’t a particularly complicated device. However, each chainsaw mill will possess certain key features that differentiate it from others. 

Chainsaw Compatibility

You can consider chainsaw mill compatibility in terms of both power requirements and whether it will fit your chainsaw. As with choosing the best wood chipper to cut branches and twigs into mulch, cutting planks with a chainsaw mill requires a saw with considerable power. While a few cordless chainsaws offer comparable performance for tree felling or log cutting, milling takes a lot of energy and can drain electric batteries quickly. Even if you have one of the best corded electric chainsaws, the amount of power necessary for milling could cause the saw to overheat. That leaves gas-powered chainsaws as the only sensible choice. 

When describing compatibility, many chainsaw mill manufacturers describe their tools as fitting “most types of chainsaws.” However, there will still be restrictions regarding bar length, so a minimum engine displacement (defined in cubic centimeters) will be suggested. 

Bar Capacity and Cutting Depth

Chainsaws are usually described by their bar length: 16 inches, 24 inches, etc. When considering chainsaw mills, bar size has a major impact on the maximum diameter of the logs they can mill and, thus, the width of planks they can produce. (For more on chainsaw bar length, see our guide on how to measure a chainsaw bar.) 

Be aware, however, that the stated dimensions can sometimes be misleading. If the mill clamps the bar end, as many do, it reduces the length available for cutting. While bar size is important for fitting the chainsaw to the mill, users will also want to check the mill’s cut size to determine its actual capacity.

Cutting depth is another key feature, and it depends on the type of chainsaw mill chosen. Some cut with the chainsaw held vertically (often called “edging mills”). These offer unlimited versatility, but repeatable accuracy is more challenging. Other mills cut with the chainsaw mounted horizontally, which can be set to a consistent thickness. Most run from ½ inch to 12 inches, though cuts as thin as ⅕ inch are possible. Some large-capacity models can exceed 15 inches.

Ease of Use

Small chainsaw mills frequently arrive ready to go right out of the box, but larger models generally require some assembly. Chainsaw mills are typically not complicated devices, but the quality of their instructions varies. While most chainsaw mills clamp the chainsaw bar, some require drilling, which entails extra work. It’s probably best to avoid those models, as many options exist that don’t require drilling.

Chainsaw mills fall into two categories: edging mills and horizontal mills. Edging mills must be run on a board mounted to the log, and they’re generally used for squaring up logs for building purposes rather than for cutting multiple planks. Horizontal mills rest on top of the log and cut consistent plank thicknesses. Adjustment is usually straightforward via a couple of bolts.

Portability and Durability

One of the biggest advantages of a chainsaw mill is portability, and these small tools often weigh under 20 pounds. Because they’re so lightweight, users can easily take the mill to the felled tree and work on-site. Jarrod Rodgers, sawyer, woodworker, and owner of Second Life Design, a custom woodworking business based in Rantoul, Illinois, prefers to bring felled trees home and process them there. He says, “The DIY aspect of a chainsaw mill is a big appeal, and I use my chainsaw mill in my driveway in the middle of town.”

Chainsaw mills are usually constructed from a mix of steel and aluminum. Steel offers great strength, so it’s used for the main structural components that hold things together. These pieces are generally also electroplated (usually with zinc, nickel, or chrome) to protect against rust. Since aluminum is much lighter, it’s generally used for guide rails. 

How to Use a Chainsaw Mill

Chainsaw mills are a reasonably simple tool to use, but always follow basic safety precautions. Also, take a couple of important steps when setting up the mill to ensure consistent, quality results.

  • Ensure the log to be cut is stable. Use chocks underneath to prevent any chance of it rolling.
  • Follow general safety rules regarding how to use a chainsaw. Wear substantial footwear, gloves, a face shield, and ear protection. Chainsaw chaps are also a good idea.
  • Check that the chainsaw chain is sharp and use a chainsaw sharpener if necessary. A blunt chain is not simply inefficient—it’s also more likely to bind or jump off the bar.
  • The first cut is key, as it provides the surface for each consecutive cut. When used by itself, the mill rests on uneven bark and trimmed branches, which means making a clean, even cut is almost impossible. To remove that rough surface, some kind of guide is necessary.
  • Edge mills usually run along a length of shop-bought or precut board that’s screwed to the log. Horizontal mills often require you to affix a jig to the log. Some people rig up an ordinary aluminum ladder, but getting it level can be challenging. Purpose-built jigs are available that are much easier to adjust.
  • Once the outer layer is removed, horizontal mills can rest on the now-flat surface. It’s not a complicated process, but you will want to take care when making the initial cut, even if you have a sharp chainsaw milling chain on one of the best chainsaws

FAQs

The sections above offer an in-depth look at the technical aspects of chainsaw mills. However, since many DIYers have never used a chainsaw mill, it’s expected that there may still be some remaining questions that need answers. 

Q. Should I purchase a chainsaw mill or a bandsaw mill?

If you’re looking for an affordable, easily portable tool for sawing a modest number of logs per year, the chainsaw mill is probably the better choice, especially if you already own a suitable chainsaw. A bandsaw mill offers higher productivity and less waste, but most are a lot more expensive. They are more likely to appeal to those who are milling logs commercially.

Q. What’s the best size chainsaw to use with a chainsaw mill?

Each chainsaw mill has a maximum size chainsaw that will fit it. As this is one of those occasions when you can never have too much power, experts recommend using the biggest chainsaw possible within the specifications of the chosen mill.

Q. If I have a smaller bar, can I still use a larger mill?

Often you can, but it depends on the mill. Most chainsaw mills offer a degree of versatility; however, it’s important to check the minimum size. Usually, this is around 14 inches. That said, a chainsaw with a bar that short might not have the necessary power to cut effectively. Also, remember that a smaller bar length restricts the size of logs you can cut.

Q. How big of a chainsaw do I need for an Alaskan mill?

There are numerous models of Alaskan mills, ranging from the smallest, which can take a 12-inch chainsaw, to the largest, which can use a 60-inch chainsaw. It is important not to underestimate your needs. Choose a chainsaw that will comfortably cut the diameter of logs you use regularly. Remember that clamping the chainsaw bar will usually reduce the usable length by 3 or 4 inches.

Q. How long does it take to cut planks with a chainsaw mill?

Chainsaw milling is not a fast process, and how long it takes depends a lot on the log size and material density. Pine, for example, is easier to saw than oak. Knots or twisted grain will have an impact, as will the chain’s sharpness and power. With so many variables, it’s difficult to be precise, though most experts suggest between 10 and 20 minutes per cut as an average.

Q. How much power is necessary for a saw?

When it comes to chainsaw mill work, the more power, the better. This is both for cutting speed and minimizing the stress on the chainsaw motor. Experts suggest a 50cc gas chainsaw as an absolute minimum, though 70cc and above is typically recommended. Additionally, using one of the best chainsaw bar oils will keep the exterior moving parts of the saw operating smoothly. 

Q. What is a ripping chain?

A standard chainsaw chain is designed to cut across the tree trunk for felling or cutting logs for firewood. Effectively, this means you’re cutting across the grain. A ripping chain is designed to cut with the grain along the length of the trunk, so it’s better when using a chainsaw mill.

Q. What are a chainsaw mill’s limitations?

Each chainsaw mill has a maximum depth of cut and maximum width. How the mill clamps the chainsaw blade has an impact, so check the chainsaw mill’s specifications carefully.

The post The Best Chainsaw Mills for Cutting Lumber appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-06T10:50:51-05:00
<![CDATA[This Was the Only Caulking Gun I Could Use One-Handed Comfortably]]>The best caulking gun can make easy work of any caulking project. We recently put our top picks to the test to see how they hold up during use. Check out the reviews here.

The post This Was the Only Caulking Gun I Could Use One-Handed Comfortably appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-caulking-gun/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=102416Mon, 06 Jan 2025 10:09:06 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Caulking guns deliver a continuous bead of caulk to seal joints between two surfaces, such as gaps between window frames and jambs. Most caulking guns today are manual, meaning you squeeze a hand trigger to dispense the sealant. However, powered caulking guns are growing in popularity because all you need to do is guide the tip to create a smooth, continuous bead of caulk.

Choosing the ideal caulking gun will depend on the type of caulk you’re using, as well as the project’s overall scope and budget. To help you decide, we tested eight popular options in real-world applications and contacted an expert to get their insights. Based on our hands-on tests and our expert’s experience, we chose the Newborn 250 Smooth Rod Revolving Frame Caulking Gun as the best overall option. It’s comfortable to grip, easy to use, and offers the smoothest rotation of all tested models. 

We’ve included​​ the rest of our recommendations on the best caulking guns below, as well as useful tips for how to choose the tool that’s right for you. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Newborn 250 Smooth Rod Revolving Frame Caulking Gun
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Newborn 188 Ratchet Rod Cradle Caulking Gun
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Bates Choice 10:1 Thrust Ratio Caulking Gun
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST GRIP: Newborn Octogun 930-GTD Hex Rod Cradle Caulking GunGun
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR THICK SEALANTS: PC Products Steel Dispensing Caulking Gun
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Chicago Pneumatic CP9885 Series Caulking Gun
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST BATTERY: DeWalt DCE560B 20V Max Adhesive Gun
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. ALSO CONSIDER: Red Devil 9-Inch Extreme Duty Caulking Gun
    ↓ Jump to Review
The Best Caulking Guns Options
Photo: Tom Scalisi for Bob Vila

Caulking Guns Comparison Chart

Our Top Picks

There’s a lot to consider when choosing the best caulking gun, and the sheer volume of information can feel overwhelming. To help you fill in the gaps, we detail the results of our hands-on tests and each item’s pros and cons below.

Best Overall

Newborn 250 Smooth Rod Revolving Frame Caulking Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: Newborn 250 Smooth Rod Revolving Frame Caulking Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Smooth rotation makes applying caulk and sealant easy
  • Comfortable grip reduces hand fatigue
  • Built-in cutter cuts spouts cleanly and efficiently

What We Don’t Like

  • Rubber coating on just 1 grip instead of 2

Specs

  • Rod type Smooth
  • Thrust ratio 18:1
  • Revolving Yes

During testing, we found applying caulk and sealant using the Newborn 250 easy and smooth. The frame rotates smoothly (certainly the smoothest of all the models), and the hand grips are very comfortable. It also has a revolving frame, making it much easier to caulk around corners. Instead of having to stop and restart, simply rotate the barrel, and the angled tip of the tube rotates to the correct position to continue running a bead. 

The Newborn 250 is built to last with a handle made of zinc alloy to reduce corrosion. The tool features a hefty 18:1 thrust ratio to easily dispense medium-viscosity caulk, including butyl and acrylic. It also has a thumb release for dripless operation, and we really liked the built-in cutter (which most high-thrust caulking guns don’t have). This model does drip a bit, but the release is easy to access and press with one hand. Our only complaint is that just one handle has a rubber coating—coating both handles would be a benefit.

What our tester says: “The frame on this model rotated more smoothly than all the other units we tested, making it incredibly easy to apply caulk and sealant evenly.”—Tom Scalisi, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Newborn 250 caulking gun at Amazon, Ace Hardware, Lowe’s, or Newborn.

Runner-Up

Newborn 188 Ratchet Rod Cradle Caulking Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: Newborn 188 Ratchet Rod Cradle Caulking Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Built-in cutter and puncture tool
  • Sturdy welded construction will stand the test of time
  • Ratchet pressure rod mitigates dripping

What We Don’t Like

  • Tougher to squeeze than other models

Specs

  • Rod type Ratcheting
  • Thrust ratio 6:1
  • Revolving No

For occasional small projects, such as caulking between a shower or bathtub and the wall, check out this nicely priced and super-dependable option from Newborn. The 188 ratchet rod cradle caulking gun has a traditional ratchet rod design and a 6:1 thrust ratio that’s best for dispensing low-viscosity sealant, such as painter’s latex caulk. It comes with a built-in pin for puncturing the seal on the caulk tube and a built-in cutter to nip off the tube’s tip.

During testing, we found quite a few things to like about the Newborn 188. For one, we appreciated the sturdy welded construction, which felt quality despite this option’s reasonable price tag. We also liked the built-in cutter and puncture tool, which made getting to work faster and easier. The one downside we found was that this caulking gun was more difficult to squeeze than others, making it best for small projects.

Get the Newborn 188 caulking gun at Amazon or Lowe’s.

Best Bang for the Buck

Bates Choice 10:1 Thrust Ratio Caulking Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: Bates Choice Caulking Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Affordable price without lacking features
  • True no-drip functionality
  • Offers consistent and reliable performance

What We Don’t Like

  • Grip handles are uncomfortable

Specs

  • Rod type Smooth
  • Thrust ratio 10:1
  • Revolving No

Finding a caulking gun that really offers a no-drip design can be difficult—even more so at a reasonable price point. But this Bates Choice model checks both boxes. This simple caulking gun features a smooth rod that provides even and consistent pressure without dripping. It also has a 10:1 ratio, which is more than most other models at this price. It has a lightweight fixed frame, as well as a built-in cutter and puncture wire. 

Our first impression of the Bates was that it felt rather cheap. It did, however, accomplish something no other caulking gun in the comparison did: It didn’t drip at all. When we considered that alongside its affordable price, the Bates really stood out. We also liked that it had a built-in cutter and a puncture tool under the frame to make getting started easier.

Get the Bates Choice caulking gun at Amazon, Walmart, or Bates Choice.

Best Grip

Newborn Octogun 930-GTD Hex Rod Cradle Caulking Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: Newborn 930-GTD Drip-Free Smooth Hex Rod Caulking Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Comfortable thermoplastic grip prevents hand fatigue
  • Smooth rod is easy to release and adjust
  • Makes an excellent silicone caulking gun

What We Don’t Like

  • No dripless as claimed

Specs

  • Rod type Smooth
  • Thrust ratio 10:1
  • No

Anyone trying to avoid tired hands while caulking and sealing may find this unit from Newborn ideal. It has two rubber overmolded grips, a smooth-pull hand trigger, and a rod that automatically retracts after releasing the trigger to prevent excess caulk from oozing out. It also features a 10:1 thrust ratio and easily dispenses light to light-medium viscosity caulk, making it well suited for latex and silicone. 

This gun has a built-in seal puncturing tool, a cutting tool, and a handy hook for hanging on a ladder rung. We like that we can cut the tips of our caulking tubes and puncture the seal without having to reach for other tools, and this caulking gun’s smooth rod is easy to adjust and release. The one thing we don’t love about this caulking gun is that its so-called “dripless caulk gun technology” is not as no-drip as advertised. It definitely dripped a little for us. 

What our tester says: “This tool’s grip really stood out during testing. It’s extremely comfortable and easy to squeeze, despite this gun not having a tremendous thrust ratio.”—Tom Scalisi, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Newborn 930-GTD caulking gun at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Walmart.

Best for Thick Sealants

PC Products Steel Dispensing Caulking Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: PC Products Steel Dispensing Caulking Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Revolving frame is easy to maneuver in hard-to-reach areas
  • Great for thicker sealant materials and adhesives
  • Puncture wire tucks away in the trigger

What We Don’t Like

  • No tip cutter

Specs

  • Rod type Smooth
  • Thrust ratio 26:1
  • Revolving Yes

With a high thrust ratio of 26:1, the PC Products steel caulking gun is a workhorse that smoothly dispenses thick sealants. Thanks to its high ratio, it also works for caulks, sealants, and adhesives at low temperatures. It features a smooth rod and a thumb release to prevent oozing and waste. It has a revolving frame that makes positioning the tube easy, especially when laying caulk around corners. 

Testing the PC Products steel caulking gun was enjoyable. Despite below-freezing temperatures, it had plenty of thrust for squeezing out sealant, and we liked that the frame revolves. While it does have smart puncture wire storage (it’s spring-loaded behind the trigger), it doesn’t feature a cutter, which could be a downside for some. 

Get the PC Products caulking gun at Amazon,The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best Heavy-Duty

Chicago Pneumatic CP9885 Series Caulking Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: Chicago Pneumatic CP9885 Mastic Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Drips very little for a professional finish
  • Easy on the hands since everything is done using pressure
  • Creates an even bead; great for awkward areas

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires an air hose

Specs

  • Rod type None
  • Thrust ratio N/A
  • Revolving No

If you have a large caulking project on the horizon, such as caulking windows throughout your house or constructing a full set of cabinets in a workshop, the Chicago Pneumatic caulking gun might be exactly what you need. Instead of offering labor-intensive manual operation, it attaches to an air compressor for efficiency and ease of use.

This caulking gun also doesn’t have a plunger. Instead, it pressurizes the space behind the caulk to push it through the tube, allowing for consistent pressure. It comes with a regulator to adjust the pressure for optimal flow as well.

Admittedly, it took us a little while to dial in this caulking gun’s pressure regulator, which did cause a bit of a mess at first. But, once dialed in, it was wonderful to test. Releasing the trigger immediately drops the pressure behind the tube, and as a result, there’s very little dripping. Also, once we adjusted the regulator, it offered consistent and smooth pressure. In addition to an air compressor, it requires an air compressor hose for operation.

Get the Chicago Pneumatic caulking gun at Amazon or Walmart.

Best Battery

DeWalt DCE560B 20V Max Adhesive Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: DeWalt DCE560B 20V Max* Adhesive Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Uses batteries DeWalt users already have
  • Adjustable speeds allow custom settings
  • Onboard work light illuminates dark work areas
  • Swiveling frame increases accuracy in tight spots

What We Don’t Like

  • A bit expensive and doesn’t come with a battery

Specs

  • Rod type Smooth
  • Thrust ratio N/A
  • Revolving Yes

When it comes to large caulking or adhesive projects, this DeWalt cordless caulking gun might be the tool for the job. This model uses power from DeWalt’s 20-volt battery lineup (not included but commonly owned by many DIYers) to squeeze caulking tubes with consistent, repeatable results. Since you only need to hold down the trigger, it’s comfortable to use for extended periods without hand fatigue.

During testing, the DeWalt caulking gun produced even and consistent results without wearing out our hands. We enjoyed its onboard work light while applying silicone caulk in dark corners, as well as its swiveling frame. It also has six adjustable speeds, allowing you to dial in the correct rate for whatever job you’re working on. While all these features come at a relatively high price, we think anyone applying construction adhesive to floor joists will find this caulking gun pays for itself in a day or two.

Get the DeWalt caulking gun (tool only) at AmazonAce Hardware, Lowe’s, or Walmart.

Also Consider

Red Devil 9-Inch Extreme Duty Caulking Gun

 The Best Caulking Gun Option: Red Devil 3989 Extreme Duty 9-Inch Caulking Gun
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Handle is comfortable yet grippy enough to feel solid
  • Plenty of power to accommodate thicker sealants
  • Quick-release lever, seal puncture tool, and ladder hook

What We Don’t Like

  • Dripped during our tests
  • Frame doesn’t swivel smoothly

Specs

  • Rod type Smooth
  • Thrust ratio 26:1
  • Revolving Yes

With a 26:1 thrust ratio for squeezing thick sealants and caulks out of their tube, Red Devil’s Extreme Duty caulk gun is worth considering for working at low temperatures or with thick adhesives. It features a smooth rod for quick release as well as a swiveling frame for caulking around corners. It also has a comfortable rubber-coated trigger and a built-in seal puncture wire in the handle.

In some areas, the Red Devil was excellent during testing. The rubber grip was comfortable yet grippy, and there was plenty of power for squeezing out caulk or sealant in cold temperatures. Unfortunately, this model is marketed as a dripless caulking gun, but it dripped during testing. Its frame also doesn’t swivel smoothly, but we got used to that and felt the sealant gun deserved a spot on our list for its sturdy build quality and power. 

Get the Red Devil caulking gun at Amazon or Walmart.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Caulking Guns

Testing caulking guns was pretty straightforward: load them up, test their power, see if they drip, and compare the results. But since temperatures were just under freezing when we tested the caulking guns, our efforts really put them through the wringer.

We tested each refillable caulking gun using an acrylic caulk to see how smooth, consistent, and easy they were to work with. We caulked a seam between two boards and then allowed the guns to rest to see how much they’d drip. We took note of features like rods, built-in cutters, puncture wires, and rubber grips. 

We then loaded the caulking guns with cold construction adhesive as well as roofing tar and ran a bead of each down the board. This showed us which guns had the best power and which were difficult to use in those conditions. We also checked for drips, which were considerably fewer than the acrylic due to the adhesive’s viscosity.

What to Consider When Choosing a Caulking Gun

Choosing a caulking gun might seem like a straightforward proposition, but there is actually quite a bit to know about these tools. From the type of rod, power vs. no power, thrust ratio, and more, it’s worth doing a bit of research. The following are some of the most important factors to consider when searching for the best caulking gun. 

Caulking Gun Type 

Repeatedly squeezing a trigger can lead to hand and wrist fatigue, which is why powered caulking guns are becoming more popular. When they first hit the market a few years ago, powered caulking guns were reserved for commercial and industrial projects. Today, DIYers are discovering the benefit of caulking with a gun that automatically dispenses sealant so they can focus on creating a smooth bead. Since an automatic caulking gun doesn’t have a hand trigger, thrust ratio does not apply. Instead, dispensing pressure is regulated via a light squeeze on the finger trigger.

  • Electric caulking guns come with a cord and require access to an electrical outlet. Light pressure on a finger trigger allows users to dispense just the right amount of sealant.
  • Battery-powered caulking guns use rechargeable batteries, which allows users to run a bead of caulk in locations where electricity isn’t available, such as in an under-construction bathroom or shower. Since they generally only store enough power for 2 to 3 hours of use per charge, investing in an extra battery to accommodate large jobs is probably worth it.
  • Pneumatic or air-powered caulking guns are among the most popular powered options for home workshops because they don’t require a battery and are interchangeable with other air-power tools. However, you will need a home air compressor to run one. In addition to the gun’s finger trigger, dispensing pressure can be regulated by adjusting the pressure on an air compressor.
  • Though it sounds like a breakfast tool, a sausage caulking gun is actually designed to hold collapsible foil cylinders of sealant called “sausages.” These caulking guns, which operate in the same manner as others (manual or powered), let users squeeze every last bit of sealant from the sausage, so there’s very little waste.

Rod Type 

Squeezing the hand trigger on a manual caulking gun forces a rod into the back of the tube of interior or exterior caulk, which in turn pushes the caulk out of the tube’s tip. There are two main types of gun rods, and they vary slightly in performance.

  • Ratchet rod: Caulking guns with ratchet rods have serrated rods that “catch” with each hand squeeze. They are usually inexpensive and suitable for light projects. The biggest problem with ratchet rods is that the sealant can keep oozing caulk out until the end of the rod is twisted and pulled back to release the pressure. This oozing can make a mess and lead to wasted sealant.
  • Smooth rod: When applying caulk with a smooth rod caulking gun—often advertised as “dripless”—the user only needs to depress a thumb lever to release pressure on the sealant to stop it from leaving the tube.

Thrust Ratio

Thrust ratio relates to the amount of force generated each time the hand trigger is squeezed. The higher the ratio, the more force is exerted with each squeeze. This is important because different types of sealant are more or less viscid (thick). With thicker sealants, more thrust ratio is required to dispense the sealant. 

Thrust ratios range from 3:1 to 28:1. Guns with lower ratios are suitable for dispensing thin caulk, such as water-based latex caulk, while higher thrust ratios are needed for dispensing more viscous caulk, such as epoxy sealants.

Revolving Frame

Stopping and starting when running a bead of caulk can lead to unsightly lumps and bulges. It’s especially challenging to run a continuous bead around a corner because your hand position and the angle of the gun must change. With a revolving frame, however, you simply rotate the frame (instead of the whole gun) when rounding a corner to caulk without interruption.

FAQs

If your head is spinning with information or unresolved questions, the following answers may clear things up. We also offer more information on whether you can caulk over caulk and top caulking mistakes in separate guides. 

Q. What is the easiest caulking gun to use?

We found the Newborn 250​​ caulking gun the easiest to use during testing. It has plenty of power, a comfortable grip, and a swivel frame. It also drips less than most other models on our list.

Q. Can I use caulk without a caulking gun?

Some manufacturers sell squeeze tubes of caulk, which don’t require a gun and can be great when working above cabinets or in tight spaces. However, without a caulking gun, applying an even and consistent bead can be difficult, so we don’t recommend using squeeze tubs for precision applications.

Q. Are there different sizes of caulking guns?

Caulking guns come in different sizes. A small caulking gun comes in a standard size of 10 ounces. All the caulking guns on this list are 10-ounce models. If you need a large caulk gun for heavy-duty applications, look for a 29-ounce version.

Q. Should you push or pull a caulking gun?

We asked Eduard Mirzoian, CEO of Restorerz, for advice on how to work a caulk gun, and he said, “Always push the trigger. Pulling the trigger doesn’t allow for proper application of pressure, which can lead to inconsistent flow and sloppy work. By pushing the trigger, you maintain control over the caulking process.”

Q. Are expensive caulk guns worth it?

We also asked Mr. Mirzoian this question, and he told us that caulking guns don’t have to be expensive. He said it’s more important to prioritize the viscosity of the caulk you’ll be using and user-friendly features like drip-free performance and adjustable flow control.

Q. How do I keep my caulking gun from dripping?

In addition to choosing a dripless caulking gun, a couple of simple caulking tips and tricks can help keep your gun from dripping. Start by storing caulking tubes upright for several hours or overnight before use. This will give trapped air time to rise, allowing it to escape as soon as you open the tube. Then, after cutting the tip, bang the bottom of the tube several times on a hard surface before placing it in your gun to further release excess air.

Q. How much should I pay for a caulk gun?

The tested and reviewed caulk guns on our list cost between $10 and $200, with most models falling under $50. How much you pay for one will be determined by how often you use it as well as the type of gun you want.

The post This Was the Only Caulking Gun I Could Use One-Handed Comfortably appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-06T10:09:06-05:00
<![CDATA[We Researched 25 Tile Saws and Determined the 7 Best Ones—Here’s the One That Aced Almost Every Test]]>For DIYers who want to cut tiles with precision, the best tile saw makes the job easier. This guide has top picks and real-life tested results.

The post We Researched 25 Tile Saws and Determined the 7 Best Ones—Here’s the One That Aced Almost Every Test appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-tile-saw/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=116103Fri, 03 Jan 2025 14:51:07 -0500ReviewsPower ToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Achieving professional results from a tile project starts with thoughtful consideration—not only regarding tile selection but also in choosing the tile saw to be used. Not every tile saw works for every job, so we tested a handful of the top tile-cutting tools that promise to make clean cuts through materials such as ceramic, porcelain, glass, and travertine.

After ripping through various tile materials and evaluating each saw’s features, our favorite was the DeWalt D24000S 10-Inch Wet Tile Saw With Stand. It precisely cut through everything we threw at it, from delicate glass tile to travertine and ceramic. It also allowed us to create diverse cuts and its sturdy construction prevented wobbling.

Other high-performing tile cutters also earned a spot in our lineup. Ahead, discover shopping tips, recommendations, and all you need to know to find the best tile saw for your project.

  1. BEST OVERALL: DeWalt D24000S 10-Inch Wet Tile Saw With Stand
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Porter-Cable PCE980 7-Inch Table Top Wet Tile Saw
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Skil 3540-02 7-Inch Wet Tile Saw
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST PORTABLE: DeWalt DWC860W 4⅜-Inch Wet/Dry Handheld Tile Cutter
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST EXTENDED CUT: Ridgid R4041S 8-Inch Wet Tile Saw
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST HANDHELD KIT: Kobalt KTSH 4024A 4-Inch Handheld Cordless Tile Saw
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST MANUAL: QEP 10630 24-Inch Manual Tile Cutter
    ↓ Jump to Review
A person using a handheld version of the best tile saw option to cut a large tile
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Product NameBlade SizeMax Rip Cut SizePlunge CutsWeight
DeWalt D24000S 10-Inch Wet Tile Saw With Stand10 inches25 inchesYes69 pounds
Porter-Cable PCE980 7-Inch Table Top Wet Tile Saw7 inches
17 inchesNo27 pounds
Skil 3540-02 7-Inch Wet Tile Saw7 inches12 inchesNo18 pounds
DeWalt DWC860W 4⅜-Inch Wet/Dry Handheld Tile Cutter4⅜ inchesUnlimitedYes6.6 pounds
Ridgid R4041S 8-Inch Wet Tile Saw8 inchesUnlimitedYes49 pounds
Kobalt KTSH 4024A 4-Inch Handheld Cordless Tile Saw4 inchesUnlimitedYes5.7 pounds
QEP 10630 24-Inch Manual Tile Cutter⅞-inch scoring wheel24 inchesNo16.2 pounds

Our Top Picks

The following is our list of the models that excelled in our assessments, each matched to the category it best represents. Our top tile saws range in price, style, and intended use, but no matter what type of tile project you have in mind, there’s a saw here to meet your needs.  

Best Overall

DeWalt D24000S 10-Inch Wet Tile Saw With Stand

 The Best Tile Saw Option: DeWalt D24000S 10-Inch Wet Tile Saw With Stand
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 1.5-hp motor delivers exceptional cutting performance
  • Versatile cutting options
  • Water flow on the blade eliminates airborne dust
  • Features a GFCI switch on the cord

What We Don’t Like

  • Included blade may not withstand cutting porcelain tile
  • High price point for occasional projects

Specs

  • Blade size 10 inches
  • Max rip cut size: 25 inches
  • Plunge cuts Yes
  • Weight 69 pounds

This Bob Vila Approved product carries our brand’s highest level of recommendation.

Bob Vila Approved badge

Bob Vila Approved recognizes the household and DIY products that impressed us most in our real-world testing and that exemplify core values of the Bob Vila brand, including craftsmanship, innovation, and value for the dollar. Winners of this designation come recommended by our professional review team and are personally approved by Bob Vila.

The DeWalt D24000S wet tile saw is a powerhouse! With a 1.5-horsepower (hp) motor, this saw delivers outstanding cutting performance on multiple tile materials. In our tests, this DeWalt saw cut ceramic and travertine tiles with precision and ease.

With a capacity for up to 25-inch rip cuts, 28-inch plunge cuts, and 45-degree angle cuts, this tile saw offers remarkable flexibility for diverse project requirements. The assembly process was relatively convenient—we had the saw and water pan unit attached to the base in about 10 minutes using the included wrenches. 

Stability and good tile support are critical when handling delicate and large-format tiles, and the DeWalt did not disappoint. It came equipped with a sturdy stand and steel legs that reduced unwanted wobbling during cuts, and the sliding table allowed us to feed the tiles through the blade smoothly. The blade’s high-efficiency water-flow system eliminated airborne dust and kept the blade cool while cutting. As a result, we didn’t experience any tile breakage, which can happen if a blade gets too hot. 

One minor downside of the DeWalt tile saw is that the included blade (a multipurpose tile blade) didn’t hold up as well as we would have liked when repeatedly cutting porcelain tiles, which are among the most challenging tiles to cut. Still, the blade performed admirably when cutting ceramic, glass, and travertine stone tiles. If you are looking to tackle a porcelain tile project, consider investing in a higher-quality blade, such as the DeWalt DW4762 diamond blade.

Read our full review: DeWalt D24000S 10-Inch Wet Tile Saw With Stand

What our tester says: “When it comes to precision-cut edges, the DeWalt wet saw delivered straight and clean edges throughout my tests, and I didn’t notice any chipping.” –Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the DeWalt D24000S tile saw at Amazon,Ace Hardware,Lowe’s, The Home Depot, Acme Tools, or MSC.

Runner-Up

Porter-Cable PCE980 7-Inch Table Top Wet Tile Saw

 The Best Tile Saw Option: Porter-Cable PCE980 7-Inch Table Top Wet Tile Saw
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Durable stainless steel top will withstand rigorous use
  • Sliding-table design increases stability for making precise cuts
  • Comes with a miter gauge
  • Water reservoir basin controls dust

What We Don’t Like

  • Blade splash guard slightly obscures the cutline
  • No GFCI switch on the cord
  • Doesn’t cut bevels

Specs

  • Blade size 7 inches
  • Max cut size 17 inches
  • Plunge cuts No
  • Weight 27 pounds

The Porter-Cable PCE980 wet tile saw features a stainless steel table for greater longevity, half of which slides to stabilize tiles during cutting. Equipped with a 1-hp motor, this saw delivers sufficient power for most tile-cutting tasks, although it’s not designed to tackle large-format tiles or extensive jobs. The PCE980 can handle up to 17-inch rip cuts, and the included miter gauge makes it easy to create accurate diagonal cuts. 

This tile saw has a 7-inch blade and an enclosed water reservoir for dust control and blade longevity. It excelled when we cut ceramic and travertine, delivering clean results without chipping. However, cutting porcelain tile proved slow, although it did get through those tiles without causing any chips.

While the water reservoir effectively controlled dust and kept the blade from overheating, we would prefer a water pump directing water right onto the blade. While this reservoir model performed very well, water did run across the stainless steel table and onto the floor, making this model best suited to outdoor use.

We also found that the splash guard slightly obstructed a clear view of the cutline, a design flaw shared among similar models on the market. With some practice, we accurately gauged where the blade would cut and achieved precise results. At 27 pounds, the PCE980 tile cutting machine can get heavy to carry, so it would be nice if Porter-Cable added a set of wheels to make this saw a pull-along model.

Get the Porter-Cable tile saw at Amazon, Lowe’s, WalmartTarget, Acme Tools, or MSC.

Best Bang for the Buck

Skil 3540-02 7-Inch Wet Tile Saw

 The Best Tile Saw Option: Skil 3540-02 7-Inch Wet Tile Saw
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Lightweight and portable design
  • Made of durable stainless steel materials
  • Features a miter gauge and adjustable rip fence

What We Don’t Like

  • Not all water runs into the reservoir
  • Unsuitable for cutting hard tile material
  • Does not make plunge cuts
  • No GFCI switch

Specs

  • Blade size 7 inches
  • Max rip cut 12 inches
  • Plunge cuts No
  • Weight 18 pounds

The 7-Inch wet tile saw from Skil is a budget-friendly gem tailored to assist homeowners and DIYers in tackling small projects, such as backsplashes and craftwork. It can handle up to 12-inch rip cuts and has a miter gauge for accurate diagonal cuts. Its stainless steel worktop is a standout feature that should outlast other budget models made with cheaper materials. You won’t find a sliding table at this price point, but with a bit of practice (and the adjustable fence), you’ll be making straight cuts in no time. The worktable is also adjustable, so you can create bevels from 0 to 45 degrees. 

The water reservoir eliminated all airborne dust, but we found quite a bit of water ran across the table’s surface and off the side of the saw instead of back into the reservoir. As a result, we recommend keeping a good eye on the water level in the reservoir because we had to add water twice to ensure the level was high enough to keep the blade wet and cool.

We didn’t successfully cut porcelain tile with this saw—it just didn’t have enough power—but it’s also not designed for that purpose. It’s portable, lightweight, and does a good job cutting softer tiles up to 12 inches long. A cord winder on the side makes for easy cord storage, but it doesn’t come with a GFCI breaker switch.

What our tester says: “I found this affordable wet saw practical and precise when cutting ceramic and glass tiles. Best of all, it won’t break the bank.”–Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Skil tile saw at Amazon, Lowe’s, Walmart, or Menards.

Best Portable

DeWalt DWC860W 4⅜-Inch Wet/Dry Handheld Tile Cutter

 DeWalt DWC860W 4⅜-Inch Wet/Dry Handheld Tile Cutter
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Easy to transport, small tile saw
  • 12-foot waterline reduces dust
  • Versatile beveling up to 45 degrees

What We Don’t Like

  • Making precise cuts can be challenging
  • 4⅜-inch blade is limiting for cutting larger tiles

Specs

  • Blade size 4⅜ inches
  • Max rip cut No limit
  • Plunge cuts Yes
  • Weight 6.6 pounds

Tabletop tile saws are the industry standard for cutting loose tiles, but what happens when the tiles you need to cut are already installed? Or what if you have just one tile to trim and you don’t want to take time to set up a tabletop tile saw? A handheld tile saw is a nifty solution.

The DeWalt DWC860W, a 4⅜-inch handheld tile saw, is a handy little tool, and its portability is a big plus for cutting on the fly. This is the first time we’ve used a handheld wet tile saw since they’re a relatively new concept. We attached its 12-foot water tube to our garden hose, and as we cut, the tube fed a stream of water onto the blade to eliminate dust and keep the blade cool. The DWC860W is also designed for dry cutting, but we generated a lot of dust during dry cutting and needed to wear dust masks.

Equipped with a robust 10.8-amp motor, this compact saw delivers exceptional cutting power—it is a DeWalt, after all. In our tests, it cut through ceramic, glass, and travertine stone. We cut through a brick paver on a whim, and it sliced right through. Its premium blade even cuts through porcelain tile, though at a slower rate. The DeWalt handheld saw also cuts bevels up to 45 degrees, making it convenient for cutting mitered corners from tile.

Get the DeWalt DWC860W tile saw at Amazon, Lowe’s, The Home Depot, Acme Tools, or MSC.

Best Extended Cut

Ridgid R4041S 8-Inch Wet Tile Saw

 The Best Tile Saw Option: Ridgid R4041S 8-Inch Wet Tile Saw
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Can rip plank tiles of unlimited length
  • Baffle guard system keeps jobsite free from splashes
  • Folding stand is convenient
  • Features a powerful 12-amp motor

What We Don’t Like

  • Saw’s weight can be cumbersome, especially during transport

Specs

  • Blade size 8 inches
  • Max cut size Unlimited
  • Plunge cuts Yes
  • Weight 49 pounds

The Ridgid R4041S 8-inch wet tile saw is a powerhouse. It has a 12-amp motor that powers through ceramic, glass, and travertine stone tiles. It even cut through porcelain with ease and precision. This saw’s impressive features and capabilities make it a go-to choice for professional contractors and avid DIYers.

With an oversize cut capacity, this saw can handle 24-inch rip cuts and 18-inch diagonal cuts. Those cuts are substantial enough to meet most needs, but one of the neatest features of this Ridgid saw is a drop-gate fence that allowed us to cut even longer tiles. Just be aware that cutting longer tiles may require more than one worker to support the tile so it doesn’t shift.

This saw comes with a die-cast aluminum sliding table that’s solid and sturdy, and it has a nonslip surface to help keep tiles stable while cutting. An optimized water-nozzle system, guard baffle system, wrap-around rubber splash guard, rear water tray, and isolation wall work together to provide maximum water efficiency and keep the water in the tray—not all over the workshop.

The R4041S also has an adjustable stand that folds out quickly, and the saw bed sits right on top. No assembly is required to set it up or take it down to move. At 49 pounds, this is a pretty heavy saw, but if you’re cutting lots of tiles—or large format tiles—it’s tough to beat the stability.

Get the Ridgid tile saw at The Home Depot.

Best Handheld Kit

Kobalt KTSH 4024A 4-Inch Handheld Cordless Tile Saw

 The Best Tile Saw Option: Kobalt KTSH 4024A 4-Inch Handheld Cordless Tile Saw
Photo: Lowes

What We Like

  • Cordless design offers the ultimate in portability
  • 4-amp-hour battery provides enough runtime for small jobs
  • Water system features onboard reservoir

What We Don’t Like

  • Second battery may be needed for larger projects

Specs

  • Blade size 4 inches
  • Max cut size Unlimited
  • Plunge cuts Yes
  • Weight 5.7 pounds

The Kobalt 4-inch handheld cordless tile saw is a game changer. It’s battery-powered and features a little onboard water reservoir, so you can run it even in remote locations without electricity. Its design eliminates the need for cords and hoses that can tangle or cause tripping.

Powered by a Kobalt 24-volt battery, this handheld tile saw delivers impressive cutting performance with a powerful brushless motor. In our tests, it cut quickly through ceramic, glass, and travertine stone tiles. It was a little slower cutting through porcelain, but it made it through and left clean, precise edges. The tile saw’s stainless steel shoe allows for easy adjustments to various depths and bevels up to 45 degrees, offering flexibility for tackling a variety of cutting needs.

We really like the innovative water-feed system on the Kobalt handheld saw. Pressing the trigger automatically supplies water to the blade, and while it wasn’t a lot of water, it was enough to eliminate dust and keep the blade cool. We could use the saw indoors to cut installed tile flooring without making too much of a mess. Still, if you’re using it indoors, you’ll probably want a wet/dry vacuum handy to suck up any excess water.

Battery runtime will vary based on the type, size, thickness, and composition of the tile being cut. In our tests, we cut ¼-inch ceramic, glass, and porcelain tiles along with ⅕-inch travertine stone tiles. Using the included high-capacity 4-amp-hour battery, we made dozens of test cuts without losing any power. 

Get the Kobalt tile saw at Lowe’s.

Best Manual

QEP 10630 24-Inch Manual Tile Cutter

 The Best Tile Saw Option: QEP 10630 24-Inch Manual Tile Cutter
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Produces less mess compared to power tools
  • Suitable for ceramic and porcelain tiles
  • Wide aluminum-alloy base with side extensions offers stability
  • Features a ⅞-inch titanium-coated tungsten-carbide cutting wheel
  • Straight-edge adjustable measurement guide enables accurate tile alignment

What We Don’t Like

  • Limited usability compared to power tool options
  • Does not cut bevels
  • Require practice to achieve consistently precise cuts

Specs

  • Blade size ⅞-inch scoring wheel
  • Max cut size 24 inches
  • Plunge cuts No
  • Weight 16.2 pounds

Wet tile saws are inherently messy, but QEP’s 24-inch manual cutter is a dust-free, splash-free alternative. This saw uses a tungsten-carbide cutting wheel to score the tile and a handle that exerts pressure on both sides to snap the tile into two pieces.

This QEP tool can cut 24-inch flooring tiles or 16-inch tiles at a 45-degree angle. It offers a reliable and versatile performance designed to handle ceramic and porcelain tiles efficiently. By following the trusted score-and-snap process used by tile setters for decades, it makes quick work of cutting tiles without the need for a power tool.

One of the standout features of the QEP model is its dual chrome-plated steel rails with linear ball-bearing slides, which contribute to smooth and precise scoring on large tiles. We tested the QEP on several types of tiles, and it performed best with ceramic and porcelain. We didn’t have much luck with glass tiles, which came away with uneven and dangerously sharp edges. But the broad aluminum-alloy base, heavy-duty rubber pads, and cutting table extensions added stability, especially when working with larger tiles.

This ceramic tile cutter has a ⅞-inch titanium-coated tungsten-carbide scoring wheel that makes consistently clean straight scores on the tiles. It’s paired with a straight-edge adjustable measurement guide that helps align tiles accurately for precise cuts.

Get the QEP tile saw at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Tile Saws

A good tile saw makes accurate cuts on a variety of tile types. When selecting models for our hands-on testing, we researched more than 25 top models. We looked at a range of features—from lightweight, handheld options that are ideal for cutting a single tile or two on the fly to robust models suitable for repeated, heavy-duty tile cutting. We chose models in all price ranges and power levels to suit everyone, from highly skilled professionals to DIYers just starting out.

In the testing phase, we examined several key features. We noted how easy it was to assemble the saws (where applicable). Then we tested them on various tile materials, including ceramic, porcelain, glass, and travertine stone, evaluating each model for its intended cutting purposes.

We looked at each saw’s functions, making rip (straight) cuts and diagonal cuts using miter gauges. We observed how well their water systems reduced dust and carefully evaluated each saw’s build quality, overall power, and the types of tiles best suited for each model.

We then awarded each saw points based on a rubric. The better a saw performed, the more points it received. After completing the testing phase, we averaged the points to identify the top-performing saws in our lineup.

Testing Stats
Products tested 7
Hours/Weeks/Time spent testing9 hours
Tests performed22
Price range$100 to $1,000
A person using the best tile saw option on a stand to cut a tile
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

What to Consider When Choosing a Tile Saw

There are several things to remember while shopping for the best wet saws for tile cutting. This section shares some of the most essential features to consider so you can choose the best tile saw for your work.

Cut Quality and Accuracy

Straight and clean tile edges affect the look of a space, so consider the saw’s cut quality and accuracy to achieve the desired design. Some saws have features that make accurate cuts easier to achieve. 

When it comes to wet saws, consider a model that provides some type of guide for creating straight cuts. A guide could be an adjustable table sawlike fence, a sliding bed that holds your tile in place while cutting, or a miter gauge (a specialized tile cutting guide that produces angles similar to a miter box) that secures the tile at the correct angle for a diagonal cut. Also, adjustable bevels allow you to make accurate outside and inside corners, which are ideal for using tile as base molding. 

For DIYers looking to cut out the cost of a professional installation, keep in mind that the accuracy of handheld and grinding tile saws is primarily up to your ability. However, some handheld saws have laser guides and attachments to guide the saw as you cut.

Blade Quality

Using a low-quality tile blade is the quickest way to exceed your tile budget and frustrate yourself. Poor-quality blades can chip the tile, slow the process, and cause more headaches than the initial savings are worth.

Chances are, your saw will come with a multipurpose diamond-grit blade necessary for cutting tile. However, some low-quality blades that come with budget-friendly saws can wobble a bit while cutting, causing inconsistent tile edges. They also wear out quickly. If you’re struggling to achieve perfect results, it might be the blade’s fault, not the saw’s or yours.

Upgrading the blade can help make an inexpensive saw cut better, so it’s something to keep in mind if you’re getting frustrated. 

Type of Tile

The type of tile you’re using is a factor when choosing the best tile saw. Some materials require extra features to create the best results. 

Ceramic and porcelain are very common types of tile. While learning how to cut ceramic tile is easy, porcelain is much more challenging and requires a high-quality diamond-encrusted blade. Marble is too soft to snap, so a manual tile scorer won’t be your best choice there. Some natural materials, like terra cotta, stone, and others, tend to be very dusty and require a wet saw, as the mess can be unbearable and make it difficult to see what you’re doing. 

A handheld wet/dry tile saw is the most versatile tile saw, and it will make most basic cuts. A wet saw follows closely behind and creates more accurate cuts. If you’re unsure about the type of saw your tile requires, these two styles will work for almost any tile and situation.

Water Feed

As mentioned earlier, water can help make tile cutting a much more enjoyable process. While splashes can be messy, the trade-offs are quick and accurate cuts and working in a low-dust environment. In addition, water reduces the friction the blade creates as it’s cutting, so there’s less risk of tiles cracking from excess heat buildup. 

How the water feeds onto the saw blade varies. Many wet saws have no feed, instead relying on the blade dipping into the water basin below the saw’s surface. Some call this a “wet-blade” saw. Others pump water onto the blade. Pumps are often more efficient, as they ensure plenty of water directly on the cut, but these models can be more expensive. 

If you’re concerned about mixing water with electricity, that’s understandable. Wet saw motors are sealed from splashes, so there’s minimal risk of a shock from a wet saw. Additionally, some of the newer models come with GFCI switches on their cords that shut off power to the saw in the event of an electrical problem.

Types of Tile Saws

If you DIY your tile project, you’ll undoubtedly save on professional tile installation costs. As you shop for the best cutting tools for tiles, you’ll notice there are a few types of saws available. Each type works differently, so learning about the differences will help determine which will work for your project.

Wet Tile Saw

A wet tile saw is one of the most effective ways to cut tile. These electric saws use a spinning diamond-embedded blade to cut tile accurately and quickly. Wet saws look similar to table saws (or circular saws) but with the addition of a water basin or water-feed tube. The water cools the saw blade while keeping airborne dust to a minimum, making these models a nice choice for DIYers in the market for a dustless tile saw.

Much like table saws can bevel wood, it’s possible to cut bevels and angles on some tile saws. This may require adjusting the deck or topside of the saw or tilting the blade. Many wet saws have sliding beds or adjustable rip fences, increasing user control. The size of the sliding bed varies from model to model, and a larger bed can make cutting large-format tiles easier.

Handheld Saw

A table-type tile wet saw isn’t the only option for cutting quickly and accurately. Electric or battery-powered handheld models can cut a tile to size or even cut bevels or shapes around moldings and cabinets. 

Handheld tile saws look and function a lot like a circular saw and work well as medium to large format tile cutters. They use diamond-embedded blades like other wet saws, though they come in both wet and dry versions. Wet versions usually feature a hose attached to the saw to keep the blade lubricated and keep the dust down, while dry versions just let the dust fly. 

Handheld tile saws let you conquer tight angles and irregular shapes or curves. They can also be easier and quicker to set up, making them desirable for jobs that require just a cut or two. Their downside is the need to develop an accurate technique, which can take some practice. Also, these saws can be pretty messy since they don’t have water basins to catch water, so you’ll probably want to use them outside or have an assistant use a wet/dry vacuum to suck up the water as you cut.

Grinding Wheel

Some tile professionals prefer an electric grinder fitted with a diamond-embedded wheel for cutting tile. A wheel can be an attractive option if you already own a grinder. These wheels make the grinder work similarly to a handheld saw but with some trade-offs. 

Grinders have plenty of power and are great for stubborn materials like granite. However, they can be awkward to hold, as they’re slightly less balanced than handheld saws. Also, they don’t have a flat surface for the tile to sit against, so you can inadvertently cut bevels if you aren’t paying attention. 

Working with a grinder is messy. It’s best to have a helper hold a shop vacuum close to your spinning blade if you prefer to keep dust and debris to a minimum.

Tile Cutter

The most common and inexpensive way to cut tiles to shape involves a manual tile cutter, sometimes called a “scorer.” Without electricity or a battery, these can be used to make straight cuts across certain types of tile. 

If you’re installing porcelain or ceramic tile, cutters are an excellent way to make quick, relatively mess-free cuts. These tools work by scoring a cut line with a small tungsten-carbide blade across the surface of a tile. You then use a lever to apply pressure to both sides of the scored line. When you apply sufficient pressure, the tile snaps along the line. 

The best manual tile cutters create very little dust, though small bits of glass can be left behind. Also, since this method depends on breaking the tile, the edges are less cleanly cut than with a diamond-embedded power saw. They also cannot make curves or intricate cuts.

FAQs

While cutting tile requires some special tiling tools, it doesn’t have to be an intimidating task. With a little experience, you’ll be able to cut tiles with your new saw in no time. The result will be an excellent finish for your next renovation. Here are some of the most frequently asked questions about tile saws and how they work. 

Q. Do I need a wet saw to cut tile?

No, you don’t, but a wet saw is usually the best option. If you don’t use a wet saw, you’ll have to deal with lots of dust. Alternatively, you can use a diamond-embedded blade in a grinder or handheld saw.

Q. Can I use a Dremel to cut tile?

Dremel offers several diamond-embedded cutting wheels for its rotary tools. They’ll work, but it might take you longer, and it could be more difficult to cut a straight line. That said, Dremel rotary tools are excellent for creating outlet cuts and curves.

Q. What size tile saw do I need?

The most common blade sizes are 4½, 7, and 10 inches. All three will work for most renovation work, though 4½-inch blades are much cheaper to replace than 7- or 10-inch models.

Q. Should you use hot or cold water in a tile saw?

Use cold water in your tile saw to help prevent the blade from overheating and cracking your tile.

Q. Should you soak the tile before cutting?

Whether or not a tile needs to be soaked before cutting depends on its type. Ceramic and porcelain tiles don’t need to be soaked before being cut. However, lightly wetting them prevents excess dust and may help you achieve a cleaner cut. Porous tiles (like some natural stones) may benefit from being soaked, making them less likely to chip during the cutting process.

Q. How do I maintain my tile saw?

To maintain your tile saw, empty the water reservoir, carefully dry the blade, and wipe down the cutting table after each use. Replace the tile saw blade when you notice any damage or dullness.

Q. Do I need to wear protection while using a tile cutter?

Flying pieces of small, sharp tile can cause serious damage if they hit your eyes or skin. Always wear protective eyewear and gloves when using a tile saw. Dust masks and earplugs can also ensure a safer tile-cutting experience. 

Why Trust Bob Vila

Bob Vila has been America’s Handyman since 1979. As the host of beloved and groundbreaking TV series including “This Old House” and “Bob Vila’s Home Again,” he popularized and became synonymous with “do-it-yourself” home improvement.

Over the course of his decades-long career, Bob Vila has helped millions of people build, renovate, repair, and live better each day—a tradition that continues today with expert yet accessible home advice. The Bob Vila team distills need-to-know information into project tutorials, maintenance guides, tool 101s, and more. These home and garden experts then thoroughly research, vet, and recommend products that support homeowners, renters, DIYers, and professionals in their to-do lists.

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a product tester and writer specializing in the construction, remodeling, and real estate industries. She and her husband own a general contracting company, and Taylor is experienced in both residential and commercial building applications. She tests a wide range of power tools as well as other home improvement, household, and lawn-and-garden products.

Additional research provided by Tom Scalisi.

The post We Researched 25 Tile Saws and Determined the 7 Best Ones—Here’s the One That Aced Almost Every Test appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2025-01-03T14:51:07-05:00
<![CDATA[After Researching 20+ Rolling Tool Bags, We Tested Our Favorites and Our Top Picks is a Game Changer]]>The best rolling tool bags can help you easily transport your tools and save your back. Find out more in this buyer's guide and see the top picks.

The post After Researching 20+ Rolling Tool Bags, We Tested Our Favorites and Our Top Picks is a Game Changer appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-rolling-tool-bag/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=155042Tue, 24 Dec 2024 09:48:39 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Carrying around a heavy toolbox might have been a badge of honor in generations past, but it can be taxing on the back and affect workflow. While rolling tool boxes are also great, they can be heavy and cumbersome, especially when filled with heavy-duty tools. That’s where a rolling tool bag comes in. Rolling tool bags feature ample capacities, organized pockets, handles, and wheels for an optimal blend of portability and organization.

We’re big fans of making work (and projects) easier, so we researched the top rolling tool bags on the market and identified five bestsellers to test. We loaded them with tools and then pulled them over grass, concrete, and gravel. And we found a favorite! The ToughBilt Rolling Tool Bag came in at the top of the list thanks to its large wheels, telescoping handle, and a neat little addition that keeps the bag open when using the tools. Keep reading to learn how you can benefit from one of these functional bags and how the following models earned a spot on our lineup of the best rolling tool bags.

  1. BEST OVERALL: ToughBuilt 18-inch Rolling Zippered Tool Bag
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Kobalt 16-Inch Rolling Tool Bag
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST SET: Husky 18-Inch Rolling Tool Bag With Two Bags
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST ORGANIZATION: DeWalt Zippered Rolling Tool Bag
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: CAT 600-D Polyester Rolling Tote Bag
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST DUFFEL: Makita 831269-3 Large LXT Tool Bag
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST CAPACITY: Klein Tools 55452RTB Tool Bag
    ↓ Jump to Review
ToughBilt Tool Bag close-up
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Our Top Picks

Choosing a great rolling tool bag isn’t complicated. We’ve done all the testing on how they hold up and perform. In addition to the five we personally tested, we’ve included a couple more that we think are good enough to feature on this list.  seem so complicated. This streamlined list consists of some of the best rolling tool bags on the market, including a great option that I had the chance to test myself.

Best Overall

ToughBuilt 18-inch Rolling Zippered Tool Bag

 The Best Rolling Tool Bags Option: ToughBuilt 18-inch Rolling Zippered Tool Bag
Photo: Lowes

What We Like

  • Ample storage space
  • Straps hold compartment open
  • Good build quality
  • Large wheels for rolling

What We Don’t Like

  • Some compartments are pretty small
  • Velcro-type straps may wear over time

Specs

  • Size 18 by 14.5 by 19.5 inches
  • Weight 19.91 pounds
  • Number of compartments 22

Our Ratings: Organization 5/5; Ease of Use 4.75/5; Durability 4.75/5; Value 4.75/5

The ToughBilt rolling tool bag has so much going for it, and its build quality is so high, that it easily took the top spot in our lineup. It offers 22 storage compartments that are well-distributed around the inside and outside of the bag, and it features a big center compartment for storing larger items like a couple of circular saws or reciprocating saws. 

Our favorite feature on this bag was the large opening and velcro-type straps on the backside that kept it open while we were working. In many cases, the top of a tool bag can sag and block access to the content inside. But with the straps, this bag stayed fully open, and we could take tools out and put them back in as we worked.

The telescoping handle is easy to use and extends smoothly by pressing the button on the top. We pulled the ToughBilt tool bag over concrete, grass, and gravel, and it rolled smoothly on all three, thanks to its large wheels. This is a great tool bag for DIYers and pros. 

What our tester says: “The straps that hold the top of the ToughBuilt bag open are game changers. I love how they keep the bag wide open so I can reach in and grab a tool without dealing with a collapsed opening.”  —Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the ToughBilt rolling tool bag at Lowes

Best Bang For The Buck

Kobalt 16-Inch Rolling Tool Bag

 The Best Rolling Tool Bags Option: Kobalt 16-Inch Rolling Tool Bag
Photo: Lowes

What We Like

  • 16 storage pockets plus 7 loops
  • Stabilizer bar prevents inadvertent tipping or rolling
  • Smooth telescoping handle
  • Durable construction

What We Don’t Like

  • Smaller wheels limit rolling performance

Specs

  • Size 10.83 by 14.17 by 16 inches
  • Weight Not listed
  • Number of compartments 16

Our Ratings: Organization 4.5/5; Ease of Use 4.5/5; Durability 4.5/5; Value 4.75/5

A high-quality rolling tool bag doesn’t have to break the bank. The Kobalt 16-inch rolling tool bag performed well in our hands-on tests and, best of all, it’s available at an affordable price point. The Kobalt bag offers 16 individual storage spaces: ten on the outside and six inside the large compartment. In addition, it has seven elastic loops at the top for holding smaller items, such as screwdrivers. 

The bag comes with two wheels that roll very smoothly on concrete but don’t fare quite as well on gravel. We felt Kobalt could improve the rolling feature by including larger wheels. But we really liked the stabilizer stand on the bottom of the bag, which kept it from inadvertently moving once we set it where we wanted it. 

The telescoping handle was great. All we had to do was push the button on the top of the handle to raise it or lower it, and it was very sturdy. The seams on the pockets are double-stitched and well-sewn. We think this would be a good choice for an electrical tool bag or for an HVAC technician who wants to carry several small tools on the outside and perhaps larger diagnostic tools in the main bag. 

Get the Kobalt rolling tool bag at Lowe’s

Best Set

Husky 18-Inch Rolling Tool Bag With Two Bags

 The Best Rolling Tool Bags Option: Husky 18-Inch Rolling Tool Bag With Two Bags
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Three bags in the set
  • Wide-mouth opening on rolling bag
  • Durable fabric and construction
  • Plenty of storage spaces

What We Don’t Like

  • Smaller wheels limit rolling performance

Specs

  • Size 18 x 17 x 9 inches
  • Weight 11.85 pounds
  • Number of compartments 18 main bag, 14 middle bag, 4 small bag

Our Ratings: Organization 4/5; Ease of Use 4.25/5; Durability 4.5/5; Value 4.75/5

Husky, The Home Depot’s house brand, provides lots of versatile storage with its 3-piece rolling tool bag set. The bags are made from rugged polyester fabric. The large, wheeled bag has 18 compartments, the medium-sized bag has 14, and the small bag has four. 

The large bag’s wide mouth offered easy access to the interior when it was completely unzipped and folded open. However, it relies on simple reinforced fabric to stay open, so we wouldn’t be surprised to see some sagging over time. 

The set offers three portable tool bags for storing all types of tools. We packed the main bag with large power tools and pulled it around. It rolled well on flat concrete but not quite as well on grass or gravel, which we felt was due to its smaller wheels. The telescoping handles moved smoothly and easily, and the smaller bags rested securely against the handle. This set would be a good choice for someone who wants to keep their tools separate by type. 

Get the Husky 3-piece rolling tool bag set at The Home Depot.

Best Organisation

DeWalt Zippered Rolling Tool Bag

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Quality materials, double-stitched seams
  • Molded plastic base for water protection
  • Wide-mouth opening

What We Don’t Like

  • No protective flap on outside pockets

Specs

  • Size 18.25 x 19.25 x 12.125 inches
  • Weight 8.84 pounds
  • Number of compartments 28

Our Ratings: Organization 5/5; Ease of Use 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 5/5

The DeWalt rolling tool bag is made from durable materials and has 28 storage spaces. The plastic-molded bottom plate prevents moisture from seeping into the bag if it is set on wet grass. 

When zippered shut, the main bag provides some rain protection, but most of the outside pockets don’t have covers, so the tools in those pockets are not protected from the elements. We did like the two zippered pockets on the exterior, which we felt would be good for holding our phones, but we can’t really call this a waterproof tool bag because so many of the pockets are open.

That said, it’s a very well-made rolling bag—worthy of the name DeWalt. The wheels are large enough that we were able to pull the bag, fully loaded, over grass and gravel as well as concrete. The telescoping handle on this one is beefier than the others we tested, which we felt made it especially suitable for someone who will be storing heavy tools. 

Get the DeWalt rolling tool bag at Amazon,Lowe’s,or Ace Hardware.

Best Heavy-Duty

CAT 600-D Polyester Rolling Tote Bag

 The Best Rolling Tool Bags Option: CAT 600-D Polyester Rolling Tote Bag
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Quality fabric, reinforced stitching
  • Wide-mouth designs stay open
  • Comfortable ergonomic handle
  • 16 storage spaces

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t roll smoothly on gravel
  • May be too small for large tool sets

Specs

  • Size 17 by 18 by 10 inches
  • Weight 2.78 pounds
  • Number of compartments 16

Our Ratings: Organization 4/5; Ease of Use 4.5/5; Durability 4.75/5; Value 4.25/5

The CAT (short for Caterpillar) rolling tool bag wasn’t the largest model we tested, but it’s well-made and has 10 storage pockets inside the main compartment and six on the outside. The fabric is thick, and the reinforced stitching is strong. 

It comes with two wheels that may feel a bit small when pulling the bag over gravel and grass, but it rolled nicely over our sidewalks and driveway. We really like the wide-open mouth that keeps the sides straight for easy access to tools. 

The CAT tool bag’s ergonomic handle was very comfortable. We found it easy to pull the bag around without developing any hand fatigue, which is a big plus for anyone who needs to transport their tools over some distance. We liked the quality of the construction and think it will last for years. 

Get the CAT rolling tool bag at The Home Depot

More Great Options

While we didn’t test the next two tool bags, they were on our short list of picks, and they’re both highly rated by buyers. If you haven’t yet found a rolling tool bag that suits your needs, consider one of these.

Best Duffel

Makita 831269-3 Large LXT Tool Bag

 The Best Rolling Tool Bag Option: Makita 831269-3 Large LXT Tool Bag
Photo: Amazon

What We Don’t Like

  • Large enough to transport several power tools
  • Sturdy fabric and build quality
  • Comes with carry strap

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t offer a wide-mouth opening

Specs

  • Size 27 x 15 x 5 inches
  • Weight 7.19 pounds
  • Number of compartments One

If there’s one thing we’ve figured out over the years, it’s that carrying an armful of power tool cases back and forth to a project is a hassle. Makita’s Large LXT Tool Bag tackles the job head-on, carrying up to six hard cases of the company’s 18V tool lineup. With the built-in wheels and telescoping handle, it takes just one hand to wheel the bag back and forth.

While the massive interior holds a bunch of power tools, there are several exterior pockets with zippers and hook-and-loop closures for hand tools, batteries, or other items. The Makita also comes with an adjustable shoulder strap for carrying up stairs or over rougher terrain. We like the ability to roll the Makita bag when convenient and then use it as a shoulder tool bag if we need to climb with it. 

Get the Makita Large LXT Tool Bag at Amazon.

Best Capacity

Klein Tools 55452RTB Tool Bag

 The Best Rolling Tool Bag Option: Klein Tools 55452RTB Tool Bag
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Capable of holding up to 200 pounds
  • Large organized tool bag
  • 24 interior and exterior storage compartments
  • Orange interior makes tools easy to see
  • Large wheels for rolling over rough terrain

What We Don’t Like

  • No shoulder strap

Specs

  • Size 19 by 14 by 12.5 inches
  • Weight 19 pounds
  • Number of compartments 24

Any tradesperson looking for an oversized rolling tool transport option should consider this tool bag from Klein Tools. We’re fans of its substantial 200-pound weight capacity, which easily accommodates heavy hand tools, parts, hardware, and power tools. The wide-mouthed, metal-reinforced opening allows for easy access to its interior—which features a contrasting orange color, making it that much easier to identify the right tool. 

Measuring 19 inches across, 14 inches tall, and 12.5 inches deep, this bag includes 24 pockets for plenty of storage, with a fully zippered front flap that offers access to several smaller slots. The 55452RTB also features heavy-duty 6-inch wheels for rolling across rough terrain and a telescoping handle that offers plenty of leverage and control when hauling up to 200 pounds of gear. We think this model is just right for the pro or DIYer with lots of power tools. 

Get the Klein Tools Tool Bag at Amazon.

Jump To Our Top Picks

Kobalt rolling tool bag close-up set on a table in a workshop
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

How We Chose and Tested the Best Rolling Tool Bags

With plenty of rolling tool bags to choose from, we first considered brand reputation, longevity, and average customer satisfaction rates. Then, we looked at the types of rolling tool bags and their intended use. To find the best of each type of tool bag, we evaluated the quality of the materials, storage compartments, size and weight, capacity, and portability. Then we narrowed our selection down to the top five for hands-on testing.

Our testing process was straightforward—we loaded up the rolling tool bags with tools and accessories and then we pulled them around on different types of terrain to see how well they rolled. We extended their telescoping handles and zipped and unzipped their zippers dozens of times. If the tool bag was advertised as being water-resistant, we poured water on its exterior to see if it would soak through. 

We awarded points based on a rubric—the better a tool bag performed on a test or assessment, the higher the points. After testing, we averaged the points to determine our top pick and to categorize the others. 

Testing Stats
Products tested 5
Time spent testing 2 weeks
Tests performed4
Price range$70 to $200 

What to Consider When Choosing a Rolling Tool Bag

Husky stackable rolling tool bags close-up
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

When shopping for the best rolling tool bag, there are a few things that should be kept in mind to make the most informed decision. The following is a list of some of those considerations, from the type of tool bag to the size and weight. 

Intended Use

The way you intend to use a rolling tool bag can help determine which model is right for you. If you need to transport your tools over some distance, such as from a work vehicle to the job site, larger wheels that can manage rough surfaces will be best. If you’re simply carrying a bunch of smaller hand tools, a compact tote should do the trick.

Your intended use and the organization of the bag are also worth considering. If you’re looking to carry some power drills and smaller saws, you’ll want a bag with a large center pocket, unobstructed by extra pockets or pouches. If you carry a lot of hardware and parts, you might prefer something that can accommodate a few plastic organizers. Be sure to pick a bag that will work for your specific needs. 

Type

There are a few types of rolling tool bags, and they each differ a bit in their design. The following points will help you decide which bag will work best for you.

  • Rolling tool bags: Rolling tool bags are typically just like regular tool bags but with an extendable handle and wheels. They have zippered closures, several pockets, and plenty of organization.
  • Rolling tool totes: Featuring a more open design, rolling tool totes allow users to reach in and grab a tool quickly. Many have rigid handles in the center. Some have zippered closures, but they’re mainly wide-open. 
  • Rolling tool duffels: When it comes to maximizing storage, rolling tool duffels are the way to go. These bags are long and offer plenty of interior storage. The difference between these bags and a traditional travel duffel is that most tool duffels can stand on their own, allowing the user to take advantage of vertical storage.

Material 

Unlike heavy tool boxes made from steel or rigid rolling totes made from heavy-duty plastic polymers, the best rolling tool bags tend to utilize durable canvas or nylon. This material makes these bags lightweight and flexible and even collapsible for storage. Collapsibility can be a big plus in a work truck or smaller garage shop.

Many rolling tool bags also feature heavy-duty hook-and-loop closures and tough zippers. Choosing a product from a well-established brand should ensure that whatever additional materials used are durable and high-quality. Some of the best brands use Velcro brand hook-and-loop as well as YKK zippers.

Size and Weight

Rolling tool bags aren’t run-of-the-mill rolling luggage. Because they have to hold lots of heavy, pointy tools rather than a weekend’s worth of clothing, they tend to incorporate thick and durable materials to do the job without weighing too much. Many of these bags can get the job done while weighing under 10 pounds, with heavier-duty models sometimes tipping the scales at closer to 20 pounds. In addition, you might want to use a small, roll up tool bag for tiny items to keep them from dropping to the bottom of the compartment of a larger bag. 

Also, you’ll want to look for a bag that’s large enough to handle the things you need to transport without being cumbersome. Large bags can be as wide and deep as 20 inches, with duffels being as long as 30 to 36 inches. If you need a more compact bag, look for one around 16 inches wide and 12 inches deep.

Weight Capacity

Plainly put, tools are heavy and you need a heavy duty tool bag to tote them. The more you load into a bag, the more stress you’ll be putting on the closures, seams, and wheels. Finding a durable bag with a decent weight capacity is important. 

Some large rolling tool bags can handle up to 250 pounds, allowing users to carry power tools and heavier hand tools like wrenches, ratchets, and sockets, as well as hardware and parts. Such heavy loads can put a lot of pressure on the wheels, but these bags are designed to handle the stress. 

With that said, not every bag has to carry 200 pounds. Most bags are designed to easily handle the weight of their loaded pockets. It’s when users place additional weight on top of the bag that they might encounter some structural or performance issues.

Storage Compartments

CAT rolling tool bag close-up set on a table n a workshop
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

One of the greatest benefits of rolling tool bags is their organization. Adding compartments and trays to a metal tool chest would make it very heavy. With a nylon bag, pockets and compartments can be created using the fabric itself. Manufacturers load these bags with pockets, dividers, zippered closures, and other features to increase their storage capacity.

Many of the best rolling tool bags feature zippered compartments with large flaps that offer access to neatly stored screwdrivers, testing instruments, and writing tools. Other compartments might include a large open center pocket, hook-and-loop flaps on the side for batteries, and more. Be sure to keep your specific tool set and gear in mind when comparing storage compartments between bags.

Portability 

The best rolling tool bags excel when it comes to portability. They can roll across parking lots, large commercial buildings, or just from the workbench to the front fender of a project car. 

By and large, the two most important factors when considering portability are the handles and wheels. Large, solid wheels and a sturdy telescoping handle will make it easy to transport a heavy load of tools from one place to another. Additionally, if you have to lift and lower the bag to and from a workbench or truck bed, it should include a sturdy set of dedicated handles to grab on to.

Additional Features 

When it comes to additional features, rolling tool bags are tough to beat. These bags come with bonuses like LED lights, roll-up flaps, large pockets, and even attachments for securing belt-hook-equipped tools for easy transport. Some also come with shoulder straps to make climbing stairs easier.

One of the most useful features that many rolling tool bags offer is an open top tool bag design. This allows users to place large tools inside without having to awkwardly maneuver them through a tight, half-opened zipper. These openings also give the user a better view of what’s inside, making it easier to quickly identify and retrieve a needed tool and thereby increasing job efficiency.

FAQs  

We covered many of the most important points about rolling tool bags above, but you still may be wondering how they work or which type of bag might best serve your needs. Here, we answer some of the most commonly asked questions about rolling tool bags to help you make a final decision.nce. Spot cleaning now and then with water and a bit of laundry detergent is a good idea. Also, a quick spray of lubricant on the wheels and telescoping handles will ensure they don’t rust and become difficult to use.

Q. Can a rolling tool bag hold a laptop?

While they can certainly hold a laptop, rolling tool bags are unlikely to have padded pockets or a compartment designed to house delicate electronics. Tool bag backpacks may better serve this need.

Q. How do I organize my tool bag? 

In general, you can organize a tool bag just as you would organize a tool box.
– Place power tools and larger hand tools, like hammers and wrenches, in the center compartment.
– Place smaller hand tools in the slots lining the interior of the bag. It’s best to put the most used tools here as these slots are the most accessible.
– For small, infrequently used hand tools, the zippered or hook-and-loop pockets on the outside of the bag are ideal.
Customizable plastic trays are excellent for organizing hardware and small parts.

Q. How do I maintain my rolling tool bag?

While not as sturdy as portable tool boxes, rolling tool bags are robust and require very little maintenance. Spot cleaning now and then with water and a bit of laundry detergent is a good idea. Also, a quick spray of lubricant on the wheels and telescoping handles will ensure they don’t rust or become difficult to use.

Q. How often should I replace my tool bag?

That will depend on the wear and tear. Some tool bags are subjected to more daily abuse than others. Consider replacing the bag if it develops significant rips, the closures fail, or it sags and loses its structural integrity.

Q. Can you wash a tool bag?

Yes, but not in a clothes washer. For spot cleaning, use a damp cloth and mild soap. For deeper cleaning, soak the bag in warm, soapy water, hand scrub spots with a brush, and hang it to dry. However, don’t submerge tool bags with metal bases, or the metal may rust.

Q. What should I carry in my tool bag?

That depends on the type of work you do. In general, popular items to carry include measuring and cutting tools, wrenches, bits, pliers, screwdrivers, and other hand tools in addition to the specialty tools needed for a particular job.

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a contractor, product tester, and writer focusing primarily on construction, DIY tools, and tool organization solutions.

Additional research provided by Tom Scalisi.

The post After Researching 20+ Rolling Tool Bags, We Tested Our Favorites and Our Top Picks is a Game Changer appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US2024-12-24T09:48:39-05:00